imageRUNNER

ADVANCE
4555i/4551i II
4545i/4545i II
4535i/4535i II
SERVICE 4525i/4525i II

MANUAL

Canon
October 21, 2024
Rev. 17

COPYRIGHT © 2024 CANON INC. CANON imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4500 Series Rev. 17 PRINTED IN U.S.A.
 Important Notices

Important Notices
Application
Canon Inc. has issued this manual for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair of products.
This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, this manual may contain information that does not
apply to your locality.
Following "Trademarks" and "Copyright" are not applicable if they are not supported by laws and regulations in the country or
region that this document and products are used in.

Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products.
When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need
arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of
this manual.

Trademarks
• The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Canon is under license.
• Mopria®, the Mopria® Logo and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria Alliance,
Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
• Apple, AppleTalk, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge, Excel and PowerPoint are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome and Android are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
• iHQC™ compression technology by I.R.I.S., copyright 2007-2015, All Rights Reserved.
• PDF-iHQC™, XPS-iHQC™ technology by I.R.I.S., copyright 2007-2015, All rights Reserved.
• Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
• Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Command WorkStation, Fiery, FreeForm, Spot-On, and WebTools are trademarks of Fiery, LLC. and/or its wholly owned
subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or certain other countries.
• TORX® is a registered trademark of Acument Intellectual Properties, LLC in the United States.
• Matrox is a registered trademark of Matrox Corporation in the Canada.
• Other product names and other names in this document are generally registered trademarks or trademarks of the companies.

Copyright
The copyright of this document belongs to Canon Inc. This document may not be copied, reproduced or translated into another
language, in whole or in part, without the prior consent of Canon Inc.
Copyright CANON INC. 2017

Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
 Important Notices

Explanation of Symbols
The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Check. Remove the claw.

1x

Check visually. Insert the claw.

1x

Check a sound. Push the part.

Disconnect the connector. Connect the power cable.

1x

Connect the connector. Disconnect the power cable.

1x

Remove the cable/wire from the Turn on the power.

cable guide or wire saddle.
1x

Install the cable/wire to the cable Turn off the power.

guide or wire saddle.
1x

Remove the screw. Loosen the screw.

1x 1x

Install the screw. Tighten the screw.

1x 1x

Cleaning is needed. Measurement is needed.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and
mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol, the arrow
indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit
door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
 Important Notices

2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".
(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations
of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of
the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major
changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service
Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine.
 Contents

Contents
Safety Precautions...............................................................................................1
Laser................................................................................................................................................... 2
Laser Safety......................................................................................................................................... 2
Handling of Laser System......................................................................................................................2
Power Supply / Lithium Battery........................................................................................................... 3
Turn power switch ON........................................................................................................................... 3
Power Supply Guidelines.......................................................................................................................3
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery..................................................................................................3
Toner Safety........................................................................................................................................ 4
About Toner.......................................................................................................................................... 4
Handling Adhered Toner........................................................................................................................ 4
Notes on works....................................................................................................................................4
Points to Note Before Servicing..............................................................................................................4
Points to Note at Cleaning..................................................................................................................... 4
Notes on Assembly/Disassembly........................................................................................................... 4
Handling of packaging materials............................................................................................................ 6
Points to Note at using Solvents and Oils........................................................................................... 6

1. Product Overview.............................................................................................7
Product Lineup.................................................................................................................................... 8
Host machine........................................................................................................................................8
Pickup/Delivery System Options............................................................................................................ 9
Scanning System Options....................................................................................................................10
Function Expansion System Options.....................................................................................................11
Features............................................................................................................................................ 14
Product Features................................................................................................................................ 14
Toner Container.................................................................................................................................. 15
Setup Guide........................................................................................................................................15
Introduction of Situation Mode..............................................................................................................16
Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 17
Product Specifications......................................................................................................................... 17
Weight and Size..................................................................................................................................18
Productivity.........................................................................................................................................18
Paper type.......................................................................................................................................... 22
Name of Parts................................................................................................................................... 32
External View......................................................................................................................................32
Cross Section View............................................................................................................................. 36
Control Panel......................................................................................................................................38

2. Technology..................................................................................................... 39
Basic Configuration........................................................................................................................... 40
Functional Configuration...................................................................................................................... 40
Original Exposure System.................................................................................................................41
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 41

i
 Contents

Reader Assembly................................................................................................................................53
ADF_Single pass ADF.........................................................................................................................59
ADF_Reversal ADF.............................................................................................................................73
Main Controller.................................................................................................................................. 87
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 87
Startup Sequence............................................................................................................................... 90
Shutdown Sequence........................................................................................................................... 90
Motion Sensor.....................................................................................................................................91
Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................... 92
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 92
Basic Sequence.................................................................................................................................. 93
Controlling the Laser Activation Timing................................................................................................. 94
Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light.................................................................................................. 96
Controlling the Polygon Motor.............................................................................................................. 96
Controlling the Laser Shutter................................................................................................................96
Image Formation System.................................................................................................................. 98
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 98
Image Stabilization Control................................................................................................................ 100
Drum Unit......................................................................................................................................... 101
Developing Assembly........................................................................................................................ 103
Toner cartridge.................................................................................................................................. 105
Transfer Unit..................................................................................................................................... 109
Waste toner container........................................................................................................................ 110
Fixing System.................................................................................................................................. 112
Overview...........................................................................................................................................112
Fixing temperature control..................................................................................................................114
Standby temperature control.............................................................................................................. 115
Print temperature control....................................................................................................................116
Down sequence control......................................................................................................................118
Fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence............................................................................................ 120
Fixing film edge cooling control.......................................................................................................... 120
Paper loop amount control before fixing.............................................................................................. 120
Fixing pressure/pressure release control.............................................................................................121
Protection features............................................................................................................................ 122
Pickup/Feed System....................................................................................................................... 123
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 123
Cassette Pickup Assembly.................................................................................................................128
Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly......................................................................................................... 132
Fixing / Registration Assembly........................................................................................................... 134
Duplex / Delivery Assembly................................................................................................................134
Detecting Jams................................................................................................................................. 135
External Auxiliary System................................................................................................................137
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 137
Power-saving Function...................................................................................................................... 138
Quick Startup.................................................................................................................................... 139
Heater control................................................................................................................................... 141
Fan Control.......................................................................................................................................141
Counter control................................................................................................................................. 144
Restricted function.............................................................................................................................147

ii
 Contents

3. Periodical Service........................................................................................ 148

Periodically Replaced Parts............................................................................................................ 149
Consumable Parts List.................................................................................................................... 150
Cleaning/Check/Adjustment Locations............................................................................................156

4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning............................................................... 158

Preface............................................................................................................................................ 159
Outline..............................................................................................................................................159
Points to Note when Tightening a Screw............................................................................................. 159
List of Parts..................................................................................................................................... 160
List of External / Internal Cover.......................................................................................................... 160
List of Main Unit................................................................................................................................ 163
Consumable Parts, Replacement Parts and Cleaning Parts................................................................. 165
PCB................................................................................................................................................. 166
Solenoid........................................................................................................................................... 167
Sensor..............................................................................................................................................168
Motor................................................................................................................................................169
Fan.................................................................................................................................................. 170
Switch.............................................................................................................................................. 171
Clutch...............................................................................................................................................172
Others.............................................................................................................................................. 173
Reader............................................................................................................................................. 174
Single Pass ADF............................................................................................................................... 175
Reversal ADF................................................................................................................................... 178
External Cover.................................................................................................................................183
Removing the Reader Front Cover..................................................................................................... 183
Removing the Reader Left Cover....................................................................................................... 183
Removing the Reader Right Cover..................................................................................................... 183
Removing the Reader Rear Cover......................................................................................................184
Removing the Front Cover................................................................................................................. 185
Removing the Front Inner Cover.........................................................................................................186
Removing the Left Upper Cover......................................................................................................... 187
Removing the Left Cover................................................................................................................... 188
Removing the Left Rear Cover........................................................................................................... 189
Removing the Right Front Upper Cover...............................................................................................189
Removing the Right Rear Cover (Upper).............................................................................................190
Removing the Right Rear Cover (Lower).............................................................................................191
Removing the Rear Cover..................................................................................................................192
Removing the Rear Lower Cover........................................................................................................193
Removing the Delivery Tray 1............................................................................................................ 194
Removing the Delivery Tray 2............................................................................................................ 195
Removing the Delivery Rear Cover (Upper/Lower).............................................................................. 196
Original Exposure System...............................................................................................................197
Removing the Reader Controller PCB.................................................................................................197
Cleaning the Reader Scanner Unit Scanner Mirror.............................................................................. 201
Removing the Reader Scanner Unit....................................................................................................203
Document Feeder System...............................................................................................................207
Single Pass ADF............................................................................................................................... 207
Reversal ADF................................................................................................................................... 227

iii
 Contents

Main Controller System................................................................................................................... 250

Removing the Main Controller PCB.................................................................................................... 250
Removing the Riser PCB................................................................................................................... 252
Removing the HDD........................................................................................................................... 254
Removing the Control Panel (Capacitive-Type)................................................................................... 255
Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................. 260
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit...................................................................................................... 260
Image Formation System................................................................................................................ 262
Removing the Developing Assembly...................................................................................................262
Removing the Developing Cylinder.....................................................................................................263
Removing the Transfer Roller.............................................................................................................266
Removing the Separation Static Eliminator..........................................................................................267
Removing the Waste Toner Container.................................................................................................268
Removing the Drum Unit....................................................................................................................269
Removing the Toner Supply Unit........................................................................................................ 269
Fixing System..................................................................................................................................271
Removing the Fixing Assembly.......................................................................................................... 271
Removing the Fixing Main Unit...........................................................................................................271
Removing the Fixing Delivery Upper Guide......................................................................................... 272
Removing the Fixing Film Unit............................................................................................................278
Removing the Pressure Roller............................................................................................................283
Pickup/Feed System....................................................................................................................... 287
Removing the Right Cover................................................................................................................. 287
Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit 1................................................................................................. 288
Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit 2................................................................................................. 290
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller.................................................................................. 291
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad............................................................................... 293
Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller ................................................................................................ 294
Removing the Cassette Feed Roller................................................................................................... 295
Removing the Cassette Separation Roller...........................................................................................296
Removing the Main Drive Unit............................................................................................................ 296
Removing the Second Delivery Unit....................................................................................................300
Removing the First Delivery Unit........................................................................................................ 301
Removing the First Delivery Drive Assembly....................................................................................... 302
External Auxiliary Control System................................................................................................... 303
Removing the DC Controller PCB.......................................................................................................303
Removing the HVT PCB.................................................................................................................... 303
Removing the Power Supply PCB...................................................................................................... 304
Removing the Air Filter...................................................................................................................... 304

5. Adjustment................................................................................................... 306
Pickup Feed System....................................................................................................................... 307
Image Position Adjustment.................................................................................................................307
Original Exposure System...............................................................................................................308
Service Mode Backup........................................................................................................................308
Actions after Clearing the RAM of the Reader Controller PCB.............................................................. 308
Document Feeder System...............................................................................................................310
Single Pass ADF............................................................................................................................... 310
Reversal ADF................................................................................................................................... 321
Actions at Parts Replacement......................................................................................................... 336

iv
 Contents

Single Pass ADF............................................................................................................................... 336

Reversal ADF................................................................................................................................... 344

6. Troubleshooting........................................................................................... 346
Initial Check.....................................................................................................................................347
Initial check items list.........................................................................................................................347
Test Print......................................................................................................................................... 349
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 349
How to use the test print.................................................................................................................... 351
Troubleshooting Items.....................................................................................................................354
Image Faults..................................................................................................................................... 354
Display of "Non-Canon Product" Message......................................................................................359
Forcible stop of paper feed..............................................................................................................361
Remedies to be performed when E602-xxxx or E614-xxxx error is displayed................................ 364
Debug Log.......................................................................................................................................368
Function Overview.............................................................................................................................368
Saving and Collecting Debug Logs..................................................................................................... 372
Service Mode Relating to Debug Logs................................................................................................ 384
Startup System Failure Diagnosis................................................................................................... 385
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 385
Basic Flow........................................................................................................................................ 386
Controller Self Diagnosis.................................................................................................................397
Boot Method..................................................................................................................................... 397
Diagnosis Result............................................................................................................................... 398
Limitations........................................................................................................................................ 402

7. Error/Jam/Alarm........................................................................................... 403
Overview......................................................................................................................................... 404
Location Code...................................................................................................................................404
Pickup Position Code.........................................................................................................................404
Pickup size....................................................................................................................................... 405
Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON .............................................................................................406
Points to Note When Clearing HDD.................................................................................................... 406
Error Code.......................................................................................................................................407
Error Code Details.............................................................................................................................407
Jam Code........................................................................................................................................ 511
Jam Type.......................................................................................................................................... 511
Jam screen display specification........................................................................................................ 512
Main Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 512
Single Pass DADF-A1 ...................................................................................................................... 514
DADF-AV1 ....................................................................................................................................... 515
Inner Finisher-J1............................................................................................................................... 516
Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1..............................................................................................517
Buffer Pass Unit-N1...........................................................................................................................518
Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1...................................................................................................... 519
2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1.................................................................................................................. 520
Paper Deck Unit-F1........................................................................................................................... 520
Jam Code Details..............................................................................................................................521
Alarm Code..................................................................................................................................... 742

v
 Contents

Alarm Code Details........................................................................................................................... 742

8. Service Mode................................................................................................ 781

Overview......................................................................................................................................... 782
Basic Operations...............................................................................................................................782
SITUATION Mode............................................................................................................................. 785
Security Support................................................................................................................................790
Service Mode Backup........................................................................................................................794
Output of Service Print Data...............................................................................................................794
COPIER (Service mode for printer).................................................................................................798
DISPLAY (State display mode)...........................................................................................................798
I/O (I/O display mode)........................................................................................................................822
ADJUST (Adjustment mode).............................................................................................................. 840
FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode).......................................................................................... 889
OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................. 917
TEST (Print test mode).................................................................................................................... 1024
COUNTER (Counter mode)..............................................................................................................1031
FEEDER (ADF service mode).......................................................................................................1054
DISPLAY (State display mode)......................................................................................................... 1054
ADJUST (Adjustment mode)............................................................................................................ 1054
FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)........................................................................................ 1056
OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................1059
SORTER (Service mode for delivery options)...............................................................................1061
ADJUST (Adjustment mode)............................................................................................................ 1061
FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)........................................................................................ 1074
OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................1076
BOARD (Option board setting mode)............................................................................................1083
OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................1083

9. Installation.................................................................................................. 1084
How to Read the Symbols.............................................................................................................1086
Symbols..........................................................................................................................................1086
Points to Note before Installation.................................................................................................. 1087
Checking before Installation.......................................................................................................... 1088
Check When Connecting the Power Plug to an Outlet........................................................................1088
Checking the Installation Environment.............................................................................................. 1088
Checking the Installation Space........................................................................................................1088
Combination Table of Accessory Installation.................................................................................1090
Installation of Host Machine.......................................................................................................... 1091
Unpacking.......................................................................................................................................1091
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1092
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1092
Operation when using uniFLOW Online.............................................................................................1114
When Relocating the Host Machine.............................................................................................. 1115
Platen Cover Type W.....................................................................................................................1117
Points to Note at Installation............................................................................................................. 1117
Checking the Contents..................................................................................................................... 1117
Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power.................................................................................1117
Installation Outline Drawing ..........................................................................................................1117

vi
 Contents

Installation Procedure.......................................................................................................................1117
Stamp Unit-B1............................................................................................................................... 1125
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1125
Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power................................................................................ 1125
Installation Outline Drawing.............................................................................................................. 1125
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1125
Operation Check..............................................................................................................................1130
NFC Kit-C1.................................................................................................................................... 1131
Points to Note at Installation............................................................................................................. 1131
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1131
Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power................................................................................ 1131
Installation Outline Drawing.............................................................................................................. 1131
Remove the Control Panel............................................................................................................... 1131
Installing the NFC Kit....................................................................................................................... 1134
Installing the Control Panel...............................................................................................................1135
Affixing the NFC Target.................................................................................................................... 1138
Setting after Installation....................................................................................................................1138
Connection Kit-A1/A2/A3 for Bluetooth LE.................................................................................... 1139
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1139
Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power................................................................................ 1140
Installation Outline Drawing.............................................................................................................. 1141
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1141
Setting after Installation....................................................................................................................1146
Heater Kit-N1.................................................................................................................................1147
Checking before Installation............................................................................................................. 1147
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1147
Installation Procedure (When the Cassette Heater PCB as standard is installed)................................. 1147
Installation Procedure (When the Cassette Heater PCB as standard is not installed)............................1150
Checking after Installation................................................................................................................ 1157
Reader Heater Unit-J2/J3..............................................................................................................1158
Points to Note Before Installation...................................................................................................... 1158
Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power................................................................................ 1158
Installation Outline Drawing.............................................................................................................. 1158
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1158
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1159
Drum Heater-C1............................................................................................................................ 1166
Checking before Installation............................................................................................................. 1166
Checking the Parts to be Installed.....................................................................................................1166
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1166
Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1...........................................................................................................1174
Points to Note Before Installation...................................................................................................... 1174
Checking before Installation............................................................................................................. 1174
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1174
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1175
Checking after Installation ............................................................................................................... 1185
Utility Tray-B1................................................................................................................................ 1186
Points to Note at Installation ............................................................................................................ 1186
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1186
Installation Outline Drawing.............................................................................................................. 1186
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1186
When installing the USB Keyboard................................................................................................... 1189

vii
 Contents

Inner 2 Way Try-L1........................................................................................................................ 1190

Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1190
Installation Outline Drawing.............................................................................................................. 1190
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1190
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1190
Settings after Installation.................................................................................................................. 1193
Copy Card Reader-F1................................................................................................................... 1194
Checking before Installation............................................................................................................. 1194
Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power................................................................................ 1194
Installation Outline Drawing.............................................................................................................. 1194
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1194
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1195
Checking after Installation................................................................................................................ 1200
IC Card Reader Box-C1/C2...........................................................................................................1201
Points to Note at Installation.............................................................................................................1201
Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1201
Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1201
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1201
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1202
Voice Operation Kit-D1..................................................................................................................1207
Points to Note at Installation.............................................................................................................1207
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1207
Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power................................................................................ 1207
Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1207
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1207
Checking after Installation................................................................................................................ 1214
Operation Check............................................................................................................................. 1215
Voice Guidance Kit-G1.................................................................................................................. 1216
Points to Note at Installation ............................................................................................................ 1216
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1216
Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power................................................................................ 1216
Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1216
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1216
Checking after Installation................................................................................................................ 1223
Operation Check............................................................................................................................. 1223
Document Scan Lock Kit-B1/B2.................................................................................................... 1224
Points to Note Before Installation......................................................................................................1224
Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power................................................................................ 1224
Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1224
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1224
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1224
Checking after Installation................................................................................................................ 1226
Serial Interface Kit-K3 / Copy Control Interface Kit-A1..................................................................1227
Points to Note at Installation ............................................................................................................ 1227
Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power................................................................................ 1227
Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1227
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1227
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1228
Pre-checks for HDD-related Option...............................................................................................1232
Points to Note at Installation.............................................................................................................1232
Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1232

viii
 Contents

Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1232

Removing the HDD (Preparation)................................................................................................. 1233
[TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB)......................................................................................................... 1235
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1235
Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1235
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1235
[TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit.......................................................................................................1238
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1238
Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1238
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1238
[TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit..................................................................... 1244
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1244
Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1244
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1244
[TYPE-4] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit......................................... 1252
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1252
Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1253
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1253
[TYPE-5] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit.....1258
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1258
Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1258
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1259
[TYPE-6] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit.................................................................... 1270
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1270
Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1271
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1271
[TYPE-7] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit................................ 1277
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1277
Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1277
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1278

APPENDICES..................................................................................................1289
Service Tool...................................................................................................................................1290
List of Special Tools.........................................................................................................................1290
Solvent/Oil List................................................................................................................................ 1290
General Circuit Diagram................................................................................................................1291
Host machine_1/18..........................................................................................................................1291
Host machine_2/18..........................................................................................................................1292
Host machine_3/18..........................................................................................................................1293
Host machine_4/18..........................................................................................................................1294
Host machine_5/18..........................................................................................................................1295
Host machine_6/18..........................................................................................................................1296
Host machine_7/18..........................................................................................................................1297
Host machine_8/18..........................................................................................................................1298
Host machine_9/18..........................................................................................................................1299
Host machine_10/18........................................................................................................................1300
Host machine_11/18........................................................................................................................ 1301
Host machine_12/18........................................................................................................................1302
Host machine_13/18........................................................................................................................1303
Host machine_14/18........................................................................................................................1304

ix
 Contents

Host machine_15/18........................................................................................................................1305
Host machine_16/18........................................................................................................................1306
Host machine_17/18........................................................................................................................1307
Host machine_18/18........................................................................................................................1308
Single pass ADF..............................................................................................................................1309
Reversal ADF..................................................................................................................................1310
Soft counter specifications ............................................................................................................1311
Removal........................................................................................................................................ 1317
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1317
Work Procedure.............................................................................................................................. 1317
Target PCBs of Automatic Update.................................................................................................1320
List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored............................................................................... 1321

x
Safety Precautions
Laser..................................................... 2
Power Supply / Lithium Battery............. 3
Toner Safety.......................................... 4
Notes on works..................................... 4
Points to Note at using Solvents and
Oils.................................................... 6
 Safety Precautions

Laser

Laser Safety
Since radiation emitted inside this machine is completely confined with protective housings and external covers, the laser beam
cannot escape from the machine during any phase of normal use by users.
Therefore, this machine is classified as a Class 1 laser product under the international standard IEC60825-1 that is regarded as
safe during normal use.

Handling of Laser System

This machine is classified as a Class 1 laser product.
However, inside the machine, Class 3B laser beam is emitted and exposure to the beam may cause eye injuries. Therefore, when
servicing on and around the Laser Assembly, be sure to turn OFF the power of the machine before starting the work.
If you must service while the power is turned ON, be sure to keep the following in mind.
• Do not use a screwdriver or any tools that reflect laser light.
• Remove watches, rings and any other objects that act as reflectors before starting the work to prevent eye injuries.
The mark or the warning label is affixed to the machine's covers that confine laser beam as shown in the figure.
If you must open the cover for servicing, be sure to prevent the eye from exposure.

The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).

Dieses Gerät ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet.

Innerhalb des Geräts wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt, der Augenschäden verursachen kann, wenn man
in diesen Strahl blickt.
Deshalb sollte bei Servicearbeiten an oder in der Nähe der Laserbaugruppe zuerst die Stromversorgung des Geräts
ausgeschaltet werden.
Bei Servicearbeiten, die unbedingt bei eingeschaltetem Gerät durchgeführt werden müssen, auf jeden Fall die folgenden
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen beachten.
• Keine Schraubendreher oder ähnliche Werkzeuge verwenden, die Laserlicht reflektieren können.
• Vor Beginn der Arbeit Uhren, Ringe und ähnliche Gegenstände abnehmen, die als Reflektoren fungieren können, um
Augenschäden zu verhindern.
An den Abdeckungen des Geräts, die das Austreten des Laserstrahls verhindern, ist das Kennzeichen bzw. der Warnaufkleber
angebracht (siehe Abbildung).
Muss für Servicezwecke die Abdeckung geöffnet werden, besondere Vorsicht walten lassen, damit der Laserstrahl nicht in die
Augen gerät.

2
 Safety Precautions

Power Supply / Lithium Battery

Turn power switch ON

The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control energy saver key.
The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power mode, sleep mode).

CAUTION:
Do not turn off the main power switch while the progress bar is indicated, during which access is made to the Storage. If
deprived of power, the Storage can suffer a fault (E602).

Power Supply Guidelines

• As a general rule, do not use extension cords.
If an extension cord must be used, one that meets the rated voltage and current of the product must be used.
When using, untie the bundle and plug the power cord into the root to ensure the connection between the power cord and
extension cord.

CAUTION:
Do not plug multiple cords together to an extension cord. It may cause a fire or electrical shock.

• Use the power plug in an easily accessible location near the host machine.

Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery

CAUTION:

English
CAUTION
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.

The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles for specific countries.
German
ACHTUNG
Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr.
Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen.

3
 Safety Precautions

Toner Safety

About Toner
Toner is a nontoxic matter composed of plastic, iron and a trace of pigments.

CAUTION:
Never throw toner in flames to avoid explosion.

Handling Adhered Toner

• Use dry tissue paper to wipe off toner adhered to skin or clothes and wash in water.
• Never use warm water for cleaning up toner to prevent toner particles from being gelated to soak into fibers permanently.
• Toner particles are reactive with vinyl polymers. Avoid contacting these materials.

Notes on works

Points to Note Before Servicing

• At servicing, be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and disconnect the power plug.
• Be sure to disconnect the power plug on a regular basis and remove dust and dirt accumulated around the outlet with dry cloth.

CAUTION:
Leaving the power plug connected for a long time in an environment having a lot of dust, moisture, or oily smoke will
cause a fire. (Because dust accumulated in the surrounding area will absorb moisture and cause an insulation failure)

• Be careful not to be injured by burrs of edges, sharp corners or protrusions.

CAUTION:
Hazardous area such as corners, edges, springs and other sharp sections may be remaining on products. Always
be aware of the presence of hazardous area to avoid injury caused by contacting and/or striking those area, by not
over-concentrating on service work.

Points to Note at Cleaning

When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that the component of solvent is vaporized
completely before assembling.

Notes on Assembly/Disassembly
Follow the items below to assemble/disassemble the device.

4
 Safety Precautions

1. Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assembling/disassembling works.
2. If not specially instructed, reverse the order of disassembly to reinstall.
3. Ensure to use the right screw type (length, diameter, etc.) at the right position when assembling.
4. To keep electric conduction, binding screws with washers are used to attach the grounding wire and the varistor. Ensure to
use the right screw type when assembling.
5. Unless it is specially needed, do not operate the device with some parts removed.
6. Never remove the painted screws when disassembling.

CAUTION:

English
CAUTION
The fuse may be in the neutral, and that the mains shall be disconnected to de-energize the phase conductors.

German
ACHTUNG
Die Sicherung kann sich im Nullleiter befinden und das Hauptnetz muss abgetrennt werden, um die Phasenleiter
stromlos zu machen.

■ Points to Note when Tightening a Screw

When a thin plates is used in some parts for the light weighting purpose, warn the following.
In the case of a screw hole with a triangle mark near it as shown in the figure below, strongly tightening the screw may damage
or deform the screw hole.
In the case of a screw hole with a triangle mark, take care not to apply too much force when tightening the screw.

The recommended torque value is shown below as a reference value.

Type of Screws
RS tight W Sems Binding TP
Fastened member Metal Resin Metal Resin Metal Resin Metal Resin
Tightening torque M4 Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.
(N*m) 1.6 1.6 1.6 0.8 1.6 0.8 1.6 0.8
M3 Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.
0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

* For PCB, refer to the tightening torque value of resin (fastened member).

Type of Screws
RS tight W Sams Binding TP

5
 Safety Precautions

Handling of packaging materials

When packaging materials for products and service parts are disposed of, they must be disposed of in accordance with local
government rules.

For Italy, Environmental labelling:

For proper recycling of the packaging of our products and articles, please visit.
https://www.canon-europe.com/sustainability/approach/packaging/

Per l'Italia , Etichettatura ambientale :

per il corretto riciclo degli imballaggi dei nostri prodotti e articoli , visita il sito.
https://www.canon-europe.com/sustainability/approach/packaging/

Points to Note at using Solvents and Oils

CAUTION:
Do not use solvents / oils other than the specified types and locations. It may affect safety.

6
1 Product Overview
Product Lineup...................................... 8
Features.............................................. 14
Specifications...................................... 17
Name of Parts..................................... 32
 1. Product Overview

Product Lineup

Host machine
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4551 / 4545 / 4535 / 4525
The underlined numerical value indicates the print speed (ppm: print per minute).

iR ADV 4551/4551i iR ADV 4545/4545i iR ADV 4535/4535i iR ADV 4525/4525i

Print speed 51 ppm 45 ppm 35 ppm 25 ppm
Positioning Target machine: iR ADV 4251/4245/4235/4225 Series
Control Panel Flat Control Panel
HDD Standard: 250 GB, Maximum: 1 TB
ADF Standard

8
 1. Product Overview

Pickup/Delivery System Options

■ Applicable Option for Each Model
[6] [5]

[1]
[7]
[4]

[8]
[2] [3]

■ Required Options and Conditions

● Pickup System Options
No. Product name Required options, conditions, etc.
[1] Paper Deck Unit-F1
- Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 Heater Kit-N1 is required.
Use it to suppress the moisture absorption of the paper in the pa-
per deck.
- Cassette Heater Unit-37
- Cassette Heater Unit-41
[2] Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1
[3] High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-B1
- FL Cassette-BC1 Option for 2nd cassette of the host machine
- FL Cassette-BD1 Option for 1st cassette of the host machine
- Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1 Option for 2nd cassette of the host machine

● Delivery System Options

No. Product name Required options, conditions, etc.
[4] Buffer Pass Unit-N1 Staple Finisher-Y1 or Booklet Finisher-Y1 is required.

9
 1. Product Overview

No. Product name Required options, conditions, etc.

[5] Inner Finisher-J1
[6] Inner 2Way Tray-L1
[7] Staple Finisher-Y1 Using with Booklet Finisher-Y1 is not available.
[8] Booklet Finisher-Y1 Using with Staple Finisher-Y1 is not available.
- 2/3 Hole Puncher Unit-A1 Option for Staple Finisher-Y1 or Booklet Finisher-Y1.
- 2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1 Option for Staple Finisher-Y1 or Booklet Finisher-Y1.
- 4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1 Option for Staple Finisher-Y1 or Booklet Finisher-Y1.
- Inner 2/3 Hole Puncher-C1 Option for Inner Finisher-J1 .
- Inner 2/F4 Hole Puncher-C1 Option for Inner Finisher-J1 .
- Inner S4 Hole Puncher-C1 Option for Inner Finisher-J1 .

Scanning System Options

■ Required Options and Conditions
[5]

[4]

[6]

[1]

[2]

[3]

No. Product name Required options, conditions, etc.

[1] Platen Cover Type W
[2] ADF Access Handle-A1
[3] Reader Heater Unit-J2 Heater Kit-N1 is required.
[4] Stamp Ink Cartridge-C1 DADF is required.
- Stamp Unit-B1 DADF is required.
[5] DADF-AV1
[6] Single Pass DADF-A1

10
 1. Product Overview

Function Expansion System Options

■ Required Options and Conditions
[4]

[5] [1]
[2]
[20] [6]
[3]

[19]

[9],[10]

[11],[12]

Licence option

[7]
[21]
[8]
[15],[16] [13],[14]
[17],[18]

● Hardware Products
No. Product name Required options, conditions, etc.
[1] NFC Kit-C1
[2] IC Card Reader Box-C1
[3] Connection Kit-A1 for Bluetooth LE
[4] Utility Tray-B1 Using with Voice Operation Kit-D1 is not available.
A tray for placing originals which can be installed on the right side of
the machine.
[5] Copy Card Reader-F1 Copy Card Reader Attachment-B5 is required.
Using with Serial Interface Kit-K3 is not available.
Using with Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 is not available.
[6] Copy Card Reader Attachment-B5 Required when Card Reader-F1 is installed.
[7] Serial Interface Kit-K3 Using with Copy Card Reader-F1 is not available.
Using with Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 is not available.
[8] Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 Using with Serial Interface Kit-K3 is not available.
Using with Copy Card Reader-F1 is not available.
[9] 2.5inch/250GB HDD-N1 This is used when the mirroring function is used with Removable
HDD Kit-AL1 or HDD Mirroring Kit-J1.
No particular options and conditions are required.
[10] 2.5inch/1TB HDD-P1 This is used when the mirroring function is used with Removable
HDD Kit-AL1 or HDD Mirroring Kit-J1.
No particular options and conditions are required.

11
 1. Product Overview

No. Product name Required options, conditions, etc.

[11] HDD Mirroring Kit-J1 Option 2.5inch/250GB HDD-N1 or Option 2.5inch/1TB HDD-P1
are required.
[12] Removable HDD Kit-AL1 Option 2.5inch/250GB HDD-N1 or Option 2.5inch/1TB HDD-P1
are required.
[13] Super G3 FAX Board-AS1 No particular options are required. Using with Remote Fax Kit-A1 is
not available.
[14] Super G3 FAX Board-AS2
[15] Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AS1 A board used when expanding and adding a second line to Super G3
FAX Board-AS1 .
Super G3 FAX Board-AS1 is required.
[16] Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AS2
[17] Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AS1 A board used when expanding and adding a third or fourth line to
Super G3 FAX Board-AS1.
Super G3 FAX Board-AS1, Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AS1 and
Additional Memory Type A (512 MB) is required.
[18] Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AS2
[19] Voice Guidance Kit-G1
[20] Voice Operation Kit-D1 Using with Utility Tray-B1 is not available.
Using with IC Card Authentication for MEAP series is not available.
An option used for utilizing the "voice guidance" and "voice recogni-
tion" functions
[21] Heater Kit-N1 It is required when installing the Reader Heater Kit-J2.
It is required when installing the Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1.
- Drum Heater-C1
- Power Supply Cable-V1
- IR-ADV SEC KIT-S1 2600 HDD Mirroring Kit-J1 is required. An option required to make this
product as an IEEE2600.1 certified model.

● License Products
At the time of installation, obtain the license number according to the license certificate included.
Then, enter the obtained license number from the Control Panel of the machine, so that the applicable functions are enabled.
There is no physical installation work at the time of installation.

Product name Required options, conditions, etc.

Remote Fax Kit-A1 No particular options are required. Using with Super G3 FAX Board-AS1 is
not available.
An option used for utilizing the remote fax function
IP FAX Expansion Kit-B1 The subordination of the G3 FAX1 line is optional.
IP FAX are limited by a plural line and exclusive control.
PCL Asian Font Set-A1
PCL International Font Set-A1
PS Printer Kit-BG1
PCL Printer Kit-BG1
Barcode Printing Kit-D1
Universal Send Trace & Smooth PDF Kit-A1
Universal Send Advanced Feature Set-H1
Universal Send Security Feature Set-D1
Universal Send Digital User Signature Kit-C1
Encrypted Secure Print Software-D1
Encrypted Printing Software-D1
Secure Watermark-B1
Document Scan Lock Kit-B1
Picture Login-A1
Web Access Software-K1
Card Set-A1
Card Set-A2
Card Set-A3

12
 1. Product Overview

Product name Required options, conditions, etc.

Card Set-A4
Card Set-A5
Card Set-A6
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4545i Series License

13
 1. Product Overview

Features

Product Features
[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

1. Original Exposure System

• Double feed detection
• Improved image quality
• Equipped with Single pass ADF or Reversal ADF
• Type of the ADF can be selected.
2. Control Panel
• 10.1-inch large screen
• Flick and pinch gestures supported
• Control Panel tilt operation
• Motion Sensor
3. Controller System
• Functions of 3rd generation of iR-ADV are installed.
• Security policy supported
• Forcible printing of user information
• Equipped with HDD Encryption Board as standard
• Wi-Fi supported
4. Image Formation System
• High durable drum
• Increased capacity of toner container
• Automatic delivery of toner
• Improved durability of consumable parts
5. Pickup Feed System
• Large capacity of pedestal supported
• Single-action operation of pulling out of a cassette
6. Improved Serviceability
• Efficient installation by adopting common options
• New I/O mode: Improved signal check of parts
• Operation check of electrical components

14
 1. Product Overview

Toner Container
This equipment uses IAP (Insulated & Air Pressure) toner bottles.

Characteristics Description
Toner supply mouth: Smaller diameter Toner soiling-resistant, soiling-resistant
Toner supply: Air assist method Enables stable toner supply even through the small supply mouth.
Design without a cap member Improves toner replaceability. (No need to remove the cap)
Installation of IC tag Installation of IC tag enables to record the Toner Bottle ID and the toner level.

Setup Guide
Setup Guide is designed to improve the workability during the installation by enabling to implement the series of necessary setting
items at installation of a device in the format of a navigation.
The items that can be set are as follows:

Display Setting screen Remarks

order
1 Switch Language/Keyboard If canceled, the device starts up without Setup Guide.
2 Paper Settings Paper Settings
3 Authentication Login If skipped, the screen proceeds to Auto Adjust Gradation (User Authentica-
tion is standard).
4 Date/Time Settings Sets the date and time
5 Network Settings Sets the IP address, subnet, and gateway.
6 DNS/Proxy Settings DNS/Proxy Settings
7 Selection Counry/Retion (FAX-TYPE set- Skipped depending on the country.
tings) The countries that require selection are USA, EUR, and ASIA.
8 FAX Settings Sipped if no G3 fax.
Configuration of a second line is outside the scope of the Setup Guide.
9 Auto Adjust Gradation Executes auto gradation adjustment
10 Output Report Network user data list
FAX user data list
List of adjsutment value (LBL-PRT)
11 End Setup Guide -

15
 1. Product Overview

Introduction of Situation Mode

Situation mode has been newly provided to improve the workability and searchability of service technicians at the site.
This mode makes it possible to easily use the service mode appropriate for the scene at the site.

< Category >

[SITUATION MODE] Detail

Installation Items related to installation
Troubleshooting Items related to troubleshooting
Parts Replacement Items performed at parts replacement
Major Adjustment Major items of adjustment
Sensor Check Operation Check of Electrical Components
Parts Check

16
 1. Product Overview

Specifications

Product Specifications
Item Specification/Function
Machine installation method Desktop type
Photosensitive medium OPC (30 mm dia.) (Compact E drum)
Exposure method Semiconductor Laser
Charging method Roller charging
Developing method Dry/Single-component Projection Development
Transfer method Roller Transfer
Separation method Static separation (Static eliminator) + Curvature separation
Pickup method Cassette: Retard separation method
Manual feed pickup tray: Pad separation method
Fixing method On-demand fixing
Delivery method Face down delivery (in-body delivery)
Drum cleaning method Cleaning Blade
Transfer cleaning method Cleaning bias application
Toner type Magnetic negative toner
Toner supplying method IAP toner bottle
Toner level detection function Yes
Leading edge image margin 4.0 + 1.5 mm/-1.0 mm
Left image margin 2.5 ± 1.5 mm
Image gradations 256 gradations
Print resolution • Reading resolution: 600 × 600 dpi
• Writing resolution: 1200 × 1200 dpi
Maximum image guaran- 293 x 428 mm
tee area
Maximum printable area 293 x 428 mm
Warm-up time • When the Main Power is turned ON
• Quick startup OFF: 30 sec. or less
• Quick startup ON: 24 sec. or less
• Startup from sleep mode
• Sleep Mode Eco Exit = OFF: 10 sec. or less
• Sleep Mode Eco Exit = ON: 15 sec. or less
First copy time • 51 ppm machine: 3.7 sec. or less
• 45, 35 ppm machine: 3.8 sec. or less
• 25 ppm machine: 5.2 sec. or less
Paper type
Cassette Thin paper 2 (60 g/m2 to 63 g/m2), Plain paper 1 (64 g/m2 to 75 g/m2), Plain paper 2 (76 g/m2 to 90 g/m2),
Plain paper 3 (91 g/m2 to 105 g/m2), Heavy paper 1 (106 g/m2 to 128 g/m2), Recycled paper*1, Colored
paper*1, Pre-punched paper*1
*1: Only 1-side
Manual feed pick- Thin paper (52 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), Thin paper 2 (60 g/m2 to 63 g/m2), Plain paper 1 (64 g/m2 to 75 g/m2),
up tray Plain paper 2 (76 g/m2 to90 g/m2), Plain paper 3 (91 g/m2 to105 g/m2), Recycled paper, Colored paper,
Pre-punched paper, Heavy paper 1 (106 g/m2 to 128 g/m2), Heavy paper 2 (128 g/m2 to 150 g/m2),
Heavy paper 3 (151 g/m2 to 163 g/m2), Heavy paper 4 (164 g/m2 to 180 g/m2), Heavy paper 5 (181 g/m2
to 220 g/m2), Tracing paper, Bond paper, Label paper, Transparency , Postcard, Envelope
Paper size
Cassette 1 B4,A4,B5,LTR,A4R,B5R,LTRR,LGL,EXE,STMTR,A5R,8K,16K,16KR
Custom Size (139.7 x 182 mm to 297 x 390 mm)
Cassette 2 A3,B4,A4,B5,LDR,LGL,LTR,A4R,B5R,LTRR, EXE,STMTR,A5R,8K,16K,16KR
Custom Size (140 x 182 mm to 297 x 432 mm)
Manual feed pick- A3, A4, A4R, A5R, B4, B5, B5R, LTR, LTRR, LGL, STMTR, 8K, 16K, LDR, EXEC, Postcard (Postal
up tray card, reply card, 4 on 1), Custom size (99 x 148 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm), Envelope (Nagagata 3,
Yougatanaga 3, Kakugata 2, COM10 No.10, Monarch, ISO-C5, DL)
Cassette pickup capacity 550 sheets(80 g/m2) , 680 sheets (64 g/m2)

17
 1. Product Overview

Item Specification/Function
Manual feed pickup tray 80 sheets (80 g/m2, 64 g/m2)
Duplex method Through-pass duplex
Memory capacity Capacity of 2 GB (for controller control) + 1 GB (for image processing)
Hard disk capacity Standard: 250 GB or more (Usable area: 250 GB)
Option: 1 TB
Rated power supply AC 110-127 V, 60 Hz
AC 220-240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption (Reference value)
Maximum: 1.5 kW or less
Standard: AC 110-127 V
• imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4551/4551i : 998.5W
• imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4545/4545i : 878.5W
• imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4535/4535i : 800W
• imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4525/4525i : 633W
AC 220-240 V
• imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4551/4551i : 882W
• imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4545/4545i : 862W
• imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4535/4535i : 783W
• imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4525/4525i : 614W
During sleep mode: 0.9W
At power OFF: • Quick startup setting OFF: 0.073 W
• Quick startup setting ON: 0.224 W
Dimensions (W x D x H) “Weight and Size” on page 18
Weight “Weight and Size” on page 18

Weight and Size

Product name Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm) Weight: Ap-
prox. (kg)
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4551/4545 & Single pass ADF 587 740 945 83.5
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4551/4545 & Reader 750 926 70
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4535/4525 & Reader 750 926 70
Single Pass DADF-A1 565 556 158 13.5
DADF-AV1 565 540 139 8.2
Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1 565 650 248 27.5
High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-B1 565 650 248 30
Paper Deck Unit-F1 400 630 440 31
Booklet Finisher-Y1 537 623 1095 57
Staple Finisher-Y1 537 623 1095 31
Inner Finisher-J1 621.8 535 205 7.2

Productivity
■ imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4551
Unit : images / min

Mode size 1-side 2-side

Casette Stack by- Paper Casette Stack by- Paper
pass Deck pass Deck
Thin-2(52 to 59 g/m2 ) A4, LTR 51 30 51 51 30 51
Thin-1(60 to 63 g/m2 ) B5, EXE, 16K 51 30 - 51 30 -
Plain1(64 to 75 g/m2 ) A4R, LTRR 37 21 - 37 21 -
Plain2(76 to 90 g/m2 ) A3, LDR, 8K 25 15 - 25 15 -
Recycled
B4, LGL 25 17 - 25 17 -
Prepunch

18
 1. Product Overview

Mode size 1-side 2-side

Casette Stack by- Paper Casette Stack by- Paper
pass Deck pass Deck
Tracing paper B5R, A5R, STMTR, 16KR 20/18/14 17 - 20/18/14 17 -
* Thin&tracing paper in
not supported 2-side, sup-
ported only Stack bypass.
BOND Paper A4, LTR, B5, EXE, 16K - 25 - - 25 -
A3, LDR, A4R, LTRR, 8K - 14 - - 14 -
B4, LGL - 13 - - 13 -
B5R, A5R, STMTR, 16KR - 17 - - 17 -
Plain3 (91 to 105 g/m2 ) A4, LTR 30 30 30 30 30 30
B5, EXE, 16K 30 30 - 30 30 -
A4R, LTRR 21 21 - 21 21 -
A3, LDR, 8K 14 14 - 14 14 -
B4, LGL 17 17 - 17 17 -
B5R, A5R, STMTR, 16KR 17/16 17/16 - 17/16 17/16 -
Thick paper 1 (106 to 128 A4, LTR, B5, EXE, 16K 28 28 28 - - -
g/m2 ) A4R, LTRR 17 17 - - - -
Label A3, LDR, B4, LGL, 8K, 14 14 - - - -
B5R, A5R, STMTR, 16KR
Thick paper 2 (129 to 150 A4, LTR, B5, EXE, 16K - 20 - - - -
g/m2 ) LTRR, A4R,B5R, A5R, - 14 - - - -
Thick paper 3 (151 to 163 STMTR, 16KR
g/m2 ) B4, LGL - 11 - - - -
Thick paper 4 (164 to 180
A3, LDR, 8K - 10 - - - -
g/m2 )
Thick paper 5 (181 to 220
g/m2 )
Tranceparency A4/LTR - 25 - - - -
Envelope Monarch 12/10/8 12/10/8 - - - -
ISO-C5 12/10/8 12/10/8 - - - -
COM10 12/10/8 12/10/8 - - - -
DL 12/10/8 12/10/8 - - - -
Kakugata 2 - 12/10/8 - - - -
Nagagata 3 - 12/10/8 - - - -
Yougatanaga 3 - 12/10/8 - - - -
Post Card Post Card - 18/14/10 - - - -
S Post Card Post Card - 18/14/10 - - - -

NOTE:
• A tolerance of plus/minus 5% (However, +10% and -0% for A4/LTR in the normal mode and 1-sided copy in the local mode)
• The copy speed varies depending on the fixing assembly temperature and paper size.
• In the normal mode/local mode, the fixing assembly is at a cool temperature and keeps the above value for the first one minute.
• "**/**" in the table refers to MAX/MIN.

■ imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4545

Unit : images / min

Mode size 1-side 2-side

Casette Stack by- Paper Casette Stack by- Paper
pass Deck pass Deck
Thin-2(52 to 59 g/m2 ) A4, LTR 45 30 45 45 30 45
Thin-1(60 to 63 g/m2 ) B5, EXE, 16K 45 30 45 45 30 45
Plain1(64 to 75 g/m2 ) A4R, LTRR 32 21 - 32 21 -
Plain2(76 to 90 g/m2 ) A3, LDR, 8K 22 15 - 22 15 -
Recycled

19
 1. Product Overview

Mode size 1-side 2-side

Casette Stack by- Paper Casette Stack by- Paper
pass Deck pass Deck
Prepunch B4, LGL 25 17 - 25 17 -
Tracing paper B5R, A5R, STMTR, 16KR 20/18/14 17 - 20/18/14 17 -
* Thin&tracing paper in
not supported 2-side,sup-
ported only Stack bypass.
BOND Paper A4, LTR, B5, EXE, 16K - 25 - - 25 -
A3, LDR, A4R, LTRR, 8K - 14 - - 14 -
B4, LGL - 13 - - 13 -
B5R, A5R, STMTR, - 17 - - 17 -
16KRSTMTR, 16KR
Plain3 (91 to 105 g/m2 ) A4, LTR 30 30 30 30 30 30
B5, EXE, 16K 30 30 - 30 30 -
A4R, LTRR 21 21 - 21 21 -
A3, LDR, 8K 14 14 - 14 14 -
B4, LGL 17 17 - 17 17 -
B5R, A5R, STMTR, 16KR 17/16 17/16 - 17/16 17/16 -
Thick paper 1 (106 to 128 A4, LTR, B5, EXE, 16K 28 28 28 - - -
g/m2 ) A4R, LTRR 17 17 - - - -
Label A3, LDR, B4, LGL, 8K, 14 14 - - - -
B5R, A5R, STMTR, 16KR
Thick paper 2 (129 to 150 A4, LTR, B5, EXE, - 20 - - - -
g/m2 ) 16KB5, EXE, 16K
Thick paper 3 (151 to 163 LTRR, A4R, B5R, A5R, - 14 - - - -
g/m2 ) STMTR, 16KR
Thick paper 4 (164 to 180 B4, LGL - 11 - - - -
g/m2 ) A3, LDR, 8K - 10 - - - -
Thick paper 5 (181 to 220
g/m2 )
Tranceparency A4/LTR - 25 - - - -
Envelope Monarch 12/10/8 12/10/8 - - - -
ISO-C5 12/10/8 12/10/8 - - - -
COM10 12/10/8 12/10/8 - - - -
DL 12/10/8 12/10/8 - - - -
Kakugata 2 - 12/10/8 - - - -
Nagagata 3 - 12/10/8 - - - -
Yougatanaga 3 - 12/10/8 - - - -
Post Card Post Card - 18/14/10 - - - -
S Post Card Post Card - 14/10 - - - -

NOTE:
• A tolerance of plus/minus 5% (However, +10% and -0% for A4/LTR in the normal mode and 1-sided copy in the local mode)
• The copy speed varies depending on the fixing assembly temperature and paper size.
• In the normal mode/local mode, the fixing assembly is at a cool temperature and keeps the above value for the first one minute.
• "**/**" in the table refers to MAX/MIN.

■ imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4535

Unit : images / min

Mode size 1-side 2-side

Casette Stack by- Paper Casette Stack by- Paper
pass Deck pass Deck
Thin-2(52 to 59 g/m2 ) A4, LTR 35 30.0 35 35 30.0 35
Thin-1(60 to 63 g/m2 ) B5, EXE, 16K 35 30.0 35 35 30.0 35
Plain1(64 to 75 g/m2 ) A4R, LTRR 32 21 - 32 21 -

20
 1. Product Overview

Mode size 1-side 2-side

Casette Stack by- Paper Casette Stack by- Paper
pass Deck pass Deck
Plain2(76 to 90 g/m2 ) A3, LDR, 8K 22 15 - 22 15 -
Recycled B4, LGL 25 17 - 25 17 -
Prepunch
B5R, A5R, STMTR, 16KR 20/18/14 17 - 20/18/14 17 -
Tracing paper
* Thin&tracing paper in
not supported 2-side,sup-
ported only Stack bypass.
BOND Paper A4, LTR, B5, EXE, 16K - 25 - - 25 -
A3, LDR, A4R, LTRR, 8K - 14 - - 14 -
B4, LGL - 13 - - 13 -
B5R, A5R, STMTR, 16KR - 17 - - 17 -
Plain3 (91 to 105 g/m2 ) A4, LTR 30 30 30 30 30 30
B5, EXE, 16K 30 30 - 30 30 -
A4R, LTRR 21 21 - 21 21 -
A3, LDR, 8K 14 14 - 14 14 -
B4, LGL 17 17 - 17 17 -
B5R, A5R, STMTR, 16KR 17/16 17/16 - 17/16 17/16 -
Thick paper 1 (106 to 128 A4, LTR, B5, EXE, 16K 28 28 28 - - -
g/m2 ) A4R, LTRR 17 17 - - - -
Label A3, LDR, B4, LGL, 8K, 14 14 - - - -
B5R, A5R, STMTR, 16KR
Thick paper 2 (129 to 150 A4, LTR, B5, EXE, 16K - 20 - - - -
g/m2 ) LTRR, A4R, B5R, A5R, - 14 - - - -
Thick paper 3 (151 to 163 STMTR, 16KR
g/m2 ) B4, LGL - 11 - - - -
Thick paper 4 (164 to 180
A3, LDR, 8K - 10 - - - -
g/m2 )
Thick paper 5 (181 to 220
g/m2 )
Tranceparency A4/LTR - 25 - - - -
Envelope Monarch 12/10/8 12/10/8 - - - -
ISO-C5 12/10/8 12/10/8 - - - -
COM10 12/10/8 12/10/8 - - - -
DL 12/10/8 12/10/8 - - - -
Kakugata 2 - 12/10/8 - - - -
Nagagata 3 - 12/10/8 - - - -
Yougatanaga 3 - 12/10/8 - - - -
Post Card Post Card - 18/14/10 - - - -
S Post Card Post Card - 14/10 - - - -

NOTE:
• A tolerance of plus/minus 5% (However, +10% and -0% for A4/LTR in the normal mode and 1-sided copy in the local mode)
• The copy speed varies depending on the fixing assembly temperature and paper size.
• In the normal mode/local mode, the fixing assembly is at a cool temperature and keeps the above value for the first one minute.
• "**/**" in the table refers to MAX/MIN.

■ imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4525

Unit : images / min

Mode size 1-side 2-side

Casette Stack by- Paper Casette Stack by- Paper
pass Deck pass Deck
Thin-2(52 to 59 g/m2 ) A4, LTR 25 25 25 25 25 25
Thin-1(60 to 63 g/m2 ) B5, EXE, 16K 25 25 - 25 25 -

21
 1. Product Overview

Mode size 1-side 2-side

Casette Stack by- Paper Casette Stack by- Paper
pass Deck pass Deck
Plain1(64 to 75 g/m2 ) A4R, LTRR 17 17 - 17 17 -
Plain2(76 to 90 g/m2 ) A3, LDR, 8K 15 15 - 15 15 -
Recycled B4, LGL 13 13 - 13 13 -
Prepunch
B5R, A5R , 17/14 17/14 - 17/14 17/14 -
Tracing paper
STMTR, 16KR
* Thin&tracing paper in
not supported 2-side,sup-
ported only Stack bypass.
BOND Paper A4, LTR , EXE, 16K - 25 - - 25 -
A3, LDR , A4R, LTRR - 14 - - 14 -
B4, LGL, 8K - 13 - - 13 -
B5R, A5R , - 17/14 - - 17/14 -
STMTR, 16KR
Plain3 (91 to 105 g/m2 ) A4, LTR 25 25 25 25 25 25
B5, EXE, 16K 25 25 - 25 25 -
A4R, LTRR 17 17 - 17 17 -
A3, LDR, 8K 14 14 - 14 14 -
B4, LGL 13 13 - 13 13 -
B5R, A5R, STMTR, 16KR 17/16 17/16 - 17/16 17/16 -
Thick paper 1 (106 to 128 A4, LTR , B5, EXE, 16K 25 25 25 - - -
g/m2 ) A4R, LTRR , 17 17 - - - -
Label A3, LDR, 8K 14 14 - - - -
B4, LGL 13 13 - - - -
B5R, A5R , 14 14 - - - -
STMTR, 16KR
Thick paper 2 (129 to 150 A4, LTR , B5, EXE, 16K - 20 - - - -
g/m2 ) LTRR, A4R , B5R, A5R , - 14 - - - -
Thick paper 3 (151 to 163 STMTR, 16KR
g/m2 ) B4, LGL - 11 - - - -
Thick paper 4 (164 to 180
A3, LDR, 8K - 10 - - - -
g/m2 )
Thick paper 5 (181 to 220
g/m2 )
Tranceparency A4/LTR - 25 - - - -
Envelope Monarch 12/10/8 12/10/8 - - - -
ISO-C5 12/10/8 12/10/8 - - - -
COM10 12/10/8 12/10/8 - - - -
DL 12/10/8 12/10/8 - - - -
Kakugata 2 - 12/10/8 - - - -
Nagagata 3 - 12/10/8 - - - -
Yougatanaga 3 - 12/10/8 - - - -
Post Card Post Card - 18/14/10 - - - -
S Post Card Post Card - 14/10 - - - -

NOTE:
• A tolerance of plus/minus 5% (However, +10% and -0% for A4/LTR in the normal mode and 1-sided copy in the local mode)
• The copy speed varies depending on the fixing assembly temperature and paper size.
• In the normal mode/local mode, the fixing assembly is at a cool temperature and keeps the above value for the first one minute.
• "**/**" in the table refers to MAX/MIN.

Paper type
See the table below for the custom paper size.

22
 1. Product Overview

Size Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm)

Custom paper size 1-1 148.0 to 181.9 98.0 to 139.6
Custom paper size 1-2 182.0 to 390.0 98.0 to 139.6
Custom paper size 1-3 390.1 to 431.8 98.0 to 139.6
Custom paper size 2-1 148 to 181.0.9 139.7 to 147.9
Custom paper size 2-2 18.02 to 390 .0 139.7 to 147.9
Custom paper size 2-3 390.1 to 431.8 139.7 to 147.9
Custom paper size 3-1 148.0 to 181.9 148.0 to 297.0
Custom paper size 3-2 182.0 to 390.0 148.0 to 297.0
Custom paper size 3-3 390.1 to 431.8 148.0 to 297.0
Custom paper size 5 (long length) 431.9 to 630.0 98.0 to 297.0

■ Pickup Specifications (1/11)

Type (paper weight: g/m2)
• Thin paper 2 (52 to 59)

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
A3 Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
B4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
A4R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
B5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
B5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
A5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
11x17 Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
LGL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
LTRR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
STMTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
EXEC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
E-OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
B-OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
M-OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
A-OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
A-LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
A-LTRR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
GLTR-R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
GLTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
GLGL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
AFLS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
FLS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
K8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
K16 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
K16R No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
F4A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
I-LGL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Free Yes No No No No No No
Free (Long Yes*1 No No No No No No
length)

23
 1. Product Overview

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
Custom size A Yes No No No No No No
*2
Custom size B Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
*2
Custom size C Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
*2

*1
It is necessary to set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST
*2
• Custom size A: Custom size 1-1, Custom size 1-2, Custom size 1-3, Custom size 2-1, Custom size 3-1, Custom size 5
(Long length)
• Custom size B: Custom size 2-2, Custom size 3-2
• Custom size C: Custom size 2-3, Custom size 3-3

■ Pickup Specifications (2/11)

Type (paper weight: g/m2)
• Thin paper 1 (60 to 63)
• Plain paper 1 (64 to 75), Plain paper 2 (76 to 90), Plain paper 3 (91 to 105)
• Heavy paper 1 (106 to 128)
• Color paper 1 (64 to 80)
• Recycled 1 (64 to 80)

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
A3 Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
B4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
A4R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
B5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
A5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
11x17 Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
LGL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
LTRR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
STMTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
EXEC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
E-OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
B-OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
M-OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
A-OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
A-LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
A-LTRR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
GLTR-R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
GLTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
GLGL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

24
 1. Product Overview

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
AFLS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
FLS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
K8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
K16 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
K16R No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
F4A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
I-LGL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Free Yes No No No No No No
Free (Long Yes*1 No No No No No No
length)
Custom size A Yes No No No No No No
*2
Custom size B Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
*2
Custom size C Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
*2

*1
It is necessary to set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST
*2
• Custom size A: Custom size 1-1, Custom size 1-2, Custom size 1-3, Custom size 2-1, Custom size 3-1, Custom size 5
(Long length)
• Custom size B: Custom size 2-2, Custom size 3-2
• Custom size C: Custom size 2-3, Custom size 3-3

■ Pickup Specifications (3/11)

Type (paper weight: g/m2)
• Heavy paper 2 (129 to 150) , Heavy paper 3 (151 to 163) , Heavy paper 4 (164 to 180) , Heavy paper 5 (181 to 220)

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
A3 Yes No No No No No No
B4 Yes No No No No No No
A4R Yes No No No No No No
A4 Yes No No No No No No
B5R Yes No No No No No No
B5 Yes No No No No No No
A5R Yes No No No No No No
11x17 Yes No No No No No No
LGL Yes No No No No No No
LTR Yes No No No No No No
LTRR Yes No No No No No No
STMTR Yes No No No No No No
EXEC Yes No No No No No No
OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No
E-OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No
B-OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No
M-OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No

25
 1. Product Overview

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
A-OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No
A-LTR Yes No No No No No No
A-LTRR Yes No No No No No No
GLTR-R Yes No No No No No No
GLTR Yes No No No No No No
GLGL Yes No No No No No No
AFLS Yes No No No No No No
FLS Yes No No No No No No
K8 Yes No No No No No No
K16 Yes No No No No No No
K16R No No No No No No No
F4A Yes No No No No No No
I-LGL Yes No No No No No No
Free Yes No No No No No No
Free (Long Yes*1 No No No No No No
length)
Custom size A Yes No No No No No No
*2

*1
It is necessary to set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST
*2
• Custom size A: Custom size 1-1, Custom size 1-2, Custom size 1-3, Custom size 2-1, Custom size 2-2, Custom size 2-3,
Custom size 3-1, Custom size 3-2, Custom size 3-3, Custom size 5 (Long length)

■ Pickup Specifications (4/11)

Type (paper weight: g/m2)
• Tracing (64 to 80)

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
A3 Yes No No No No No No
B4 Yes No No No No No No
A4R Yes No No No No No No
A4 Yes No No No No No No
B5R Yes No No No No No No
B5 Yes No No No No No No
A5R Yes No No No No No No
11x17 Yes No No No No No No
LGL Yes No No No No No No
LTR Yes No No No No No No
LTRR Yes No No No No No No
STMTR Yes No No No No No No
EXEC Yes No No No No No No
K8 Yes No No No No No No
K16 Yes No No No No No No
I-LGL Yes No No No No No No
Free Yes No No No No No No

26
 1. Product Overview

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
Free (Long Yes*1 No No No No No No
length)
Custom size A Yes No No No No No No
*2

*1
It is necessary to set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST
*2
• Custom size A: Custom size 1-1, Custom size 1-2, Custom size 1-3, Custom size 2-1, Custom size 2-2, Custom size 2-3,
Custom size 3-1, Custom size 3-2, Custom size 3-2, Custom size 3-3, Custom size 5 (Long length)

■ Pickup Specifications (5/11)

Type (paper weight: g/m2)
• Clear film (151 to 181)

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
A3 No *2 No No No No No No
A4R No *2 No No No No No No
A4 No *2 No No No No No No
11x17 No *2 No No No No No No
LTR No *2 No No No No No No
LTRR No *2 No No No No No No
Free No No No No No No No
Free (Long No No No No No No No
length)
Custom size A No *2 No No No No No No
*1

*1
• Custom size A: Custom size 1-1, Custom size 1-2, Custom size 1-3, Custom size 2-1, Custom size 2-2, Custom size 2-3,
Custom size 3-1, Custom size 3-2, Custom size 3-3
*2
It is necessary to set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
COPIER > OPTION > USER > FLM-DSPL

■ Pickup Specifications (6/11)

Type (paper weight: g/m2)
• OHP (151 to 181)

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
A3 Yes No No No No No No
LTR Yes No No No No No No

27
 1. Product Overview

■ Pickup Specifications (7/11)

Type (paper weight: g/m2)
• Labels 1 (151 to 181)

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
A3 Yes No No No No No No
B4 Yes No No No No No No
A4R Yes No No No No No No
A4 Yes No No No No No No
B5R Yes No No No No No No
B5 Yes No No No No No No
A5R Yes No No No No No No
11x17 Yes No No No No No No
LGL Yes No No No No No No
LTR Yes No No No No No No
LTRR Yes No No No No No No
STMTR Yes No No No No No No
EXEC Yes No No No No No No
K8 Yes No No No No No No
K16 Yes No No No No No No
F4A Yes No No No No No No
I-LGL Yes No No No No No No
Free Yes No No No No No No
Custom size A* Yes No No No No No No

*
• Custom size A: Custom size 1-1, Custom size 1-2, Custom size 1-3, Custom size 2-1, Custom size 2-2, Custom size 2-3,
Custom size 3-1, Custom size 3-2 , Custom size 3-3

■ Pickup Specifications (8/11)

Type (paper weight: g/m2)
• Bond paper 1 (75 to 90)

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
A3 Yes No No No No No No
B4 Yes No No No No No No
A4R Yes No No No No No No
A4 Yes No No No No No No
B5R Yes No No No No No No
B5 Yes No No No No No No
A5R Yes No No No No No No
11x17 Yes No No No No No No
LGL Yes No No No No No No
LTR Yes No No No No No No
LTRR Yes No No No No No No
STMTR Yes No No No No No No
EXEC Yes No No No No No No
K8 Yes No No No No No No

28
 1. Product Overview

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
K16 Yes No No No No No No
I-LGL Yes No No No No No No
Free Yes No No No No No No
Custom size A* Yes No No No No No No

*
• Custom size A: Custom size 1-1, Custom size 1-2, Custom size 1-3, Custom size 2-1, Custom size 2-2, Custom size 2-3,
Custom size 3-1, Custom size 3-2, Custom size 3-3

■ Pickup Specifications (9/11)

Type (paper weight: g/m2)
• Postcard, 4 on 1 postcard (164 to 209)

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
Postcard Yes No No No No No No
Reply Postcard Yes No No No No No No
4 on 1 Postcard Yes No No No No No No

■ Pickup Specifications (10/11)

Type (paper weight: g/m2)
• Pre-Punched paper 1 (75 to 80)

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
A3 Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
B4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
A4R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
B5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
A5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
11x17 Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
LGL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
LTRR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
STMTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
EXEC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
E-OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
B-OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
M-OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
A-OFFICIO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
A-LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
A-LTRR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

29
 1. Product Overview

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
GLTR-R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
GLTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
GLGL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
AFLS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
FLS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
K8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
K16 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
K16R No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
F4A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
I-LGL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Free Yes No No No No No No
Custom size A* Yes No No No No No No
Custom size B* Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Custom size C* Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No

*
• Custom size A: Custom size 1-1, Custom size 1-2, Custom size 1-3, Custom size 2-1, Custom size 3-1, Custom size 5
(Long length)
• Custom size B: Custom size 2-2, Custom size 3-2
• Custom size C: Custom size 2-3, Custom size 3-3

■ Pickup Specifications (11/11)

Type (paper weight: g/m2)
• Envelope (75 to 105)

Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
COM10_R Yes No Yes No No No No
Monarch_R Yes No Yes No No No No
ISO-C5_R Yes No Yes No No No No
ISO-B5_R No No No No No No No
DL_R Yes No Yes No No No No
Nagagata 3_R Yes No No No No No No
Yougatanaga Yes No No No No No No
3_R
Kakugata 2_R Yes No No No No No No
COM10 No No No No No No No
Monarch No No No No No No No
ISO-C5 No No No No No No No
ISO-B5 No No No No No No No
DL No No No No No No No
Nagagata 3 No No No No No No No
Yougatanaga 3 No No No No No No No
Kakugata 2 No No No No No No No
Free No No No No No No No
Free (Long No No No No No No No
length)
Custom size A* Yes No No No No No No

30
 1. Product Overview

*
• Custom size A: Custom size 1-1, Custom size 1-2, Custom size 1-3, Custom size 2-1, Custom size 2-2, Custom size 2-3,
Custom size 3-1, Custom size 3-2, Custom size 3-3

31
 1. Product Overview

Name of Parts

External View
■ Front side of the machine

No. Name No. Name

1 Motion Sensor 8 Multi-purpose Tray
2 Control Panel 9 Right Lower Door
3 ADF 10 Cassette Right Door
4 USB Port (Right Front) 11 Cassette 1
5 USB Port (Right Rear) 12 Cassette 2
6 USB Connector 13 Main Power Supply Switch
7 LAN Port

32
 1. Product Overview

No. Name No. Name

1 Push-out Stopper 3 Toner Supply Cover
2 Delivery Tray 4 Front Cover

■ Rear side of the machine

No. Name No. Name

1 Extension phone line terminal (LINE 4/LINE 3/LINE 2 3 Handset connection terminal (Handset)
from above)
2 Phone line terminal (LINE 1) 4 External phone terminal (EXT.)

33
 1. Product Overview

■ Inside of the host machine

No. Name No. Name

1 Toner Container 2 Waste Toner Container

■ ADF/Reader

No. Name No. Name

1 Document Set Lamp 7 Document Read Area Cover
2 ADF Upper Cover 8 Copyboard Glass
3 Slide Guide 9 Document Delivery Extension Tray
4 Document Pickup Tray 10 Document Stopper
5 Document Pickup Extension Tray 11 Document Delivery Tray

34
 1. Product Overview

No. Name No. Name

6 Document Read Area 12 Unremoved Document Lamp

■ Multi-purpose Tray

No. Name No. Name

1 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Side Guide Plate 3 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Sub Tray
2 Multi-purpose Tray

■ Cassette

No. Name No. Name

1 Trailing Edge Guide Plate 2 Side Guide Plate

35
 1. Product Overview

Cross Section View

■ Host machine
CCD Unit Toner Supply Unit Toner Container

Delivery Assembly

Fixing Assembly

Drum Unit

Drum

Developing Assembly

Laser Scanner Unit Cassette 1 Cassette 2

■ Reader
[1]

[2]

No. Name No. Name

[1] Reader Scanner Unit [2] Reader Unit

36
 1. Product Overview

■ Single pass ADF

[7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

[8] [9] [10][11][12] [13] [14] [15]

Key No. Name Key No. Name

[1] Pickup Roller [9] Lead Roller 1
[2] Separation Roller [10] Platen Roller 1
[3] Feed Roller [11] Platen Roller 2
[4] Pullout Roller [12] Lead Roller 2
[5] Pullout Roller [13] Lead Roller 2
[6] Registration Roller [14] Delivery Roller
[7] Registration Roller [15] Delivery Roller
[8] Lead Roller 1

■ Reversal ADF
[1] [2] [4] [3] [5]

[9] [8] [7] [6]

No. Name No. Name

[1] Lower registration roller [6] Lower delivery reversal roller
[2] Upper registration roller [7] Lead roller 2 (upper)
[3] Pickup roller assembly [8] Platen roller
[4] Separation roller [9] Lead roller 1 (upper)
[5] Upper delivery reversal roller - -

37
 1. Product Overview

Control Panel
[1] [2] [3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]
[9]

[16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10]

No. Name
[1] [Settings/Registration] key
[2] Numeric keys
[3] [Energy Saver] key
[4] [Counter/Device Information] key
[5] Brightness Adjustment key
[6] Settings key
[7] [Clear] key
[8] [Stop] key
[9] [Start] key
[10] Main Power indicator
[11] Error indicator
[12] Processing/Data indicator
[13] [Reset] key
[14] ID (Log In/Out) key
[15] NFC (If equipped with NFC Kit-B1)
[16] Touch panel display

38
2 Technology
Basic Configuration............................. 40
Original Exposure System...................41
Main Controller....................................87
Laser Exposure System...................... 92
Image Formation System.................... 98
Fixing System....................................112
Pickup/Feed System......................... 123
External Auxiliary System................. 137
 2. Technology

Basic Configuration

Functional Configuration
The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional system blocks; document exposure system block, controller
system block, laser exposure system block, image formation system block, fixing system block and pickup/feed system block.

Original exposure system

Reader controller
CCD Exposure lamp
PCB

Controller system
HDD Duplexing
Main Delivery
Option controller feed
board
Fixing
DC system
controller Fixing
Laser exposure system

Laser scanner unit Transfer

Image
formation
system Pickup

Pickup/feed
Cassette 1
system

Flow of paper Cassette 2

Flow of signal
Laser beam

40
 2. Technology

Original Exposure System

Overview
■ Features
Reader Assembly
• Productivity has been increased by improving the original reading speed.

ADF
• Low energy consumption by adopting a new Scanner Unit
• Realization of a compact Scanner Unit by adopting a new lens unit
• Increase in the supported original basis weight
• The double feed detection function added

● Reader Assembly
• Productivity has been increased by improving the original reading speed.

● ADF
ADF
• Low energy consumption by adopting a new Scanner Unit
• Realization of a compact Scanner Unit by adopting a new lens unit
• Increase in the supported original basis weight
• The double feed detection function added

41
 2. Technology

Reversal ADF
• Improvement of quick-engaging/disengaging the Pickup roller assembly and the Separation roller
• Improvement of paper curl detection by the modification the Document length sensor
• Installation of the Document delivery Lamp function

■ Specifications
● Reader Assembly
Item Specification/Function Remarks
Photo conductor White high luminance LED + light guide plate -
Scanning of original At copyboard reading -
Scanning by moving Scanner Unit

When Using ADF

Stream scanning of original with fixed Scanner Unit
Reading resolution Black & White: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Color: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Number of gradations 256 gradations -
Carriage position detec- Scanner Unit HP Sensor (PS2) -
tion
Magnification ratio 25% to 400% Black & White: Scan magnification (skipping of 2
vertical lines: 25% to 50%)
Color: Digital variable magnification
Horizontal scanning direction Horizontal scanning direction
Image processing by the Main Controller PCB -

Vertical scanning direction Vertical scanning direction

Image processing by the Main Controller PCB Partially processed by the Reader Control-
ler PCB
Number of lines of the 4 lines (R, G, B, B/W) -
Reading Sensor
Original size detection Horizontal scanning direction -
Detection by the Reading Sensor (Scanner Unit)

Vertical scanning direction

Detection by the Reflection Sensor (Original Size
Sensor 1 (AB configuration) or Original Size Sen-
sor 2 (Inch configuration))

42
 2. Technology

Item Specification/Function Remarks

Maximum docu- At copyboard reading -
ment size 297 mm x 431.8 mm

When using the ADF

304.8 mm x 630 mm

● ADF
Single pass ADF

Item Specifications Remarks

Document Automatic pickup/delivery method Simultaneous du-
pickup plex reading
method
Original Sheet document -
Type
Original ba- 1-sided 1-sided
sis weight • A/B: 38 to 157 g/m2 • A/B: For origi-
• Inch: 50 to 157 g/m2 nals 38 g/m2 or
more and less
2-sided
than 42 g/m2,
50 to 157 g/m2 width 257 mm
Color original (B5 size) or
more and 1-si-
64 to 157 g/m2
ded single
sheet delivery
• A/B: For origi-
nals exceeding
432 mm, 1-sided
single sheet
feed: 60 to 90
g/m2 *
Original size A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, B4, B5, B5R, • *1 : Max Scanning
B6R, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, Width 297 mm
STMTR, 8K, 16K, 16KR • B6 paper can on-
ly be fed with land-
Feed direction
scape orientation
139.7 to 432 mm (STMT to 17 • Since originals that
inch) *432 to 630 mm originals can are 432 to 630 mm in
also be read (see the note). the feed direction are
Width direction larger than the Docu-
ment Pickup Tray,
128 to 304.8 mm (B6R to 12
they can be read
inch)(*1)
while being held by
the user. *
Original set- Pickup from the Original Tray: Face up -
ting direc-
tion
Original set- Pickup from the Original Tray: Cen- -
ting position ter reference
Document Stream reading Simultaneous duplex
scanning reading can only be per-
method formed on originals that
are 432 mm or smaller
Original Drive-free retard separation -
separation
method
Original 1-sided, 2-sided (simultaneous) -
feed mode

43
 2. Technology

Item Specifications Remarks

Original All sizes: 150 sheets (80 g/m2 or less) • Originals exceeding
Tray stack- 80 g/m2 are conver-
ing capacity ted by basis weight.
Folded originals must
be 10 mm or less
in height.
• Originals exceeding
432 mm can only be
loaded one sheet at
a time.
Mixed pa- Mix of the same configuration Load the originals on the
per func- Available rear side.
tions Guaranteed combinations
Mix of different configurations with a mix of different
Available configurations: AB config-
uration: A3/B4, B4/A4R,
A4/B5, B5R/A5R
Original size Available -
detection
function
Finished Available -
stamp func-
tion
Document Stream reading -
processing • 1-sided
speed • Copy/SEND: 600 dpi
BW: 80 ipm
BW: 60 ipm
• SEND: 300 dpi
BW: 80 ipm
CL: 80 ipm
• 2-sided
• Copy/SEND: 600 dpi
BW: 150 ipm
BW: 80 ipm
• SEND: 300 dpi
BW: 160 ipm
CL: 160 ipm
Power Sup- DC 24 V, DC 12 V Supplied by the connec-
ply ted equipment

* : To use the Long Original mode, select the following service mode (LV.2) and set it to "1" (default: "0")
• COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST

Reversal ADF

Item Specifications
Document pickup method Automatic pickup and delivery
Document loading direction Face-up
Document loading position Aligned to center
Document separation method Upper separation
Document weight Single -sided AB configuration: 42 to 128 g/m2
(Single-sided one sheet feed: 38 to 128 g/m2)
Inch configuration: 50 to 128 g/m2
Double-sided 50-128 g/m2
Black and White mixed Same types of paper: 50 to 128 g/m2
width document Different types of paper: 64 to 81 g/m2
Color mixed width docu- Same types of paper: 64 to 128 g/m2
ment Different types of paper: 64 to 81 g/m2
Black and White/Col-
or mixed

44
 2. Technology

Item Specifications
Document weight Document longer than Single-sided one sheet feed: 60 to 90 g/m2
432 mm
Document size AB configuration: B6, A5R, A5, B5R, B5, A4R, A4, B4, A3
Inch configuration: 11×17, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR, 8K, 16K
Width: 140 to 297 mm
Length: 128 to 432 mm
(It is available when the operator holds long documents between 432mm
and 630mm.)
Document supply tray capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Document feeding mode Single-sided/Double-sided
Document size detection Available (Standard size)
Mixed document function Same types mixed Yes
width document
Different types mixed Yes
width document
Book document Supported (The document thickness must be 50 mm or less.)
Power supply Supplied from the host machine
Dimensions 565 mm×525 mm×139 mm (W×D×H)
Weight Approx. 8kg

■ Basic Configuration
● Reader Assembly
Parts Configuration

[8] [9]

[7] [10]

[6] [11]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

Key No. Name Code Function/Specification

[1] Scanner Unit - Image reading, analog image processing
[2] Scanner Unit HP Sensor PS_A1 Scanner Unit HP detection
[3] ADF Open/Close Sensor 1 PS_N1 ADF open/close detection (DADF detection at 5 degrees)
[4] ADF Open/Close Sensor 2 PS_N2 ADF open/close detection (detection of timing for size detection at 30
degrees of ADF opening/closing)
[5] Sensor Lightproof Sheet - -
[6] Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 Overall Reader control, digital image processing
[7] Original Size Sensor 1 PS_R1 Size detection in the vertical scanning direction (AB configuration)
[8] Original Size Sensor 2 PS_R2 Size detection in the vertical scanning direction (Inch configuration)
[9] Scanner Motor STM1 2-phase Pulse Motor: Pulse control
[10] Carriage Drive Belt - -

45
 2. Technology

Key No. Name Code Function/Specification

[11] Guide Shaft - -

Scanner Unit
This equipment uses a Scanner Unit that integrates an LED, mirror, lens, and Reading Sensor to perform original exposure
and reading.
Light emitted from the LED is reflected by the original and reaches the Reading Sensor through the Reflection Mirror and the
Lens Unit.

Lens

LED (light source)

mirror
No.4
mirror No.3
mirror
No.2

mirror No.1

mirror
No.5

Lens CCD

Red (R) line

Green (G) line
Blue (B) line
Black & White (B/W) line

LED Lamp Unit

The LED Lamp Unit emits light from the 2 LED Lamp PCBs (with 36 LED chips for each PCB).
The emitted light exposes the original via the Reflection Plate.

Newly Developed Lens Unit

By using the Lens Unit with 4 lenses combined, downsizing of the Scanner Unit has been achieved.

Reading Sensor
The Reading Sensor reads the image for1 image line.
The Reading Sensor has 4 lines (R, G, B, and B/W). At 600 dpi B&W reading, 1 line (B/W) is used. At color reading, 3 lines (R,
G, and B) are used.

Related Error Code

Shading error
• E302-0001: Error in paper front white shading

46
 2. Technology

• E302-0002: Error in paper front black shading

● ADF
Single pass ADF

Function Configuration
A list of functions is indicated below.

Reader Controller PCB

ADF Driver PCB

Power Supply
Assembly

Original Feed Assembly Original Pickup Assembly Original Pickup Tray

Original Scanning Original Delivery Tray

Assembly (Rear Side)
Original Scanning Original Path
Assembly (Front Side)

Parts Configuration
[8]

[7]

[6]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[2]
[1]

Key No. Name Code

[1] ADF Stamp Solenoid SL1
[2] Scanner Unit -
[3] ADF Pickup Clutch CL1

47
 2. Technology

Key No. Name Code

[4] ADF Registration Motor STM1
[5] ADF Pickup Motor STM2
[6] ADF Read Motor STM3
[7] ADF Cooling Fan FAN_A1
[8] ADF Driver PCB UN_BO1

Drive Configuration List

This equipment is a document feeder for stream reading only.
This equipment has 3 motors, 1 clutch, and 1 solenoid as drive load.
It also has 1 document reading unit (Scanner Unit) for the back side of originals.
The drive configuration of this equipment is indicated below.

M1 M2

CL1

M3 SL1

Code Name Role

STM1 ADF Registration Motor Drive of Pickup Roller
STM2 ADF Pickup Motor Drive of Registration Roller, paper feed
STM3 ADF Read Motor Lead Roller, Delivery Roller drive, Glass shift
CL1 ADF Pickup Clutch ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Unit lifting operation
SL1 ADF Stamp Solenoid Stamp drive

List of Rollers
[7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]

48
 2. Technology

Key No. Name

[1] Pickup Roller
[2] Separation Roller
[3] Feed Roller
[4] Pullout Roller
[5] Pullout Roller
[6] Registration Roller
[7] Registration Roller
[8] Lead Roller 1
[9] Lead Roller 1
[10] Platen Roller 1
[11] Platen Roller 2
[12] Lead Roller 2
[13] Lead Roller 2
[14] Delivery Roller
[15] Delivery Roller

List of Sensors
PS_R3
PS_N1
PS_A3
PS_A5
PS_A4

UN_SNS1

PS_R1

UN_BO8

UN_BO7

PS_A9

PS_R2
PS_A1
PS_A6
PS_A2
PS_A7
UN_BO6

Code Name Detection description Jam Detection

Delay Sta- Others
tio-
nary
PS_A1 Arch Sensor Pullout Roller arch formation timing Yes Yes -
PS_A2 Delivery Tray Sensor Existence of originals in the Original Output Tray - - -
PS_A3 LTR-R/ LGL Sensor Identifying LTR-R/LGL paper - - -
PS_A4 AB/ Inch Sensor Identifying A4R/LTRR and A5R/STMTR paper - - -
PS_A5 Cover Open/Closed Sensor Opening/closing of the Feeder Cover - - Yes
PS_A6 Lead Sensor 1 Lead Roller 1 disengagement timing Yes Yes -
PS_A7 Lead Sensor 2 Lead Roller 2 disengagement timing Yes Yes -
PS_A9 Paper Back Reading Glass HP Sensor Reading Glass position - - -
UN_BO6 Original Size Sensor Original size in the width direction - - -
UN_BO7 Double Feed Sensor PCB (transmission) Double feed detection (transmission) - - Yes
UN_BO8 Double Feed Sensor PCB (reception) Double feed detection (reception) - - Yes

49
 2. Technology

Code Name Detection description Jam Detection

Delay Sta- Others
tio-
nary
PS_N1 Original Sensor Existence of originals in the Document Pick- - - -
up Tray
PS_R1 Post-separation Sensor The position of the leading edge of the original Yes Yes -
immediately after pickup
PS_R2 Registration Sensor Registration arch formation timing Yes Yes -
PS_R3 Large Size/ Small Size Sensor Identifying large size/small size originals - - -

ADF Driver PCB

The connections of the ADF Driver PCB are indicated below.

J402 J401 J408

J407

J409

IC
J410

J405 J404

ADF Driver PCB J No. Connection destination

Code Name
J401 UN_BO1 Reader Controller PCB
J402 UN_BO1 Reader Controller PCB
J404 STM1 ADF Registration Motor
STM2 ADF Pickup Motor
J405 STM3 ADF Read Motor
J407 CL1 ADF Pickup Clutch
SL1 ADF Stamp Solenoid
PS_A1 Arch Sensor
PS_A2 Delivery Tray Sensor
PS_N1 Original Sensor
PS_R1 Post-separation Sensor
UN_BO4 Original Display LED
J409 FAN_A1 ADF Cooling Fan
J408 PS_A5 Cover Open/Closed Sensor
PS_A6 Lead Sensor 1
PS_A7 Lead Sensor 2
PS_A9 Paper Back Reading Glass HP Sensor
PS_R2 Registration Sensor
UN_BO6 Original Size Sensor
UN_BO7 Double Feed Sensor PCB (transmission)
UN_BO8 Double Feed Sensor PCB (reception)
J410 UN_SNS1 Original Width Volume
PS_A3 LTR-R/ LGL Sensor
PS_A4 AB/ Inch Sensor
PS_R3 Large Size/ Small Size Sensor
UN_BO5 Delivery Display LED

50
 2. Technology

Reversal ADF

List of Major Electric Parts

PCB1

M2 SL1
PCB4

CL1
CL2

M1

PCB5

SL2 PCB2
PCB3

Symbol Name
CL1 Pickup clutch
CL2 Registration clutch
SL1 Release solenoid
SL2 Stamp solenoid
M1 Pickup motor
M2 Read motor
PCB1 ADF driver PCB
PCB2 Document set LED PCB
PCB3 Different width sensor PCB
PCB4 Document width sensor PCB
PCB5 Document delivery LED PCB

Roller Layout
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

[13]

[12][11] [10] [9] [8] [7] [6]

No. Name
[1] Lower registration roller
[2] Upper registration roller
[3] Feed roller
[4] Separation roller
[5] Pickup roller

51
 2. Technology

No. Name
[6] Upper delivery reversal roller
[7] Lower delivery reversal roller
[8] Lead roller 2 (lower)
[9] Lead roller 2 (upper)
[10] Platen roller
[11] Lead roller
[12] Lead roller 1 (lower)
[13] Lead roller 1 (upper)

Sensor Layout
SR6 SR8
SR9/SR10/SR11/SR12 SR5 SR7

SR2 SR1 SR3 SR15 SR13/SR14

Symbol Name Detection description

SR1 Registration sensor Registration arch creation timing
SR2 Lead sensor Image Leading start/completion timing
SR3 Delivery reversal sensor Delivery reversal timing
SR5 Document set sensor Document set detection
SR6 Cover open/closed sensor Open/close of Feeder Cover
SR7 Document length sensor 1 Document size detection (length)
SR8 Document length sensor 2
SR9 Different width sensor 1 Document size detection (width)
SR10 Different width sensor 2
SR11 Different width sensor 3
SR12 Different width sensor 4
SR13 Document width sensor 1
SR14 Document width sensor 2
SR15 Document width sensor 3

52
 2. Technology

Drive Configuration

M1

CL2 CL1

SL2 SL1
M2

Symbol Name Role

M1 Pickup motor Pickup documents.
M2 Read motor Feeds documents when Stream reading or Delivery.
SL1 Release solenoid Shifts the Lower delivery reversal roller after reversal of a document.
SL2 Stamp solenoid Stamps on a document.
CL1 Pickup clutch Transmit the Pickup motor drive to the Pickup roller and the Feed roll-
er.
CL2 Registration clutch Transmit the power of the Pickup motor to the Lower registration roll-
er.

Reader Assembly
■ Magnification Ratio
● Changing the Magnification Ratio in the Horizontal Scanning Direction
When using the reading mode of the reader / When using the ADF
Reading in the horizontal scanning direction is performed at 100% size. Changes to the magnification ratio are processed by the
Main Controller PCB.

● Changing the Magnification Ratio in the Vertical Scanning Direction

As the magnification change in vertical scanning direction, the following operation is performed according to original reading
method and difference in magnification.

53
 2. Technology

1. Magnification change operation when using the reading mode of the reader
Data is processed by the Main Controller PCB according to the magnification ratio.
Example) In the case of reducing the magnification to 25%: Original reading speed of 260 mm/sec, original reduced to 25%
(1/4 size) by the Main Controller PCB
Example) In the case of 100%: Original reading speed of 260 mm/sec

Operation description Magnification

25 % to 50 % 50.1 % to 199.9 % 200 % to 400 %
Original reading speed 260 260 260
(mm/sec)
Digital magnification process- 25 to 50 50.1 to 199.9 100 to 200
ing in the Main Controller
PCB (%)

■ Original Size Detection

● Overview
This machine determines the size of an original by the combination of the measurement results of the reflected light at particular
points of the Reflection Sensor and Reading Sensor. Furthermore, two points are measured for each size to perform accurate
detection even if the original is moved when the ADF is closed.
• Horizontal scanning direction: Reading Sensor (AB configuration: 12 point measurement, inch configuration: 6
point measurement)
• Vertical scanning direction: Reflection Photosensor (AB configuration, inch configuration: 1 location, AB/inch configuration:
1 location (shipped with position of Original Sensor 1, but can be changed the position of Original Sensor 2 as necessary))
The original size is determined using the following procedure:

1. Search of external light (horizontal scanning direction only)

The sensor level at each detection position in the horizontal scanning direction is measured while the LED is OFF.

2. Detection of output level of each sensor

The LED of the Reading Sensor Unit is turned ON to measure the sensor level at each detection position in the horizontal
scanning direction.
Furthermore, the Reflection Photo Sensor LED for the vertical scanning direction is turned ON to measure the sensor output.

The original size is determined by the combination of these outputs.

● Control description
In horizontal scanning direction, sensor level of each original detection position is measured by moving the Scanner Unit to the
detection position shown in the figure in relation to the original setting position. In the vertical scanning direction, the original size
is determined using the Original Sensor 1 and 2.

AB type Inch type

Original sensor 1 Original sensor 2

Original detection
position 1 STMTR
Original detection A5R
position 1
Original detection
position 2 B5R
Original detection
position 3 A5 A4R Original detection
position 2 STMT LTRR LGL
Original detection
position 4 B5 B4
Original detection position 5 K16 K8 Original detection 279.4×431.8mm
Original detection position 6 A4 A3 position 3 LTR (11"×17")

CCD original detection position CCD original detection position

54
 2. Technology

■ Dust Detection Control

● Single pass ADF
Overview
When reading an original, original reading position is changed according to the presence/absence of dust on the Stream Reading
Glass or the Guide Plate of the ADF or image correction is performed to prevent the dust to be printed on an image. This control
is performed only when the ADF is being used and has been closed.

Control timing
• At job completion
• At paper interval (after each sheet is read)
• At the start of a job (only when one of the following conditions is met)
When dust is detected at all detection points when the previous job finished
When dust detection was not completed normally when the previous job finished (because the ADF was opened, etc.)

Main power Start key

switch ON ON

WMUP STBY
1st 2nd
SCAN SCAN

Dust detection Dust detection Dust detection

control control control

Control description
At job completion (dust detection)
The Reading Sensor detects presence/absence of dust at the reading position A, B, and C in that order, and the position where
dust is least present becomes the reading position for the next job.

At the start of a job (dust evasion)

Like the time of completion of a job, presence/absence of dust is detected at all positions (A, B, and C in that order). The
position where dust is least present is used as the reading position and reading starts.

C B A

At paper interval
The Scanner Unit does not move.
Reading is performed at the position determined by the control performed at job completion or at the start of a job, and image
correction is performed if dust is detected at that position.

55
 2. Technology

0.5 mm 0.5 mm

C B A

Scanning Glass

Service mode
• Adjustment of dust detection level at paper interval
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR > DFDST-L1
• Adjustment of dust detection level at job completion
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR > DFDST-L2

● Reversal ADF
Overview
Dust detection / correction control executes the following processing in association with the shading correction to correct image
density variation (white streaks) in areas of dust.
1. Before shading, dust adhered at shading positions is detected.
2. After shading, the shading coefficient of already detected areas of dust is corrected.

Execution timing
Dust detection / correction control is always executed at the time of white shading during shading correction.
There are 2 processings for dust.

Processing to avoid dust (when starting the first stream reading job after turning ON the power, when ending a stream
reading job, etc.)
Like the time of completion of a job, presence/absence of dust is detected at all positions (1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 in that order). The
position where dust is least present is used as the reading position and reading starts.

0.5 mm 0.5 mm

2 3 1 4 5

1
2
3
4
5

56
 2. Technology

Processing to correct dust (when a regular stream reading job starts, between papers)
Dust detection is executed at the reading position, and image density variation (white streaks) in areas of dust is corrected
from the next original if there is any dust.

0.5 mm 0.5 mm

2 3 1 4 5

Stream Read Glass

Related Service Mode

• Adj image correction level: stream read
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > DFDST-L1
• Adj dust detection level: stream reading
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > DFDST-L2

■ Image Processing
The functions of the PCB related to image processing are shown below:

Reader Controller PCB

Shading correction (executed per job)
Color displacement correction in vertical scanning direction

Scanner Unit PCB

Scanner Unit drive, analog image processing, A/D conversion
Image processing is performed by the Reader Controller PCB for each line of the images. The main functions are indicated below.
Reader Controller PCB
Shading correction
Color displacement correction in vertical scanning direction

Scanner Unit PCB (in the Scanner Unit)

Scanner Unit Drive
Gain correction of the Reading Sensor output, Offset correction

57
 2. Technology

Scanner Unit PCB (Reader)

LED
Reader Controller PCB

Analog image ASIC

signal EEP-ROM
SRAM
Gain
Scanner unit Shading correction
drive control correction data
Analog image CPU
process A/D Color offset
Digital
- gain correction correction
conversion image
- offset correction in sub scanning
signal

CCD/AP PCB

Scanner Unit PCB (ADF)

LED

Analog image
signal

Scanner unit Main Controller PCB

drive control

Analog image
process A/D
- gain correction
conversion
- offset correction

CCD/AP PCB

● Scanner Unit Drive

The Reading Sensor included in this equipment is comprised of approx. 7,500 pixels.The signal photoelectrically converted by the
light-receiving part is output to the Analog Front-end Circuit on the Scanner Unit PCB.

5HDGLQJ6HQVRU

Enlarged

Light-receiving section

Output
L L H H L H L H H H L ………

● Gain correction of the Reading Sensor output, Offset correction

The analog video signal output from the Reading Sensor has its amplification ratio aligned with a fixed value (gain correction) and
has its output voltage when there is no incident light aligned with a fixed value (offset correction).

● A/D Conversion for Reading Sensor Output

The corrected analog video signal is converted into the digital signal for each pixel voltage value using an A/D converter.

58
 2. Technology

● Overview of Shading Correction

Even density of an original is even, output of the Reading Sensor may not become even due to the following reasons.
• Variation in sensitivity of pixels of the Reading Sensor
• Variation in lens light intensity
• Difference in the transmission light intensity in the center of the lens and the surrounding area
• Difference in the light intensity in the center of the LED and the surrounding area
• LED deterioration
To correct unevenness of the Reading Sensor output, shading correction is performed.
In shading correction, there is a type of shading correction that is executed per job.

● Shading correction
Shading correction is performed for each scanning of original.
With this operation, light of LED Lamp is emitted to the Standard White Plate, and the reflected light is converted into digital data at
the analog image processing part of the Scanner Unit PCB. The amount of digitized reflected light is input to the shading correction
circuit in the Main Controller PCB as the shading coefficient. In the shading correction circuit, the stored target value and the
shading coefficient are compared, and the difference is determined as the shading correction value.
With this shading correction value, variation of pixel of the Reading Sensor of each scan is corrected to make the image density
level even.

Reading Sensor
output Characteristics
after correction
Target value Characteristics
before correction
Measurement
value

White
Original density
Standard White Plate

■ Color displacement correction processing in vertical scanning direction

Color displacement correction control in vertical scanning direction is a processing to correct the displacement in RGB by shifting
pixels in the vertical direction (up to 1 pixel) to align GREEN with RED and BLUE images when RGB cannot be read such that
they are accurately overlapped at color scanning.
Example) Scanned image of black line when RED is shifted upwards and BLUE is shifted downwards compared to GREEN

&RORUGLVSODFHPHQW
FRUUHFWLRQLQYHUWLFDO
VFDQQLQJGLUHFWLRQ5*

1 line

&RORUGLVSODFHPHQW %HIRUH $IWHU

FRUUHFWLRQLQYHUWLFDO FRUUHFWLRQ FRUUHFWLRQ
VFDQQLQJGLUHFWLRQ*%

There are 2 color displacement correction values in the vertical scanning direction, as indicated below. The correction values are
already adjusted at the time of shipping and stored as service modes. (In COPIER > ADJUST > CCD)
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-RG
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-BG
When a job is started, color displacement correction processing is performed based on the saved color displacement
correction values.

ADF_Single pass ADF

■ Outline of Electric Circuits
This equipment is controlled by the Reader Controller PCB.
The relationship between the various electrical components is indicated below.

59
 2. Technology

Sensor

Motor
ADF Driver
Scanner Unit
PCB
Solenoid

Fan

Reader Controller PCB

Related Error Code

Communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Scanner Unit
• E280 - 0001: Communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was not completed within
the specified period of time.
• E280 - 0002: Disconnection of FFC between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was detected.
• E280 - 0101: Communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was not completed within the
specified period of time.
• E280 - 0102: Disconnection of FFC between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was detected.
Communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF
• E400 - 0001: A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected.
• E400 - 0002: A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected.
• E400 - 0003: Disconnection of the harness between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected.
ADF fan error
• E412 - 0005: Rotation of fan was detected after the stop signal for the DADF Cooling Fan was transmitted.
• E412 - 0006: Stop of fan was detected after rotation signal for the DADF Cooling Fan was transmitted.
Different DADF model error
• E490 - 0001: A wrong Scanner Unit was installed.
• E490 - 0101: A wrong DADF was installed.

● Overview
The operation modes of this machine are categorized as indicated below.

Name of opera- Duplex reading Operation overview Supported print mode

tion mode method
Normal rota- - Picks up originals and reads them with the 1-sided original -> 1-sided printing
tion pickup/delivery Scanner Unit on the Reader side. Then out- 1-sided original-> 2-sided printing
puts them.
1-sided original mix of the same configuration ->
1-sided printing
1-sided original mix of the same configuration ->
2-sided printing
1-sided original mix of different configurations ->
1-sided printing
1-sided original mix of different configurations ->
2-sided printing
Long original -> 1-sided printing
Simultaneous du- Picks up originals, reads their front side with 2-sided original -> 1-sided printing
plex reading the Scanner Unit at the Reader side, and 2-sided original -> 2-sided printing
reads their back side with the Scanner Unit
2-sided original mix of the same configuration ->
on the ADF side. Then outputs them.
1-sided printing
2-sided original mix of the same configuration ->
2-sided printing
2-sided original mix of different configurations ->
1-sided printing

60
 2. Technology

Name of opera- Duplex reading Operation overview Supported print mode

tion mode method
Normal rota- Simultaneous du- Picks up originals, reads their front side with 2-sided original mix of different configurations ->
tion pickup/delivery plex reading the Scanner Unit at the Reader side, and 2-sided printing
reads their back side with the Scanner Unit
on the ADF side. Then outputs them.

An overview of the flow of the original is indicated below.

61
 2. Technology

● 1-Sided Original (Small Size)

1) 1st sheet pickup

2) 1st sheet arch creation 1

(Pullout Roller)

3) 1st sheet arch creation 1

(Registration Roller)

4) 1st sheet scanning

5) 1st sheet delivery

& 2nd sheet pickup
and arch creation 1 (Pullout Roller)

6) 2nd sheet scanning

62
 2. Technology

■ Scanner Unit
● Configuration of the Scanner Unit
The Scanner Unit has the same mechanism as that of the reader. For details, refer to "Scanner Unit" in "Basic Configuration" in
the section "Reader Technology".
Note that there is a difference in their externals due to the shapes of the locations where the units are installed. For this reason,
the unit for the ADF and that for the reader cannot be exchanged.

Related Error Code

Light intensity error
• E301-0002: Light intensity is below the reference level at paper back shading.
Shading error
• E302-0101: Error in paper back white shading
• E302-0102: Error in paper back black shading

● Duplex Reading Control

2-sided originals are read using simultaneous duplex reading.
With one feed, the Scanner Unit of the Reader Unit reads the front side and the Scanner Unit of the ADF reads the back side without
reversing the paper.

Scanner Unit Scanning position

(ADF) for the rear side

Scanning position Scanner Unit

for the front side (Reader)

Service mode
• Zoom fine adjustment when reading 2-sided originals (horizontal scanning direction) [front side]
FEEDER > ADJUST > ADJMSCN1
• Zoom fine adjustment when reading 2-sided originals (horizontal scanning direction) [back side]
FEEDER > ADJUST > ADJMSCN2

● Glass shift control

This equipment has a Reading Glass on the bottom surface of the Scanner Unit.
This Reading Glass has a Standard White Plate used for shading correction and dust detection correction.
The Reader Controller drives the Read Motor (STM3) as needed to move the Reading Glass.
The Reader Controller performs the above-mentioned correction by comparing the position of the Standard White Plate and the
reflection data of the image scanning position.

63
 2. Technology

ADF Driver PCB

M3

PS_A9 Scanning Glass

The shift timing for the Reading Glass is indicated below.

Condition Reading Glass shift operation

Wait Yes
Standby No
At recovery from sleep mode Yes
At 1-sided reading Yes
At 2-sided reading Yes
At last rotation No

Related Error Code

Scanner HP error
• E202-0101: An error occurs during the Glass HP detection operation (outward)
• E202-0102: An error occurs during the Glass HP detection operation (homeward)

■ Pickup Feed System

A list of original size detections is indicated below.

Timing Direction Sensor Mode

Normal Mix of the Mix of dif- Long
same con- ferent con- original
figuration figurations
Feeding starts. Feed LTR-R/ LGL Sensor (PS_A3) Yes - - -
Large Size/ Small Size Sensor (PS_R3) Yes - - -
Width AB/ Inch Sensor (PS_A4) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Original Width Volume (UN_SNS1) Yes Yes Yes Yes
During feed Feed Post-separation Sensor (PS_R1) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Lead Sensor 1 (PS_A6) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Width Original Size Sensor (UN_BO6) - - Yes -

NOTE:
Normal/mix of same configuration/mix of different configurations: The measurement value is replaced with a fixed size.
Long Original mode (non-fixed detection): The measurement value is used as the original size without changing it.

● Detection when Starting Pickup

Detection in the Feed Direction
The LTR-R/ LGL Sensor (PS_A3) and Large Size/ Small Size Sensor (PS_R3) determine the paper size (large size or small size).
When an original is placed in the Document Pickup Tray, the detection lever of the LTR-R/ LGL Sensor (PS_A3) operates with the
Lightproof Plate and the Lightproof Plate blocks the Photo Interrupter.

64
 2. Technology

At the same time, the reflective Large Size/ Small Size Sensor (PS_R3) detects whether the original has reflecting light.
The size of a paper in the Document Pickup Tray is estimated based on the signal (LGL_S) of the LTR-R/ LGL Sensor (PS_A3),
the signal (LGL_S2) of the Large Size/ Small Size Sensor (PS_R3), and the original width.
The original size is detected in real-time when turning ON the start key and sent to the connected equipment.

ADF Driver PCB

LGL-S2

LGL-S
LGL Size Original

PS_A3
PS_R3

Detecting Flag

Detection in the Width Direction

The original size in the width direction is detected using the Original Width Volume (UN_SNS1) and AB/ Inch Sensor (PS_A4) in
the Document Pickup Tray.
The analog resistance value of the Original Width Volume (UN_SNS1) changes according to the Slide Guide. The ADF Driver PCB
receives this change in the resistance value as an original size signal (UN_SNS1), and uses it as the size in the width direction.
The AB/ Inch Sensor (PS_A4) is located inside the Document Pickup Tray to enable accurate width detection of A4R/LTRR and
A5R/STMTR using the Original Width Volume (UN_SNS1). The AB/ Inch Sensor (PS_A4) outputs "1" for the AB/inch detection
signal (A4LT_S) when the original width is "127 mm or more and less than 148 mm" or "197 mm or more and less than 214 mm".

ADF Driver PCB

Slide Guide
(Rear)
A4LT_S

VR

AB/ Inch
Determination Sensor
(PS_A4)

Gear

Original Width Volume

(UN_SNS1)

Slide Guide
(Front)

● Detection when Feeding

Detection in the Feed Direction
The original size in the feed direction is calculated using the detection signals of the Post-separation Sensor (PS_R1) and Lead
Sensor 1 (PS_A6).

65
 2. Technology

ADF Driver PCB

PS_A6 PS_R1

Detection in the Width Direction(Only when loading the different width mixed paper)
The size is determined by the Original Size Sensor (UN_BO6).

UN_BO6

ADF Driver PCB

● Original Detection Control

Detection of originals in the Document Pickup Tray is performed by the Original Sensor (PS_N1).
When an original is placed in the Document Pickup Tray, the Detection Lever operates with the Lightproof Plate and the Lightproof
Plate passes through the Photo Interrupter. This makes the Original Sensor (PS_N1) emit an original detection signal (EMP_S).
If the Cover Open/Closed Sensor (PS_A5) detects that the Feeder Cover has been closed, a Feeder Cover open/close detection
signal (COVER_S) is emitted.
When the ADF Driver PCB receives a Feeder Cover open/close detection signal (COVER_S) and original detection signal
(EMP_S), an original set indication signal (EMP_LED) is sent to light the Original Set Display LED (LED).

66
 2. Technology

ADF Driver PCB

UN_BO4

PS_N1 PS_A5

● Pickup Operation
The pickup operation is performed by the Pickup Roller, Separation Roller, and Feed Roller.
The Pickup Roller and Feed Roller are driven by the Pickup Motor (M1). By turning ON the Pickup Clutch (CL1) after completion
of the pickup operation, the Pickup Roller Unit is lifted up.
Errors in the pickup operation are detected by the Post-separation Sensor (PS_R1). If the original could not be detected at the
specified timing, it is notified as a jam.

ADF Driver PCB

SEPA_M_A/ B
SEPA_S

MV_CL

M1 CL1

PS_R1

● Original Feed Control

This equipment forms an arch in the Pullout Roller and Registration Roller locations. This increases the feed accuracy.

67
 2. Technology

ADF Driver PCB

PS_A1

ADF Driver PCB

PS_R2

● Jam Detection
This equipment detects original jams using the sensors indicated in the diagram. The check timing to detect jam is already stored
in the ROM of the Reader Controller PCB, which determines the occurrence of a jam by the presence of an original in the areas
of corresponding sensors.
When a jam occurs, the machine stores the information by the code.
This machine's jam code can be checked by printing out a jam error history report from service mode.

PS_R2 UN_BO8 UN_BO7 PS_A1 PS_R1

PS_A6 PS_A7

68
 2. Technology

'LVSOD\ ,2 $GMXVW )XQFWLRQ 2SWLRQ 7HVW &RXQWHU

-$0! ! 5($'<!

1R '$7( 7,0( 7,0( / &2'( 3 &175 6,=(
      2'  $
      2'  $
 
 
 
2& 
 
19'

   
  
)   3&$5'

 
 
 
  
 2  $5
  
 
 
 
 
  2  $
%  
 
 
 
  
  
 2 
 $

'LVSOD\ ,2 $GMXVW )XQFWLRQ 2SWLRQ 7HVW &RXQWHU

1R
-DP7\SH
'(/$<
6HQVRU1R
36

● Double Feed Detection Control

This equipment has Double Feed Sensor PCBs (Transmission/Reception) (UN_BO7/UN_BO8) to detect double feeding of paper.
The Double Feed Sensor PCBs (Transmission/Reception) (UN_BO7/UN_BO8) located between the Pullout Roller and the
Registration Roller use an ultrasonic method to perform double feed detection. Once it is judged that a double feed has occurred,
the machine stops operation due to a jam.
When a job is started, the sensor level is checked without an original to calculate the threshold value for double feed detection.
During the job, the Post-separation Sensor (PS_R1) detects and manages the leading edge/trailing edge for each original sheet
and determines whether a double feed has occurred by comparing the values with the threshold value from when the job started.

UN_BO8 UN_BO7 PS_R1

[2] [1]

No. Name
[1] Pullout Roller
[2] Registration Roller
PS_R1 Post-separation Sensor

69
 2. Technology

No. Name
UN_BO7 Double Feed Sensor PCB (transmission)
UN_BO8 Double Feed Sensor PCB (reception)

NOTE:
The Double Feed Sensor PCB uses an ultrasonic sensor. With the ultrasonic method, the oscillation portion emits ultrasonic wave to
the paper surface. In the result, new ultrasonic wave is generated as the paper vibrates, and the reception side reads the ultrasonic
wave. A double feed is detected when the oscillation is smaller due to a second sheet of paper.

<In the case of a single sheet>

Reception
side paper vibration
Vibration: large

Transmission Original
side

<In the case of double feeding> Original (1st sheet)

Reception paper vibration
side
Vibration: large

Vibration: small

Transmission
side Original (2nd sheet)

● Double Feed Detection Jam

Loca-
Jam code Types of jam Sensor name Sensor number
tion
01 0020 Double feed jam (during a job) ADF Double UN_BO7, UN_BO8
0021 Sensor communication error (during a job) Feed Sensor
0060 Double feed jam (during a job, first sheet)
0061 Sensor communication error (during a job,
first sheet)
0062 Sensor adjustment reception level error (at
the start of a job)
0063 Sensor adjustment communication error (at
the start of a job)

● Types of jam
Feed System

Location Jam code Sensor name Sensor number Jam type

Delay Stationary Residual
01 0001 ADF Post-separa- PS_R1 Yes - -
0002 tion Sensor - Yes -
0042 - Yes -
0003 ADF Arch Sensor PS_A1 Yes - -
0043 Yes - -
0004 - Yes -
0044 - Yes -
0005 ADF Registration Sensor PS_R2 Yes - -
0045 Yes - -
0006 - Yes -

70
 2. Technology

Location Jam code Sensor name Sensor number Jam type

Delay Stationary Residual
01 0046 ADF Registration Sensor PS_R2 - Yes -
0007 ADF Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6 Yes - -
0047 Yes - -
0008 - Yes -
0048 - Yes -
0009 ADF Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7 Yes - -
0049 Yes - -
0010 - Yes -
0050 - Yes -
0094 Entire Feed System Sen- - - - Yes
sor

Others

Location Jam code Jam type Sensor name Sensor number

01 0090 DADF open DADF Open/Close Sen- Reader: PS_N1, PS_N2
0091 DADF opened by user sor 1/2
0092 Cover open Cover Open/Closed Sen- PS_A5
0093 Cover opened by user sor
0095 Pickup error Post-separation Sensor PS_R1
0071 Software timing error*1 - -
0073 Error avoidance jam*2 - -
0076 Size Error Large/Small Sensor, LTR- PS_R3, PS_A3
R/LGL Sensor
0096 Limited functions jam*3 - -
00A1 Post-separation Sensor Power Post-separation Sensor PS_R1
ON Jam
00A2 Scanner Unit HP Sensor Power Scanner Unit HP Sensor PS_A1
ON Jam
00A3 Original Size Sensor (Inch) Power Registration Sensor PS_R2
ON Jam
00A4 Lead Sensor 1 Power ON Jam Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6
00A5 Lead Sensor 2 Power ON Jam Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7

*1 It occurs when a software sequence error has occurred for some reasons. The machine is recovered by opening and then
closing the cover to remove jammed paper.
*2 An error which is handled as an error code occurs. It is highly possible that the machine is recovered by opening and then closing
the cover. Therefore, the jam message is indicated to make the user to open and then close the cover to recover the machine. If
the machine is not recovered by opening and then closing the cover, refer to the error log, and perform the remedy for the error
code which has occurred at the same time.
*3 Limited functions jam is a jam for preventing an original to be left inside the machine when a problem which requires the machine
moves to limited functions mode occurs. If an error occurs for some reasons, a jam message is displayed to make the user to
perform jam removal. After that, an error is displayed, and the device enters limited functions mode. The machine recovers when
the cause of the error is solved.

If this jam occurs, refer to the error log, and perform the remedy for the error code which has occurred at the same time.

71
 2. Technology

NOTE:
Settings/Registration (method for resuming when a feeder paper jam occurs)
When performing stream reading, the method for resuming after a jam has occurred can be set.
Setting item is as follow.
• From 1st Page: After removing the jam, load all original pages in the Document Pickup Tray again. After the Start key is
pressed, the machine feeds the original pages that were already read until the jam occurred without reading them again, and
resume reading of the remaining pages. (Default)
• From Stopped Original: After removing the jam, only load the original pages that have not yet been read in the Document
Pickup Tray again. After the Start key is pressed, the machine resumes reading of the remaining pages.
This equipment supports stream reading of 150 original pages (80 g/m2), so if a jam occurs at the 149th page of a 150 page original,
for example, it can take up to 2 minutes to resume reading if all the original pages are loaded again. Resuming from the original
page where reading stopped enables shorter jam recovery times.

■ Fan
This equipment has a single fan. Its functions are indicated below.

Code Name Function

FAN_A1 ADF Cooling Fan Cooling the ADF Driver PCB (UN_BO1) and 3 motors

[FAN_A1]

■ Power Supply Assembly

An overview of the power supply is indicated below.
With this equipment, 4 types of power (24 V, 12 V, 6 V, and 5 V) are received from the Reader Unit.
The 24 V power is mainly used for the motor, solenoid, fan.
The 12 V power is mainly used for the LED Lamp Unit.
The 5 V power is mostly used for the sensors.
3.3 V power is generated via a converter on the ADF Driver PCB and supplied to the Original Width Volume.

24V
Motor
24V 24V Solenoid
DADF driver 24V
PCB Fan
Reader
controller 5V
Sensor
PCB
5V
3.3V Original
width volume
24V
6V Scanner Unit 24V LED
4.5V PCB lamp unit

Related Error Code

Power supply (24 V) error

72
 2. Technology

• E227-0101: 24 V port is OFF when the power of the DF Unit is turned ON

ADF_Reversal ADF
■ Basic Operation
● Outline
The ADF has the following operation modes.

Operation mode name Outline of operation Associated print mode

Forward pickup/Delivery Picks up, reads, and then delivers a document. Single-sided document -> Simplex printing
Single-sided document -> Duplex printing
Forward feed/Re- Picks up, reads, reverses, and delivers a document. Double-sided document -> Duplex printing
verse delivery Double-sided document -> Simplex printing

● Forward Pickup/Delivery Operation

Simplex read operation (when two document sheets are placed)

Document

Reading of first document

sheet

Pickup of first document sheet/ Pickup of second document

Formation of loop sheet

Start for reading of Formation of loop

the first document sheet of second document

To next

73
 2. Technology

Completion of reading of Completion of reading of

first document sheet second document sheet

Start of reading of Completion of delivery of

second document sheet the second document sheet/
End of job

Completion of delivery of
first document sheet

● Forward Pickup/Reverse Delivery Operation

Duplex read operation (when two document sheets are placed)

74
 2. Technology

Document

Start of reading of front side

of first document sheet

Pickup and formation of loop End of reading of

of first document sheet first document sheet

Position to start of Stop after feeing the first

reading of first document sheet document sheet to reversal
position

To next

75
 2. Technology

Removal of registration loop of Stop after feeding the first

reverse side of the first document document sheet to reversal
sheet/Re-pickup/ position
Release of
the Lower delivery reversal roller

Position to start reading of Removal of idle registration

reverse side at loop at the first document sheet/
the first document sheet Re-pickup/Release of
the Lower delivery reversal roller

Idle feed of first document

Completion of reading of
sheet
reverse side at the first document
sheet/Pressurization of
the Lower delivery reversal roller To next

76
 2. Technology

Start of separation at End of reading of front side of

the seconddocument sheet/ second document sheet
Pressurization of
the Lower delivery reversal roller

Start of reading of top side of Stop after feeding

second document sheet the second document sheet
to reversal position

Delivery of first document sheet Removal of registration loop of

reverse side at the second document
sheet/Re-pickup/Release of
the Lower delivery reversal roller

To next

77
 2. Technology

Start of reading of reverse Removal of idle registration

side of second document sheet loop at the second document sheet/
Re-pickup/Release of
the Lower delivery reversal roller

End of reading of reverse

Delivery of second document sheet/
side of second document sheet
Pressurization at
the Lower delivery reversal roller

Stop after feeding the second Completion of delivery of

document sheet to reversal position second document sheet/end of job

■ Document Pickup/Feed
● Basic Operation
After pressing the start key with a document placed on the Document supply tray, a document is picked up in the
following procedure.

Pickup Operation
The Pickup motor (M1) drives to lower the Pickup roller assembly through the Pickup clutch (CL1) and then the Pickup roller rotates
to feed a document.
The lock of the stopper is released by linking the Pickup roller assembly. The Separation roller is used to improve the separation
performance while feeding a document.

M1 M1
Pickup roller
Pickup roller
CL1 Document CL1

ศ㞳࣮࣮ࣟࣛ
Stopper
ศ㞳࣮࣮ࣟࣛ
Separation roller

Formation of loop
During Pickup Operation, the Lower registration roller is stopped rotating while moving a document against the Upper/Lower
registration rollers and then form a loop. Thus it prevents a document from skewing.

78
 2. Technology

Upper/Lower registration roller

Loop

Feed
The Pickup motor (M1) drives the Lower registration roller through the Registration clutch (CL2). Thus a document is fed.
A document is fed to the read wait point when the Read motor (M2) drives the Lead roller 1 (upper).

M2

CL2 M1

Read roller 1
(Upper)

Reading start point Lower registration roller

Stream reading
The stream reading starts when the leading edge of a document reaches the reading point and the read start signal is received
from the host machine.
"Stream reading" is a scan function which a document is scanned while feeding along the Document glass. The Scanner which
is fixed under the Document glass reads the image.
A document is fed by the Lead roller 1 (upper) and the Platen roller driven by the Read motor (M2). The read image is stored in
the memory of the host machine.

M2

Platen roller
Document glass Scanner

● Pickup Roller Assembly and Separation Roller

The Pickup roller assembly consists of the Pickup roller and the Feed roller.
When the start key is pressed or a document pickup signal is input, the Pickup motor (M1) drives to lower the Pickup roller
assembly through the Pickup clutch (CL1) and then the Pickup roller and the Feed roller rotates to feed a document to the
Registration roller.
The Pickup roller assembly is equipped with stoppers to prevent that a document is inserted deeper than appropriate position.
The Separation roller is used to improve the separation performance while picking up a document.

79
 2. Technology

Stopper
Pickup motor(M1)
Pickup roller

Document
Pickup clutch(CL1)
Stopper
Feed roller

Separation roller

■ Document Reversing
● Basic Operation
There are two types of document reversal operation: one that is performed from the top to the reverse side of the document and
the other that is performed from the reverse side to the top of the document.
Since the basic operation methods are identical, only the reversal operation performed from the reverse side to the top is
discussed below.

Top side pickup

The Read motor (M2) drives the Lead roller 1 (upper) and the Platen roller to scan the surface of a document on stream reading.
After completion of scanning, Read motor (M2) drives the Lead roller 2 (upper) and the Upper delivery reversal roller to feed a
document to the reverse point.

M2 M2 Upper delivery reversal roller

Read roller 1 Read roller 2(Upper)

(Upper) Platen roller

Reversal/Feed 1
After the trailing edge of a fed document passes the Delivery reversal sensor (SR3), the Read motor (M2) stops.
Thus a document stops at the reverse point. The Read motor (M2) drives in reverse direction to feed a document to the Registration
roller and then it stops. After that, the Release solenoid (SL1) turns on to release the Lower delivery reversal roller.

M2 M2

SL1 SL1
Delivery reversal sensor(SR3)

Reversal/Feed 2
The Pickup motor (M1) drives the Lower registration roller through the Registration clutch (CL2) to feed a document to the Read
wait point.
Thus, the document is reversed. After a document is picked up again, turn OFF the Release solenoid (SL1) to pressurize
at the same time that reverse side reading is complete. After that, each operation is performed such as re-reverse, feeding
and delivering.

80
 2. Technology

M2

Read roller 1 CL2 M1 Lower registration roller Upper delivery

M2
(Upper) reversal roller

SL1 SL1
Reading start point

■ Document Delivery
A document is delivered by the Lead roller 2 (upper) and the Upper delivery reversal roller driven by the Read motor (M2).

M2 M2
Upper delivery reversal roller

SL1 SL1
Read roller 2 (Upper)

■ Document Detection
● Outline
This machine detects a document using either of the two methods depending on the print mode.
• Normal print mode (other than mixed size print mode and banner paper mode)
• Mixed size print mode and banner paper mode

Normal print mode

Function Description Symbol

Document presence/absence detection Detects document existence on the Document sup- Document set sensor(SR5)
ply tray.
Initial document size ab- Length Detects document length on the Document sup- Document length sensor 1/2
sence detection ply tray. (SR7/SR8)
Width Detects the document width on the Document sup- Document width sensor1/2/3
ply tray. (SR13/SR14/SR15)

Mixed size print mode and banner paper mode

Function Description Symbol

Document presence/absence detection Detects document existence on the Document sup- Document set sensor (SR5)
ply tray.
Mixed width document size de- Length Document length is detected while feeding. Registration sensor (SR1)
tection Read sensor (SR2)
Width Detects the maximum document width on the Document width sensor1/2/3
Document supply tray. (SR13/SR14/SR15)
Document width is detected while feeding. Different width sensor 1/2/3/4
(SR9/SR10/SR11/SR12)

● Initial Document Size Detection

Initial document size is detected when a document is placed on the Document supply tray. The Document length sensor 1/2
(SR7/SR8) and the Document width sensor 1/2/3 (SR13/SR14/SR15) are used for the detection.
The light shading detects document length whose sensor is the Document length sensor 1/2 (SR7/SR8).

81
 2. Technology

Document width is detected by the Document width sensor 1/2/3 (SR13/SR14/SR15) which performs by light prevention plate
connected with the Slide guide adjustment.
Document sizes are determined by combination of ON/OFF states of these sensors.
The Document length sensor 1 (SR7) is a Reflection Sensor which is available to detect the length of a document in case that the
curled paper is placed on the document pickup tray.

SR8
SR14

SR15

SR7

SR13

The following table shows the relationship among length detection sensor signals, document widths, and initial document sizes.

Document width detection Document length detec- Detected size

tion
Width (mm) Document Document Document Document Document AB INCH AB/INCH AB/K
width sensor width sensor width sensor length sensor length sen-
1 (SR13) 2 Document 3 (SR15) 1 (SR7) sor 2 (SR8)
(SR14)
143.9 or less OFF OFF OFF ON ON - - STMTR A5R
OFF ON - - STMTR A5R
ON OFF - - STMTR A5R
OFF OFF - STMTR STMTR A5R
More than OFF ON ON ON ON - - A5R A5R
143.9 and OFF ON - - A5R A5R
165.0 or less
ON OFF - - A5R A5R
OFF OFF A5R - A5R A5R
More than OFF OFF ON ON ON - - B5R B5R
165.0 and OFF ON - - B5R B5R
196.0 or less
ON OFF B5R - B5R B5R
OFF OFF B6 - B6 B6
More than ON OFF ON ON ON - - A4R A4R
196.0 and OFF ON - - A4R A4R
213.9 or less
ON OFF A4R - A4R A4R
OFF OFF A5 - A5 A5
More than ON ON ON ON ON - LGL LGL A4R
213.9 and OFF ON - - LGL A4R
236.5 or less
ON OFF - LTRR LTRR A4R
OFF OFF - STMT STMT A5
More than ON OFF OFF ON ON B4 - B4 B4
236.5 and OFF ON - - B4 B4
263.5 or less
ON OFF - - B4 B4

82
 2. Technology

Document width detection Document length detec- Detected size

tion
More than ON OFF OFF OFF OFF B5 - B5 B5
236.5 and
263.5 or less
More than ON ON OFF ON ON - 11 × 17 11 × 17 K8
263.5 and OFF ON - 11 × 17 11 × 17 K8
288.2 or less
ON OFF - 11 × 17 11 × 17 K8
OFF OFF - LTR LTR K16
More than OFF ON OFF ON ON A3 11 × 17 A3 A3
288.2 OFF ON - 11 × 17 A3 A3
ON OFF - 11 × 17 A3 A3
OFF OFF A4 LTR A4 A4

● Mixed width document size detection

In case that mixed width and length documents are set, 3 types of paper detections such as maximum width, other than maximum
width and length are performed.
The maximum width is detected by the Document width sensor 1/2/3(SR13/SR14/SR15) in the same way of initial document
size detection.
Width other than maximum width is detected by the Different width sensor 1/2/3/4 (SR9/SR10/SR11/SR12).
Document length is detected by ON state on the Read sensor (SR2) and OFF state on the Registration sensor (SR1). Each
document size is determined by the combination of the ON/OFF states on these sensors.

SR14

SR15

SR12
SR11
SR10
SR9 SR13

SR2

SR1

Same series mixed width document combination

Same series of size (AB configuration) Same series of size (Inch configuration)
A4 B5 A5 B6 LTR LGL LTRR STMT
A3 A - - - - - - -
B4 - A - - - - - -
A4R - - A - - - - -
B5R - - - A - - - -
11 × 17 - - - - A - - -
LGL - - - - - - A A
LTRR - - - - - A - A
STMT - - - - - A A -

83
 2. Technology

Different series mixed width document combination

AB configuration Mixed

Different series of size

B4 B5 A4R A5 B5R B6 A5R
Maximum size Width (mm) 257 210 182 148.5
A3 297.0 A B C C C C -
A4 B A C C C C -
B4 257.0 - - A B C C C
B5 - - B A C C C
A4R 210.0 - - - - B B C
A5 - - - - B A C
B5R 182.0 - - - - - - C
B6 - - - - - - C

Inch configuration Mixed

Different series of size

LGL LTRR STMT STMTR
Maximum size Width (mm) 215.9 139.7
11 × 17 279.0 A B B -
LTR A B A C
LGL 215.9 - - - C
LTRR - - - C
STMT - - - C

Item Contents
A Combination assured
B Not assured. (Possible to feed)
C Not assured. (Possible to have original jam)
- Out of Specifications

■ Detecting Jams
This machine detects document jams using the sensors shown below.
Document jam check timing is controlled by the host machine which determines jam occurrence by document existence on the
specific sensors.
Jam codes can be checked by outputting a jam error log report in the service mode of the host machine.

SR5

SR6

SR2

SR3
SR1

84
 2. Technology

ACC ID JAM Code JAM Type Name Symbol

01 0003 DELAY Registration sensor SR1
01 0043 DELAY Registration sensor SR1
01 0004 STNRY Registration sensor SR1
01 0044 STNRY Registration sensor SR1
01 0009 DELAY Read sensor SR2
01 0049 DELAY Read sensor SR2
01 0010 STNRY Read sensor SR2
01 0050 STNRY Read sensor SR2
01 0013 DELAY Delivery reversal sensor SR3
01 0053 DELAY Delivery reversal sensor SR3
01 0014 STNRY Delivery reversal sensor SR3
01 0054 STNRY Delivery reversal sensor SR3
01 0071 Sequence - -
01 0090 DADF OP Copyboard cover open/closed sensor 1 PS_N1*
(At copy mode, select the Pickup Cas-
sette)
01 0091 DADF OP Copyboard cover open/closed sensor 1 PS_N1*
(other than those above)
01 0092 COVER OP Cover open/closed sensor SR6
01 0093 COVER OP Cover open/closed sensor SR6
01 0095 Paper pickup error Registration sensor SR1/SR5
Document set sensor
01 0096 Limited function*2 - -
01 00A1 Power-on Registration sensor SR1
01 00A2 Power-on Read sensor SR2
01 00A3 Power-on Delivery reversal sensor SR3

*1: The sensor of the Reader of the host machine.

*2: Limited functions jam is a jam for preventing an original to be left inside the machine when a problem which requires the
machine moves to limited functions mode occurs. If an error occurs for some reasons, a jam message is displayed to make the
user to perform jam removal. The troubleshooting from this jam cord is not possible.

■ Power Supply
The power supply lines are shown below. This machine power is supplied from the host machine.

24V 24V ࣭Motor

࣭Solenoid
J9

࣭Clutch
Host machine
5V 5V
J5

࣭Sensor
ADF driver PCB

■ Stamp Operation (If equipped with the Stamp Unit)

When the stamp function is selected on the FAX mode or scan mode, a document is stamped indicating that a document is already
read or sent.
The Stamp solenoid (SL2) drives the Stamper. The Stamp solenoid (SL2) is driven by the signal from the ADF driver PCB (PCB1).

85
 2. Technology

Document

Stamper

Stamp solenoid

Stamp solenoid
drive signal
ADF driver PCB

■ Original Output Indicator

After completion of reading, the LED at the Document delivery LED PCB (PCB5) lights ON to prevent from leaving a document.
The LED keeps lighting for 10 seconds and then turns OFF.

PCB5

Related service mode

• ON/OFF of DADF delivery LED:
Connecting to iR-ADV devices
COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM > DFEJCLED
Connecting to iR devices
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > DFEJCLED

86
 2. Technology

Main Controller

Overview
■ Configuration/Function

Item Function
Main Controller PCB System Control/Memory Control/Printer Output Image Processing Control,Reader Image Input
Processing, Card Reader Connection I/F, Fax ImageProcessing, USB Extension HUB Connection
I/F, RTC
RAM Temporarily storage of image data:Capacity of 2 GB (for controller control) + 1 GB (for image process-
ing)
USB port USB2.0 Device I/F, USB3.0 Host I/F
Hard disk 2.5-inch SATA I/F Standard: 250 GB (250 GB usable area), address list,security information (pass-
word, certificate), image data, preferences
Flash PCB Storage of system software: 2 GB
TPM PCB Generation and storage of the encryption key.
(Only when Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings is"On". Default: Off)

87
 2. Technology

■ Main Controller PCB

J6005
J15 J6001

J13

J18 J8000
J6003
J9
J8001
J6004
J5

J3
J11 J7000
J7

J1

J21 J20 J6000

No. Functions and specifications No. Functions and specifications

J1 TPM PCB J21 Copy Control Interface Kit I/F
J3 USB I/F (Device) J6000 -
J5 USB I/F (Host) J6001 Image Data Analyzer PCB
J7 LAN I/F J6003 / Standard hard disk
J9 - J6004
J11 Flash PCB J6005 Counter Memory PCB
J13 Voice-Operation J7000 Riser PCB
Voice-Guidance
J15 Controller Fan J8000 / Hard disk for mirroring
J18 - J8001
J20 Serial Interface Kit J8002 -
Copy Card Reader

88
 2. Technology

■ Riser PCB

J7201
J4021

J4031

J4022

J7202 J4023

J4202
J4013

J4012

J4000 J4011

J9001 J4201

J4002

J4003

No. Functions and specifications No. Functions and specifications

J4000 Main Controller PCB J4023 IC Card Reader (upper port)/USB flash drive for users
(lower port)
J4002 AC Driver PCB J4031 Reader Controller PCB
J4003 SOFT-ID PCB J4201 Main Switch
J4011 /4012 Fax (1-Line) J4202 WIFI PCB
J4013 Fax (2nd/3rd/4th Line) J7201 Laser Driver PCB
J4021/J4022 Control Panel I/F J7202 DC Controller PCB
J9001 AC Driver PCB

89
 2. Technology

Startup Sequence
Power Supply Switch ON Power Supply
Switch ON

Initializing process of hardware

Starting BIOS
[Main Controller PCB]

Starting IPL (boot program)

and OS system software
[Flash PCB]

Starting application
[Hard disk]

Standby
screen display
Standby screen display
Screen sequence and internal processing sequence

NOTE:
To achieve faster startup, the progress bar and the active PCB are not synchronized.
For this reason, the progress bar cannot be utilized for troubleshooting.
For information about troubleshooting, refer to "Related error codes (major error codes)" shown below.

Related error codes (major error codes):

• E602-0001: HDD detection error
• E614-0001: Flash PCB detection error
• E614-0002: Error in file system on the Flash PCB
• E614-4001: Error in file system on the Flash PCB
• E614-4002: Error in file system on the Flash PCB
• E748-2010: Flash PCB error / HDD error

NOTE:
When the following errors occur, the system of the host machine has not been started normally. Therefore the error code is not
recorded in the log.
E602-XX01, E614-XX01, E748-2010

Shutdown Sequence
Before shutting down the power supply, it is necessary to perform the HDD completion process (Purpose: to prevent damage on
the HDD) and execute the fixing disengagement operation.This sequential process is called “shutdown sequence”.
With this machine, the Main Controller PCB detects turning OFF the Main Power Supply Switch, and the shutdown sequence is
started and executed automatically.
Note that the maximum shutdown time with this equipment is 90 seconds. (If the maximum of 90 seconds has elapsed, the power
supply is turned OFF by the hard timer circuit on the Relay PCB.)

90
 2. Technology

NOTE:
If the power supply is stopped without shutting down the machine, or if the processing to completely delete the hard disk (deletion
of the primary file) fails to be completed within the shutdown time (max. 90 sec.), data consistency is checked at startup, during
which the progress bar is displayed.

Motion Sensor
Function
Automatic recovery from sleep mode
• The machine automatically recovers from sleep mode by staying in the designated area for more than a certain period of time.
The time spent in the area varies based on the setting of sensitivity (4 levels).
• The sensor determines whether a person approaches the above mentioned area is a user. If a person approaches the
machine from the front side, it starts the operation to recover from sleep mode early. If a person approaches the machine from
the side, the sensor judges whether he/she is just a passer to prevent recovery by mistake.

CAUTION:
Recovery time depends on the time for recovery from sleep mode of the host machine. The Motion Sensor outputs the trigger
for recovery from sleep mode. Operation of the Motion Sensor is the same for recovery from Deep Sleep and from Sleep
1, but time for recovery differs depending on the recovery process of the host machine.

The machine is not recovered by a passer.

• Reduce unnecessary power consumption
• The machine may recover from sleep mode if walking speed is slow. However, if no operation is performed for a certain period
of time, it moves to sleep mode again.

CAUTION:
Since the detection is performed by outputting a certain frequency from the output part and receiving the reflection wave by
the reception part; thus, do not block the sensor area.

Settings / Registration
Preferences > Timer / Energy Settings > Use Motion Sensor
In Settings / Registration, you can disable the sensor and select the sensor sensitivity.

CAUTION:
• The motion sensor detects people or objects that approach the sensor on the front side of the machine. Operation
may become unstable if objects are left near the sensor or the machine is placed in a location where there is heavy
human traffic.
• The motion sensor uses ultrasonic waves, and thus may encounter problems due to other sources of ultrasonic waves
in its environment.
• If you feel that something is wrong with the motion sensor, change the sensitivity setting or turn the motion sensor off
in [Settings / Registration] > [Preferences] > [Timer/Energy Settings] > [Use Motion Sensor] > [Sensor Sensitivity].

91
 2. Technology

Laser Exposure System

Overview
■ Specifications
Item Description
Wave length 51 ppm machine : 787 to 800nm
45/35 ppm machine : 787 to 800nm
25 ppm machine : 785nm to 800nm
Laser type Infrared laser (invisible)
Laser output 51 ppm machine : 10mW
45/35 ppm machine : 10mW
25 ppm machine : 5mW
Number of laser beams 51 ppm machine : 4 beams/lines
45/35 ppm machine : 4 beams/lines
25 ppm machine : 2 beams/lines
Resolution 1200dpi
Motor type Brushless motor
Motor revolutions 51 ppm machine : approx 27000 rpm
45/35 ppm machine : approx 16000 rpm
25 ppm machine : approx 32000 rpm
Number of Scanner Mirror facets 6 facets (40 mm dia.)

■ Main Configuration Parts

Laser Unit BD mirror

Polygon mirror BD PCB

Name Function
Laser Unit Emits laser
Polygon mirror Scans the laser light in the main scanning direction
BD mirror Reflects the laser light in the BD PCB direction
BD PCB Generates the BD signa

■ Control System Configuration

Controls for the laser exposure system are mainly performed by the DC controller PCB.

92
 2. Technology

Laser Driver PCB

J602
J744

J601

Polygon Motor Control Signal

Laser Control Signal

BD Signal
J745 BD PCB

Polygon Motor PCB

J324
DC Controller PCB
Image Signal

Riser PCB

J7201

Basic Sequence
Initial rotation (INTR):
After the control panel key is ON, the machine starts the polygon motor and rotates the laser polygon motor until it reaches the
number of target rotation while keepingall laser OFF.
Once it reaches the target, the machine enters stand-by mode(FG control).
If pressing the start key before the control panel key is ON, standby time gets shorter after the polygon motor reaches the target.
Print (PRINT):
When copy start key is ON, the machine drives A laser.
After BD PCB detects A laser, the machine performs the APC (laser intensity) control of each laser.
Oncethe BD signal reaches the specified cycle, the machine is ready to print.
Image data is output from the main controller based on the synchronous signal and laser isemitted corresponding to it.
But 25 ppm machine does not control the C,D laser for 2 beam (A, B laser only).
<In the case of A4, 1 sheet>

93
 2. Technology

Control panel key ON

(Start key ON 1 ) Start key ON

STBY INTR PRINT STBY

Waiting in FG control
Speed up BD control Speed down
Polygon motor

PVREQ signal

Laser Light off Light off Light off

Light on

: BD detection/APC control
: AP control Image per 1 line

BD 㻖㻌1 BD 㻖㻌1

Laser A Laser A

Laser B Laser B

Laser C Laser C

Laser D Laser D

㻖1: BD signal is generated based on A laser light. Only A laser light reaches BD sensor
on BD PCB and B/C/D laser does not reach.

Controlling the Laser Activation Timing

■ Laser ON/OFF Control
Laser ON/OFF control is dependent on the combination of the laser control signal (A/B laser: CNT0-0/0-1/0-2, C/D laser:
CNT1-0/1-1/1-2) from the DC Controller PCB.

NOTE:
25 ppm machine does not control the C,D laser for 2 beam.

<A laser/B laser>

Laser control signal Laser status

CNT0-0 CNT0-1 CNT0-2
1 1 1 Image data output.
0 1 1 Forced output of the A laser
1 0 1 Forced output of the B laser.
0 0 1 Forced output of the A/B Laser
1 1 0 Output compulsion OFF.
0 1 0 A Laser (APC control)
1 0 0 B Laser (APC control)
0 0 0 Electric discharge: APC reset

<C laser/D laser>

Laser control signal Laser status

CNT1-0 CNT1-1 CNT1-2
1 1 1 Image data output.
0 1 1 Forced output of the C laser.
1 0 1 Forced output of the D laser.
0 0 1 Forced output of the C/D laser.
1 1 0 Output compulsion OFF
0 1 0 C Laser (APC control)OFF
1 0 0 D Laser (APC control)OFF
0 0 0 Electric discharge: APC reset

94
 2. Technology

CTRL_0-2
CTRL_0-1
CTRL_0-0
CTRL_1-0
CTRL_1-1
CTRL_1-2
J324

DC Controller PCB

■ Main Scanning Synchronous Control

Main scanning synchronous control is operated at synchronous PCB based on BD synchronous signal.
Based on BD signal that is formed from A laser light detected by BD PCB, BD synchronous signal for each laser is formed inside
image PCB.
Image data written in the line memory is read out by the readable signal (RE_A, RE_B, RE_ C, RE_D) according to the 4 phase
differences formed inside the delayPCB based on the BD synchronous signal (BD_SYNCH) and is sent to the laser driver.
Because iR4225 is a 2 beam, the reading possibility signal becomes RE_C and RE_D.

NOTE:
Regarding BD signal formation
Not B laser but A laser only reaches BD sensor on BD PCB.
BD signal is formed based on A laser light.

[6]
BD signal

J8143 J8142

[1]
BD_SYNCH

RE_A
[2]
[3]

RE_B
[2]
[3]
[4]
RE_C
[2]
[3]

RE_D
[2]
[3]
[5]
Main Controller PCB2

95
 2. Technology

No Name No Name
[1] Synchronous PCB [4] VDO
[2] Delay PCB [5] VDO signal process unit
[3] Line memory [6] Laser driver PCB
BD_SYNCH BD synchronous signal RE_A/B/C/D Readable signal

Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light

■ APC Control
The machine monitors the laser light that is emitted to the built-in photo diode of laser diode and adjusts the laser to
appropriate intensity.

Controlling the Polygon Motor

From when the polygon motor starts and the polygon motor reaches the number of target rotation to before image formation starts,
the machine controlsthe rotation speed by referring to the polygon motor rotation speed signal (FG signal).
During image formation, it controls the polygon motor rotation speed based on BD signal.
Polygon motor rotation speed is controlled by speed-up signal (ACC signal) and speed-down signal (DEC signal).
DEC
ACC

FG

J208

DC Controller PCB

Related Error Code

• E110-0001: The Polygon Motor (M11) speed lock signal does not indicate a locked state a specific period of time after the
Polygon Motor (M11) has been started.
• E110-0002: The speed lock signal indicates a deviation 10 times in sequence at intervals of 100 msec after the signal has
indicated a locked state.
• E110-0003: The Polygon Motor (M11) speed lock signal does not indicate a locked state for 6.5 sec. after a switchover is made
from low to normal speed or for 8 sec. after a switchover is made from normal to low speed.

Controlling the Laser Shutter

When a drum unit was drawn, laser shutter will be closed by laser shutter link that works in conjunction with the drum unit and the
laser light is blocked.
Also, when the front door or right door open is detected, polygon motor and the laser emission will be turned OFF.

96
 2. Technology

Laser shutter

Laser shutter link

DURAM UNIT IN DRUM UNIT OUT

Laser unit Laser shutter Laser unit Laser shutter

Laser shutter link Laser shutter link

97
 2. Technology

Image Formation System

Overview
■ Features
• High image quality is supported.
Charge control and the parts for image formation process are optimized.
• High durability drum
E drum is adopted.

Primary Charging Roller

Photosensitive Drum

Transfer Roller

Developing Cylinder

■ Specifications
Item Specifications/Mechanism/Method
Photosensi- Material OPC drum (E-drum)
tive Drum diameter Φ30
drum
Cleaning method Cleaning blade
Process speed At cassette pickup
• 51 ppm machine : 230 mm/sec
• 45/35 ppm machine : 230 mm/sec
• 25 ppm machine : 137 mm/sec
At manual feeder pickup
• 51 ppm machine : 137 mm/sec
• 45/35/25 ppm machine : 137 mm/sec
Primary Charging method Primary charging roller
charging Roller diameter φ14
Charging method Brush roller (φ10)
Developing Developing method Dry one-component jumping development
Developing cylinder di- φ20
ameter
Toner Magnetic negative toner
Toner level detection Toner detection by toner level sensor (inside Toner Feed path and developing unit)
Transfer Transfer method Transfer roller
Roller diameter φ16
Charging method Cleaning bias application
Separation Separation method Static separation (Static eliminator) + Curvature separation
Waste toner Collected into waste toner container
Waste toner container capacity: approx. 750g

98
 2. Technology

■ Major Components of Image Formation System

Toner Container

Brush Roller

Primary Charging Roller

Waste Toner Feed Screw

Cleaning Blade

Photosensitive Drum

Drum Unit

Toner Feed Screw Transfer Roller

Toner Feed Path
Developing Assembly Developing Cylinder
Toner Feed Screw

Name Function
Toner cartridge Toner cartridge filled with the toner for supply
Drum unit Unit consisting of the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, etc.
Brush roller Rotates in connection with the primary charging roller to clean its surface.
Primary charging roller Rotates in connection with the photosensitive drum to cause it negatively charged.
Cleaning blade Scrapes off the residual toner on the photosensitive drum.
Waste toner feed screw Feeds the toner scraped off by the cleaning blade to the waste toner container.
Photosensitive drum Forms images on the surface of the photosensitive drum.
Transfer roller Applies positive charge to the back of a paper to cause the toner to be transferred to it.
Developing cylinder Transfers the toner in the developing unit to the photosensitive drum.
Developing assembly Unit consisting of the developing cylinder, developing blade, etc.
Toner feed screw(Inside developing unit) Feeds the toner supplied from the toner feed distance into the developing unit.
Toner feed screw(Inside toner feed distance) Feeds the toner supplied from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
Toner feed path A path to feed toner supplied from the Toner Container to the Developing Assembly

■ Image Formation Process

The image formation system of the machine mainly consists of the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, developing
cylinder, transfer charging roller, static eliminator, and cleaning blade. The image formation process around the drum unit contains
the six blocks.

99
 2. Technology

Primary charging roller

Drum cleaning block
Cleaning Blade

Photosensitive drum

Paper
Primary
charging block

Separation block

Static eliminator
Laser exposure
block

Developing block
Transfer charging roller
Transfer block

Developing cylinder

Image Formation Process Description

Primary charging block Charges the surface of the photosensitive drum to a uniform negative potential.
Laser exposure block Exposes laser beam on the surface of the drum for charge neutralization to form the latent
image formation.
Developing block Causes the negatively-charged toner on the developingcylinder to adhere to the latent image
formation on the surface of the photosensitive drum to form a visible image.
Transfer block Applies positive charge to the back of a paper to transfer the toner on the drum to the paper.
Separation block Separates a paper from the photosensitive drum with its elastic force and at the same time applies
negative charge to the back of paper to facilitate paper separation.
Drum cleaning block Scrapes off the residual toner on the surface of the drum using the cleaning blade and feeds it to the
waste toner container.

Image Stabilization Control

At times, changes in the environment or wear on the machine can cause its image output to become unstable. To obtain a stable
image, the machine uses the following control mechanisms.

■ PASCAL Control
This control stabilizes gradation density characteristics on the image.
This control is executed when the following is selected in user mode: Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust
Patch pattern on the test print is scanned by the Reader to create a gradation table.

100
 2. Technology

Main controller
Reader controller PCB

PASCAL control

Primary charging roller

Photosensitive drum

Paper

Transfer roller

Developing assembly

Execution timing
During execution of Full Adjust: User mode > Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto
Adjust Gradation

Drum Unit
The drum unit mainly consists of the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, brush roller, cleaning blade, and waste toner
feed screw, and is driven by the main motor (M1).
Cleaning blade in contact with the photosensitive drum scrapes off the residual toner on its surface without being transferred to
a paper. The residual toner scraped off by the cleaning blade is fed from the toner ejection part into the waste toner container by
the waste toner feed screw. The primary charging roller is cleaned by the brush roller in contact with it.

Waste toner feed screw

Cleaning Blade

Brush roller
Toner ejection part

M1
Photosensitive drum

[1]
Primary charging roller

DC Controller PCB

No. Name No. Name

M1 Main motor [1] Main motor drive signal

101
 2. Technology

■ Primary Charging Bias Control

The machine is directly charged by the charging roller. DC bias and AC bias that stabilized the charge is applied to the primary
charging roller.

Primary charging roller

Photosensitive drum

HVT PCB

Environment sensor

[2] [1]

Primary AC bias Primary DC bias

control circuit control circuit
DC Controller PCB

No. Name No. Name

[1] Primary charging bias control signal [2] Environment sensor detection signal

■ Constant voltage control of DC bias and AC bias

The primary AC bias control circuits on the DC controller PCB control the DC bias and AC bias applied to the primary charging
roller to keep their voltage at the fixed level.
The primary AC bias control circuits control constant voltage control and current quantity of electric discharge control of the AC
bias by the environment.
* The current quantity of electric discharge control minimizes charged AC bias to lengthen drum life. Electric discharge product
on the drum decreases by decreasing the primary AC bias. Therefore, the image smear by fusion with the water decrease.

■ DC/AC bias switch control

The DC/AC bias output varies according to the environment detected by the environment sensor (S16).

■ Drum Unit Detection (New/Old)

This machine reads information recorded in the Drum Unit Memory and detects whether the drum is new or old based on the
information, when the power is turned on.
When a new drum is detected, it is judged that the Drum Unit has been replaced.

Operation of the host machine

1. Check whether Drum Unit Memory is present in each drum unit.

102
 2. Technology

2. If there is Drum Unit Memory, judge whether the Drum Unit is new or old (has been replaced or not).

UN2
DC Controller PCB

Drum Unit New/Old Sensor

Information specific to the drum

Drum Unit Memory

Related Alarm Codes

• Drum Unit (Bk) replacement completion alarm: 43-0073
• Drum memory detection error (Bk): 09-0013

Developing Assembly
The developing assembly mainly consists of the developing cylinder, developing blade, toner agitation plate, and toner feed screw,
and driven by the main motor (M1) and developing cylinder clutch (CL1).
The toner supplied from the toner cartridge is fed into the developing assembly by the toner feed screw and toner agitation plate.
The toner presence/absence in the developing assembly is detected by the developing assembly toner sensor (S25) which is a
magnetic permeability sensor.

103
 2. Technology

Toner feed screw

Toner agitation plate

Developing Blade

S25
Developing cylinder

CL 3

M1

[3] [2] [1]

DC Controller PCB

No. Name No. Name

S25 Developing assembly toner sensor [1] Developing cylinder clutch drive signal
CL1 Developing cylinder clutch [2] Main motor drive signal
M1 Main motor [3] Developing assembly toner sensor detection signal

■ Developing Bias Control

The DC bias and AC bias are applied to the developing cylinder.

Photosensitive drum

Density Setting

Main Controller PCB

Environment sensor

HVT PCB Developing cylinder

[3] [2] [1]

Developing AC bias Developing DC bias

control circuit control circuit
DC Controller PCB

No. Name No. Name

[1] Developing bias control signal [3] Density setting signal
[2] Environment sensor detection signal

104
 2. Technology

■ Constant voltage control of DC bias and AC bias

The DC bias and AC bias control circuits on the DC controller PCB control the DC bias and AC bias applied to the developing
cylinder to keep their voltage at the fixed level.

■ Toner Supply Shutter Opening/Closing Mechanism

There are shutters at the supply mouths of the toner supply unit to prevent toner scattering.
The shutter is opened/closed in conjunction with push-in and pull-out of the developing assembly.

Shutter

Toner supply unit

Toner supply unit Shutter

Toner

Toner cartridge
■ Overview
Toner cartridge is filled with toner and supplies to the developing assembly.

105
 2. Technology

The toner in the toner cartridge is fed to the toner feed path and then to the developing assembly by the toner feed screw. The
toner presence/absence in the toner feed path is detected by the toner feed level detection sensor (S51) which is a magnetic
permeability sensor.

If the developing assembly toner level sensor(S25) detects the absence of the toner in the developing assembly, the toner feed
motor(M21) drives to rotate the toner feed screw to feed toner in the toner feed path to the developing assembly. Also, if the toner
feed level detection sensor (S51) detects the absence of the toner in the toner feed path, the bottle motor (M17) drives to rotate
the toner cartridge to feed the toner in the Toner cartridge to the toner feed path.

If the toner feed level detection sensor (S51) keeps detecting the absence of the toner for more than the specified period of time,
no toner in the toner cartridge is assumed and the message to replace the Toner cartridge will be displayed. Also, if the developing
assembly toner level sensor(S25) keeps detecting the absence of the toner for more than the specified period of time, no toner
in the developing assembly is assumed and a No Toner error message will be displayed.

Toner Feed
Screw
Toner Feed Path

Route of toner supply

Toner Feed
Motor
Toner Cartridge
M21

Toner Feed Level

S51
Detection Sensor

Toner Feed Level Detection Sensor detection signal

S25
Developing Assembly Toner Feed Motor drive signal
Toner Level Sensor Toner Feed
Screw
Level Sensor detection signal

Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly Toner

Developing Clutch
CL1

M17 Bottle Motor M1 Main Motor

Bottle motor Main motor Developing Clutch

drive signal drive signal drive signal

DC Controller PCB

■ Bottle State Detection

Purpose: To detect the state of the Toner Container

Detection timing
• At power-on
• When the Toner Bottle Exchange Door is closed
• At recovery from sleep mode
Bottle ROM PCB(UN76) detects the state of the bottle from the Toner Container memory [1].

106
 2. Technology

UN75

[1]

Screen display
A message shown below is displayed according to the condition detected from the memory.

Message Condition
---- The correct Toner Container is loaded.
Cartridge with wrong item no. may be inserted. The Toner Container with wrong item no. is inserted.
Toner cartridge may be malfunctioning. The Toner Cartridge which may be malfunctioning is inserted.

Related Alarm Codes

• 10-0094 : Toner memory detection error

Related Service Mode

• Display of each color Toner Container ID:
COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > TNRB-IDK
• Output of the Toner Container ID report:
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > TNRB-PRT

107
 2. Technology

■ Toner Level Detection

Toner Container

Toner Feed Path

S51

S25 Developing
Assembly

Toner Level Detection outputs alarms and messages with "Bottle Remaining Toner Low", "Bottle Empty", or "Output Stop"
depending on the detection result.

Condition Bottle Remaining Bottle Empty Output Stop Bottle Replacement

Toner Low Completion
Toner Sta-
tus

S51 S51 S51 S51

S25 S25 S25 S25

Toner cartridge: Low Toner cartridge: 0 % Toner cartridge: 0 % Toner cartridge: 0 %

Toner feed path: 100 % Toner feed path: 100 % Toner feed path: 100 % Toner feed path: 100 %
Developing unit: 100 % Developing unit: 100 % Developing unit: 100 % Developing unit: 100 %
Alam Code Toner car- Toner Low Toner Bottle empty alarm None Toner Bottle replacement noti-
tridge prior (Black) fication alarm
delivery alarm*3
alarm
10-0020 10-0001 10-0404 10-0100 (00000071)
10-0100 (00000181)
Message None Black toner is Replace the toner cartridge. Replace the toner cartridge. None
(machine low.
operation) Replacement
is not yet nee-
ded. *4
Detection The timing The timing When the sensor output re- When the sensor output re- When Toner Bottle replace-
timing varies de- varies de- sult is changed sult is changed ment is completed
pending on pending on the
the service service mode
mode set- setting. *2
ting. *1
Detected to Toner supply Toner supply Toner Feed Level Detection Developing Assembly Toner Bottle Sensor PCB
(location) count count Sensor (S51) Level Sensor (S25)

*1: The detection timing can be changed in the following service modes (setting of the Toner Container prior delivery alarm
notification timing).(0 - 40 % : The default value varies depending on the country.)
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-BK
*2: The detection timing can be changed in the following service modes (setting of the threshold value for displaying the Toner
Container remaining toner warning).(0 - 40 % : The default value varies depending on the country.)
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > T-LW-BK
*3: The message is generated by UGW and displayed on the UGW portal screen. This is not displayed on this machine.
*4: Whether to display the toner replacement preparation message can be changed in the following service mode (setting of the
ON/OFF of toner warning display).
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > TNR-WARN

108
 2. Technology

Related Error Code

• E020-0000: The path between the sub hopper and the developing assembly is clogged with toner.
• E024-0000: The connector of Developing Assembly Toner Level Sensor (S25) is disconnected.
• E024-0001: The Developing Assembly Toner Level Sensor (S25) is disconnected.
• E025-0000: The connector of the Feeding Area Toner Level Sensor (S51) is disconnected.
• E025-0001: Failure of the Bottle Motor (M17)
• E025-0002: Unstable rotation of the Bottle Motor (M17)

Transfer Unit
The transfer unit mainly consists of the static eliminator and transfer roller which rotates in connection with the drum unit.

Static eliminator

Transfer charging roller

■ Transfer Bias/Separation Static Eliminator Bias Control

DC bias is applied to the transfer roller and static eliminator.

Photosensitive drum

Static eliminator

Environment sensor

HVT PCB
Transfer charging roller
[3] [2] [1]

Transfer bias Static eliminator bias

control circuit control circuit
DC Controller PCB

No. Name No. Name

[1] Separation static eliminator bias control signal [3] Environment sensor detection signal
[2] Transfer bias control signal

109
 2. Technology

■ Transfer Bias Constant Current Control

The transfer bias control circuit on the DC controller PCB controls the transfer bias applied to the transfer roller to keep the
constant current.

■ Transfer bias level control

The transfer bias output varies according to the environment, paper type, paper width, and/or source of paper detected by the
environment sensor (S16).

■ Cleaning Bias Control

To return the toner adhered on the transfer roller to the photosensitive drum, negative voltage is applied at the last rotation.

■ Separation Static Eliminator Bias Control

Either of the two types of negative voltage (low bias or high bias) is applied to the static eliminator depending on the print mode
and sequence for reducing electrostatic suction to facilitate separation of paper from the photosensitive drum.

Waste toner container

Residual toner adhered on the photosensitive drum without being transferred to a paper is scraped off by the cleaning blade in
contact with the photosensitive drum, then fed into the waste toner container by the waste toner feed screw.
The waste toer container is supported by a spring. If the waste toner container sinks down lower than specified with the weight of
collected toner, the waste toner full sensor (S17) detects the waste toner container full.

Drum Unit

Waste Toner Container

S17 S17

No. Name
S17 Waste toner full sensor

■ Waste Toner Full Level Detection

Toner level accumulated in the Waste Toner Container is detected.

110
 2. Technology

Detection descrip- Prior delivery alarm/Waste Toner Container prepa- Waste Toner Container full
tion ration warning *1
Message (machine op- Waste toner is near full. (Replacement not yet needed.) Replace the waste toner container. (Host machine
eration) is stopped.)
Detection timing When the Switch is pressed and the total counter value When the Switch is pressed and the total counter
exceeds 50,000 sheets *1 value fails 50,000 sheets *2
When the specified number of sheets have been
printed from the nearly full notification *3
Detected to (location) Waste toner full sensor (S17) Waste toner full sensor (S17)/The number of prints
Alarm Codes 11-0010 11-0001

*1: The Waste Toner Container preparation warning message can be set to be displayed or hidden in the following service mode.
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > WT-WARN
*2: Special full level detection
When attaching a waste toner container that has been used by the other machine, or the counter information is lost for some
reason, it is necessary to notify full level before an alert is given. (The counter shows less than 50,000 although the sensor detects
full level of waste toner) In such a case, it is determined as full level without an alert and the machine cannot continue printing.
Explain the user that there will be no alert when any of the above is executed.
*3: The exact number of printed sheets differs depending on the usage environment and usage situation.
The specified number of sheets differs according to the machine.
• 51 ppm machine: 2,500 sheets
• 45 ppm machine: 2,500 sheets
• 35/25 ppm machine: 2,000 sheets

Related Alarm Codes

• 11-0001: Waste toner alarm
• 11-0010: Near-full state of the Waste Toner Container

■ Detection of Completion of Waste Toner Replacement

The completion of Waste Toner Container replacement is detected by the following timing/conditions.

Item Details
Detection timing When the Waste Toner Sensor PCB (S17) turns ON while "preparation warning" or "full" is detected
Parts counter Automatically cleared * 1

*1 : In the following cases, the parts counter is not automatically cleared and thus you must clear it manually.
• Replacement while "preparation warning" or "full" is not detected
• Replacement while the power is off

111
 2. Technology

Fixing System

Overview
■ Features
This machine introduces the on-demand fixing method.

Fixing delivery roller

Separation guide

Fixing heater

Fixing film Fixing inlet guide Fixing inlet guide Pressure roller
(Upper) (Lower)

■ Specifications
Item Function/method
Fixing method On-demand fixing
Fixing speed Process Speed H 233mm/sec (1/1-high speed: 1.4% speed-up)
233mm/sec (1/1-end speed: 0.9% speed-up)
230mm/sec (1/1-speed)
224mm/sec (1/1-slow speed: 4.5% speeddown)
Process Speed L 139mm/sec (1/1-high speed: 1.4% speed-up)
139mm/sec (1/1-end speed: 0.9% speed-up)
137mm/sec (1/1-speed)
131mm/sec (1/1-slow speed: 4.5% speeddown)
Fixing heater Ceramic heater
Control temperature 215 deg C (Process speed H, plain paper 1, single sided) *1
Temperature detection By the main thermistors and the sub thermistors (front) and (rear)
Cleaning control Cleaning sequence control
Edge heat rising prevention control Paper edge cooling fans (front)/(rear) and sequence control
Fixing loop contro Loop sensor

112
 2. Technology

Item Function/method
Protective Function "Main thermistor and Sub thermistors (front)/(rear)
Thermo Switch (operating temperature: 250 deg C)"

*1. Target temperature is specified depending on the process speed, the fixing mode and the fixing temperature at the start of
warm-up control.

■ Major parts configuration

Film Unit

Pressure Roller

Fixing Pressure
Release Sensor
(S53)
Thermoswitch
(TP1)
Fixing Main
Fixing Outlet Sensor Thermistor
(S19) (TH1)
Fixing Sub
Thermistor 2
(TH3)
Fixing Sub
Thermistor 1
(TH2)

Fixing Heater
(H1, H2)

Symbol Part name Function / method

- Film unit Applying heat and pressure makes the toner image on paper
- Pressure roller fixed (fused).
H1/H2 Fixing heater Ceramic heater
TH1 Main thermistor To be in contact with the heater
Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise
TH2 Sub thermistor1 To be in contact with the heater (non-feeding area)
Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise, tem-
perature detection/cooling control on the edges
TH3 Sub thermistor2 To be in contact with the heater (non-feeding area)
Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise, tem-
perature detection/cooling control on the edges
TP1 Thermo Switch Non-contact type with the heater
To block AC electric power supply when a failure is detected.
S19 Fixing outlet sensor Jam detection
S53 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor Detect the engagement/disengagement status of the Film Unit

113
 2. Technology

Fixing temperature control

Standby temperature control

To preheat the fixing assembly to reduce time for starting print.
• Flying start temperature control

Print temperature control

To increase temperature to meet the fixing target temperature and keep the target temperature during printing.
• Startup (warm-up rotation) temperature control
• Print temperature control
• Sheet-to-sheet temperature control

Down sequence control

To prevent fixing failure due to rising temperature at the edge or fall in temperature. This control causes reduced the
productivity (through-put).
• Down sequence when feeding small size paper
• Down sequence when switching paper size

114
 2. Technology

Standby temperature control

Max. 10 sec

Flying start temperature control

Purpose
To reduce the print time (FPOT) of the 1st sheet

Starting conditions
• When opening the copyboard cover or ADF, and also the detection temperature of the main thermistor is less than 100
deg C.
• When the original sheet is set on the ADF tray, and also the detection temperature of the main thermistor is less than 100
deg C.
• When the main power switch is turned ON or the machine condition is shift from the sleep mode to standby, and also the
detection temperature of the main thermistor is less than 180 deg C.

Control description
The target control temperature is set to 155 deg C and the fixing motor starts to rotate with a half speed. The control continues
for maximum 10 seconds.

115
 2. Technology

Print temperature control

Startup (warm-up rotation) temperature control

To increase fixing temperature to be ready for printing after receiving the print-start command

Print temperature control

To set optimal target temperature to prevent fixing failure or offset, and keep the specified target temperature during printing
1. Setting target temperature
Target temperature is specified depending on the paper type, paper size, elapsed time since the last control (including the
standby control) of fixing temperature and fixing temperature at the start of warm-up control.
2. Temperature control during printing
When the paper passes in the fixing unit, the fixing temperature is controlled to keep the target value (see the table on the
next page) according to the detection result of main thermistor.
3. Sheet-to-sheet distance temperature control
To prevent the excessive temperature rise and to save the power consumption, the target temperature is set 5 deg C low (in
case of plain paper *1) from the printing temperature.
*1. When the fixing mode is the plain paper 1, plain paper 2 or thin paper, set to -5 dec C. In the other cases, set to -15 or -20
deg C low or +5 deg C high according paper type

Target temperature during printing

The control temperature is determined according to the fixing mode and to the fixing temperature at the start of warm-up control.
The following 16 modes are provided as the fixing mode. The fixing modes are changed by the paper setting and the service
mode setting.
The following table is the control temperature when the fixing temperature is less than 55 deg C at the start of warm-up control.

Fixing Mode

Fixing mode Paper setting Weight (g/m2 )

Thin paper Thin paper 52 to 59
Plain paper 1 Plain paper 1 60 to 63
Translucent paper 64 to 80
Plain paper 1_N1 Plain paper 1 60 to 63
Translucent paper 64 to 80
Plain paper 1_N3 Plain paper 1 60 to 63
Translucent paper 64 to 80
Plain paper 2 Recycled paper 64 to 80
Color paper 64 to 80
Punch hole paper 64 to 80

116
 2. Technology

Fixing mode Paper setting Weight (g/m2 )

Plain paper 2 Plain paper 2 81 to 90
Plain paper 2_N1 Recycled paper 64 to 80
Color paper 64 to 80
Punch hole paper 64 to 80
Plain paper 2 81 to 90
Plain paper 2_N3 Recycled paper 64 to 80
Color paper 64 to 80
Punch hole paper 64 to 80
Plain paper 2 81 to 90
Heavy paper 1 Heavy paper 1 151 to 181
Label paper 106 to 128
Heavy paper 2 Heavy paper 1 151 to 181
Label paper 106 to 128
Heavy paper 3 Heavy paper 3 129 to 163
Heavy paper 4 Heavy paper 4 164 to 220
Transparency Transparency 151 to 181
Bond paper Bond paper 75 to 90
Postcard (Fixing grade priority) Postcard -
S-Postcard (Productivity priority) Postcard -
Envelope Envelope -

Related Service Mode

• Set fixing cln sequence execution temp
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > FIX-CLN
• Set fixing grade priority mode
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > FIX-PR
• Setting of control temperature(Curl correction in high humidity)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > FX-S-TMP
• Set fix smeared image ctrl mode level
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-CONT
• Set fixing control temp: plain paper 3
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TEMP-CON
• Set fix ctrl temp table:Thin1/MP-tray
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TEMPCON2
• Setting of control temperature(Plain paper1,Manual feed)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TB10
• Setting of control temperature(Plain paper1,Second of 2-sided)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TB11
• Setting of control temperature(Plain paper2,Manual feed)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TB12
• Setting of control temperature(Thin paper2,Cassette)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TB13
• Setting of control temperature(Thin paper2,Manual feed)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TB14
• Setting of control temperature(Thin paper1,Second of 2-sided)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TB15
• Setting of control temperature(Plain paper2,Second of 2-sided)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TB16
• Setting of control temperature(Heavy paper 1)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL2
• Setting of control temperature(Heavy paper 2)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL3
• Setting of control temperature(Heavy paper 3)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL4
• Thin paper curl correction mode
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL5
• Setting of control temperature(Envelope/Postcard/-SPostcard)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL6

117
 2. Technology

• Setting of control temperature(Plain paper2,Cassette)

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL7
• Setting of control temperature(OHP)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL8
• Setting of control temperature(Plain paper1,Cassette)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL9
• Setting of control temperature(Plain paper1,Multi-purpose Tray)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL10

Down sequence control

■ Down sequence when feeding small size paper
Purpose
To prevent temperature rise of non-feeding area in the case of continuous print of small size paper (less than A4 of length in width
direction), fixing offset or deterioration of fixing film.

Starting conditions
1. Normal down sequence
(1) When the detected temperature of sub thermistor (front) or (rear) reaches 255 deg C or higher for 400 msec continuously
during printing
(2) Whenever the thermistor detects 255 deg C or higher for 400 msec continuously, the down sequence is carried out with
the maximum 4 steps.
2. Heavy paper down sequence
(3) When one minute have passed with the heavy paper mode 1/2/3/4, or when the detected temperature of sub thermistor
(front) or (rear) reaches 255 deg C or higher for 400 msec continuously
(4) When the detected temperature of sub thermistor (front) or (rear) reaches 255 deg C or higher for 400 msec continuously
with the heavy paper down sequence, the productivity is compared with the normal down sequence. If the productivity of the
normal down sequence is low, the sequence is shift to the normal down sequence.

Operation
The fixing temperature is reduced by making wider sheet-to-sheet distance to control the temperature at lower than the target
temperature for normal print.
(Unit: sheets)

Down sequence A4 B4 B5 A4R A5R Post card S-Post card Free size
LTR LGL A5 LTRR B5R Envelope
EXE-R
Normal down1 12 20 20 20 18 14 10 12
Normal down2 10 12 12 12 14 10 8 10
Normal down3 8 10 10 10 14 10 8 8
Normal down4 8 8 8 8 14 10 8 8
Heavy paper down 16 8 16 10 16 10 8 8

Completion conditions
(5) When the fixing temperature reaches 175 deg C and lower for 400 msec continuously, the productivity returns to normal.
(6) When the fixing temperature reaches 175 deg C and lower for 400 msec continuously after shifting from the heavy paper down
sequence to the normal down sequence, the sequence is shifted to the heavy paper down sequence.

118
 2. Technology

Normal (3)
(1)
Normal down <1st Step> Thick paper down
(2)
(5) Normal down <2nd Step>
(2) (4)
Normal down <3rd Step>
(2)
Normal down <4th Step>

(6)

Related Service Mode

• Setting for down sequence start temperature
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > EDG-WAIT

■ Down sequence when switching paper size

Purpose
This down sequence prevents temperature rise of non-feeding area: there can be possible fixing offset or wrinkle of the succeeding
paper due to increased temperature of non-feeding area of the preceding paper when continuously making prints or feeding wider
length of paper than the preceding paper.

Starting conditions
If the temperature difference between sub thermistor1 and main thermistor or between sub thermistor2 and main thermistor
exceeds 20 deg C (*1) when switching to the paper which has longer width than the preceding paper.

Operation
Pickup of the succeeding paper and power distribution to the heater are stopped as well to decrease the fixing temperature.

Completion conditions
When the temperature difference between sub thermistor1 and main thermistor or between sub thermistor2 and main thermistor
reaches 20 deg C and less.

*1. It is different according to setting value of the service mode (Productivity priority mode or Productivity priority in rotation
collation mode).

Related Service Mode

• Set productivity priority mode
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD > PSP-PR1
• Set productivity priority in rotation collation mode
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD > PSP-PR4

119
 2. Technology

Fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence

Purpose
To prevent the dirt of the pressure roller causing the dirt of the paper back side.

Starting conditions
When the detected temperature of sub thermistor1 or thermistor2 is higher 18 deg C or more than the one of the main thermistor.

Operation
After completion of the last rotation, the temperature control is executed so that the fixing heater turns on and the toner on the
pressure roller is melted to transfer it to the fixing film. After transferring the toner to the fixing film, the fixing motor is rotated slightly
to shift the nip area, so that re-transferring the toner to the pressure roller is prevented.

Completion conditions
This sequence is finished when either following condition is satisfied.
• After 5 seconds (maximum 10 sec) from shifting to the pressure roller cleaning sequence.
• When the next job is started during the pressure roller cleaning sequence.

Related Service Mode

• clean the fixing film
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > FIX-CLN
• Set fixing cln sequence execution temp
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > FIX-CLN

Fixing film edge cooling control

When making prints with the paper that the width is shorter than A4, to prevent temperature rise of non-feeding area, the fan
attached near the fixing assembly sends air and cools to the front and rear side of the fixing film.
For details of the fixing film edge cooling control, “Fixing film edge cooling fan (rear)/(front) control” on page 143

Related Service Mode

• Setting for down sequence start temperature
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > EDG-WAIT

Paper loop amount control before fixing

Purpose
To get a proper image by avoiding a shock when the trailing edge of paper comes out of the registration roles, an appropriate paper
loop is formed between transfer roller and fixing roller.

Pressure roller
Fixing film

Sensor: OFF
Drum

Registration Loop sensor(S6)

roller
Sensor: ON
Transfer roller

120
 2. Technology

Starting conditions
This control is performed at every paper feeding.

Operation
The fixing motor drive speed is controlled as follows by detecting the paper loop between transfer roller and fixing roller with the
loop sensor.
1. The fixing motor drive speed is reduced by 4.5% when the reading edge of paper is fed 35mm from the transfer roller. The
reduced speed is kept until the loop sensor is turned on by the formed paper loop.
2. After detecting the ON condition of the loop sensor for 50 msec continuously, the fixing motor drive speed is increased by 1.4%
compared with the process speed. The increased speed is kept until the loop sensor is turned off by the deleted paper loop.
3. After detecting the OFF condition of the loop sensor for 50 msec continuously, the fixing motor drive speed is reduced by 4.5%
compared with the process speed. The reduced speed is kept until the loop sensor is turned on by the formed paper loop.
4. Repeat steps 2) and 3). The fixing motor drive speed is increased by 0.9% compared with the process speed when the trailing
edge of paper reaches 65 mm before coming out of the registration roller.
5. When continuously making prints, return to step 1). When making a single print, shift to the last rotation.

Related Service Mode

• Registration loop amnt adj: cst pickup
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > LOOP-CST
• Registration loop amnt adj: MP pickup
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > LOOP-MF
• Registration loop amnt adj: 2-sided feeding
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > LOOPREFE
• Registration loop amnt adj: MP Tr fd of plain 3
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > LOOP-THK
• Registration loop amunt adj: MP Tr fd of spcl ppr
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > LOOP-SP
• Registration loop amnt adj: cst feed of envlp
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > LOOP-ENV

Fixing pressure/pressure release control

Purpose
Release/application of pressure for fixing is performed automatically by rotating the Fixing Motor clockwise or
counterclockwise direction.
When the paper jam occurs, the jammed paper can be removed easily by the pressure release control of the fixing unit.

Control Timing
Pressure release timing
• When a jam is detected
* Power-on jam is included in the jam detection mentioned above.
* However, door open jam is excluded.
Pressure application timing
• At power-on with pressure-released state.
• after jam removal.

Control Sequence
Fixing pressure release
1. When the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor is OFF, the Fixing Motor rotates to the reverse direction.
2. When the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor detects ON for more than specified time continually, the Fixing Motor stops.
Fixing pressure
1. When the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor is ON, the Fixing Motor rotates to the reverse direction.
2. When the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor detects OFF for more than specified time continually, the Fixing Motor stops.

Error Codes
• E009-0000: Fixing Motor pressure error
• E009-0001: Fixing Motor pressure release error

121
 2. Technology

Protection features
Code Detail Title Description Error Clear
E000 0001 Fixing temperature The temperature detected by the main thermistor does not rise to the Yes
abnormal rise specified value during startup control.
E001 0000 Fixing unit tempera- The reading of the main thermistor is 250 deg C or more continuously for Yes
ture rise detection 200 msec.
0001 The hardware circuit detects overheating of the main or sub thermistor for Yes
200 msec.
0002 The reading of the sub thermistor is 295 deg C or more continuously for Yes
200 msec.
E002 0000 Fixing unit tempera- 1. The reading of the main thermistor is less than 115 deg C continuously Yes
ture insufficient rise for 400 msec 1.3 sec after it has indicated 100 deg C.
2. The reading of the main thermistor is less than 150 deg C continuously
for 400 msec 1.3 sec after it has indicated 140 deg C.
E003 0000 Low fixing temper- The reading of the main thermistor is less than 100 deg C continuously for 200 No
ature detection af- msec or more.
0001 ter standby The Sub Thermistor 1 detected a temperature of 50 deg C or lower for 500 No
consecutive msec or longer.
0002 The Sub Thermistor 2 detected a temperature of 50 deg C or lower for 500 No
consecutive msec or longer.
E004 0000 Thermistor discon- When disconnection is detected with connector (J214) for 30 sec continuous- No
nection detection er- ly.
ror
0001 Fixing relay welding Welding of the fixing relay on the AC Driver PCB was detected. No
detection error
E009 0000 Fixing pressure/pres- When the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor never detected pressure for No
sure release er- 1.5 sec.
0001 ror detection When the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor never detected pressure release No
for 1.5 sec.
E014 0001 Unstable rotation of Detection is executed every 100 msec after the start of motor rotation; No
the Fixing Motor (M2) however, the drive detection signal is absent for 2 sec.
0002 During motor rotation, detection is executed every 100 msec; however, the No
drive signal is absent 5 times in sequence.
E261 0000 Error in Zero Cross Zero Cross failed to be detected for 500ms or more while the relay was ON. No
* The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.

Related Service Mode

• Error code clear
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR

122
 2. Technology

Pickup/Feed System

Overview

Duplex Feed Control

Fixing / Registration
Assembly

Multi-Purpose Pickup
Assembly

Cassette Pickup
Assembly

■ Specification
Item Description
Paper storage method Front loading method
Pickup method Cassette Retard separation method
Manual feed Pad separation method
pickup tray
Paper stack capacity Cassette 550 sheets (80 g/m2), 680 sheets (64 g/m2)
Manual feed 80 sheets (80 g/m2), 80 sheets (64 g/m2)
pickup tray
Paper feed reference Center reference
Paper size Cassette1 A4,A4R,A5R,B4,B5,B5R,LTR,LTRR,LGL,STMTR,EXEC,8K,16K,16KR
Cassette2 A4,A4R,A3,A5R,B4,B5,B5R,LTR,LTRR,LGL,11" x 17", STMTR,EXEC,8K,16K,16KR,Free
size(139.7 mm x 182 mm to 297 mm x 431.8 mm) envelope (No.10(COM10),ISO-C5,Mon-
arch,DL)*The optional Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1 isrequired.
Manual feed A4,A4R,A3,A5R,B4,B5,B5R,LTR,LTRR,LGL,11" x 17", STMTR,EXEC,8K,16K,16KR,Free size
pickup tray (99 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 431.8 mm) envelope (No.10(COM10),ISO-C5,Monarch,DL)
Label (B4,A4R,A4,LTR,LTRR)
Paper grammage Cassette 60g/m2 to 128g/m2
Manual feed 52 g/m2 to 220 g/m2
pickup tray
Paper size switch Cassette By the user
Manual feed By the user
pickup tray

123
 2. Technology

Item Description
Duplexing method Through path

■ Parts Configuration
Arrangement of Rollers

Reverse Roller
Tray 2 Delivery Roller
Tray 1 Delivery Roller
Vertical Path Roller
Duplex Inlet Roller

Delivery Roller
Fixing Film
Duplex Feed Roller 1
Pressure Roller
Drum
Duplex Feed Roller 2
Transfer Roller
Registration Roller
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller
Multi-purpose Tray Pullout Roller
Pickup Roller (Cassette1)
Vertical Path Roller (Cassette1)
Feed Roller (Cassette1)
Separation Roller (Cassette1)

Vertical Path Roller (Cassette2)

Feed Roller (Cassette2)
Separation Roller (Cassette2)
Pickup Roller (Cassette2)

124
 2. Technology

Arrangement of Sensors

S24

S22

S21

S19

S6

S7

S5

S9

S1

S2
S3 S4 S33

S31
S34 S32

No. Name No. Name

S1 Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor S19 Fixing Outlet Sensor
S2 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor S21 No.1 Delivery Sensor
S3 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B S22 No.2 Delivery Sensor
S4 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A S24 Reversal Sensor
S5 Pre-Registration Sensor S31 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor
S6 Loop Sensor S32 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A
S7 Duplex Feed Sensor S33 Cassette 2 Pickup Sensor
S9 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Sensor S34 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B

125
 2. Technology

Route of Drive

M10 M20

SL12
M2
SL13

M9

M1

CL3

CL12
M13
SL2

SL1
M3

SL11

No. Name No. Name

M1 Main Motor SL1 Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid
M2 Fixing Motor SL2 Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid
M3 Cassette 2 Pickup Motor SL11 Cassette 2 Pickup Solenoid
M9 Duplex Feed Motor SL12 Reversal Solenoid
M10 No.1 Delivery Motor SL13 No.2 Delivery Solenoid
M13 Cassette 1 Pickup Motor CL3 Registration Clutch
M20 Reversal Motor CL12 Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Clutch

126
 2. Technology

■ Diagram of Paper Paths

Reversing point

Delivery to tray 2
(option)

Delivery to tray 1

Pickup from
manual feeder

Pickup from cassette 1

Pickup from cassette 2

Pickup from option cassette

127
 2. Technology

Interval speed

(iR-ADV4551,4545,4535) 230(137)mm/sec
(iR-ADV4525) 137(137)mm/sec

(iR-ADV4551)
(iR-ADV4545,4535) 550(550)mm/sec
(iR-ADV4525) 550(550)mm/sec

(iR-ADV4551)
(iR-ADV4545,4535) 460(230)mm/sec
(iR-ADV4525) 230(230)mm/sec

(iR-ADV4551,4545,4535,4525) 345mm/sec

* Speeds when picking up a A4 plain paper from a cassette are shown as the interval speeds.
( ): in the case of manual feeder.

Cassette Pickup Assembly

The paper inside the cassette is held up by the lifter plate.
When pickup takes place, the pickup solenoid (SL1/SL11) is turned on, and the pickup roller is moved down. When the pickup roller
comes into contact with the surface of paper, the sheet is picked up by rotation of the roller.
Only a single sheet of paper picked up is moved to the feed path by the feed roller and the separation roller, and moved as far as
the registration roller by the pickup vertical path roller.
The pickup vertical path roller, pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller are driven by the cassette pickup motor (M3/M13)

Pickup roller
Pickup vertical path roller
Feed roller
Separation roller

Lifter plate

Alarm Code
• 04-0011 : Cassette 1 Paper Feed Retry error
• 04-0012 : Cassette 2 Paper Feed Retry error

128
 2. Technology

■ Paper Size Detection

Paper size of the cassette can be automatically detected by adjusting the position of the guide plate.
Concavo-convex area of the cassette dial is switched when the guide plate is shifted and two Size Switches on a printer
are switched.
Length and width are detected according to the ON / OFF combination of switches.
As long as standard paper, both AB type and inch type can be used.
However, size should be found manually on the check screen of operation panel for the combination of A5-Rand STMT-R or the
combination of B5-R and EXEC.

S29/S30
S28/S35

129
 2. Technology

Cassette size
switch (S29/S30)

Rear
detection
rink

Rear guide plate

Cassette size
switch (S28/S35)
Detection
dial

Detection
Side guide plate dial Cassette size
switch (S28/S35)

Width detection(S28/S35) Length detection(S29/S30)

Width Length ① ② ③ ④ ① ② ③ ④
B5 257.0 182.0 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
EXEC 267.0 184.0 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
16K 270.0 195.0 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
A5-R 148.5 210.0 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
A4 297.0 210.0 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
STMT-R 139.7 215.9 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
LTR 279.4 215.9 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
B5-R 182.0 257.0 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON
LTR-R 215.9 279.4 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON
A4-R 210.0 297.0 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF
LGL 215.9 355.6 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
B4 257.0 364.0 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF
8K 270.0 390.0 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON
A3 297.0 420.0 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

130
 2. Technology

Width detection(S28/S35) Length detection(S29/S30)

Width Length ① ② ③ ④ ① ② ③ ④
LDR 279.4 431.8 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON

Also, the cassette presence is detected when the size switch is pushed.
(If no switch is pushed, it is determined as no cassette.)

Setting method when the size detection patterns are overlapped

ASize should be found manually on the check screen for the combination of A5-Rand STMT-R or the combination of B5-R
and EXEC.
Specify the ecognition method for the special paper with user setting.

Paper level sensor

Paper level in a cassette is detected with the sensor indicated below.

Name Symbol
Cassette paper level sensor A S4/S32
Cassette paper level sensor B S3/S34
Cassette paper sensor S2/S31

Cassette paper
sensor (S2/S31)

Cassette paper
level sensor A (S3/S32) Flag

Cassette paper
level sensor B (S4/S34)

Paper sensor flag

Lifter gear

Tray

131
 2. Technology

If the paper is full

Cassette Paper
Cassette Paper Level Sensor A
Level Sensor B Paper

OFF OFF
If the paper is approx.half Cassette Paper
Level Sensor A
Cassette Paper
Level Sensor B Paper

OFF ON

If the paper is a little

Cassette Paper
Cassette Paper Level Sensor A
Level Sensor B Paper

ON ON
Cassette Paper Sensor
If the paper is absent

Cassette paper level Cassette paper level Cassette paper sensor Paper level Display
sensor A sensor B
ON ON ON 100% to 50%

OFF ON ON 50% to 50 sheets

OFF OFF ON 50 sheet or less

--- --- OFF no paper

Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly

The paper in the tray of the manual feed pickup unit is forced against the manual feed pickup roller by the work of the lifting plate,
and only a single sheet of paper is separated and moved into the machine by the work of the manual feed pickup roller and the
separation pad.

132
 2. Technology

Multi-Purpose Tray
Paper Length Sensor
(S50)
Multi-purpose Tray
Pickup Roller
Side Guide
Lifting Plate

Separation Pad Multi-purpose Tray

Pickup Tray

Pressure Spring Multi-Purpose Tray

Paper Size Sensor
Multi-Purpose Tray (S27)
Paper Sensor
(S9)

Alarm Code
• 04-0017 : Manual Feeder Paper Feed Retry error

■ Multi-purpose Tray Paper Detection

Paper presence/absence on the Multi-Purpose Tray is detected by the Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Sensor(S9).

■ Multi-purpose Tray Automatic Size Detection

Size detection is performed to paper set in the Multi-purpose Tray, and paper size is determined according to the setting of Paper
Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer (A/B size, Inch size, A/K size).

Result of size detec- Paper Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer*1
tion A/B Size Inch Size A/K Size
A3 A3 11×17/No corresponding size A3
B4 B4 11×17/No corresponding size 8K/No corresponding size
A4R A4R LGL/LTRR/No corresponding size A4R
A4 A4 LTR/No corresponding size A4
B5R B5R No corresponding size No corresponding size
B5 B5 LTR/EXEC/No corresponding size 16K/No corresponding size
A5R A5R STMTR/No corresponding size A5R
11 x 17 A3/B4/No corresponding size 11 x 17 A3/8K/No corresponding size
LGL A4R/No corresponding size LGL A4R/No corresponding size
LTR A4/B5/No corresponding size LTR A4/16K/No corresponding size
LTRR A4R/No corresponding size LTRR A4R/No corresponding size
STMTR A5R/No corresponding size STMTR A5R/No corresponding size
EXEC B5/No corresponding size EXEC 16K/No corresponding size
8K B4/No corresponding size 11×17/No corresponding size 8K
16K B5/No corresponding size LTR/EXEC/No corresponding size 16K
Postcard Blank unless "Paper Settings" is performed due to non-standard size
Custom size

*1: Set the paper size you want to perform automatic size detection in the Multi-purpose Tray in the following Setting/Registration.
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer

133
 2. Technology

NOTE:
The default settings by region are shown below.

Location Default setting

US Inch Size
CN A/K Size
Other than above A/B Size

Automatic size detection is performed by the following three sensors for the paper size of the Multi-purpose Tray.
• Multi-Purpose Tray Width Sensing PCB (S27): detects the paper width
• Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor (S50): detects the paper length
When paper length in feed direction is not specified, control is performed based on the size detected from when the Registration
Clutch is turned ON until the Registration Sensor is turned OFF.

Non-Japanese special papers are linked with the following service mode.
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > LOCAL-SZ

Configure the setting in Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Settings > Other Size.

■ Long Length Paper

This machine supports long length paper.
Long length paper with 630 mm in length can be used in the Multi-purpose Tray pickup.

Service mode
By setting the following service mode (Lv.2) to "1", the Long Original button appears on the Copy > Options screen, and long length
paper becomes available for use.
• Display/hide of long strip mode
COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST

Fixing / Registration Assembly

■ Registration Control
The registration roller is driven by the main motor (M1).
In between the registration roller and the main motor is the registration clutch (CL3), servicing to turn on and off the registration
roller so that the paper will be matched in relation to the image on the drum at correct registration.

CL3 M1

Registration Roller

Duplex / Delivery Assembly

■ Duplex Feed Control
On this machine, the paper is reversed outside the machine with using the reverse mouth.

134
 2. Technology

After stopping at the reverse stop position, the paper fed to the duplex path will be fed to the 2-sided pickup standby position.

■ Duplex Standby Control

In the case of duplex feed, when there is paper at the downstream standby position, feeding of the 1st side is suspended.

M10 M20

SL12
Reverse mouth

Tray 2 Delivery mouth

SL13

M9
Tray 1 Delivery mouth

S7

Detecting Jams
Jam Code List

S24

S22

S21

S19

S6

S7

S5

S9

S1

S2
S3 S4 S33

S31
S34 S32

135
 2. Technology

• Jam in Feed System

01xx: Delay, 02xx: Stationary, 0Axx: Residue, 0Bxx: Door open jams
0Cxx: Jam except the above factor, 0D91: Paper size jams, 0CF1: Error Jams
Yes: Detects, -: Does not detect

JAM Code Sensor name Jam type

Delay Stationary Residue
xx01 S1 Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor Yes Yes Yes
xx02 S33 Cassette 2 Pickup Sensor Yes Yes Yes
xx05 S5 Pre-Registration Sensor Yes Yes Yes
xx07 S19 Fixing Outlet Sensor Yes Yes Yes
xx08 S21 No.1 Delivery Sensor Yes Yes Yes
xx09 S22 No.2 Delivery Sensor Yes Yes Yes
xx0A S24 Reversal Sensor Yes Yes Yes
xx0D S7 Duplex Feed Sensor Yes Yes Yes

• Other Jams

JAM Code Sensor name Jam type

01FF S1 Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor Sequence error jam
02FF S33 Cassette 2 Pickup Sensor Sequence error jam
05FF S5 Pre-Registration Sensor Sequence error jam
07FF S19 Fixing Outlet Sensor Sequence error jam
08FF S21 No.1 Delivery Sensor Sequence error jam
09FF S22 No.2 Delivery Sensor Sequence error jam
0AFF S24 Reversal Sensor Sequence error jam
0DFF S7 Duplex Feed Sensor Sequence error jam
0B00 (SW2) Front Door Switch Door Open jam (TThe sensor ID is non-display.)
0CA0 - Dcon retry jam *1 -
0CAF - Fin comm time out jam *1 -

*1 By service mode(Lv.2) setup, the conversion from a jam cord to an error code is possible.
As an assist function of the cause elucidation of the jam, for the jam that the identification of the cause is difficult, convert a
jam cord into an error code and enable the acquisition of the log.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > JM-ERR-D

136
 2. Technology

External Auxiliary System

Overview
■ Power Supply Configuration
Power Supply Configuration inside the Host Machine
12/24V All-night
Power Power
Supply Supply Main
PCB PCB Switch
UN5 UN1 SW1

AC Driver PCB Riser PCB

Fixing UN30
Heater 1 H1 6HPLFRQGXFWRU UN14
Heater 6:
Fixing Control
Heater 2 H2 Area
Reader Controller
PCB
UN4

2nd Cassette Controller

PCB
(Cassette Feeding Unit)

2nd Cassette Controller

Environment PCB
Switch (High Capacity Cassette
SW4 Feeding Unit)
Laser Driver PCB
2 Beams:UN60
4 Beams:UN23
Heater PCB Deck Driver PCB
Cassette UN3 (Paper Deck Unit)
Heater H4 Front Door HVT PCB
Switch UN6
Option SW2
Cassette
Heater H6 Interlock
Option %XIIHU3DVV
Deck 8QLW
Heater H7
3URWHFWLRQ
Reader &LUFXLW
REG
Heater H5
Booklet/Staple
Drum DC/DC finisher
Heater H3
DC Controller PCB
24V UN2
12V 3XQFKHU8QLW
5V
3.3V
5U

Inner finisher
Option Relay

Inner 3XQFKHU8QLW

137
 2. Technology

Power Configuration of the Reader Unit

24V
Motor
5V
Sensor

24V
Reader 12V
Printer CCD PCB 12V LED Lamp
Controller 6V Unit
PCB
12V
24V
12V DADF driver PCB

Power-saving Function
■ Overview
There are "Standby" and "Sleep" as the power supply mode of this machine.
Further, "Sleep" is divided into the following 3 modes: "Sleep Standby", "Sleep 1", "Deep Sleep".

Reader Control panel

State of power
supply ON
Standby Energy Saving
State of power
supply OFF
Engine
Main Controler

[Energy Saver] key is turned off

or [Energy Saver] key is turned on
A specified period of time has passed

Sleep Mode
Sleep Standby

Energy Use Energy Use

“Low” “High”

Job end Job submission

Job submission Job end
Deep Sleep Sleep 1

* The time specified in Settings/Registration> Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Sleep Time

Standby
The mode that the machine is running or can start operation immediately and all power is supplied in this mode.

Sleep Standby
The state that only the Control Panel is off while the power is supplied to all other parts.

Sleep 1
The state that the controller's all-night and non-all-night power is supplied while the Control Panel is off.

Deep Sleep
In this state, the Control Panel is off while only all-night power is supplied.
When any of the following "Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep" applies, transition to this mode does not occur.

138
 2. Technology

● Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep Mode (Check Items)

Settings of Settings/Registration
When the following settings are enabled in the [Settings/Registration] menu, the machine does not enter Deep Sleep mode.
The corresponding items are shown below.

Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings

• Sleep Mode Energy Use > High
• Sleep Mode Energy Use > Low > Compensate for Network Comm.
• Within the time specified in Auto Sleep Time

Preferences > Network

• NetWare Settings > Use NetWare > ON
• AppleTalk Settings > Use AppleTalk > ON
• TCP/IP Settings > BMLinkS Settings > Use BMLinkS > ON (*1)
• IEEE 802.1X Settings > Use IEEE 802.1X > ON
• TCP/IP Settings > IPv4 Settings > IP Address Settings > Auto IP > ON
• TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > mDNS Settings > Use mDNS > ON
• Google Cloud Print Settings > Use Google Cloud Print > ON (*2)
• TCP/IP Settings > SIP Settings > NGN Settings > Use NGN > ON (*1)
• Direct Connection Settings > Use Direct Connection > ON
Function Settings > Receive/Forward
• Fax Settings >Select RX Mode > Fax/Tel (Auto Switch) (*1)
• Fax Settings > Remote RX > ON (*1)
• Fax Settings > Set Number Display > ON (*1)

Function Settings > Send

• Fax Settings > Modem Dial-in Settings > ON (*1)

Other Settings
• Volume Settings key > Fax Volume Settings > Incoming Fax Ring > ON (*1)
*1: This may not be displayed depending on the country/region, model, and configuration of the options.
*2: This must be already registered on Google Cloud Print in advance.

Hardware status
• It is connected to the coin vendor.

System Performance Status

• The system is running/communicating.

CAUTION:
The system is in a running/communicating state for approx. 10 minutes after startup in many cases.

Quick Startup
To realize faster startup, power configuration has been changed to always supply power to the All-night Power Supply PCB.
Thereby, the main menu can be displayed after 4 seconds from turning ON the Main Power Supply Switch.
Although when the Main Power Supply Switch is OFF, power is supplied to the following PCBs.
• AC Driver PCB
• All-night Power Supply PCB
• Main Controller PCB

139
 2. Technology

Image of
existing power supply By turning OFF the Main Switch,
Main SW all power turns OFF

Relay
All-night All-night
Power Supply Circuit

Main Controller PCB

Relay
NOT All-night
Power Supply
Power supply

Energized area when

the Main Switch is OFF

Image of power supply

for iR-ADV 4500 Series Power is supplied to the All-night Power Supply
Main SW even if the Main Switch is turned OFF

All-night
Semiconductor SW Circuit

All-night Main Controller PCB

Relay Power Supply

Power supply NOT All-night

Power Supply

NOTE:
The quick startup function can be set from "Settings/Registration".
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Quick Startup Settings for Main Power
[On]: Quick startup is executed (default)
[Off]: Quick startup is not executed

Disconnect the power plug when performing work with the possibility to come in contact with the PCBs above. If a conductive
material comes in contact with the PCB, short circuit may occur in the PCB, and may cause damage on it.
The following label is used at the place where attention is required.

Quick Start

Plug Off
Conditions for not executing quick startup
This machine does not execute quick startup if the following conditions are met at first startup after the power plug is connected
to the outlet.

Connection status of the hardware

• A coin vendor is connected.

Either of the following network settings is set to "ON":

Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network
• AppleTalk Settings > Use AppleTalk > ON
• Slect Wired/Wireless LAN > Wireless LAN
• Bluetooth Settings > ON

When turning ON the main power of the machine after turning OFF the main power in any of the conditions below
• The system is running/communicating.

140
 2. Technology

Others
• More than 110 hours have elapsed after quick startup
• When turning ON the main power of the machine in 20 seconds after turning OFF the main power
• When turning ON the main power of the machine after turning OFF the main power from the Remote UI
• The next time the power is turned ON after occurrence of the error code
• The next time the power is turned ON after shifting to the service mode screen

Heater control
Power Configuration of the Heater
Reader Heater

Drum Heater

Deck Heater

Heater PCB

Cassette Heater

Heater operating condition

Status Reader Drum Cassette Deck

heater heater heater heater
Turning on the en- Turning off the main pow- ON ON ON ON
vironment heater er switch
switch (SW4) DEEP SLEEP mode ON ON ON ON
Energy Saver mode ON ON /OFF*1 ON ON
Standby mode OFF ON /OFF*1 ON ON
Printing OFF OFF OFF OFF

*1: When a temperature of the Drum Heater exceeds the specified value, ON/OFF is switched.

Fan Control
■ Overview
Fan layout

141
 2. Technology

FM12

FM3 FM7

FM1
FM4

FM2

FM5

FM6

No. Name Function Error code

FM1 Fixing Cooling Fan (Rear) Cools the fixing unit. E840-0001, E840-0002
Cool paper on the delivery tray
FM2 Fixing Cooling Fan (Front) Cools the fixing unit. E840-0003, E840-0004
Cool paper on the delivery tray
FM3 Heat Exhaust Fan (Rear) Cools the fixing unit. E805-0000, E805-0001
FM4 Heat Exhaust Fan (Front) Cools the fixing unit. E805-0002, E805-0003
FM5 Power Supply Cooling Fan Cools the power supply. E804-0000
FM6 Developing Cooling Fan Cools the power supply. E806-0000, E806-0001
Circulate air in the host machine.
FM7 Delivery Cooling Fan Cool paper. E806-0002, E806-0003
FM12 Main Controller Cooling Fan Cools the main controller. E880-0001

WUP STBY INI PTINT LSTR JAM/ERR/Deep Sleep

/Sleep 1
Fixing film cooling
fan (rear) (FM1)
Fixing Film Cooling *1 *2
Fan (front) (FM2)
*1 *2
Exhaust fan (rear) (FM3)
*1 *2
Exhaust fan (front) (FM4)

Power supply cooling *1 *2

fan (FM5)
Main body cooling *1 *2
fan (FM6)
*1 *2
Paper cooling fan (FM7)

Controller cooling fan *1 *2

(FM12)
*1 *2
: Full speed : Half speed

*1: The fan operates at half speed only when the machine enters the standby mode after running for more than 8 minutes for fixing.
*2: The fan control in PRINT/LSTR performs full speed/half speed drive/stop depending on print mode and fix control temperature.

142
 2. Technology

*3: The fan operates for approx. 1 minute at a maximum depending on the setting of "Auto Sleep Timer". When the machine exits
from Deep Sleep due to the Control Panel power ON/OFF or job query from network without job, the fan operates for approx.
10 minutes.

Related service modes

• Change of rotational speed for paper edge cooling fan (Lv.2)
COPIER > ADJUST > FIXING > FN-MV-SW
• Fan drive extension mode after job (Lv.2)
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > FAN-EXTN

■ Fixing film edge cooling fan (rear)/(front) control

Purpose
These fans are used to prevent the sections where paper is not fed from heating excessively when narrow paper (narrower than
the A4 size (297 mm)) is fed.
These fans are used for the following purpose when paper wider than the A4 width (297 mm) is fed.
• Cool paper that has passed through the fixing unit.
• Cool paper to prevent the adhesion of paper interval on the delivery tray.

Overview
• [A]: When paper narrower than the A4 width (297 mm) is fed, the air outlet of the paper edge cooling fan (rear)/(front) opens
to blow air to both ends of the fixing film, thus cooling the sections where paper is not fed.
• [B]: When paper wider than the A4 width (297 mm) is fed, the air outlet of the fixing film edge cooling fan (rear)/(front) closes
to cool paper that has passed through the fixing unit and paper on the delivery tray.

Fixing
Assembly

FM1/2

Control sequence
1. The shutter motor (M8) is energized and the shutter HP sensor (S10) detects the edge cooling shutter.

143
 2. Technology

2. Aperture width of the edge cooling shutter is depending on the paper size. The edge cooling shutter starts to move when the
registration clutch turns ON.

Opening width of the shutter Paper size

25 ppm ma- 35 ppm ma-
chine chine
51 ppm ma- 45 ppm ma-
chine chine
0 mm A3, A4(in respective mode other than N1/N3)
18 mm 22 mm LDR, LTR, A-LTR
23 mm 26 mm K8, K16
24 mm 27 mm EXEC, G-LTR, K-LGL
29 mm 32 mm B4, B5
30 mm A3, A4
(in N1/N3 mode and the surface temperature of the pressure roller is 95 degrees C or more.)
*1
50 mm LTR-R, LGL, A-LTR-R, OFFICIO, A-OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO, EOFFICIO, M-OFFICIO,
FOOLSCAP, F4AR, I-LGL
53 mm A4-R, FOLIO
58 mm(opend) Other than the above-mentioned sizes

*1: The width of the edge cooling shutter aperture can be adjusted by service mode (Open width adj of paper edge cooling
fan shutter; in N1/N3 mode, A3/A4).
SERVICE MODE > COPIER > ADJUST > FIXING > ADJ-FNSH
Adjusting value; "0"-"6": Aperture width changes in 0mm – 24mm by 4mm steps.
Adjusting value; "7"-"14": Aperture width changes in 30mm – 58mm by 4mm steps.
3. When Fixing film edge cooling fans (rear/front) (FM1/FM2) and the main body cooling fan (FM6) are ON, their power (full
speed, half speed and stop) and width of the edge cooling shutter aperture are controlled by the subthermistor (TH1/TH2).

Shutter (rear)

Film unit
Shutter HP
sensor (S10)

Shutter motor (M8)

Shutter (front)

FM1

FM2

Counter control
Count-up timing differs according to the following.
• Print mode (1-sided page, 2nd side of 2-sided page, 1st side of 2-sided page)
• Delivery position (Finisher).

144
 2. Technology

Target of delivery Print mode

Single-sided/Doublesided (2nd side) Double-sided (1st side)
Count-up timing
Host machine 1st delivery tray No.1 delivery sensor (S12) Duplex feed sensor (S7)
2nd delivery tray No. 2 delivery sensor (S42)
Inner finisher Inner finisher inlet sensor (S1)
Staple Finisher / Tray area Inlet Sensor (PS101)
Booklet Finisher Saddle area Saddle Inlet Sensor (PS201)

Default counters for each region/location (model) are listed below.

Target Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item Region Code
Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6
JP model Total1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 JP
Type1 101 0 0 0 0 0
(Conventional
method)
JP model Type Total2 Copy(Total2) TotalA2 *1 *1 *1 JP
2 102 202 127 0 0 0
(New method)
Taiwan model Total1 Total(Large) Copy(Total1) Copy(Large) *1 *1 TW
101 103 201 203 0 0
UL model Total1 Total(Large) Copy(Total1) Copy(Large) *1 *1 US
Type1 101 103 201 203 0 0
(Conventional
method)
UL model Type Total2 Copy(Total2) *1 *1 *1 *1 US
2 102 202 0 0 0 0
(New method)
General model Total1 Total(Large) Copy(Total1) Copy(Large) *1 *1 SG/ KO/ CN
101 103 201 203 0 0
UK model Total(Black/ Total(Black/ Scan(Total1) Print(Total1) *1 *1 GB
Type1 Large) Small)
(Conventional 112 113 501 301 0 0
method)
240V Total1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 GB
UK model Type 101 0 0 0 0 0
2
(New method)
CA model Total1 Total(Large) Copy(Total1) Copy(Large) *1 *1 AU
101 103 201 203 0 0
FRN model Total(Black/ Total(Black/ Scan(Total1) Print(Total1) *1 *1 FR
Type1 Large) Small)
(Conventional 112 113 501 301 0 0
method)
FRN model Total1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 FR
Type 2 101 0 0 0 0 0
(New method)
GER model Total(Black/ Total(Black/ Scan(Total1) Print(Total1) *1 *1 DE
Type1 Large) Small)
(Conventional 112 113 501 301 0 0
method)
GER model Total1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 DE
Type 2 101 0 0 0 0 0
(New method)
AMS model Total(Black/ Total(Black/ Scan(Total1) Print(Total1) *1 *1 ES/ SE/ PT/
Type1 Large) Small) NO/ DK/ FI/
(Conventional PL/ HU/ CZ/
method) SI/ GR/ EE/
RU/ NL/ SK/

145
 2. Technology

Target Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item Region Code
Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6
AMS model 112 113 501 301 0 0 RO/ HR/ BG/
Type1 TR
(Conventional
method)
AMS model Total1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 ES/ SE/ PT/
Type 2 101 0 0 0 0 0 NO/ DK/ FI/
(New method) PL/ HU/ CZ/
SI/ GR/ EE/
RU/ NL/ SK/
RO/ HR/ BG/
TR
ITA model Total(Black/ Total(Black/ Scan(Total1) Print(Total1) *1 *1 IT
Type1 Large) Small)
(Conventional 112 113 501 301 0 0
method)
ITA model Total1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 IT
Type 2 101 0 0 0 0 0
(New method)
China Total1 Total(Black/ Total(Black/ *1 *1 *1 CN
Large) Small)
101 112 113 0 0 0

*1: Nothing is displayed as default. However, you can change this setting from the service mode.

Explanation of the list

• Large: Large size paper (when paper length exceeds 364 mm in paper feed direction)
• Small: Small size paper (when paper length is 364 mm or less in paper feed direction)
• Total: Copy + Print; 1 count up
• 2-Sided: 1 count up when auto 2-sided copy
• Region code change of CONFIG is executed from COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CONFIG.
• Three-digit number in the counter column shows the setting value of the following service mode items.
COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER 1
COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER 2
COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER 3
COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER 4
COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER 5
COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER 6
• COUNTER2 to 6 can be changed from the following service mode.
COPIER > OPTION > USER
• The change of the counter display type (New method/Conventional method) can be changed from the following service mode.
COPIER > OPTION > USER > CNT-SW

Region Region Region Region Region Region

code code code
JP Japan ES Spain RU Russia
US United States SE Sweden SK Slovakia
GB United Kingdom PT Portugal RO Romania
FR France NO Norway HR Croatia
DE Germany DK Denmark BG Bulgaria
IT Italy FI Finland TR Turkey
AU Australia PL Poland TH Thailand
SG Singapore HU Hungary VN Vietnam
NL Netherlands CZ Czech Republic AR Argentine
KR Korea SI Slovenia IN India
CN China GR Greece
TW Taiwan EE Estonia

146
 2. Technology

Restricted function
The restricted function mode is activated when several specific errors are detected so the surviving functions still can operate.

Item Copy ADF Scan Book Scan Print Finisher

Specific error in ADF Book copy : ena- Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
bledADF copy: dis-
abled
Specific error in Reader Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled
Specific error in Host machine Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled
Specific error in Finisher Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled*1
Specific error in Finisher Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled *2
Specific error in pickup Enabled Enabled Enabled *3 Enabled Enabled

*1: Only the straight pass delivery is available. Stapling, aligning, punching are not available.
*2: Only the stapling is not available.
*3: Only the target paper source is not available.

ADF restriction error code

E413

Reader restriction error code

E202, E225, E227, E248, E280, E400

Printer restriction error code

E000, E001, E002, E003, E004, E010, E014, E020, E024, E025, E110, E261, E800, E805, E806, E840

Finisher restriction error code

• Inner finisher
E531, E551, E590
• Staple/Booklet finisher
E514, E530, E531, E532, E535, E537, E540, E542, E590, E591, E592, E593,E5F0,E5F1,E5F2, E5F3, E5F4, E5F6
*E590 to E593: for the puncher unit (option).

Service mode
• Restricted operation at Finisher error (for Staple Finishe/Booklet Finisher)
SORTER > OPTION > MD-SPRTN

147
3 Periodical Service
Periodically Replaced Parts.............. 149
Consumable Parts List...................... 150
Cleaning/Check/Adjustment Locations
.......................................................156
 3. Periodical Service

Periodically Replaced Parts

Host machine

No. Parts name Parts number Quan- Estimated life Parts counter
tity (Service mode)
Intermedi- Sub item
ate item
1 Air Filter FC0-3078 1 240,000 pages DRBL-1 OZ-FIL1

[1]

149
 3. Periodical Service

Consumable Parts List

Host machine

No. Parts name Parts number Quantity Estimated life Parts counter
*1 *2 (Service mode)
Intermedi- Sub item
ate item
1 Transfer Roller FE8-2935 1 300,000 pages DRBL-1 TR-ROLL
2 Separation Static Eliminator FM3-9296 1 240,000 pages DRBL-1 SP-SC-EL
3 Drum Unit - 1 - - -
4 Developing Assembly FM1-J148 1 500,000 pages DRBL-1 DV-UNT-K
5 Waste Toner Container FM3-9276 1 80,000 pages DRBL-1 WST-TNR
6 Pickup Roller (Cassette 1) FB6-3405 1 150,000 sheets DRBL-1 C1-PU-RL
7 Separation Roller (Cas- FC6-6661 1 120,000 sheets DRBL-1 C1-SP-RL
sette 1)
8 Feed Roller (Cassette 1) FC0-5080 1 150,000 sheets DRBL-1 C1-FD-RL
9 Pickup Roller (Cassette 2) FB6-3405 1 150,000 sheets DRBL-1 C2-PU-RL
10 Separation Roller (Cas- FC6-6661 1 120,000 sheets DRBL-1 C2-SP-RL
sette 2)
11 Feed Roller (Cassette 2) FC0-5080 1 150,000 sheets DRBL-1 C2-FD-RL
12 Multi-purpose Tray Pick- FL3-1352 1 150,000 sheets DRBL-1 M-FD-RL
up Roller
13 Multi-purpose Tray Separa- FL3-3469 1 150,000 sheets DRBL-1 M-SP-PD
tion Pad
14 Fixing Main Unit (100V) FM1-J022 1 240,000 pages DRBL-1 FX-UNIT
15 Fixing Main Unit (120V) 51 ppm machine: FM1-J020 1 240,000 pages DRBL-1 FX-UNIT
25/35/45 ppm machine: FM1-
J023
16 Fixing Main Unit (230V) 51 ppm machine: FM1-J021 1 240,000 pages DRBL-1 FX-UNIT
25/35/45 ppm machine: FM1-
J024

*1: The parts number may be changed due to engineering change.

*2: All the values described in this column are estimated replacement timing in A4 size. The replacement timing is a reference value
in the case of usage in general offices, and the actual value differs depending on the customer environment, operation conditions
in the field, etc.

150
 3. Periodical Service

[2]

[1]

[12]
[14] [15] [16] [13]

[4]

[5]

[8]

[7]

[6] [11]
[9] [10]

151
 3. Periodical Service

1-path ADF

No. Parts name Parts num- Quanti- Estimated life Parts counter
ber ty (Service mode)
Intermediate Sub item
item
1 Pickup Roller FL1-3120 1 80,000 sheets DRBL-2 DF-PU-RL
2 Feed Roller FC0-9450 1 80,000 sheets DRBL-2 DF-FD-RL
3 Separation Roller FC0-9631 1 80,000 sheets DRBL-2 DF-SP-RL
4 Pre-separation Unit FM1-J766 1 80,000 sheets DRBL-2 DF-PR-PD
5 Stamp FC7-5465 1 7,000 times DRBL-2 STAMP

[3] [2] [1]

[4]

[5]

152
 3. Periodical Service

Reverse ADF

No. Parts name Parts num- Quanti- Estimated life Parts counter
ber ty (Service mode)
Intermediate Sub item
item
1 Pickup Roller FM1-D470 1 80,000 sheets DRBL-2 DF-PU-RL
2 Separation Roller FM1-D471 1 80,000 sheets DRBL-2 DF-SP-RL
3 Stamp FB5-9410 1 7,000 times DRBL-2 STAMP
4 Left Hinge FE3-5484 1 150,000 times DRBL-2 DF-HNG-L

NOTE:
Although there is no consumable parts setting for the Pre-separation Unit in this machine, the parts counter DF-PR-PD for the
Pre-separation Unit in the menu under COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 > DF-PR-PD is installed and increments the count by 1
for each sheet of paper fed regardless of the reading mode (1-sided/2-sided).
However, an increment in the counter value does not affect the operation. After selecting in the menu COPIER > COUNTER >
DRBL-2 > DF-PR-PD, clearing the counter by pressing the Clear key is possible.

[4]

[1]

[2]

[3]

153
 3. Periodical Service

2-cassette Pedestal-AN1

No. Parts name Parts num- Quanti- Estimated life Parts counter
ber ty (Service mode)
Intermediate Sub item
item
1 Pickup Roller (Cassette 3) FB6-3405 1 150,000 sheets DRBL-2 C3-PU-RL
2 Separation Roller (Cassette 3) FC6-6661 1 120,000 sheets DRBL-2 C3-SP-RL
3 Feed Roller (Cassette 3) FC0-5080 1 150,000 sheets DRBL-2 C3-FD-RL
4 Pickup Roller (Cassette 4) FB6-3405 1 150,000 sheets DRBL-2 C4-PU-RL
5 Separation Roller (Cassette 4) FC6-6661 1 120,000 sheets DRBL-2 C4-SP-RL
6 Feed Roller (Cassette 4) FC0-5080 1 150,000 sheets DRBL-2 C4-FD-RL

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]

High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-B1

No. Parts name Parts num- Quanti- Estimated life Parts counter
ber ty (Service mode)
Intermediate Sub item
item
1 High Capacity Cassette Pickup Roller FL0-4002 1 500,000 sheets DRBL-2 HCCPU-RL
2 High Capacity Cassette Separation Roller FL0-1674 1 500,000 sheets DRBL-2 HCCSP-RL
3 High Capacity Cassette Feed Roller FL0-2885 1 500,000 sheets DRBL-2 HCCFD-RL

[1]

[2]

[3]

Paper Deck Unit-F1

No. Parts name Parts num- Quanti- Estimated life Parts counter
ber ty (Service mode)
Intermediate Sub item
item
1 Deck Pickup Roller FL0-4500 1 1,000,000 DRBL-2 PD-PU-RL
sheets
2 Deck Separation Roller FC0-9631 1 1,000,000 DRBL-2 PD-SP-RL
sheets

154
 3. Periodical Service

No. Parts name Parts num- Quanti- Estimated life Parts counter
ber ty (Service mode)
Intermediate Sub item
item
3 Deck Feed Roller FC0-9450 1 1,000,000 DRBL-2 PD-FD-RL
sheets

Inner Finisher-J1, Inner 2/4 Hole Puncher-C1

No. Parts name Parts num- Quanti- Estimated life Parts counter
ber ty (Service mode)
Intermediate Sub item
item
1 Staple Unit FM1-N381 1 500,000 times DRBL-2 FIN-STPR
2 Staple-free Staple Unit FM1-C429 1 30,000 times DRBL-2 FR-STPL

Booklet Finisher-Y1, Staple Finisher-Y1, 2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1

No. Parts name Parts num- Quanti- Estimated life Parts counter
ber ty (Service mode)
Intermediate Sub item
item
1 Staple Unit FM1-L281 1 500,000 times DRBL-2 FIN-STPR
2 Stitcher Unit *1 FL0-6966 1 100,000 times DRBL-2 SDL-STP
3 Staple-free Staple Unit FM1-K422 1 30,000 times DRBL-2 FR-STPL
4 Stack Tray Torque Limiter FE3-9778 2 200,000 sheets DRBL-2 TRY-TQLM
5 Paddle Unit FE3-6957 4 1,000,000 DRBL-2 FIN-MPDL
sheets
6 Stack Delivery Lower Roller Clutch FK4-1312 1 1,000,000 DRBL-2 SW-RL-CL
sheets
7 Escape Feed Clutch FK4-1312 1 1,000,000 DRBL-2 ESC-CL
sheets
8 Static Eliminator (Stack Tray Delivery Assem- FL0-5052 1 1,000,000 DRBL-2 DL-STC
bly) sheets
9 Static Eliminator (Escape Delivery Assembly) FL0-5056 1 1,000,000 DRBL-2 TRY-STC1
sheets
10 Static Eliminator (Saddle Delivery Assembly) *1 FL0-2207 2 1,000,000 DRBL-2 SDL-STC
sheets

*1: Booklet Finisher-Y1 only

155
 3. Periodical Service

Cleaning/Check/Adjustment Locations

No. Category Name Timing Work de- Cleaning method

scription
1 Host machine Transfer Guide Whenever Cleaning
needed
2 Developing Push-on Roller Whenever Cleaning
needed
3 Fixing Inlet Guide Whenever Cleaning
needed
4 Pre-registration Guide (Static Elimina- Whenever Cleaning
tion Fabric) needed
5 Reader Both sides of the Original Glass (Large) Whenever Cleaning Clean when soiling is remarkable (includ-
needed ing the back side White Plate)
6 Both sides of the Original Glass (Small) Whenever Cleaning Clean when soiling is remarkable
needed
7 Scanner Mirror (1st to 4th) Whenever Cleaning
needed
8 1-path ADF Post-separation Sensor Whenever Cleaning Perform as needed basis during a service
needed visit for parts replacement
9 Registration Roller Whenever Cleaning If it is soiled or foreign matters are attach-
needed ed, clean with alcohol and lint-free paper.
10 Lead Roller 1 Whenever Cleaning
needed
11 Lead Roller 2 Whenever Cleaning
needed
12 Lead Roller 3 Whenever Cleaning
needed
13 Pullout Roller Whenever Cleaning
needed
14 Rollers/Slave Rollers Whenever Cleaning
needed
15 Original Sensor Whenever Cleaning
needed
16 Double Feed Sensor (Transmission) Whenever Cleaning
needed
17 Double Feed Sensor (Reception) Whenever Cleaning
needed
18 ADF height adjustment Whenever Adjustment
needed
19 Reverse ADF Pickup Roller Unit (Pickup Roller and Whenever Cleaning Wipe with a cloth tightly wrung out with
Feed Roller) needed water or neutral detergent, and then wipe
20 Separation Roller Whenever Cleaning with a dry cloth.
needed
21 Registration Roller Whenever Cleaning
needed
22 Feed Guide (Dust-collecting Tape) Whenever Cleaning
needed
23 Delivery Reverse Roller Whenever Cleaning
needed
24 Rollers/Slave Rollers Whenever Cleaning
needed
25 Scrapers Whenever Cleaning
needed
26 White Plate (Copyboard) Whenever Cleaning User maintenance item
needed Wipe with a cloth tightly wrung out with
27 Platen Roller Whenever Cleaning water or neutral detergent, and then wipe
needed with a dry cloth.

156
 3. Periodical Service

No. Category Name Timing Work de- Cleaning method

scription
28 Reverse ADF White Sheet Whenever Cleaning User maintenance item
needed Wipe with a cloth tightly wrung out with
water or neutral detergent, and then wipe
with a dry cloth.
29 ADF height adjustment Whenever Adjustment Adjust when the height is not appropriate
needed

157
4 Parts Replacement
and Cleaning
Preface..............................................159
List of Parts....................................... 160
External Cover.................................. 183
Original Exposure System.................197
Document Feeder System................ 207
Main Controller System.....................250
Laser Exposure System.................... 260
Image Formation System.................. 262
Fixing System....................................271
Pickup/Feed System......................... 287
External Auxiliary Control System.....303
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Preface

Outline
This chapter describes disassembly and reassembly procedures of the printer.
The service technician is to identify the cause of printer failures according to follow the disassembly procedures of each part to
replace the defective parts or the consumable parts.
Note the following precautions when working on the printer.
• Before disassembling or reassembling the printer, be sure to disconnect its power cord from the electrical outlet.
• When having removed the Drum Unit from the host machine before disassembling and assembling the machine, be sure to
put the Photosensitive Drum in a protective bag even in a short period of time to prevent the adverse effect of light.
• Reassembling procedures are followed by the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise specified.
• Note the length, diameters, and locations of screws as you remove them. When reassembling the printer, be sure to use them
in their original locations.
• Do not run the printer with any parts removed as a general rule.
• Ground yourself by touching the metal part of the printer before handling the PCB to reduce the possibility of damage caused
by static electricity.
• When you replace the part that the rating plate or the product code label is attached, be sure to remove the rating plate or the
product code label and put it to the new part.

Points to Note when Tightening a Screw

For reduction in weight, thin plates are used in some parts of this machine.
In the case of a screw hole with a triangle mark near it as shown in the figure below, strongly tightening the screw may damage
or deform the screw hole.
In the case of a screw hole with a triangle mark, carefully tighten the screw, taking care not to apply too much force.

The recommended torque value is shown below as a reference value.

Types of screws
Screw (RS tightening) W Sems Binding TP
Fastened member Metal Resin Metal Resin Metal Resin Metal Resin
Tightening M4 Approx. 1.6 Approx. 1.6 Approx. 1.6 Approx. 0.8 Approx. 1.6 Approx. 0.8 Approx. 1.6 Approx. 0.8
torque M3 Approx. 0.8 Approx. 0.8 Approx. 0.6 Approx. 0.6 Approx. 0.6 Approx. 0.6 Approx. 0.6 Approx. 0.6
(N*m)

* For PCB, refer to the tightening torque value of resin (fastened member).

Type of Screws
RS tight W Sams Binding TP

159
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

List of Parts

List of External / Internal Cover

[2] [3]

[1]
[4]

[14]

[5]

[13] [6]

[7]
[12]

[8]

[11]

[9]
[10]

No. Name No. Name

[1] Reader Left Cover [8] Cassette 1
[2] DADF (Standard) [9] Optional Cassette 2
[3] Reader Front Cover [10] Left Lower Cover
[4] Control Panel Unit [11] Left Cover
[5] Support Cover [12] Left Upper Cover
[6] Toner Supply Cover [13] Delivery Tray
[7] Front Cover [14] Left Rear Cover

160
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

[16] [17]

[15] [18]

[26]

[25]

[19]

[24]

[20]
[23]

[21]
[22]

No. Name No. Name

[15] Reader Right Cover [21] Right Rear Cover (Upper)
[16] Copyboard Glass [22] Right Rear Cover (Lower)
[17] ADF Reading Glass [23] Right Lower Door
[18] Reader Rear Cover [24] Right Lower Cover (Front)
[19] Rear Cover [25] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray
[20] Rear Lower Cover [26] Right Cover

161
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

[4] [5]
[6]

[3]

[7]

[2] [1]

[10]
[8]
[9]

No. Name No. Name

[1] ADF Front Cover [6] Document supply tray extension
[2] ADF Left Cover [7] Document output tray extension
[3] ADF Upper Cover [8] Hinge Cover
[4] Slide Guide [9] ADF Rear Cover
[5] Document supply tray [10] Document output tray

162
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

List of Main Unit

[4]
[3]

[5]

[2]

[1]

No. Name
[1] Laser Scanner Unit
[2] Toner Supply Unit
[3] CCD Unit
[4] Right Cover Unit
[5] Multi Pickup Unit

163
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

[6]

[13]

[7]

[12]
[8]

[9]

[10]

[11]

No. Name
[6] Second Delivery Unit
[7] First Delivery Unit
[8] Fixing Assembly
[9] Developing Assembly
[10] Cassette Pickup Unit 1
[11] Cassette Pickup Unit 2
[12] Main Drive Unit
[13] First Delivery Drive Assembly

164
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Consumable Parts, Replacement Parts and Cleaning Parts

[6]

[5]

[4]

[7]
[2] [8]

[1]

[3]

[10]

[11]

[10]
[9] [11]

No. Name No. Name

[1] Developing Assembly [7] Multi-purpose Tray Roller
[2] Fixing Assembly [8] Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad
[3] Waste Toner Container [9] Pickup Roller
[4] Transfer Roller [10] Feed Roller
[5] Separation Static Eliminator [11] Separation Roller
[6] Filter - -

165
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

PCB

UN11

UN7

UN8
UN13

UN72
UN73
UN71
UN77

UN75
UN4

UN25
UN14
UN23
/UN60
UN15
UN6
UN5
UN30
UN20
UN1
UN2
UN24

UN3

Symbol Name Symbol Name

UN1 All-night Power Supply PCB UN20 Modular PCB (1 line)
UN2 DC Controller PCB UN23 Laser Driver PCB (4 Beams)
UN3 Heater PCB UN24 BD PCB
UN4 Reader Controller PCB UN25 Main Controller PCB
UN5 12/24V Power Supply PCB UN30 AC Driver PCB
UN6 HVT PCB UN60 Laser Driver PCB (2 Beams)
UN7 LCD PCB UN71 Wireless LAN PCB
UN8 Key Top PCB UN72 NFC PCB
UN11 Touch Panel PCB UN73 Device Port LED PCB
UN13 Control Panel CPU PCB UN75 Bottle Sensor PCB
UN14 Riser PCB UN77 Motion Sensor PCB
UN15 G3 FAX PCB - -

166
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Solenoid

SL12
SL13

SL2

SL1

SL11

Symbol Name
SL1 Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid
SL2 Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid
SL11 Cassette 2 Pickup Solenoid
SL12 Reversal Solenoid
SL13 No.2 Delivery Solenoid

167
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Sensor

S14
S15
S13
S12 S11
S21
S23 S20
S22 S24
S50
S10
S52 S53
S27
S7
S1
S2 S6 S51 S9
S3
S4 S19
S5 S25
S39
S35 S46
S33 S16
S30 S31 S17
S28
S32
S29 S34 S18

Symbol Name Symbol Name

S1 Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor S22 No.2 Delivery Sensor
S2 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor S23 No.2 Delivery Full Sensor
S3 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B S24 Reversal Sensor
S4 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A S25 Developing Assembly Toner Level Sensor
S5 Pre-Registration Sensor S27 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Size Sensor
S6 Loop Sensor S28 Cassette 2 Paper Width Detection Switch
S7 Duplex Feed Sensor S29 Cassette 2 Paper Length Detection Switch
S9 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Sensor S30 Cassette 1 Paper Length Detection Switch
S10 Fixing Film Shutter HP Sensor S31 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor
S11 CCD Unit HP Sensor S32 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A
S12 Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor 1 S33 Cassette 2 Pickup Sensor
S13 Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor 2 S34 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B
S14 Original Size Sensor 2 S35 Cassette 1 Paper Width Detection Switch
S15 Original Size Sensor 1 S39 Cassette Cover Sensor
S16 Environment Sensor S46 Toner Cover Open/Closed Sensor
S17 Waste Toner Full Sensor S50 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor
S18 Front Cover Open/Closed Sensor S51 Toner Feed Level Detection Sensor
S19 Fixing Outlet Sensor S52 Bottle Motor HP Sensor
S20 No.1 Delivery Full Sensor S53 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor
S21 No.1 Delivery Sensor - -

168
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Motor

M14

M20

M10

M8
M21 M2
M9 M17

M11
M1

M13

M3

Symbol Name Symbol Name

M1 Main Motor M11 Polygon Motor
M2 Fixing Motor M13 Cassette 1 Pickup Motor
M3 Cassette 2 Pickup Motor M14 Reader Motor
M8 Fixing Film Shutter Motor M17 Bottle Motor
M9 Duplex Feed Motor M20 Reversal Motor
M10 No.1 Delivery Motor M21 Toner Feed Motor

169
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Fan

FM12

FM3
FM7

FM1 FM4

FM2

FM5

FM6

Symbol Name
FM1 Fixing Cooling Fan (Rear)
FM2 Fixing Cooling Fan (Front)
FM3 Heat Exhaust Fan (Rear)
FM4 Heat Exhaust Fan (Front)
FM5 Power Supply Cooling Fan
FM6 Developing Cooling Fan
FM7 Delivery Cooling Fan
FM12 Main Controller Cooling Fan

170
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Switch

SW1

SW2

SW4

Symbol Name
SW1 Main Switch
SW2 Front Door Switch
SW4 Environment Switch

171
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Clutch

CL12
CL1

CL3

Symbol Name
CL1 Developing Clutch
CL3 Registration Clutch
CL12 Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Clutch

172
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Others
[2]
[1]

H5

[4]
TH1
TH2
TH3

TP1
SP1 H1, H2
[3]

H3

H4

Symbol Name Symbol Name

[1] Fixing Film H2 Fixing Heater 2
[2] Pressure Roller SP1 Speaker
[3] Developing Cylinder H3 Drum Heater
[4] Control Panel Speaker H4 Cassette Heater
TH1 Fixing Main Thermistor H5 Reader Heater
TH2 Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 H6 Option Cassette Heater
TH3 Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 H7 Option Deck Heater
H1 Fixing Heater 1 TP1 Thermoswitch

173
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Reader

STM1
UN_BO1 HTR1
HTR3

HTR2
HTR4

PS_N2

PS_N1

PS_A1 PS_R2
PS_R1
UN_BO2
UN_BO3

No. Name Refarence

STM1 Scanner Motor
PS_A1 Scanner Unit HP Sensor
PS_N1 Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (Front)
PS_N2 Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (Rear)
PS_R1 Original Size Sensor (AB)
PS_R2 Original Size Sensor (Inch)
HTR1 Reader Heater 1 (100V)
HTR3 Reader Heater 2 (200V)
HTR2 Reader Heater 1 (100V)
HTR4 Reader Heater 2 (200V)
UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB
UN_BO2 CMOS PCB
UN_BO3 LED PCB

174
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Single Pass ADF

■ ADF

FAN_A1

STM3
STM2

STM1

CL1

SL1

No. Name Refarence

CL1 Separation Clutch
SL1 Stamp Solenoid
STM1 Registration Motor
STM2 Pickup Motor
STM3 Read Motor
FAN_A1 Cooling Fan

175
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

PS_R3
PS_N1
PS_A3
PS_A5 PS_A4
UN_SNS1
PS_R1
UN_BO8
UN_BO7

PS_A9

PS_R2
PS_A6 PS_A1
PS_A2
PS_A7
UN_BO6

No. Name Refarence

PS_A1 Arch Sensor
PS_A2 Delivery Tray Sensor
PS_A3 LTR-R/ LGL Sensor
PS_A4 AB/ Inch Sensor
PS_A5 Cover Open/Closed Sensor
PS_A6 Lead Sensor 1
PS_A7 Lead Sensor 2
PS_A9 Glass Movement HP Sensor
PS_N1 Original Sensor
PS_R1 Post-separation Sensor
PS_R2 Registration Sensor
PS_R3 Large/Small Sensor
UN_BO6 Paper Width Sensor
UN_BO7 Double Feed Detection PCB (Transmission)
UN_BO8 Double Feed Detection PCB (Reception)
UN_SNS1 Original Width Volume

176
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

UN_BO1

UN_BO5
UN_BO4
UN_BO2
UN_BO3

No. Name Refarence

UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB
UN_BO2 CMOS PCB
UN_BO3 LED PCB
UN_BO4 Original set indicator
UN_BO5 Original output indicator

177
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Reversal ADF
■ External Cover
[4]

[2]

[3]
[1]

[5]

No. Name Reference

[1] Front Cover “Removing the Front Cover” on page 235
[2] Rear Cover “Removing the Rear Cover” on page 236
[3] Feeder Cover “Removing the Feeder Cover” on page 237
[4] Rear Small Cover “Removing the Rear Cover” on page 236
[5] Inner Cover “Removing the Inner Cover” on page 238

178
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Main Unit

[1]

No. Name Reference

[1] Feed Assembly “Removing the Feed Assembly” on page 230

■ Consumable Parts Requiring Periodic Replacement and Cleaning Points

[4]

[1]

[2]

[3]

No. Name Reference

[1] Pickup roller assembly “Removing the Pickup Roller Assembly” on
page 228
[2] Separation roller “Removing the Separation Roller” on page 227
[3] Stamper “Replacing the Stamp” on page 233
[4] Left hinge “Removing the Left Hinge” on page 234

179
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Clutch, Solenoid, Motor, PCB

PCB1

M2 SL1
PCB4

CL1
CL2

M1

PCB5

SL2 PCB2
PCB3

Symbol Name Main Unit Reference

M1 Pickup motor - “Removing the Pickup Motor (M1)”
on page 243
M2 Read motor - “Removing the Read Motor (M2)”
on page 243
SL1 Release solenoid - -
SL2 Stamp solenoid - -
CL1 Pickup clutch - “Removing the Pickup Clutch/Reg-
CL2 Registration clutch - istration Clutch (CL1/CL2)” on
page 244
PCB1 ADF driver PCB - “Removing the ADF Driver PCB
(PCB1)” on page 245
PCB2 Original set indicator Document supply tray “Removing the Document Set LED
PCB (PCB2)” on page 245
PCB3 Different width sensor PCB Feeder Cover “Removing the Different Width
Sensor PCB (PCB3)” on page 238
PCB4 Document width sensor PCB Document supply tray -
PCB5 Original output indicator Document supply tray -

180
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Sensor
SR8
SR14

SR15

SR5
SR7
SR6

SR12
SR11
SR10
SR9 SR13

SR2

SR3
SR1

Symbol Name Main Unit Reference

SR1 Registration sensor Feed assembly “Removing the Sensor
SR2 Read sensor Feed assembly (SR1,SR2,SR3)” on page 239
SR3 Delivery reversal sensor Feed assembly
SR5 Document set sensor - -
SR6 Cover open/closed sensor - -
SR7 Document length sensor 1 Document supply tray -
SR8 Document length sensor 2 Document supply tray -
SR9 Different width sensor 1 Feeder Cover “Removing the Different Width
SR10 Different width sensor 2 Feeder Cover Sensor PCB (PCB3)” on page 238
SR11 Different width sensor 3 Feeder Cover
SR12 Different width sensor 4 Feeder Cover
SR13 Document width sensor 1 Document supply tray -
SR14 Document width sensor 2 Document supply tray -
SR15 Document width sensor 3 Document supply tray -

181
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Other
[1]

[2]

No. Name Reference

[1] Right hinge “Removing the Right Hinge” on page 246
[2] Platen roller “Removing the Platen Roller” on page 247

182
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

External Cover

Removing the Reader Front Cover

■ Procedure
1. Open the ADF.

2. Remove the Reader Front Cover [1].

• 2 Rubber Caps [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
• 2 Hooks [4]

[1] [2]
[3]
2x

[3]
[2]
[4]

Removing the Reader Left Cover

■ Procedure
1. Open the ADF.

2. Remove the Reader Left Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 3 Hooks [3]

2x

[3]

[2]

[1]

Removing the Reader Right Cover

■ Procedure
1. Open the ADF.

183
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Reader Right Cover [1].

• 1 Rubber Cap [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
• 3 Hooks [4]

[4]
2x

[1]

[4]

[3]

[2]

Removing the Reader Rear Cover

■ Procedure
1. Lift up the hinge part [1] of the ADF to set it to the book original mode.

[1]

184
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Reader Rear Small Cover [1].

• 2 Rubber Caps [2]
• 2 Screws [3]

2x

[3] [1]

[3]
[2]

3. Remove the Reader Rear Cover [1].

• 2 Rubber Caps [2]
• 4 Screws [3]
• 2 Hooks [4]

4x

[1]

[3]
[4]
[4]

[3]
[2]

Removing the Front Cover

■ Procedure
1. Open the Front Cover.

185
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Front Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Hinge Pins [3]

2x

[2]

[2]

[3]

[1]

Removing the Front Inner Cover

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Front Cover.“Removing the Front Cover” on page 185

2. Remove the Drum Unit.“Removing the Drum Unit” on page 269

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Developing Unit Cover [1].
• 1 Screw [2]

1x

[2] [1]

186
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Waste Toner Support Base [1].

• 1 Screw [2]

1x

[1]

[2]

3. Open the Toner Supply Cover [1], and remove the Toner Bottle [2].

[2]

[1]

4. Remove the Front Inner Cover [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
• 1 Connector [3]

[2]
4x 1x [3]

[1]

[2]

Removing the Left Upper Cover

■ Procedure
1. Open the Toner Supply Cover [1].

187
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

[1]

2. Remove the Left Upper Cover [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Claws [3]

1x 2x

[3]

[1]

[2]

Removing the Left Cover

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Left Upper Cover.“Removing the Left Upper Cover” on page 187

188
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Left Cover [1].
• 3 Screws [2]

3x

[1]

[2]

Removing the Left Rear Cover

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Left Rear Cover [1].
• 4 Screws [2]
• 1 Claw [3]

4x

1x

[3] [2]

[1] [2]

Removing the Right Front Upper Cover.

■ Procedure
1. Open the Right Cover.

189
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Right Front Upper Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Claws [3]

2x

[2]
1x

[1]
1x
[3]

Removing the Right Rear Cover (Upper)

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Right Rear Cover (Upper) [1].
• 4 Screws [2]
• 1 Claw [3]

4x 1x

[1]
[2]

[3]

[2]

190
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Removing the Right Rear Cover (Lower)

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Right Rear Cover (Upper).“Removing the Right Rear Cover (Upper)” on page 190

■ Procedure
1. Open the Cassette Right Upper Cover [1].

[1]

2. Remove the Handle Cover [1].

• 1 Claw [2]

[2]
1x

[1]

3. Lift the handle [1] on the right rear side, and remove the screw [2].

[1]

1x

[2]

191
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. Remove the Right Rear Cover (Lower) [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Claw [3]

1x

1x [3]

[1]

[2]

Removing the Rear Cover

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Rear Cover [1].
• 4 Screws [2]

4x
[2]

[1]

[2]

192
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Removing the Rear Lower Cover

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Connector Cover [1].
• 1 Screw [2]

1x

[2] [1]

2. If the Cassette Pedestal is installed, disconnect the connectors [1].

• 3 Connectors [1]

3x

[1]

3x

193
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Remove the Power Supply Cord Retainer [1] and the Power Supply Cord [2] (100/120V models only).
• 1 Screw [3]

[2]

1x

[1]

[3]

4. Remove the Rear Lower Cover [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
• 1 Claw [3]
• 2 Hooks [4]

4x 1x
[1]

[3]

[4]
[2]
[2]
[4]

Removing the Delivery Tray 1

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Left Upper Cover.“Removing the Left Upper Cover” on page 187

194
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Delivery Tray 1 [1].
• 3 Screws [2]

3x

[1]

[2]

Removing the Delivery Tray 2

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Delivery Tray 1.“Removing the Delivery Tray 1” on page 194

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Delivery Tray 2 [1].
• 1 Screw [2]

1x

[1]

[2]

195
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Removing the Delivery Rear Cover (Upper/Lower)

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Delivery Rear Cover (Upper/Lower) [1].
• 1 Screw [2]

[1]

1x

[2]

196
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Original Exposure System

Removing the Reader Controller PCB

■ Procedure
1. Lift up the hinge part [1] of the ADF to set it to the book original mode.

[1]

2. Open the ADF.

3. Remove the Reader Cable Cover [1].

• 2 Rubber Caps [2]
• 2 Screws [3]

2x

[1]

[3]

[2]
[3]

[2]

197
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. Disconnect the connector [1] and the 2 Flat Cables [2] from the Reader Controller PCB.
• 2 Connectors (with a hook) [3]

3x
[2]

[2]
[1]

[3]

[3]

5. Remove the Reader Rear Cover [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
• 3 Rubber Caps [3]

4x

[2] [3]

[3] [2]
[2] [2]
[1]

[3]

6. Remove the Reader Controller PCB Cover Plate [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
• 2 Hooks [3]

[3]
4x

[1]

[2]
[2]

7. Remove the Flat Cable [2] from the Reader Controller PCB [1].
• 1 Connector (with a hook)

198
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

8. Remove the Reader Controller PCB Unit.

• 5 Connectors [3]
• 2 Edge Saddles [4]
• 4 Screws [5]
• 1 Video Cable [6]

[3] [2]
2x [3] 4x
[4]
[1]

4x

[4] [5]
[6]

[1] [5]

199
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

9. Remove the Reader Controller PCB [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 4 Screws [3]

[3]
5x
[3]

[3]

[1]

[2]

NOTE:
Caution when installing the Reader Controller PCB [1]
• When installing the Reader Controller PCB [1], tighten the screw [2] first.

CAUTION:
• The Reader Controller PCB in factory default setting is different by the host machine type.

Host Machine Type Reader Controller PCB in factory default setting

PCB Configuration Firmware
Reversal ADF model Reversal ADF * Reversal ADF model
Single pass ADF model Single pass ADF model * Single pass ADF model
ADF selectable model Single pass / Reversal ADF model * Reversal ADF model

*Connector configuration is different by the host machine type.

• The Reader Controller PCB for service part is 1 type described below.

Reader Controller PCB for service part

PCB Configuration Firmware
Single pass / Reversal ADF model * Reversal ADF model

*Connector configuration is different by the host machine type.

• When the Reader Controller PCB for service part is installed on the Single Pass ADF, a message prompting the user
to upgrading the firmware immediately after turning ON the host machine. When executing the upgrade following the
message, the firmware for the single pass ADF is installed. However, the firmware is not upgraded when the Reader
Controller PCB for service part is installed on the reversal ADF model or platen cover model.
• If upgrading the firmware is skipped, the ADF enters the limited functions mode. a "The feeder needs to be checked."
message is displayed in the status line and a "Ready to copy. (Functions Limited) Cannot use Feeder" message is
displayed on the copy screen. a message prompting the user to upgrading the firmware each time of turning ON or
OFF the host machine. In order to maintain consistency in versions for options, upgrade or downgrade the firmware
regardless of the setting in service mode > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG.

10. <When the ADF driver PCB and the reader controller PCB is replaced>
Actions after Replacement: “Actions after Parts Replacement” on page 340

200
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Cleaning the Reader Scanner Unit Scanner Mirror

■ Procedure
1. Open the ADF.

2. Remove the Glass Retainer (Right) [1] and then remove the Copyboard Glass [2].
• 2 Screws [3]

[3]
2x

[3]

[1]

[2]

CAUTION:
Grease is applied on the 2 Rail Shafts [1] of the Reader Scanner Unit. If you have touched the grease, be careful not to put
it to other parts.

[1]

3. Move the belt [1], and move the Reader Scanner Unit [2] to the cut-off [3] of the Reader Unit.

[3]

[1]

[2] [2]

4. Loosen the screw [1] to release the tension applied on the belt.

201
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

5. Remove the 2 screws [2] securing the LED Unit.

2x 1x

[2]

[1]

6. Move the Reader Scanner Unit in the direction of the arrow while paying attention not to make it contact with the
frame of the Reader, and place it as shown in the figure below.

[1] [1]

7. Remove the LED Unit [1].

• 2 Connectors [2]
• 3 Hooks

2x

[1]

[2]

8. Return the Scanner Unit to its original position.

202
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

9. Clean the mirror [1] with lint-free paper. The following 4 mirrors can be cleaned.

[1]

[1]

[2]

NOTE:
The rearmost mirror [2] cannot be cleaned. However, it is a dustproof mirror, so there is no need to clean it.

Removing the Reader Scanner Unit

■ Procedure
1. Open the ADF [1].

203
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Glass Retainer (Right) [1] and then remove the Copyboard Glass [2].
• 2 Screws [3]

[3]
2x

[3]

[1]

[2]

CAUTION:
Grease is applied on the 2 Rail Shafts [1] of the Reader Scanner Unit. If you have touched the grease, be careful not to put
it to other parts.

[1]

3. Move the belt [1], and move the Reader Scanner Unit [2] to the cut-off [3] of the Reader Unit.

[3]

[1]

[2] [2]

204
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. Loosen the screw [1] to release the tension applied on the belt. After that, remove the belt [3] from the Reader
Scanner Unit [2].

1x

[3]

[1] [2]

CAUTION:
Holding the Reader Scanner Unit
• Be sure to hold both edges [1].
• Do not touch the PCB [2] and the mirror [3].

[3]

[1]

[1]

[2]

5. Place paper [1] on the Stream Reading Glass, and place the Reader Scanner Unit on it with its upside [2] down.

[2]
[1]

205
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

6. Disconnect the Flat Cable [1] (with Protection Sheet [2]) from the Reader Scanner Unit.
• 1 Connector (with a hook) [3]
• Guide [A]

[A] [1]
1x

[2]

[3]

CAUTION:
When installing the Reader Scanner Unit, be sure to insert the 4 protrusions [2] of the Flat Cable Protection Sheet [1] into
the guide [A].

[1]

[A]
[2]

[2]

NOTE:
Installation Procedure
When installing the belt to the Reader Scanner Unit, it can be installed easily by removing the belt [2] from the pulley [1].

[1]

[2]

7. Actions after Replacement : “Actions after Parts Replacement” on page 342

206
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Document Feeder System

Single Pass ADF

■ Removing the ADF Pre-separation Unit / ADF Separation Roller
● Procedure
1. Open the Feeder Cover [1].

2. Remove the Pre-separation Unit [2].

• 2 Claws [3]

[1]
2x

[2]

[3]

3. Remove the ADF Separation Roller Shaft [1].

[1]

207
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. Remove the ADF Separation Roller [1] from the shaft [2].
• 1 Claw [3]

1x [2]

[1]

[3]

CAUTION:
Clear the parts counter in the following service mode after replacing the ADF Separation Roller.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 > DF-SP-RL

■ Removing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit

● Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the ADF Pickup Roller and the ADF Feed Roller.

1. Remove the Feeder Inner Cover (Front) [1] and the Feeder Inner Cover (Rear) [2].
• 2 Claws [3]
• 4 Hooks [4]

[3] [2]
2x

[1]

[4]

[4]

208
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Resin Ring [1].

[1]

3. Pull out the shaft while shifting the 2 bushings [1].

[1]

4. Remove the ADF Pickup Roller Unit [1].

[1]

■ Removing the ADF Pickup Roller and the ADF Feed Roller
● Preparation
1. Remove the ADF Pickup Roller Unit.“Removing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit” on page 208

● Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the ADF Pickup Roller and the ADF Feed Roller.

209
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

1. Remove the bushing [1] and the 2 Resin Rings [2] from the ADF Pickup Roller Unit.

[2]

[1]

2. Remove the Roller Holder (Front) [1] and the Parallel Pin [2].

[1]

[2]

210
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Remove the ADF Pickup Roller [1] and the ADF Feed Roller [2].
• 1 Claw [3]

1x [2]

[1]

[3]

CAUTION:
Be sure to install the ADF Pickup Roller [1] with the protrusion [2] on the front side and install the ADF Feed Roller [3] with
the bearing [4] on the rear side.

[4] [3]

[2]

[1]

211
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

CAUTION:
Installing the Roller Holder (Front) and the Parallel Pin
1. Pass the Roller Holder (Front) [1] through the shaft of the ADF Pickup Roller Unit, and slide it until it comes to the hole
for the Parallel Pin [2].
2. Rotate the gear [3] in the direction shown in the figure below so that the hole for the Parallel Pin is oriented horizontally,
and install the Parallel Pin.

[3]

[1]

[2]

3. Install the Roller Holder (Front) [1] by aligning its grove [2] with the Parallel Pin.

[2]
[1]

CAUTION:
Clear the parts counter in the following service mode after replacing the ADF Pickup Roller.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 > DF-PU-RL
Clear the parts counter in the following service mode after replacing the ADF Feed Roller.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 > DF-FD-RL

■ Installing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit

● Procedure
1. Hold the ADF Pickup Roller Unit while lifting the 2 flags [1] with your fingers.

212
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Install the bushing [2].

[1]

[2]

3. Place the 2 flags [1] of the ADF Pickup Roller Unit on the 2 guides [2] of the feeder, and insert the Pickup Roller Unit
side from above.

[2]

[1]

4. Move the shaft [2] of the ADF Pickup Roller Unit under the 2 flags [1] on the feeder side. Shift the bushing [3] while
compressing the spring, and insert the shaft [2] into the Shaft Support [4] of the feeder. (It is advisable to insert it
from the rear side.)

[1]
[2] [4]

[3]

5. Put the shaft [1] of the ADF Pickup Roller Unit into the Shaft Support (front side) [2] of the feeder, and secure it with
the bushing [3].

[1]
[2]

[3]

213
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

6. Secure the Resin Ring on the front side.

7. Install the Feeder Inner Cover (Front) and the Feeder Inner Cover (Rear).

■ Removing the ADF

● Procedure
1. Open the 2 Hinge Covers [1], and remove the 2 Hinge Open/Close Guide Plates [2].
• 4 Screws [3]

4x
[1]

[2]
[2]

[3] [3]

2. Open the ADF.

3. Remove the Reader Cable Cover [1].

• 2 Rubber Caps [2]
• 2 Screws [3]

2x

[1]

[3]

[2]
[3]

[2]

4. Disconnect the connector [1] and the 2 Flat Cables [2] from the Reader Controller PCB.
• 2 Connectors (with a hook) [3]

3x
[2]

[2]
[1]

[3]

[3]

214
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

5. Remove the ADF [1].

• 4 Screws [2]

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage the white sheet [1] of the ADF.
• Be careful not to damage the Reader Communication Cable Guide [2] when placing the ADF.

[1]

[2]

4x

[1]

[2]
[2] [2]

■ Installing the White Plate

● Preparation
1. Remove the White Plate.

● Procedure
1. Open the ADF.

215
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Place the White Plate on the Copyboard Glass while placing "Rear" on the plate on the rear side, and "Front" on the
front side. Be sure to align the Index Sheet with the left side of the White Plate.

3. Close the ADF [1]. Then, open it again.

[1]

4. Press the White Plate [1] from the bottom left shown in the figure.

[1]

216
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

5. Pull the lever [1] on the upper side of the ADF, and open the cover [2] of the document reading area. Hold down the 8
areas indicated with circles shown in the figure below, and secure the White Plate and the cover of the ADF document
reading area in place.

[1]

[2]

CAUTION:
Check that the White Plate [1] is not placed on the Index Sheet [2].

[1] [2] [1] [2]

[2] [1] [2] [1]

■ Removing the ADF Scanner Unit

● Preparation
1. Removing the ADF Pre-separation Unit“Removing the ADF Pre-separation Unit / ADF Separation Roller” on page 207

217
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

● Procedure
1. Remove the Upper Inner Cover [1].
• 1 Screw [2]

[2]
1x

[1]

2. Remove the connector [1] and the round shape terminal [2].
• 1 Screw [3]
• 1 Harness Guide [4]

[3]
1x

1x
[2]

[4]
[1]

3. Free the spring [1] from the hook [2].

[1]

[2]

218
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. While opening the Pickup Tray [1], remove the Delivery Guide [2].
• 4 Screws [3]
• 2 Claws [4]

4x [3] [2]

[1]
[2]

[3]

[4]

CAUTION:
Holding the ADF Scanner Unit
• Be sure to hold the handle [1] and the plate [2].
• Do not touch the PCB [3] and the mirror [4].

[4]

[3]

[1]
[2]

5. Disconnect the Flat Cable [2] from the ADF Scanner Unit [1].
• 1 Connector (with a hook) [3]

6. Hold the handle [4] and the plate [5], and remove the ADF Scanner Unit.
• 2 Screws (W Sems) [6]
• 1 Screw (with a spring) [7]

[6]
1x [5]

3x [7]

[1]

[2]
[3] [4]

219
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Cleaning the Paper Back Reading Glass

● Procedure
1. Pass a sheet of paper on the ADF.

NOTE:
The ADF document reading part is moved to the position for replacing or installing the Paper Back Reading Glass after passing a
sheet of paper on the ADF.

2. Open the Feeder Cover [1].

3. Remove the 2 screws [3] of the Front Cover [2].

2x
[3]

[1]

[3]

[2]

4. Open the ADF [1] and remove the 2 screws [3] of the Front Cover [2].

2x [2]

[1] [3]

[3]

5. Open the cover [1] of the ADF document reading part.

220
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

6. Open the Rear Guide [2] and remove the Paper Back Reading Glass [3].

CAUTION:
Be sure to open the Rear Guide; otherwise, the roller comes in contact with the glass.

[3]

[2]

[1]

7. Clean the front surface [1] and the back surface [2] of the Paper Back Reading Glass with wet and tightly-wrung
lint-free paper [3].

[1]
[3]

[2]

CAUTION:
Do not attach the Paper Back Reading Glass over the mylar sheet when installing.

221
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Removing the Rear Cover

● Procedure
1. Open the Feeder Cover [1].

2. Remove the 3 screws [3] of the Rear Cover [2].

[1]
3x
[3]

[3]

[2]

NOTE:
The figure below shows the 3 claws [1] and the 2 protrusions [2] of the Rear Cover.

[2]

[1]

3. While opening the Pickup Tray [1], remove the Rear Cover [2].
• 3 Claws [3]
• 2 Protrusions [4]

[1]
3x

[4]

[3]

[2]
[3]

222
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. Remove the parts on the rear side of the ADF as needed.

■ Cleaning the Lead Roller 1/2/3

● Procedure

CAUTION:
To clean the Lead Roller 2 and 3, perform the procedure from step 9.

1. Open the ADF Upper Cover [1].

2. Remove the 2 screws [3] of the ADF Front Cover [2].

2x
[3]

[1]

[3]

[2]

3. Open the ADF [1], and remove the 2 screws [3] of the ADF Front Cover [2].

2x [2]

[1] [3]

[3]

4. Remove the ADF Rear Cover. “Procedure” on page 222

223
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

5. Remove the ADF Left Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]

2x

[1]

[2]

6. Remove the screws [2] one each on the front and rear of the Pressure Plate [1] of the Lead Roller 1.
• 1 Screw [3] (P Tightening)
• 1 Screw [4] (RS Tightening)

[3]
1x [2]

[1]

1x

[4]

[2]

224
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

7. Release the 2 hooks [2] on the front and rear of the Pressure Plate [1], and gently remove the Pressure Plate [1].

CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the 6 Compression Springs used inside.

NOTE:
Opening the ADF Upper Cover releases the pressure and makes it easier to perform the work.

[1]
1x 1x

[2]

[2]

8. Clean the Lead Roller 1 [1] with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

[1]

CAUTION:
When installing the Pressure Plate, check that the 6 Compression Springs are correctly set in the holder on the Lead
Roller side.

NOTE:
Opening the ADF Upper Cover releases the pressure and makes it easier to perform the work.

225
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

9. When cleaning the Lead Roller 2 [1], open the Rear Guide [3] and cover [2] of the ADF document reading area, and
clean the Lead Roller 2 with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

[1]
[3]

[2]

10. When cleaning the Lead Roller 3 [1], lift up the ADF Document Pickup Tray, and clean the Lead Roller 3 from the
original delivery outlet side with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

[1]

■ Removing the ADF Driver PCB

● Preparation
1. Removing the Rear Cover“Removing the Rear Cover” on page 222

226
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

● Procedure
1. Remove the ADF Driver PCB [1].
• 8 Connectors [2]
• 2 Screws [3]

[3] [3]
2x
[2]
[2]

8x [1]

[2]
[2]

Reversal ADF
■ Removing the Separation Roller
● Procedure
1. Open the Feeder cover [1].

[1]

2. Remove the Separation roller [1].

[1]

227
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. When replacing the Separation roller with a new one, clear the parts counter.
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 > DF-SP-RL

NOTE:
When the DADF-AV1 is installed in the iR-ADV C3500 series and iR-ADV 4500 series, the COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 >
DF-PR-PD counts up by 1 for every sheet of paper passed, regardless of the reading mode (single-sided/double-sided).
Increasing the counter value does not affect the operation, but it should be cleared if necessary.
After selecting COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 > DF-PR-PD, press the clear key to clear the counter.
Note that when the DADF-AV1 is installed in another product (Includes iR-ADV C3500III series/iR-ADV 4500III series), the COPIER
> COUNTER > DRBL-2 > DF-PR-PD does not count up.

■ Removing the Pickup Roller Assembly

● Procedure
1. Open the Feeder cover [1].

[1]

2. Remove the Pickup roller assembly [1].

[1]

3. When replacing the Pickup roller assembly with a new one, clear the parts counter.
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 > DF-PU-RL

228
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Removing this Machine from the Host Machine

● Procedure
1. Remove the Cover of Reader [1].
• 2 Rubber Caps [2]
• 2 Screws [3]

[3]

2x

[1]
[2]

2. Disconnect the Grounding Cable [1].

• 2 Connectors [2]
• 1 Screw [3]
• 2 Wire Saddles [4]

[4]

2x

1x

[2]
[1]
[3]

3. Open the ADF.

229
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. Remove the ADF [1].

CAUTION:
When holding this equipment, be careful not to touch the Platen roller [3].

• 2 Screws [2]

[2]

[3]
[1]
2x

● Actions after Reinstalling the ADF

1. Adjusting the Height.“Adjusting the Height” on page 322

2. Adjusting the Perpendicularity “Adjusting the Perpendicularity” on page 326

3. Adjusting the Reading Position“Adjusting the Reading Position” on page 330

4. Adjusting the Magnification“Adjusting the Magnification” on page 331

5. Adjusting the Image Position (Main Scanning Direction)“Adjusting the Image Position (Main Scanning Direction)”
on page 332

6. Adjusting the Image Position (Sub Scanning Direction)“Adjusting the Image Position (Sub Scanning Direction)” on
page 333

7. Adjusting the White Level “Adjusting the White Level” on page 334

■ Removing the Feed Assembly

● Preparation
1. Remove the Front Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover” on page 236

2. Remove the ADF from the host machine.“Removing this Machine from the Host Machine” on page 229

3. Remove the Feeder Cover.“Removing the Feeder Cover” on page 237

230
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

● Procedure
1. Remove the Tray holder [1].
• 1 Screw [2]

1x

[1]

[2]

2. Remove the Grounding Wire [1].

• 1 Screw [2]

1x

[1]

[2]

3. Remove the 8 Connectors [1] on the ADF driver PCB.

[1]

8x

[1]

[1]

231
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. Remove the Document supply tray [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Grounding Wire [3]
• 1 Ferrite Core [4]
• 1 Harness [5]

[1]

1x
[2]

1x
[3]

[4] [5]

5. Remove the Read motor.“Removing the Read Motor (M2)” on page 243

6. Remove the Left hinge.“Removing the Left Hinge” on page 234

7. Remove the Pickup clutch/Registration clutch.“Removing the Pickup Clutch/Registration Clutch (CL1/CL2)” on
page 244

8. Remove the Pickup motor.“Removing the Pickup Motor (M1)” on page 243

9. Remove the harness guide [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Connector [3]

[2]

1x

2x

[3] [1]

232
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

10. Remove the Feed assembly [1].

• 6 Screws [2]

[2]

6x

[2]

[2]

[1]

■ Replacing the Stamp

● Procedure
1. Open the Feeder Cover and Separation guide.

2. Remove the Stamper [1].

3. Attach the new Stamper [1]. (Be careful to set the Stamper side to the front.)

[1]

4. Close the Feeder cover and Separation guide.

CAUTION:
If the Stamper is floating, a jam can occur. Be sure to push in the Stamper until it clicks.

233
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

5. When replacing the Stamper with a new one, clear the parts counter.
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 > STAMP

■ Removing the Left Hinge

● Preparation
1. Removing the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover” on page 236

2. Remove the ADF from the host machine.“Removing this Machine from the Host Machine” on page 229

● Procedure
1. Remove the Left hinge [1].
• 6 Screws [2]

CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the Left hinge. Hold it while removing the screws from it.

[2]

6x

[1] [2]
[2]

[2]

2. When replacing the Left hinge with a new one, clear the parts counter.
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 > DF-HNG-L

234
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Removing the Front Cover

● Procedure
1. Open the Feeder Cover [1].

[1]

2. Remove the screw [1].

[1]

1x

3. Open the ADF.

4. Remove the 2 screws [2].

2x

[2]

5. Close the ADF.

235
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

6. Remove the Front Cover [1].

• 3 Hooks [2]

[2]

[1]

[2]

■ Removing the Rear Cover

● Procedure
1. Open the Feeder Cover [1].

[1]

2. Remove the Rear Small Cover [1].

• 1 Screw [2]

1x

[1]

[2]

236
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Remove the Rear Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Claws [3]

[2]

2x

2x

[1]

[3]

■ Removing the Feeder Cover

● Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover” on page 236

2. Remove the Front Cover.“Removing the Front Cover” on page 235

● Procedure
1. Remove the Harness [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Grounding Wire [3]
• 1 Connector [4]
• 1 Wire Saddle [5]
• 2 Clamps [6]

[4] [2]

1x

1x
[6]
[1]
[5] [6] [3]
1x

237
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Feeder Cover [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Positioning Pin [3]

CAUTION:
Be careful not to hang the cables while putting the rear cables through the hole at the plate.

[1]

1x

[3]

[2]

■ Removing the Inner Cover

● Preparation
1. Remove the Pickup roller assembly.“Removing the Pickup Roller Assembly” on page 228

● Procedure
1. Remove the Inner Cover [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Claws [3]

[3]

[1]

1x
[3]

2x

[2]

■ Removing the Different Width Sensor PCB (PCB3)

● Preparation
1. Remove the Inner cover.“Removing the Inner Cover” on page 238

238
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

● Procedure
1. Remove the sensor holder [1].
• 3 Screws [2]

[1]

3x

[2]

2. Remove the Different width sensor PCB [1].

• 1 Connector [2]
• 3 Claws [3]

[3] [1] [2]

1x

3x [3]
[3]

■ Removing the Sensor (SR1,SR2,SR3)

● Preparation
1. Remove the Feed assembly.“Removing the Feed Assembly” on page 230

239
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

● Procedure
1. Remove the fixing plate [1].
• 3 Screws [2]

[2]

3x

[2] [1] [2]

2. Turn over the Feed assembly, remove the following parts.

• 1 Resin ring [1]
• 1 Flange [2]
• 1 Pulley [3]
• 1 E-ring [4]
• 1 Bearing [5]
• 1 Gear [6]
• 1 Bushing [7]

[7]
[6]

[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]

240
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Remove the Platen roller unit [1].

• 2 Claws [2]

[2]

2x

[1]

[2]

4. Remove the Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]

[2]

2x

[1]

241
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

5. Remove the Lead roller 2(upper) [1].

• 1 Resin ring [2]
• 1 Flange [3]
• 1 Pulley [4]
• 1 E-ring [5]
• 1 Bearing [6]
• 1 Gear [7]
• 1 Bushing [8]

[1]

[8]
[7]

[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]

6. Remove the Sensor mount [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Claws [3]

[2]

2x

2x

[1]

[3]

242
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

7. Remove the Sensors [1].

• 3 Connectors [2]

3x

[1] SR3
[1] SR1
[1] SR2

■ Removing the Pickup Motor (M1)

● Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover” on page 236

2. Remove the Clutch unit.“Removing the Pickup Clutch/Registration Clutch (CL1/CL2)” on page 244

● Procedure
1. Remove the Pickup motor [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Spring [3]

2x

[3]

[2] [1]

● Actions after Replacement

1. Adjusting the Magnification.“Adjusting the Magnification” on page 331

■ Removing the Read Motor (M2)

● Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover” on page 236

243
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

● Procedure
1. Remove the Read motor [1].
• 1 Connector [2]
• 3 Screws [3]
• 1 Spring [4]

[2] [1]

1x

3x

[4]

[3]

● Actions after Replacement

1. Adjusting the Magnification.“Adjusting the Magnification” on page 331

■ Removing the Pickup Clutch/Registration Clutch (CL1/CL2)

● Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover” on page 236

2. Remove the Feeder Cover.“Removing the Feeder Cover” on page 237

● Procedure
1. Remove the Clutch support plate [1].
• 3 Connectors [2]
• 2 Screws [3]

[2] [1]

2x

3x

[2]
[3]

244
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the 2 Clutches [1].

• 2 Resin rings [2]
• 2 Bushings [3]

[1] CL1

[1] CL2

[3]

[2]

■ Removing the ADF Driver PCB (PCB1)

● Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover” on page 236

● Procedure
1. Remove the ADF driver PCB [1].
• 10 Connectors [2]
• 2 Screws [3]

[3]

10x
[2]

2x
[2]
[2]

[2] [1]

■ Removing the Document Set LED PCB (PCB2)

● Preparation
1. Remove the Inner cover.“Removing the Inner Cover” on page 238

245
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

● Procedure
1. Remove the sensor holder [1].
• 3 Screws [2]

[1]

3x

[2]

2. Remove the LED PCB [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Connector [3]

1x

1x

[1]
[3]
[2]

■ Removing the Right Hinge

● Preparation
1. Remove the ADF from the host machine.“Removing this Machine from the Host Machine” on page 229

● Procedure
1. Turn over the ADF.

246
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Right hinge [1].

• 2 Screws [2]

[2]

2x

[1]

■ Removing the Platen Roller

● Preparation
1. Remove the Feed assembly.“Removing the Feed Assembly” on page 230

● Procedure
1. Remove the fixing plate [1]
• 3 Screws [2]

[2]

3x

[2] [1] [2]

247
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Turn over the Feed assembly, remove the following parts.

• 1 Resin ring [1]
• 1 Flange [2]
• 1 Pulley [3]
• 1 E-ring [4]
• 1 Bearing [5]
• 1 Gear [6]
• 1 Bushing [7]

[7]
[6]

[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]

3. Remove the Platen roller unit [1].

• 2 Claws [1]

[2]

2x

[1]

[2]

248
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. Remove the Platen roller [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Plate [3]
• 1 Platen roller holder (front) [4]
• 1 Bushing [5]
• 1 Gear [6]
• 1 Platen roller holder (rear)[7]

2x
[6] [7]
[2]

[1]

[5]

[2] [3] [4]

249
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Main Controller System

Removing the Main Controller PCB

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Right Rear Cover (Upper).“Removing the Right Rear Cover (Upper)” on page 190

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Do not transfer the following parts to another host machine whose serial number is different. The host machine does not
start up normally and may become unrecoverable in some cases.
• Main Controller PCB 2 (with the Memory PCB unremoved)
• TPM PCB
• FLASH PCB
• Memory PCB

1. Hold the handle [1] and remove the Main Controller PCB [2].
• 1 Screw [3]
• 1 Connector [4]

[2]

[4]

1x

1x

[1]
[3]

250
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the harness of the HDD Unit [1].

• 2 Connectors [2]
• 1 Wire Saddle [3]
• 1 Harness Guide [4]

2x
[1] [1]

2x [3]

[2]

NOTE:

3. Turn over the Main Controller PCB [1], and remove the HDD Unit [2].
• 4 Screws [3]

[2]

4x

[1]

NOTE:
After replacement of the Main Controller PCB, there is no need to set/register the data again.

251
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

CAUTION:
When replacing the Main Controller PCB, transfer the following parts from the old PCB to the new PCB.
• • TPM PCB [1]
• Flash PCB [2]
• Memory PCB [3]

[3]

[1] [2]

CAUTION:
Points to Note when Replacing the Main Controller PCB
1. Hold the handle [1] and insert the Main Controller PCB [2].
2. Check the connection of the connector [3], and secure it with the screw [4].

[2]

[3]

1x

1x

[1]
[4]

Removing the Riser PCB

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Right Rear Cover (Upper).“Removing the Right Rear Cover (Upper)” on page 190

252
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover” on page 192

■ Procedure
1. Remove the screw [1], loosen the 4 screws [2], and remove the Controller Box Cover [3].

1x

4x

[2]

[3]
[1]

2. Remove the Riser PCB [1].

• 1 Flat Cable [2]
• 11 Connectors [3]
• 5 Screws [4]

[1]
12x
[3]

[2]

5x

[4]

253
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Removing the HDD

■ Preparation

CAUTION:
• When removing the HDD, be careful of destruction by electrostatic discharge.
• Be sure to keep the HDD free from impact.

1. Actions before Replacement: “Actions before Parts Replacement” on page 339

2. Remove the Right Rear Cover (Upper).“Removing the Right Rear Cover (Upper)” on page 190

■ Procedure
1. Open the HDD Lid [1].
• 1 Screw [2]

1x

[1]
[2]

2. Remove the HDD Unit [1].

CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the HDD Unit [1].

[1]

254
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Remove the HDD Fixation Plate [2] from the HDD [1].
• 4 Screws [3]

[3]
[3]

4x

[1]

[2]

4. Actions after Replacement:“Actions after Parts Replacement ” on page 339

Removing the Control Panel (Capacitive-Type)

■ Procedure
1. Open the ADF [1], and raise the Control Panel [2].

[1]

[2]

2. Remove the Reader Front Cover [1].

• 2 Rubber Caps [2]
• 2 Screws [3] (RS Tightening; M3)
• 2 Hooks [4]
• 1 Boss [5]

2x
[5]

[2]
[3]

[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]

255
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Remove the Control Panel Arm Cover [1].

• 2 Rubber Caps [2]
• 2 Screws [3] (RS Tightening; M3)

2x

[2]
[1]

[2]

4. Remove the 3 screws [2] securing the Control Panel Hinge [1].

[2]
3x

[1]

5. Place the paper [1] on the Copy Board Glass to prevent damage on the Control Panel.

[1]

256
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

6. Free the Control Panel Cable [1] from the 4 Cable Guides [2].

4x

[1]

[2]

7. Pull out the Control Panel [1].

8. Remove the Control Panel Connector Cover [2].

• 5 Claws [3]

9. Remove the Cable Guide [4].

[1] [3]
[2]
3x 1x

[4]

[4]
[5]

10. Turn over the Control Panel [1] on the Copy Board Glass.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the Control Panel when turning it over.

[1]

257
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

11. Remove the Cable Holder [1].

• 1 Connector [2]
• 3 Hooks [3]
• 1 Boss [4]

1x

[3]

[2]

[4]
[1]
[3]

12. Disconnect the USB Cable [1] and the Control Panel Cable [2].

2x

[2]

[1]

13. Remove the 6 screws [2] securing the Control Panel Rear Cover [1].
• 4 Rubber Caps [3]

CAUTION:
The Control Panel is still connected with the Grounding Wire.

[3] [2]
[3]

6x
[2]

[2]

[2]

[1]

258
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

14. Remove the Control Panel Right Hinge [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Boss [3]

[1]
1x

[3]

[2]

15. Turn over the Control Panel Rear Cover [1], remove the screw [2] to disconnect the Grounding Wire [3], and remove
the Control Panel [4].

[2]
[4]
1x
[3]

[1]

259
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Laser Exposure System

Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

■ Preparation

CAUTION:
When servicing on and around the Laser Assembly, be sure to turn OFF the power of the host machine before starting
the work.

CAUTION:
Do not disassemble the Laser Scanner Unit because it requires adjustment.
Disassembling the unit may cause functional problems.

1. Remove the Left Upper Cover.“Removing the Left Upper Cover” on page 187

2. Remove the Left Cover.“Removing the Left Cover” on page 188

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Scanner Fixation Plate [1].
• 1 Screw [2]

[1]

1x

[2]

260
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Pull out the Laser Scanner Unit [1].

• 2 Connectors [2]

CAUTION:
• Do not touch the PCB on the Laser Scanner Unit [1].
• Do not move the volume resistor on the PCB.

2x
[2]

[1]

3. Remove the Laser Scanner Unit [1].

• 2 Connectors [2]
• 2 Sponges [3]

[2]
2x

[1]

[1]

[3]

4. Actions after Replacement: “Actions after Replacement” on page 339

261
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Image Formation System

Removing the Developing Assembly

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Drum Unit. “Removing the Drum Unit” on page 269

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Developing Assembly [1].
• 1 Connector [2]

[1]
1x

[2]

CAUTION:
Points to Note at Installation
• Be sure to insert it with the guide [1] of the Developing Assembly fitted in the groove [2] of the host machine.

[2] [1]

262
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

NOTE:
When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > DV-UNT-K

Removing the Developing Cylinder

■ Preparation

CAUTION:
Do not touch the Developing Cylinder or give a shock to it.

CAUTION:
Points to Note at Installation
• Many self tapping screws are used in the Developing Assembly. Do not overtighten the self tapping screws, or the screw
holes will break.

1. Remove the Developing Assembly.“Removing the Developing Assembly” on page 262

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Top Cover [1].
• 4 Screws [2]

[2]

4x

[1]

2. Remove the ring [1], gear [2], Parallel Pin [3], and Shaft Support [4].

[2]
[1]

[4]
[3]

263
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Remove the Gear Unit [1].

• 3 Screws [2]

3x

[2]

[1]

[2]

4. Remove the holder [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Push-on Roller [3]
• 1 Bearing [4]

2x

[1]

[4]

[3]

[2]

5. Remove the holder [1].

• 2 Screws [2]

2x

[2] [1]

264
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

6. Remove the Developing Contact Spring [1].

[1]

7. Remove the holder [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Push-on Roller [3]
• 1 Bearing [4]

2x
[3]

[2]

[1]
[4]

8. Remove the Blade Unit [1].

• 2 Screws [2]

[2]

2x

[1]

265
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

9. Remove the Developing Cylinder [1].

[1]

Removing the Transfer Roller

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller during the work.

1. Open the Right Cover.

2. Remove the Stopper (Rear) [1].

• 1 Claw [2]

1x

[2]

[1]

266
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Remove the Transfer Roller [1].

• 1 Stopper (Front) [2]
• 1 Claw [3]
• 1 Shaft Support (Rear) [4]

1x [3]

[2]

2
[4]

[1]

CAUTION:
Points to Note at Installation
• Be sure to install it so that the longitudinal side of the Transfer Roller is positioned on the rear side of the host machine.
• Be sure to fit the spring [1] of the Transfer Roller onto the boss [2].

[2]

[1]

NOTE:
When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > TR-ROLL

Removing the Separation Static Eliminator

■ Procedure
1. Open the Right Cover.

2. Remove the Separation Static Eliminator [1].

• 1 Claw [2]

267
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

1x [2]

[1]

NOTE:
When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > SP-SC-EL

Removing the Waste Toner Container

■ Procedure
1. Open the Front Cover.

2. Turn the Lock Lever [1] in the direction of the arrow, and remove the Waste Toner Container [2].

[1]

[2]

3. Attach the accompanying cap [2] to the opening of the Waste Toner Container [1] to prevent leakage of the content.

[1]

[2]

NOTE:
When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > WST-TNR

268
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Removing the Drum Unit

■ Preparation
1. Open the Right Cover.

2. Remove the Waste Toner Container.“Removing the Waste Toner Container” on page 268

■ Procedure
1. Remove the screw [2] of the Developing Pressure Lever [1], and turn the lever [1] in the direction of the arrow.

1x

[1]
[2]

2. Remove the Drum Unit [1].

[1]

CAUTION:
• Do not touch the surface of the drum during the work.
• Be sure to cover the removed Drum Unit with paper to block light.

NOTE:
When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > PT-DRM

Removing the Toner Supply Unit

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Front Inner Cover. “Removing the Front Inner Cover” on page 186

2. Removing the Removing the Delivery Tray 2. “Removing the Delivery Tray 2” on page 195

3. Remove the Developing Assembly. “Removing the Developing Assembly” on page 262

269
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Toner Supply Unit [1].
• 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Screw [3]

CAUTION:
When removing the Toner Supply Unit [1], do not tilt it as toner may spill out.

[2]

1x

[3]

1x

[1]

2. Remove the Bottle Ring [1].

• 2 Screws [2]

CAUTION:
In the case of a Toner Supply Unit [1] provided as a service part, the Bottle Ring is not connected to the unit.

[2]

2x

[1]

270
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Fixing System

Removing the Fixing Assembly

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
The Fixing Assembly right after power OFF is hot and may cause burn injury. Be sure to perform the operation after the
assembly is surely cooled.

1. Open the Right Cover.

2. Remove the screw [1] on the front side, loosen the screw [2] on the rear side, and remove the Fixing Assembly [3].

1x

1x

[3] [2]

[1]

NOTE:
When holding the Fixing Assembly [3], be sure to hold the positions shown in the figure.

[3]

Removing the Fixing Main Unit

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Fixing Assembly.“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 271

271
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Fixing Outer Delivery Unit Guide [1] from the Fixing Assembly [2].
• 1 Screw [3]
• 2 Claws [4]
[2]

1x
[1]

2x

[4]

[3]

NOTE:
When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-UNIT

Removing the Fixing Delivery Upper Guide

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Fixing Assembly.“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 271

2. Remove the Fixing Outer Delivery Unit Guide.“Removing the Fixing Main Unit” on page 271

272
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Cable Cover [1], and remove the Connector Holder [2].
• 2 Claws [3]

[3]

[1]

2x

[2]

2. Remove the Motor Cover [1].

• 2 E-rings [2]
• 2 Screws [3]

[1]
2x

[3]

[2]

273
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Remove the 2 screws [2] of the Pressure Plate Units (Front/Rear) [1], and open them in the direction of the arrows.

CAUTION:
• Be sure not to turn the fixing nip pressure adjustment screw.
• Note that the fixing nip pressure cannot be adjusted in the field. If the adjustment screw has been turned and the nip
pressure has been changed, replace the Fixing Assembly.

[1]
[1]
1x 1x

[2] [2]

274
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. Remove the Terminal Cover [1].

• 1 Claw [2]

1x

[1]
[2]

5. Remove the screw [2] securing the terminal [1].

• 1 Screw [2]

1x

[1]
[2]

275
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

6. Remove the Electrode Plate [1] in the direction of the arrow.

• 1 Claw [2]

[1]

1x

[2]

CAUTION:
Points to Note at Installation
• Be sure to install the Electrode Plate [1] while releasing the claw [2].

[1]
1x

[2]

• Check that the Electrode Plate [1] is secured with the claw [2] and the 2 hooks [3].

[1]

[2] [3]

276
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

7. Remove the the cable of the Connector Holder [1].

• 2 Snap bands [2]
• 2 Claws [3]

1x 2x

[2]

[1]

[3]

8. Remove the gear [1] and the cam [2].

[2]

[1]

9. Remove the 2 E-rings [1], cam [2], and Parallel Pin [3].

[1]

[3]

[2]

277
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

10. While removing the Pressure Plate Unit (Front) [1], remove the Guide Shaft [2] together with the Pressure Plate Unit
(Rear) [3].

[2] [3]
[1]

11. Remove the guide [1].

• 1 Screw [2]

1x
[2]

[1]

12. Remove the Fixing Delivery Upper Guide [1].

[1]

Removing the Fixing Film Unit

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Fixing Main Unit.“Removing the Fixing Main Unit” on page 271

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the Fixing Film Unit during installation/removal.

278
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

1. Remove the Cable Cover [1], and remove the Connector Holder [2].
• 2 Claws [3]

[3]

[1]

2x

[2]

2. Remove the Motor Cover [1].

• 2 E-rings [2]
• 2 Screws [3]

[1]
2x

[3]

[2]

279
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Remove the 2 screws [2] of the Pressure Plate Units (Front/Rear) [1], and open them in the direction of the arrows.

CAUTION:
• Be sure not to turn the fixing nip pressure adjustment screw.
• Note that the fixing nip pressure cannot be adjusted in the field. If the adjustment screw has been turned and the nip
pressure has been changed, replace the Fixing Assembly.

[1]
[1]
1x 1x

[2] [2]

280
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. Remove the Fixing Film Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]

[2]
2x

[1]

5. Remove the Terminal Cover [1].

• 1 Claw [2]

1x

[1]
[2]

6. Remove the screw [2] securing the terminal [1].

• 1 Screw [2]

1x

[1]
[2]

281
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

7. Remove the Electrode Plate [1] in the direction of the arrow.

• 1 Claw [2]

[1]

1x

[2]

CAUTION:
Points to Note at Installation
• Be sure to install the Electrode Plate [1] while releasing the claw [2].

[1]
1x

[2]

• Check that the Electrode Plate [1] is secured with the claw [2] and the 2 hooks [3].

[1]

[2] [3]

282
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

8. Remove the cable of the Connector Holder [1].

• 2 Snap bands [2]
• 2 Claws [2]

1x 2x

[2]

[1]

[3]

9. Disconnect the connector [2] from the Connector Holder [1].

• 1 Connector [2]

[2]
[1]

1x

10. Remove the Fixing Film Unit [1].

[1]

Removing the Pressure Roller

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Fixing Film Unit.“Removing the Fixing Film Unit” on page 278

283
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the Pressure Roller during installation/removal.

1. Remove the Cable Holder [1].

• 1 Screw [2]

[1]
1x

[2]

2. Remove the Fixing Inlet Guide [1].

• 1 Claw [2]

1x
[1]

[2]

284
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Insert 5 or 6 sheets of plain paper between the Fixing Outlet Guide [1] and the Pressure Roller [2] so as to protect all
the ribs of the Fixing Outlet Guide [1].

CAUTION:
If the Pressure Roller [2] is removed without inserting plain paper, the ribs of the Fixing Outlet Guide [1] will come in contact
with the Pressure Roller [2] and the roller will get scratched.

[1]
[1]

[2]

4. Remove the Pressure Roller [1].

[1]

285
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

5. Remove the E-ring [2], Pressure Roller Gear [3], 2 Shaft Supports [4], and 2 bearings [5] from the Roller Shaft [1].

[3]

[2]
[1]

[4]

[5]

CAUTION:
Points to Note at Installation
• Be sure to protect the whole surface of the Pressure Roller with 5 or 6 sheets of plain paper.
• Pull out the plain paper while rotating the Pressure Roller Gear [1] by hand.

[1]

286
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Pickup/Feed System

Removing the Right Cover

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Right Rear Cover (Upper).“Removing the Right Rear Cover (Upper)” on page 190

■ Procedure
1. Open the Right Cover [1].

2. Remove the Cover Inner Cover [2].

• 6 Screws [3]

[2] [1]

6x

[3]

[3]

287
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Remove the Right Cover [1].

CAUTION:
When the pin [4] is removed, the Right Cover [1] may fall off. Be sure to hold the lower part of the Right Cover while removing
the pin.

• 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Wire Saddle [3]
• 1 Pin [4]

[4]

[1]

[3]
1x

1x

[2]

Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit 1

■ Preparation
1. Pull out the cassette.

2. Open the Front Cover.

3. Open the Right Cover.

4. Remove the Right Lower Cover (when the Cassette Pedestal is installed, skip this step).

5. Remove the Right Rear Cover (Lower).“Removing the Right Rear Cover (Lower)” on page 191

288
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Handle Cover [1].

2. Remove the Right Front Lower Cover [2].

• 1 Claw [3]
• 3 Screws [4]

[2]
[3]

1x

3x

[4]
[1]

3. Remove the Connection Cable [1].

• 2 Connectors [2]
• 1 Snap Band [3]
• 1 Wire Saddle [4]
• 2 Edge Saddles [5]

[2]
2x
[3]

[4]

[1]

[2] [5]

289
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. Remove the protrution[1] on bottom of the Right Cover.

• 2 Screws [2]

1x

5. Remove the Cassette Pickup Unit 1 [1].

• 5 Screws [2]

[1]

5x

[2]
[2]

NOTE:
Be sure to remove it while lifting the rear side of the Pickup Unit 1 with the Right Cover fully opened.

Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit 2

■ Preparation
1. Pull out the cassette.

2. Open the Right Cover.

290
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Remove the Right Lower Cover (when the Cassette Pedestal is installed, skip this step).

4. Remove the Right Rear Cover (Lower).“Removing the Right Rear Cover (Lower)” on page 191

■ Procedure
1. Disconnect the Connection Cable [1].
• 1 Connector [2]

1x

1x

[1]

[2]

2. Remove the Cassette Pickup Unit 2 [1].

• 4 Screws [2]

[1]
4x

[2]

Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller during the work.

1. Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray.

291
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller Cover [1].

• 1 Screw [2]

[1]

1x

[2]

292
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Free the claw [1], slide the Shaft Support (Front) [2], and remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller [3].

[2]

1x

[1]

CAUTION:
When installing it, be sure to follow the order shown below.
1. Fit the hole of the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller [1] onto the protrusion of the Shaft Support (Rear) [2].
2. Attach the Shaft Support (Front) [4] while pushing down the Separation Pad [3].
3. Attach the Shaft Support (Rear) [2] to the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller [1].

[2]

[1]

[3]

[4]

NOTE:
When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > M-FD-RL

Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad

■ Preparation

CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the Separation Pad during the work.

1. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller.“Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller” on page 291

293
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Shift the Shaft Support (Rear) [1] toward the rear.
• 1 Claw [2]

[1]

1x

[2]

2. Remove the Separation Pad [1] using a flat-blade screwdriver.

NOTE:
Be sure to insert the flat-blade screwdriver at an angle.

[1]

NOTE:
When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > M-SP-PD

Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller during the work.

1. Pull out the cassette from the host machine.

2. Open the Right Cover.

294
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Remove the Leaf Spring [1], and remove the Cassette Pickup Roller [2].
• 1 Claw [3]

[1]

[2]

1x

[3]

NOTE:
When a consumable part has been replaced, be sure to clear the corresponding parts counter.
• Cassette 1 parts counter
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C1-PU-RL
• Cassette 2 parts counter
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C2-PU-RL

Removing the Cassette Feed Roller

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller during the work.

1. Pull out the cassette from the host machine.

2. Open the Right Cover.

3. Remove the Cassette Feed Roller [1].

• 1 Claw [2]

[1]

1x

[2]

295
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

NOTE:
When a consumable part has been replaced, be sure to clear the corresponding parts counter.
• Cassette 1 parts counter
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C1-FD-RL
• Cassette 2 parts counter
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C2-FD-R

Removing the Cassette Separation Roller

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller during the work.

1. Pull out the cassette from the host machine.

2. Open the Right Cover.

3. Remove the Cassette Separation Roller [1].

• 1 Claw [2]

1x [2]

[1]

NOTE:
When a consumable part has been replaced, be sure to clear the corresponding parts counter.
• Cassette 1 parts counter
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C1-SP-RL
• Cassette 2 parts counter
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C2-SP-RL

Removing the Main Drive Unit

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Front Inner Cover.“Removing the Front Inner Cover” on page 186

2. Remove the Developing Assembly.“Removing the Developing Assembly” on page 262

3. Remove the Right Rear Cover (Upper).“Removing the Right Rear Cover (Upper)” on page 190

4. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover” on page 192

5. Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left Rear Cover” on page 189

296
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the screw [1], loosen the 4 screws [2], and remove the Controller Box Cover [3].

1x

4x

[2]

[3]
[1]

2. Remove the 5 connectors [1].

5x

[1]

297
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Open the lower part of the Controller Box [1].

• 4 Screws [2]

[2]

4x

[2]

[3]

[1]

NOTE:
Close the stopper [3] first when closing the Controller Box [1].

4. Disconnect all the connectors [1].

• 9 Wire Saddles [2]

[1]
5x

9x

[2]

298
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

5. Remove the HVT PCB Unit [1].

• 1 Connector [2]
• 2 Screws [3]

1x

2x

[3]

[1] [2]

6. Remove the 4 connectors.

8x

4x

7. Remove the 3 clutches.

• 3 Resin E-rings

299
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

8. Remove the Main Motor Unit.

• 4 Screws

4x

9. Remove the Main Drive Unit.

• 4 Screws

4x

Removing the Second Delivery Unit

■ Procedure
1. Open the Right Cover.

300
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Drive Cover [1].

• 1 Claw [2]

1x

[1]
[2]

3. Remove the Second Delivery Unit [1].

• 1 Connector [2]
• 2 Screws [3]

[1]

1x

2x

[2]

[3] [3]

Removing the First Delivery Unit

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Delivery Rear Cover (Upper/Lower). “Removing the Delivery Rear Cover (Upper/Lower)” on page 196

2. Remove the Delivery Tray 2. “Removing the Delivery Tray 2” on page 195

3. Remove the Fixing Assembly. “Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 271

301
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the First Delivery Unit [1].
• 1 Screw [2]

[1]

1x

[2]

Removing the First Delivery Drive Assembly

■ Preparation
1. Remove the First Delivery Unit.“Removing the First Delivery Unit” on page 301

■ Procedure
1. Remove the First Delivery Drive Assembly [1].
• 1 Connector [2]
• 3 Screws [3]

1x [3]

3x

[1] [2]
[3]

302
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

External Auxiliary Control System

Removing the DC Controller PCB

■ Preparation
1. Actions before replacement: “Before Parts Replacement” on page 336

2. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover” on page 192

3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover.“Removing the Rear Lower Cover” on page 193

■ Procedure
1. Remove the DC Controller PCB [1].
• 25 Connectors [2]
• 6 Screws [3]

25x 6x
[1]

[2]

[3]

[3]

2. Actions after replacement: “Works During Parts Replacement” on page 337

Removing the HVT PCB

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover” on page 192

303
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the HVT PCB [1].
• 3 Screws [2]
• 1 Connector [3]

[2]

3x

1x

[3]
[1]

Removing the Power Supply PCB

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Left Upper Cover.“Removing the Left Upper Cover” on page 187

2. Remove the Left Cover.“Removing the Left Cover” on page 188

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Power Supply PCB [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
• 10 Connectors [3]

[1]
2x

10x [3]
[3]

[2]

Removing the Air Filter

■ Procedure
1. Open the Right Cover.

304
 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Filter Cover [1] (front/rear).

• 2 Claws [2]

[1]

[2]

3. Remove the Filter [1] (front/rear).

[1]

NOTE:
When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > OZ-FIL1

305
5 Adjustment
Pickup Feed System......................... 307
Original Exposure System.................308
Document Feeder System................ 310
Actions at Parts Replacement...........336
 5. Adjustment

Pickup Feed System

Image Position Adjustment

1. After setting the following service mode, press the Start key and output a test print (2-sided print) from each of the
paper sources.
COPIER > TEST > PG >
TYPE = 5
PG-PICK = each paper source

■ Hardware Adjustment
1. Hardware adjustment is not set for Cassettes 1.

■ Software Adjustment
Use the following service mode to make an adjustment.

1. Left edge margin

COPIER > ADJUST > MISC >

Service mode item Description of adjustment

C1-ADJ-Y Cassette 1
C2-ADJ-Y Cassette 2
C3-ADJ-Y Cassette 3
C4-ADJ-Y Cassette 4

As the input value is changed by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is changed by 0.1 mm.

2. Leading edge margin

There is no service mode setting for adjusting the leading edge margin.

3. If the service mode setting value has been changed, write down the new adjustment value on the service label.
<Reference: Standard value>
Left edge: 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm

)HHGLQJGLUHFWLRQ
COPIER>ADJUST>MISC>xx-ADJ-Y
xx = C1/C2/C3/C4
+

307
 5. Adjustment

Original Exposure System

Service Mode Backup

Adjustment is made to every machine at the time of shipment to write the adjustment value in the service label.
Be sure to adjust the value in the field, and in the case of changing the service mode value, be sure to write down the changed
value in the service label.
When the corresponding item is not found on the service label, write the value in blank field.
The service label is affixed to the back of the Reader Front Cover.
It is also possible to backup and restore using service modes. This backup will take approx. 10 seconds.

Backup: Service mode (Lv.2)

COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMBUP

Restoration: Service mode (Lv.2)

COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMRES

NOTE:
When changing the service mode setting values, it is recommended to back them up in the above service mode. Performing backup
makes the work easier when replacing the Reader Controller PCB, etc.

Actions after Clearing the RAM of the Reader Controller PCB

1. Execute the RAM clear in the following service mode.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON

2. Turn OFF and then ON the connected equipment.

3. Depending on the status of backup, perform one of the following measures.

• When backup is performed normally
Execute the following service mode (Lv.2) to restore the backup data.
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMRES

NOTE:
Work is completed when backup was normally performed.

• When backup is not performed normally

Enter the values written on the service label (on the back of the Reader Front Cover) to the service mode items.

4. In the following service mode, calculate the MTF filter coefficient.

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > MTF-CLC

5. In the following service mode, calculate for matching paper front and back linearity.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-LNR

6. In the following service mode, execute either AB or Inch configuration tray width adjustment.
• To execute AB configuration adjustment
1. Highlight the service mode item.
FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A4
2. Align the Slide Guide with "A4/A3".
3. Highlight the service mode item.
FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- A5R
4. Align the Slide Guide with "A5R".
5. Press the OK key and register the width of A5R.

308
 5. Adjustment

• To execute Inch configuration adjustment

1. Highlight the service mode item.
FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTR
2. Align the Slide Guide with "LTR/11x17".
3. Press the OK key and register the width of Letter.
4. Highlight the service mode item.
FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- LTRR
5. Align the Slide Guide with "STMT/LTRR/LGL".
6. Press the OK key and register the width of LTRR.

7. In the following service mode, output P-PRINT.

COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT
Keep the output P-PRINT in service book case.

309
 5. Adjustment

Document Feeder System

Single Pass ADF

■ Creating the Test Charts for Image Position Adjustment

CAUTION:
Create the test charts for image position adjustment after completing adjustments on the printer side.

1. After setting the service modes as follows, press the Start key to output the test chart.
• COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE = 6
• COPIER > TEST > PG > PG-PICK = To set the Pickup Cassette for test print output.

NOTE:
• If the specified test chart cannot be output, draw a test chart on A4 or LTR paper with a rectangle whose four corners are 10
mm smaller than the paper.
• To draw characters and marks so that you can see the direction of the copied image.

10 mm

10 mm 10 mm

10 mm

■ Eased Angle Guide (Opening Angle of 90 Degrees)

Change the opening angle of the ADF from 70 degrees to 90 degrees.

NOTE:
Some operation become easier by making the DADF opening angle wider.

310
 5. Adjustment

1. Turn over the cover and remove the Angle Guide Plate.
• 4 Screws

4x Hinge Covers

Hinge Open/Close Hinge Open/Close

Guide Plate Guide Plate

CAUTION:
After adjustment, be sure to install the Angle Guide Plate.

■ Adjustment of the Tray Width

Execute either "AB configuration adjustment" or "Inch configuration adjustment" for this adjustment.

● AB Configuration Adjustment
1. Highlight the service mode item in the following service mode.
FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A4

2. Align the Slide Guide with "A4/A3".

3. Press the OK key and register the width of A4.

4. Highlight the service mode item in the following service mode.

FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- A5R

5. Align the Slide Guide with "A5R".

6. Press the OK key and register the width of A5R.

● Inch Configuration Adjustment

1. Highlight the service mode item in the following service mode.
FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTR

2. Align the Slide Guide with "LTR/11x17".

3. Press the OK key and register the width of Letter.

4. Highlight the service mode item in the following service mode.

FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- LTRR

5. Align the Slide Guide with "STMT/LTRR/LGL".

6. Press the OK key and register the width of LTRR.

■ Height Adjustment
● Checking the Height
1. Close the ADF.

311
 5. Adjustment

2. Check that the 2 Height Adjustment Bosses [1] at the left front and rear side are in contact with the Stream Reading
Glass [2].

NOTE:
Checking becomes easier by lighting the LED using the following service mode.
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > SCANLAMP

[2]

[1]

3. If they are not in contact, perform the height adjustment.

Also, if it could not be checked visually, check with the following methods.
• “Checking the Height of the Height Adjustment Boss on the Front Side” on page 312
• “Checking the Height of the Height Adjustment Boss on the Rear Side” on page 312

Checking the Height of the Height Adjustment Boss on the Front Side

1. Put a sheet of paper [2] on the place where the protrusions touch the Stream Reading Glass [1], and check whether
there is any resistance of the paper when closing the ADF.

[1]

[2]

2. If there is no resistance, perform the height adjustment.

Checking the Height of the Height Adjustment Boss on the Rear Side

1. Put a sheet of paper [2] on the place where the protrusions touch the Stream Reading Glass [1], and check whether
there is any resistance of the paper when closing the ADF.

[2]

[1]

312
 5. Adjustment

2. If there is no resistance, perform the height adjustment.

● Adjustment procedure
1. Adjust by turning the Fixation Screw on the upper side of Hinge.
• If both front and rear side (or only front side) are not installed properly: Turn the Right Hinge Fixation Screw clockwise
(black arrow) to correctly locate it at the front.

• If the rear side is not installed properly: Turn the Left Hinge Fixation Screw counterclockwise (white arrow).

2. Check the height again and see if it is at an appropriate height.

■ Right Angle Adjustment (Slant Adjustment)

NOTE:
There are two adjustment methods: One for reading the front side (Scanner Unit on the Reader side) and another for reading the
back side (Scanner Unit on the DADF side).

313
 5. Adjustment

● Adjustment of the Paper Front Reading

1. Place a test chart on the ADF and perform 1-sided print.

2. Check the A part of the printed paper for the squareness of the image. Make adjustment if it is not at a right angle.

Image on test chart

Printed image

Feed direction

3. Remove the ADF White Plate [1].

4. Loosen the 4 Knurled Screws [1] at the front part of the Right and Left Hinge Unit.

5. Rotate the screw [2] of the right hinge to move the Fixation Member.
A = Less than 90 degrees: Turn the screw clockwise
A = 90 degrees or more: Turn the screw counterclockwise

[2]

[1]
[1]

6. After adjustment, tighten the 4 Knurled Screws.

7. Print the test chart again, and check that the A part is at a right angle.

8. Install the White Plate removed in step 3. Check that the White Plate is not placed on the Index Sheet.

● Adjustment of the Paper Back Reading

1. Place a test chart facing down on the ADF and perform 2-sided print.

314
 5. Adjustment

2. Check the A part of the printed paper for the squareness of the image. Make adjustment if it is not at a right angle.

Image on test chart

Printed image

Feed direction

3. Remove the Front Cover.

4. Loosen the adjustment screw.

5. Adjust the position of the guide supporting the Scanner Unit.

A = less than 90 degrees: Move the Guide to the right side (white arrow).
A = 90 degrees or more: Move the Guide to the left side (black arrow).

[2]

[1]

6. Tighten the screws after adjustment.

7. Print the test chart again, and check that it is at a right angle.

■ Adjustment of the Stream Reading

1. Execute the following service mode item.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS

■ Side registration adjustment

NOTE:
There are two adjustment methods: One for reading the front side (Scanner Unit on the Reader side) and another for reading the
back side (Scanner Unit on the ADF side).

● Adjustment of the Paper Front Reading

1. Place a test chart on the Document Pickup Tray and perform a 1-sided print.

2. Overlay the printed paper onto the test chart.

315
 5. Adjustment

3. Check that the rear side of the printed image is within the standard range.
Standard range: A </= 1 mm

< If the image is displaced toward rear > < If the image is displaced toward front >
Rear side of
printed image Image rear side of
test chart

A
A

Image rear side of

test chart Rear side of
printed image

Feed direction Feed direction

4. If it is not within the standard range, make an adjustment with the following service mode
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF
• If the printed image is displaced toward the rear side: Increase the value (by moving the image toward the front side).
• If the printed image is displaced toward the front side: Decrease the value (by moving the image toward the rear side).
• Amount of change per increment: 0.1 mm
• Adjustment range: 2 to 202 (Default: 102)

5. Print the test chart again, and check that the image is within the ranges of the standard.

● Adjustment of the Paper Back Reading

1. Place a test chart facing down on the Document Pickup Tray and perform 2-sided print.

2. Overlay the printed paper onto the test chart.

3. Check that the rear side of the printed image is within the standard range.
standard range: A≦1 mm

< If the image is displaced toward rear > < If the image is displaced toward front >
Rear side of
printed image Image rear side of
test chart

A
A

Image rear side of

test chart Rear side of
printed image

Feed direction Feed direction

316
 5. Adjustment

4. If it is not within the standard range, make an adjustment with the following service mode
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJY-DF2
• If the printed image is displaced toward the front side: Increase the value (by moving the image toward the rear side).
• If the printed image is displaced toward the rear side: Decrease the value (by moving the image toward the front side).
• Amount of change per increment: 0.1 mm
• Adjustment range: 56 to 220 (Default: 124)

5. Print the test chart again, and check that the image is within the ranges of the standard.

■ Leading edge registration adjustment

NOTE:
There are two adjustment methods: One for reading the front side (Scanner Unit on the Reader side) and another for reading the
back side (Scanner Unit on the ADF side).

● Adjustment of the Paper Front Reading

1. Place a test chart on the Document Pickup Tray and perform a 1-sided print.

2. Overlay the printed paper onto the test chart.

3. Check that the leading edge of the printed image is within the standard range.
Standard range: A </= 1 mm

< If the image is displaced toward trailing edge > < If the image is displaced toward leading edge >

Leading edge of Image leading edge of

Image leading edge of printed image Leading edge of test chart
test chart printed image

A A

Feed direction Feed direction

4. If it is not within the standard range, make an adjustment with the following service mode
FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST
• If the printed image is displaced toward the trailing edge: Increase the value (by moving the image toward the
leading edge).
• If the printed image is displaced toward the leading edge: Decrease the value (by moving the image toward the
trailing edge).
• Amount of change per increment: 0.1 mm
• Adjustment range: -50 to +50

5. Print the test chart again, and check that the image is within the ranges of the standard.

● Adjustment of the Paper Back Reading

1. Place a test chart facing down on the Document Pickup Tray and perform 2-sided print.

2. Overlay the printed paper onto the test chart.

317
 5. Adjustment

3. Check that the leading edge of the printed image is within the standard range.
Standard range: A </= 1 mm

< If the image is displaced toward trailing edge > < If the image is displaced toward leading edge >

Leading edge of Image leading edge of

Image leading edge of printed image Leading edge of test chart
test chart printed image

A A

Feed direction Feed direction

4. If it is not within the standard range, make an adjustment with the following service mode
FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST2
• If the printed image is displaced toward the trailing edge: Increase the value (by moving the image toward the
leading edge).
• If the printed image is displaced toward the leading edge: Decrease the value (by moving the image toward the
trailing edge).
• Amount of change per increment: 0.1 mm
• Adjustment range: -50 to +50

5. Print the test chart again, and check that the image is within the ranges of the standard.

■ Magnification ratio adjustment

NOTE:
• There are two adjustment methods: One for reading the front side (Scanner Unit on the Reader side) and another for reading
the back side (Scanner Unit on the DADF side).
• This adjustment is performed by comparing the images printed by stream reading and Copyboard reading.

● Adjustment of the Paper Front Reading

1. Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass of the connected equipment and print. This is called Print 1.

2. Place a test chart on the Document Pickup Tray and perform a 1-sided print. This is called Print 2.

3. Overlay the Print 2 onto the Print 1.

318
 5. Adjustment

4. Check that the trailing edge of the image on the Print 2 is within the standard range.
Standard range: A </= 1 mm

< If the image of print 2 is longer > < If the image of print 2 is shorter >

Trailing edge of Trailing edge of

print 1 print 2
Trailing edge of Trailing edge of
print 2 print 1

A A

Feed direction Feed direction

5. If it is not within the standard range, make an adjustment with the following service mode
FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED
• If the image on the Print 2 is longer: Make the numeric value larger (by making the stream reading of the original "faster").
• If the image on the Print 2 is shorter: Make the numeric value smaller (by making the stream reading of the
original "slower").
• Amount of change per increment: 0.1%
• Adjustment range: -30 to +30

6. Print the test chart again, and check that the image is within the ranges of the standard.

● Adjustment of the Paper Back Reading

1. Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass of the connected equipment and print. This is called Print 1.

2. Place a test chart facing down on the Document Pickup Tray and perform 2-sided print. This is called Print 2.

3. Overlay the Print 2 onto the Print 1.

4. Check that the trailing edge of the image on the Print 2 is within the standard range.
Standard range: A </= 1 mm

< If the image of print 2 is longer > < If the image of print 2 is shorter >

Trailing edge of Trailing edge of

print 1 print 2
Trailing edge of Trailing edge of
print 2 print 1

A A

Feed direction Feed direction

319
 5. Adjustment

5. If it is not within the standard range, make an adjustment with the following service mode
FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD2
• If the image on the Print 2 is longer: Make the numeric value larger (by making the vertical scanning length of the
image shorter).
• If the image on the Print 2 is shorter: Make the numeric value smaller (by making the vertical scanning length of the
image longer).
• Amount of change per increment: 0.1%
• Adjustment range: -30 to +30

6. Print the test chart again, and check that the image is within the ranges of the standard.

■ White level adjustment

1. Place a sheet of blank A4 or LTR size paper on the Copyboard Glass and close the ADF.

CAUTION:
When executing the white level adjustment using paper with smaller width, adjustment may not be executed properly.

2. Execute the service mode item.

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1

3. Remove the blank paper from the Copyboard Glass, and place it on the Document Pickup Tray of ADF.

4. Execute the service mode item.

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD >DF-WLVL2

5. Place the blank paper on the Copyboard Glass again and close the ADF.

6. Execute the service mode item.

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3

7. Remove the blank paper from the Copy Board Glass, and place it on the Document Pickup Tray of ADF.

8. Execute the service mode item.

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4

■ Hinge pressure adjustment

1. Open the ADF, and find out the lowest position it stays open without holding it by hands.

2. Find out if the height of the position checked in step 1 is within the standard range.
Standard range: 19 cm or more

320
 5. Adjustment

3. If the height is not within the standard range, execute the following adjustments.
If the height is 19 cm or less: Turn the hexagon wrench counterclockwise.

NOTE:
Service Tool: Hexagon wrench (2.5 mm)

[1]

4. Check that the "height adjustment boss" does not contact with the Stream Reading Glass after adjustment.

Reversal ADF
■ Overview
● Adjustment
In case of removing this equipment and then re-installed, adjust it in order as shown below.

No. Adjustment item Reference

1 Adjusting the Height “Adjusting the Height” on page 322
2 Adjusting the Perpendicularity “Adjusting the Perpendicularity” on page 326
3 Adjusting the Reading Position “Adjusting the Reading Position” on
page 330
4 Adjusting the Magnification “Adjusting the Magnification” on page 331
5 Adjusting the Image Position (Horizontal Scanning Direction) “Adjusting the Image Position (Main Scan-
ning Direction)” on page 332
6 Adjusting the Image Position (Leading Edge) “Adjusting the Image Position (Sub Scanning
Direction)” on page 333
7 Adjusting the White Level “Adjusting the White Level” on page 334

● Preparation or Creation of Test Chart

Prepare a test chart. If there is no test chart, create a test chart.
Create a test chart that has a 10 mm smaller rectangle from the edge of A4 or LTR paper.

NOTE:
Be sure to write a character or mark to identify the printed image direction.

321
 5. Adjustment

10 mm

10 mm 10 mm

10 mm

■ Basic Adjustment
● Overview of Adjustment
The DADF has the following adjustment items. The following is the order of adjustment.

No. Adjustment Items

1 Adjusting the Height
2 Adjusting the Perpendicularity
3 Adjusting the Read Position
4 Adjusting the Magnification
5 Adjusting the Image Position (Main Scanning Direction)
6 Adjusting the Image Position (Sub Scanning Direction)
7 Adjusting the White Level

● Adjusting the Height

Check the Left Hinge Height

When Visual Check

1. Close the DADF and check whether the front and rear ADF scan glass spacers are in close contact with the ADF
scan glass.

NOTE:
If visual check is difficult, perform the check with reference to "When Check with the Paper".

322
 5. Adjustment

When Check with the Paper

1. Check the rear-left height of the DADF.

Cut a sheet of paper to make a paper slip with width of 45mm. Set paper against the protrusion in such a manner that the
sheet is nearly hidden, and then close the DADF.

NOTE:
By placing the paper slip as instructed, it does not interfere the soundproofing sheet stuck on the bottom of the DADF when
closing it.

Soundproofing Sheet

CAUTION:
Use plain paper.
Set paper so that it does not reach the document reader.

Sheet
Protrusion Document reader

Sheet

Protrusion Document reader

Paper

323
 5. Adjustment

2. Pull out the set paper.

Pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow to check that slight resistance is felt.

3. Check the front-left height of the DADF.

Set paper against the protrusion in such a manner that the sheet is nearly hidden, and then close the DADF.

CAUTION:
Set paper so that it does not reach the document reader.

Protrusion
Document reader
Sheet

Paper
Protrusion
Document reader
Sheet

324
 5. Adjustment

4. Pull out the set paper.

Pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow to check that slight resistance is felt.

Checking the Right Hinge Height

1. Be sure that the white plate is in close contact with the front and rear document glass when this Equipment is closed.

Order of Adjustment
When the front or rear side is floating:
1. Adjust the Left Hinge Height.
2. Adjust the Right Hinge Height.
3. Check the Left Hinge Height.
(Check the height of the Left Hinge. If the height is inappropriate, adjust it again.)
When both sides are floating:
1. Adjust the Left Hinge Height.
2. Adjust the Right Hinge Height.
3. Adjust the Left Hinge Height.
4. Check the Right Hinge Height.
(Check the height of the Right Hinge. If the height is inappropriate, adjust it again.)

NOTE:
Before adjusting the hinge height, remove the hinge covers. After the adjustment, attach the hinge covers.

325
 5. Adjustment

Adjusting the Left Hinge Height

1. Adjust the height with the left hinge height adjusting screw.

CAUTION:
Loosen the lock nut before adjustment, and tighten it after adjustment.

• If the front spacer is floating, turn the adjusting screw clockwise to bring the front spacer closer to the glass.
• If only the rear spacer or both front and rear spacers are floating, turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise to bring the
rear spacer closer to the glass.

Hinge height adjusting screw

Lock nut

Adjusting the Right Hinge Height

1. Adjust the height with the right hinge height adjusting screw.

CAUTION:
Loosen the lock nut before adjustment, and tighten it after adjustment.

• Turning the adjusting screw clockwise raises the right side height of the DADF.
• Turning the adjusting screw counterclockwise lowers the right side height of the DADF.

Hinge height adjusting screw

Lock nut

● Adjusting the Perpendicularity

1. Copy the test chart with the DADF.

326
 5. Adjustment

2. Check the perpendicularity at the leading edges of the test chart and copy.
Measure dimensions A and B on the test chart and dimensions A' and B' on the copy. If (A-B) is not same as (A'-B'), go step
3 and following steps.

Feed direction Test chart

A’

Feed direction Copy

B’

327
 5. Adjustment

3. Loosen the screw securing the right hinge, and slide the hinge to the front or rear with reference to the marking-off
line to adjust the perpendicularity.

1x

• For B'>A
Slide the hinge to rear side.
• For A'>B'
Slide the hinge to front side.

%̓!$̓

$̓!%̓

4. Tighten the fixing screw loosened in step 3.

1x

328
 5. Adjustment

5. Remove the White Plate.

6. Place the White Plate on the Copyboard Glass by aligning it with the Index Sheet.

5($5

)52
17

7. Close the DADF, and then open it again.

329
 5. Adjustment

8. Press the White Plate upward as shown in the figure below.

CAUTION:
If the White Plate is pressed downward, it is placed on the Index Sheet, so be sure to press it upward.

9. With the DADF closed, check that the White Plate is not placed on the Index Sheet as shown in the figures.

CAUTION:
Be sure that there is no gap between the White Plate and the Index Sheet. As a guide, it should be 0.3 mm or less.

'$') '$')

White Plate Index Sheet White Plate Index Sheet

Reader Unit Reader Unit

'$') '$')

White Plate Index Sheet White Plate Index Sheet

Reader Unit Reader Unit

● Adjusting the Reading Position

1. Execute the following item in the service mode.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS

2. Press [OK] or [Yes].

The scanner to start a scan; in several seconds, the DADF will end auto adjustment of the read position.

330
 5. Adjustment

3. Select the following item in the service mode to check the value, and write down the new adjustment value on the
service label.
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS

NOTE:
The service label affixed to the back of Reader Front Cover.

CAUTION:
If the DADF fails auto adjustment and indicates [NG], go through the following:
1. Clean the platen roller of the DADF and the ADF scan glass of the host machine, and then execute the above auto
adjustment again.
2. If the auto adjustment operation still fails, make the manual adjustment with the following service mode.
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS
Change the setting, and adjust on the best setting checking the output copy image.
3. When the setting value was changed in step 2, write down the new numerical value in the service label.

● Adjusting the Magnification

1. Copy the test chart with the DADF.

2. Compare the image length in feed direction between the copy and the test chart. As necessary, make the
following adjustment.

Adjustment Procedure

1. Select the following item in the service mode.

FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED

331
 5. Adjustment

2. Change the value as gap A in the figure.

• If the printed image is longer: Increase the value. (The image shrinks in the feed direction.)
• If the printed image is shorter: Decrease the value. (The image extends in the feed direction.)
Setting Value; 1=0.1%

< If the image is longer >

Trailing edge of
test chart Trailing edge of
printed image

Feed direction

< If the image is shorter >

Trailing edge of
printed image Trailing edge of
test chart

Feed direction

3. When the setting value was changed in step 2, write down the new numerical value in the service label.

NOTE:
The service label affixed to the inside of Reader Front Cover.

● Adjusting the Image Position (Main Scanning Direction)

1. Copy the test chart with the DADF.

2. Compare the horizontal registration between the copy and the test chart. As necessary, make the
following adjustment.

Adjustment Procedure

1. Select the following item in the service mode.

COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF

332
 5. Adjustment

2. Change the value as gap A in the figure.

• If the image is displaced to the rear: Increase the value. (The image shifts to the front.)
• If the image is displaced to the front: Decrease the value. (The image shifts to the rear.)
Setting Value; 1=0.1mm

< If the image is displaced toward rear >

Rear side of
printed image

Rear side of
test chart image

Feed direction

< If the image is displaced toward front >

Rear side of
test chart image

Rear side of
printed image

Feed direction

3. When the setting value was changed in step 2, write down the new numerical value in the service label.

NOTE:
The service label affixed to the back of Reader Front Cover.

● Adjusting the Image Position (Sub Scanning Direction)

1. Copy the test chart with the DADF.

2. Compare the leading edge registration between the copy and the test chart. As necessary, make the
following adjustment.

Adjustment Procedure

1. Select the following item in the service mode.

FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST

333
 5. Adjustment

2. Change the value as gap A in the figure.

• If the image is displaced to the trailing edge: Increase the value. (The image shifts to the leading edge.)
• If the image is displaced to the leading edge: Decrease the value. (The image shifts to the trailing edge.)
Setting Value; 1=0.1mm

< If the image is displaced toward trailing edge >

Leading edge of Leading edge of

test chart image printed image

Feed direction

< If the image is displaced toward leading edge >

Leading edge of
Leading edge of test chart image
printed image

Feed direction

3. When the setting value was changed in step 2, write down the new numerical value in the service label.

NOTE:
The service label affixed to the back of Reader Front Cover.

● Adjusting the White Level

NOTE:
1. This is a item of adjustment in which the white level of images made in stream reading mode are matched with the white level
of images made in book mode. If this adjustment is skiped, the following will likely occur:
• Inappropriate reproduction of background density in images made in stream reading mode.
• Wrong speck detection in stream reading mode.
2. The white level adjustments execute the following item in the service mode.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

334
 5. Adjustment

1. Place the white copy paper which the user usually uses on the copyboard glass. Execute the following item in the
service mode.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1

2. Press [OK] or [Yes].

Automatic adjustment starts.

3. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and place it onto the DADF. Execute the following item in the
service mode.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

4. Press [OK] or [Yes].

Automatic adjustment starts (duplex stream reading).

5. If adjustment fails, perform steps 1 to 4 again.

6. Select the following item in the service mode to check the value, and write down the new adjustment value on the
service label.
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B

NOTE:
The service label affixed to the back of Reader Front Cover.

335
 5. Adjustment

Actions at Parts Replacement

Single Pass ADF

■ MP Pickup Tray Unit
● Actions after Parts Replacement
1. Load A4R paper in the MP Pickup Tray and slide the paper width guide to fit the paper size.

2. Select service mode as shown below and Press OK key for each. The setting value is registered after the
auto adjustment.
COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A4R
COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A6R
COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A4

3. Write each setting value on the service label.

COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A4R
COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A6R
COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A4

■ DC Controller PCB
How to Replace the Parts: “Removing the DC Controller PCB” on page 303

● Before Parts Replacement

CAUTION:
When replacing the DC Controller PCB, be sure to use a new one. Do not use the DC Controller PCB which was used with
another machine.

1. Execute the following service mode to output setting values for just in case of restoration failure of backup data.
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT

2. Execute the following service mode to back up the service mode setting values.
(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP
During execution, "ACTIVE" flashes in the status column of the service mode.
It takes approx. 2 minutes. Upon success, [OK!] is displayed in the status column.

3. After confirming that [OK!] is displayed in the status column of the service mode, turn OFF the power of the machine.

336
 5. Adjustment

● Works During Parts Replacement

1. If the firmware combination is incorrect, execute an update with the Automatic Update function.

Screen example

CAUTION:
Automatic Update is available only when the following Service Mode settings are at 1 or 2.
(Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG

2. When the setting value data is backed up before parts replacement, execute the following service mode to restore
the backed-up setting value data.
(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES
During execution, "ACTIVE" flashes in the status column of the service mode.
It takes approx. 2 minutes. Upon success, [OK!] is displayed in the status column.

3. When setting values cannot be backed up before replacement or when the backed-up data cannot be restored in this
step due to reasons such as damage of the DC Controller PCB, enter the values of each service mode item written
on the service label or P-PRINT before parts replacement.

■ Hard Disk
● Overview
The following describes the tasks when replacing the HDD.
Note that procedures to backup/restore the data in the HDD is required when replacing the HDD.
Perform backup/restoration based on the following.

Backup List

Backup target data Backup Method

User Service DCM Power OFF
(excluding DCM)
Address List Yes*1 - Yes*9 -
Forwarding Settings Yes*1 - Yes*9 -
Settings / Registration
Preferences (Except for Paper Type Management Settings) - - Yes*9 Yes*10
Adjustment/Maintenance - - Yes*9 Yes*10
Function Settings (Except for Printer Custom Settings,Forwarding Set- - - Yes*9 Yes*10
tings)
Set Destination (Except for Address List) - - Yes*9 Yes*10
Management Settings (Except for Address List) - - Yes*9 Yes*10
User authentication information used for local device authentication of UA Yes*2 - Yes*9 -
(User Authentication)
Printer Settings Yes*1 - Yes*9 Yes*10
Set Paper Information Yes*1 - Yes*9 -
Setting items for each menu in Main Menu (Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox)

337
 5. Adjustment

Backup target data Backup Method

User Service DCM Power OFF
(excluding DCM)
Favorite Settings Yes*1 Yes*8 Yes*9 -
Default Settings - Yes*8 Yes*9 -
Shortcut settings for "Options" - Yes*8 Yes*9 -
Previous Settings - Yes*8 - -
Setting items for Quick Menu
Button Size information - - Yes*9 -
Wallpaper Setting - - Yes*9 -
Button information in Quick Menu - - Yes*9 -
Restrict Quick Menu - - Yes*9 -
Setting items for Main Menu
Button settings in Main Menu - - Yes*9 -
Button settings on the top of the screen - - Yes*9 -
Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu - - Yes*9 -
Other settings for Main Menu - - Yes*9 -
Function Settings > Store/Access Files
Mail Box Settings (Register Box Name, PIN, Time Until File Auto Delete, Yes*4 - Yes*9 -
Printer upon Storing from Printer Driver)
Image data in Mail Box, Fax Inbox, and Memory RX Inbox Yes*4 - - -
Network Place Settings - - Yes*9 Yes*10
Web browser settings
Web Access setting information - Yes*8 Yes*9 -
MEAP settings
MEAP application - Yes*8 - -
License files for MEAP applications Yes*5 - - -
Data saved using MEAP applications Yes*5 △*8 Yes*9 -
SMS (Service Management Service) password - Yes*8 - -
Universal data settings
Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed - - - -
Send mode)
Job logs - - - -
Audit Log Yes*6 - - -
Key Pair and Server Certificate in Certificate Settings in TCP/IP Set- - - Yes*9 -
tings in Network Set-tings in System Settings (from the Additional Func-
tions screen)
Auto Adjust Gradation setting values - - - -
PS font - - - -
Key information to be used for encryption when TPM is OFF - - - -
Key and settings information to be used for encryption when TPM is ON Yes*7 - - -
Personal Settings
Display Language - - Yes *9 -
Accessibility Settings - - Yes *9 -
Default Screen - - Yes *9 -
Default Job Settings - - Yes *9 -
Quick Menu (Personal, layout of the Personal tab, and background of the - - Yes *9 -
Personal tab)
Address Book (Personal/Group) Yes *1 - Yes *9 -
Key ring (for host machine functions) - - Yes *9 -
Personal settings of MEAP Yes *11 Yes *8 Yes *9 -
Service Mode
Service Mode setting values (MN-CON) - - △*9 Yes*10

*1: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import or Export

338
 5. Adjustment

*2: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > User Management > Authentication Management >
User Management
*3: Remote UI > Quick Menu > Export
*4: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Back Up or Restore
*5: Remote UI > Service Management Service
*6: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Device Management > Save Audit Log
Audit log that was exported cannot be put back to the device from which the log was exported.
*7: Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings
*8: Download mode > [5]: Backup/Restore > [3] : MEAP Backup > Meapback.bin
Backup is possible using SST or USB memory
The data saved using a MEAP application can be backed up only when the MEAP application has a backup function.
*9: Backup Method using DCM When You set it in COPIER> OPTION> USER> SMD-EXPT> ON, a backup/restore is possible in
Service Mode Settings from the Remote UI.
There is a backup button on the TOP page of the service mode.
• Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export All
• Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export
• Service mode top screen > BACKUP
• Web Service
*10: The setting value that was set when the main power was turned OFF the last time is automatically backed up to the Flash
PCB. When a HDD is replaced with a new one, the setting value is automatically inherited from the Flash PCB at the time of
HDD formatting.
*11: iWEMC DAM plug-in

● Actions before Parts Replacement

1. Backup the required data based on the “Table: Backup List” on page 337.

2. Execute the following service mode and printout the setting data to be ready in case of failing to restore the data.
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT

● Actions after Parts Replacement

1. HDD format
Start the machine in safe mode, and format all partitions using SST or a USB memory.

2. Turning OFF and ON the main power switch.

3. Restoring the backup data

4. Resetting/registering the data

While referring to the list which was printed before replacement, reset/register the data.

5. When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA certificate, request the user to generate
them again.

6. Execute auto gradation adjustment.

• Execute auto gradation adjustment.Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto
Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust

■ Laser Scanner Unit

How to Replace the Parts: “Removing the Laser Scanner Unit” on page 260

● Actions after Replacement

When replacing the laser unit, enter the values recorded on the label affixed to the laser unit to be replaced for the following in the
service mode:

339
 5. Adjustment

-10 0 147 136 93 16 117

㹀 㹁 㹂 㸿 㹃 㹄 㹅
Input example
• Adjust of write start position of laser
A : COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > PVE-OFST
• Difference in magnification between the lasers (K)
B : COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ1-K
C : COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ2-K
D : COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ3-K
• Difference in the phase between the lasers (K)
E : COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ4-K
F : COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ5-K
G : COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ6-K

■ Drum Unit
How to Replace the Parts: “Removing the Drum Unit” on page 269

● Actions after Parts Replacement

1. Execute auto gradation adjustment.
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation

■ Developing Unit
How to Replace the Parts: “Removing the Developing Assembly” on page 262

● Actions after Parts Replacement

1. Execute all series of operation for supplying toner to the Developing Assembly/Toner Supply area. After counting
down from 600 seconds, it is stopped automatically.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > TONER-S

■ Reader Controller PCB

How to Replace the Parts:“Removing the Reader Controller PCB” on page 197

● Actions before Parts Replacement

1. Output the latest service mode setting values.
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT

2. Perform back p in the following service mode (Lv.2).

COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMBUP

● Actions after Parts Replacement

CAUTION:
Once the Reader Controller PCB was replaced with a brand-new one, make sure to perform a version update. Otherwise,
the functionalities available with the latest version will not perform properly.

340
 5. Adjustment

CAUTION:
Auto-update is available only when the following service mode (Lv. 2) is set to 1 or 2.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG

1. Update the RCON version in accordance with one of the following screen messages.
<When the update button is displayed>
1. If the following message is displayed on the screen, press [Update] to auto-update the RCON version.

Screen sample
<When the update button is not displayed>
1. If the following message is displayed on the screen, press [Close].

Screen sample
2. Enter the following service mode (Lv. 2) and set the value to “2.”
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG
3. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
4. Once the update button is displayed, press [Update] to auto-update the RCON version.

2. Depending on the status of backup, perform one of the following measures.

• When backup is performed normally
Execute the following service modes to restore the backup data.
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMRES

NOTE:
• During the execution, "ACTIVE" flashes in the status column of the service mode.
• The execution takes approx. 2 minutes. Upon success, [OK!] is displayed in the status column.
• Work is completed when backup was normally performed.

• When backup is not performed normally or when the backed-up data cannot be restored
Enter the value of each service mode item on the service label or P-PRINT as listed before the parts replacement.

3. In following service mode, calculate the MTF filter coefficient.

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > MTF-CLC

341
 5. Adjustment

4. In following service mode, calculate for matching paper front and back linearity.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-LNR

5. In following service mode, execute either AB or Inch configuration tray width adjustment.
• To execute AB configuration adjustment
1. Align the Slide Guide with "A4/A3".
2. Select the service mode, press the OK key, and register the width of A4.
FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A4
3. Align the Slide Guide with "A5R".
4. Select the service mode, press the OK key, and register the width of A5R.
FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- A5R
• To execute Inch configuration adjustment
1. Align the Slide Guide with "LTR/11x17".
2. Select the service mode, press the OK key, and register the width of LTR.
FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTR
3. Align the Slide Guide with "STMT/LTRR/LGL".
4. Select the service mode, press the OK key, and register the width of LTRR.
FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- LTRR

6. In the following service mode, output P-PRINT.

COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT
Keep the output P-PRINT in service book case.

■ Scanner Unit (Paper Front)

● Actions after Parts Replacement
1. Enter the values written on the label included with the Scanner Unit.
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-RG
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-GB

2. Adjust the shading position.

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RDSHDPOS

3. Adjust the stream reading position.

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS

4. Adjust the white level.

Prepare a sheet of A3 or 11x17 size paper.
1. Place the paper on the Copyboard Glass.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
2. Place the paper on the ADF Document Pickup Tray.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
3. Place the paper on the Copy Board Glass.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3
4. Place the paper on the ADF Document Pickup Tray.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4

5. Execute the following service mode to calculate the MTF filter coefficient.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > MTF-CLC

6. Write down the following service mode values in the service label (on the back of the Reader Front Cover).
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-RG
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-GB
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > SH-TRGT
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW

342
 5. Adjustment

■ Scanner Unit (Paper Back)

● Actions after Parts Replacement
1. Enter the values written on the label included with the Scanner Unit.
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF2GB
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF2RG

2. Adjust the shading position.

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RDSHDPOS

3. Adjust the stream reading position.

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS

4. Adjust the white level.

Prepare a sheet of A3 or 11x17 size paper.
1. Place the paper on the Copyboard Glass.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
2. Place the paper on the ADF Document Pickup Tray.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
3. Place the paper on the Copy Board Glass.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3
4. Place the paper on the ADF Document Pickup Tray.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4

5. Execute the following service mode to calculate the MTF filter coefficient.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > MTF-CLC

6. Write down the following service mode values in the service label (on the back of the Reader Front Cover).
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-RG
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-GB
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-G
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-B
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-BW

■ Copyboard Glass
● Actions after Parts Replacement
1. Enter the value (XXXXYYYYZZZZ) shown on the Barcode Label affixed at the upper right of the Copy Board Glass.
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Z

W-PLT-X W-PLT-Z
W-PLT-Y

2. Adjust the shading position.

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RDSHDPOS

3. Set the target value of B&W shading.

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-TGT

4. Adjust the white level. Prepare a sheet of A3 or 11x17 size paper.

1. Set a sheet of paper on the Copyboard Glass.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
2. Set a sheet of paper on the ADF Document Pickup Tray.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

343
 5. Adjustment

3. Set a sheet of paper on the Copyboard Glass.

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3
4. Set a sheet of paper on the ADF Document Pickup Tray.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4

5. Write the service setting values on the service label inside of the reader front cover.
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > SH-TRGT
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-G
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-B
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-BW

Reversal ADF
■ Overview
● Adjustment After Replacing the Parts
In case of removing the parts as shown below, adjust the following item.

Parts to replace Adjustment item Reference

Motor/Other roller Adjusting the Magnification “Adjusting the Magnification” on page 331

● Preparation or Creation of Test Chart

Prepare a test chart. If there is no test chart, create a test chart.
Create a test chart that has a 10 mm smaller rectangle from the edge of A4 or LTR paper.

NOTE:
Be sure to write a character or mark to identify the printed image direction.

10 mm

10 mm 10 mm

10 mm

● Adjusting the Magnification

1. Copy the test chart with the DADF.

2. Compare the image length in feed direction between the copy and the test chart. As necessary, make the
following adjustment.

Adjustment Procedure

1. Select the following item in the service mode.

FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED

344
 5. Adjustment

2. Change the value as gap A in the figure.

• If the printed image is longer: Increase the value. (The image shrinks in the feed direction.)
• If the printed image is shorter: Decrease the value. (The image extends in the feed direction.)
Setting Value; 1=0.1%

< If the image is longer >

Trailing edge of
test chart Trailing edge of
printed image

Feed direction

< If the image is shorter >

Trailing edge of
printed image Trailing edge of
test chart

Feed direction

3. When the setting value was changed in step 2, write down the new numerical value in the service label.

NOTE:
The service label affixed to the inside of Reader Front Cover.

345
6 Troubleshooting
Initial Check.......................................347
Test Print........................................... 349
Troubleshooting Items.......................354
Display of "Non-Canon Product"
Message........................................ 359
Forcible stop of paper feed............... 361
Remedies to be performed when
E602-xxxx or E614-xxxx error is
displayed....................................... 364
Debug Log.........................................368
Startup System Failure Diagnosis.....385
Controller Self Diagnosis...................397
 6. Troubleshooting

Initial Check

Initial check items list

Item No. Detail Check
Site Environment 1 The voltage of the power supply is as rated (+/ -10%).
2 The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near a water faucet, water boiler,
humidifi er), and it is not in a cold place. The machine is not near a source of fi re or dust.
3 The site is not subject to ammonium gas.
4 The site is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise, provide curtains.)
5 The site is well ventilated, and the floor keeps the machine level.
6 The machine's power plug remains connected to the power outlet.
Checking the Paper 1 The paper is of a recommended type.
2 The paper is not moist. Try paper fresh out of package.
Checking the Placement 1 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a
of Paper specific level.
2 If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed in the correct orientation in the
manual feed tray.
Checking the Durables 1 Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end of its life.
Checking the Periodically 2 Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically replaced parts table, and replace
Replaced Parts any part that has reached the time of replacement.

Checking Each Unit/ Each Function System

Item No. Detail Check

Reader 1 Check that there is no cut, dirt or any foreign particle on the scanner system parts.
2 Check that the scanner unit moves smoothly and there is no dirt on the rail.
3 Check that the lump light does not blink.
4 Check that there is no dew condensation found on the scanning system parts.
Image Formation System 1 Check that the drum unit and developing assembly are properly installed.
2 Check that there is no cut and dirt on the photosensitive drum.
3 Check that the transfer roller is not worn and deformed and has no cut/ dirt.
Fixing System 1 Check that the fixing film and pressure roller is not worn and deformed and has no cut/ dirt.
2 Check that the fixing thermistor wire is not cut.
3 Check that there is electrical conductivity among thermoswitch.
Pickup Feed System 1 Check that there is no foreign particle such as paper dust etc.
2 Check that the pickup/ feed/ separation roller does not accumulate the paper dust. Check
that these rollers are not worn and deformed and have no cut/ dirt.
3 Check that the registration roller/ paper path roller is not worn and deformed and has no
cut/ dirt.
4 Check that the feed guide is not worn and deformed and has no cut/ dirt.
5 Check that there is no edge fold/ curl/ wave/ moisture absorption occurred on the paper.
6 Check if using Canon recommended paper/ transparency makes it better or not.
Drive system 1 Check that the drive system does not get heavy load.
2 Check that the gear is not worn and not get chipped.
Cassette 1 Check that the cassette is installed properly and the paper size is configured properly.
Check if the symptom appears or not after replacing the cassette with the cassette that
works normally.
2 Check that the cassette middle plate moves smoothly and is not deformed.
3 Check that the cassette side guide plate/ trailing edge guide plate is properly set.
4 Check that the cassette heater switch is ON (When the cassette heater is installed.).
General 1 Check that the sensor/ clutch/ motor/ solenoid works properly (Make sure to check the power
source and signal transmission route with the general circuit diagram.).
2 Check that there is no wire wedged/ screw loosened.
3 Check that all the external covers are installed.
4 Check that the main power switch/ control panel power switch is ON.

347
 6. Troubleshooting

Item No. Detail Check

General 5 Check that the wiring of power cable/ signal cable to each option is properly installed.
6 Check that the fuse on each PCB does not burn out.
7 Check that there is no error in customer's usage method.
Others 1 If moving the machine from the cold place such as storage etc to a warm place abruptly, dew
condensation is generated inside machine and it may cause various troubles.
• E100 occurs due to dew condensation on BD sensor.
• Low image density in the vertical scanning direction due to dew condensation on the
dust-proof glass.
• Low image density due to dew condensation on the reader CCD and copyboard glass.
• Paper feed failure due to dew condensation on the pickup feed guide.
2 If the symptom d appears, wipe the pickup/ feed unit with dry cloth.Moreover, if storing
the toner container/ developing assembly/ drum unit in the cold place and unpacking them
abruptly in warm place, dew condensation may be generated. To prevent dew condensation,
place them in warm place sufficiently (for 1 to 2 hours) before unpacking.

348
 6. Troubleshooting

Test Print

Overview
PG Pattern Image check item PCB to
TYPE Grada- Fog- Trans- Black White Un- Un- Right Side Shock Magni- gener-
tion ging fer fail- line line even even angle regis- fica- ate PG
ure pitch density accu- tration tion ra-
(rear/ racy tio
front) Straigh
t line
accu-
racy
0 Normal ---
copy/print
1 Grid Yes Yes Yes Main
Control-
ler PCB
2 17 grada- Yes Yes Yes Main
tions Tbic Control-
rank 2 ler PCB
3 17 grada- Yes Yes Yes Main
tions Control-
600dpi ler PCB
(134-line
screen or
141-line
screen)
4 Solid Yes Main
white Control-
ler PCB
5 Halftone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main
(density: Control-
80H, Tbic ler PCB
rank 2,
without
image
correc-
tion)
6 Halftone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main
(density: Control-
80H, 134- ler PCB
line
screen or
141-line
screen,
without
image
correc-
tion)
7 Solid Yes Yes Yes Yes Main
black Control-
ler PCB
8 Horizon- Yes Yes Yes Yes Main
tal line (4 Control-
dots, 27 ler PCB
spaces)
9 Horizon- Yes Yes Yes Yes Main
tal line (6 Control-
dots, 50 ler PCB
spaces)

349
 6. Troubleshooting

PG Pattern Image check item PCB to

TYPE Grada- Fog- Trans- Black White Un- Un- Right Side Shock Magni- gener-
tion ging fer fail- line line even even angle regis- fica- ate PG
ure pitch density accu- tration tion ra-
(rear/ racy tio
front) Straigh
t line
accu-
racy
10 Horizon- Yes Yes Yes Yes Main
tal line (2 Control-
dots, 3 ler PCB
spaces)
11 Halftone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main
(density: Control-
60H, Tbic ler PCB
rank 2,
without
image
correc-
tion)
12 Halftone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main
(density: Control-
60H, 134- ler PCB
line
screen or
141-line
screen,
without
image
correc-
tion)
13 Halftone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main
(density: Control-
30H, Tbic ler PCB
rank 2,
without
image
correc-
tion)
14 Halftone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main
(density: Control-
30H, 134- ler PCB
line
screen or
141-line
screen,
without
image
correc-
tion)
15 15 to 50: ---
For de-
velop-
ment

NOTE:
When outputting a halftone test print, be sure to use PG TYPE:6 except in the following cases.
1. When checking the image of side registration adjustment, use PG TYPE:11.

350
 6. Troubleshooting

How to use the test print

■ Grid (TYPE=1)

Check item Check method Assumed cause

Right angle accura- Check whether lines in the horizontal/vertical scanning directions Feed system failure or Laser Scanner Unitfai-
cy/Straight line accu- are paralleled to the paper and these lines are at right angles to lure is considered.
racy one another.
Side registration Check the left margin. Floor at the installation site is extremely distor-
ted, or the feed system failure is considered.
Magnification ratio Check whether the grid is printed at 9.99mm intervals. (Check Rollers' feed system failure or laser exposure
the image on the second side at duplex printing.) system failure (drum, Laser Scanner) is consid-
ered.

■ 17 gradations (TYPE=2/3)

Check item Check method Assumed cause

Gradation Check whether gradation in density is made appropriately. Drum failure, laser exposure system failureor developing
system failure is considered.
Black line Check whether black lines appear on the image. Laser light path failure, developing system failure, cleaning
(drum) failure or transfer roller failure is considered.
White line Check whether white lines appear on the image. Developing system failure is considered.

351
 6. Troubleshooting

■ Solid white (TYPE=4)

Check item Check method Assumed cause

Fogging Check whether foggy image appears in the blank area. Drum failure, laser exposure system failureor developing
system failure is considered.

■ Halftone (TYPE=5/6/11/12/13/14)

NOTE:
When outputting a halftone test print, be sure to use PG TYPE:6 except in the following cases.
1. When checking the image of side registration adjustment, use PG TYPE:11.

Check item Check method Assumed cause

Transfer fail- Check the evenness of halftone density. Check whether Transfer system failure or transfer roller failure is consid-
ure uneven image or foggy image appears. ered.
Black line Check whether black lines appear on the image. Laser light path failure, grid failure, developing system fail-
ure, cleaning (drum) failure or transfer roller failure is consid-
ered.
White line Check whether white lines appear on the image. Developing system failure is considered.
Uneven pitch Check whether lines appear on the image in the horizontal Drum failure, developing system failure, laser exposure
scanning direction. system failure or drive-related failure is considered.
Uneven densi- Check the density difference between the front and Drum failure or developing system failure is considered.
ty(rear/front) rear sides.
Side registra- Check the left margin. Floor at the installation site is extremely distorted, or the feed
tion system failure is considered.
Shock Check whether horizontal lines appear on the image. Rollers' feed system failure or laser exposure system failure
(drum, Laser Scanner) is considered.

352
 6. Troubleshooting

■ Solid black (TYPE=7)

Check item Check method Assumed cause

Transfer fail- Check the evenness of halftone density. Check whether Transfer system failure is considered.
ure uneven image or foggy image appears.
Uneven pitch Check whether lines appear on the image in the horizontal Drum failure, developing system failure, laser exposure
scanning direction. system failure or drive-related failure is considered.
Uneven densi- Check the density difference between the front and Drum failure or developing system failure isconsidered.
ty(rear/front) rear sides.

■ Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10)

Check item Check method Assumed cause

Black line Check whether black lines appear on the image. Laser light path failure, developing system failure, cleaning
(drum) failure or transfer roller failure is considered.
White line Check whether white lines appear on the image. Developing system failure is considered.
Uneven pitch Check whether lines appear on the image in the horizontal Drum failure, developing system failure, laser exposure
scanning direction. system failure or drive-related failure is considered.
Uneven densi- Check the density difference between the front and Drum failure or developing system failure isconsidered.
ty(rear/front) rear sides.

353
 6. Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Items

Category Item Reference

Imagefai- Dirt Central image tail trace “Scattered image at center” on page 354
lure Paper reverse side stained with toner “Paper Reverse Side Stained with Toner” on page 355
Stained leading/trailing edge of paper “Stained Leading/Trailing Edge of Paper” on page 355
Blur/Void Image transfer wrong/text void “Image Transfer Wrong/Text Void” on page 356
Image deletion/blur/dew condensation “Image Deletion/Blur/Dew Condensation” on page 356
Operation- Paper jam Too large curl “Too Large Curl” on page 357
failure Paper jam due to solid image printed on paper “Thin Paper Jam (63 g/m2 or Less)” on page 357
with small leading-edge margin (1-4 mm)
Thin paper jam (63 g/m2 or less) “Paper Jam due to Solid Image Printed on Paper with
Small Leading-Edge Margin (1-4 mm)” on page 357

Image Faults
■ Scattered image at center

Occurrence area
Pre-registration guide (Static eliminator)

Cause
An image is scattered by paper dust stuck on the static eliminator of the pre-registration guide.

Occurrence condition
(A lump of) paper dust is stuck on the static eliminator of the pre-registration guide.

Remedy
Cleaning of the static eliminator of the pre-registration transfer guide
1. Remove the right cover.
2. Lightly tap a contaminated part of the static eliminator to remove the paper dust.

354
 6. Troubleshooting

■ Paper Reverse Side Stained with Toner

Occurrence area]
• Fixing assembly (circumference of the roller: approx.94 mm)
• Transfer roller (circumference: approx.50 mm)

Cause
Fixing Assembly: Toner came off the paper sticks to the pressure roller, and then the toner sticks to the reverse side of the paper.
Transfer Roller: Toner remained on the drum that had stopped at occurrence of a jam. During the recovery operation performed
later, the toner sticks to the transfer roller.

Occurrence condition
Fixing Assembly: When fixing ability is poor due to low temperature, a halftone image has been printed on a lot of sheets of paper,
or the time for replacement of the transfer unit is near.
Transfer Roller: When a paper jam has occurred or the time for replacement of the transfer roller is near.

Remedy
• Fixing Assembly: Service mode (Lv.2: FIX-CLN)
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > FIX-CLN
• Transfer Roller: Service mode (Lv.2: TR-CLN)
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > TR-CLN

■ Stained Leading/Trailing Edge of Paper

Occurrence area
• Transfer Front Guide
• Fixing Inlet Guide

Cause
• Transfer Front Guide: The leading or trailing edge of paper touches the toner stuck to the transfer front upper guide.
• Fixing Inlet Guide: The leading or trailing edge of paper touches the toner stuck to the fixing inlet guide.

Occurrence condition
When halftone or solid-black images are printed in succession

355
 6. Troubleshooting

Remedy
Using lens-cleaning paper or the like, clean the guide stained with toner.

■ Image Transfer Wrong/Text Void

Occurrence area
Transfer Roller (circumference: 50 mm)

Cause
• Resistance of paper increases due to reduction in paper water content, resulting in insufficient transfer output.
• Resistance of paper decreases due to increase in paper water content, resulting in excessive transfer output.

Occurrence condition
• Paper left alone in a low-humidity environment
• Paper left alone in a high-humidity environment

Remedy
Service mode (Lv.2: TROPT-SW) > "-2" to "1"
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR > TROPT-SW

■ Image Deletion/Blur/Dew Condensation

356
 6. Troubleshooting

Occurrence area
Drum (circumference: 94 mm)

Cause
Corona products generated on the charging roller stick to the drum, and then water molecules adsorb onto them, resulting in
reduction in resistance.
Therefore, a desired latent image cannot be formed, resulting in a blurred image.

Occurrence condition
• When the machine is operated first in the morning under the high-temperature and high humidity environment.

Remedy
• Service mode (Lv.2: IMG-BLD1) > "1" to "3"
COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET > IMG-BLD1
• Install the optional drum heater.

■ Too Large Curl

Occurrence area
Fixing Assembly

Cause
The water content on the front surface of paper becomes different from that on the reverse side of paper, making the curl larger.

Occurrence condition
When the paper has been left alone in a high-humidity environment.

Remedy
• Service mode (Lv.2: TMP-TBLC) > "0" to "3"
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBLC
• Machine shipped with cassette heater: Turn on the heater.
• Install an optional cassette heater.

■ Paper Jam due to Solid Image Printed on Paper with Small Leading-Edge
Margin (1-4 mm)
Occurrence area
Fixing Assembly

Cause
When a solid image is printed on the paper with a small leading-edge margin (1-4 mm), paper cannot be easily separated from
the fixing film, causing a paper jam.

Occurrence condition
When the paper has been left alone in a high-humidity environment or when a solid image is printed on the paper with a small
leading-edge margin.

Remedy
• Service mode (Lv.2: SP-SW) > "0" to "2"
COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW > SP-SW
• Service mode (Lv.2: TMP-TBLC) > "0" to "3"
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBLC

■ Thin Paper Jam (63 g/m2 or Less)

Occurrence area
• Drum
• Fixing Assembly

357
 6. Troubleshooting

Cause
The separation power reduces due to low elasticity of paper, causing a jam in the drum assembly or fixing assembly.

Occurrence condition
When paper thinner than 64 g/m2 paper is used.

Remedy
• Service mode (TMP-TBL5) > "0" to "2"
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL5

358
 6. Troubleshooting

Display of "Non-Canon Product" Message

The following shows the remedy to be performed when a "non-Canon product" message is displayed even though Canon-made
toner and drums are used.

Remedy
Perform a remedy according to the instruction of the alarm.

Toner Bottle

Alarm code: 10-0094

1. Remove and then install the Toner Bottle.
2. Check for any scar or soiling on the memory area of the Toner Bottle.
3. Check the connector(J160,J42,J124) between the Bottle ROM PCB(UN75) and the DC Controller PCB.
4. Check for any soiling or damage on the Bottle ROM PCB(UN75).
5. Disconnect and then connect the connector (J333) of the DC Controller (UN2).
6. Replace the Toner Bottle.

359
 6. Troubleshooting

Drum Unit

Alarm code: 09-0013

1. Remove and then install the Drum Unit.
2. Check the contact point of the Drum Unit Memory(UN74).
3. Remove and then install the Drum Unit New/Old Connector PCB.
4. Check the connector(J2060) between the DC Controller PCB(UN2) and the Drum Unit Memory(UN74).
5. Disconnect and then connect the connector (J334) of the DC Controller (UN2).
6. Replace the Drum Unit.
7. Replace the Drum Unit New/Old Connector PCB.

360
 6. Troubleshooting

Forcible stop of paper feed

Function Overview
Forcibly stop the paper at a specified position.
Next time a job occurs, the paper is forcibly stopped at the stop position (leading edge) shown in the figure
When the operation is stopped forcibly, jam code "AAxx" is displayed.

[50,51] [70]
[42,43]
[71]
[40,41]
[72]
[32,33]
[30,31,99]
[73]

[6,7]
[20,21]
[1]

[2] [5]

[3]

[4]

Use case
• When bent paper/skew/wrinkles occur
• When jam occurs frequently

361
 6. Troubleshooting

How to use
1. Use this function from SITUATION mode.
Service Mode > SITUATION > Troubleshooting > Forcible stop of paper feed
The following service modes can be operated from this SITUATION mode.

COPIER > TEST > P-STOP > PRINTER

COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE
COPIER > TEST > PG > PG-PICK
COPIER > TEST > PG > 2-SIDE
COPIER > TEST > PG > DENS-K

2. Execute a job (copy/test print).

3. Stop the paper at a specified position to identify the cause of the trouble.

Points to note when using

• Remove the paper being stopped with the normal jam removal procedure. After jam removal, the job is
automatically recovered.
• Display of standard jam code indicates that a jam occurs somewhere other than the specified position.
• When a job which the paper does not pass the specified stop position is executed, the setting to forcibly stop the paper
becomes disabled.
• Unfixed toner may be attached depending on the stop position. Use caution when handling it.

Setting Value
0: OFF
1: Outlet of the Vertical Path Slave Roller (cassette 1)
2: Outlet of the Vertical Path Slave Roller (cassette 2)
3: Outlet of the Vertical Path Slave Roller (cassette 3)*3
4: Outlet of the Vertical Path Slave Roller (cassette 4)
5: Outlet of the Deck Pull-out Roller roller
6: Inlet of the Registration Roller
7: Inlet of the Registration Roller (2nd side)
20: Registration Roller
21: Registration Roller (2nd side)
30: Inlet of the Fixing Assembly
31: Inlet of the Fixing Assembly (2nd side)
32: Outlet of the Fixing Assembly
33: Outlet of the Fixing Assembly (2nd side)
40: Outlet of the First Delivery *1
41: Outlet of the First Delivery (2nd side) *1

362
 6. Troubleshooting

42: Outlet of the Vertical Path Slave Roller *1

43: Outlet of the Vertical Path Slave Roller (2nd side) *1
50: Outlet of the Second Delivery *1
51: Outlet of the Second Delivery (2nd side) *1
70: Reverse Mouth *2
71: Inlet of the Duplexing inlet roller *2
72: Outlet of the Duplexing inlet roller *2
73: Outlet of the Duplexing/feeding roller *2
99: Inlet of the Fixing Assembly (for checking image)
Any value other than those mentioned above: Not used

*1: Paper may not be stopped depending on the delivery destination setting.
*2: Paper is stopped after being reversed for a 2-sided job.
*3: The paper stop in the same position on the High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit installation.

363
 6. Troubleshooting

Remedies to be performed when E602-xxxx or E614-xxxx error

is displayed
Remedy procedure for E602 or E614 differs according to the status of the screen where error is displayed.
Check the remedy procedure by referring to the following flow chart.

Start

An error
code is displayed on
a black screen

Go to
[Error code descriptions] Go to [Flow Chart 2]

Flow Chart 1

Turn OFF the main power.

+------------------------------------+
| E602-0801 |
+------------------------------------+

Cannot access the hard disk.

If the optional removable hard disk is use, check it is connected
then restart the machine.
IF this is error tou occur, content your service representative.

Display Sample : If an error code is displayed on a black screen

Execute a remedy described in service mode by referring to Error / Jam / Alarm in the Service Manual.
If an error code and a message is displayed on a black screen (as above), shift to the hard disk maintenance mode referring to
the Flow Chart 2 and execute the remedy described in Error / Jam / Alarm in the Service Manual.

364
 6. Troubleshooting

START

Confirmation or judgment
(1) Check cable connector
connected to HDD and
Detail change of
restart the machine. initialization and
/or Inspection
(2) Did
the machine start and Initialization and /or
the issue solved? inspection fails and
related parts are replaced

Automatic process
(3) Shift to the hard disk of the machine
maintenance mode.

(4) Is the
issue judged to be unsolvable
by hard disk maintenance
mode?
(9) Cancel the scheduled
process and turn OFF
the power.

(5) Specify target area (10) Take an

(CHK TYPE) action based on an error For E614-4000
code that appeared.
(6) Schedule the process
to conduct, turn OFF and In case other
then ON the main power. than E614-4000
(12) Start in safe mode
(7) Scheduled process and reinstall the system.
(11) Replace related parts.
is conducted.
(13) Did
the machine start and
(8) Did
issue solved?
the machine start and
issue solved?

(14) Replace related parts.

End

Flow Chart 2

CAUTION:
Numbers in the Flow Chart 2 are corresponding to the procedure numbers. Check the remedy procedure by referring to the
flow chart.

1. Check cable connector connected to the hard disk and restart the machine.

2. Check if the machine is started normally. If the machine is started normally, the analysis is complete.

365
 6. Troubleshooting

3. If the machine is not started normally, execute key operation to shift to the service mode for shifting to hard disk
maintenance mode.

[1] : CHK TYPE

[2] : HD CHECK
[3] : HD CLEAR
[4] : HD OPERATION CANCEL

+------------------------------------+
| E602-0801 |
+------------------------------------+

Cannot access the hard disk.

If the optional removable hard disk is use, check it is connected
then restart the machine.
IF this is error tou occur, content your service representative.

Example of hard disk maintenance mode screen

4. Determine if the issue is solved in the hard disk maintenance mode.

• Proceed to 5 for diagnosis for the first time or trying to restore with the hard disk maintenance mode.
• If the issue cannot be solved by hard disk maintenance (HD-CHECK/HD-CLEAR is not executed or issue unsolved even
executed), proceed to 9.

5. Press "1" of Numeric Keypad, then two digits number to specify the target area (CHK TYPE).

[1] : CHK TYPE

[2] : HD CHECK
[3] : HD CLEAR
[4] : HD OPERATION CANCEL
-------------------------------------------------
[1] has been selected
- Change to (0)

CAUTION:
The CHK - TYPE to be specified needs to be entered in two digits even the number to be specified is one digit. Enter "01"
to specify "1" and enter "04" to specify "4".
For example, in the case of the above display (E602-0801), specify No. 8 because Partition No. 8 is in error. (Enter the
number as "08")
If you made a mistake, press "1" again then enter two digits number.

6. Specify and schedule the process stated as a remedy for error code by referring to the Flow chart No.6, "Error / Jam /
Alarm" in the Service Manual. Then turn OFF and then ON the main power of the machine.
• To schedule disk check (COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM >HD-CHECK), select [2]:HD-CHECK.
• To schedule formatting (COPIER / FUNCTION / SYSTEM /HD-CLEAR), select [3]:HD CLEAR.

NOTE:
When the menu [2] to [4] is selected, key cannot be re-entered. If you made a wrong selection, Turn OFF and then ON the main
power of the machine, shift to hard disk maintenance mode and specify again.

7. Scheduled process is automatically executed.

8. If the process is complete and the machine is restarted normally, analysis is complete.
The same black screen and the error code is displayed, shift back to the hard disk maintenance mode and conduct
other maintenance.

366
 6. Troubleshooting

9. Consider the HDD cannot be restored, select [4] and cancel the schedule. Switch OFF the main power of the machine.

[1] : CHK TYPE

[2] : HD CHECK
[3] : HD CLEAR
[4] : HD OPERATION CANCEL
-------------------------------------------------
[4] has been selected
Turn OFF the main power.

CAUTION:
Replacing HDD without canceling the schedule causes the scheduled process is executed to replaced HDD at the next
normal startup.
When replacing parts, specify [4] to cancel the schedule.

10. Start in safe mode and reinstall the system.

1) Start in safe mode and reinstall the system.
2) Check the FLASH PCB if it cannot start in safe mode or if reinstallation is not successful. (See error code E614-4000)

11. If the process is complete and the machine is restarted normally, analysis is complete.
The same black screen and the error code is displayed, shift back to the hard disk maintenance mode and conduct
other maintenance.

12. Refer to the Service Manual to replace the related parts.

NOTE:
Related parts for E602
• Harness between main controller PCB and the HDD
• HDD
• Main Controller PCB
Related parts for E614
• Flash PCB
• Main Controller PCB

367
 6. Troubleshooting

Debug Log

Function Overview
As for debug log, following logs are available: continuous log that saves the operation log, automatic log that is saved when an
event occurs, manual log which is collected and saved each time at log saving, packet log, and key operation log.

Host machine
Main Controller
Save area
Auto save area
Module When executing
Log Log log saving
As needed / When
an event occurs
Automatic Continuous
Module logs logs
Log Log
Log
Log
Manual logs
Module
Log
When executing Packets
log saving When executing
log saving
Each Controller Log
Key operation
logs

NOTE:
Debug logs are used for analysis of program operations of the machine and identification of the problem by the developer.
This machine has a function for compiling operation history of each software module as debug logs and outputting them as unified
logs for analyzing problems.
Since the frequency of outputting debug logs and the type of logs can be changed by the settings, the settings need to be changed
according to the trouble that occurs and the situation.

Types of Debug Logs

Types of De- Description

bug Logs
Sublogs Manual logs
Logs collected in each module and controller are archived and can be collected when log saving is executed.
Logs of the Main Controller, RCON, and DCON are saved together with automatic logs as up to 10 logs in total.

Automatic logs
Logs that are automatically saved to the machine when an event (exceptional behavior, error code, or
reboot) occurs.
Logs of the Main Controller, RCON, and DCON are saved together with manual logs as up to 10 logs in total.
Continuous logs
Logs that are continuously saved while the machine is running.
Up to 100 logs of only the Main Controller can be stored.
Key operation logs History of key operations.
Log collection starts by enabling the setting and starting the function.
Logs that are archived and can be collected when log saving is executed.
Network pack- Logs of network packet data sent from or received by the host machine.
et logs Log collection starts by enabling the setting and starting the function.
Logs that are archived and can be collected when log saving is executed.

Storage location and types of Sublogs

The locations where Sublogs are stored and the types of logs are shown below. Logs may be stored in controllers and parts other
than those shown below.

368
 6. Troubleshooting

Type Automatic logs Manual logs Continuous logs

Main Controller Yes (more detailed than continu- Yes (more detailed than continu- Yes
ous logs) ous logs)
DCON Yes Yes No
RCON Yes Yes No

Cases Where Debug Logs Need to Be Collected

• When the result of identification of the cause shows that the trouble was caused by host machine (firmware, hardware-
related controller)
• When the failure occurs only at the customer's site and cannot be reproduced by the department in charge of quality
management or Canon Inc.

■ Sublogs
Sublog is the general term for the unified logs for analyzing problem in which operation histories of software modules are compiled
as debug logs.
When a problem relating to the host machine occurs in the field and it is difficult to identify the cause of it at the user site, collecting
Sublogs and sending them to Design Dept./R&D can improve the efficiency of analyzing the problem and reduce the time it takes
to deal with the problem.

CAUTION:
• Sublogs are basically stored in volatile memory. Therefore, almost all information will be erased by turning OFF and ON
the power before saving the log data. When obtaining the log data, make sure to implement the operation to save the
log data (manually saving log) before turning OFF and ON the power.
• I order to prevent failure of collecting necessary information because the log is overwritten with the succeeding process,
be sure to collect the Sublog while the symptom has occurred or immediately after the occurrence.
• Once the Sublog files are collected, they are deleted from the machine. In the case of collecting Sublogs consecutively,
the number of continuous log files may be fewer than usual.

■ Key operation logs

This function collects the history of key operations in order to distinguish between a failure of the Main machine and an operation
error of the user in the case of trouble of erroneous fax transmission.
If it cannot be denied the possibility that the user operation caused the error, collect the key operation logs.
The key operation log are stored/recovered in a form included in the Sublog files.
The following confidential information in the stored key operation log is masked.
• Personal identification number, PIN code, password, etc., to be entered
• Information that is hidden by turned letters on the UI screen

CAUTION:
To obtain permission from a user in advance for recording key operations for failure analysis.

■ Network Packet Logs

CAUTION:
Performance, etc. deteriorate while this function is being used.
Only when it is expected that the trouble was caused by network, collect network packet logs.

This function collects the transmitted and received network packet data as a debug log in the storage (capture).

NOTE:
To use this function, you need to register a license, so you need to ask the Support Dept. of the sales company to issue a license.

369
 6. Troubleshooting

CAUTION:
• When obtaining the network packet log, explain to the user and obtain permission before proceeding.
• After obtaining the network packet log, turn OFF the setting by the following operation.
1. Set "0" in the following service mode (Lv.2) to stop the capture of network packets.
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > STT-STP
2. Set "0" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > CAPOFFON
3. Disable (OFF) the setting in the following menu.
[Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [Store Network Packet Log]
• Under heavy network load environment, packets can be dropped.

370
 6. Troubleshooting

■ Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs

Check the following flow to determine the procedure for collecting logs according to the type of problem.

Service call for trouble

Does the problem

repeat restart?

Key operation logs need to be collected

Does the problem

cause the Control Panel
to be locked?
Network packet logs need to be collected

<DEBUG SRAM PCB Assembly Board: Required>

Does the problem

repeat restart? See Case A of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"

Does the problem

cause the Control Panel See Case B of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"
to be locked?

Is the problem related

See Case C of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"
to the sleep mode?

<DEBUG SRAM PCB Assembly Board: Not required>

Is the problem still

occurring or just finished See Case D of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"
occurring?

See Case D of the "Procedure

for Obtaining Logs"

When the user's operation such as wrong fax transmission may be the cause of the problem, enable [Store Key Operation Log].

371
 6. Troubleshooting

Procedure for Collecting Logs

Log Collection Procedure List

Problem Details of Problem DEBUG SRAM Procedure for Obtaining Logs

Case PCB ASS'Y
Board
Case A Problem that repeats re- Necessary 1. Refer to “Preparation” on page 374 and make the preparations such as
start installing the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board or change the settings.
2. Execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network
Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 377 immediately
after restart.
3. Save and collect reports by referring to “Saving and Collecting Report
Files” on page 382.
4. Collect debug logs by referring to “Collection of Log” on page 378.
Case B Problem causing the Necessary 1. Refer to “Preparation” on page 374 and make the preparations such as
Control Panel to installing the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board or change the settings.
be locked 2. Turn OFF and then ON the power immediately after the Control Panel
is locked.
3. Execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network
Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 377 after startup.
4. Save and collect reports by referring to “Saving and Collecting Report
Files” on page 382.
5. Collect debug logs by referring to “Collection of Log” on page 378.
Case C Problem related to the Necessary 1. Refer to “Preparation” on page 374 and make the preparations such as
sleep mode installing the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board or change the settings.
2. After the problem occurs, turn OFF and then ON the power if necessary,
and execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network
Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 377.
3. Save and collect reports by referring to “Saving and Collecting Report
Files” on page 382.
4. Collect debug logs by referring to “Collection of Log” on page 378.
Case D Problem when execut- Not necessary 1. Execute log saving while the problem is occurring by referring to
ing a job (Example: “Saving of Manual Logs, Network Packet Logs and Key Operation
Printing is not per- Logs” on page 377.
formed, etc.) 2. Execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network
Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 377.
3. Collect debug logs by referring to “Collection of Log” on page 378.
When an E code error Not necessary Execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network Packet
has occurred Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 377.
However, if the background of the Control Panel is blank and an error code
is displayed in text, logs cannot be obtained.
Case E Problems other Not necessary Execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network Packet
than above Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 377.
Check with the user on the date and time when the problem occurred and
the procedure.

Saving and Collecting Debug Logs

■ Tools Required
The following tools are necessary to save/collect debug logs of the machine.

Exporting to a USB Device

• USB device
When exporting debug logs to a USB device, use a USB device in which the system software for the machine is registered
using SST.
Since the size and number of log files to collect varies according to the device status and the logs that have been saved,
the size of the collected files may be several hundred MB. Therefore, it is recommended to use a USB device with 1 GB
or more of free space.
The USB device must be formatted with the FAT file system.

372
 6. Troubleshooting

CAUTION:
Be sure to check that the USB device has 1 GB or more of free space before collecting a log.
If capacity of the USB device is insufficient, logs that failed to be saved will be deleted so that analysis of the symptom cannot
be performed.

Exporting to a PC
• PC with SST installed
• Network connection cable
When exporting debug logs to a PC, a PC with SST installed and a network connection cable are required.
Common (When Exporting to a USB Device, or When Exporting to a PC)
• DEBUG SRAM PCB Assembly Board
In the following conditions, debug logs cannot be saved, therefore the DEBUG SRAM PCB Assembly Board is required.
• When restart is repeated
• When all the operations of the device are frozen and manual logs cannot be collected.
• When the machine would not recover from sleep mode
Refer to the following regarding installation on to the Controller PCB.

DEBUG SRAM PCB

Reference example of installation

■ Work Flow
The flow of saving/collecting Sublogs is shown below.

1. Preparation
Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs” on page 371, and make the preparation as needed according
to a situation where an event has occurred.

2. Reproduction of the symptom

Reproduce the symptom.

3. Saving of manual logs

Save manual logs that require manual operation.

4. Output of reports
Output reports necessary for escalation.

373
 6. Troubleshooting

5. Collecting log files

Start the machine in download mode, and save (collect) the log files to a USB device or a PC.

CAUTION:
In the case of analysis using Sublog, the following information needs to be obtained together with the Sublog.
• Symptom that has occurred (from service technician's viewpoint as far as possible)
• Date and time of the event (from an hour before the event to an hour after the event)
• Reports (P-Print, HIST-PRT, job logs, communication management report, etc.)
• Printed data and original at the time of reproduction (depends on the trouble that has occurred)
Besides Sublog, the above-mentioned information is required due to the following reasons:
• Failures such as a process being stopped due to an error or an unintended behavior are easy to find, but failures such
as "the behavior is slow" are difficult to analyze based on operation logs only.
• Since the number and size of the files are huge, the information helps to find the operation log where the
problem occurred.
• When R&D reproduces the failure, it is necessary to use information such as the procedure used by the customer,
frequency of use, and job data at the time of occurrence of the failure.

6. Remove the board installed in step 1 and return the settings back to the original values.

■ Preparation
Follow the procedure shown below to make preparations for collecting debug logs.

1. Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs” on page 371 and when it is judged that DEBUG
SRAM PCB ASSEMBLY Board is required, install the board.

DEBUG SRAM PCB

Reference example of installation

2. Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs” on page 371 and when it is judged that collection
of the key operation logs is required, enable [Store Key Operation Log] by following the procedure shown below.
1. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Device Management] > [Store Key Operation Log].
2. Select [ON] and press [OK] to start saving key operation logs.

CAUTION:
When collecting the key operation logs, be sure to obtain user's permission in advance.

374
 6. Troubleshooting

3. Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs” on page 371 and when it is judged that collection
of the network packet logs is required, enable the network packet log collection function by following the procedure
shown below and start the function.
1. Enter a license in the following menu to enable network packet capture.
[Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/Other] > [Register License]

NOTE:
Use the license issued by the Support Dept. of the sales company to activate it.

2. Enable (ON) the setting in the following menu.

[Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [Store Network Packet Log]
3. Set the target interface to be acquired in service mode (Lv.2). If the set value is changed, restart the host machine and
then proceed to step 4.
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > CAPIF
• 1: Local loop back
Basically it is not used. Use only when there is a obtaining request from our development side.
• 2: Wired LAN
When “Wired LAN” is set in [Settings/Registration] > [References] > [Network] > [Select Interface]
• 3: Wireless LAN
When “Wireless LAN” is set in [Settings/Registration] > [References] > [Network] > [Select Interface]
• 4: Wireless Software AP Mode
When “Access point mode” is set in [Settings/Registration] > [References] > [Network] > [Direct Connection Setting]
• 5: Wi-Fi Direct
When “Wi-Fi Fi Direct” is set in [Settings/Registration] > [References] > [Network] > [Direct Connection Setting]
• 6: Wired LAN (Sub Line)
When "Wired LAN + Wireless LAN" or "Wired LAN + Wired LAN" is set in [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >
[Network] > [Interface Selection], and obtaining communication on the sub line side
4. Set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > CAPOFFON
5. Refer to “Initial setting of the network packet log collection function” on page 375, and configure the required
option settings.

4. When an instruction to change the automatic log settings is given by the Support Dept. of the sales company, change
the settings by referring to “Automatic Log Settings” on page 375.

● Automatic Log Settings

The automatic log is set to automatically save when triggered by “unexpected error occurrence”, “error code occurrence”, or
“reboot due to software anomaly detection”.
• Service Mode to set triggers
COPIER > Function > DBG-LOG > LOG-TRIG (Default: 101)

CAUTION:
Changing the LOG-TRIG settings may cause adverse effects, so only make setting changes if instructed by Canon Inc.
through the sales company’s support.

● Initial setting of the network packet log collection function

When collecting the network packet logs, configure the initial settings as needed.

Setting the overwrite function

375
 6. Troubleshooting

1. To enable this function, set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > OVERWRIT

NOTE:
When this setting is enabled, old logs will be overwritten. If the symptom cannot be reproduced, disable this setting (setting value:
0) and secure logs (save them using SST or USB).
After securing the logs, enable the setting (setting value: 1) again.

Behavior when HDD reaches the limit

When this setting is enabled (setting value: 1), the following behaviors will occur when the HDD reaches the limit.
• When overwrite setting is ON
• The oldest packet file is deleted. This "oldest file" is judged not by the date and time allocated to the file but by
the last update time of the file.
• If the HDD reaches the maximum size while retrieving packets, the oldest file will be deleted, and CAPSTATE
of the capture, which continues the retrieval process for the file which is being saved, remains "RUNNING".
• When overwrite setting is OFF
• The capture is stopped.
• The CAPSTATE of the capture will be "HDDFULL". However, STT-STP will remain as Start (1) status. By
changing STT-STP (0) to STTSTP (1), the capture resumes.
• When the capture resumes, the capture starts if HDDFULL has been solved.
• The CAPSTATE of the capture will be "RUNNING".
• If HDDFULL has not been solved, an error is generated as the result of resuming the capture.
• The CAPSTATE of the capture remains "HDDFULL".
• If the capture is stopped while the CAPSTATE is "HDDFULL", the CAPSTATE of the capture remains "STOP".

Setting the encryption function

1. To enable this function, set "2" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > ENCDATA
• 0: Encrypted when data is extracted (factory default setting).
• 1: Not encrypted when data is extracted.
• 2: When data is extracted, a ciphertext file and a plaintext file are extracted.
The extension of extracted packet data will be "XXX.can" when encryption settings are enabled.
The extension of extracted packet data will be "XXX.cap" when encryption settings are disabled.
This setting only applies when extracting data by the USB flash drive.

NOTE:
When SST is used to collect data, both plaintext data and ciphertext data are extracted, and this setting is ignored.

Setting the payload drop function

1. To enable this setting, set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > PAYLOAD
• 0: Not drop the payload (factory default settings)
• 1: Drop the payload
The obtained packet data includes a header part and data part. The header part includes data such as the TCP header and
IP header. The data part includes the actual data.
Enabling this function discards the actual payload data and extracts only the data from the header part, which has the
following effects.
• Can be used when customer data is not allowed to be extracted
• Can be used in an environment where traffic is highly overloaded

Header part

Data part
Discarded part

Packet data structure image

376
 6. Troubleshooting

Setting the filter function

1. To enable this function, set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > SIMPFILT
• 0: All data is collected without being filtered (factory default setting).
• 1: Data is filtered.
If this function is enabled, only packet data that includes the machine's MAC address in the packet header is captured.

Setting the startup collection function

1. To enable this function, set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > PONSTART
• 0: Not automatically collect at startup (factory default setting)
• 1: Data is filtered.
If this function is enabled, only packet data that includes the machine's MAC address in the packet header is captured.

■ Saving of Manual Logs, Network Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs
Follow the procedure shown below to save debug logs (manual logs, network packet logs, and key operation logs) that require
manual operation to the save area of the host machine.

CAUTION:
When network packet logs have been collected and necessary network packets have been captured, stop the capture from
the following menu.
1. Set "0" in the following service mode (Lv.2) to stop the capture of network packets.
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > STT-STP
2. Set "0" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > CAPOFFON
3. Disable (OFF) the setting in the following menu.
[Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [Store Network Packet Log]
When this setting is disabled, all the set service mode are initialized.
Be sure to disable the network capture function after completing the analysis of the network trouble,

When obtaining in service mode

1. Set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2) to start the capture of the network packets.
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > STT-STP
2. Execute the following service mode (Lv.2) to check the status of the capture.
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > CAPSTATE
The following types of status are displayed.
- RUNNING: Packet capture in progress
- STOP: Packet capture stopped
- HDDFULL: When 1 GB of the packet upper capture limit is captured

377
 6. Troubleshooting

When capturing from the control panel

1. After the symptom has reproduced, hold down the Counter key on the Control Panel for approx. 10 seconds, and then press
1, 2, and 3 in that order on the Numeric Keypad.

CAUTION:
If the power is turned OFF during the period from when the symptom occurs to when the manual log is saved (hold
down the Counter key and press numeric keys 1, 2, and 3), necessary log data will be deleted so that analysis cannot
be performed.

2 1

2. Confirm that "Saving system information" is displayed on the control panel.

• For platform version 3.7 or later, the following screen is displayed.

Save screen for Platform Version 3.7 or later

• For platform versions 3.6 and earlier, the following message appears in the status display field:

Saving messages for Platform Version 3.6 and earlier

CAUTION:
• While logs are being saved, other operations cannot be performed.
• If the above screen or message does not appear, press the reset button and repeat the procedure from step 2.

■ Collection of Log
Save the Sublogs stored in the host machine to a USB device or a PC with SST installed.
The procedure for storing Sublogs to a USB device differs from that for storing Sublogs to a PC

378
 6. Troubleshooting

● Collecting into a USB Device

To save (collect) Sublogs to a USB device, perform the procedure shown below to collect the logs.
If SST is used to save (collect) Sublogs to a PC, this work is not necessary.

CAUTION:
If the log is stored multiple times to the USB flash drive on the host machine with the platform version 3.6 or earlier, make
sure to move the stored log file to a different location each time.
Log files are stored in the root directory of USB flash drive. If multiple files are stored, the file, "LOGLIST.txt" is overwritten.
Note that on the host machine with the platform version 3.7 later, specifications are changed and this file is not overwritten.

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the machine.

2. Execute the following service mode.

COPIER > Function > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD

3. The host machine will enter download mode. Press [8] on the Numeric Keypad.

[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ Root Menu (USB) <v25.12> ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] (v25.12)

-------------------------------------------------------
[ 1 ] : Select Version

[ 4 ] : Clear/Format
[ 5 ] : Backup/Restore
[ 8 ] : Download File
[ 9 ] : Version Information
[ Reset ] : Start shutdown sequence

4. [Download File Menu] will appear. Press a numeric key for the file to download.

[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ Download File Menu (USB) <v25.12> ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] (v25.12)

------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ 1 ] : SUBLOG Download
[ 4 ] : ServicePrint Download
[ 5 ] : NetCap Download
[ C ] : Return to Menu

• Press [1] key to download Sublog.

• Press [5] to download network packet log.

5. The files to be downloaded and the number of files are displayed. Check the following items and press [0] on the
Numeric Keypad.
• Whether the manual log that was saved at the time of reproduction of the symptom is displayed under Event Logs
• Whether the date and time at which the symptom was reproduced is within the period of Continuous Log
Example: When the symptom was reproduced at 9:40 on April 14, 2017 and a manual log was saved
Check that the manual log that was generated at 9:40 on April 14, 2017 is displayed under Event Logs.
Check whether 9:40 on April 14, 2017 is included in the logged period(from 8:03:33 on March 22, 2017 to 9:45:14 April
14, 2017) of the ContinuousLog.

379
 6. Troubleshooting

[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ Sublog Download (EventLog + CuntinuousLog) ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Event Logs ( lastest 10 files) :
20170414_09-40-UPN00003-V2512_Debuglog@Cnt123
20170404_16-02-ZZZ00000-V0254_ServiceCall-E719-0001
20170328_08-22-ZZZ00000-V0254_exception
ContinuousLog :
Period : 20170322_0803-33 to 20170414_0945-14

Toral : 102files
/ Execute ? /
-(OK) : 0 / (CANCEL) : Any other keys -

6. When downloading the log files is complete, the following message will appear. Press any key.
--- Please press any keys ---

● Saving to a PC with SST installed

Follow the procedure shown below to save (collect) Sublogs to a PC using SST.
For instructions, refer to the following chapters of the "SST_Operation Manual".
• 8.Get log

NOTE:
If a USB device is used to save (collect) Sublogs, this work is not necessary.

● Checking the Saved Files

NOTE:
If log files are stored in the USB flash drive, the path to the storage destination is different by the platform version.

Platform version prior to 3.7

They are stored in the root directory of USB flash drive.

Platform version 3.7 or later

Folders of "iA_sublog" and "model name + serial number + date (year, month, day + hour, minute, second)" are automatically
created in the root directory of USB flash drive and files are stored in the latter folder.

Sublog files
Check the saved log files whether the necessary log has been collected.
• Whether it is a log file of the target model (It contains the serial number of the target machine.)
• Whether the time and date the symptom occurred is included in the logged period. (Date and time in the log file name
represent those of when the log collection is started. There are files with dates before the symptom occurs.)

Storage locations of log files

Storage locations of log files are shown below.
When using USB device: Root folder of the USB device

380
 6. Troubleshooting

When using SST: PC's C:\ServData\<model name>\serial number folder

How to check the continuous log files

The continuous log files are stored in the log file storage location.
Check the names (date and time) of the files that end with "clog.bin" to see whether the date and time the symptom was
reproduced is included.
In the case of the following figure, the oldest continuous log is 08:03:33 on March 22, 2017 and the latest file is 08:43:44 on
April 14, 2017. The date and time the symptom was reproduced should be included within the period.

20170322_0803-33-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170322_0848-16-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170322_0954-48-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170322_1102-52-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170413_1408-46-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170413_1409-12-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170413_1455-57-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170414_00-26-ZZZ00000-V2512_SAFE.bin
20170414_0843-44-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
LOGLIST.TXT
sxldlog_2017-04-14_00-28-22.bin

20161013_1733-36_ZZZ99999_1406_clog.bin
Serial Number
Data and time when a file Firmware Version
was archived (year, month, Identification indicating
day, hour, minute, second). that it is a continuous log

File name of continuous log

How to check the manual log files and automatic (event) log files
The manual log files and automatic (event) log files are stored in the log file storage location.
At the time of collection, these logs will be archived as a one binary file (the name of the file ends with "_SAFE.bin").

20161013_19-34-ZZZ99999-V1406_SAFE.bin
YYYYMMDD_HH-MM Serial Number Firmware Version

Which logs have been stored in this binary file is described in LOGLIST.TXT stored in the log file storage location.
Open this file to check the manual logs and automatic (event) logs.

CAUTION:
If a manual log was saved when the symptom was reproduced, check that a log with the date and time immediately after
the reproduction is included.
If there is no log file collected immediately after the symptom was reproduced, the file may have been overwritten and lost.

20170413_1408-46-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170328_08-18-ZZZ00000-V0254_exception
20170413_1409-12-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170328_08-22-ZZZ00000-V0254_exception
20170413_1455-57-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170404_16-02-ZZZ00000-V0254_ServiceCall-E719-0001
20170414_00-26-ZZZ00000-V2512_SAFE.bin
20170404_16-04-ZZZ00000-V0254_ServiceCall-E719-0001
20170414_0843-44-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
LOGLIST.TXT 20170414_09-40_ZZZ00000_V0254_Debuglog@Cnt123
sxldlog_2017-04-14_00-28-22.bin UPDATELOG_LOG

381
 6. Troubleshooting

20161013_10-10_ZZZ99999_V 1308_Debuglog@Cnt123
Serial Number Identification indicating that
Data and time when key Firmware Version
a key operation was performed
operation was performed
(year, month, day, hour, minute, second).

File name of manual log

20161012_14-48_ZZZ99999_V1406_Fatal00-exception
Data and time when Serial Number Cause of occurrence
Firmware Version
an even occurred
(year, month, day, hour, minute, second).

20161012_14-48_ZZZ99999_V1406_ServiceCall-E719-0031
Data and time when Serial Number Cause of occurrence
Firmware Version
an even occurred
(year, month, day, hour, minute, second).

File name of automatic log

How to check the network packet log files

The network packet log file is stored in the "NC + date" folder created in the log file storage location.
Open the folder and check that two types of files have been saved: a plaintext file which file name starts with "NC" and ends
with ".cap", and a ciphertext file which file name starts with "NC" and ends with ".can".

■ Saving and Collecting Report Files

Follow the steps below to save and retrieve the report file.

Service mode (via USB)

1. Connect a USB flash drive to the unit.
2. Make sure the USB is recognized.
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE

382
 6. Troubleshooting

3. Run service mode and retrieve report files to USB.

COPIER > Function > MISC-P > RPT2USB

4. It is saved in the following folder directly under USB.

Series Name > Serial No. > SP [Date (yyyymmddhhmm)] L

NOTE:
You can check the series name in the service mode below.
COPIER > Display > USER > SER-NAME
However, if the series name contains an underscore ("_"), the series name will not display characters after the underscore ("_").
If the service mode series name is ACxxxx_3, the name set in the folder will be the series name ACxxxx.

Download mode (via USB)

1. Connect a USB memory to the unit.
2. Run the following service modes.
COPIER > Function > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD

3. When the machine enters download mode, press the number pad [8].

[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ Root Menu (USB) <v25.12> ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] (v25.12)

-------------------------------------------------------
[ 1 ] : Select Version

[ 4 ] : Clear/Format
[ 5 ] : Backup/Restore
[ 8 ] : Download File
[ 9 ] : Version Information
[ Reset ] : Start shutdown sequence

4. [Download File Menu] appears, select [4].

[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ Download File Menu (USB) <v25.12> ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] (v25.12)

------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ 1 ] : SUBLOG Download
[ 4 ] : ServicePrint Download
[ 5 ] : NetCap Download
[ C ] : Return to Menu

5. It is saved in the following folder directly under USB.

SP (date (yyyymmddhhmm))

Download mode (via SST)

For instructions, refer to "SST_Operation Manual".

383
 6. Troubleshooting

• 8.Get log

Service Mode Relating to Debug Logs

Although the procedure for collecting debug logs of this equipment is as indicated above, there are other service modes related
to debug logs.
Use the following service modes (Lv.2) as needed.
COPIER > Function > DBG-LOG > HIT-STS
COPIER > Function > DBG-LOG > DEFAULT
COPIER > Function > DBG-LOG > LOG-DEL

NOTE:
If log collection is continued or setting change is repeated when an abnormality is found in operation of the function related to debug
logs, temporary files or log files may be remained in the machine. In that case, execute "DEFAULT" in service mode to clear the
settings related to debug logs and repeat the operation again.

Confirming the Existence of Debug Logs (HIT-STS)

This service mode confirms whether debug logs exist in the auto save area.
"OK!" is displayed if logs exist in the auto save area.

NOTE:
"OK!" is displayed even after pressing the Counter key + numeric keys 1, 2, and 3.

Initializing the Debug Log Settings (DEFAULT)

This service mode changes all the settings related to debug logs back to the default (settings at the time of shipment).
• Be sure to perform when returning the device to the customer after completion of trouble investigation. (Operations required)
• Execute this service mode when resetting the settings related to debug logs during investigation of log collection and perform
the operation again.
However, note that the log files automatically saved to the debug log save area in the controller are kept within the range not
exceeding the upper limit.
If you want to delete the saved logs (want to use HIT-STS), use "LOG-DEL" indicated later.

Deleting the Automatically Saved Log Files (LOG-DEL)

This service mode deletes the automatically saved and stored log files. The settings of log operation such as trigger for saving log
are not cleared.
Although it is not used normally (the upper limit of the number of saved logs is automatically controlled by firmware), it is necessary
to delete logs with LOG-DEL once when judging whether logs are collected using HIT-STS after changing the trigger for saving log.
(It is because OK is displayed in HIT-STS as long as the saved logs exist.)

384
 6. Troubleshooting

Startup System Failure Diagnosis

Overview
The purpose of this diagnosis is to identify the cause when the host machine would not start up.
A combination of the following three identification methods is used to identify the cause.
• A method for identifying the failure on the basis of the LED/LCD display status
• A method for identifying the failure on the basis of the power supply/signal route
• Identification of the location of the controller-related failure with the controller self-diagnosis function
The diagnosis is made according to the startup system failure diagnosis flow in order to perform basic identification of the cause
and perform the remedy.
If it turned out that the failure was caused by the controller or the Power Supply Assembly, perform a controller self-diagnosis or
check the Power Supply Assembly, and perform the remedy.
If the diagnosis result shows that replacement of parts is required, perform the works in the order shown below.
1. Check if the connectors (of a cable, etc.) are connected properly.
2. Replace the cable.
3. Replace the parts.
After performing the works shown above, be sure to restart the host machine and check if the symptom occurs again.

WARNING:
When a tester is used to perform a check, the AC voltage may be measured. There is a possibility of electrical shock, so
caution is required during the work.

NOTE:
The numbers such as (1) and (2) shown in the flow diagram indicate that there is a check item table showing the items to be checked
in the flow chart, location, and procedure.
Each number in the flow diagram is linked with the item number of the corresponding check item table to be referenced.

Flow Check item list

Start
(1) Whether there is nothing displayed on the Control Panel LCD
-1-
Is the Control Check item
NO
Panel Main Power LED Check whether the Control Panel LCD is blank and nothing is displayed on it.
blinking?
-2- NO
YES Is the Control
Panel Main Power LED
ON? -3-
Is the Control NO
YES Panel Energy Saver LED
Replace the following parts. lit or blinking?
- microUSB Cable between
the Main Controller PCB YES The location of each check item
(J4501) and the Control
Panel CPU PCB (J1020).
Replace the following parts. can be referenced by the
- microUSB Cable between
the Main Controller PCB corresponding number in the
(J4501) and the Control flow diagram.
Panel CPU PCB (J1020).

CAUTION:
Before using a tester to perform a check, be sure to turn OFF the Environment Heater Switch.
If a check is performed with the Environment Heater Switch ON, the diagnosis may not be performed correctly.

NOTE:
When replacing the cable, disconnect the cable from the connector and check the continuity.

385
 6. Troubleshooting

Basic Flow
If the host machine would not start up, follow the flow shown below to identify the location of the trouble.
If a number (1) or (2) is shown in a flow chart box, be sure to make a judgement according to the check item table.

Start

Turn OFF the main power switch, and check

for disconnection of the power plug and
the Power Supply Cord.

Turn ON the power switch.

-1-
Is the Control YES
Panel LCD "blank"?

Perform the Control

NO Panel LED check
flow.
-2-
Does the bar remain YES
displayed on the Control
Panel LCD?

NO Perform a controller
self-diagnosis.
-3-
Does the logo remain YES
displayed on the Control
Panel LCD?
Perform the following work or replace
NO the following parts
- Reinstall the system.
- Replace the SSD.
-4-
Is an error code YES
displayed on the Control
Panel LCD?
NO Execute countermeasures by
referring to the error code
correspondence table
Check that the machine can be
started without any problem

Finish

(1) Whether there is nothing displayed on the Control Panel LCD

Check item
Check whether the Control Panel LCD is blank and nothing is displayed on it.

If it is blank, see “Control Panel LED Check Flow” on page 388 to perform the remedy.

386
 6. Troubleshooting

(2) Whether the bar remains displayed on the Control Panel LCD
Check item
Check whether the bar remains displayed on the Control Panel LCD.

If the bar remains displayed, see “Controller Self Diagnosis” on page 397 to perform the remedy.

(3) Whether the logo remains displayed on the Control Panel LCD
Check item
Check whether the logo remains displayed on the Control Panel LCD.

If the logo remains displayed, re-install the system software or replace the HDD.
• See the Chapter 4, "Firmware Management" of the "imageRUNNER ADVANCE System Service Manual" to re-install the
system software.
• See the Chapter 4, "Parts Replacement and Cleaning Procedure > Main Controller System" of this manual to replace
the HDD.

(4) Whether an E code is displayed on the Control Panel LCD

Check item
Check whether an E-code is displayed on the Control Panel LCD.

E602-0001
An error has occurred.
Turn OFF the main power

Display sample of an E-code

If an displayed error code starts with E602 or E614, see “ Remedies to be performed when E602-xxxx or E614-xxxx error is
displayed” on page 364 to perform the remedy.
If the error codes other than above is displayed, see “Error Code” on page 407 to perform the remedy.

387
 6. Troubleshooting

■ Control Panel LED Check Flow

Follow the flow shown below to identify the location of failure according to the Control Panel LED status and take measurements.
If a number (1) or (2) is shown in a flow chart box, be sure to refer to the check item table and make a judgment.

Start

-1-
Is the Control NO
Panel Main Power LED
blinking?
-1-
YES Is the Control NO
Panel MainPower LED
ON?
Perform the 5-V
YES Power Supply
Assembly check
-3- flow.
Is the LED8 of NO
the Main Controller
PCB ON?
- Replace the micro-USB cable connecting the Riser
YES PCB (J4022) and the Control Panel Unit (J1021). *
- Replace the mini-HDMI cable connecting the Riser
PCB (J4021) and the Control Panel Unit (J1020). *
- Replace the Control Panel.
- If the above does not resolve the problem, replace
the Main Controller PCB and Riser PCB.
Replace the following parts.
- Main Controller PCB
- Harness between the Riser PCB(J4002)
and AC Driver PCB(J114)
-1-
Which is the Pattern 2
blink pattern of the Control
Panel Main Power
LED?
Pattern 1
-4-
Is the FLASH
PCB LED1
blinking? YES
NO
Turn OFF the main Perform the 12 V
power, remove the Flash Power Supply
PCB, and turn ON the Assembly check
main power again. flow.

-2-
Is an error code NO
displayed on the Control
Panel LCD?
YES
Replace the following parts. Replace the following parts.
- Flash PCB - Main Controller PCB

*: Note that working with 2 or more people is required to lift the Reader/ADF
Finish
when replacing the corresponding parts.

(1) Control Panel Main Power LED is blinking / ON

Check item
Blink pattern of the Control Panel Main Power LED

Pattern 1 (The Main Power LED blinks 2 times in 4 seconds: Controller error)

388
 6. Troubleshooting

1 sec
4 sec

Pattern 2 (The Main Power LED blinks 3 times in 4 seconds: Power Supply error)

1 sec
4 sec

(2) E-code is displayed on the Control Panel LCD

Check item
Check whether E-code is displayed on the Control Panel.

E602-0001
An error has occurred.
Turn OFF the main power

E-code display example

When "E614-4000" is displayed.

1) Start in safe mode and reinstall the system
2) Check the FLASH PCB if it cannot start in safe mode or if reinstallation is not successful. (See error code E614-4000)

(3) Is the LED8 of the Main Controller PCB ON?

Check item
Check whether the LED8 of the Main Controller PCB is ON.

LED8

Reference example

(4) Is the LED8 of the FLASH PCB blinking?

Check item
Check whether the LED2 of the FLASH PCB is blinking.

389
 6. Troubleshooting

LED1

Reference example

■ All-night Power Supply (5 V) Check Flow

If 5 V power is not supplied to the PCB, the location of the problem can be identified by checking the PCB, connector, etc. supplying
power to the PCB in question.
5 V Power Supply Assembly Block Diagram

Main
Controller
PCB

J103 CN101 CN201 J111 J113 J9001 J4022 J1021

All-night
AC Driver PCB AC Driver PCB Control Panel
Power Supply Riser PCB
AC DC 5V DC 5V DC 5V CPU PCB
PCB

390
 6. Troubleshooting

Refer to the flow shown below, and solve the 5 V power supply system trouble.

START

Is 5 V output from Q4070 (pin 1) YES

of the Riser PCB to J4022?

[Assumed failure location]

NO
1. Control Panel CPU PCB
2. and
Harness
Riserbetween
PCB * the Control Panel CPU PCB

YES
Is 5 V supplied to J9001 (pin 2)
of the Riser PCB?

[Assumed failure location]

NO 1. Riser PCB

Is 5 V output from J113 (pin 2) YES

of the AC Driver PCB?

[Assumed failure location]

NO
1. and
Harness
Riserbetween
PCB the AC Driver PCB

[Assumed failure location]

1. AC Driver PCB
2. and
Harness
All-night
between
Powerthe
Supply
AC Driver
PCB PCB
3. All-night Power Supply PCB

*: Note that working with 2 or more people is required to lift

the Reader/ADF when replacing the corresponding parts.
Proceed to Startup System Failure Diagnosis Flow.

5 V Power Supply Assembly Check Flow

Check item

No. Check item Check point

1 Riser PCB
Pin 1 (5 V) of Q4070 and the
plate (GND)

Normal value: DC 5 V

391
 6. Troubleshooting

No. Check item Check point

2 Riser PCB
Connector side of J9000
Pin 2 (5 V) and pin 4 (GND)

Normal value: DC 5 V

3 AC Driver PCB
Connector side of J113
Pin 2 (5 V) and pin 4 (GND)

Normal value: DC 5 V

■ DC Power (12V) Check Flow

12 V power is output when the AC Driver PCB receives a signal from the Main Controller PCB and AC power is supplied to the
12/24V Power Supply PCB.
If 12 V power is not supplied to the PCB, the location of the problem can be identified by checking the PCB, connector, etc.
supplying power to the PCB in question.
If there is no problem with the power supply route, it may be a problem with the signal route.

392
 6. Troubleshooting

Main
Controller
PCB

J103 CN2 CN52 J112 J113 J9001 J4022 J1021

12V/24V
AC Driver PCB AC Driver PCB Control Panel
Power Riser PCB
AC DC 12V DC 12V DC 12V CPU PCB
Supply PCB

J114 RMT_SYS J4002

DC 3.3V

12 V Power Supply/Signal Block Diagram

393
 6. Troubleshooting

Identify the location of the assumed failure according to the following flow.
CAUTION:
If 12 V is not output from the AC Driver PCB due to a power supply failure,
START
automatic shutdown will occur approx.
30 seconds after the power is turned ON, and the voltage will not be able to be
measured after that.
Be sure to measure the voltage within 30 seconds after the power is turned ON.
If automatic shutdown occurs, turn ON the power and continue the measurement.
Turn OFF and then ON the power.

*: Note that working with 2 or more people is required to lift

the Reader/ADF when replacing the corresponding parts.
After the power is turned ON, YES
does a Main Motor turn within
30 seconds?

No

YES
Is 12 V output from Q4307 (pin 8)
of the Riser PCB to J4022?

[Assumed failure location]

No 1. Control Panel CPU PCB
2. Harness between the Control Panel CPU PCB and Riser PCB *

YES
Is 12 V supplied to J9001 (pin 6)
of the Riser PCB?
[Assumed failure location]
No 1.Riser PCB

YES
Is 12 V output from J113 (pin 6)
of the AC Driver PCB?

[Assumed failure location]

No
1.Harness between the Riser PCB and AC Driver PCB

[Assumed failure location]

1. AC Driver PCB
2. and
Harness
Power
between
Supply the
PCBAC Driver PCB
3. 12/24V Power Supply PCB

Is the LED6002 of the YES

Main Controller PCB OFF?

[Assumed failure location]

No 1.Main Controller PCB

[Assumed failure location]

1.Riser PCB
2.Harness between the Riser PCB and AC Driver PCB
3.AC Driver PCB
4.12/24V Power Supply PCB

Proceed to Startup System Failure Diagnosis Flow.

12 V Power Supply Assembly Check Flow

Check item

No. Check item Check point

1 Check whether the Main Mo- Check the drive sound of Main Motor rotation.
tor is rotating.

394
 6. Troubleshooting

No. Check item Check point

2 Riser PCB
Pin 8 (12 V) of Q4307 and the
plate (GND)

Normal value: DC 12 V

3 Riser PCB
Connector side of J9000
Pin 6 (12V) and pin 7 (GND)

Normal value: DC 12 V

4 AC Driver PCB
Connector side of J113
Pin 6 (12V) and pin 7 (GND)

Normal value: DC 12 V

395
 6. Troubleshooting

No. Check item Check point

5 Main Controller PCB
LED6002

LED6002

396
 6. Troubleshooting

Controller Self Diagnosis

In order to reduce the time for identifying the cause of error occurred in the field and improve the accuracy of identifying the
error locations, operation of the controller system error diagnosis tool added to the host machine and the remedies for errors
are described.
This manual can be used when the host machine is in the following conditions.
• When a failure of the Main Controller PCB and the related PCBs (child PCBs such as TPM installed on the Main Controller
PCB) is suspected
• When HDD failure is suspected
PCBs and units diagnosed by the tool are as follow:

DC Controler PCB All-night/Non-allnight Power Supply Reader Operation panel

Main Controller PCB

Flash PCB
Memory PCB
Controller Self Diagnosis tool

Option
HDD

The area framed in blue (dotted line) in the figure shows the components to be checked by the controller system error
diagnosis tool.
The Main Controller PCB, child PCBs installed on the Main Controller PCB and HDD are automatically checked, and the result is
displayed on the Control Panel.

Boot Method
1. Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys '2' and '4' simultaneously.

397
 6. Troubleshooting

2. Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen appears on the Control Panel.

===============================================
BOX Checker Ver 0. 58
SCENARIO-1 Processing BoxMode check start. . .

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SN-1 IA-DDR2 SDRAM check start. . .

NOTE:
When this tool is not installed correctly, the regular Startup screen is displayed.

In this case, perform the following remedy.

Turn OFF the Main Power Switch again, and execute steps 1 and 2 shown above.
If this tool still does not boot, it means that BCT (Box Checker Test) is deleted, so install BCT.
If BCT is not installed correctly, "- - . - -" is displayed in Service Mode (BCT) in the host machine.
• COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION > BCT

Diagnosis Result
Diagnosis Time
Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes.
The result is displayed on the Control Panel.

When the diagnosis result is normal

When an error is detected by diagnosis

Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result. In detailed information, the name of the test where the error was
detected is displayed.

398
 6. Troubleshooting

How to view the error result

The following screen is an enlarged view of the detailed information indicated above.
Explanation of the detailed error information is described.

>> The result of Box checker is displayed below.

[no] : SN-9 PCI Configuration PCI-Bridge
[NG] : SN-13 TPM
[no] : SN-19 O-SDRAM

>> Please Turn off main switch.

[NO] means that optional PCBs are not mounted.

A fault has occurred when [NO] is displayed irrespective of whether the Option PCB is attached.
[NG] means that an error occurred to PCBs mounted as standard.

■ Controller System Error Diagnosis Table

The error locations are identified according to the following table.

Test name Detailed test name Presumed failure loca- Remedy Relevant Er-
tion ror Code
SN-1 MN- Check the SDRAM • Main Controller PCB1 Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1 -
DDR3 SDRAM of the Main Control-
ler PCB1
SN-2 SM BUS Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB1 Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1 -
MN DDR3 On Main Controller PCB1
Board
SN-5 PCI Con- Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB1 Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1 -
figuration Cai- Main Controller PCB1
man
SN-8 CPLD Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB1 Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1 -
Main Controller PCB1
SN-9 LANC Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB1 Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1 -
FLASH Main Controller PCB1
SN-10 RTC Check RTC set- • Main Controller PCB1 Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1 -
CHECK ting time
SN-11 TPM Check TPM PCB de- • Main Controller PCB1 1. Replacement of the TPM PCB E746
vice • TPM PCB 2. Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1
Remarks: It is always
[NG] in machines for
China because the
TPM PCB is not instal-
led.
SN-12 M- Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB1 Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1 -
DDR3 SDRAM Main Controller PCB1 • Main Controller PCB2
SN-13 FRAM Check the Memory • Memory PCB 1. Check the Memory PCB installation E355
PCB lead 2. Replace the Memory PCB

399
 6. Troubleshooting

Test name Detailed test name Presumed failure loca- Remedy Relevant Er-
tion ror Code
SN-16 HDD Check the HDD lead • HDD In case of a single HDD configuration E602
(see the display exam- 1. Check the HDD connection
ple shown below) 2. (If it is displayed in a mirroring config-
uration, it indicates that the HDD 1
is faully.)
Replace the HDD Cable
3. Replace the HDD
In case of an HDD mirroring configuration -
1. Check the connection of the HDD indi-
cated in the diagnosis result.
2. Replace the cable of the HDD indica-
ted in the diagnosis result.
3. Replace the HDD indicated in the diag-
nosis result.
SN-17 SRI SRI BUS device Con- • Main Controller PCB1 Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1 -
nection check
SN-25 FAN1 Check the rotation of • Main Controller PCB1 Check the connection of the Controller Fan E880
the Controller Fan
SN-100 HDD Check the S.M.A.R.T. • HDD • If the S.M.A.R.T. Check displays a numeric -
HEALTH acquisition and lead value apart from [0], a backup of customer
CHECK performance (see the data is recommended.
example displayed in • If the CheckResult is judged as CAUTION,
the figure below) a backup of customer data is recommen-
ded.
• If the Performance is displayed as [20 MB/s]
or less, replacement of the HDD is recom-
mended.
• If Exec SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK is
judged as NG, replace the HDD.

CAUTION:
If the Sector count is "0," the suspi-
cion of Hdd hardware failure is low,
so try "Hdd Format."

SN-16 HDD

>0%V@

&KHFN5HVXOW !>1250$/@

([HF61+''+($/7+&+(&. !>2.@

([HF6&(1$5,23URFHVVLQJ%R[0RGH !>2.@







 [Rebuilding] = During rebuilding of mirrored HDD

[HDD1 Failure] = Failure of the HDD1
!!7KHUHVXOWRI%R[FKH[FNHULVGLVSOD\HGEHORZ
>:DUQLQJ@61+''>+'')DLOXUH@ [HDD2 Failure] = Failure of the HDD2
3OHDVHKLW5HVHW.H\WRVWDUWVKXWGRZQ

400
 6. Troubleshooting

SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SN-23 FAN check start. . .
Exec SN-23 FAN => [OK] S.M.A.R.T Check -----
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK check start. . .
05: Reallcated Sectors Count:[000000000000] Refer to <S.M.A.R.T Check>.
S.M.A.R.T Check -----
05 : Reallocated Sectors Count :[00000000000000] See below.
c5 : Current Pending Sector Count :[00000000000000] C5: Current Pending Sector Count:[000000000000]
c6 : Uncorrectable Sector Count :[00000000000000]
Read Performance Check ----- C6: Uncorrectable Sector Count:[000000000000]
136. 8 [MB/s]
CheckResult => [NORMAL]
Exec SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK => [OK]
========================================== Read Performance Check ----- If "Performance" is [20 MB/s] or less,
Exec SCENARIO-1 Processing BoxMode => [OK]
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% [90.8MB/s] recommend to replace the HDD.
%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%% %%%%% %%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%% %%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %% %%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%% CheckResult => [NORMAL]
%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%
%%%%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%%%%% %%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%
If the result is CAUTION,
%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %%%%%%% Exec SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK => [OK] recommend the backup of user data.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
>> The result of Box chexcker is displayed below. ===================================
[NO] : SN-8 PCI Configuration PCI-Bridge
[NO] : SN-18 GOR(0)-DDR2 SDRAM
Exec SCENARIO-1 Preocessing BoxMode => [OK]
--- Please hit Reset Key to start shutdown. ---
If the result is NG, replace the HDD.

● HDD S.M.A.R.T Information

S.M.A.R.T Check

S.M.A.R.T Check Description Remedy

05: Reallocated Sectors Number of alternative processed defec- If a numeric value besides [0000000000000] is displayed,
Count: [000000000000] tive sectors backup is recommended to avoid losing customer data.
c5: Current Pending Sector Number of pending sectors (sectors If a numeric value apart from [0000000000000] is displayed,
Count: [000000000000] that may have defective sectors) backup is recommended to avoid losing customer data.
c6: Uncorrectable Sector Number of defective sectors (uncorrect- If a numeric value apart from [0000000000000] is displayed,
Count: [0000000000000] able sectors) which do not allow alter- • backup is recommended to avoid losing customer data.
native processing • Replace the HDD
* Alarm 31-0008 may have occurred in the Host Machine.

NOTE:
When replacing one of the mirrored HDDs, replace the HDD indicated in the controller self-diagnosis result or indicated by the error
display of the HDD LED.
Of the two HDDs installed, the HDD installed on the front side is the HDD 1 (on the left in the picture), and the HDD installed on the
rear side is the HDD 2 (on the right in the picture).
The location of the LED and the location of the HDD differ depending on the model. A reference example is shown below.

HDD1 HDD2

HDD LED

Reference example

401
 6. Troubleshooting

Limitations
• If there is a problem with the test name (SN-1, 2, 8, 12), this diagnosis tool itself will not startup.
• When no PCBs are installed on the Main Controller PCB, the following judgment results are displayed.
Standard PCB: [NG]
Optional PCB: [OK]
However, [NO] is displayed in detailed error information for optional PCBs.

402
7 Error/Jam/Alarm
Overview........................................... 404
Error Code.........................................407
Jam Code.......................................... 511
Alarm Code....................................... 742
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Overview
This section describes the error codes that are displayed when failure has occurred. The codes are divided into three categories.

Code types Description Reference

Error Codes This code is displayed when a failure caused by the host machine “Error Code” on page 407
has occurred.
Jam code This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine. “Jam Code” on page 511
Alarm code This code is displayed when some functions are disabled. “Alarm Code” on page 742

Display of error codes

The 7-digit "E000XXX"error code is displayed on the display of the Control Panel. However, since "000" of the 2nd to 4th digits is
not used, the 5th to 7th digits are described as "EXXX" in the Service Manual. (Example: E012 -> E000012)

Location Code
The error codes, jam codes, and alarm codes of this machine contain information on the location.
The location is displayed in 2 digits and has the meaning shown below: (In the jam display screen, the "L" row corresponds to the
location code.)

Device JAM ERR ALARM

Host machine 00 Main Controller: 00 Other than
Printer engine: 05 those below
Reader/ADF 01 04 02, 50
Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1 00 05 04
High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-B1 00 05 04
Paper Deck Unit-F1 00 05 04
Buffer Pass Unit-N1 02 02 -
Booklet Finisher-Y1 / Staple Finisher-Y1 02 02 61
Inner Finisher-J1 02 02 61
2/3 Hole Puncher Unit-A1 02 02 65
2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1
4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1
Inner 2/F4 Hole Puncher-C1 02 02 65
Inner 2/3 Hole Puncher-C1
Inner S4 Hole Puncher-C1
FAX Board - 07 -

Pickup Position Code

When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code. (In the jam display screen, the "P" row
corresponds to the pickup position code.)

Pickup position Pickup position code

At Finisher jam/At error avoidance jam/At ADF jam without pickup operation (at SEND, BOX, etc.) 00
Cassette 1 01
Cassette 2 02
Cassette 3 (Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1 / High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-B1) 03
Cassette 4 (Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1) 04
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Assembly 05
Side Paper Deck 06
Duplex (At duplex printing, jam occurs after paper passes through the Duplex Feed Sensor (S7).) F0

404
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Pickup size
When a jam occurs, a paper size is displayed. (The row displaying "SIZE" on the jam screen refers to the paper size.)
Due to the limitation of displayable number of characters, some paper size names are omitted. The following is the list of displayed
row of texts and corresponding paper sizes.
* The following is based on the display specification and not all paper sizes can actually be used.

Display Paper Size Display Paper Size

A0 A0 LDR LEDGER
A1 A1 LDRFB LEDGERFULLBLEED
A2 A2 LGL LEGAL
A3 A3 LTR LETTER
A3FB A3FULLBLEED EXE EXECUTIVE
A4 A4 STMT STATEMENT
A5 A5 10x8 10x8
A6 A6 12x18 12x18
A7 A7 13x19 13x19
I-B0 ISOB0 15x11 15x11
I-B1 ISOB1 17x22 17x22
I-B2 ISOB2 18x24 18x24
I-B3 ISOB3 A-FLS Australian-FOOLSCAP
I-B4 ISOB4 ALGL Argentina-LEGAL
I-B5 ISOB5 ALTR Argentina-LETTER
I-B6 ISOB6 OFI OFICIO
I-B7 ISOB7 A-OFI Argentina-OFICIO
I-C0 ISOC0 B-OFI Bolivia-OFICIO
I-C1 ISOC1 E-OFI Ecuador-OFICIO
I-C2 ISOC2 M-OFI Mexico-OFICIO
I-C3 ISOC3 KLGL Korea-LEGAL
I-C4 ISOC4 GLGL Government-LEGAL
I-C5 ISOC5 GLTR Government-LETTER
I-C6 ISOC6 IND-LGL India-LEGAL
I-C7 ISOC7 COM10 COM10
I-SRA3 SRA3 DL DL
J-B0 JISB0 E_C2 Nagagata 2
J-B1 JISB1 E_C3 Nagagata 3
J-B2 JISB2 E_C4 Nagagata 4
J-B3 JISB3 E_C5 Nagagata 5
J-B4 JISB4 E-K2 Kakugata 2
J-B5 JISB5 E_K3 Kakugata 3
J-B6 JISB6 E_K4 Kakugata 4
J-B7 JISB7 E_K5 Kakugata 5
K16 K16 E_K6 Kakugata 6
K8 K8 E_K7 Kakugata 7
ND-PCD Newdry Postcard E_K8 Kakugata 8
OTHER OTHER E_Y1 Yougata 1
PCARD Postcard E-Y2 Yougata 2
PCARD4 4 on 1 Postcard E_Y3 Yougata 3
F4A F4A E-Y4 Yougata 4
F4B F4B E_Y5 Yougata 5
FLSC FOOLCAP E_Y6 Yougata 6
FOLIO FLIO E_Y7 Yougata 7
FREE FREE SIZE EVLP_YN3 Yougatanaga 3
ICARD INDEXCARD E-B5 B5 Envelope
USER Custom E-C5 C5 Envelope
MONA MONARCH

405
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Display Paper Size Display Paper Size

EVLP Unknown size envelope

Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON

• Execution of clearing MN-COM deletes all data in Address Book, Forwarding Settings, Settings/Registration (Adjustment/
Maintenance, Function Settings, Set Destination, Management Settings), etc. Before execution of this operation, ask user to
back up the data and get approval for this operation.
• Clearing MN-CON will clear the service mode setting values. Be sure to enter the service mode setting values again in
accordance with the configuration of the options of the host machine and requests from the user.
• When clearing MN-CON while any login application other than User Authentication is, error such as not displayed login screen
occurred. In this case, access SMS once and switch login application to User Authentication to recover to the normal status.

Points to Note When Clearing HDD

As a remedy for error codes (E602-XXXX, E611-0000), HDD partition is selected and the target partition may be cleared.
When clearing partition, be sure to check which data will be deleted by referring Detail of HDD partition1-26 and explain to the user
before starting work.

406
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Error Code

Error Code Details

E000-0001-05 Fixing temperature abnormal rise
Detection Description The temperature detected by the main thermistor does not rise to the specified value during
startup control.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J307) to the Fixing Main Thermistor
(TH1/J707)
- Fixing Main Thermistor (TH1)
- Fixing Unit
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR; and then turn
OFF and then ON the power.
2.Check/replace the harness and connector between the DC Controller PCB and the Fixing
Main Thermistor.
3.Replace the Fixing Main Thermistor (Film Unit).
4.Replace the Fixing Unit.
5.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E001-0000-05 Fixing unit temperature rise detection

Detection Description The reading of the main thermistor is 250 deg C or more continuously for 200 msec.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J307) to the Fixing Main Thermistor
(TH1/J707)
- Fixing Main Thermistor (TH1)
- Fixing Unit
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR; and then turn
OFF and then ON the power.
2.Check/replace the harness and connector between the DC Controller PCB and the Fixing
Main Thermistor.
3.Replace the Fixing Main Thermistor (Film Unit).
4.Replace the Fixing Unit.
5.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

407
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E001-0001-05 Fixing unit temperature rise detection

Detection Description The hardware circuit detects overheating of the main or sub thermistor for 30 msec.
Remedy [Related parts]
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR; and then turn
OFF and then ON the power.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E001-0002-05 Fixing unit temperature rise detection

Detection Description The reading of the sub thermistor is 295 deg C or more continuously for 200 msec.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J307) to the Fixing Main Thermistor
(TH1/J707)
- Fixing Main Thermistor (TH1)
- Fixing Unit
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR; and then turn
OFF and then ON the power.
2.Check/replace the harness and connector between the DC Controller PCB and the Fixing
Main Thermistor.
3.Replace the Fixing Main Thermistor (Film Unit).
4.Replace the Fixing Unit.
5.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E002-0000-05 Fixing unit temperature insufficient rise

Detection Description 1.The reading of the main thermistor is less than 115 deg C continuously for 400 msec 2.5 sec after
it has indicated 100 deg C.
2.The reading of the main thermistor is less than 150 deg C continuously for 400 msec 1.3 sec after
it has indicated 140 deg C.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J307) to the Fixing Main Thermistor
(TH1/J707)
- Fixing Main Thermistor (TH1)
- Fixing Unit
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR; and then turn
OFF and then ON the power.
2.Check/replace the harness and connector between the DC Controller PCB and the Fixing
Main Thermistor.
3.Replace the Fixing Main Thermistor (Film Unit).
4.Replace the Fixing Unit.
5.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

408
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E003-0000-05 Low fixing temperature detection after standby

Detection Description The reading of the main thermistor is less than 100 deg C continuously for 200 msec or more.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J307), the Fixing Drawer Connector (J705)
and the Main Thermistor (TH1/J707)
- Main Thermistor (TH1)
- Fixing Drawer Connector
- Fixing Unit
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER (LEVEL1)> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR.
Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power.
2. Remove and install the Fixing Unit.
3. Check that the Fixing Drawer Connector is free of foreign matter or bent pin.
4. Check/replace the harnesses and connectors from the DC Controller PCB to the
Main Thermistor.
5. Replace the Film Unit.
6. Replace the Fixing Unit.
7. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E003-0001-05 Low fixing temperature detection after standby

Detection Description The Sub Thermistor 1 detected a temperature of 50 deg C or lower for 500 consecutive msec
or longer.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J307), the Fixing Drawer Connector (J705)
and Sub Thermistor 1 (TH2/J707)
- Sub Thermistor 1 (TH2)
- Fixing Drawer Connector
- Fixing Unit
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER (LEVEL1)> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR.
Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power.
2. Remove and install the Fixing Unit.
3. Check that the Fixing Drawer Connector is free of foreign matter or bent pin.
4. Check/replace the harnesses and connectors from the DC Controller PCB to the Sub
Thermistor 1.
5. Replace the Film Unit.
6. Replace the Fixing Unit.
7. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

409
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E003-0002-05 Low fixing temperature detection after standby

Detection Description The Sub Thermistor 2 detected a temperature of 50 deg C or lower for 500 consecutive msec
or longer.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J307), the Fixing Drawer Connector (J705)
and the Sub Thermistor 2 (TH3/J707)
- Sub Thermistor 2 (TH3)
- Fixing Drawer Connector
- Fixing Unit
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER (LEVEL1)> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR.
Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power.
2. Remove and install the Fixing Unit.
3. Check that the Fixing Drawer Connector is free of foreign matter or bent pin.
4. Check/replace the harnesses and connectors from the DC Controller PCB to the Sub
Thermistor 2.
5. Replace the Film Unit.
6. Replace the Fixing Unit.
7. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E004-0000-05 Thermistor disconnection detection error

Detection Description When disconnection is detected with connector (J307) for 30 sec continuously.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J307) to the Fixing Main Thermistor
(TH1/J707)
- Fixing Main Thermistor (TH1)
- Fixing Unit
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR; and then turn
OFF and then ON the power.
2.Check/replace the harness and connector between the DC Controller PCB and the Fixing
Main Thermistor.
3.Replace the Fixing Main Thermistor (Film Unit).
4.Replace the Fixing Unit.
5.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E004-0001-05 Fixing relay welding detection error

Detection Description Welding of the fixing relay on the AC Driver PCB was detected.
Remedy [Related parts]
- AC Driver PCB (UN30)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Replace the AC Driver PCB.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

410
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E009-0000-05 Fixing Unit pressurization error

Detection Description The pressurization of the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor (S53) was not detected for 1.5 seconds
during the Fixing Motor(M2) pressurization drive.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J307) to the Fixing Pressure Release
Sensor (S53/J710)
- Fixing Pressure Release Sensor (S53)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the harness and connector between the DC Controller PCB and the Fixing
Main Thermistor.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E009-0001-05 Fixing Unit pressure release error

Detection Description The pressure release of the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor (S53) was not detected for 1.5
seconds during the Fixing Motor(M2) pressure release drive.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J307) to the Fixing Pressure Release
Sensor (S53/J710)
- Fixing Pressure Release Sensor (S53)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the harness and connector between the DC Controller PCB and the Fixing
Main Thermistor.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E010-0001-05 Unstable rotation of the Main Motor (M1)

Detection Description Detection is executed every 100 msec after the start of motor rotation; however, the drive detection
signal is absent for 2 sec.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J309) to the Main Motor (M1/J137)
- Main Motor (M1)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

411
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E010-0002-05 Unstable rotation of the Main Motor (M1)

Detection Description During motor rotation, detection is executed every 100 msec; however, the drive signal is absent
5 times in sequence.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J309) to the Main Motor (M1/J137)
- Main Motor (M1)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E014-0001-05 Unstable rotation of the Fixing Motor (M2)

Detection Description Detection is executed every 100 msec after the start of motor rotation; however, the drive detection
signal is absent for 2 sec.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J331) to the Fixing Motor (M2/J730)
- Fixing Motor (M2)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E014-0002-05 Unstable rotation of the Fixing Motor (M2)

Detection Description During motor rotation, detection is executed every 100 msec; however, the drive signal is absent
5 times in sequence.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J331) to the Fixing Motor (M2/J730)
- Fixing Motor (M2)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

412
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E020-0000-05 The path between the sub hopper and the developing assembly is clogged with toner.
Detection Description The Developing Assembly Toner Level Sensor (S25) detects the absence of toner, while the
Developing Assembly Toner Level Sensor (S51) detects the presence of toner.
* Error occurs after the delivery if a paper in passage exists.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J301) to the Developing Assembly Toner
Level Sensor (S25/J25)
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J333) to the Developing Assembly Toner
Level Sensor (S51/J44)
- Developing Assembly Toner Level Sensor (S25)
- Developing Assembly Toner Level Sensor (S51)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E024-0000-05 The connector of Developing Assembly Toner Level Sensor (S25) is disconnected.
Detection Description The Developing Assembly Toner Level Sensor (S25) connection detection signal is absent for 100
msec 10 times in sequence.
* Error occurs after the delivery if a paper in passage exists.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J301) to the Developing Assembly Toner
Level Sensor (S25/J25)
- Developing Assembly Toner Level Sensor (S25)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E024-0001-05 The Developing Assembly Toner Level Sensor (S25) is disconnected.

Detection Description <At LOW SPEED>
- The Developing Assembly Toner Level Sensor (S25) ON counter is checked every 2.5 seconds,
and the counter increments 1 count every 25 times when the sensor goes on, and 300 counts
are reached.
<At HIGH SPEED>
- The Developing Assembly Toner Level Sensor (S25) ON counter is checked every 1.5 seconds,
and the counter increments 1 count every 15 times when the sensor goes on, and 300 counts
are reached.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J301) to the Developing Assembly Toner
Level Sensor (S25/J25)
- Developing Assembly Toner Level Sensor (S25)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

413
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E025-0000-05 The connector of the Toner Feed Level Detection Sensor (S51) is disconnected.
Detection Description The Toner Feed Level Detection Sensor (S51) signal does not detected 10 times in a row at
intervals of 100msec.
* Error occurs after the delivery if a paper in passage exists.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J333) to the Toner Feed Level Detection
Sensor (S51/J44)
- Toner Feed Level Detection Sensor (S51)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
- All-night Power Supply PCB (UN1)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
3.Replace the All-night Power Supply PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E025-0001-05 Failure of the Bottle Motor (M17)

Detection Description The Bottle Motor (M17) lock signal does not indicate a locked state a specific period of time after
the Bottle Motor (M17) has been started.
* The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J324,J9324) to the Bottle Motor (M17/J41)
- Bottle Motor (M17)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
- All-night Power Supply PCB (UN1)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
3.Replace the All-night Power Supply PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E025-0002-05 Unstable rotation of the Bottle Motor (M17)

Detection Description The Bottle Motor HP Sensor (S52) signal does not indicate a locked state a specific period of time
after the Bottle Motor (M17) has been started.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J324,J9324) to the Bottle Motor (M17/J41)
- Bottle Motor (M17)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
- All-night Power Supply PCB (UN1)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
3.Replace the All-night Power Supply PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

414
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E110-0001-05 Failure of the Polygon Motor (M11)

Detection Description The Polygon Motor (M11) speed lock signal does not indicate a locked state a specific period of time
after the Polygon Motor (M11) has been started.
* The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J324,J9324) to the Laser Scanner Unit
(J745/J744/J9744/J602/J9602)
- Laser Scanner Unit
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E110-0002-05 Failure of the Polygon Motor (M11)

Detection Description The speed lock signal indicates a deviation 10 times in sequence at intervals of 100 msec after the
signal has indicated a locked state.
* The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J324,J9324) to the Laser Scanner Unit
(J745/J744/J9744/J602/J9602)
- Laser Scanner Unit
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E110-0003-05 Failure of the Polygon Motor (M11)

Detection Description The Polygon Motor (M11) speed lock signal does not indicate a locked state for 6.5 sec. after a
switchover is made from low to normal speed or for 8 sec. after a switchover is made from normal
to low speed.
* The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J324,J9324) to the Laser Scanner Unit
(J745/J744/J9744/J602/J9602)
- Laser Scanner Unit
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

415
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E196-0000-05 Error in EEPROM access

Detection Description 20 retries failed after error occurred during communication with EEPROM.
* Error occurs after the delivery if a paper in passage exists.
Remedy [Related parts]
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E197-0000-05 Error in communication of Laser Driver PCB Communication time out error between DC
Controller PCB and Main Controller PCB 2
Detection Description Communication error with image PCB (For factory)
Communication time out error between DC Controller PCB and Main Controller PCB 2
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J324,J9324) to the Laser Scanner Unit
(J745/J744/J9744/J602/J9602)
- Harness connecting from the Main Controller PCB 2 (UN14/J7201) to the Laser Scanner
Unit (J601)
- Laser Scanner Unit
- Main Controller PCB 2 (UN14)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
3.Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
4.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E197-0001-05 Error in communication of Laser Driver PCB

Detection Description Communication error with image PCB for factory (Serial communication error)
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J324,J9324) to the Laser Scanner Unit
(J745/J744/J9744/J602/J9602)
- Laser Scanner Unit
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

416
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E197-0003-05 The connector of the laser scanner unit is disconnected.

Detection Description The connector of the laser scanner unit is disconnected.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J324,J9324) to the Laser Scanner Unit
(J745/J744/J9744/J602/J9602)
- Laser Scanner Unit
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E197-1004-05 High Voltage PCB disconnection

Detection Description High Voltage PCB disconnection detection
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J323) to the HVT PCB (UN6/J401)
- HVT PCB (UN6)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the HVT PCB.
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E197-2000-05 Serial communication error

Detection Description A communication error of ASIC (HV_KONA) in the DC Controller PCB was detected.
Remedy [Related parts]
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E197-2001-05 Serial communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Side Paper Deck was detected.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J325) to the Deck Driver PCB
(PCB2/J357)
- Deck Driver PCB (PCB2)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Deck Driver PCB.
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

417
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E202-0001-04 Reader Scanner Unit HP error

Detection Description The Reader Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when starting scanning operation.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J102) and the Scanner Unit HP Sensor
(PS_A1/J5002)
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J108) and the Scanner Motor
(STM1/J5015)
- Scanner Unit HP Sensor (PS_A1)
- Scanner Motor (STM1)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E202-0002-04 Reader Scanner Unit HP error

Detection Description The Reader Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when completing scanning operation.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J102) and the Scanner Unit HP Sensor
(PS_A1/J5002)
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J108) and the Scanner Motor
(STM1/J5015)
- Scanner Unit HP Sensor (PS_A1)
- Scanner Motor (STM1)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E202-0003-04 Reader Scanner Unit HP error

Detection Description An error in the Reader Scanner Unit position was detected when reading of a job was started.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J102) and the Scanner Unit HP Sensor
(PS_A1/J5002)
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J108) and the Scanner Motor
(STM1/J5015)
- Scanner Unit HP Sensor (PS_A1)
- Scanner Motor (STM1)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

418
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E202-0004-04 Reader Scanner Unit HP error

Detection Description Home position error of the Reader Scanner Unit was detected when reading of a job
was completed.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J102) and the Scanner Unit HP Sensor
(PS_A1/J5002)
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J108) and the Scanner Motor
(STM1/J5015)
- Scanner Unit HP Sensor (PS_A1)
- Scanner Motor (STM1)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E202-0101-04 DADF Scanner Unit HP error

Detection Description The DADF Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when starting scanning operation.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J408) and the Glass Movement HP Sensor
(PS_A9/J462)
- Glass Movement HP Sensor (PS_A9)
- Glass Movement Gear 18T
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.

E202-0102-04 DADF Scanner Unit HP error

Detection Description The DADF Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when completing scanning operation.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J408) and the Glass Movement HP Sensor
(PS_A9/J462)
- Glass Movement HP Sensor (PS_A9)
- Glass Movement Gear 18T
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.

E227-0001-04 Power supply error

Detection Description The Reader Controller PCB did not detect 24 V when the main power was turned ON.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J104) and the DADF Driver PCB
(PCB1/J402)
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J101) and the AC Driver PCB
(UN30/J118)
- Harness between the AC Driver PCB (UN30/J112) and the 12V/24V Power Supply PCB
(UN5/CN52)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
- AC Driver PCB (UN30)
- 12V/24V Power Supply PCB (UN5)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference]
- When an error is detected, conduction of 24 V is stopped. At power check, check if 24 V is
conducted or rated voltage is output by repeating power cycling of the machine.
- Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and
restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

419
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E227-0101-04 Power supply error

Detection Description The DADF Driver PCB did not detect 24 V when the main power was turned ON.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J104) and the DADF Driver PCB
(PCB1/J402)
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J101) and the AC Driver PCB
(UN30/J118)
- Harness between the AC Driver PCB (UN30/J112) and the 12V/24V Power Supply PCB
(UN5/CN52)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
- AC Driver PCB (UN30)
- 12V/24V Power Supply PCB (UN5)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference]
- When an error is detected, conduction of 24 V is stopped. At power check, check if 24 V is
conducted or rated voltage is output by repeating power cycling of the machine.
- Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and
restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E240-0000-05 Error in controller communication

Detection Description The serial communication error such as parity error or overrun error is constantly detected.
Remedy [Related parts]
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E240-0001-05 Error in controller communication

Detection Description The serial communication error such as parity error or overrun error is detected while printing.
Remedy [Related parts]
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E246-0001-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact the service company office

E246-0002-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.

E246-0003-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.

420
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E246-0005-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.

E247-0001-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact the service company office

E247-0002-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.

E247-0003-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.

E247-0004-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.

E248-0001-04 EEPROM error

Detection Description The Main Controller PCB detected reading error of the Reader backup value in the Reader
Controller PCB.
Remedy Check/replace the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1).
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E248-0002-04 EEPROM error

Detection Description The Main Controller PCB failed writing of the Reader backup value in the Reader Controller PCB.
Remedy Check/replace the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1).
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E248-0003-04 EEPROM error

Detection Description The Main Controller PCB detected an error at inspection after completion of writing of the Reader
backup value in the Reader Controller PCB.
Remedy Check/replace the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1).
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E248-0102-04 EEPROM error

Detection Description The DADF Driver PCB failed writing of the backup value.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J401) and the Reader Controller PCB
(UN_BO1/J103)
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

421
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E248-0103-04 EEPROM error

Detection Description The DADF Driver PCB detected an error at inspection after completion of writing of the
backup value.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J401) and the Reader Controller PCB
(UN_BO1/J103)
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E261-0000-05 Error in Zero Cross

Detection Description Zero Cross failed to be detected for 500ms or more while the relay was ON.
* The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J303) to the AC Driver PCB (UN30/J116)
- AC Driver PCB (UN30)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the AC Driver PCB.
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E280-0001-04 Communication error

Detection Description Communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was not
completed within the specified period of time.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Scanner Unit (UN_BO2/J101 ) and the Reader Controller PCB
(UN_BO1/J105)
- Reader Scanner Unit (UN_BO2)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E280-0002-04 Communication error

Detection Description Disconnection of FFC between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit
was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Scanner Unit (UN_BO2/J101 ) and the Reader Controller PCB
(UN_BO1/J105)
- Reader Scanner Unit (UN_BO2)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

422
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E280-0101-04 Communication error

Detection Description Communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was not
completed within the specified period of time.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J103) and the DADF Driver PCB
(PCB1/J401)
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E280-0102-04 Communication error

Detection Description Disconnection of FFC between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit
was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (J105) and the DADF Scanner Unit(J101)
- Reader Controller PCB
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E302-0001-04 Error in paper front white shading

Detection Description An access error to the paper front white shading RAM or a paper front white shading value out of
specification was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Scanner Unit (UN_BO2/J101 ) and the Reader Controller PCB
(UN_BO1/J105)
- Reader Scanner Unit (UN_BO2)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E302-0002-04 Error in paper front black shading

Detection Description An access error to the paper front black shading RAM or a paper front black shading value out of
specification was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Scanner Unit (UN_BO2/J101 ) and the Reader Controller PCB
(UN_BO1/J105)
- Reader Scanner Unit (UN_BO2)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

423
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E302-0101-04 Error in paper back white shading

Detection Description An access error to the paper back white shading RAM or a paper back white shading value out of
specification was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J103) and the DADF Driver PCB
(PCB1/J401)
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E302-0102-04 Error in paper back black shading

Detection Description An access error to the paper back black shading RAM or a paper back black shading value out of
specification was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J103) and the DADF Driver PCB
(PCB1/J401)
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E315-0007-00 Image process device timeout error

Detection Description Image compression process was not completed within the specified period of time (120 sec)
at scanning.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB and Main Controller PCB
- Main Controller PCB
- Reader Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E315-000D-00 Image process device timeout error

Detection Description Processing of a JBIG-compressed data was not completed within the specified period of time (120
sec) at printing or SEND.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Check/replace the Main Controller PCB.

E315-000F-00 Image process device timeout error

Detection Description Duplication of image data in the memory was not completed within the specified period of time
(120 sec).
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Check/replace the Main Controller PCB.

424
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E315-0027-00 Image process device timeout error

Detection Description Image processing (change in magnification ratio, rotating, and shifting) was not completed normally
within the specified period of time (120 sec).
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Check/replace the Main Controller PCB.

E315-0033-00 Image process device timeout error

Detection Description Processing to clear image data in the memory was not completed normally within the specified
period of time (120 sec).
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Check/replace the Main Controller PCB.

E315-0035-00 Image process device timeout error

Detection Description Processing to clear image data in the memory was not completed normally within the specified
period of time (120 sec).
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Check/replace the Main Controller PCB.

E315-0500-00 Image process device timeout error

Detection Description Transfer of image signal was not completed within the specified period of time (120 sec)
at scanning.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB and Main Controller PCB
- Main Controller PCB
- Reader Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E315-0510-00 Image process device timeout error

Detection Description Image processing was not completed within the specified period of time (30 sec) at scanning.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB and Main Controller PCB
- Main Controller PCB
- Reader Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E315-0520-00 Image process device timeout error

Detection Description Image processing was not completed within the specified period of time (120 sec) at scanning.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Check/replace the Main Controller PCB.

425
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E315-0530-00 Image process device error

Detection Description Compression processing of the scanned image into JPEG was terminated abnormally.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Check/replace the Main Controller PCB.

E315-0531-00 Image process device timeout error

Detection Description Compression processing of the scanned image into JPEG was not completed within the specified
period of time (120 sec).
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB and Main Controller PCB
- Main Controller PCB
- Reader Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E315-0540-00 Image process device error

Detection Description An error occurred during decompression of JPEG.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Check/replace the Main Controller PCB.

E315-0541-00 Image process device timeout error

Detection Description Decompression of JPEG was not completed within the specified period of time (120 sec).
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Check/replace the Main Controller PCB.

E315-0561-00 Image process device timeout error

Detection Description Image transfer was not completed within the specified period of time (60 sec) after the start
of printing.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB and Main Controller PCB
- Main Controller PCB
- Reader Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E350-0000-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact the service company office

E350-0001-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.

E350-0002-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.

426
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E350-0003-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.

E350-3000-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.

E351-0000-00 System error

Detection Description Main Controller PCB communication error.
Remedy Check/replace the Main Controller PCB

E354-0001-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact the service company office

E354-0002-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.

E355-0001-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact the service company office

E355-0002-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.

E355-0003-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.

E355-0004-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.

E400-0001-04 Communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB
was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J103) and the DADF Driver PCB
(PCB1/J401)
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J104) and the DADF Driver PCB
(PCB1/J402)
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

427
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E400-0002-04 Communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB
was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J103) and the DADF Driver PCB
(PCB1/J401)
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J104) and the DADF Driver PCB
(PCB1/J402)
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E400-0003-04 Communication error

Detection Description Disconnection of the harness between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB
was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J103) and the DADF Driver PCB
(PCB1/J401)
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J104) and the DADF Driver PCB
(PCB1/J402)
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E412-0005-04 Fan error

Detection Description Rotation of fan was detected after the stop signal for the DADF Cooling Fan was transmitted.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- DADF Cooling Fan (FAN_A1)
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related parts.

E412-0006-04 Fan error

Detection Description Stop of fan was detected after rotation signal for the DADF Cooling Fan was transmitted.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- DADF Cooling Fan (FAN_A1)
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related parts.

E423-0001-04 SDRAM error in the Reader Controller PCB

Detection Description Either an access error to SDRAM in the Reader Controller PCB or an error at data inspection
was detected.
Remedy Replace the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1).
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E490-0001-04 Different Scanner Unit model error

Detection Description A wrong Scanner Unit was installed.
Remedy Install the Scanner Unit for this model.

428
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E490-0002-04 Different Scanner Unit model error

Detection Description A wrong Scanner Unit was installed.
Remedy Install the Scanner Unit for this model.

E490-0101-04 Different DADF model error

Detection Description A wrong DADF was installed.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Flat Cable between the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J401) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN_
BO1/J103)
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check if the installed DADF model matches the model that was set in "COPIER> OPTION>
CUSTOM> SCANTYPE". If not matched, install the appropriate DADF.
2. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E490-0102-04 Different DADF model error

Detection Description A wrong DADF was installed.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Flat Cable between the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J401) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN_
BO1/J103)
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check if the installed DADF model matches the model that was set in "COPIER> OPTION>
CUSTOM> SCANTYPE". If not matched, install the appropriate DADF.
2. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E490-9999-04 Error due to the reader for different model

Detection Description Configuration mismatch between the Reader Controller software and the Reader/DADF
was detected.
Remedy Execute automatic software update.
(Install the system software with correct configuration.)

E501-0000-02 Communication error (Finisher-J1)

Detection Description A communication error between the host machine and the Finisher was detected.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the DC Controller PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
- DC Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the DC Controller PCB and the Finisher
Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment when
Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore
the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

429
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E503-0021-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Saddle Unit (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
was detected. (Command transmission error)
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle
Stitcher Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.
3. Replace the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB.

E503-0022-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Saddle Unit (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
was detected. (Command reception error)
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle
Stitcher Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.
3. Replace the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB.

E503-0031-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Puncher Unit (Finisher-J1/Y1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher Controller PCB was
detected. (Command transmission error)
Remedy a. INNER FIN-J1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
- Puncher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b.STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
- Puncher Controller PCB (PCB301)
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher
Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.
3. Replace the Puncher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

430
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E503-0032-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Puncher Unit (Finisher-J1/Y1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher Controller PCB was
detected. (Command reception error)
Remedy a. INNER FIN-J1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
- Puncher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b.STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
- Puncher Controller PCB (PCB301)
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher
Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.
3. Replace the Puncher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E503-0041-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Buffer Pass (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Buffer Pass Controller PCB was
detected. (Command transmission error)
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Buffer Pass Controller PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Buffer Pass Controller PCB (PCB401)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Buffer Pass Controller PCB and the
Finisher Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Buffer Pass Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment when
Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E503-0042-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Buffer Pass (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Buffer Pass Controller PCB was
detected. (Command reception error)
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Buffer Pass Controller PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Buffer Pass Controller PCB (PCB401)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Buffer Pass Controller PCB and the
Finisher Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Buffer Pass Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment when
Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.

431
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E503-0061-02 Error in communication between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description Communication error between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB was detected. (Command
transmission error)
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Remedy] Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E503-0062-02 Error in communication between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description Communication error between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB was detected. (Command
reception error)
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Remedy] Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E505-0001-02 a. Finisher data error (Finisher-J1) b. Finisher data error (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The data read from Finisher Controller PCB has an error. (The read data doesn't match with the
written data.)
Remedy a. INNER FIN-J1
[Related parts] Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1).
b.STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Remedy] Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E505-0004-02 Puncher unit data error (Inner Puncher-C1/Puncher Unit-A1)

Detection Description The data read from Puncher Controller PCB has an error. (The read data doesn't match with the
written data.)
Remedy a. INNER PUNCH-C1
[Related parts]
- Puncher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b. PUNCHER UNIT-A1
[Related parts]
- Puncher Controller PCB (PCB301)
[Remedy] Replace the Puncher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E505-0005-02 Buffer Pass data error (Buffer Pass unit-N1)

Detection Description The data read from Puncher Controller PCB has an error. (The read data doesn't match with the
written data.)
Remedy BUFFER PASS UNIT-N1
[Related parts]
- Buffer Pass Controller PCB (PCB401)

432
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E514-0002-02 Assist Motor error (Finisher-J1)

Detection Description - The Assist HP Sensor was not turned ON although 3 seconds had passed after the Assist Motor
operation started.
- The Assist HP Sensor was not turned ON when starting operation.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Assist HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Assist Motor
- Assist HP Sensor (PS7)
- Assist Motor (M5)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the corresponding harnesses/cables or connectors or the parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment when
Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E514-8001-02 a. Assist Motor error (Finisher-J1) b. Error in the Paper End Assist Motor (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description a. The Assist HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Assist Motor
operation started.
b. The assist belt does not come off the Paper End Assist HP Sensor when the Paper End Assist
Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy a. INNER FIN-J1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Assist HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Assist Motor
- Assist HP Sensor (PS7)
- Assist Motor (M5)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b.STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paper End Assist HP Sensor (PS123) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Paper End Assist Motor (M113) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paper End Assist HP Sensor (PS123)
- Paper End Assist Motor (M113)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E514-8002-02 Error in the Paper End Assist Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Paper End Assist HP Sensor does not detect the assist belt when the Paper End Assist Motor
has been driven for 2 seconds.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paper End Assist HP Sensor (PS123) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Paper End Assist Motor (M113) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paper End Assist HP Sensor (PS123)
- Paper End Assist Motor (M113)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

433
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E516-0001-02 Paddle Motor error (Finisher-J1)

Detection Description - The Paper Fold HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 3 seconds had passed after the Paddle
Motor operation started.
- The last paper fold operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paper Fold HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle Motor
- Paper Fold HP Sensor (PS8)
- Paddle Motor (M10)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the corresponding harnesses/cables or connectors or the parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment when
Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E516-0002-02 Paddle Motor error (Finisher-J1)

Detection Description - The Paper Fold HP Sensor was not turned ON although 3 seconds had passed after the Paddle
Motor operation started.
- The last paper fold operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paper Fold HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle Motor
- Paper Fold HP Sensor (PS8)
- Paddle Motor (M10)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the corresponding harnesses/cables or connectors or the parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment when
Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E530-8001-02 a. Rear Alignment Motor error (Finisher-J1) b. Error in the Front Alignment Motor (Finisher-
Y1)
Detection Description a. The Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after
the Rear Alignment Motor operation started.
b. The front alignment plate does not come off the Front Alignment HP Sensor when the Front
Alignment Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy a. INNER FIN-J1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Plate
HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Motor
- Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor (PS5)
- Rear Alignment Motor (M4)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b.STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Front Alignment HP Sensor (PS115) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Front Alignment Motor (M107) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Front Alignment HP Sensor (PS115)
- Front Alignment Motor (M107)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

434
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E530-8002-02 a. Rear Alignment Motor error (Finisher-J1) b. Error in the Front Alignment Motor (Finisher-
Y1)
Detection Description a. The Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after
the Rear Alignment Motor operation started.
b. The Front Alignment HP Sensor does not detect the Front Alignment plate when the Front
Alignment Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy a. INNER FIN-J1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Plate
HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Motor
- Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor (PS5)
- Rear Alignment Motor (M4)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b.STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Front Alignment HP Sensor (PS115) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Front Alignment Motor (M107) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Front Alignment HP Sensor (PS115)
- Front Alignment Motor (M107)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E531-8001-02 a. Stapler Motor error (Finisher-J1) b. Error in the Staple Motor (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description a. The Staple HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 0.4 seconds had passed after the Stapler
Motor operation started.
b. The staple unit does not come off the Staple HP Sensor when the Staple Motor has been driven
for 0.4 seconds.
Remedy a. INNER FIN-J1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stapler Unit
- Stapler Unit (including the Stapler Motor and the Staple HP Sensor)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b.STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Stapler Unit to the Stapler Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Stapler Unit Relay PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Stapler Unit
- Stapler Unit Relay PCB (PCB102)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

435
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E531-8002-02 a. Stapler Motor error (Finisher-J1) b. Error in the Staple Motor (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description a. The Staple HP Sensor was not turned ON although 0.4 seconds had passed after the Stapler
Motor operation started.
b. The Staple HP Sensor does nor detect the staple unit when the Staple Motor has been driven
for 0.4 seconds.
Remedy a. INNER FIN-J1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stapler Unit
- Stapler Unit (including the Stapler Motor and the Staple HP Sensor)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b.STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Stapler Unit to the Stapler Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Stapler Unit Relay PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Stapler Unit
- Stapler Unit Relay PCB (PCB102)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E532-8001-02 a. Stapler Shift Motor error (Finisher-J1) b. Error in the Stapler Shift Motor (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description a. The Stapler Shift HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Stapler
Shift Motor operation started.
b. The stapler unit does not come off the Stapler Shift HP Sensor when the Stapler Shift Motor has
been driven for 1 second.
Remedy a. INNER FIN-J1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stapler Shift HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stapler Shift Motor
- Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PS11)
- Stapler Shift Motor (M7)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b.STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PS124) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stapler Shift Motor (M114) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PS124)
- Stapler Shift Motor (M114)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

436
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E532-8002-02 a. Stapler Shift Motor error (Finisher-J1) b. Error in the Stapler Shift Motor (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description a. The Stapler Shift HP Sensor was not turned ON although 10 seconds had passed after the
Stapler Shift Motor operation started.
b. The Stapler Shift HP Sensor does not detect the stapler unit when the Stapler Shift Motor has
been driven for 15 seconds.
Remedy a. INNER FIN-J1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stapler Shift HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stapler Shift Motor
- Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PS11)
- Stapler Shift Motor (M7)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b.STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PS124) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stapler Shift Motor (M114) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PS124)
- Stapler Shift Motor (M114)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E535-0001-02 Return Belt Motor error (Finisher-J1)

Detection Description The Return Belt HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Return
Belt Motor operation started.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt Motor
- Return Belt HP Sensor (PS3)
- Return Belt Motor (M2)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the corresponding harnesses/cables or connectors or the parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment when
Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E535-0002-02 Return Belt Motor error (Finisher-J1)

Detection Description The Return Belt HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1 second had passed after the Return Belt
Motor operation started.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt Motor
- Return Belt HP Sensor (PS3)
- Return Belt Motor (M2)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the corresponding harnesses/cables or connectors or the parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment when
Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.

437
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E535-8001-02 Error in the Swing Guide Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The swing guide does not come off the Swing Guide HP Sensor when the Swing Guide Motor has
been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Swing Guide Motor (M110) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119)
- Swing Guide Motor (M110)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E535-8002-02 Error in the Swing Guide Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Swing Guide HP Sensor does not detect the swing guide when the Swing Guide Motor has
been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Swing Guide Motor (M110) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119)
- Swing Guide Motor (M110)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

438
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E537-8001-02 a. Front Alignment Motor error (Finisher-J1) b. Error in the Rear Alignment Motor (Finisher-
Y1)
Detection Description a. The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after
the Front Alignment Motor operation started.
b. The rear alignment plate does not come off the Rear Alignment HP Sensor when the Rear
Alignment Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy a. INNER FIN-J1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Alignment Plate
HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Alignment Motor
- Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor (PS4)
- Front Alignment Motor (M3)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b.STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Rear Alignment HP Sensor (PS116) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Rear Alignment Motor (M108) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Rear Alignment HP Sensor (PS116)
- Rear Alignment Motor (M108)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

439
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E537-8002-02 a. Front Alignment Motor error (Finisher-J1) b. Error in the Rear Alignment Motor (Finisher-
Y1)
Detection Description a. The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after
the Front Alignment Motor operation started.
b. The Rear Alignment HP Sensor does not detect the rear alignment plate when the Rear
Alignment Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy a. INNER FIN-J1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Alignment Plate
HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Alignment Motor
- Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor (PS4)
- Front Alignment Motor (M3)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b.STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Rear Alignment HP Sensor (PS116) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Rear Alignment Motor (M108) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Rear Alignment HP Sensor (PS116)
- Rear Alignment Motor (M108)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

440
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E540-8001-02 a. Tray Shift Motor error (Finisher-J1) b. Stack tray time out error (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description a. The Stack Tray Paper Height Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after
the Tray Shift Motor operation started.
b. The operation of the stack tray don't finish when the Stack Tray Shift Motor has been driven for
28 seconds.
The stack tray does not come off the same area when the Stack Tray Shift Motor has been driven
for 15 seconds.
Remedy a. INNER FIN-J1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stack Tray Paper
Height Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray Shift Motor
- Stack Tray Paper Height Sensor (PS9)
- Tray Shift Motor (M6)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b.STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray HP Sensor (PS106) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Full Sensor 1/2/3 (PS107/PS108/PS109) to the Finisher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PS110) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Stack Tray HP Sensor (PS106)
- Stack Tray Full Sensor 1/2/3 (PS107/PS108/PS109)
- Stack Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PS110)
- Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

441
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E540-8002-02 a. Tray Shift Motor error (Finisher-J1) b. Stack tray area error (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description a. The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF or the Stack Tray Lower Limit Sensor
was not turned ON although 3.5 seconds had passed after the Front Alignment Motor operation
started in the tray down operation.
The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF after the tray was moved down in the
paper level detection operation.
b. The stack tray detects the discontinuous area during the operation.
Remedy a. INNER FIN-J1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stack Tray Paper
Height Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray Shift Motor
- Stack Tray Paper Height Sensor (PS9)
- Tray Shift Motor (M6)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b.STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray HP Sensor (PS106) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Full Sensor 1/2/3 (PS107/PS108/PS109) to the Finisher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PS110) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Stack Tray HP Sensor (PS106)
- Stack Tray Full Sensor 1/2/3 (PS107/PS108/PS109)
- Stack Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PS110)
- Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

442
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E540-8004-02 Stack tray paper surface detection error (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor does not turn off when the stack tray has been lowered for
10 seconds.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-emitting) (PBA101) to the Finisher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-receiving) (PBA102/PBA103) to the
Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-emitting) (PBA101)
- Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-receiving) (PBA102/PBA103)
- Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E551-0001-02 Error in the Inlet Cooling Fan of the Finisher (Finisher-J1)

Detection Description When the lock signal is detected 300 msec at the time of fan drive, Retry of the drive is executed.
At the time of retry, the lock signal is detected 100 msec.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the nlet Cooling Fan
- Inlet Cooling Fan (FM1)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the corresponding harnesses/cables or connectors or the parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment when
Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E551-0002-02 Error in the Inlet Cooling Fan of the Finisher (Finisher-J1)

Detection Description The lock signal is detected 300 msec more while the fan stops.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the nlet Cooling Fan
- Inlet Cooling Fan (FM1)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the corresponding harnesses/cables or connectors or the parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment when
Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E551-0003-02 Error in the Cooling Fan (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The lock signal is detected 1.2 seconds or more while the fan operates.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Cooling Fan (FM101) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Cooling Fan (FM101)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

443
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E551-0004-02 Error in the Cooling Fan of the Finisher (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The lock status is released when the fan stops.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Cooling Fan (FM101) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Cooling Fan (FM101)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E553-8001-02 Error in the Escape Delivery Shift Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The lower escape delivery roller does not come off the Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor when the
Escape Delivery Shift Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS112) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS112)
- Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E553-8002-02 Error in the Escape Delivery Shift Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor does not detect the escape delivery roller when the Escape
Delivery Shift Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS112) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS112)
- Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

444
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E553-8011-02 Error in the Flapper Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The flapper does not come off the Flapper HP Sensor when the Flapper Motor has been driven for
1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Flapper HP Sensor (PS105) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Flapper Motor (M104) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Flapper HP Sensor (PS105)
- Flapper Motor (M104)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E553-8012-02 Error in the Flapper Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Flapper HP Sensor does not detect the flapper when the Flapper Motor has been driven for
1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Flapper HP Sensor (PS105) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Flapper Motor (M104) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Flapper HP Sensor (PS105)
- Flapper Motor (M104)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E553-80F1-02 Error in the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The paddle does not come off the Saddle Paddle HP Sensor when the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor
has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paddle HP Sensor (PS206) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Paddle HP Sensor (PS206)
- Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

445
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E553-80F2-02 Error in the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Saddle Paddle HP Sensor does not detect the paddle when the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor has
been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paddle HP Sensor (PS206) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Paddle HP Sensor (PS206)
- Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E554-8001-02 Safety switch ON error (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Front Cover Switch is turned OFF for 0.3 seconds when the Front Cover Sensor is ON.
An error of Short Connector (J132) was detected. (New Type *) The Swing Guide Safety Switch is
turned ON for 0.3 seconds. (Old Type*)
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) to the Finisher Controller PCB
(Old Type*)
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Short Connector (J132) (New Type*)
- Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) (Old Type*)
- Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E577-0002-02 Paddle Motor error (Finisher-J1)

Detection Description - The Paddle HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1 second had passed after the Paddle Motor
operation started.
- The last paddle operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle Motor
- Paddle HP Sensor (PS2)
- Paddle Motor (M10)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the corresponding harnesses/cables or connectors or the parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment when
Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.

446
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E577-8001-02 a. Paddle Motor error (Finisher-J1) b. Error in the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description a. The Paddle HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1 second had passed after the Paddle Motor
operation started. The last paddle operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor.
b. The paddle does not come off the Paddle HP Sensor when the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor has
been driven for 1 second.
Remedy a. INNER FIN-J1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle Motor
- Paddle HP Sensor (PS2)
- Paddle Motor (M10)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b.STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paddle HP Sensor (PS120) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paddle HP Sensor (PS120)
- Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E577-8002-02 Error in the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Paddle HP Sensor does not detect the paddle when the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor has been
driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paddle HP Sensor (PS120) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paddle HP Sensor (PS120)
- Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

447
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E578-8001-02 Error in the Return Roller Lift Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The return roller does not come off the Return Roller HP Sensor when the Return Roller Lift Motor
has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Return Roller HP Sensor (PS121) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Return Roller Lift Motor (M111) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Return Roller HP Sensor (PS121)
- Return Roller Lift Motor (M111)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E578-8002-02 Error in the Return Roller Lift Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Return Roller HP Sensor does not detect the return roller when the Return Roller Lift Motor has
been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Return Roller HP Sensor (PS121) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Return Roller Lift Motor (M111) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Return Roller HP Sensor (PS121)
- Return Roller Lift Motor (M111)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
[Points to note at work] When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection
timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before
checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

448
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E57B-8001-02 Error in the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The paper end pushing guide does not come off the Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor when
the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor (PS122) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor (PS122)
- Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E57B-8002-02 Error in the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor does not detect the paper end pushing guide when the
Paper End Pushing Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor (PS122) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor (PS122)
- Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

449
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E583-8001-02 Error in the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The tray auxiliary guides don't come off the Front/Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensors when the
Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117)
- Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118)
- Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E583-8002-02 Error in the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Front/Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensors don't detect the tray auxiliary guides when the
Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117)
- Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118)
- Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

450
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E590-0002-02 Error in the Punch (Inner Puncher-C1)

Detection Description The Puncher does not come on the Punch HP Sensor after driving stopped during initialization.
The Punch HP Sensor does not detect the punch when the Punch Motor has been driven for 0.4
seconds for returning the punch after the punch jam.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 1 (S5) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 2 (S6) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor Clock Sensor (S7) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor (M2) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Punch HP Sensor 1 (S5)
- Punch HP Sensor 2 (S6)
- Punch Motor Clock Sensor (S7)
- Punch Motor (M2)
- Puncher Relay PCB (PCB5)
- Puncher Controller PCB (PCB1)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

451
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E590-8001-02 a. Error in the Punch (Inner Puncher-C1) b. Error in the Punch Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)
Detection Description a. The punch does not come off the Punch HP Sensor when the Punch Motor has been driven for
0.2 seconds.
b. The punch does not come off the Punch HP Sensor when the Punch Motor has been driven for
0.2 seconds.
Remedy a. INNER PUNCH-C1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 1 (S5) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 2 (S6) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor Clock Sensor (S7) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor (M2) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Punch HP Sensor 1 (S5)
- Punch HP Sensor 2 (S6)
- Punch Motor Clock Sensor (S7)
- Punch Motor (M2)
- Puncher Relay PCB (PCB5)
- Puncher Controller PCB (PCB1)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b. PUNCHER UNIT-A1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 1 (PS303) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 2 (PS304) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS305) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor (M301) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Punch HP Sensor 1 (PS303)
- Punch HP Sensor 2 (PS304)
- Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS305)
- Punch Motor (M301)
- Puncher Relay PCB (PCB302)
- Puncher Controller PCB (PCB301)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

452
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E590-8002-02 Error in the Punch Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)

Detection Description The Punch HP Sensor does not detect the punch during initialization.
The Punch HP Sensor does not detect the punch when the Punch Motor has been driven for 0.4
seconds for returning the punch after the punch jam.
Remedy Puncher Unit-A1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 1 (PS303) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 2 (PS304) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS305) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor (M301) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Punch HP Sensor 1 (PS303)
- Punch HP Sensor 2 (PS304)
- Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS305)
- Punch Motor (M301)
- Puncher Relay PCB (PCB302)
- Puncher Controller PCB (PCB301)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E593-0001-02 Error in the Punch Horizontal Registration Motor (Inner Puncher-C1)

Detection Description The punch unit does not come off the Horizontal Registration HP Sensor when shifting the punch
unit by 9mm toward rear.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Horizontal Registration HP Sensor (S1) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Horizontal Registration Motor (M1) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Horizontal Registration HP Sensor (S1)
- Punch Horizontal Registration Motor (M1)
- Puncher Controller PCB (PCB1)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

453
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E593-0002-02 Error in the Punch Horizontal Registration Motor (Inner Puncher-C1)

Detection Description The Horizontal Registration HP Sensor does not detect the punch unit when shifting the punch unit
by 37mm toward rear.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Horizontal Registration HP Sensor (S1) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Horizontal Registration Motor (M1) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- PHorizontal Registration HP Sensor (S1)
- Punch Horizontal Registration Motor (M1)
- Puncher Controller PCB (PCB1)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E593-8001-02 Error in the Punch Shift Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)

Detection Description The punch unit does not come off the Punch Slide HP Sensor when shifting the punch unit by 9mm
toward rear.
Remedy Puncher Unit-A1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Punch Slide HP Sensor (PS302) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Shift Motor (M302) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Punch Slide HP Sensor (PS302)
- Punch Shift Motor (M302)
- Puncher Controller PCB (PCB301)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E593-8002-02 Error in the Punch Shift Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)

Detection Description The Punch Slide HP Sensor does not detect the punch unit when shifting the punch unit by 37mm
toward front.
Remedy Puncher Unit-A1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Punch Slide HP Sensor (PS302) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Shift Motor (M302) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Punch Slide HP Sensor (PS302)
- Punch Shift Motor (M302)
- Puncher Controller PCB (PCB301)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

454
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E5F0-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The saddle paper end stopper does not come off the Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor when
the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor (PS210) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor (PS210)
- Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E5F0-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor does not detect the saddle paper end stopper when the
Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor has been driven for 4 seconds.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor (PS210) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor (PS210)
- Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

455
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E5F1-8003-02 Saddle Delivery Motor clock error (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The lock state of Saddle Delivery Motor is detected 0.2 seconds or more while the motor operates.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Delivery Motor Clock Sensor (PS211) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Delivery Motor (M207) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Delivery Motor Clock Sensor (PS211)
- Saddle Delivery Motor (M207)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E5F3-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Alignment Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The saddle alignment plate does not come off the Saddle Alignment HP Sensor when the Saddle
Alignment Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Alignment HP Sensor (PS207) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Alignment Motor (M203) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Alignment HP Sensor (PS207)
- Saddle Alignment Motor (M203)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

456
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E5F3-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Alignment Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Saddle Alignment HP Sensor does not detect the saddle alignment plate when the Saddle
Alignment Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Alignment HP Sensor (PS207) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Alignment Motor (M203) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Alignment HP Sensor (PS207)
- Saddle Alignment Motor (M203)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E5F4-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Stitcher Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The saddle stitcher does not come off the Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor when the Saddle Stitcher
Motor has been driven for 1.2 seconds.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215)
- Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

457
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E5F4-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Stitcher Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor does not detect the saddle stitcher when the Saddle Stitcher Motor
has been driven for 1.2 seconds.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215)
- Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E5F6-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The saddle paper pushing plate does not come off the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor
when the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor (PS208) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor (PS208)
- Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

458
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E5F6-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor does not detect the saddle paper pushing plate when
the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor (PS208) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor (PS208)
- Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E5F6-8003-02 Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor clock error (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The lock state of Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor is detected 0.2 seconds or more while
the motor operates.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PS212) to the
Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PS212)
- Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

459
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E5F8-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The saddle switching lever does not come off the Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor when the
Saddle Switching Lever Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205)
- Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E5F8-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor does not detect the saddle switching lever when the
Saddle Switching Lever Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205)
- Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

460
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E5FA-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Gripper Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The saddle gripper does not come off the Saddle Gripper HP Sensor when the Saddle Gripper
Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper Motor (M205) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209)
- Saddle Gripper Motor (M205)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E5FA-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Gripper Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Saddle Gripper HP Sensor does not detect the saddle gripper when the Saddle Gripper Motor
has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper Motor (M205) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209)
- Saddle Gripper Motor (M205)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly,
perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.

E602-0001-00 HDD error

Detection Description HDD failed to be Ready, or HDD was not formatted.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
4. Check/replace the related parts.

461
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-0020-00 HDD error

Detection Description Corruption of database managing user mode/service mode data was detected.
Remedy While this error occurs, backup of the setting values is disabled.
In addition, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
2. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using a USB flash drive.
3. Replace the HDD.

E602-0101-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the PDL-related file storage area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error
at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "1", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "1", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-0111-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the PDL-related file storage area. (File could not be written in the HDD
after startup or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "1", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "1", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

462
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-0201-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (Initialization failed at startup
or I/O error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "2", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "2", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-0211-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (File could not be written in
the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "2", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "2", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

463
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-0301-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the MEAP-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error
at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "3", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "3", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-0311-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the MEAP-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup
or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "3", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "3", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

464
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-0401-00 HDD error

Detection Description Logical partition error was detected. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "4", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "4", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to the error, enter safe mode using
(2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-0411-00 HDD error

Detection Description Logical partition error was detected. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error
after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "4", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "4", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to the error, enter safe mode using
(2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

465
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-0501-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (Initialization failed at startup
or I/O error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "5", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "5", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-0511-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (File could not be written in
the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "5", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "5", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

466
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-0601-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (Initialization failed at startup
or I/O error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "6", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "6", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-0611-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (File could not be written in
the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "6", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "6", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

467
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-0701-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in general application temporary area (temporary file). (Initialization failed at
startup or I/O error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "7", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "7", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-0711-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in general application temporary area (temporary file). (File could not be
written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "7", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "7", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

468
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-0801-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the general application-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O
error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-0811-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the general application-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD
after startup or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

469
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-0901-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in PDL spool data (temporary file). (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error
at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "9", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "9", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-0911-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in PDL spool data (temporary file). (File could not be written in the HDD after
startup or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "9", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "9", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

470
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-1001-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the SEND-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error
at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "10", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "10", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-1011-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the SEND-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup
or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "10", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "10", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

471
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-1101-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the update-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error
at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "11", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "11", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-1111-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the update-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup
or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "11", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "11", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

472
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-1201-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the license-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error
at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although
the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 5.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared.
3. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "12", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
4. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-1211-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the license-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup
or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although
the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 5.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared.
3. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "12", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
4. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

473
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-1301-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although
the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 5.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared.
3. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "13", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
4. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-1311-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O
error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although
the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 5.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared.
3. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "13", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
4. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

474
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-1401-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in SWAP (temporary file/alternative memory area). (Initialization failed at
startup or I/O error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "14", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "14", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-1411-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in SWAP (temporary file/alternative memory area). (File could not be written
in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "14", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "14", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

475
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-1701-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the debug log area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "17", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "17", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-1711-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the debug log area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or
I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "17", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "17", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

476
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-1801-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the image data storage area in Advanced Box. (Initialization failed at
startup or I/O error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "18", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "18", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-1811-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the image data storage area in Advanced Box. (File could not be written
in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "18", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "18", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

477
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-1901-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of data for printing. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O
error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "19", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "19", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-1911-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of data for printing. (File could not be written in the HDD
after startup or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "19", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "19", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode
using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E602-2000-00 HDD error

Detection Description I/O error was detected in the file system after startup.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check that the HDD optional board is properly installed.
2. Turn ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared.
3. Execute the key clear using SST (to make an unformatted disk).
[CAUTION] E602-0001 will be indicated if activating the machine with the unformatted disk.
Therefore, be sure to format the HDD.
4. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.

478
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-2001-00 HDD error

Detection Description Mismatch on encryption operation
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check that the Main Controller PCB is installed properly.
2. Turn ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared.
3. Execute the key clear using SST (to make an unformatted disk).
[CAUTION] E602-0001 will be indicated if activating the machine with the unformatted disk.
Therefore, be sure to format the HDD.
4. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.

E602-2002-00 HDD error

Detection Description Failure of encryption board and others
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Turn ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared.
2. Execute the key clear using SST (to make an unformatted disk).
[CAUTION] E602-0001 will be indicated if activating the machine with the unformatted disk.
Therefore, be sure to format the HDD.
3. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E602-5001-00 Encryption Chip error

Detection Description Error of the encryption chip on the Main Controller
Remedy [Related parts] Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Replace the Main Controller PCB

E602-5002-00 HDD error

Detection Description A non-genuine HDD was detected.
Remedy 1. Replace the HDD with a genuine one.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.
2. Format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.

E602-FF01-00 HDD error

Detection Description An unidentified HDD error was detected at startup.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Main Controller PCB
- HDD
[Reference] For backup and restoration, refer to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

479
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E602-FF11-00 HDD error

Detection Description An unidentified HDD error was detected after startup.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Main Controller PCB
- HDD
[Reference] For backup and restoration, refer to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Check/replace the related parts.
[Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5.
Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.

E604-0512-00 Faulty/insufficient image memory (Main Controller PCB1)

Detection Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB 1
Remedy Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PCB 1 as indicated by 0512.

E604-1024-00 Faulty/insufficient image memory (Main Controller PCB1)

Detection Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB 1
Remedy Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PCB 1 as indicated by 1024.

E604-1536-00 Faulty/insufficient image memory (Main Controller PCB1)

Detection Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB 1
Remedy Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PCB 1 as indicated by 1536.

E613-0512-00 Faulty/insufficient image memory

Detection Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB
Remedy Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PC as indicated by 0512.

E613-1024-00 Faulty/insufficient image memory

Detection Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB
Remedy Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PCB as indicated by 1024.

E613-1536-00 Faulty/insufficient image memory

Detection Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB
Remedy Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PCB as indicated by 1536.

E613-2048-00 Memory error

Detection Description Memory of the Main Controller PCB is faulty.
Remedy Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PCB as indicated by 2048.

E614-0001-00 Flash PCB error

Detection Description The Flash PCB could not be recognized, or the Flash PCB was not formatted.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
- Reinstall the necessary application software once the error is cleared.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it
is installed properly.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

480
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E614-0002-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description The file system could not be initialized normally at startup.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Reference] For backup and restoration, refer to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
- Reinstall the necessary application software once the error is cleared.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB to check that it is
installed properly.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E614-0006-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description Bootable was not found on the Flash PCB.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
- Reinstall the necessary application software once the error is cleared.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it
is installed properly.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E614-0101-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although
the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
5. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E614-0111-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup
or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although
the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
5. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

481
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E614-0201-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although
the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
5. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E614-0211-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup
or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although
the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
5. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E614-0301-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although
the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
5. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

482
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E614-0311-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup
or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although
the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
5. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E614-0401-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description Logical partition error was detected. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E614-0411-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description Logical partition error was detected. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O
error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

483
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E614-0501-00 Error in file system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An error was detected in the general application-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O
error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB
flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.

E614-0511-00 Error in file system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An error was detected in the general application-related area. (File could not be written in the Flash
PCB after startup or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB
flash drive.
6. Check/replace the related parts.

E614-0601-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An error was detected in the license-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error
at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

484
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E614-0611-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An error was detected in the license-related area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after
startup or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E614-0701-00 Error in file system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An error was detected in system setting value (service mode, etc.) storage area. (Initialization failed
at startup or I/O error at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. Check/replace the related parts.

E614-0711-00 Error in file system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An error was detected in system setting value (service mode, etc.) storage area. (File could not be
written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. Check/replace the related parts.

485
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E614-4000-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description The OS could not be recognized.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Remedy]
1. Enter the safe mode and reinstall the system software using SST/USB flash drive.
2. Enter the safe mode and format the storage.
3. Turn OFF the main power and check the installation status of the Flash PCB and storage and
the connection status of the cables.
4. Replace the Flash PCB and reinstall the system software using SST/USB flash drive.
5. If any other error occurs, recover from the error according to the action taken.
6. Replace the storage device.
7. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E614-4001-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description The OS boot file was not found.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it
is installed properly.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Check that the HDD and the cables are properly installed.
4. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
5. If another error occurs, clear the error by performing the remedy for it.
6. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E614-4002-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description The OS kernel was not found.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it
is installed properly.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Check that the HDD and the cables are properly installed.
4. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
5. If another error occurs, clear the error by performing the remedy for it.
6. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E614-4003-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description The OS boot loader was not found.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it
is installed properly.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Check that the HDD and the cables are properly installed.
4. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
5. If another error occurs, clear the error by performing the remedy for it.
6. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E614-4010-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description The OS in safe mode could not be recognized.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it
is installed properly.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.

486
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E614-4011-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description The file for booting the OS in safe mode was not found.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it
is installed properly.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.

E614-4012-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description The kernel in safe mode was not found.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it
is installed properly.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.

E614-9000-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description SRAM device access-related error (at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it
is installed properly.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.

E614-9001-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description Error in memory allocation/invalid memory (at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it
is installed properly.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.

E614-9002-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description Setting file error was detected at startup.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it
is installed properly.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.

E614-9003-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description Parameter error was detected at startup.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it
is installed properly.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.

487
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E614-9004-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description Startup error was detected.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it
is installed properly.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.

E614-FF01-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An unidentified Flash error was detected at startup. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error
at startup)
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although
the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 5.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
5. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E614-FF11-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An unidentified Flash error was detected at startup. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after
startup or I/O error after startup)
Remedy [Related parts] R2.00
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although
the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 5.
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System
Service Manual.
4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
5. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E615-0001-00 Error in self-diagnosis of the encryption module

Detection Description An error was detected in self-diagnosis of the encryption library.
Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
- Reinstall the necessary application software and restore the backup data once the error
is cleared.
1. After reinstalling the system software using SST or a USB memory, turn OFF and then ON the
main power.
2. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list.
3. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and execute [4] Clear/Format> [2] Flash Format (Flash
format) using a USB memory.
4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory.
[Reference] For backup and restoration, refer to "Adjustment> Main Controller System" and
"Appendix> Backup Data List" in the Service Manual.

488
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E674-0001-07 Fax Board communication error

Detection Description An error was detected for the specified number of times in communication with the Fax Board.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Fax Board and the Riser PCB
- Fax Board
- Riser PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.

E674-0002-07 Fax Board communication error

Detection Description An error was detected for the specified number of times in communication with the Fax Board.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Fax Board and the Riser PCB
- Fax Board
- Riser PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.

E674-0004-07 Fax Board communication error

Detection Description A communication error occurred when accessing the modem IC used for fax.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Fax Board and the Riser PCB
- Fax Board
- Riser PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.

E674-0008-07 Fax Board communication error

Detection Description A communication error occurred when accessing the port IC used for fax.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Fax Board and the Riser PCB
- Fax Board
- Riser PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.

E674-0010-07 Fax Board communication error

Detection Description A communication error occurred when opening the Timer Device used for fax.
Remedy Check/replace the Main Controller PCB

E674-0011-07 Fax Board communication error

Detection Description A communication error occurred when starting the Timer Device used for fax.
Remedy Check/replace the Main Controller PCB

E674-0020-07 Fax Board communication error

Detection Description An error occurred in the modem IC used for fax.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Fax Board and the Riser PCB
- Fax Board
- Riser PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.

E674-0021-07 Fax Board communication error

Detection Description A Fax Board for non-supported modem has been connected.
Remedy Replace it with a genuine Fax Board (for 1-line, 2-line, or 3/4-line).

E674-0030-07 Fax Board communication error

Detection Description Check sum error
Remedy System software download for 2 line FAX

489
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E674-0100-07 Fax Board communication error

Detection Description After completion of fax communication, writing of the communication information (log) failed, and
the log could not be read.
Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
If it occurs when the power is turned OFF and then ON after executing FAX > Clear > ALL, execute
FAX > Clear > ALL and turn OFF and then ON the power again.
[CAUTION] The previous communication information (log) will be cleared by turning OFF and then
ON the main power.

E674-0300-07 Fax configuration error

Detection Description It was detected that there was a Fax Board for multiple lines installed while the IP Fax license
was enabled.
Remedy 1. Remove the Fax Board for multiple lines to use the machine as an IP Fax model.
2. Uninstall the IP Fax license to use the machine as a G3 Fax model.

E674-0301-07 Fax configuration error

Detection Description It was detected that there was no 1-line Fax Board installed while the IP Fax license was enabled.
Remedy 1. Install the Fax Board (1-line) to use the machine as an IP Fax model.
2. Uninstall the IP Fax license and install the G3 Fax Board to use the machine as a G3
Fax model.S15

E677-0001-00 Print server error

Detection Description Abnormality detected on the exhaust fan operation of printer server
Remedy 1. Check supplying power to the exhaust fan
2. Exhaust fan replacement

E677-0003-00 Print server error

Detection Description An error in the fan of the Print Server was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Print Server Fan
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.

E677-0004-00 Print server error

Detection Description Abnormality detected on the CPU fan operation of printer server
Remedy 1. Check supplying power to the CPU fan
2. CPU fan replacement

E677-0010-00 Print server error

Detection Description Failure was detected in operation of the CPU fan on the print server.
Remedy 1. Replace the board of the print server.
2. Reinstall the Print Server (For details, refer to "Service Manual image PASS P2.")

E677-0080-00 Print server error

Detection Description Error is detected at the Mother Board check when print server is started.
Remedy 1. Check the cable connection and turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Reinstall the print server (For details, refer to "Service Manual image PASS P2.")

490
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E711-0001-05 UFDI communication error

Detection Description Communication system error (reception time out error/checksum error etc.)
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2) to the Finisher Controller PCB.
(PCB1/PCB101)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1/PCB101)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E713-0010-05 Erroneous communication with finisher (reception error)

Detection Description The communication does not restart by the error retry after the communication failure with
the finisher.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2) to the Finisher Controller PCB.
(PCB1/PCB101)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1/PCB101)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E713-0011-05 Erroneous communication with finisher (reception error)

Detection Description The communication does not restart by the error retry after the communication failure with
the finisher.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2) to the Finisher Controller PCB.
(PCB1/PCB101)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1/PCB101)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

491
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E713-0020-05 Erroneous communication with finisher (reception data error)

Detection Description The communication does not restart by the error retry after the communication failure with
the finisher.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2) to the Finisher Controller PCB.
(PCB1/PCB101)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1/PCB101)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E713-0021-05 Erroneous communication with finisher (reception time out error)

Detection Description The communication does not restart by the error retry after the communication failure with
the finisher.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2) to the Finisher Controller PCB.
(PCB1/PCB101)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1/PCB101)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E713-0022-05 Erroneous communication with finisher (reception data error)

Detection Description The communication does not restart by the error retry after the communication failure with
the finisher.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2) to the Finisher Controller PCB.
(PCB1/PCB101)
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1/PCB101)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

492
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E716-0000-05 Erroneous communication with cassette pedestal

Detection Description After the presence of a cassette pedestal has been detected, the communication fails to be normal
for 5 sec.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1:Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J325) to the
Pedestal Controller PCB (UN101/J32)
- High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-B1:Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB
(UN2/J338) to the High-capacity Cassette Driver PCB (UN104/J31)
- Pedestal Controller PCB (UN101)/High-capacity Cassette Driver PCB (UN104)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Pedestal Controller PCB (UN101)/High-capacity Cassette Driver PCB (UN104).
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E719-0001-00 Error in Coin Vendor.

Detection Description Error in starting of the CoinVendor
- The Coin Vendor, which should have been connected before the power was turned OFF, is not
connected when the power is turned ON.
Remedy Check the connection between charging management equipment and machine, and check that the
Cable is not open-circuit.
Clear the error while the charging management equipment is connected to operate and when
switching to the operation without charging management equipment.
(To prevent the misuse by removing the charging management equipment, this error code
is displayed.)

E719-0002-00 Error in Coin Vendor.

Detection Description Error in IPC when CoinVendor is running.
- In the case of disconnection of IPC or an error in which IPC communication failed to be recovered.
- When disconnection of the pickup delivery signal is detected.
- When illegal connection is detected (short-circuit with Tx and Rx of IPC)
Remedy Check the connection between charging management equipment and machine, and check that the
Cable is not open-circuit.
Clear the error while the charging management equipment is connected to operate and when
switching to the operation without charging management equipment.
(To prevent the misuse by removing the charging management equipment, this error code
is displayed.)

E719-0003-00 Error in Coin Vendor.

Detection Description - In the case of communication error with the coin vendor while obtaining the unit price at start-up.
Remedy Check the connection between charging management equipment and machine, and check that the
Cable is not open-circuit.
Clear the error while the charging management equipment is connected to operate and when
switching to the operation without charging management equipment.
(To prevent the misuse by removing the charging management equipment, this error code
is displayed.)

E719-0004-00 Coin vendor error

Detection Description The coin vendor was connected to a model that does not support the coin vendor
Remedy 1. Disconnect the coin vendor

493
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E719-0031-00 Error in serial communication at the start of the New Card Reader
Detection Description Failure in communication with the serial New Card Reader at start-up.
Remedy - Check if the cable of the serial New Card Reader is disconnected.
- Take out the serial New Card Reader.
- COPIER > Function > CLEAR > CARD
- COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERR

E719-0032-00 Error in serial communication at the start of the New Card Reader
Detection Description Communication failed in the middle of the operation although communication with the serial New
Card Reader was successful at start-up.
Remedy - Check if the cable of the serial New Card Reader is disconnected.

E719-0041-00 Coin vendor error

Detection Description Communication with the coin vendor could not be established at startup of the host machine.
(Charge mode (COIN = 6) has been set.)
Remedy 1. If it operates in charge mode (COIN = 6)
- Check that it is the supported charging management equipment.
- Check the cable to be connected.
- Check the power of the charging management equipment.
2. If charge mode is canceled
- Select COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN> "0", and turn OFF and then ON the main power.

E719-0042-00 Coin vendor error

Detection Description Communication with the coin vendor could not be established at startup of the host machine.
(Charge mode (COIN = 6) has been set.)
Remedy 1. If it operates in charge mode (COIN = 6)
- Check that it is the supported charging management equipment.
- Check the cable to be connected.
- Check the power of the charging management equipment.
2. If charge mode is canceled
- Select COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN> "0", and turn OFF and then ON the main power.

E720-0001-00 Error due to non-compatible Finisher

Detection Description Non-compatible Finisher was connected.
Remedy Connect either the Staple Finisher-Y1 or Saddle Stitch Finisher-Y1.

E730-C001-00 Error in HDD access

Detection Description An error occurred when accessing the HDD.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.

E731-3000-00 Main Controller PCB error

Detection Description Unable to recognize the SURF Board.
Remedy Check/replace the Main Controller PCB

E731-3001-00 Main Controller PCB error

Detection Description Failure of SURF initialization.
Remedy Check/replace the Main Controller PCB

E731-3002-00 Main Controller PCB error

Detection Description Failure of SURF initialization.
Remedy Check/replace the Main Controller PCB

494
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E731-3015-00 Main Controller PCB error

Detection Description Video data is not transmitted to CL1-G even though there is no problem in the software.
Remedy Check/replace the Main Controller PCB

E732-0001-04 Communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB
was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J109) and the Riser PCB (UN14/J4031)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
- Riser PCB (UN14)
- Main Controller PCB (UN25)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E732-0010-00 Communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB
was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J109) and the Riser PCB (UN14/J4031)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
- Riser PCB (UN14)
- Main Controller PCB (UN25)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E732-0020-00 Communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB
was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J109) and the Riser PCB (J7)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
- Riser PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E732-0021-00 Communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB
was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J109) and the Riser PCB (J7)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
- Riser PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

495
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E732-0022-00 Communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB
was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J109) and the Riser PCB (J7)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
- Riser PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E732-0023-04 Communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB 1was
detected at startup/recovery from sleep.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J109) and the Riser PCB (UN14/J4031)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
- Riser PCB (UN14)
- Main Controller PCB (UN25)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E732-0F01-04 Communication error

Detection Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot
If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E732-0001 is generated.
Remedy It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after
log collection.

E732-0F20-00 Communication error

Detection Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot
If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E732-0020 is generated.
Remedy It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after
log collection.

E732-0F21-00 Communication error

Detection Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot
If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E732-0021 is generated.
Remedy It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after
log collection.

E732-0F22-00 Communication error

Detection Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot
If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E732-0022 is generated.
Remedy It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after
log collection.

E732-0F23-04 Communication error

Detection Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot
If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E732-0023 is generated.
Remedy It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after
log collection.

496
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E732-8888-00 Communication error

Detection Description Scanner for a different model was detected at communication with the Reader.
Remedy Replace the Reader Unit with the one for this model.

E733-0000-05 Printer communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB was detected
at startup.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harnesses between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB
- DC Controller PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2
min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E733-0001-05 Printer communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harnesses between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB
- DC Controller PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2
min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E733-0002-05 Printer communication error

Detection Description Signal error was detected after establishment of communication between the DC Controller PCB
and the Main Controller PCB.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harnesses between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB
- DC Controller PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2
min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E733-0010-05 Printer communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harnesses between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB
- DC Controller PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2
min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E733-0F00-05 Printer communication error

Detection Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot
If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E733-0000 is generated.
Remedy It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after
log collection.

497
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E733-0F01-05 Printer communication error

Detection Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot
If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E733-0001 is generated.
Remedy It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after
log collection.

E733-0F02-05 Printer communication error

Detection Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot
If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E733-0002 is generated.
Remedy It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after
log collection.

E733-F000-05 Printer communication error

Detection Description Disconnection of a cable between the Main Controller PCB and the DC Controller PCB
was detected.
Remedy [Remedy] Check/replace the harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Main
Controller PCB.

E733-F001-05 Printer communication error

Detection Description Disconnection of a cable between the Main Controller PCB and the DC Controller PCB
was detected.
Remedy [Remedy] Check/replace the harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Main
Controller PCB.

E733-F002-05 Printer communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the Main Controller PCB and the Laser Driver PCB was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] 2.00
- Flat Cable between the Riser PCB (UN14/J7201) and the Laser Driver PCB (UN23/J601)
- Connector between the Main Controller PCB (UN25) and the Riser PCB (UN14)
- Laser Scanner Assembly
- Riser PCB (UN14)
- Main Controller PCB (UN25)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.

E743-0000-04 Communication error

Detection Description The Reader Controller PCB detected a communication error between the Main Controller PCB and
the Reader Controller PCB.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J109) and the Riser PCB (UN14/J4031)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1)
- Riser PCB (UN14)
- Main Controller PCB (UN25)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

498
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E743-0000-05 DDI communication error

Detection Description The Reader Controller PCB detected the communication error between the Main Controller PCB
and the Reader Controller PCB.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2) to the Reader Controller PCB (UN_B01).
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_B01)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E743-0001-04 DDI communication error

Detection Description Software sequence error
Remedy [Remedy] Turn OFF and then ON the main power.

E744-0001-00 Language file error

Detection Description The language file in HDD was not supported by the version of Bootable.
Remedy Reinstall the correct language file using SST or USB memory reinstall the entire software.

E744-0003-00 Language file error

Detection Description The language file to be switched to that was described in the Config.txt in HDD was not found.
Remedy Reinstall the correct language file using SST or USB memory reinstall the entire software.

E744-0004-00 Language file error

Detection Description Switching to the language file in the HDD failed.
Remedy Reinstall the correct language file using SST or USB memory reinstall the entire software.

E744-2000-00 Controller firmware mismatch

Detection Description Invalid controller firmware was detected.
Remedy Replace the ECO-ID PCB with the one for this model.

E744-5000-07 Mismatch of software version for fax

Detection Description After the Fax Board (option) has been installed, mismatch of version of software in the Fax Board
was detected at transmission and reception.
Remedy Upgrade the system software version to the latest one.

E746-0011-00 Voice Board error

Detection Description Because both the voice composition board and the composition recognition board are inserted.
Remedy Insert only 1 board of the appropriate voice board.

E746-0021-00 Image Analysis Board error

Detection Description Self-check NG of Image Analysis Board
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Remove and then install the Image Analysis Board.
2. If the error is not cleared, replace the Image Analysis Board.
3. After replacing the Image Analysis Board, reinstall the firmware of the Image Analysis Board or
the system software which version is supported by this model using SST or a USB flash drive.

E746-0022-00 Image Analysis Board error

Detection Description Different version of Image Analysis Board (PCB used for PCAM)
Remedy Reinstall the firmware of the Image Analysis Board or the system software which version is
supported by this model using SST or a USB flash drive.

499
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E746-0023-00 Image Analysis Board error

Detection Description No response from Image Analysis Board (PCB used for PCAM)
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Remove and then install the Image Analysis Board.
2. If the error is not cleared, replace the Image Analysis Board.
3. After replacing the Image Analysis Board, reinstall the firmware of the Image Analysis Board or
the system software which version is supported by this model using SST or a USB flash drive.

E746-0024-00 Image Analysis Board error

Detection Description Failure in behavior of Image Analysis Board (PCB used for PCAM)
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Remove and then install the Image Analysis Board.
2. If the error is not cleared, replace the Image Analysis Board.
3. After replacing the Image Analysis Board, reinstall the firmware of the Image Analysis Board or
the system software which version is supported by this model using SST or a USB flash drive.

E746-0031-00 TPM error

Detection Description A communication error has occurred between the Main Controller PCB and the TPM PCB
at startup.
Remedy Check/replace the TPM PCB.
[Reference] After replacing the TPM PCB, if the TPM key was backed up, restore the key.
1. Connect the USB memory which stores the TPM key.
2. Execute "Settings/Registration> Log In> Management Settings> Data Management> TPM
Settings> Restore TPM Key".
[CAUTION] Ask the customer to enter "System Manager ID" and "System Manager PIN" when
logging in.
3. Enter the password set at backup operation.
4. When the restoration completion screen is displayed, click "OK". Remove the USB memory, and
turn OFF and then ON the main power.

E746-0032-00 TPM error

Detection Description Mismatch of the TPM key was detected.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Replace the TPM PCB.
[Reference] After replacing the TPM PCB, if the TPM key was backed up, restore the key.
1. Connect the USB memory which stores the TPM key.
2. Execute "Settings/Registration> Log In> Management Settings> Data Management> TPM
Settings> Restore TPM Key".
[CAUTION] Ask the customer to enter "System Manager ID" and "System Manager PIN" when
logging in.
3. Enter the password set at backup operation.
4. When the restoration completion screen is displayed, click "OK". Remove the USB memory, and
turn OFF and then ON the main power.

E746-0033-00 TPM error

Detection Description It was detected that data in TPM was inconsistent.
Remedy If the TPM key was backed up,
- Restore the TPM key.
1. Connect the USB memory which stores the TPM key.
2. Execute "Settings/Registration> Log In> Management Settings> Data Management> TPM
Settings> Restore TPM Key".
[CAUTION] Ask the customer to enter "System Manager ID" and "System Manager PIN" when
logging in.
3. Enter the password set at backup operation.
4. When the restoration completion screen is displayed, click "OK". Remove the USB memory, and
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
If the TPM key was not backed up,
- Format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.

500
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E746-0034-00 TPM auto recovery error

Detection Description The error occurred when clearing HDD while TPM setting was ON.
Remedy It is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the power.
If the error is not cleared, format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB
flash drive.

E746-0035-00 TPM version error

Detection Description TPM PCB which cannot be used in this machine was installed.
Remedy Install the TPM PCB for this model.

E748-2000-00 Main Controller PCB access error

Detection Description Main Controller PCB Chip access error.
Remedy Check/replace the Main Controller PCB

E748-2001-00 Main Controller PCB access error

Detection Description Main Controller PCB memory access error.
Remedy Check/replace the Main Controller PCB

E748-2010-00 Flash PCB error / HDD error

Detection Description IPL (startup program) was not found, or the HDD could not be recognized.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harnesses between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
- Flash PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Disconnect the cable between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD, and turn ON the
main power.
a. When the error code has not been changed:
1. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Restore the backup data.
b. When the error code has been changed to another one, see the remedy for the
corresponding code.
[Reference] For backup and restoration, refer to "Adjustment> Main Controller System" and
"Appendix> Backup Data List" in the Service Manual.

E748-2011-00 Flash PCB error

Detection Description OS was not found at startup.
Remedy After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.

E748-2012-00 Flash PCB error

Detection Description Cannot mount the OS in safe mode startup or No OS startup script
Remedy After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.

E748-2021-00 Main Controller PCB access error

Detection Description Main controller board access errors
Remedy Check/replace the Main Controller PCB

E748-2022-00 Main controller startup error

Detection Description An fatal error was detected in the Main Controller at startup
Remedy Replace the Main Controller PCB

E748-2023-00 Main Controller PCB access error

Detection Description Main controller board access errors
Remedy Check/replace the Main Controller PCB

501
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E748-2024-00 Main Controller PCB access error

Detection Description Main controller board access errors
Remedy Check/replace the Main Controller PCB

E748-2025-00 Main Controller PCB access error

Detection Description Main controller board access errors
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Bypass PCB
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Check/replace the related connector and parts.

E748-2026-00 Main Controller PCB access error

Detection Description Main controller board access errors
Remedy Check/replace the Main Controller PCB

E748-4910-00 Main Controller PCB access error

Detection Description Main controller board access errors
Remedy Check/replace the Main Controller PCB

E748-9000-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.

E749-0006-00 Error due to change in hardware configuration

Detection Description Change in option configuration could not be detected.
Remedy [Remedy] Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
[Reference] Options are recognized again by turning OFF and then ON the main power.
In the case of changing option configuration, disconnect the power plug or turn OFF the breaker
after turning OFF the main power so that an error does not occur.

E750-0001-05 System software error

Detection Description Model information of the DC Controller did not match the notification from the controller.
Remedy Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory.

E753-0001-00 Download Error

Detection Description Update of the system software failed.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
2. Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Replace the FLASH PCB, and reinstall the system software.
4. Collect debug log and contact the sales company.

E753-0001-05 Download error

Detection Description System Software Update Error
Error occurs when updating system software of uninstalled options
Remedy [Remedy]
1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
2. Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory.
3. Replace the FLASH PCB, and reinstall the system software.
4. Collect debug log and contact the sales.

E760-0001-00 Main Controller PCB internal error

Detection Description An error was detected in the Main Controller PCB.
Remedy Check/replace the Main Controller PCB

502
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E800-0000-05 Power condition unmatched error between Main Controller PCB and DC Controller PCB
Detection Description The power of DC controller PCB still keep ON even if it reaches 90 sec after detecting the power
OFF by the main controller PCB.
Remedy [Remedy]
1. Wait till the power is turned off.
2. Turn the main power switch ON.

E804-0000-00 Power Supply Fan error

Detection Description It was detected that the Supply Fan was locked.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the AC Driver PCB (UN30/J117) and the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM5/J712)
- Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM5)
- AC Driver PCB (UN30)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.

E804-0000-05 Failure of the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM5)

Detection Description When lock signal is detected for 5 sec while the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM5) is stopped.
* The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J117) to the Power Supply Cooling Fan
(FM5/J712)
- Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM5)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Power Supply Cooling Fan.

E804-0001-05 Unstable rotation of the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM5)

Detection Description The fan stop signal is detected for 5 minutes or more and the retry operation fails 4 times
continuously after generating the ON signal of the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM5).
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J117) to the Power Supply Cooling Fan
(FM5/J712)
- Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM5)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the Power Supply Cooling Fan.

E805-0000-05 Failure of the Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM3)

Detection Description When lock signal is detected for 15 sec while the Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM3) is stopped.
* The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J335) to the Exhaust Fan (Rear)
(FM3/J2010)
- Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM3)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

503
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E805-0001-05 Unstable rotation of the Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM3)

Detection Description When lock signal failed to be detected for 15 sec while the Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM3) is driven.
* The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J335) to the Exhaust Fan (Rear)
(FM3/J2010)
- Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM3)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E805-0002-05 Failure of the Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM4)

Detection Description When lock signal is detected for 15 sec while the Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM4) is stopped.
* The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J335) to the Exhaust Fan (Front)
(FM4/J2009)
- Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM4)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E805-0003-05 Unstable rotation of the Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM4)

Detection Description When lock signal failed to be detected for 15 sec while the Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM4) is driven.
* The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J335) to the Exhaust Fan (Front)
(FM4/J2009)
- Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM4)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

504
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E806-0000-05 Failure of the Main Body Cooling Fan (FM6)

Detection Description When lock signal is detected for 5 sec while the Main Body Cooling Fan (FM6) is stopped.
*The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J337) to the Main Body Cooling Fan
(FM6/J441)
- Main Body Cooling Fan (FM6)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E806-0001-05 Unstable rotation of the Main Body Cooling Fan (FM6)

Detection Description When lock signal failed to be detected for 15 sec while the Main Body Cooling Fan (FM6) is driven.
* The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J337) to the Main Body Cooling Fan
(FM6/J441)
- Main Body Cooling Fan (FM6)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E806-0002-05 Failure of the Paper Cooling Fan (FM7)

Detection Description When lock signal is detected for 15 sec while the Paper Cooling Fan (FM7) is stopped.
*The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J335) to the Paper Cooling Fan
(FM7/J2209)
- Paper Cooling Fan (FM7)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

505
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E806-0003-05 Unstable rotation of the Paper Cooling Fan (FM7)

Detection Description When lock signal failed to be detected for 15 sec while the Paper Cooling Fan (FM7) is driven.
* The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J335) to the Paper Cooling Fan
(FM7/J2209)
- Paper Cooling Fan (FM7)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E808-0001-05 AC Driver PCB location error

Detection Description When determine the location of the AC Driver PCB, location is not corresponding at the 100V/
120V/230V.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J303) to the AC Driver PCB (UN30/J116)
- AC Driver PCB (UN30)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the AC Driver PCB.
3.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E840-0000-05 Edge Shutter Home Position error

Detection Description When the home position of the shutter is not detected
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J334) to the Fixing Film Shutter HP Sensor
(S10/J109)
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J334) to the Fixing Film Shutter motor
(M8/J2037)
- Fixing Film Shutter HP Sensor (S10)
- Fixing Film Shutter motor (M8)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

506
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E840-0001-05 Failure of Fixing Film Edge Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM1)

Detection Description When the lock signal is detected for 15 sec while the fixing film edge cooling fan (rear) stops.
* The same status is detected again after the retry operation.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J334) to the Fixing Film Cooling Fan
(Rear) (FM1/J732)
- Fixing Film Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM1)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E840-0002-05 Rotation error of Fixing Film Edge Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM1)
Detection Description When the lock signal is detected for 15 sec while the fixing film cooling fan (rear) operates.
* The same status is detected again after the retry operation.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J334) to the Fixing Film Cooling Fan
(Rear) (FM1/J732)
- Fixing Film Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM1)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E840-0003-05 Failure of Fixing Film Edge Cooling Fan (Front) (FM2)

Detection Description When the lock signal is detected for 15 sec while the fixing film edge cooling fan (front) stops.
* The same status is detected again after the retry operation.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J334) to the Fixing Film Cooling Fan
(Front) (FM2/J733)
- Fixing Film Cooling Fan (Front) (FM2)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

507
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E840-0004-05 Rotation error of Fixing Film Edge Cooling Fan (Front) (FM2)
Detection Description When the lock signal is detected for 15 sec while the fixing film edge cooling fan (front) operates.
* The same status is detected again after the retry operation.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness connecting from the DC Controller PCB (UN2/J334) to the Fixing Film Cooling Fan
(Front) (FM2/J733)
- Fixing Film Cooling Fan (Front) (FM2)
- DC Controller PCB (UN2)
[Remedy]
1.Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
2.Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

E880-0001-00 Controller Fan error

Detection Description It was detected that the Controller Fan was locked.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Cable between the Main Controller PCB (UN25/J15) and the Controller Fan (FM12)
- Controller Fan (FM12)
- Main Controller PCB (UN25)
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
- Check the connectors of the Controller Fan.
- Visually check rotation of the Controller Fan.
a. If it is not rotated, replace the Controller Fan.
b. If it is rotated, replace the Main Controller PCB.

E880-0003-00 Controller Fan error

Detection Description It was detected that the Controller Fan was locked.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Cable between the Main Controller PCB and the Controller Fan
- Controller Fan
- Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
- Check the connectors of the Controller Fan.
- Visually check rotation of the Controller Fan.
a. If it is not rotated, replace the Controller Fan.
b. If it is rotated, replace the Main Controller PCB.

E880-0005-00 Error in Controller Fan

Detection Description Fan lock of the HDD Cooling Fan was detected
Remedy Check if the connector is connected.
It the connection is OK, replace the HDD Cooling Fan.

E881-0001-00 Board over heat error

Detection Description Abnormal temperature of the Main Controller CPU was detected.
Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
a. If the error occurred during a service visit and then occurred again, replace the Main
Controller PCB.
b. If the error does not occur during a service visit but is found in the log:
1. Clean the inlet on the side where the fan is installed and remove dust.
2. Remove dust from the Controller fan.
3. If the space on the side where the fan is installed is less than 10 cm, ask the customer to secure
enough space.

508
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E882-0001-05 Main Power Supply Switch error

Detection Description The main power was not turned OFF due to the solenoid in the Main Power Switch not working.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Riser PCB (UN14/J502) and the Power Switch (SW1/J10)
- Power Switch (SW1)
- Riser PCB (UN14)
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
a. If the fuse of the Riser PCB is blown out,
1. Check the harness and connector (caught cable, short circuit).
2. Check/replace the Riser PCB.
b. If the fuse of the Riser PCB is not blown out,
1. Check for any open circuit of the harness.
2. Check/replace the Main Power Supply Switch.

E996-0071-04 Error for collecting sequence jam log (ADF)

Detection Description Error for collecting jam log (ADF)
Remedy [Remedy] Collect debug log and contact to the sales company.
[Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-R" to "1", it is handled
as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence.

E996-0CA0-05 Frequent error avoidance jam (PRINTER)

Detection Description Error avoidance jam (PRINTER)
Make "000CA0" jam to be displayed as an error by setting JM-ERR-D in service mode.
Remedy [Remedy]Collect debug log and contact to the sales company.
[Reference] To cancel the setting, select COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D, and set
JM-ERR-D to 0.

E996-0CAF-05 Frequent error avoidance jam (PRINTER)

Detection Description Error avoidance jam (PRINTER)
Make "000CAF" jam to be displayed as an error by setting JM-ERR-D in service mode.
Remedy [Remedy]Collect debug log and contact to the sales company.
[Reference] To cancel the setting, select COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D, and set
JM-ERR-D to 0.

E202-0010-04 Reader Scanner Unit HP error

Detection Description The Reader Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when starting scanning operation.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness between the Scanner Unit HP Sensor (SR2/J5202) and the Reader Controller PCB
(UN1/J102) (Unit of replacement: DF MOUNT ASSEMBLY, L)
- Harness between the Scanner Motor (M1/J601) and the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J108)
(Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR)
- Scanner Unit HP Sensor (SR2)
- Scanner Motor (M1)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

509
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E302-0003-04 Error in paper front white shading

Detection Description The paper front white shading value gradually became out of the specified range.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness between the Reader Scanner Unit (J101) and the Reader Controller PCB (J105)
- Reader Scanner Unit
- Reader Controller PCB
[Remedy]
1. Clean the LED, mirror, and Stream Reading Glass of Scanner Unit.
2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E302-0103-04 Error in paper back white shading

Detection Description The paper back white shading value gradually became out of the specified range.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness between the DADF Scanner Unit (J1102) and the Reader Controller PCB (J105)
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (J109) and the Riser PCB (J4031) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE)
- DADF Scanner Unit
- Reader Controller PCB
[Remedy]
1. Clean the LED, mirror, and Stream Reading Glass of Scanner Unit.
2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

E730-D001-00 Error in XPS processing

Detection Description An error occurred when processing the XPS.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Restart the host machine and perform the job again.
2. Format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.

510
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Jam Code

Jam Type
Type Overview of detection Check items (in arbitrary order)
DELAY A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned • Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
ON although a specified period of time had passed • Soiling on the target sensor
after the start of detection by the sensor. • Displacement of the target sensor position
• Failure of the target sensor
• Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located
upstream of the target sensor
• Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller
located upstream of the target sensor
STNRY A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not • Remaining paper near the target sensor
turned OFF although a specified period of time had • Soiling on the target sensor
passed after the sensor was turned ON. • Displacement of the target sensor position
• Failure of the target sensor
• Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located
upstream of the target sensor
• Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller
located upstream of the target sensor
DOOR OP A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected • Door open during printing
door open during printing operation.
COVER OP A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected • Cover open during printing
cover open during printing operation.
ADF OPEN A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected • ADF open during printing
ADF open during printing operation.
SEQUENCE A sequence jam occurs when there was an error • Opening/closing of the door
in sensor detection signal at printing operation se- • Turning OFF and then ON the power
quence. • Error near the target sensor (soiling/displacement/failure of
Since the jam may occur due to sporadic noise with the sensor, error in harness/open circuit of harness, soiling
software of each equipment or communication line (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor, or soiling (pa-
(interruption of communication), failure of the part is per dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller)
not the cause of the jam. After the jam is removed,
the machine works.
POWER ON A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON • Remaining paper in the machine
state at power-on. • Soiling on the target sensor
• Failure of the target sensor
• Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)
ERROR An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the • Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
machine (excluding parts failure) was detected. • Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error oc-
currence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not
the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead
of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and
printing operation is suspended. In such case, serv-
ice technician should perform remedial work for the
error code.
SIZE ERR A size error jam occurs when the difference be- • Difference in paper size
tween the paper length detected by the Cassette • Wrong paper size setting
Guide Plate/specified on the Control Panel and the • Error in the Document Size Sensor (soiling/displace-
length measured by the Post-Separation Sensor is ment/failure of the sensor)
out of the specified range. • Error in the Paper Size Detection Unit (failure of mechanical
structure for size detection, failure of the Guide Plate, or
failure of the Cassette Size Switch)
P-STOP Forcible stop of paper feed • Using at problem analysis.
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position
specified in service mode.

511
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Type Overview of detection Check items (in arbitrary order)

Wrapping jam When the first sensor after the fixing roller is • Fixing Assembly remaining in Paper
turned ON is turned OFF immediately detection • Failure of the target sensor
after the detection. • Fixing Assembly failure
Alternatively, when the second sensor after fixing • Paper Type Confirmation (Check if paper type cannot
roller is turned ON and immediately after detection, be used.)
the first sensor is detection turned OFF.

Jam screen display specification

Due to one jam code being used for multiple options, the illustration for the different option may be displayed on the jam screen.
In this case, "1/2" or similar information is displayed on top left side of the screen and this area can be pushed. This operation can
be used to switch information on the screen.

Main Unit

S24
S22

S21

S19
S6
S7
S5
S9
S1

S33

S4 S3 S34 S32 S31 S2

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID

00 0101 DELAY Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor S1
00 0102 DELAY Cassette 2 Pickup Sensor S33

512
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID

00 0103 DELAY Cassette 3 Pre-registration Sensor PS108/PS101
/High Capacity Cassette Pull-
out Sensor
00 0104 DELAY Cassette 4 Pre-registration Sensor PS109
00 0105 DELAY Pre-Registration Sensor S5
00 0107 DELAY Fixing Outlet Sensor S19
00 0108 DELAY No.1 Delivery Sensor S21
00 0109 DELAY No.2 Delivery Sensor S22
00 0201 STNRY Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor S1
00 0202 STNRY Cassette 2 Pickup Sensor S33
00 0203 STNRY Cassette 3 Pre-registration Sensor PS108/PS101
/High Capacity Cassette Pull-
out Sensor
00 0204 STNRY Cassette 4 Pre-registration Sensor PS109
00 0205 STNRY Pre-Registration Sensor S5
00 0207 STNRY Fixing Outlet Sensor S19
00 0208 STNRY No.1 Delivery Sensor S21
00 0209 STNRY No.2 Delivery Sensor S22
00 010A DELAY Reversal Sensor S24
00 010D DELAY Duplex Feed Sensor S7
00 020A STNRY Reversal Sensor S24
00 020D STNRY Duplex Feed Sensor S7
00 0A01 POWER ON Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor S1
00 0A02 POWER ON Cassette 2 Pickup Sensor S33
00 0A03 POWER ON Cassette 3 Pre-registration Sensor PS108/PS101
/High Capacity Cassette Pull-
out Sensor
00 0A04 POWER ON Cassette 4 Pre-registration Sensor PS109
00 0A05 POWER ON Pre-Registration Sensor S5,S6
/Loop Sensor
00 0A07 POWER ON Fixing Outlet Sensor S19
00 0A08 POWER ON No.1 Delivery Sensor S21
00 0A09 POWER ON No.2 Delivery Sensor S22
00 0A0A POWER ON Reversal Sensor S24
00 0A0D POWER ON Duplex Feed Sensor S7
00 0B00 DOOR OP - -
00 0CA0 SEQUENCE - -
00 0CAF SEQUENCE - -
00 0D91 SIZE ERR - -
00 0CE0 SEQUENCE - -
00 0CF1 OTHER - -
00 AA01 P-STOP - -
00 AA02 P-STOP - -
00 AA03 P-STOP - -
00 AA04 P-STOP - -
00 AA05 P-STOP - -
00 AA06 P-STOP - -
00 AA07 P-STOP - -
00 AA20 P-STOP - -
00 AA21 P-STOP - -
00 AA30 P-STOP - -
00 AA31 P-STOP - -
00 AA32 P-STOP - -
00 AA33 P-STOP - -
00 AA40 P-STOP - -

513
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID

00 AA41 P-STOP - -
00 AA42 P-STOP - -
00 AA43 P-STOP - -
00 AA50 P-STOP - -
00 AA51 P-STOP - -
00 AA70 P-STOP - -
00 AA71 P-STOP - -
00 AA72 P-STOP - -
00 AA73 P-STOP - -
00 AA99 P-STOP - -

Single Pass DADF-A1

PS_R3
PS_N1
PS_A3
PS_A5 PS_A4

PS_R1
UN_BO8
UN_BO7

PS_A9

PS_R2
PS_A6 PS_A1
PS_A2
PS_A7
UN_BO6
ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID
01 0001 DELAY Post-separation Sensor PS_R1
01 0002 STNRY Post-separation Sensor PS_R1
01 0003 DELAY Arch Sensor PS_A1
01 0004 STNRY Arch Sensor PS_A1
01 0005 DELAY Registration Sensor PS_R2
01 0006 STNRY Registration Sensor PS_R2
01 0007 DELAY Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6
01 0008 STNRY Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6
01 0009 DELAY Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7
01 0010 STNRY Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7
01 0020 DOUBLE Double Feed Sensor PCB UN_BO7, UN_BO8
01 0021 OTHER Double Feed Sensor PCB UN_BO7, UN_BO8
01 0042 STNRY Post-separation Sensor PS_R1
01 0043 DELAY Arch Sensor PS_A1
01 0044 STNRY Arch Sensor PS_A1
01 0045 DELAY Registration Sensor PS_R2
01 0046 STNRY Registration Sensor PS_R2
01 0047 DELAY Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6

514
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID

01 0048 STNRY Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6
01 0049 DELAY Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7
01 0050 STNRY Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7
01 0060 DOUBLE Double Feed Sensor PCB UN_BO7, UN_BO8
01 0062 OTHER Double Feed Sensor PCB UN_BO7, UN_BO8
01 0063 OTHER Double Feed Sensor PCB UN_BO7, UN_BO8
01 0061 OTHER Double Feed Sensor PCB UN_BO7, UN_BO8
01 0071 OTHER - -
01 0076 OTHER Large/Small Sensor, LTR-R/LGL Sensor PS_R3, PS_A3
01 0090 ADF OPEN Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor Reader : PS_N1, PS_N2
(Front/Rear)
01 0091 ADF OPEN Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor Reader : PS_N1, PS_N2
(Front/Rear)
01 0092 COVER OP Cover Open/Closed Sensor PS_A5
01 0093 COVER OP Cover Open/Closed Sensor PS_A5
01 0095 OTHER Original Sensor PS_N1
01 0096 OTHER - -
01 00A1 POWER ON Post-separation Sensor PS_R1
01 00A2 POWER ON Loop Sensor PS_A1
01 00A3 POWER ON Registration Sensor PS_R2
01 00A4 POWER ON Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6
01 00A5 POWER ON Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7
01 00D5 OTHER Original Sensor PS_N1

DADF-AV1

SR9,SR10,SR11,SR12 SR6 SR8

SR5 SR7

SR2 SR1 SR3 SR15 SR13,SR14

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID

01 0003 DELAY Registration Sensor SR1
01 0004 STNRY Registration Sensor SR1
01 0009 DELAY Lead Sensor SR2
01 0010 STNRY Lead Sensor SR2
01 0013 DELAY Delivery Reversal Sensor SR3
01 0014 STNRY Delivery Reversal Sensor SR3
01 0043 DELAY Registration Sensor SR1
01 0044 STNRY Registration Sensor SR1
01 0049 DELAY Lead Sensor SR2
01 0050 STNRY Lead Sensor SR2
01 0053 DELAY Delivery Reversal Sensor SR3
01 0054 STNRY Delivery Reversal Sensor SR3
01 0071 OTHER - -
01 0076 OTHER - -
01 0090 ADF OPEN Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (Front/Rear) PS_N1,PS_N2

515
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID

01 0091 ADF OPEN Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (Front/Rear) PS_N1,PS_N2
01 0092 COVER OP Cover Open/Closed Sensor SR6
01 0093 COVER OP Cover Open/Closed Sensor SR6
01 0095 OTHER Document Set Sensor SR5
01 0096 OTHER - -
01 00A1 POWER ON Registration Sensor SR1
01 00A2 POWER ON Lead Sensor SR2
01 00A3 POWER ON Delivery Reversal Sensor SR3
01 00A6 POWER ON Delivery Reversal Sensor SR3
01 00D5 OTHER Registration Sensor / Document Set Sensor SR1 / SR5

Inner Finisher-J1

MSW1
PS17

PS1

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID

02 1001 DELAY Inlet Sensor PS17
02 1002 DELAY Punch Trailing Edge Sensor PCB3
02 1003 DELAY No.2 path sensor S2
02 1101 STNRY Delivery sensor PS1
02 1102 STNRY Punch Trailing Edge Sensor PCB3
02 1103 STNRY No.2 path sensor S2
02 1200 OTHER - -
02 1301 POWER ON Delivery Sensor PS1
02 1302 POWER ON Punch trailing edge sensor PCB3
02 1303 POWER ON No.2 path sensor S2
02 1304 POWER ON Inlet Sensor PS17
02 1400 COVER OP Front cover switch MSW1
02 1500 STAPLE - -
02 1601 PUNCH Punch Waste Box Sensor S4
02 1701 OTHER Delivery sensor PS1
02 1801 ERROR - -
02 1802 ERROR - -
02 1803 ERROR - -
02 1804 ERROR - -
02 1805 ERROR - -
02 1C14 ERROR - -
02 1C16 ERROR - -
02 1C30 ERROR - -
02 1C32 ERROR - -
02 1C35 ERROR - -
02 1C37 ERROR - -
02 1C40 ERROR - -
02 1C77 ERROR - -

516
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID

02 1CFF OTHER - -
02 1F01 OTHER - -
02 1F32 OTHER - -
02 1F90 SEQUENCE - -

Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1

PS111
PS102
PS130 PS101
PS114 PS103
PS128 PS104
PS129 SW101
PS125 PS201
PS203 PS215
PS202

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID

02 1001 DELAY Inlet Sensor PS101
02 1002 DELAY Delivery Sensor PS102
02 1003 DELAY Buffer Sensor PS103
02 1004 DELAY Lower Escape Delivery Sensor PS111
02 1008 DELAY Saddle Delivery Sensor PS203
02 1009 DELAY Saddle Inlet Sensor PS201
02 1101 STNRY Inlet Sensor PS101
02 1102 STNRY Delivery Sensor PS102
02 1103 STNRY Buffer Sensor PS103
02 1104 STNRY Lower Escape Delivery Sensor PS111
02 1108 STNRY Saddle Delivery Sensor PS203
02 1109 STNRY Saddle Inlet Sensor PS201
02 1200 OTHER - -
02 1301 POWER ON Inlet Sensor PS101
02 1302 POWER ON Delivery Sensor PS102
02 1303 POWER ON Buffer Sensor PS103
02 1304 POWER ON Lower Escape Delivery Sensor PS111
02 1307 POWER ON Saddle Processing Tray Pa- PS202
per Sensor
02 1308 POWER ON Saddle Delivery Sensor PS203
02 1309 POWER ON Saddle Inlet Sensor PS201

517
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID

02 1400 COVER OP Front Cover Sensor/ PS104,SW101
Front Cover Switch
02 1500 STAPLE - -
02 1501 SDL STP Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor PS215
02 1801 ERROR Staple-free Binding PS130
02 1802 ERROR Staple-free Binding HP Sensor PS129
02 1803 ERROR - -
02 1804 ERROR - -
02 1805 ERROR - -
02 1C14 ERROR - -
02 1C30 ERROR - -
02 1C32 ERROR - -
02 1C35 ERROR - -
02 1C37 ERROR - -
02 1C40 ERROR - -
02 1C77 ERROR - -
02 1C53 ERROR - -
02 1C54 ERROR - -
02 1C78 ERROR - -
02 1C7B ERROR - -
02 1C83 ERROR - -
02 1CF0 ERROR - -
02 1CF1 ERROR - -
02 1CF3 ERROR - -
02 1CF6 ERROR - -
02 1CF8 ERROR - -
02 1CFA ERROR - -
02 1CFF OTHER - -
02 1F01 OTHER - -
02 1F32 OTHER - -
02 1F90 SEQUENCE - -

Buffer Pass Unit-N1

PS403

PS402 PS401

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID

02 100A DELAY Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PS401
02 100B DELAY Buffer Pass Exit Sensor PS402
02 110A STNRY Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PS401
02 110B STNRY Buffer Pass Exit Sensor PS402
02 1201 OTHER Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PS401

518
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID

02 130A POWER ON Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PS401
02 130B POWER ON Buffer Pass Exit Sensor PS402
02 1405 DOOR OP OPEN Detection Sensor PS403
02 1F3E SEQUENCE - -

Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1

S2

S5 S6

PCB3

S4

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID

02 1600 PUNCH Punch HP Sensor 1/2 S5,S6
02 1C90 ERROR - -
02 1C93 ERROR - -

519
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1

PS303 PS304

PS301

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID

02 1600 PUNCH Punch HP Senpor 1/2 PS303,PS304
02 1C90 ERROR - -
02 1C93 ERROR - -

Paper Deck Unit-F1

PS1

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID

00 010F DELAY Deck Pickup Sensor PS1
00 020F STNRY Deck Pickup Sensor PS1
00 0A0F POWER ON Deck Pickup Sensor PS1

520
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Jam Code Details

■ 00-0101: JamCode (Main Unit)
[Symptom/Question]
00-0101: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor
Sensor No. : S1
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

521
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0102: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0102: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Cassette 2 Pickup Sensor
Sensor No. : S33
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

522
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0103: JamCode (Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0103: JamCode (Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Cassette 3 Pre-registration Sensor
Sensor No. : PS108
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

523
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0103: JamCode (High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-B1)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0103: JamCode (High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-B1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : High Capacity Cassette Pullout Sensor
Sensor No. : PS101
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

524
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0104: JamCode (Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0104: JamCode (Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Cassette 4 Pre-registration Sensor
Sensor No. : PS109
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

525
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0105: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0105: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Pre-Registration Sensor
Sensor No. : S5
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

526
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0107: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0107: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Fixing Outlet Sensor
Sensor No. : S19
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

527
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0108: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0108: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : No.1 Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : S21
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

528
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0109: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0109: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : No.2 Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : S22
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

529
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-010A: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-010A: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Reversal Sensor
Sensor No. : S24
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

530
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-010D: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-010D: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Duplex Feed Sensor
Sensor No. : S7
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

531
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-010F: JamCode (Paper Deck Unit-F1)

[Symptom/Question]
00-010F: JamCode (Paper Deck Unit-F1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Deck Pickup Sensor
Sensor No. : PS1
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

532
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0201: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0201: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor
Sensor No. : S1
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

533
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0202: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0202: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Cassette 2 Pickup Sensor
Sensor No. : S33
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

534
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0203: JamCode (Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0203: JamCode (Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Cassette 3 Pre-registration Sensor
Sensor No. : PS108
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

535
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0203: JamCode (High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-B1)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0203: JamCode (High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-B1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : High Capacity Cassette Pullout Sensor
Sensor No. : PS101
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

536
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0204: JamCode (Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0204: JamCode (Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Cassette 4 Pre-registration Sensor
Sensor No. : PS109
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

537
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0205: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0205: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Pre-Registration Sensor
Sensor No. : S5
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

538
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0207: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0207: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Fixing Outlet Sensor
Sensor No. : S19
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

539
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0208: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0208: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : No.1 Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : S21
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

540
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0209: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0209: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : No.2 Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : S22
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

541
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-020A: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-020A: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Reversal Sensor
Sensor No. : S24
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

542
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-020D: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-020D: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Duplex Feed Sensor
Sensor No. : S7
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

543
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-020F: JamCode (Paper Deck Unit-F1)

[Symptom/Question]
00-020F: JamCode (Paper Deck Unit-F1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Deck Pickup Sensor
Sensor No. : PS1
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

544
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0A01: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0A01: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor
Sensor No. : S1
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

545
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0A02: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0A02: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Cassette 2 Pickup Sensor
Sensor No. : S33
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

546
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0A03: JamCode (Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0A03: JamCode (Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Cassette 3 Pre-registration Sensor
Sensor No. : PS108
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

547
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0A03: JamCode (High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-B1)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0A03: JamCode (High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-B1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : High Capacity Cassette Pullout Sensor
Sensor No. : PS101
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

548
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0A04: JamCode (Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0A04: JamCode (Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Cassette 4 Pre-registration Sensor
Sensor No. : PS109
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

549
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0A05: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0A05: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Pre-Registration Sensor,Loop Sensor
Sensor No. : S5,S6
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

550
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0A07: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0A07: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Fixing Outlet Sensor
Sensor No. : S19
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

551
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0A08: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0A08: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : No.1 Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : S21
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

552
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0A09: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0A09: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : No.2 Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : S22
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

553
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0A0A: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0A0A: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Reversal Sensor
Sensor No. : S24
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

554
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0A0D: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0A0D: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Duplex Feed Sensor
Sensor No. : S7
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

555
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0A0F: JamCode (Paper Deck Unit-F1)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0A0F: JamCode (Paper Deck Unit-F1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Deck Pickup Sensor
Sensor No. : PS1
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

556
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0B00: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0B00: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Door open jam
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected door open during printing operation.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door open during printing

557
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0CA0: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0CA0: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Sequence jam
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
A sequence jam occurs when there was an error in sensor detection signal at printing operation sequence.
Since the jam may occur due to sporadic noise with software of each equipment or communication line (interruption of
communication), failure of the part is not the cause of the jam. After the jam is removed, the machine works.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door
- Turning OFF and then ON the power
- Error near the target sensor (soiling/displacement/failure of the sensor, error in harness/open circuit of harness, soiling
(grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor, or soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller)

558
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0CAF: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0CAF: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Sequence jam
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
A sequence jam occurs when there was an error in sensor detection signal at printing operation sequence.
Since the jam may occur due to sporadic noise with software of each equipment or communication line (interruption of
communication), failure of the part is not the cause of the jam. After the jam is removed, the machine works.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door
- Turning OFF and then ON the power
- Error near the target sensor (soiling/displacement/failure of the sensor, error in harness/open circuit of harness, soiling
(grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor, or soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller)

559
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0CF1: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0CF1: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

560
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-0D91: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-0D91: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Size error
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
A size error jam occurs when the difference between the paper length detected by the Cassette Guide Plate/specified on the
Control Panel and the length measured by the Registration Sensor is out of the specified range.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Difference in paper size
- Wrong paper size setting
- Error in the Document Size Sensor (soiling/displacement/failure of the sensor)
- Error in the Paper Size Detection Unit (failure of mechanical structure for size detection, failure of the Guide Plate, or failure of
the Cassette Size Switch)

561
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA01: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA01: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

562
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA02: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA02: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

563
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA03: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA03: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

564
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA04: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA04: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

565
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA05: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA05: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

566
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA06: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA06: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

567
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA07: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA07: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

568
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA20: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA20: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

569
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA21: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA21: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

570
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA30: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA30: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

571
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA31: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA31: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

572
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA32: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA32: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

573
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA33: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA33: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

574
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA40: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA40: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

575
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA41: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA41: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

576
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA42: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA42: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

577
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA43: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA43: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

578
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA50: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA50: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

579
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA51: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA51: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

580
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA70: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA70: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

581
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA71: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA71: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

582
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA72: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA72: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

583
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA73: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA73: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

584
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 00-AA99: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Symptom/Question]
00-AA99: JamCode (Main Unit)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Forcible stop of paper feed
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Using at problem analysis.

585
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0001: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0001: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Post-separation Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_R1
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

586
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0002: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0002: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Post-separation Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_R1
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

587
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0003: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0003: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Loop Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_A1
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

588
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0003: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0003: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Registration Sensor
Sensor No. : SR1
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

589
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0004: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0004: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Loop Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_A1
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

590
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0004: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0004: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Registration Sensor
Sensor No. : SR1
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

591
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0005: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0005: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Registration Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_R2
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

592
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0006: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0006: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Registration Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_R2
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

593
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0007: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0007: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Lead Sensor 1
Sensor No. : PS_A6
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

594
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0008: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0008: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Lead Sensor 1
Sensor No. : PS_A6
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

595
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0009: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0009: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Lead Sensor 2
Sensor No. : PS_A7
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

596
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0009: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0009: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Lead Sensor
Sensor No. : SR2
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

597
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0010: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0010: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Lead Sensor 2
Sensor No. : PS_A7
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

598
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0010: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0010: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Lead Sensor
Sensor No. : SR2
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

599
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0013: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0013: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Delivery Reversal Sensor
Sensor No. : SR3
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

600
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0014: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0014: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Delivery Reversal Sensor
Sensor No. : SR3
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

601
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0020: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0020: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Double Feed
Sensor Name : Double Feed Detection PCB
Sensor No. : UN_BO7,UN_BO8
Overview of detection
- When double feeding is detected during originals feeding (Excluding for mixed/free-size assigned)
- When paper or sticky notes are detected on the document surface
- When an error of the Double Feed Detection Sensor is detected
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Double feed originals
- Originals with sticky notes attached to their surface
- Failure of the Double Feed Detection Sensor

602
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0021: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0021: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : Double Feed Detection PCB
Sensor No. : UN_BO7,UN_BO8
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

603
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0042: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0042: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Post-separation Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_R1
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

604
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0043: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0043: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Loop Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_A1
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

605
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0043: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0043: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Registration Sensor
Sensor No. : SR1
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

606
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0044: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0044: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Loop Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_A1
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

607
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0044: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0044: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Registration Sensor
Sensor No. : SR1
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

608
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0045: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0045: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Registration Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_R2
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

609
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0046: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0046: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Registration Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_R2
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

610
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0047: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0047: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Lead Sensor 1
Sensor No. : PS_A6
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

611
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0048: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0048: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Lead Sensor 1
Sensor No. : PS_A6
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

612
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0049: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0049: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Lead Sensor 2
Sensor No. : PS_A7
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

613
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0049: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0049: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Lead Sensor
Sensor No. : SR2
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

614
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0050: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0050: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Lead Sensor 2
Sensor No. : PS_A7
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

615
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0050: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0050: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Lead Sensor
Sensor No. : SR2
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

616
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0053: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0053: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Delivery Reversal Sensor
Sensor No. : SR3
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

617
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0054: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0054: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Delivery Reversal Sensor
Sensor No. : SR3
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

618
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0060: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0060: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Double Feed
Sensor Name : Double Feed Detection PCB
Sensor No. : UN_BO7,UN_BO8
Overview of detection
- When double feeding is detected during originals feeding (Excluding for mixed/free-size assigned)
- When paper or sticky notes are detected on the document surface
- When an error of the Double Feed Detection Sensor is detected
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Double feed originals
- Originals with sticky notes attached to their surface
- Failure of the Double Feed Detection Sensor

619
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0061: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0061: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : Double Feed Detection PCB
Sensor No. : UN_BO7,UN_BO8
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

620
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0062: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0062: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : Double Feed Detection PCB
Sensor No. : UN_BO7,UN_BO8
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

621
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0063: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0063: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : Double Feed Detection PCB
Sensor No. : UN_BO7,UN_BO8
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

622
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0071: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0071: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

623
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0071: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0071: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

624
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0076: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0076: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : Large,Small Sensor, LTR-R,LGL Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_R3,PS_A3
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

625
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0090: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0090: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : ADF OPEN
Sensor Name : Copyboard Cover Open_Closed Sensor (Front,Rear)
Sensor No. : PS_N1,PS_N2
Overview of detection
A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected ADF open during printing operation.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- ADF open during printing

626
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0091: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0091: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : ADF OPEN
Sensor Name : Copyboard Cover Open_Closed Sensor (Front,Rear)
Sensor No. : PS_N1,PS_N2
Overview of detection
A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected ADF open during printing operation.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- ADF open during printing

627
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0092: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0092: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : COVER Open jam
Sensor Name : Cover Open
Sensor No. : PS_A5
Overview of detection
A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected cover open during printing operation.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Cover open during printing

628
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0092: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0092: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : COVER Open jam
Sensor Name : Closed Sensor
Sensor No. : SR6
Overview of detection
A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected cover open during printing operation.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Cover open during printing

629
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0093: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0093: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : COVER Open jam
Sensor Name : Cover Open
Sensor No. : PS_A5
Overview of detection
A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected cover open during printing operation.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Cover open during printing

630
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0093: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0093: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : COVER Open jam
Sensor Name : Closed Sensor
Sensor No. : SR6
Overview of detection
A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected cover open during printing operation.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Cover open during printing

631
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0095: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0095: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : Original Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_N1
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

632
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0095: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0095: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : Registration Sensor,Original Set Sensor
Sensor No. : SR1,SR5
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

633
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0096: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0096: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

634
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-0096: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-0096: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

635
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-00A1: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-00A1: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Post-separation Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_R1
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

636
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-00A1: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-00A1: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Registration Sensor
Sensor No. : SR1
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

637
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-00A2: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-00A2: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Scanner Unit HP Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_A1
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

638
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-00A2: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-00A2: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Lead Sensor
Sensor No. : SR2
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

639
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-00A3: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-00A3: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Delivery Reversal Sensor
Sensor No. : SR3
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

640
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-00A3: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-00A3: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Registration Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_R2
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

641
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-00A4: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-00A4: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Lead Sensor 1
Sensor No. : PS_A6
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

642
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-00A5: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-00A5: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Lead Sensor 2
Sensor No. : PS_A7
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

643
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-00A6: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-00A6: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Delivery Reversal Sensor
Sensor No. : SR3
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

644
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-00D5: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-00D5: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : Original Sensor
Sensor No. : PS_N1
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

645
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 01-00D5: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Symptom/Question]
01-00D5: JamCode (Reversal DFDF)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : Registration Sensor,Original Set Sensor
Sensor No. : SR1,SR5
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

646
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1001: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1001: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Inlet Sensor
Sensor No. : PS17
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

647
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1001: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1001: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Inlet Sensor
Sensor No. : PS101
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

648
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1002: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1002: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Punch Trailing Edge Sensor
Sensor No. : PCB3
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

649
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1002: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1002: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : PS102
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

650
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1003: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1003: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : No.2 path sensor
Sensor No. : S2
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

651
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1003: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1003: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Buffer Sensor
Sensor No. : PS103
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

652
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1004: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1004: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Lower Escape Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : PS111
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

653
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1008: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1008: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Saddle Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : PS203
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

654
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1009: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1009: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Saddle Inlet Sensor
Sensor No. : PS201
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

655
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-100A: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-100A: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor
Sensor No. : PS401
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

656
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-100B: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-100B: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Delay jam
Sensor Name : Buffer Pass Exit Sensor
Sensor No. : PS402
Overview of detection
A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection
by the sensor.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/Failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/Failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

657
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1101: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1101: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : PS1
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

658
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1101: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1101: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Inlet Sensor
Sensor No. : PS101
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

659
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1102: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1102: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Punch Trailing Edge Sensor
Sensor No. : PCB3
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

660
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1102: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1102: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : PS102
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

661
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1103: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1103: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : No.2 path sensor
Sensor No. : S2
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

662
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1103: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1103: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Buffer Sensor
Sensor No. : PS103
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

663
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1104: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1104: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Lower Escape Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : PS111
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

664
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1108: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1108: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Saddle Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : PS203
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

665
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1109: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1109: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Saddle Inlet Sensor
Sensor No. : PS201
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

666
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-110A: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-110A: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor
Sensor No. : PS401
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

667
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-110B: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-110B: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Stationary jam
Sensor Name : Buffer Pass Exit Sensor
Sensor No. : PS402
Overview of detection
A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was
turned ON.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper near the target sensor
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Failure of the target sensor
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor
- Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor

668
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1200: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1200: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

669
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1200: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1200: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

670
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1201: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1201: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor
Sensor No. : PS401
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

671
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1301: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1301: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : PS1
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

672
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1301: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1301: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Inlet Sensor
Sensor No. : PS101
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

673
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1302: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1302: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Puncher trailing edge sensor
Sensor No. : PCB3
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

674
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1302: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1302: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : PS102
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

675
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1303: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1303: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : No.2 path sensor
Sensor No. : S2
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

676
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1303: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1303: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Buffer Sensor
Sensor No. : PS103
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

677
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1304: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1304: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Inlet Sensor
Sensor No. : PS17
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

678
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1304: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1304: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Escape Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : PS111
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

679
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1307: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1307: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Saddle Processing Tray Paper Sensor
Sensor No. : PS202
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

680
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1308: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1308: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Saddle Delivery Sensor
Sensor No. : PS203
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

681
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1309: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1309: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Saddle Inlet Sensor
Sensor No. : PS201
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

682
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-130A: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-130A: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor
Sensor No. : PS401
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

683
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-130B: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-130B: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Power-on jam
Sensor Name : Buffer Pass Exit Sensor
Sensor No. : PS402
Overview of detection
A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Remaining paper in the machine
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Failure of the target sensor
- Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)

684
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1400: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1400: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : COVER Open jam
Sensor Name : Front cover switch
Sensor No. : MSW1
Overview of detection
A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected cover open during printing operation.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Cover open during printing

685
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1400: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1400: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : COVER Open jam
Sensor Name : Front Cover Sensor,Front Cover Switch
Sensor No. : PS104,SW101
Overview of detection
A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected cover open during printing operation.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Cover open during printing

686
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1405: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1405: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Door open jam
Sensor Name : OPEN Detection Sensor
Sensor No. : PS403
Overview of detection
A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected door open during printing operation.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door open during printing

687
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1500: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1500: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : STAPLE
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
A staple jam occurs when the sensor in the Staple Unit detected an abnormality during staple operation.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Failure of the Staple Unit
- Error in harness/open circuit of harness

688
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1500: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1500: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : STAPLE
Sensor Name : Staple HP Sensor
Sensor No. : PS125
Overview of detection
A staple jam occurs when the sensor in the Staple Unit detected an abnormality during staple operation.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Failure of the Staple Unit
- Error in harness/open circuit of harness

689
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1501: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1501: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : SDL STP
Sensor Name : Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor
Sensor No. : PS215
Overview of detection
A saddle staple jam occurs when the sensor in the Stitcher Unit detected an abnormality during stitch operation.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Failure of the Stitcher Unit
- Error in harness/open circuit of harness

690
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1600: JamCode (2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1600: JamCode (2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : PUNCH
Sensor Name : Punch HP Sensor 1,Punch HP Sensor 2
Sensor No. : PS303,PS304
Overview of detection
A punch jam occurs when the sensor detected an abnormality during punch operation.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Failure of the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Error in harness/open circuit of harness
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor
- Paper Type Confirmation (Check if paper type cannot be used.)

691
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1600: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1600: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : PUNCH
Sensor Name : Punch HP Sensor 1,Punch HP Sensor 2
Sensor No. : S5,S6
Overview of detection
A punch jam occurs when the sensor detected an abnormality during punch operation.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Failure of the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Error in harness/open circuit of harness
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor
- Paper Type Confirmation (Check if paper type cannot be used.)

692
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1601: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1601: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : PUNCH
Sensor Name : Punch Waste Box Sensor
Sensor No. : S4
Overview of detection
A punch jam occurs when the sensor detected an abnormality during punch operation.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Failure of the target sensor
- Displacement of the target sensor position
- Soiling on the target sensor
- Error in harness/open circuit of harness
- Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor
- Paper Type Confirmation (Check if paper type cannot be used.)

693
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1701: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1701: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : Delivery sensor
Sensor No. : PS1
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

694
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1801: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1801: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

695
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1801: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1801: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : Staple-free Binding Motor Clock Sensor
Sensor No. : PS130
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

696
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1802: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1802: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

697
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1802: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1802: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : Staple-free Binding HP Sensor
Sensor No. : PS129
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

698
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1803: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1803: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

699
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1803: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1803: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

700
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1804: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1804: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

701
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1804: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1804: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

702
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1805: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1805: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

703
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1805: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1805: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

704
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C14: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C14: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

705
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C14: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C14: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

706
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C16: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C16: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

707
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C30: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C30: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

708
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C30: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C30: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

709
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C32: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C32: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

710
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C32: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C32: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

711
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C35: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C35: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

712
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C35: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C35: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

713
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C37: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C37: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

714
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C37: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C37: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

715
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C40: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C40: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

716
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C40: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C40: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

717
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C53: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C53: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

718
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C54: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C54: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

719
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C77: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C77: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

720
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C77: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C77: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

721
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C78: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C78: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

722
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C7B: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C7B: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

723
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C83: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C83: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

724
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C90: JamCode (2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C90: JamCode (2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

725
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C90: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C90: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

726
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C93: JamCode (2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C93: JamCode (2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

727
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1C93: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1C93: JamCode (Inner 2/3_2/4_4 Hole Puncher-C1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

728
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1CF0: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1CF0: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

729
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1CF1: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1CF1: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

730
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1CF3: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1CF3: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

731
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1CF6: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1CF6: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

732
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1CF8: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1CF8: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

733
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1CFA: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1CFA: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Error avoidance
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected.
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended.
In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
- Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal

734
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1F01: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1F01: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

735
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1F01: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1F01: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

736
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1F32: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1F32: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

737
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1F32: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1F32: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : OTHER
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
Other jam occurred
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Door OPEN/CLOSE after handling jam
- Power Supply OFF/ON after handling jam
- An error near the target sensor (Sensor dirt, Sensor displacement, Sensor failure, Wire harness failure/disconnection, Dirtiness
of Drive Motor (grease)/Deterioration/failure, Dirtiness of Drive Roller (paper dust)/Deterioration/failure)

738
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1F3E: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1F3E: JamCode (Buffer Pass Unit-N1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Sequence jam
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
A sequence jam occurs when there was an error in sensor detection signal at printing operation sequence.
Since the jam may occur due to sporadic noise with software of each equipment or communication line (interruption of
communication), failure of the part is not the cause of the jam. After the jam is removed, the machine works.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door
- Turning OFF and then ON the power
- Error near the target sensor (soiling/displacement/failure of the sensor, error in harness/open circuit of harness, soiling
(grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor, or soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller)

739
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1F90: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1F90: JamCode (Inner Finisher-J1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Sequence jam
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
A sequence jam occurs when there was an error in sensor detection signal at printing operation sequence.
Since the jam may occur due to sporadic noise with software of each equipment or communication line (interruption of
communication), failure of the part is not the cause of the jam. After the jam is removed, the machine works.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door
- Turning OFF and then ON the power
- Error near the target sensor (soiling/displacement/failure of the sensor, error in harness/open circuit of harness, soiling
(grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor, or soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller)

740
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

■ 02-1F90: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Symptom/Question]
02-1F90: JamCode (Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1)

[Remedy/Answer]
Jam Type : Sequence jam
Sensor Name : -
Sensor No. : -
Overview of detection
A sequence jam occurs when there was an error in sensor detection signal at printing operation sequence.
Since the jam may occur due to sporadic noise with software of each equipment or communication line (interruption of
communication), failure of the part is not the cause of the jam. After the jam is removed, the machine works.
I/O: Service Mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check
Check items (in arbitrary order)
- Opening/closing of the door
- Turning OFF and then ON the power
- Error near the target sensor (soiling/displacement/failure of the sensor, error in harness/open circuit of harness, soiling
(grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor, or soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller)

741
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Alarm Code

Alarm Code Details

00-0085 A notice of state
A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

00-0246 Error code display (4-digit)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Soft counter PCB cannot write normally
C. Remedy

00-0247 Error code display (4-digit)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Soft counter PCB cannot restore data
C. Remedy

01-0001 Notification of disabled to obtain counter values for a certain period of time
A. Operation / B. Cause / Counter information is not set to UGW
C. Remedy * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW

01-0002 No change in device status after specified period of time has passed (RDS server creates)
A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

01-0004 Notification of IP address change

A. Operation / B. Cause / IP address has been changed
C. Remedy * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW

01-0005 Restricted operation notification

A. Operation / B. Cause / The device entered limited function mode for some reason.
C. Remedy * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW

02-0025 Insufficient Scanner Unit (Paper Front) LED light intensity alarm (Some of the LEDs are OFF.
Scanning can be continued.)
A. Operation / B. Cause / In the case that the light intensity is insufficient at LED lighting.
C. Remedy

04-0010 Notification of jam left untouched

A. Operation / B. Cause / Jam is left untouched
C. Remedy * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW

04-0011 Cassette 1 Paper Feed Retry error

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: Nothing in particular.
C. Remedy Cause: The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out.
Measures: Check the pick-up/paper feed/separation rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper
remains around the paper feed area or not.

04-0012 Cassette 2 Paper Feed Retry error

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: Nothing in particular.
C. Remedy Cause: The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out.
Measures: Check the pick-up/paper feed/separation rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper
remains around the paper feed area or not.

04-0013 Cassette 3 Paper Feed Retry error

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: Nothing in particular.
C. Remedy Cause: The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out.
Measures: Check the pick-up/paper feed/separation rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper
remains around the paper feed area or not.

742
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

04-0014 Cassette 4 Paper Feed Retry error

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: Nothing in particular.
C. Remedy Cause: The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out.
Measures: Check the pick-up/paper feed/separation rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper
remains around the paper feed area or not.

04-0017 Manual Feeder Paper Feed Retry error

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: Nothing in particular.
C. Remedy Cause: The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out.
Measures: Check the pick-up/paper feed/separation rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper
remains around the paper feed area or not.

04-0018 Paper Deck Retry error

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: Nothing in particular.
C. Remedy Cause: The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out.
Measures: Check the pick-up/paper feed/separation rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper
remains around the paper feed area or not.

04-1537 Deck Lifter descent alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause:
C. Remedy - Error in the Lifter Plate or error in the Lifter Wire
- Error in the Deck Lifter Motor or error in the harness
- Error in the Deck Lifter Lower Position Sensor or error in the harness
- Error in the Relay Paper Sensor or error in the harness
Detection condition/timing: The Deck Lifter Lower Position Sensor was not turned ON within the
specified period of time when lowering the lifter.
Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot
be used.)
Measures:
1.Open the compartment and check for any foreign matter in it. If there is any foreign matter,
remove it.
2.Check that the Lifter Plate is not caught by the Side Guide. If there is a catch, repair it.
3.Remove the deck front cover, and check that the lifter wire is properly installed (no coming off,
disconnection, slack, or winding in the reverse direction). If there is an error, repair it.
When the lifter wire is wound in the reverse direction at the deck lifter alarm (04-1537) occurrence,
execute the following service mode.
- Drive of Deck Lifter Motor: COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> DK1-LIFT
4.Execute service mode: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> DK-RCV and clear the Deck Lifter
descent alarm.
5.Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
6.Push the Relay Paper Sensor Flag and check that the Lifter Plate being lowered stops at the
lowest position.
a. If it is not lowered:
- Check/replace the harness and connector between the Deck Driver PCB and the Relay
Paper Sensor.
- Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Lifter Motor.
- Replace the Relay Paper Sensor.
- Replace the Box Driver PCB.
b. Although it is lowered, it does not stop at the lowest position.
- Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Lifter Lower
Position Sensor.
- Replace the Box Driver PCB.
- Replace the Deck Lifter Lower Position Sensor.

743
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

04-1539 Deck Paper Level Sensor alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause:
C. Remedy - Error in the Lifter Plate or error in the Lifter Wire
- Error in the Paper Level Sensor or error in the harness
- Error in the Relay Paper Sensor or error in the harness
- Error in the Deck Lifter Motor or error in the harness
Detection condition/timing: The Deck Paper Level Sensor was not turned ON within the specified
period of time when raising the lifter.
Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot
be used.)
Measures:
1.Open the compartment and check that the Lifter Plate is not caught by the Side Guide. If there
is a catch, repair it.
2.Remove the deck front cover, and check that the lifter wire is properly installed (no coming off,
disconnection, or slack). If there is an error, repair it.
3.Remove the deck right cover, close the compartment.
4.Turn OFF/ON the main power switch, and check if the Lifter Plate is raised from the right side.
5.If it is not raised, execute the following operations.
- Check/replace the harness and connector between the Deck Driver PCB and the Paper
Level Sensor.
- Check/replace the harness and connector between the Deck Driver PCB and the Relay
Paper Sensor.
- Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Lifter Motor.
- Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Driver PCB.
- Replace the Paper Level Sensor.
- Replace the Relay Paper Sensor.
- Replace the Deck Lifter Motor.
- Replace the Box Driver PCB.
- Replace the Deck Driver PCB.

04-1542 Deck Lifter upper limit alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause:
C. Remedy - Error in the Deck Lifter Upper Limit Sensor 1/2 or error in the harness
- Error in the Paper Level Sensor or error in the harness
Detection condition/timing: The Deck Lifter Upper Limit Sensor 1/2 were turned ON while raising
the lifter.
Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot
be used.)
Measures:
1.Check for any damaged parts around the flag of the Deck Lifter Upper Limit Sensor 1/2.
2.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Lifter
Upper Limit Sensor 1/2.
3.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Paper
Level Sensor.
4.Replace the Deck Lifter Upper Limit Sensor 1/2.
5.Replace the Paper Level Sensor.
6.Replace the Box Driver PCB.

744
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

04-1543 Deck lifter lower limit alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause:
C. Remedy - Error in the Deck Lifter Lower Position Sensor or error in the harness
- Error in the Deck Lifter Lower Limit Switch or error in the harness
Detection condition/timing:
The Deck Lifter Lower Limit Switch was turned ON while lowering the lifter.
Movement/symptom:
The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot be used.)
Measures:
1.Check for any damaged parts around the flag of the Deck Lifter Lower Position Sensor. If there
are damaged parts, replace it.
2.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Lifter
Lower Position Sensor.
3.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Lifter
Lower Limit Switch.
4.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Lifter
Lower Limit Switch.
5.Replace the Deck Lifter Lower Position Sensor.
6.Replace the Deck Lifter Lower Limit Switch.
7.Replace the Box Driver PCB.

04-1586 Deck interlock alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause:
C. Remedy - Error in the Compartment Open/Close Sensor or error in the harness
- Error in the Compartment Open/Close Switch or error in the harness
Detection condition/timing: The interlock was not detected with the Compartment Open/Close
Sensor ON.
Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot
be used.)
Measures:
1.Check if the compartment is halfway closed. If it is halfway closed, close it properly.
2.Close the compartment and check whether the Compartment Open/Close Sensor and the
Compartment Open/Close Switch respond normally by I/O of the service mode.
3.Check/replace the harness (integrated with a switch) and connector between the Deck Driver
PCB and the Compartment Open/Close Switch.
4.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Deck Driver PCB and the Compartment
Open/Close Sensor.
5.Replace the Compartment Open/Close Sensor.
6.Replace the Deck Driver PCB.

04-1587 Deck Pickup Motor disengagement alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause:
C. Remedy - Error in the Deck Pickup Motor or error in the harness
- Error in the Separation Roller Sensor or error in the harness
- Error in the Pickup Assembly
Detection condition/timing: The Separation Roller Sensor did not respond when disengaging the
Feed/Separation Roller.
Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot
be used.)
Measures:
1.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Deck Driver PCB and the Deck
Pickup Motor.
2.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Deck Driver PCB and the Separation
Roller Sensor.
3.Replace the Deck Pickup Motor and Separation Roller Sensor.
4.Replace the Deck Driver PCB.
5.Check the rear coupling of the Deck Pickup Assembly. If there is an error, replace it.

745
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

04-1937 Lifter error detection alarm: High Capacity Cassette

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause:
C. Remedy Error in the Lifter paper height detection
Detection condition/timing:
When paper height was not detected within the specified period of time while lifting up the lifter
Movement/symptom:
While failure has occurred (an alarm has occurred), the target paper source cannot be used
because it is in no paper state.
Message displayed on the Control Panel:
Paper source needs to be checked. (Call service rep.)
Measures:
- Check the connector of the Pickup Unit.
- Check the paper surface detection of the Pickup Unit.
- Check the Pickup Roller of the Pickup Unit.
- Check the motor, gear and timing belt for driving the lifter in the receptacle.

04-1942 Upper limit detection alarm: High Capacity Cassette

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause:
C. Remedy Upper limit of the lifter was detected.
Detection condition/timing:
When detecting the upper limit three times
Movement/symptom:
While failure has occurred (an alarm has occurred), the target paper source cannot be used
because it is in no paper state.
Message displayed on the Control Panel:
Paper source needs to be checked. (Call service rep.)
Measures:
- Check for any foreign matter in the receptacle.
- Check the connector of the Pickup Unit.
- Check the Upper Limit Sensor of the Pickup Unit.
- Check the Pickup Roller of the Pickup Unit.

746
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

04-1976 Receptacle error detection alarm: High Capacity Cassette

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause:
C. Remedy Error in the sensor in the receptacle
Detection condition/timing:
- When paper stack was not detected three times within the specified period of time while shifting
a paper stack
- When Right Deck paper loading detection failed three times although paper stack shift detection
was turned ON within the specified period of time while shifting a paper stack
- When the Division Plate detection failed three times although the Division Plate Solenoid was
turned ON while shifting a paper stack
- When the Lifter HP detection failed three times within the specified period of time while the Lifter
was moving to the HP
Movement/symptom:
While failure has occurred (an alarm has occurred), the target paper source cannot be used
because it is in no paper state.
Message displayed on the Control Panel:
Paper source needs to be checked. (Call service rep.)
Measures:
- Check for any foreign matter in the receptacle.
- Check the connector and the cable connector of the receptacle.
- Check the motor, gear and timing belt for shifting paper stack in the receptacle.
- Check the Paper Stack Shift Sensor in the receptacle.
- Check the Division Plate Solenoid and the Division Plate Sensor in the receptacle.
- Check the Right Deck and the Lifter Sensor in the receptacle.
- Adjust the paper settings by referring to the Service Manual [High Capacity Cassette Pedestal >
Adjustment > Switching the Size between LTR and A4].
Method for clearing the alarm:
1. Perform a remedy for the failure.
2. Place paper in the Left Tray with no paper in the Right Tray, and close the receptacle.
The alarm is cleared when shifting of stack is performed normally.
3. Press the [Status Monitor/Cancel] key, and check that the status of the Cassette 3 is
"paper present".

09-0013 Drum memory detection alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: The memory of the Drum Unit could not be detected.
C. Remedy Measures:
1. Remove and then install the Drum Unit.
2. Check the contact point of the Drum Unit Memory (UN74).
3. Disconnect and then connect the connector (J1) of the Drum Unit New/Old Connector PCB.
4. Check the connector (J2060) between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and the Drum Unit New/Old
Connector PCB.
5. Disconnect and then connect the connector (J334) of the DC Controller PCB (UN2).
6. Replace the Drum Unit.
7. Replace the Drum Unit New/Old Connector PCB.

10-0001 Toner Low (Black) alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Low toner was detected and UGW generated an alarm.
C. Remedy * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW

10-0020 Toner cartridge prior delivery alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / An alarm for requesting a prior delivery is sent to UGW as the value of Toner level detect value has
C. Remedy reached the value set in COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-BK.

747
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

10-0094 Toner memory detection alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Memory of toner could not be detected.
C. Remedy Measures:
1. Remove and then install the Toner Bottle.
2. Check for any scar or soiling on the memory area of the Toner Bottle.
3. Check the connector (J160, J42, J124) between the Bottle ROM PCB (UN75) and the DC
Controller PCB (UN2).
4. Check for any soiling or damage on the Bottle ROM PCB (UN75).
5. Disconnect and then connect the connector (J333) of the DC Controller PCB (UN2).
6. Replace the Toner Bottle.

10-0100 Toner Bottle change notification alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Replacement of Toner Bottle was detected.
C. Remedy 10-0100-0071: New Toner Bottle replacement detection (Bk)
10-0100-0081: Toner Bottle premature removal detection (Bk)
10-0100-0181: Unidentified Toner Bottle detection (Bk)

10-0404 Toner Bottle empty alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / When the Toner Bottle empty was detected
C. Remedy

11-0001 Waste Toner Container full

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: A message "The waste toner container is full." is displayed on the Control Panel, and
C. Remedy the machine is stopped.
Cause: The Waste Toner Container becomes full.
Measures: Clean the Waste Toner Container.

11-0010 Waste toner container near full

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: Displayed a message by an operation panel (A continuation print is possible)
C. Remedy Cause: The capacity of the Waste Toner Container became near full.

13-0023 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause /
C. Remedy

13-0027 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause /
C. Remedy

13-002B For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause /
C. Remedy

13-0100 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause /
C. Remedy

13-0FFC For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause /
C. Remedy

13-0FFD For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause /
C. Remedy

13-0FFE For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause /
C. Remedy

13-0FFF For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause /
C. Remedy

748
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

14-0002 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause /
C. Remedy

31-0005 Environment Sensor reading alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: It becomes as follow: environment temperature= 0 degC, environment humidity= 0%.
C. Remedy Cause: Connection of the Environment Sensor cannot be detected.
Measures:
1) Check the connection of the Environment Sensor (THU1).
2) Replace the Environment Sensor (THU1).

31-0006 HDD failure when equipped with the mirroring function

A. Operation / B. Cause / HDD failure when equipped with the mirroring function
C. Remedy

31-0008 HDD failure prediction alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: HDD failure is expected to occur in a short time due to occurrence of physical error in
C. Remedy HDD. It does not occur in the HDD of mirroring configuration.
Cause: Error in the S.M.A.R.T. value of HDD
Measures:
1. Back up the data stored in HDD.
2. Replace the HDD.
3. Restore the data.
S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology): Self-diagnosis function built in
the HDD. The occurrence rate of reading error, reading and writing speed, the total number of Motor
start-up and stop times, the total length of power-on time, etc. are monitored.

31-0009 FLASH failure prediction alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Error in the S.M.A.R.T. value of FLASH memory It indicates a physical error of the FLASH
C. Remedy memory, which is expected to soon lead to a failure.
*: S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology) = It is a self-diagnosis function
built in the FLASH memory, and monitors the occurrence rate of reading errors, reading/writing
speed, total number of times of motor start-up/stop, total length of power-on time, etc.
Continuously using the machine without taking any measures may lead to E614.
Measures: Back up the data stored in the FLASH memory, and restore the data after replacing the
FLASH memory.

31-0106 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

31-0116 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

31-0126 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

31-0136 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

31-01F1 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

31-01F2 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

749
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

31-01F3 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

31-01F4 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

31-01F5 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

31-01F6 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

37-0001 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

37-0002 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

37-0003 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

37-0004 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

37-0005 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

37-0006 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

37-0007 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

37-1000 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

37-2000 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

38-0001 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

38-0002 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

750
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-0111 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Error message (E-code)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0210 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Not specified
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0211 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Frequently
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0212 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Occasionally
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0213 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_First time in the day
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0220 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Not specified
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0221 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Frequently
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0222 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Occasionally
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0223 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_First time in the day
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0230 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Not specified
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0231 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 1
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0232 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 2
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

751
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-0233 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 3
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0234 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 4
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0235 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Spare (Not selectable)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0240 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Not specified
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0241 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Envelope
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0242 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Postcard
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0243 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Plain paper
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0244 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Label paper
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0245 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Heavy paper
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0250 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Not specified
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0251 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Frequently
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0252 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Occasionally
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

752
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-0253 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_First time in the day
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0260 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Not specified
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0261 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Frequently
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0262 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Occasionally
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0263 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_First time in the day
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0290 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Others
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0310 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Color not specified
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0311 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Black
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0312 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Yellow
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0313 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Magenta
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0314 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Cyan
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0320 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Color not specified
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

753
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-0321 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Black
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0322 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Yellow
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0323 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Magenta
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0324 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Cyan
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0330 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Color not specified
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0331 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Black
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0332 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Yellow
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0333 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Magenta
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0334 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Cyan
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0340 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Color not specified
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0341 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Black
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0342 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Yellow
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

754
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-0343 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Magenta
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0344 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Cyan
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0350 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Color not specified
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0351 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Black
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0352 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Yellow
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0353 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Magenta
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0354 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Cyan
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0360 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Color not specified
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0361 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Black
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0362 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Yellow
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0363 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Magenta
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0364 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Cyan
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

755
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-0370 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Color not specified
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0371 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Black
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0372 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Yellow
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0373 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Magenta
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0374 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Cyan
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0380 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Color not specified
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0381 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Black
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0382 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Yellow
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0383 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Magenta
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0384 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Cyan
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0390 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Others
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0511 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Print
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

756
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-0520 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Not specified
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0521 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Transmission and reception
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0522 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Reception
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0523 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Transmission
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0524 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Forwarding
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0530 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Not specified
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0531 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Slow response
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0532 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Occasional freeze-up (Not work)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0541 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Scan (SEND)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0551 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Main
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0552 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Options
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0590 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Others
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

757
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-0611 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Training
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0612 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Addition
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0621 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Forwarding_Fax
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0622 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Forwarding_SEND
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0631 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Printer driver installation
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0641 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Address book
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0651 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Network
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0690 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Others
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0811 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Order_Toner_Black
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0812 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Order_Toner_Yellow
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0813 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Order_Toner_Magenta
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-0814 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Order_Toner_Cyan
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

758
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-0821 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Order_Waste Toner Container
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1111 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Error message (E-code)_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1210 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Not specified_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1211 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Frequently_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1212 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Occasionally_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1213 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_First time in the day_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1220 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Not specified_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1221 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Frequently_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1222 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Occasionally_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1223 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_First time in the day_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1230 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Not specified_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1231 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 1_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

759
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-1232 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 2_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1233 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 3_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1234 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 4_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1235 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Spare (Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1240 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Not specified_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1241 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Envelope_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1242 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Postcard_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1243 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Plain paper_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1244 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Label paper_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1245 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Heavy paper_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1250 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Not specified_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1251 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Frequently_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

760
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-1252 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Occasionally_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1253 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_First time in the day_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1260 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Not specified_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1261 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Frequently_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1262 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Occasionally_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1263 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_First time in the day_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1290 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Others_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1310 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Color not specified_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1311 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Black_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1312 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Yellow_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1313 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Magenta_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1314 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Cyan_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

761
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-1320 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Color not specified_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1321 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Black_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1322 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Yellow_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1323 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Magenta_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1324 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Cyan_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1330 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Color not specified_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1331 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Black_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1332 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Yellow_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1333 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Magenta_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1334 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Cyan_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1340 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Color not specified_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1341 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Black_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

762
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-1342 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Yellow_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1343 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Magenta_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1344 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Cyan_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1350 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Color not specified_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1351 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Black_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1352 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Yellow_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1353 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Magenta_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1354 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Cyan_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1360 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Color not specified_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1361 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Black_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1362 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Yellow_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1363 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Magenta_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

763
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-1364 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Cyan_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1370 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Color not specified_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1371 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Black_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1372 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Yellow_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1373 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Magenta_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1374 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Cyan_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1380 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Color not specified_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1381 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Black_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1382 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Yellow_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1383 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Magenta_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1384 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Cyan_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1390 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Others_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

764
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-1511 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Print_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1520 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Not specified_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1521 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Transmission and reception_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1522 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Reception_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1523 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Transmission_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1524 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Forwarding_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1530 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Not specified_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1531 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Slow response_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1532 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Occasional freeze-up (Not work)_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1541 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Scan (SEND)_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1551 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Main_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1552 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Options_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

765
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-1590 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Others_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1611 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Training_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1612 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Addition_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1621 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Forwarding_Fax_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1622 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Forwarding_SEND_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1631 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Printer driver installation_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1641 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Address book_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1651 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Network_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1690 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Others_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1811 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Order_Toner_Black_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1812 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Order_Toner_Yellow_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1813 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Order_Toner_Magenta_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

766
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-1814 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Order_Toner_Cyan_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-1821 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Order_Waste Toner Container_(Cancel)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-19EE Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Test signal
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-19FF Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Remedy completed
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2111 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Error message (E-code)_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2210 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Not specified_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2211 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Frequently_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2212 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Occasionally_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2213 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_First time in the day_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2220 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Not specified_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2221 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Frequently_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2222 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Occasionally_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

767
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-2223 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_First time in the day_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2230 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Not specified_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2231 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 1_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2232 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 2_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2233 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 3_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2234 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 4_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2240 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Not specified_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2241 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Envelope_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2242 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Postcard_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2243 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Plain paper_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2244 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Label paper_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2245 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Heavy paper_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

768
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-2250 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Not specified_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2251 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Frequently_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2252 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Occasionally_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2253 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_First time in the day_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2260 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Not specified_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2261 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Frequently_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2262 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Occasionally_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2263 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_First time in the day_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2290 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Paper jam_Others_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2310 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Color not specified_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2311 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Black_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2312 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Yellow_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

769
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-2313 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Magenta_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2314 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Cyan_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2320 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Color not specified_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2321 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Black_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2322 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Yellow_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2323 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Magenta_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2324 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Cyan_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2330 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Color not specified_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2331 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Black_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2332 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Yellow_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2333 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Magenta_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2334 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Cyan_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

770
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-2340 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Color not specified_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2341 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Black_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2342 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Yellow_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2343 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Magenta_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2344 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Cyan_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2350 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Color not specified_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2351 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Black_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2352 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Yellow_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2353 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Magenta_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2354 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Cyan_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2360 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Color not specified_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2361 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Black_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

771
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-2362 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Yellow_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2363 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Magenta_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2364 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Cyan_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2370 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Color not specified_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2371 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Black_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2372 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Yellow_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2373 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Magenta_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2374 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Cyan_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2380 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Color not specified_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2381 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Black_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2382 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Yellow_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2383 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Magenta_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

772
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-2384 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Cyan_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2390 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Image failure_Others_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2511 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Print_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2520 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Not specified_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2521 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Transmission and reception_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2522 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Reception_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2523 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Transmission_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2524 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Forwarding_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2530 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Not specified_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2531 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Slow response_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2532 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Occasional freeze-up (Not work)_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2541 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Scan (SEND)_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

773
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-2551 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Main_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2552 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Options_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2590 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Operation failure_Others_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2611 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Training_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2612 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Addition_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2621 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Forwarding_Fax_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2622 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Forwarding_SEND_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2631 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Printer driver installation_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2641 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Address book_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2651 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Network_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2690 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Settings_Others_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2811 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Order_Toner_Black_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

774
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

39-2812 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Order_Toner_Yellow_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2813 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Order_Toner_Magenta_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2814 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Order_Toner_Cyan_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

39-2821 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Order_Waste Toner Container_(Customer information change)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

43-0073 Drum Unit replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / The replacement of the Drum Unit was detected.
C. Remedy

50-0010 Successive occurrence of separation alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Condition unable to separate 1st sheet of original from the ADF occurs 3 times in a row. Check
C. Remedy rotation of the Pickup Motor -> Check the life of the Pickup Roller -> Check if paper lint is at the
pickup slot.

50-0014 Insufficient Scanner Unit (Paper Back) LED light intensity alarm (Some of the LEDs are OFF.
Scanning can be continued.)
A. Operation / B. Cause / In the case that the light intensity is insufficient at LED lighting.
C. Remedy

50-0015 Failure of the ADF Double Feed Sensor

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause:
C. Remedy Failure of the Double Feed Sensor installed in the ADF
Detection condition/timing:
- When a paper feed error of the Double Feed Sensor was detected at power-on
- When an error of the output value of the Double Feed Sensor was detected during ADF job (While
an ADF job is being executed, it is handled as a jam once and retry is performed.)
Clearing condition:
When communication and the sensor output value are normal at power-on
Movement/symptom:
"Check area where multi. sheet feed was detected. (Call serv. rep.)" is displayed in the status line.
Although reading from the ADF is possible, double feed cannot be detected when it occurs.
Message displayed on the Control Panel:
Check area where multi. sheet feed was detected. (Call serv. rep.)
Measures:
Check for any foreign matter, clean paper lint, disconnect and then connect the connectors, replace
the Double Feed Detection PCB, replace the RCON/DF Driver PCB, replace the harnesses

60-0001 Shift Tray alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: Shift Tray operation is stopped.
C. Remedy Cause: Home position at startup of the host machine cannot be detected.
Measure: Check connector disconnection of the HP Sensor (Front) (PS101) and the HP Sensor
(Rear) (PS102) -> Replace the HP Sensor (Front) (PS101) and the HP Sensor (Rear) (PS102).

775
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

61-0002 Finisher Staple Free Stapling alarm: Fin-J1/Y1

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: The staple free staple unit is broken.
C. Remedy Operation : Operation stops as jam. After jam processing, the paper is delivered without stapling
until a job is finished.
Recovery method : Replace the Staple free staple unit. After performing the remedy work, go
through the following to clear the alarm: SORTER> FUNCTION> EMSG-CLR.

70-0086 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause /
C. Remedy

70-0087 Firmware combination mismatch

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: An option with the firmware which version is newer than that of the firmware installed in
C. Remedy the host machine was detected. It is an alarm when the automatic update cancellation message is
displayed on the Control Panel.
Detection condition:
When the following two conditions are satisfied:
1. "1" is set in COPIER>Option>FNC-SW>VER-CHNG.
2. The version of the firmware installed in the option that has been installed to the host machine is
newer than that of the firmware in the host machine.
Timing: At startup
Movement/symptom: Cancel the automatic update.
Measures: Update the firmware of the host machine.

73-0006 LIPS
A. Operation / B. Cause / Error in configuration acquisition/management
C. Remedy

73-0007 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

73-0008 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

73-0009 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

73-0011 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

73-0014 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

73-0015 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

73-0017 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

73-0021 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

776
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

73-0024 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

73-0026 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

75-0001 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

75-0002 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

76-0001 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

76-0002 Font
A. Operation / B. Cause / Fails to secure the work area to analyze the font that is downloaded at "Resource Download".
C. Remedy

76-0003 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

76-0004 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

76-0005 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

76-0006 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

76-0007 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

76-0008 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

78-0003 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

78-0005 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

79-0001 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

79-0002 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

777
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

79-0003 Canon-made PCL

A. Operation / B. Cause / Overflow of work memory for translator
C. Remedy

79-0004 Canon-made PCL

A. Operation / B. Cause / Download overflow
C. Remedy

80-0001 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

80-0003 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

80-0004 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

80-0007 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

80-0008 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

80-0009 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

80-0010 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

80-0011 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

80-0012 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

80-0013 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

80-0015 BDL
A. Operation / B. Cause / Print data cannot process this version.
C. Remedy

80-0016 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

80-0019 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

81-0001 Imaging
A. Operation / B. Cause / Fails to allocate the memory.
C. Remedy

778
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

81-0002 Imaging
A. Operation / B. Cause / Rendering error
C. Remedy

81-0003 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

81-0004 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

81-0005 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

81-0006 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

83-0005 PDF
A. Operation / B. Cause / PDF memory full
C. Remedy

83-0015 PDF
A. Operation / B. Cause / PDF data decoding error
C. Remedy

83-0016 PDF
A. Operation / B. Cause / Page range error
C. Remedy

83-0017 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

84-0001 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

84-0002 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

84-0003 XPS print range error

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

84-0004 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

84-0005 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

84-0006 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

84-0007 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

779
 7. Error/Jam/Alarm

84-0008 XPS non-support image error

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

84-0009 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy

85-001A For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause /
C. Remedy

85-002A For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause /
C. Remedy

780
8 Service Mode
Overview........................................... 782
COPIER (Service mode for printer)...798
FEEDER (ADF service mode).........1054
SORTER (Service mode for delivery
options)........................................1061
BOARD (Option board setting mode)
.....................................................1083
 8. Service Mode

Overview
It is possible to see each item of service mode so that those who access to service mode can understand how to use them.
The main types of this machine's service mode are shown below.

Basic Operations
This section describes the basic operation of service mode.

■ Entering Service Mode

For information on how to enter service mode, contact the Support Dept. of the sales company.

■ Service Mode Menu

Press the button in the service mode menu to display the initial screen of each mode.
The differences between these modes are described below.

Top Screen

MODELIST
In this mode, functions for referring to each item in service mode, etc. are available.

Updater
This button is used to access the CDS and UGW servers and update system software.

BACKUP
This button is used to back up the service mode setting values.

RESTORE
This button is used to restore the service mode setting values backed up by [BACKUP].

SITUATION
This function displays service mode items according to the situation.

LUI MASK
This button is used to display a mask screen to prevent operations from being performed from the Control Panel while the
service mode is being accessed from a remote PC.

NOTE:
For the detailed information on how to use Updater, BACKUP, and RESTORE, refer to the imageRUNNER ADVANCE System
Service Manual.

■ Description of Service Mode Items

The description of the initial screen, the main items, the intermediate items and the sub items can be displayed.
After selecting any item of the initial screen, main item, the intermediate item or the sub item, pressing “i” (Information Button)
displays the description of the selected item (hereinafter referred to as the service mode contents).

782
 8. Service Mode

CAUTION:
• Displayed language of the service mode contents can be selected from J/E/F/I/G/S/C/K/T.
• The service mode contents can be upgraded using SST or a USB flash drive just like other system software.

Example: COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION screen

1. Press the [i] button.

2. The title of each sub item is displayed.

To check the details of each item, select the relevant item and press the [i] button.

3. A detailed description of the sub item (specifications and use methods, setting screen, etc.) is displayed.

■ Switching the Screen Display (Level 1 <->2)

Switching of screens between Level 1 and Level 2 becomes easier.

783
 8. Service Mode

By pressing <LEVEL 1> at the upper right of the screen while Level 1 screen is displayed, the screen is switched to Level 2 screen.

Examples of Screen Display

NOTE:
This key combination can be used to enter the Level 2 screen.
• Mode List screen > [Settings/Registration] > [2]

784
 8. Service Mode

SITUATION Mode
Situation mode has been implemented in this machine to improve workability and searchability at the site. This mode makes it
possible to easily use the service mode appropriate for the scene at the site.

The following items are available in situation mode.

• Install:
To be referred at installation of the machine.
• Troubleshooting:
To be referred at problem solving.
• Parts Replacement:
To be referred at parts replacement.
• Major Adjustment:
To be referred at installation of the machine.
• Sensor Check:
To be referred at checking of the sensor.
• Part Check:
To be referred at operation check of the part.
The following three points are made available depending on each situation:
• Display of related service mode that requires adjustment
• Display of causes and remedies
• Display of related images

■ How to Use Sensor Check

You can find a desired electrical component in Sensor Check of situation mode to review its I/O info. To do this, follow the
procedure below.

1. Start service mode.

785
 8. Service Mode

2. Select "SITUATION".

3. On the "SITUATION MODE" screen, select "Sensor Check".

4. Press a button according to the type of electrical component and the corresponding device type.
Example: In the case of the Registration Sensor of the host machine, press the button (red dotted frame) at "COPIER"/"P-
SENSOR".

Device classification

Electrical parts
classification

786
 8. Service Mode

5. A list of electrical component types for the selected device is displayed.

6. Select an electrical component to display the details in the frame (red dotted frame) at the bottom of the screen.

7. Press the [i] button to display the screen showing the locations of electrical components.

■ How to Use Parts Check

In the Parts Check of situation mode, among electrical components used (motors, fans, solenoids, and clutches), those that can
operate alone can be operated from the screen and the operations can be checked. The operation procedure is shown below.

787
 8. Service Mode

NOTE:
The service mode used below utilizes the system where electrical components used are operated by control signals sent from the
DC Controller. If a control signal is sent but the electrical component does not operate, a failure of the electrical component, open
circuit of the cable for transmitting control signals, or poor contact of the connector is suspected.

1. Select SERVICE MODE > SITUATION > Parts Check.

2. Press a button according to the type of electrical component and the corresponding device type.
Example: In the case of a motor of the host machine, press the button (red dotted frame) at "COPIER"/"MOTOR".

Device classification

Electrical parts
classification

3. A list of electrical component types for the selected device whose operation can be checked is displayed.

4. Select the electrical component you want to operate and then press the Start button to send a signal for driving the
selected electrical component for a specified period of time from the DC Controller.

788
 8. Service Mode

5. "ACTIVE" is displayed while the electrical component is driven. After the electrical component has been driven for
a specified period of time, "OK!" is displayed if transmission of the drive signal succeeded, or "NG !" is displayed
if failed.

789
 8. Service Mode

Press the [i] button to display the screen showing the locations of electrical components.

6. The screen showing the locations of electrical components is displayed.

Security Support
A password can be specified to prevent unauthorized access to the service mode.

Related Service Mode:

Setting password type when the screen is switched to the service mode
• COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW (Level 1)

The password for service engineer when the screen is switched to the service mode
• (Level 2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD

790
 8. Service Mode

■ Procedure for Setting Password

1. Set "1" or "2" in the following service mode.
• COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW
<Setting range>
0: No password [Default]
1: Service technician
2: System administrator + Service technician

CAUTION:
• This setting is enabled without restarting the host machine.
• After setting the password, the following screen will be displayed by accessing service mode.
• Therefore, when the PSWD-SW is set to "2" (system administrator + service technician), enter the system administrator
password ([System Manager ID] and [System Manager PIN] in [Settings/Registrations] > [Management Settings] >
[User Management] > [System Manager Information Settings]), and then press the [OK] button.

2. Follow the following procedure to check that you can login to service mode.
1. When setting PSWD-SW to "1" (system administrator) or "2" (ServiceMode_070Backup) in step 1, the system
administrator password entry screen will be displayed, so enter the system administrator ID in [Sys Manager ID ] (1) and
system administrator password in [Password] (2), and then press the [OK] button.

(1)
(2)

2. When setting PSWD-SW to "2" (system administrator + service technician) in step 1, the service technician password
entry screen will be displayed after step 2. Enter the service technician password in [Password] (1), and then press the
[OK] button.

(1)

CAUTION:
• The service technician password is the password set in COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD.
• If you forget the password for service technician, disable the password function using the Service Support Tool (SST).

Check that you can access service mode and finish the work.

791
 8. Service Mode

■ Function to Mask the Screen during Remote Access

This function ensures security during servicing work using remote connection.
The machine has an option called Remote Operation Viewer for remote control via a network. This option enables a service
technician to perform maintenance on the machine from a remote location.
However, the same screen is displayed on the Remote Operation Viewer screen and the Control Panel during the work, which
carries the following risks.
• The screen being operated can be seen by the user.
• During remote operation, the user may perform an operation on the Control Panel and an unexpected processing may
be executed.

To solve these security problems, a function has been added to display a message on the Control Panel screen when the machine
is being operated remotely using Remote Operation Viewer in order to prevent the user from performing unexpected operations.
As shown in the figure below, the mask screen is displayed when this function is enabled.

Canon Remote Operation Viewer screen Operation Panel

The mask screen is

displayed on
the Control Panel
screen when this
function is enabled.

Examples of Screen Display

Functional Specification
The specifications of this function are shown below.

792
 8. Service Mode

• When this function is enabled, a mask screen is displayed on the Control Panel. When the function is disabled, the original
screen is displayed again.

Example of the displayed mask screen

• This function is disabled when the following operations are performed.
• Press [LUI MASK] on the service mode top screen.
• Exit Remote Operation Viewer.
• The remote access is disconnected due to a network failure, etc.
• The machine is shut down (power down) or restarted.
• If this function is disabled while the service mode is being operated, the service mode is forcibly exited, and the previous
screen is displayed. (However, the service mode is not forcibly terminated if the Updater screen has been accessed from
service mode.)
• When this function is enabled, all operations (operations from the Touch Panel or hardware keys) other than screen brightness
adjustment and operation on the Energy Saver key are disabled.

● Procedure for Enabling This Function

The procedure for enabling this function is shown below.

1. Use the Remote Operation Viewer to access the machine, and start service mode.

2. Press [LUI MASK], and check that the button is enabled (has turned light blue).

● Procedure for Disabling This Function

The procedure for disabling this function is shown below.

1. Perform one of the following operations.

• Access the service mode, press [LUI MASK], and check that the button is disabled (has turned gray).

• Exit the Remote Operation Viewer.

• Disconnect the network (disconnect the network cable, disable the network function, etc.).
• Shut down or restart the machine.

793
 8. Service Mode

Service Mode Backup

Adjustment is made to every machine at the time of shipment to write the adjustment value in the service label.
When replacing the DC Controller PCB or clearing RAM, the adjusted values of ADJUST and OPTION return to the default;
therefore, be sure to adjust the value in the field, and in the case of changing the service mode value, be sure to write down the
changed value in the service label. When the corresponding item is not found on the service label, write the value in blank field.

Place of service label

Output of Service Print Data

• The service print data such as P-PRINT can be output as a file.
• By executing the following service mode, data at the time can be saved in the Storage
Service Mode Level 1 > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE
• The saved data will be deleted from the Storage when it is exported to SST or a USB flash drive.
• When multiple service data such as P-PRINT and HIST-PRINT is saved in the host machine, it is collectively exported to SST
or a USB flash drive.

NOTE:
• Service print data cannot be output when an error has occurred.
• When connecting a USB flash drive that runs on external power, start the machine with the power is turned ON in advance.
A USB flash drive connected after the machine has been started cannot be recognized.

How to obtain the report data Location

“Moving the file in service mode” on page 795 USB flash drive
“Moving the file in download mode” on page 796 USB flash drive
“How to Export Service Print File to a PC Using SST ” on page 797 PC

■ Service Print and Data File Name Supported for File Output
Service Mode Content
COPIER > Function> MISC-P > P-PRINT Output of service mode setting values
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > HIST-PRT Output of jam and error history
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > USER-PRT Output of Settings/Registration menu setting values list
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > D-PRINT Output of service mode (DISPLAY)
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > ENV-PRT Output of the temperature and humidity inside the machine/surface temperature
of the Fixing Roller as a log
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > PJH-P-1 Output of details on print job history (100 jobs)
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > PJH-P-2 Output of details on print job history (all jobs)

794
 8. Service Mode

Service Mode Content

COPIER > Function > MISC-P > USBH-PRT Output of USB device information report
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > TNRB-RPT Output of the Toner Container ID report

NOTE:
When each service mode is individually executed, the report corresponding to the service mode as of the time of execution is output.

■ Moving the file in service mode

Preparation
The following item needs to be prepared to export the service print file to a USB flash drive.
• USB flash drive (FAT32 format file system that is not locked with a password. To display the USB menu, the said model's
firmware must already be registered.)

Overall flow
1. Selecting RPT-FILE
Select service mode > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE; and then press OK.
2. Generating report file
After the “ACTIVE” blinks for 3 to 4 minutes, generation of a report file is complete as “OK!” is displayed.

3-+3
86%+357
537),/( 2.
53786%

3. Connect the USB flash drive storage device to the USB port.
4. Select service mode > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT2USB; and then press OK.

3-+3
86%+357
537),/(
53786%

NOTE:
• If the downloaded file is opened as plain text, the paragraphs are misaligned, which makes it difficult to read the data.
• When the file is dragged to WordPad, an image similar to the image output on paper may be displayed in some cases.

795
 8. Service Mode

■ Moving the file in download mode

Preparation
The following item needs to be prepared to export the service print file to a USB flash drive.
• USB flash drive (FAT32 format file system that is not locked with a password. To display the USB menu, the said model's
firmware must already be registered.)

Overall flow
1. Selecting RPT-FILE
Select service mode > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE; and then press OK.
2. Generating report file
After the “ACTIVE” blinks for 3 to 4 minutes, generation of a report file is complete as “OK!” is displayed.

3-+3
86%+357
537),/( 2.
53786%

3. Execute Download mode > [8]: Download File > [4]: ServicePrint Download.

>>>>>>>'RZQORDG)LOH0HQX 86% @@@@@@@


>@68%/2*'RZQORDG
>@6HUYLFH3ULQW'RZQORDG
>&@5HWXUQWR0DLQ0HQX

>5HVHW@6WDUWVKXWGRZQVHTXHQFH

>@KDVEHHQVHOHFWHG([HFXWH"
 2.  &$1&(/ $Q\RWKHUNH\V

796
 8. Service Mode

■ How to Export Service Print File to a PC Using SST

For instructions, refer to the following chapters of the "SST_Operation Manual".
• 8.Get log

797
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer)

DISPLAY (State display mode)

■ VERSION
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
DC-CON 1 Display of DCON firmware version
Detail To display the firmware version of DC Controller PCB.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

R-CON 1 Display of RCON firmware version

Detail To display the firmware version of Reader Controller PCB.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

PANEL 1 Dspl of Control Panel CPU PCB ROM ver

Detail To display the ROM version of Control Panel CPU PCB.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

SORTER 1 Dspl of FIN-CONT (Main) firmware version

Detail To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB (Main).
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99

NIB 1 Display of network software version

Detail To display the version of the network software.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99

SDL-STCH 1 Dspl of Saddle Sttch Ctrollr PCB ROM ver

Detail To display the ROM version of the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99

MN-CONT 1 Display of MNCON firmware version

Detail To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

798
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
PUNCH 1 Display of Finisher Inner Punch Unit
Detail To display the version of Finisher Inner Puncher Unit.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99

LANG-FR 1 Display of French language file version

Detail To display the version of French language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-DE 1 Display of German language file version

Detail To display the version of German language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-IT 1 Display of Italian language file version

Detail To display the version of Italian language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-CS 2 Display of Czech language file version

Detail To display the version of Czech language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-DA 2 Display of Danish language file version

Detail To display the version of Danish language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-EL 2 Display of Greek language file version

Detail To display the version of Greek language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-ES 1 Display of Spanish language file version

Detail To display the version of Spanish language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-ET 2 Display of Estonian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Estonian language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

799
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
LANG-FI 2 Display of Finnish language file version
Detail To display the version of Finnish language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-HU 2 Display of Hungarian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-KO 2 Display of Korean language file version

Detail To display the version of Korean language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-NL 2 Display of Dutch language file version

Detail To display the version of Dutch language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-NO 2 Display of Norwegian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-PL 2 Display of Polish language file version

Detail To display the version of Polish language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-PT 2 Display of Portuguese language file ver

Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-RU 2 Display of Russian language file version

Detail To display the version of Russian language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-SL 2 Display of Slovenian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

800
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
LANG-SV 2 Display of Swedish language file version
Detail To display the version of Swedish language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-TW 2 Dspl of Chinese language file ver: trad

Detail To display the version of Chinese language file (traditional).
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-ZH 2 Dspl of Chinese language file ver: smpl

Detail To display the version of Chinese language file (simplified).
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-BU 2 Display of Bulgarian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-CR 2 Display of Croatian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Croatian language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-RM 2 Display of Romanian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Romanian language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-SK 2 Display of Slovak language file version

Detail To display the version of Slovak language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-TK 2 Display of Turkish language file version

Detail To display the version of Turkish language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-CA 2 Display of Catalan language file version

Detail To display the version of Catalan language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

801
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
MEDIA-JA 2 Dspl of Japanese media information ver
Detail To display the version of Japanese media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-EN 2 Dspl of English media information ver

Detail To display the version of English media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-DE 2 Dspl of German media information version

Detail To display the version of German media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-IT 2 Dspl of Italian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Italian media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-FR 2 Dspl of French media information version

Detail To display the version of French media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-ZH 2 Dspl of Chinese media info ver: smpl

Detail To display the version of Chinese media information (simplified).
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-SK 2 Dspl of Slovak media information version

Detail To display the version of Slovak media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-TK 2 Dspl of Turkish media information ver

Detail To display the version of Turkish media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-CS 2 Dspl of Czech media information version

Detail To display the version of Czech media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

802
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
MEDIA-EL 2 Dspl of Greek media information version
Detail To display the version of Greek media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-ES 2 Dspl of Spanish media information ver

Detail To display the version of Spanish media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-ET 2 Dspl of Estonian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Estonian media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-FI 2 Dspl of Finnish media information ver

Detail To display the version of Finnish media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-HU 2 Dspl of Hungarian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Hungarian media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-KO 2 Dspl of Korean media information version

Detail To display the version of Korean media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-NL 2 Dspl of Dutch media information version

Detail To display the version of Dutch media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-NO 2 Dspl of Norwegian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Norwegian media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-PL 2 Dspl of Polish media information version

Detail To display the version of Polish media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

803
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
MEDIA-PT 2 Dspl of Portuguese media information ver
Detail To display the version of Portuguese media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-RU 2 Dspl of Russian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Russian media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-SL 2 Dspl of Slovenian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Slovenian media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-SV 2 Dspl of Swedish media information ver

Detail To display the version of Swedish media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-TW 2 Dspl of Chinese media info version:trad

Detail To display the version of Chinese media information (traditional).
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-BU 2 Dspl of Bulgarian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Bulgarian media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-CR 2 Dspl of Croatian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Croatian media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-RM 2 Dspl of Romanian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Romanian media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

MEDIA-CA 2 Dspl of Catalan media information ver

Detail To display the version of Catalan media information.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

804
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
FAX1 1 Display of 1-line FAX PCB ROM version
Detail To display the ROM version of 1-line FAX PCB.
Nothing is displayed if the PCB is not connected.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range ASCII character string (21 digits)

FAX2/3/4 1 Dspl of 2/3/4-line FAX PCB ROM version

Detail To display the ROM version of 2/3/4-line FAX PCB.
Nothing is displayed if the PCB is not connected.
Use Case When checking the version
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range ASCII character string (21 digits)

IOCS 1 Display of IOCS version

Detail To display the IOCS version.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

S-LNG-JP 1 Dspl of service mode Japanese file ver

Detail To display the version of Japanese language file in service mode.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

S-LNG-EN 1 Dspl of service mode English file ver

Detail To display the version of English language file in service mode.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

S-LNG-FR 1 Dspl of service mode French file version

Detail To display the version of French language file in service mode.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

S-LNG-IT 1 Dspl of service mode Italian file ver

Detail To display the version of Italian language file in service mode.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

S-LNG-GR 1 Dspl of service mode German file version

Detail To display the version of German language file in service mode.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

805
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
S-LNG-SP 1 Dspl of service mode Spanish file ver
Detail To display the version of Spanish language file in service mode.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

TSP-JLK 1 Dspl Image Data Analyzer Board version

Detail To display the version of Image Data Analyzer Board.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

BCT 1 Display of self diagnosis tool version

Detail To display the version of self diagnosis tool.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-TH 2 Display of Thai language file version

Detail To display the version of Thai language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-VN 2 Display of Vietnamese language file ver

Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-AR 2 Dspl of Arabic language file ver

Detail To display the version of Arabic language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-MS 2 Dspl of Malay language file ver

Detail To display the version of Malay language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-HI 2 Dspl of Hindi language file ver

Detail To display the version of Hindi language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-EU 2 Dspl of Euskera language file ver

Detail To display the version of Euskera language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

806
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
RPTL-CS 2 Dspl RUI Portal Czech file version
Detail To display the version of Czech language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-DA 2 Dspl RUI Portal Danish file version

Detail To display the version of Danish language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-EL 2 Dspl RUI Portal Greek file version

Detail To display the version of Greek language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-ET 2 Dspl RUI Portal Estonian file version

Detail To display the version of Estonian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-FI 2 Dspl RUI Portal Finnish file version

Detail To display the version of Finnish language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-HU 2 Dspl RUI Portal Hungarian file version

Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-NL 2 Dspl RUI Portal Dutch file version

Detail To display the version of Dutch language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-NO 2 Dspl RUI Portal Norwegian file version

Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-PL 2 Dspl RUI Portal Polish file version

Detail To display the version of Polish language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

807
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
RPTL-PT 2 Dspl RUI Portal Portuguese file version
Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-RU 2 Dspl RUI Portal Russian file version

Detail To display the version of Russian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-SL 2 Dspl RUI Portal Slovenian file version

Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-SV 2 Dspl RUI Portal Swedish file version

Detail To display the version of Swedish language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-ID 2 Dspl RUI Portal Indonesian file version

Detail To display the version of Indonesian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-BU 2 Dspl RUI Portal Bulgarian file version

Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-CR 2 Dspl RUI Portal Croatian file version

Detail To display the version of Croatian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-RM 2 Dspl RUI Portal Romanian file version

Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-SK 2 Dspl RUI Portal Slovak file version

Detail To display the version of Slovak language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

808
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
RPTL-TK 2 Dspl RUI Portal Turkish file version
Detail To display the version of Turkish language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-CA 2 Dspl RUI Portal Catalan file version

Detail To display the version of Catalan language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-TH 2 Dspl RUI Portal Thai file version

Detail To display the version of Thai language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

RPTL-VN 2 Dspl RUI Portal Vietnamese file version

Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

BF-PASS 1 Display of BF-CONT firmware version

Detail To display the firmware version of Buffer Pass Unit Controller PCB.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99

SORT-SLV 1 Dspl of FIN-CONT (Sub) firmware version

Detail To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB (Sub).
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99

CONT-PF 1 Display of Controller firmware version

Detail To display the platform version of the controller.
Use Case When checking the platform version at upgrade/problem occurrence
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

LANG-HE 2 Display of Hebrew language file version

Detail To display the version of Hebrew language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-LT 2 Dspl of Lithuanian language file version

Detail To display the version of Lithuanian language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

809
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
LANG-LV 2 Display of Latvian language file version
Detail To display the version of Latvian language file.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 - 99.99

LANG-UK 2 Dspl of Ukrainian language file ver

Detail To display the Ukrainian language file version
Use Case When the firmware is upgraded
Adj/Set/Operate Method None (display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

LANG-MI 2 Dspl of Maori language file ver

Detail To display the Maori language file version
Use Case When the firmware is upgraded
Adj/Set/Operate Method None (display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 - 99.99

TPM 1 TPM Version Display

Detail View Version for the installed TPM hardware
Use Case When Checking TPM Version
Display/Adj/Set Range Displayed values:
01.02, 02.00
Display values include:
01.02: TPM1.2
02.00: TPM2.0
Default Value 0

■ USER
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > USER
SPDTYPE 1 Display of engine speed type
Detail To display the engine speed type of this machine.
Use Case When checking the engine speed type
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)

ADFTYPE 1 Display of DADF type

Detail To display the type of the DADF currently installed.
Use Case When replacing the DADF
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Reverse type, 1: 1-path type, 2: Not installed (Copyboard model)
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM> SCANTYPE

RCON-PCB 1 Dspl of the Reader Controller PCB type

Detail To display the type of the Reader Controller PCB currently installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Reverse type, 1: 1-path type, 2: Selectable type
Default Value According to the setting at shipment
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM> SCANTYPE

810
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > USER
DL-RCON 1 Display of RCON type
Detail To display the type of RCON which is a system software.
The RCON type differs depending on the types of the Reader Controller PCB and DADF.
When downloading the RCON due to E490 (error due to different model), check the value of
this item.
Use Case When E490 (error due to different model) occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: For reverse type, 1: For 1-path type
Supplement/Memo When downloading the firmware as a set, the RCON type is automatically judged according to the
value of this item.

SER-NAME 1 Dspl firmware registration series name

Detail Display firmware registration series name
Use Case To check the folder name for firmware registration in USB flash drive
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)

RENT-SW 2 ON/OFF disp of rental support function

Detail The ON/OFF status of the rental support function is displayed in the service mode.
The rental information is stored in the backup area of the counter and only appears in the
MEAP app.
If this MEAP application is uninstalled in the print stop state, the cause of the print stop will not be
known, so the ON/OFF state of the rental support function can be checked in this service mode.
Use Case Check whether the rental support function is on or off.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Display Only
Caution If you want to set the value, you need to install the rental MEAP app.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0

■ ACC-STS
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ACC-STS
FEEDER 1 Display of DADF connection state
Detail To display the connecting state of DADF.
Use Case When checking the connection between the machine and DADF
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not connected, 1: Connected

SORTER 1 Connect state of Finisher-related option

Detail To display the connection state of Finisher-related options.
Use Case When checking the connection of Finisher-related options
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range Left column (connection state of Finisher-related options): 1 to 5
1: Without Saddle
2: With Saddle
3 to 5: Not used
Right column (connection state of Finisher-belonged Puncher): 0 to 4
0: No hole, 1: 2-hole, 2/4-hole switching, 2: 3-hole, 2/3-hole, 2/3-hole switching, 3: 4-hole, 4:
4-hole (SW)

811
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ACC-STS
DECK 1 Display of Paper Deck connection state
Detail To display the connecting state of the Paper Deck.
Use Case When checking the connection between the machine and the Paper Decks
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 5
0: Not connected, 1: Connected, 2 to 4: Not used, 5: Multi-purpose Tray only

CARD 1 Dspl of connection state of Card Reader

Detail To display the connecting state of Card Reader.
Use Case When checking the connection between the machine and the Card Reader
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: No card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected. (Copy is not available.)
1: Card Reader is not connected, or card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected. (Copy
is available.)

RAM 1 Display of MNCON PCB memory capacity

Detail To display the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB.
Use Case When checking the memory capacity of the machine
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Unit MB
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

COINROBO 1 Dspl of Coin Manager connection state

Detail To display the connecting state of the Coin Manager.
Use Case When checking the connection between the machine and the Coin Manager
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not connected, 1: Connected

NETWARE 1 Install state dspl of NetWare firmware

Detail To display the installation state of the NetWare firmware.
Use Case When checking whether NetWare firmware is installed to the machine
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not installed, 1: Installed

HDD 1 Display of HDD model name

Detail To display the model name of HDD.
Use Case When checking the model name of HDD used on the machine
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)

IA-RAM 1 Display of MNCON PCB memory capacity

Detail To display the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB.
Use Case When checking the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Unit MB
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

812
 8. Service Mode

■ ANALOG
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ANALOG
TEMP 1 Display of inside temperature
Detail To display the temperature inside the machine detected by Environment Sensor.
Use Case When checking the temperature inside the machine
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 60
Unit deg C
Appropriate Target Value 20 to 27
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

HUM 1 Display of inside humidity

Detail To display the humidity inside the machine detected by Environment Sensor.
Use Case When checking the humidity inside the machine
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Unit %
Appropriate Target Value 30 to 70
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

ABS-HUM 1 Display of inside moisture content

Detail To display the absolute moisture content inside the machine detected by Environment Sensor.
Use Case When checking the moisture content inside the machine
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Unit g
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 22
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

FIX-C 1 Display of Fixing Roller center temp

Detail To display the center temperature of the Fixing Roller detected by the Fixing Main Thermistor.
Use Case When checking the temperature at the center of Fixing Roller
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
Unit deg C
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

FIX-E 1 Display of Fixing Roller edge temp

Detail To display the edge temperature of the Fixing Roller detected by the Fixing Sub Thermistor 1.
Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 is located in the rear nip inlet side of Fixing Roller.
Use Case When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Roller
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
Unit deg C
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

813
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ANALOG
FIX-UE2 1 Display of Fixing Roller edge temp 2
Detail To display the edge temperature of the Fixing Roller detected by the Fixing Sub Thermistor 2.
Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 is located in the rear nip outlet side of Fixing Roller.
Use Case When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Roller
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
Unit deg C
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

■ CST-STS
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CST-STS
WIDTH-MF 2 Display of MP Tray paper width size
Detail To display the paper width size set on the Multi-purpose Tray.
Use Case When checking the paper width side set on the Multi-purpose Tray
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Unit mm
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DK1-HADV 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

■ HV-STS
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > HV-STS
PRIMARY 1 Display of primary charging current
Detail To display the current that is applied to the Primacy Charging Assembly at the latest.
Use Case When checking ON/OFF of potential control
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4000
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

TR 1 Dspl of transfer current:Plain, 1st side

Detail To display the current that is applied to plain paper (1st side) in the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
at the latest.
Use Case For checking
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

BIAS 1 Dspl of developing DC bias setting value

Detail To display the setting value of developing DC bias.
Use Case For checking
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

814
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > HV-STS
TR-V 1 Display of transfer voltage
Detail To display the voltage in the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly at the latest.
Use Case For checking
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Unit V
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

■ CCD
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD
TARGET-B 2 Shading target value (B)
Detail To display the shading target value of Blue.
Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 65535 (maximum) is considered a failure of the Reader
Controller PCB.
When the value is out of the target value range, image failure or E302 (shading error) may have
occurred. Identify the cause according to the value.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 512 to 2047

TARGET-G 2 Shading target value (G)

Detail To display the target value of Green.
Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 65535 (maximum) is considered a failure of the Reader
Controller PCB.
When the value is out of the target value range, image failure or E302 (shading error) may have
occurred. Identify the cause according to the value.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 512 to 2047

TARGET-R 2 Shading target value (R)

Detail To display the shading target value of Red.
Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 65535 (maximum) is considered a failure of the Reader
Controller PCB.
When the value is out of the target value range, image failure or E302 (shading error) may have
occurred. Identify the cause according to the value.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 512 to 2047

815
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD
GAIN-OB 2 Gain level of Read Sensor odd bit(B):frt
Detail To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader
Controller PCB.
When the value is out of the target value range, image failure or E302 (shading error) may have
occurred. Identify the cause according to the value.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

GAIN-OG 2 Gain level of Read Sensor odd bit(G):frt

Detail To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader
Controller PCB.
When the value is out of the target value range, image failure or E302 (shading error) may have
occurred. Identify the cause according to the value.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

GAIN-OR 2 Gain level of Read Sensor odd bit(R):frt

Detail To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader
Controller PCB.
When the value is out of the target value range, image failure or E302 (shading error) may have
occurred. Identify the cause according to the value.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

GAIN-EB 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(B):frt

Detail To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader
Controller PCB.
When the value is out of the target value range, image failure or E302 (shading error) may have
occurred. Identify the cause according to the value.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

816
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD
GAIN-EG 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(G):frt
Detail To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader
Controller PCB.
When the value is out of the target value range, image failure or E302 (shading error) may have
occurred. Identify the cause according to the value.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

GAIN-ER 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(R):frt

Detail To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader
Controller PCB.
When the value is out of the target value range, image failure or E302 (shading error) may have
occurred. Identify the cause according to the value.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

LAMP-BW 2 Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL:B&W, front

Detail To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for front side) in B&W
scanning mode.
Use Case When an image failure occurs at front side reading in black mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 55 to 275
Appropriate Target Value 100 to 275
Supplement/Memo LED cannot be replaced individually. Replace the Scanner Unit.

LAMP-CL 2 Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL:clr, front

Detail To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for front side) in color
scanning mode.
Use Case When an image failure occurs at front side reading in color mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 55 to 275
Appropriate Target Value 100 to 275
Supplement/Memo LED cannot be replaced individually. Replace the Scanner Unit.

LAMP2-BW 2 Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL: B&W, back

Detail To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for back side) in B&W
scanning mode.
Use Case When an image failure occurs at back side reading in black mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 55 to 275
Appropriate Target Value 100 to 275
Supplement/Memo LED cannot be replaced individually. Replace the Scanner Unit.

817
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD
LAMP2-CL 2 Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL: clr, back
Detail To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for back side) in color
scanning mode.
Use Case When an image failure occurs at back side reading in color mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 55 to 275
Appropriate Target Value 100 to 275
Supplement/Memo LED cannot be replaced individually. Replace the Scanner Unit.

OFST-BW 2 Dspl Read Sensor offset value:B&W, front

Detail To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for front side) in B&W
scanning mode.
Use Case When an image failure occurs at front side reading in black mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 116

OFST-CL 2 Dspl Read Sensor offset value:clr, front

Detail To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for front side) in color
scanning mode.
Use Case When an image failure occurs at front side reading in color mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 116

OFST2-BW 2 Dspl Read Sensor offset value: B&W, back

Detail To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side) in B&W
scanning mode.
Use Case When an image failure occurs at back side reading in black mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 116

GAIN-BW1 2 Read Sensor gain level adj VL1: B&W, frt

Detail To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 1 of Scanner Unit (for front side).
Use Case When an image failure occurs at front side reading in black mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

GAIN-BW2 2 Read Sensor gain level adj VL2: B&W, frt

Detail To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 2 of Scanner Unit (for front side).
Use Case When an image failure occurs at front side reading in black mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

GAIN-BW3 2 Read Sensor gain level adj VL3: B&W, frt

Detail To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 3 of Scanner Unit (for front side).
Use Case When an image failure occurs at front side reading in black mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

818
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD
GAIN-BW4 2 Read Sensor gain level adj VL4: B&W, frt
Detail To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 4 of Scanner Unit (for front side).
Use Case When an image failure occurs at front side reading in black mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

GAIN2BW1 2 Read Sensor gain level adj VL1:B&W, back

Detail To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 1 of Scanner Unit (for back side).
Use Case When an image failure occurs at back side reading in black mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

GAIN2BW2 2 Read Sensor gain level adj VL2:B&W, back

Detail To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 2 of Scanner Unit (for back side).
Use Case When an image failure occurs at back side reading in black mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

GAIN2BW3 2 Read Sensor gain level adj VL3:B&W, back

Detail To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 3 of Scanner Unit (for back side).
Use Case When an image failure occurs at back side reading in black mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

GAIN2BW4 2 Read Sensor gain level adj VL4:B&W, back

Detail To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 4 of Scanner Unit (for back side).
Use Case When an image failure occurs at back side reading in black mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

GAIN2-OR 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor odd bit(R):back

Detail To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader
Controller PCB.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

819
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD
GAIN2-OG 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor odd bit(G):back
Detail To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader
Controller PCB.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

GAIN2-OB 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor odd bit(B):back

Detail To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader
Controller PCB.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

GAIN2-ER 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(R):back

Detail To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader
Controller PCB.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

GAIN2-EG 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(G):back

Detail To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader
Controller PCB.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

GAIN2-EB 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(B):back

Detail To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader
Controller PCB.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Appropriate Target Value 0 to 143

820
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD
OFST2-CL 2 Dspl Read Sensor offset value:clr, back
Detail To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side) in color
scanning mode.
Use Case When an image failure occurs at back side reading in color mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 116

■ MISC
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > MISC
TNRB-IDK 1 Display of Bk-color Toner Container ID
Detail To display the ID of Bk-color Toner Container that is installed to the machine
Use Case When checking whether the barcode ID on the Toner Container is read correctly
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 12-digit decimal number

SD-INFO 2 For R&D

■ DRSTS-K
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DRSTS-K
DR-I-D-K 1 Display of Drum Unit installed date
Detail To display the installed date of the Drum Unit.
At initial installation, the date of the first power supply after assembling at factory is displayed.
When the Drum Unit is replaced, the date of the first power supply after replacement is displayed.
Use Case When checking the installed date of the Drum Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Caution The date may differ from that at the location due to compliance with GMT.

DRM-ID-K 1 Display of Drum Unit ID

Detail To display the ID of the Drum Unit that is installed to the machine.
Use Case - When outputting the drum report
- When checking the ID of the Drum Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)

DR-O-D-K 1 Dspl of Drum Unit (Bk) removed date

Detail To display the removed date of the Drum Unit (Bk).
The date on which the machine recognized that the ID of the replaced Drum Unit is different
is displayed.
Use Case - When outputting the drum report
- When checking the ID of the Drum Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Caution The date may differ from that at the location due to compliance with GMT.

D-ST-K 1 Display of Drum Unit (Bk) status

Detail To display the status of the Drum Unit (Bk).
Use Case - When outputting the drum report
- When checking the state of the Drum Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3

821
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DRSTS-K
INI-S-K 1 Dspl of Drum Unit installed station: Bk
Detail To display the color of the station where the Drum Unit was installed first.
Use Case - When outputting the drum report
- When checking the station information
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4
1 to 3: Not used, 4: Bk, 0: Others

REP-S-K 1 Dspl Drum Unit replacement station: Bk

Detail To display the color of the station where the Drum Unit has been replaced.
Use Case - When outputting the drum report
- When checking the station information
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
0 to 254: Not used, 255: Bk
Default Value 255

I/O (I/O display mode)

■ COPIER(DC-CON > P004 to P024)
Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks
P004 15 - - -
14 Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor S1 L: Paper
13 Pre-Registration Sensor S5 L: Paper
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor S50 H: Paper
4 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Sensor S9 L: Paper
3 Loop Sensor S6 H: Paper
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 Main Switch/Front Door Switch SW1_SW2 H: OPEN
P005 15-0 - - -
P006 15-0 - - -
P007 15-0 - - -
P008 15-0 - - -
P009 15-0 - - -
P010 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 Duplex Feed Sensor S7 H: Paper
7 - - -
6 - - -

822
 8. Service Mode

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks

5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P011 15-0 - - -
P012 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 Developing Assembly Toner Sensor S25 H: ON
11 - - -
10 Front Cover Open/Closed Sensor S18 L: OPEN
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 Waste Toner Full Sensor S17 H: FULL
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P013 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 Fixing Outlet Sensor S19 H: Paper
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor S53 H: Disengage
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P014 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 Fixing Film Shutter HP Sensor S10 H: HP
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -

823
 8. Service Mode

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks

0 - - -
P015 15-0 - - -
P016 15-0 - - -
P017 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Feeding Area Toner Level Sensor S51 H: ON
0 - - -
P018 15 Bottle Motor HP Sensor S52 H: HP
14 Toner Cover Open/Closed Sensor S46 L: OPEN
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P019 15-0 - - -
P020 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 Reversal Sensor S24 H: Paper
P021 15 - - -
14 - - -

824
 8. Service Mode

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks

13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 No.2 Delivery Full Sensor S23 H: FULL
3 - - -
2 No.2 Delivery Sensor S22 H: Paper
1 - - -
0 - - -
P022 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 No.1 Delivery Full Sensor S20 H: FULL
11 No.1 Delivery Sensor S21 H: Paper
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P023 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 Cassette Cover Sensor S39 L: OPEN
8 Cassette 2 Paper Width Detection Switch 1 S28_1 L: ON
7 Cassette 2 Paper Width Detection Switch 2 S28_2 L: ON
6 Cassette 2 Paper Width Detection Switch 3 S28_3 L: ON
5 Cassette 2 Paper Width Detection Switch 4 S28_4 L: ON
4 Cassette 2 Paper Length Detection Switch 1 S29_1 L: ON
3 Cassette 2 Paper Length Detection Switch 2 S29_2 L: ON
2 Cassette 2 Paper Length Detection Switch 3 S29_3 L: ON
1 Cassette 2 Paper Length Detection Switch 4 S29_4 L: ON
0 Cassette 1 Paper Width Detection Switch 1 S30_1 L: ON
P024 15 Cassette 1 Paper Width Detection Switch 2 S30_2 L: ON
14 Cassette 1 Paper Width Detection Switch 3 S30_3 L: ON
13 Cassette 1 Paper Width Detection Switch 4 S30_4 L: ON
12 Cassette 1 Paper Length Detection Switch 1 S35_1 L: ON
11 Cassette 1 Paper Length Detection Switch 2 S35_2 L: ON
10 Cassette 1 Paper Length Detection Switch 3 S35_3 L: ON
9 Cassette 1 Paper Length Detection Switch 4 S35_4 L: ON
8 Cassette 2 Pickup Sensor S33 H: Paper

825
 8. Service Mode

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks

7 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B S34 L: ON
6 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A S32 L: ON
5 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor S31 L: ON
4 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B S3 L: ON
3 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A S4 L: ON
2 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor S2 L: ON
1 - - -
0 - - -

■ READER(R-CON > P001 to P006)

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks
P001 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (Rear) PS_N2 L: OPEN
2 Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (Front) PS_N1 L: OPEN
1 - - -
0 - - -
P002 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Scanner Unit HP Sensor PS_A1 H: HP
0 - - -
P003 15-0 - - -
P004 15-0 - - -
P005 15-0 - - -
P006 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -

826
 8. Service Mode

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks

8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Original Size Sensor (Inch) PS_R2 L: ON
0 Original Size Sensor (AB) PS_R1 L: ON

■ SP_DADF-A1(FEEDER > P002 to P009)

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks
P002 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 Cover Open/Closed Sensor PS_A5 L: OPEN
6 Large/Small Sensor PS_R3 L: ON
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 Glass Movement HP Sensor PS_A9 H: ON
P003 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 Paper Width Sensor 4 UN_BO6_1 L: ON
6 Paper Width Sensor 3 UN_BO6_2 L: ON
5 Paper Width Sensor 2 UN_BO6_3 L: ON
4 Paper Width Sensor 1 UN_BO6_4 L: ON
3 LTR-R/ LGL Sensor PS_A3 H: ON
2 AB/ Inch Sensor PS_A4 H: ON
1 Delivery Tray Sensor PS_A2 H: Paper
0 Original Sensor PS_N1 L: ON
P004 15-0 - - -
P005 15-0 - - -
P006 15-0 - - -
P007 15-0 - - -
P008 15-0 - - -
P009 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -

827
 8. Service Mode

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks

11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7 H: Paper
3 Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6 H: Paper
2 Registration Sensor PS_R2 H: Paper
1 Arch Sensor PS_A1 H: ON
0 Post-separation Sensor PS_R1 H: Paper

■ DADF-AV1(FEEDER > P001 to P009)

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks
P001 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 Different width sensor 1 SR9 H: ON
6 - - -
5 Cover open/closed sensor SR6 H: OPEN
4 Document set sensor SR5 H: ON
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P002 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 Document length sensor 1 SR7 H: ON
6 Document length sensor 2 SR8 H: ON
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 Different width sensor 4 SR12 H: ON
1 Different width sensor 3 SR11 H: ON
0 Different width sensor 2 SR10 H: ON
P003 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -

828
 8. Service Mode

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks

9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 Document width sensor 3 SR15 H: ON
5 - - -
4 Document width sensor 2 SR14 H: ON
3 Document width sensor 1 SR13 H: ON
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P004 15-0 - - -
P005 15-0 - - -
P006 15-0 - - -
P007 15-0 - - -
P008 15-0 - - -
P009 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 Delivery reversal sensor SR3 H: Paper
2 Read sensor SR2 H: Paper
1 Registration sensor SR1 H: Paper
0 - - -

■ Cassette Feeding Unit-AN1(DC-CON > P027 to 028)

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks
P027 15 Cassette 3 Size Switch B_4 SW102_4 L: ON
14 Cassette 3 Size Switch B_3 SW102_3 L: ON
13 Cassette 3 Size Switch B_2 SW102_2 L: ON
12 Cassette 3 Size Switch B_1 SW102_1 L: ON
11 Cassette 3 Size Switch A_4 SW101_4 L: ON
10 Cassette 3 Size Switch A_3 SW101_3 L: ON
9 Cassette 3 Size Switch A_2 SW101_2 L: ON
8 Cassette 3 Size Switch A_1 SW101_1 L: ON
7 Cassette 4 Size Switch B_4 SW104_4 L: ON
6 Cassette 4 Size Switch B_3 SW104_3 L: ON
5 Cassette 4 Size Switch B_2 SW104_2 L: ON
4 Cassette 4 Size Switch B_1 SW104_1 L: ON
3 Cassette 4 Size Switch A_4 SW103_4 L: ON
2 Cassette 4 Size Switch A_3 SW103_3 L: ON
1 Cassette 4 Size Switch A_2 SW103_2 L: ON
0 Cassette 4 Size Switch A_1 SW103_1 L: ON
P028 15 Cassette3 Paper Presence Sensor PS102 L: ON
14 Cassette3 Paper Level Sensor A PS104 L: ON
13 Cassette3 Paper Level Sensor B PS105 L: ON

829
 8. Service Mode

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks

12 Cassette3 Pre-Registration Sensor PS108 H: Paper
11 Cassette4 Paper Presence Sensor PS103 L: ON
10 Cassette4 Paper Level Sensor A PS106 L: ON
9 Cassette4 Paper Level Sensor B PS107 L: ON
8 Cassette4 Pre-Registration Sensor PS109 H: Paper
7 Pedestal Right Cover Sensor PS101 L: OPEN
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -

■ High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-B1(DC-CON > P031 to P033)

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks
P031 15 High Capacity Cassette Paper Sensor PS122 H: Paper
14 High Capacity Cassette Paper Surface Sensor PS107 L: Paper
13 High Capacity Cassette Pullout Sensor PS101 H: Paper
12 High Capacity Cassette Pickup Nip Sensor PS103 H: Paper
11 Right Cassette Paper Sensor PS121 H: Paper
10 High Capacity Cassette Paper Level Sensor PS118 L: ON
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P032 15-0 - - -
P033 15 Right Door Open/Close Switch SW105 L: OPEN
14 - - -
13 High Capacity Cassette Open/Close Detect Sen- PS123 H: OPEN
sor
12 High Capacity Cassette Upper Limit Sensor PS113 L: ON
11 Left Cassette Paper Sensor PS120 H: Paper
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -

830
 8. Service Mode

■ Paper Deck Unit-F1(DC-CON > P036 to P040)

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks
P036 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 Paper Level Sensor PS6 H: Paper
2 Deck Paper Sensor PS11 H: Paper
1 Deck Lifter Upper Limit Sensor 1 PS4 H: ON
0 - - -
P037 15 Deck Pickup Sensor PS1 H: Paper
14 Deck Pull-out Sensor PS2 H: Paper
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P038 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Deck Connection Switch SW2 L: Disengage
0 Compartment Open/Close Sensor PS8 L: OPEN
P039 15 Compartment Open Switch PCB PCB1 H: OPEN
14 Compartment Open/Close Detection Switch SW1 L: ON
13 - - -
12 - - -

831
 8. Service Mode

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks

11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 Deck Lifter Upper Limit Sensor 2 PS3 H: ON
P040 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 Relay Paper Sensor PS5 H: Paper
7 Deck Lifter Lower Limit Switch SW3 L: ON
6 Deck Lifter Lower Position Sensor PS9 H: ON
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 Separation Roller Sensor PS7 H: Disengage
1 - - -
0 - - -

■ Inner Finisher-J1(SORTER > P001 to P006)

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks
P001 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 Stack Tray HP Sensor PS14 H: HP
1 - - -
0 - - -
P002 15 Stack Tray Paper Height Sensor PS9 H: Paper
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 Processing Tray Paper Sensor PS6 H: Paper
11 - - -
10 - - -

832
 8. Service Mode

9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Inlet Sensor PS17 H: Paper
0 - - -
P003 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 Paper Fold HP Sensor PS8 H: HP
10 Assist HP Sensor PS7 H: HP
9 Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor PS5 H: HP
8 Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor PS4 H: HP
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P004 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 Manual Staple Sensor PS12 L: Paper
3 Manual Staple Switch PCB PCB3 H: ON
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P005 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 Delivery Sensor PS1 H: Paper
10 Stack Tray Lower Limit Sensor PS10 H: ON
9 Stapler Shift HP Sensor PS11 H: HP
8 Return Belt HP Sensor PS3 H: HP
7 - - -
6 Clinch Motor Drive Detection Sensor PS13 H: ON
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -

833
 8. Service Mode

2 - - -
1 Clinch HP Sensor PS15 H: HP
0 - - -
P006 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 Paddle HP Sensor PS2 H: HP
12 - - -
11 Front Cover Switch MSW1 H: OPEN
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -

■ Staple Finisher-Y1/Booklet Finisher-Y1(SORTER > P001 to P021)

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks
P001 15 Buffer Sensor PS103 H: Paper
14 - - -
13 Inlet Sensor PS101 H: Paper
12 - - -
11 Delivery Sensor PS102 H: Paper
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P002 15 Escape Delivery Sensor PS111 H: Paper
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 Swing Guide HP Sensor PS119 H: HP
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 Paper End Assist HP Sensor PS123 H: HP
3 Manual Staple Switch SW103 H: ON
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -

834
 8. Service Mode

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks

P003 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 Processing Tray Paper Sensor PS114 H: Paper
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P004 15 Flapper HP Sensor PS105 H: HP
14 Front Alignment HP Sensor PS115 H: HP
13 Rear Alignment HP Sensor PS116 H: HP
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 Front Cover Switch SW101 L: ON
2 - - -
1 Paddle HP Sensor PS120 H: HP
0 - - -
P005 15-0 - - -
P006 15-0 - - -
P007 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor PS117 H: HP
7 - - -
6 Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor PS122 H: HP
5 - - -
4 Return Roller HP Sensor PS121 H: HP
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor PS118 H: HP
0 - - -
P008 15-0 - - -
P009 15-0 - - -
P010 15 - - -
14 - - -

835
 8. Service Mode

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks

13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 Front Cover Sensor PS104 L: OPEN
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P011 15-0 - - -
P012 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 Staple Edging Sensor PS126 L: ON
6 Staple Sensor PS127 H: ON
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 Escape Tray Full Sensor PS113 L: FULL
2 - - -
1 Manual Staple Paper Sensor PS128 L: Paper
0 - - -
P013 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 H: ON
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Stack Tray HP Sensor PS106 H: HP
0 Stack Tray Full Sensor 1 PS107 H: FULL
P014 15-0 - - -
P015 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 Staple-free Binding HP Sensor PS129 H: HP
11 Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor PS112 H: HP
10 - - -

836
 8. Service Mode

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks

9 Stapler Shift HP Sensor PS124 H: HP
8 Staple HP Sensor PS125 L: HP
7 Stack Tray Full Sensor 2 PS108 H: FULL
6 Stack Tray Full Sensor 3 PS109 H: FULL
5 Stack Tray Upper Limit Sensor PS110 H: ON
4 - - -
3 Stack Tray Peper Surface Sensor (Upper) (light- PBA102 H: Paper
receiving)
2 Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (Lower) (light- PBA103 H: Paper
receiving)
1 - - -
0 - - -
P016 15-0 - - -
P017 15-0 - - -
P018 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 Saddle Inlet Sensor PS201 H: Paper
6 Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor PS210 H: HP
5 Saddle Alignment HP Sensor PS207 H: HP
4 Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor PS205 H: HP
3 Saddle Gripper HP Sensor PS209 H: HP
2 Saddle Unit Set Sensor PS204 H: HP
1 - - -
0 - - -
P019 15-0 - - -
P020 15-0 - - -
P021 15 Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor PS208 H: HP
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 Saddle Delivery Sensor PS203 H: Paper
8 Saddle Paddle HP Sensor PS206 H: HP
7 Front Saddle Stitcher Staple Sensor PS214 H: ON
6 Rear Saddle Stitcher Staple Sensor PS213 H: ON
5 Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor PS215 L: HP
4 - - -
3 Saddle Delivery Tray Paper Sensor PS216 H: Paper
2 - - -
1 Saddle Processing Tray Paper Sensor PS202 L: Paper
0 - - -

■ Puncher Unit-A1(SORTER > P051 to P052)

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks
P051 15 - - -

837
 8. Service Mode

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks

14 Punch Horizontal Registration Sensor 5 PBA302_5 H: Paper
(light-receiving)
13 Punch HP Sensor 1 PS303 L: HP
12 Punch Motor Clock Sensor PS305 H: ON
11 Punch Horizontal Registration Sensor 4 PBA302_4 H: Paper
(light-receiving)
10 Punch Horizontal Registration Sensor 3 PBA302_3 H: Paper
(light-receiving)
9 Punch Horizontal Registration Sensor 2 PBA302_2 H: Paper
(light-receiving)
8 Punch Horizontal Registration Sensor 1 PBA302_1 H: Paper
(light-receiving)
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P052 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 Punch Inlet Sensor PS301 H: Paper
10 Punch HP Sensor 2 PS304 H: ON
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Punch Slide HP Sensor PS302 H: HP
0 - - -

■ Inner Puncher-C1(SORTER > P004 to P011)

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks
P004 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 Disengaging Sensor S8 H: Connect
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -

838
 8. Service Mode

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks

0 - - -
P005 15-0 - - -
P006 15-0 - - -
P007 15-0 - - -
P008 15-0 - - -
P009 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 Punch HP Sensor 1 S5 L: ON
12 - - -
11 Horizontal Registration Sensor 4 PCB3-4 H: Paper
10 Horizontal Registration Sensor 3 PCB3-3 H: Paper
9 Horizontal Registration Sensor 2 PCB3-2 H: Paper
8 Horizontal Registration Sensor 1 PCB3-1 H: Paper
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P010 15 Punch Waste Box Sensor S4 H: ON
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 Trailing Edge Sensor PCB3-5 H: Paper
10 Punch HP Sensor 2 S6 H: ON
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 No.2 Delivery Tray Full Sensor S3 H: ON
1 Horizontal Registration HP sensor S1 H: HP
0 - - -
P011 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 No.2 Path Sensor S2 H: Paper
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -

839
 8. Service Mode

■ Buffer Pass Unit-N1(SORTER > P065)

Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks
P065 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 OPEN Detection Sensor PS403 L: OPEN
1 Buffer Pass Exit Sensor PS402 L: Paper
0 Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PS401 L: Paper

ADJUST (Adjustment mode)

■ AE
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > AE
AE-TBL 1 Adj of text density at image density adj
Detail To adjust text density according to the adjusted image density.
As the greater value is set, text gets darker.
Use Case When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 9
Default Value 5

■ ADJ-XY
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY
ADJ-X 1 Adj start pstn in book mode: vert scan
Detail To adjust the image reading start position (image leading edge position) in the vertical scanning
direction at copyboard reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Decrease the value when the non-image width is larger than the standard value.
Increase the value when out of original area is copied.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the trailing edge side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range -50 to 50
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

840
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY
ADJ-Y 1 Adj start pstn in book mode: horz scan
Detail To adjust the image reading start position in the horizontal scanning direction at copyboard reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Decrease the value when the non-image width is larger than the standard value.
Increase the value when out of original area is copied.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the rear side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -35 to 35
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

ADJ-S 1 Adjustment of Reader shading position

Detail To adjust the Scanner Unit (for front side) position in feed direction when reading the White Plate
on the left edge of the Copyboard Glass.
When replacing the Scanner Unit, execute RDSHDPOS and write the value of this item in the
service label.
When clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the reading position moves to the trailing edge side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case - When black lines/white lines appear
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
- When clearing the Reader-related RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -100 to 100
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RDSHDPOS
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

ADJ-Y-DF 1 Adj start pstn: stream read, horz scan

Detail To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction at stream reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the rear side by 0.1 mm.
The setting is applied to only the image on the front side in the case of DADF (1-path model) or the
images on both the front and back sides in the case of DADF (reverse model).
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -35 to 35
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

841
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY
STRD-POS 1 Adj Scanner Unit pstn: stream, feed way
Detail To adjust the position of the Scanner Unit on the Reader side in feed direction at stream reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the front side in the case of DADF (1-path model) or the
images on both the front and back sides in the case of DADF (reverse model).
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -50 to 50
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STRD-POS
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

ADJ-X-MG 1 Fine adj img ratio: book mode, vert scan

Detail To make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is changed by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.01 %.
+: Enlarge
-: Reduce
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -50 to 50
Unit %
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.01
per Unit

ADJY-DF2 1 Strem read strt pstn:horz scan,bck,1path

Detail To adjust the back side image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction at stream
reading using the DADF (1-path).
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the rear side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -35 to 35
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

842
 8. Service Mode

■ CCD
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
W-PLT-X 1 Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (X) entry
Detail To enter the white level data (X) for the Standard White Plate.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data/replacing the Copyboard Glass,
enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 9999
Default Value 8271
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Y/Z
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

W-PLT-Y 1 Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (Y) entry

Detail To enter the white level data (Y) for the Standard White Plate.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data/replacing the Copyboard Glass,
enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 9999
Default Value 8735
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Z
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

W-PLT-Z 1 Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (Z) entry

Detail To enter the white level data (Z) for the Standard White Plate.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data/replacing the Copyboard Glass,
enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 9999
Default Value 9418
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

843
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
SH-TRGT 1 Shading target VL (B&W) entry: Copyboard
Detail To enter the B&W shading target value in copyboard reading mode.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Scanner Unit, execute DF-WLVL3, and write the value which is automatically
set in the service label.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2047
Default Value 1126
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

100-RG 1 Img Sensr RG color displace crrct: front

Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction due to the
Scanner Unit (for front side).
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -256 to 256
Unit line
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.001
per Unit

100-GB 1 Img Sensr GB color displace crrct: front

Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction due to the
Scanner Unit (for front side).
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -256 to 256
Unit line
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.001
per Unit

844
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
DFTAR-R 1 Shading target VL (R) entry: front side
Detail To enter the shading target value of Red of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side), execute DF-WLVL1 and
DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting is applied to the image on the front side when the DADF (1-path model) is installed,
whereas it is applied to the images on both the front and back sides when the DADF (reverse
model) is installed.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2047
Default Value 1159
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/WLVL2
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DFTAR-G 1 Shading target VL (G) entry: front side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Green of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side), execute DF-WLVL1 and
DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting is applied to the image on the front side when the DADF (1-path model) is installed,
whereas it is applied to the images on both the front and back sides when the DADF (reverse
model) is installed.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2047
Default Value 1189
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/WLVL2
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DFTAR-B 1 Shading target VL (B) entry: front side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Blue of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side), execute DF-WLVL1 and
DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting is applied to the image on the front side when the DADF (1-path model) is installed,
whereas it is applied to the images on both the front and back sides when the DADF (reverse
model) is installed.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2047
Default Value 1209
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/WLVL2
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

845
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF2-M1 1 MTF value 1 entry: horz scan, front side
Detail To enter the setting value 1 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF2-M2 1 MTF value 2 entry: horz scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 2 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF2-M3 1 MTF value 3 entry: horz scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 3 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

846
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF2-M4 1 MTF value 4 entry: horz scan, front side
Detail To enter the setting value 4 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF2-M5 1 MTF value 5 entry: horz scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 5 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF2-M6 1 MTF value 6 entry: horz scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 6 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

847
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF2-M7 1 MTF value 7 entry: horz scan, front side
Detail To enter the setting value 7 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF2-M8 1 MTF value 8 entry: horz scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 8 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF2-M9 1 MTF value 9 entry: horz scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 9 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

848
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF2-S1 1 MTF value 1 entry: vert scan, front side
Detail To enter the setting value 1 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF2-S2 1 MTF value 2 entry: vert scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 2 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF2-S3 1 MTF value 3 entry: vert scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 3 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

849
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF2-S4 1 MTF value 4 entry: vert scan, front side
Detail To enter the setting value 4 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF2-S5 1 MTF value 5 entry: vert scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 5 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF2-S6 1 MTF value 6 entry: vert scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 6 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

850
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF2-S7 1 MTF value 7 entry: vert scan, front side
Detail To enter the setting value 7 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF2-S8 1 MTF value 8 entry: vert scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 8 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF2-S9 1 MTF value 9 entry: vert scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 9 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

851
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
100DF2GB 2 Img Sensr GB color displace crrct: back
Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction due to the
Scanner Unit (for back side).
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range -256 to 256
Unit line
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.001
per Unit

100DF2RG 2 Img Sensr RG color displace crrct: back

Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction due to the
Scanner Unit (for back side).
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range -256 to 256
Unit line
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.001
per Unit

DFCH2R2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (R) entry: front

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the front side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2550
Default Value 2000
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

852
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
DFCH2R10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (R) entry:front
Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the front side of No.10 image in DADF
complex chart.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2550
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DFCH2B2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (B) entry: front

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Blue data on the front side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2550
Default Value 2000
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DFCH2B10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (B) entry:front

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Blue data on the front side of No.10 image in DADF
complex chart.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2550
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

853
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
DFCH2G2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (G) entry: front
Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the front side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2550
Default Value 2000
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DFCH2G10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (G) entry:front

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the front side of No.10 image in
DADF complex chart.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2550
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF-M1 1 MTF value 1 entry: horz scan, back side

Detail To enter the setting value 1 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

854
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF-M2 1 MTF value 2 entry: horz scan, back side
Detail To enter the setting value 2 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF-M3 1 MTF value 3 entry: horz scan, back side

Detail To enter the setting value 3 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF-M4 1 MTF value 4 entry: horz scan, back side

Detail To enter the setting value 4 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

855
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF-M5 1 MTF value 5 entry: horz scan, back side
Detail To enter the setting value 5 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF-M6 1 MTF value 6 entry: horz scan, back side

Detail To enter the setting value 6 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF-M7 1 MTF value 7 entry: horz scan, back side

Detail To enter the setting value 7 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

856
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF-M8 1 MTF value 8 entry: horz scan, back side
Detail To enter the setting value 8 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF-M9 1 MTF value 9 entry: horz scan, back side

Detail To enter the setting value 9 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF-S1 1 MTF value 1 entry: vert scan, back side

Detail To enter the setting value 1 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

857
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF-S2 1 MTF value 2 entry: vert scan, back side
Detail To enter the setting value 2 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF-S3 1 MTF value 3 entry: vert scan, back side

Detail To enter the setting value 3 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF-S4 1 MTF value 4 entry: vert scan, back side

Detail To enter the setting value 4 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

858
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF-S5 1 MTF value 5 entry: vert scan, back side
Detail To enter the setting value 5 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF-S6 1 MTF value 6 entry: vert scan, back side

Detail To enter the setting value 6 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF-S7 1 MTF value 7 entry: vert scan, back side

Detail To enter the setting value 7 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

859
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF-S8 1 MTF value 8 entry: vert scan, back side
Detail To enter the setting value 8 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF-S9 1 MTF value 9 entry: vert scan, back side

Detail To enter the setting value 9 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DFCH-R2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (R) entry: back

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the back side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2550
Default Value 2000
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

860
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
DFCH-R10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (R) entry: back
Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the back side of No.10 image in DADF
complex chart.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2550
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DFCH-B2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (B) entry: back

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Blue data on the back side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2550
Default Value 2000
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DFCH-B10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (B) entry: back

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Blue data on the back side of No.10 image in DADF
complex chart.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2550
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

861
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
DFCH-G2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (G) entry: back
Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the back side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2550
Default Value 2000
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DFCH-G10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (G) entry: back

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the back side of No.10 image in
DADF complex chart.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2550
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF2-M10 1 MTF value 10 entry:horz scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 10 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

862
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF2-M11 1 MTF value 11 entry:horz scan, front side
Detail To enter the setting value 11 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF2-M12 1 MTF value 12 entry:horz scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 12 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF2-S10 1 MTF value 10 entry:vert scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 10 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

863
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF2-S11 1 MTF value 11 entry:vert scan, front side
Detail To enter the setting value 11 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF2-S12 1 MTF value 12 entry:vert scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 12 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF-M10 1 MTF value 10 entry:horz scan, back side

Detail To enter the setting value 10 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

864
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF-M11 1 MTF value 11 entry:horz scan, back side
Detail To enter the setting value 11 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF-M12 1 MTF value 12 entry:horz scan, back side

Detail To enter the setting value 12 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF-S10 1 MTF value 10 entry:vert scan, back side

Detail To enter the setting value 10 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

865
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF-S11 1 MTF value 11 entry:vert scan, back side
Detail To enter the setting value 11 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MTF-S12 1 MTF value 12 entry:vert scan, back side

Detail To enter the setting value 12 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the
Scanner Unit (for back side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 20 to 85
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DFCH2K2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) entr: frt

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the front side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2550
Default Value 2000
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

866
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
DFCH2K10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) entr: frt
Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the front side of No.10 image in DADF
complex chart.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2550
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DFCH-K2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) entr: bck

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the back side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2550
Default Value 2000
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DFCH-K10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) entr: bck

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the back side of No.10 image in DADF
complex chart.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2550
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

867
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
DFTAR-BW 1 Shading target VL (B&W) entry: front
Detail To enter the B&W shading target value of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side), execute DF-WLVL3 and
DF-WLVL4 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting is applied to the image on the front side when the DADF (1-path model) is installed,
whereas it is applied to the images on both the front and back sides when the DADF (reverse
model) is installed.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2047
Default Value 1209
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3/WLVL4
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DFTBK-G 1 Shading target VL (G) entry: back side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Green of the Scanner Unit (for back side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for back side), execute DF-WLVL1 and
DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 700 to 1400
Default Value 1136
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/WLVL2
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DFTBK-B 1 Shading target VL (B) entry: back side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Blue of the Scanner Unit (for back side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for back side), execute DF-WLVL1 and
DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 700 to 1400
Default Value 1126
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/WLVL2
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

868
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
DFTBK-R 1 Shading target VL (R) entry: back side
Detail To enter the shading target value of Red of the Scanner Unit (for back side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for back side), execute DF-WLVL1 and
DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 700 to 1400
Default Value 1156
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/WLVL2
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DFTBK-BW 1 Shading target VL (B&W) entry: back

Detail To enter the B&W shading target value of the Scanner Unit (for back side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for back side), execute DF-WLVL3 and
DF-WLVL4 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 700 to 1400
Default Value 1126
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3/WLVL4
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

■ LASER
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > LASER
PVE-OFST 1 Adj of write start position of laser
Detail To adjust the image position by changing the laser emitting position.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image moves by 0.01 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Use Case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the laser scanner unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution Do not change the value except in the case of replacing the DC Controller PCB/Laser Scanner Unit.
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 511
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.01
per Unit

869
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > LASER
LA-OFF 1 Laser trailing edge OFF adjustment
Detail To adjust the timing to turn OFF the laser to the trailing edge of free size paper.
As the value is increased, the timing to turn OFF the laser is delayed.
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution - Do not change the setting in the normal operation.
- After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Default Value 0

LDADJ1-K 1 Magnification between A-B laser (K)

Detail When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the laser scanner unit, enter the value of service label stuck on the laser
scanner unit.
Use Case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the laser scanner unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 511
Default Value 0

LDADJ2-K 1 Magnification between A-C laser (K)

Detail When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the laser scanner unit, enter the value of service label stuck on the laser
scanner unit.
Use Case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the laser scanner unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 511
Default Value 0

LDADJ3-K 1 Magnification between A-D laser (K)

Detail When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the laser scanner unit, enter the value of service label stuck on the laser
scanner unit.
Use Case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the laser scanner unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 511
Default Value 0

870
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > LASER
LDADJ4-K 1 Phase difference between A-B laser (K)
Detail When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the laser scanner unit, enter the value of service label stuck on the laser
scanner unit.
Use Case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the laser scanner unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 511
Default Value 0

LDADJ5-K 1 Phase difference between A-C laser (K)

Detail When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the laser scanner unit, enter the value of service label stuck on the laser
scanner unit.
Use Case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the laser scanner unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 511
Default Value 0

LDADJ6-K 1 Phase difference between A-D laser (K)

Detail When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the laser scanner unit, enter the value of service label stuck on the laser
scanner unit.
Use Case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the laser scanner unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 511
Default Value 0

■ DEVELOP
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DEVELOP
DE-OFST 1 Enter offset value for develop DC bias
Detail To set the Vdc offset auto adjustment value for potential control of copy image manually.
As the value is changed by 1, the offset value is increased or decreased by 0.3%.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
As the value is increased, copy image gets darker.
Use Case When the abnormal image appears (high or low density)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.3
per Unit

871
 8. Service Mode

■ DENS
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS
DENS-ADJ 1 Density correction of copy image
Detail To correct the density of copy image by changing the F-value table.
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Blurring is alleviated when the value is increased, and fogging is alleviated when the value
is decreased.
Use Case When fogging or blurring at high density area occurs with a copy image
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution Density of printer output image cannot be corrected.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 9
Default Value 5
Supplement/Memo F-value table: shows the relationship between original density and image density.

■ BLANK
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > BLANK
BLANK-T 1 Adjustment of leading edge margin
Detail To adjust the margin on the leading edge of paper.
As the value is increased by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel
(0.0212 mm).
Use Case - When reducing the margin upon user's request
- When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1000
Unit pixel
Default Value 188
Amount of Change 0.0212
per Unit

BLANK-L 1 Adjustment of left edge margin

Detail To adjust the margin on the left edge of paper.
As the value is increased by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel
(0.0212 mm).
Use Case When reducing the margin upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1000
Unit pixel
Default Value 118
Amount of Change 0.0212
per Unit

872
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > BLANK
BLANK-R 1 Adjustment of right edge margin
Detail To adjust the margin on the right edge of paper.
As the value is increased by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel
(0.0212 mm).
Use Case When reducing the margin upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1000
Unit pixel
Default Value 118
Amount of Change 0.0212
per Unit

BLANK-B 1 Adjustment of trailing edge margin

Detail To adjust the margin on the trailing edge of paper.
As the value is increased by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel
(0.0212 mm).
Use Case - When reducing the margin upon user's request
- When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1000
Unit pixel
Default Value 118
Amount of Change 0.0212
per Unit

■ PASCAL
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > PASCAL
OFST-P-Y 1 Y density adj at test print reading
Detail To adjust the offset of Y-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment).
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 128
Default Value According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

873
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > PASCAL
OFST-P-M 1 M density adj at test print reading
Detail To adjust the offset of M-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment
(full adjustment).
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 128
Default Value According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

OFST-P-C 1 C density adj at test print reading

Detail To adjust the offset of C-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment
(full adjustment).
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 128
Default Value According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

OFST-P-K 1 Bk density adj at test print reading

Detail To adjust the offset of Bk-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment
(full adjustment).
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 128
Default Value According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

874
 8. Service Mode

■ HV-PRI
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-PRI
OFST1-DC 1 Adj primary charge DC offset 1
Detail To adjust the offset value of the primary charging DC bias.
+: The offset value increases.
-: The offset value decreases.
Use Case - When the image is failure.
- When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.3
per Unit

OFST1-AC 1 Adj primary charge AC offset 1

Detail To adjust the offset value of the primary charging AC bias.
+: The offset value increases.
-: The offset value decreases.
Use Case - When the image is failure.
- When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.5
per Unit

■ HV-TR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR
TR-OFST 1 Adj transfer target bias offset
Detail To adjust the offset output value of the transfer charging bias (constant current / constant voltage).
Use Case When the abnormal image appears (transfer image burst or transfer image memory or low density)
When replacing the DC Controller PCB or clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Unit % (duty)
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo As the value is changed by 1, the bias is changed by 1.0444(constant current)/
1.33(constant voltage)
Amount of Change 1.0444/1.33
per Unit

875
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR
TR-TP-TM 1 Adj transfer lead edge weak bias time
Detail This mode determines the time to apply voltage for transfer leading edge weak bias during the
second printing of 2-sided..
+: The application time increases.
-: The application time decreases.
When the fixing delivery delay jam occurs, increase the application time.
Use Case This item is used when the fixing delivery delay jam (0107) of the 2nd side of 2-sided occurs in the
following condition.
- High temperature/high humidity environment
- The cassette heater is ON
- Use of the thin paper 1 and plain paper 1/2
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When the transfer bias level (TR-TP-LV) is increased and the application time (TR-TP-TM) is too
shorter, the jam may occur easily.
When the transfer bias level (TR-TP-LV) is decreased and the application time (TR-TP-TM) is too
longer, the leading part of the image becomes light.
When the setting of TR-TP-LV is not 0, the setting of TR-TP-TM becomes effective.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 127
Unit msec
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-TP-LV
Amount of Change 5
per Unit

TR-TP-LV 1 Adj transfer lead edge weak bias level

Detail This mode determines the level to apply voltage for transfer lead edge weak bias during the second
printing of 2-sided.
+: The output level increases.
-: The output level decreases.
When the fixing delivery delay jam occurs, decrease the output level.
Use Case This item is used when the fixing delivery delay jam (0107) of the 2nd side of 2-sided occurs in the
following condition.
- High temperature/high humidity environment
- The cassette heater is ON
- Use of the thin paper 1 and plain paper 1/2
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution When the transfer bias level (TR-TP-LV) is increased and the application time (TR-TP-TM) is too
shorter, the jam may occur easily.
When the transfer bias level (TR-TP-LV) is decreased and the application time (TR-TP-TM) is too
longer, the leading part of the image becomes light.
When the setting of TR-TP-LV is not 0, the setting of TR-TP-TM becomes effective.
Display/Adj/Set Range -50 to 50
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-TP-TM
Amount of Change 0.01
per Unit

TR-OFT1 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFT2 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

876
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR
TR-OFT3 2 For R&D
Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFT4 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.33
per Unit

TR-OFT5 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.33
per Unit

TR-OFT6 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFT7 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFT8 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.33
per Unit

TR-OFT9 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.33
per Unit

TR-OFP1 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFP2 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFP3 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.33
per Unit

TR-OFP4 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.33
per Unit

TR-OFP5 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFP6 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFP7 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.33
per Unit

TR-OFP8 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.33
per Unit

877
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR
TR-OFP9 2 For R&D
Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFP10 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFP11 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.33
per Unit

TR-OFP12 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.33
per Unit

TR-OFP13 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFP14 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFP15 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.33
per Unit

TR-OFP16 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.33
per Unit

TR-OFP17 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFP18 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFH1 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFH2 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFH3 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFH4 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFH5 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

878
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR
TR-OFO1 2 For R&D
Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFO2 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFO3 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

TR-OFO4 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1.0444
per Unit

■ FEED-ADJ
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ
REGIST 1 Adj of registration start timing
Detail To adjust the timing to turn ON the Registration Roller.
As the value is changed by 1, the margin on the leading edge of paper is increased or decreased
by 0.1 mm.
+: Top margin becomes larger.
-: Top margin becomes smaller.
In the case of 25cpm model, this item is effective by both paper feedings for the same speed in the
cassette feeding and the manual feeding.
In the case of 35/45/51cpm model, this item is effective for only the cassette feeding of the
normal speed.
Perform the setting of the manual feeding in COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> RG-HF-SP.
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case - When adjustment of leading edge margin
- When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> RG-HF-SP
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

LOOP-CST 1 Registration loop amnt adj: cst pickup

Detail To adjust the registration loop amount at cassette pick-up.
As the value is changed by 1, the paper feeding distance is increased or decreased by 0.1 mm.
+: The loop amount increases.
-: The loop amount decreases.
Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
When the cassette feeding paper is skewed
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 127
Unit mm
Default Value 63
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

879
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ
LOOP-MF 1 Registration loop amnt adj: MP pickup
Detail To adjust the registration loop amount at multi-purpose tray pick-up.
As the value in changed by 1, the paper feeding distance is increased or decreased by 0.1 mm.
+: The loop amount increases.
-: The loop amount decreases.
Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
When the manual feeding paper is skewed
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 127
Unit mm
Default Value 45
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

ADJ-REFE 1 Side rgst adj: second side of 2-sided

Detail To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the horizontal scanning direction.
The image write start position is set in the relative amount against the first side regardless of the
paper pickup cassette/tray/deck.
As the value is changed by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased or decreased by
0.1 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
In case of side registration adjustment at 2nd side (re-pickup)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> ADJ-RE-L
Supplement/Memo The side registration in second side of the large paper is adjusted by the settings of the ADJ-RE-L
and this mode.
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

LOOPREFE 1 Rgst loop amnt adj: 2-sided feeding

Detail To adjust the registration loop amount at 2-sided paper feeding.
As the value in changed by 1, the paper feeding distance is increased or decreased by 0.1 mm.
+: The loop amount increases.
-: The loop amount decreases.
Use Case When the 2-sided paper is skewed
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 127
Unit mm
Default Value 45
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

880
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ
RG-HF-SP 1 Rgst clutch on timing adj: 1/2 speed
Detail To adjust the registration clutch on timing at 1/2 speed feeding.
As the value in changed by 1, the registration clutch on timing is increased or decreased by 0.1 mm.
+: The timing becomes fast.
-: The timing becomes slow.
In the case of 25cpm model, this item is not work.
Perform the setting in COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> REGIST.
In the case of 35/45/51cpm model, this item is effective for only the 1/2 speed.
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> REGIST
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

ADJ-RE-L 1 Side regist adj: 2-sided, large paper

Detail To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction for 2-sided print. (large
paper with 216mm or more in feed direction)
The image write start position is set in the relative amount against the first side regardless of the
paper pickup cassette/tray/deck.
As the value is incremented by 1, the left blank area changes by 0.1mm.
+: The left blank area becomes narrow. (The image shifts to left)
-: The left blank area becomes wide. (The image shifts to right)
Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
In case of side registration adjustment at 2nd side (re-pickup) with large paper
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> ADJ-REFE
Supplement/Memo The side registration in second side of the large paper is adjusted by the settings of the ADJ-REFE
and this mode.
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

LOOP-THK 2 Reg loop amnt adj: MP Tr fd of plain 3

Detail To adjust the registration loop amount at multi-purpose tray pickup of plain paper 3 and bond paper
and postcard.
As the value in changed by 1, the paper feeding distance is increased or decreased by 0.1 mm.
+: The loop amount increases.
-: The loop amount decreases.
Use Case When the plain paper 3 and bond paper and postcard are skewed
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

881
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ
LOOP-SP 2 Reg loop amunt adj: MP Tr fd of spcl ppr
Detail To adjust the registration loop amount at multi-purpose tray pickup of special paper.
As the value in changed by 1, the paper feeding distance is increased or decreased by 0.1 mm.
+: The loop amount increases.
-: The loop amount decreases.
Use Case When the special paper is skewed
Special paper is Transparency, Thin paper 2, Label paper, Tracing paper
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

LOOP-ENV 2 Reg loop amnt adj: cst feed of envlp

Detail To adjust the registration loop amount at cassette pickup of envelope.
As the value in changed by 1, the paper feeding distance is increased or decreased by 0.1 mm.
+: The loop amount increases.
-: The loop amount decreases.
Use Case When the envelope is skewed at the cassette feeding
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

ADJ-PTMG 2 Feed timing Adj

Detail To adjust the paper feeding timing according to the feed allowance temperature. (regardless of the
fixing mode)
As the value in changed by 1, the feed allowance temperature is increased or decreased by 3
degrees centigrade.
+: The feed allowance temperature decreases.
-: The feed allowance temperature increases.
Use Case Use to shorten the first copy time or the warm up time.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C
3 to 11: each 3 deg C
12 to 14: -15 deg C
Default Value 7

882
 8. Service Mode

■ CST-ADJ
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CST-ADJ
MF-A4R 1 Adj of MP Tray A4R paper width
Detail To adjust the width of A4R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value,
execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> MF-A4R.
Use Case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Size Sensor or registering a new value
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1024
Default Value 359
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> MF-A4R

MF-A6R 1 Adj of MP Tray A6R paper width

Detail To adjust the width of A6R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value,
execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> MF-A6R.
Use Case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Size Sensor or registering a new value
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1024
Default Value 118
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> MF-A6R

MF-A4 1 Adj of MP Tray A4 paper width

Detail To adjust the width of A4 paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value,
execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> MF-A4.
Use Case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Size Sensor or registering a new value
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1024
Default Value 479
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> MF-A4

■ FIXING
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FIXING
FX-FL-SP 2 Adj of fixing film speed at normal speed
Detail To adjust the fixing film speed at the normal speed
Use Case When paper passes through the registration roller, the density difference occurs by slack/tension
of the paper on the image trailing edge (about 45mm).
When executing RAM clear of DC controller PCB/replacing the PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -3 to 3
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

883
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FIXING
FX-FL-LW 2 Adj of fixing film speed at half speed
Detail To adjust the fixing film speed at the half speed
Use Case When paper passes through the registration roller, the density difference occurs by slack/tension
of the paper on the image trailing edge (about 45mm).
When executing RAM clear of DC controller PCB/replacing the PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -3 to 3
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

FN-MV-SW 2 Change rotational speed: fixing cool fan

Detail When the rotational speed for the fixing cooling fan is changed to reduce the curl amount of the
moist paper
Use Case When the rotational speed for the fixing cooling fan shutter of the curl alleviation.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: Half speed, 2: Full speed
Default Value 1

ADJ-FNSH 2 Open wid adj of fixing cool fan shutter

Detail When the open width for the fixing cooling fan shutter is changed to reduce the curl amount of the
moist paper
As the value in changed by 1, the open width is increased or decreased by 4 mm.
+: The open width increases.
-: The open width decreases.
Use Case When the open width for the fixing cooling fan shutter of the curl alleviation.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 6: Open width is between 0 to 24 mm in increments of 4 mm
7 to 14: Open width is between 30 to 58 mm in increments of 4 mm
Default Value 7

■ MISC
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > MISC
SEG-ADJ 1 Set criteria for text/photo: front side
Detail To set whether to judge the original scanned with the Scanner Unit (for front side) in Text/Photo/Map
mode as text or photo.
As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a photo document, and as the value
is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a text document.
The setting is applied to the image on the front side when the Copyboard/DADF (1-path model)
is installed, whereas it is applied to the images on both the front and back sides when the DADF
(reverse model) is installed.
Use Case When adjusting the judgment level of text/photo original scanned with the Scanner Unit (for front
side) in Text/Photo/Map mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range -4 to 4
Default Value 0

884
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > MISC
K-ADJ 1 Set criteria for black text: front side
Detail To set whether to judge the color of the text scanned with the Scanner Unit (for front side) as black.
As the value is larger, the text tends to be detected as black.
The setting is applied to the image on the front side when the Copyboard/DADF (1-path model)
is installed, whereas it is applied to the images on both the front and back sides when the DADF
(reverse model) is installed.
Use Case When adjusting the criteria for judging the color of the text scanned with the Scanner Unit (for
front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range -3 to 3
Default Value 0

ACS-ADJ 1 Set criteria for B&W/color in ACS:front

Detail To set whether to judge the original scanned with the Scanner Unit (for front side) in ACS mode as
B&W/color original.
As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a B&W document, and as the value
is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a color document.
The setting is applied to the image on the front side when the Copyboard/DADF (1-path model)
is installed, whereas it is applied to the images on both the front and back sides when the DADF
(reverse model) is installed.
Use Case When adjusting the color recognition level in ACS mode at scanning with the Scanner Unit (for
front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range -3 to 3
Default Value 0

ACS-EN 2 Set ACS mode judgmt area: book mode, frt

Detail To set the ACS judgment area in the image on the front side read with the Copyboard.
As the value is larger, the judgment area is widened.
Use Case When adjusting the ACS judgment area at copyboard reading
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range -2 to 2
Default Value 1

ACS-CNT 2 Set chromatic clr judgmt area: book, frt

Detail To set the area to judge whether the image on the front side read with the Copyboard is color or
B&W at automatic color selection.
As the value is larger, the judgment area is widened.
Use Case When adjusting the area where the pixel is counted to judge whether it is a color/B&W image
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range -2 to 2
Default Value 0

885
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > MISC
C1-ADJ-Y 2 Enter Cassette1 side register adj value
Detail As the value is changed by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased or decreased by
0.1 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
Use Case When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from Cassette 1, when executing RAM clear
of the DC Controller PCB, or when replacing the PCB (Enter the value of service label.)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution Be sure to enter the adjustment value on the service label after adjustment.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

C2-ADJ-Y 2 Enter Cassette2 side register adj value

Detail As the value is changed by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased or decreased by
0.1 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
Use Case When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from Cassette 2, when executing RAM clear
of the DC Controller PCB, or when replacing the PCB (Enter the value of service label.)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution Be sure to enter the adjustment value on the service label after adjustment.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

C3-ADJ-Y 2 Enter Cassette3 side register adj value

Detail As the value is changed by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased or decreased by
0.1 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
Use Case When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from Cassette 3, when executing RAM clear
of the DC Controller PCB, or when replacing the PCB (Enter the value of service label.)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution Be sure to enter the adjustment value on the service label after adjustment.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

886
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > MISC
C4-ADJ-Y 2 Enter Cassette4 side register adj value
Detail As the value is changed by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased or decreased by
0.1 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
Use Case When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from Cassette 4, when executing RAM clear
of the DC Controller PCB, or when replacing the PCB (Enter the value of service label.)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution Be sure to enter the adjustment value on the service label after adjustment.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

MF-ADJ-Y 2 Enter MP Tray side register adj value

Detail As the value is changed by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased or decreased by
0.1 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
Use Case When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from Multi-purpose Tray, when executing RAM
clear of the DC Controller PCB, or when replacing the PCB (Enter the value of service label.)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution Be sure to enter the adjustment value on the service label after adjustment.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

DK-ADJ-Y 2 Enter Paper Deck side register adj value

Detail As the value is changed by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased or decreased by
0.1 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
Use Case When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from Paper Deck, when executing RAM clear
of the DC Controller PCB, or when replacing the PCB (Enter the value of service label.)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution Be sure to enter the adjustment value on the service label after adjustment.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

ACS-EN2 2 Set ACS mode judgment area: stream read

Detail To set the ACS judgment area either in the image on the front side stream read with DADF (1-path
model) or the images on both the front and back sides stream read with the DADF (reverse model).
As the value is larger, the judgment area is widened.
Use Case When adjusting the ACS judgment area at stream reading
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range -2 to 2
Default Value 1

887
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > MISC
ACS-CNT2 2 Set chromatic clr jdgmt area:stream read
Detail To set the area to judge whether the image on the front side stream read with DADF (1-path model)
or the images on both the front and back sides stream read with the DADF (reverse model) is color
or B&W at automatic color selection.
As the value is larger, the judgment area is widened.
Use Case When adjusting the area where the pixel is counted to judge whether it is a color/B&W image
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range -2 to 2
Default Value 0

SEG-ADJ3 1 Set criteria for text/photo: back side

Detail To set whether to judge the original scanned with the Scanner Unit (for back side) in Text/
Photo/Map mode as text or photo.
As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a photo document, and as the value
is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a text document.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When adjusting the judgment level of text/photo original scanned with the Scanner Unit (for back
side) in Text/Photo/Map mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range -4 to 4
Default Value 0

K-ADJ3 1 Set criteria for black text: back side

Detail To set whether to judge the color of the text scanned with the Scanner Unit (for back side) as black.
As the value is larger, the text tends to be detected as black.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When adjusting the criteria for judging the color of the text scanned with the Scanner Unit (for
back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range -3 to 3
Default Value 0

ACS-ADJ3 1 Set ACS B&W/color jdgmt stdrd:back side

Detail To set whether to judge the original scanned with the Scanner Unit (for back side) in ACS mode as
B&W/color original.
As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a B&W document, and as the value
is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a color document.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When adjusting the color recognition level in ACS mode at scanning with the Scanner Unit (for
back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range -3 to 3
Default Value 0

888
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > MISC
ACS-EN3 2 ACS mode judgmt area:stream, bck, 1-path
Detail To set the ACS judgment area in the image on the back side stream read with the DADF
(1-path model).
As the value is larger, the judgment area is widened.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When adjusting the ACS judgment area in the image on the back side at stream reading
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range -2 to 2
Default Value 1

ACS-CNT3 2 Chromatic clr jdgmt area:strem,bck,1path

Detail To set the area to judge whether the image on the back side stream read with DADF (1-path model)
is color or B&W at automatic color selection.
As the value is larger, the judgment area is widened.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When adjusting the area where the pixel is counted to judge whether it is a color/B&W image
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range -2 to 2
Default Value 0

FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)

■ INSTALL
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL
TONER-S 1 Toner supply to Developing Assembly
Detail To execute a series of operation necessary for supplying toner to the Developing Assembly/Toner
Supply area (drive the Developing Cylinder, Toner Stirring/Feed Member) as a whole.
After counting down from 600 seconds, it is stopped automatically.
Use Case - At installation
- When replacing the Developing Assembly
- When replacing toner in the Developing Assembly
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the items.
"Check the Developer" is displayed.
2) Check connection, and then press OK key.
It automatically stops after 10 minutes.
Caution - Although "Check the Developer" is displayed when selecting the item, be sure to check the
connection between the Developing Assembly and connector in advance.
- The operation can be stopped manually with OK key when a failure occurs.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: xxx second (remaining time), When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value 600

889
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL
STRD-POS 1 Auto adj frt side read pstn: DADF stream
Detail To automatically adjust the Scanner Unit (for front side) position in feed direction when stream
reading original with DADF.
The adjustment result is reflected to COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS.
Use Case At DADF installation/uninstallation
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Close the DADF.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
The operation automatically stops after the adjustment.
3) Write the value displayed by COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS in the service label.
Caution Write the adjusted value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal termination: NG!
Required Time 10 sec
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS

CARD 1 Card number setting

Detail To set the card number to be used for Card Reader.
A series of numbers from the entered number to the number of cards specified by CARD-RNG can
be used.
Use Case - At installation of the Card Reader
- After replacement of the HDD
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the number, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution The card management information (department ID and password) is initialized.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2001
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CARD-RNG

E-RDS 1 ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS

Detail To set whether to use the E-RDS.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not used, 1: Used (All the counter information is sent.)
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERDS-DAT
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol

RGW-PORT 1 Set port number of Sales Co's server

Detail To set the port number of the sales company's server to be used for Embedded-RDS.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 65535
Default Value 443
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, COM-TEST, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol

890
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL
COM-TEST 1 Dspl connect result w/ Sales Co's server
Detail To display the result of the connection test with the sales company's server.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When connection is completed: OK, When connection is failed: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol

COM-LOG 1 Dspl connect error w/ Sales Co's server

Detail To display error information when the connection with the sales company's server failed.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Caution Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range Year, date, time, error code, error detail information (maximum 128 characters)
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, RGW-ADR
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol

RGW-ADR 1 URL setting of Sales Company's server

Detail To set the URL of the sales company's server to be used for Embedded-RDS.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the URL.
2) Enter the URL, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution - Do not use Shift-JIS character strings.
- Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range URL
Default Value https://b01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol

CNT-DATE 1 Set counter send start date to SC server

Detail To set the year, month, date, hour and minute to send counter information to the sales
company's server.
This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended function is available.
Use Case When the non-Canon-made extension function of the Embedded-RDS is available
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range YYYYMMDDHHMM (12 digits)
YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date, HH: Hour, MM: Minute
Default Value 000000000000
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol

891
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL
CNT-INTV 1 Set counter send interval to SC server
Detail To set the interval of sending counter information to the sales company's server in a unit of one hour.
This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended function is available.
Use Case When using the Embedded-RDS third-party extended function
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 168 (=1 week)
Unit hour
Default Value 24
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

CDS-CTL 1 Set country/area when using CDS

Detail To set country/region to enable CDS.
In principle, the default value is the same as that of CONFIG. If the value differs from the
country/region of the vice-company of sales, change the setting.
Use Case When enabling CDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution If the setting value is not configured to be the same as the country/region of the vice-company of
sales, the necessary firmware may not be able to be downloaded.
Display/Adj/Set Range JP: Japan, US: USA, GB: Great Britain, FR: France, DE: Germany, IT: Italy, AU: Australia, SG:
Singapore, NL: Netherlands, KR: Korea, CN: China, TW: Taiwan, ES: Spain, SE: Sweden, PT:
Portugal, NO: Norway, DK: Denmark, FI: Finland, PL: Poland, HU: Hungary, CZ: Czech Republic,
SI: Slovenia, GR: Greece, EE: Estonia, RU: Russia, SK: Slovakia, RO: Romania, HR: Croatia, BG:
Bulgaria, TR: Turkey, TH: Thailand, VN: Vietnam, AR: Argentina, IN: India, CA: Canada, LA: Latin
America, HK: Hong Kong
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG
Supplement/Memo CDS: Contents Delivery System

RDSHDPOS 1 Auto adj of Reader shading position

Detail To automatically adjust the Scanner Unit (for front side) position in feed direction when reading the
White Plate on the left edge of the Copyboard Glass.
The adjustment result is reflected to ADJ-S.
Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range At start of operation: START, During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Required Time 10 sec
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-S
Supplement/Memo Shading: It determines the white color reference by reading the White Plate.

BIT-SVC 1 OFF/ON of Web service of E-RDS

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set ON/OFF of Web service function of E-RDS.
When OFF is selected, authentication information cannot be obtained from E-RDS.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1

892
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL
NFC-USE 1 ON/OFF of NFC option
Detail To set whether to enable the installed NFC option.
Set 1 when using the NFC option. [Use NFC Card Emulation] is displayed in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When installing the NFC option
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Additional Management Settings> Device Management> Use NFC Card Emulation
Functions Mode

BLE-USE 1 ON/OFF of BLE module option

Detail To set whether to enable the installed BLE module option.
Set 1 when using the BLE module option. The BLE setting screen is displayed in
[Settings/Registration].
Use Case When installing the BLE module option
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Do not set 1 when the BLE module option is not installed.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

INSTDTST 1 Batch set installation date info: YMDHN

Detail Information on the current date and time is entered collectively in YMDHN of INSTDT by
pressing INSTDTST.
Use Case At installation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Related Service Mode COPIER>OPTION>USER>INSTDT-Y
COPIER>OPTION>USER>INSTDT-M
COPIER>OPTION>USER>INSTDT-D
COPIER>OPTION>USER>INSTDT-H
COPIER>OPTION>USER>INSTDT-N

FAX-USE 1 Enable/disable FAX function

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To switch enable/disable of the FAX function of a device mounted with a FAX Board.
Use Case When disabling the FAX function of a device mounted with a FAX Board
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn ON/OFF the Main Power.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1

SUB-IF 1 Set for line connecting to cloud service

Detail To select the network line connecting to the Canon cloud service
Use Case When the Canon cloud service is used with a sub line
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select either [Wired LAN+Wireless LAN] or [Wired LAN+Wired LAN] when selecting interface
2) Configure the network setting for the sub line
3) Select 1 for this setting
4) Turn the main power OFF, and then ON
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Main line, 1: Sub line
Default Value 0

893
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL
RMS-RGKY 1 Setting the Device Registration Key
Detail By setting this item in advance, the device registration key input screen can be skipped when
selecting "Counter/Device Information > Monitoring Service".
Use Case To reduce the number of UGW connection steps by entering the Device Registration Key
for pre-installation.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution Dealer Tenant has a different Device Registration Key.
If nothing is entered, the Device Registration Key entry screen is displayed.
Display/Adj/Set Range Input character : 0 to 9
Number of input character : 8 or 16 digit number
Default Value JP:78453833 AR:__BLANK__ AU:__BLANK__ CN:__BLANK__ CZ:__BLANK__ DK:__BLANK_
_ EE:__BLANK__ FI:__BLANK__ FR:__BLANK__ DE:__BLANK__ GR:__BLANK__ HU:__
BLANK__ IN:__BLANK__ IT:__BLANK__ KR:__BLANK__ NL:__BLANK__ NO:__BLANK__ PL:_
_BLANK__ PT:__BLANK__ RU:__BLANK__ SG:__BLANK__ SI:__BLANK__ ES:__BLANK__
SE:__BLANK__ TW:__BLANK__ GB:__BLANK__ US:__BLANK__ OTHER:78453833
Supplement/Memo Device Registration Key : 8 or 16 digit number

■ CCD
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD
DF-WLVL1 1 White level adj in book mode: color
Detail To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually
used by the user on the Copyboard Glass.
Note: About the paper to be used for adjustment
If "paper with different whiteness between the front and the back" or "paper with different whiteness
within the same surface" is used to adjust, the color tone may change between the front and
the back.
Use Case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set a paper on the Copyboard Glass.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL2 in a row.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL2

894
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD
DF-WLVL2 1 White level adj: stream reading, color
Detail To adjust the white level for stream reading by setting the paper which is usually used by the user
on the DADF.
Note: About the paper to be used for adjustment
If "paper with different whiteness between the front and the back" or "paper with different whiteness
within the same surface" is used to adjust, the color tone may change between the front and
the back.
Use Case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the DADF.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL1.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1
Supplement/Memo - In the case of DADF (reverse model)
The Scanner Unit (for front side) calculates the white level correction coefficient based on the
luminance at copyboard reading detected with DF-WLVL1 and the luminance at stream reading
detected with DF-WLVL2.
- In the case of DADF (1-path model)
The Scanner Unit (for front side) calculates the white level correction coefficient based on the
luminance at copyboard reading detected with DF-WLVL1, the luminance at stream reading
detected with DF-WLVL2, and the luminance at stream reading that the Scanner Unit (for back
side) detected with DF-WLVL2.

DF-LNR 1 Deriving of DADF front/back linearity

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity characteristics when using the DADF (1-path model) based
on the scanned data that has been backed up at factory.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the value of the reader's service label.
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFCH-R2/R10/G2/G10/B2/B10, DFCH2R2/R10/G2/G10/B2/B10,
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!

MTF-CLC 1 Deriving of MTF filter coefficient

Detail To derive the MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the MTF value which has been
backed up.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to enter the MTF values for the Scanner Units (for front side/back side) in MTF-M1 to 12/S1
to 12 and MTF2-M1 to 12/S1 to 12 in advance.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF-M1 - M12, MTF-S1 - S12, MTF2-M1 - M12, MTF2-S1 - S12
Supplement/Memo MTF values are written on the labels of the Scanner Units.

895
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD
DF-WLVL3 1 White level adj in book mode: B&W
Detail To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting a paper which is usually
used by the user on the Copyboard Glass.
Note: About the paper to be used for adjustment
If "paper with different whiteness between the front and the back" or "paper with different whiteness
within the same surface" is used to adjust, the color tone may change between the front and
the back.
Use Case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set a paper on the Copyboard Glass.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL4 in a row.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL4

DF-WLVL4 1 White level adj: stream reading, B&W

Detail To adjust the white level for stream reading by setting the paper which is usually used by the user
on the DADF.
Note: About the paper to be used for adjustment
If "paper with different whiteness between the front and the back" or "paper with different whiteness
within the same surface" is used to adjust, the color tone may change between the front and
the back.
Use Case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the DADF.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL3.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3
Supplement/Memo - In the case of DADF (reverse model)
The Scanner Unit (for front side) calculates the white level correction coefficient based on the
luminance at copyboard reading detected with DF-WLVL3 and the luminance at stream reading
detected with DF-WLVL4.
- In the case of DADF (1-path model)
The Scanner Unit (for front side) calculates the white level correction coefficient based on the
luminance at copyboard reading detected with DF-WLVL3, the luminance at stream reading
detected with DF-WLVL4, and the luminance at stream reading that the Scanner Unit (for back
side) detected with DF-WLVL4.

BW-TGT 1 Set of B&W shading target value

Detail After the white level data (X/Y/Z) for the Standard White Plate is set, read the Standard White Plate
and set the black and white shading target value.
Use Case When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after execution of COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, W-
PLT-Z.
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y/Z, SH-TRGT

896
 8. Service Mode

■ CST
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CST
MF-A4R 1 Reg Multi-purpose Tray A4R stdrd width
Detail To register the standard value of A4R paper width (210 mm) on the Multi-purpose Tray.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set A4R paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so that it fits the paper width.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
The value is registered after automatic adjustment.
Caution After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R, and write
it down on the service label.
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R

MF-A6R 1 Reg Multi-purpose Tray A6R stdrd width

Detail To register the standard value of A6R paper width (105 mm) on the Multi-purpose Tray.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A6R.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set A6R paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so that it fits the paper width.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
The value is registered after automatic adjustment.
Caution After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A6R, and write
it down on the service label.
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A6R

MF-A4 1 Reg Multi-purpose Tray A4 standard width

Detail To register the standard value of A4 paper width (297 mm) on the Multi-purpose Tray.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set A4 paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so that it fits the paper width.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
The value is registered after automatic adjustment.
Caution After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4, and write
it down on the service label.
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4

DK1-INT1 1 Initialization at Deck parts replacement

Detail To execute initialization of Paper Deck. Lite at parts replacement.
By executing this item, the lifter moves up from the lower limit position and stops when the
Paper Surface Sensor detects paper top face. The travel distance is reflected to the paper level
detection control.
Use Case When replacing the Pickup Unit/PCB/compartment
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Execute this item while there is no paper in a deck and the lifter is in stopped state.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Required Time 30 sec

DK1-SPAD 1 Setting of Deck Lifter stop position

Detail To set stop position of the lifter when opening the compartment of the Paper Deck Unit.
When 0 is set, the lifter moves down to the lower limit position when the compartment is opened.
When 1 is set, the lifer moves up to the pickup position and then the compartment opens. The
height of the Pre-separation Plate can be adjusted.
Even 1 is set, the value is returned to 0 when the compartment is opened.
Use Case When adjusting pre-separation position after replacing the Pickup Unit/compartment
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution The value is returned to 0 when the compartment is opened.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Stop at lower limit position (normal), 1: Stop at pickup position
Default Value 0

897
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CST
DK1-LIFT 1 Drive of Deck Lifter Motor
Detail To drive the Lifter Motor of the Paper Deck.
When descent timeout alarm (04-1537) occurs, the lifter wire may be wound in the opposite
direction. The Lifter Motor is driven for approximately 5 seconds to wind the wire correctly.
Use Case At recovery from descent timeout alarm
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Close the compartment.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!

■ CLEANING
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEANING
DRM-IDL 2 Drum cleaning
Detail To execute cleaning operation of the drum.
Use Case When the black spots appear on the copy image in the drum circumference cycle. (Toner adheres
on the drum surface.)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Copy a blank paper, and check that black dots are alleviated.
Required Time 80 sec

TR-CLN 2 Transfer roller cleaning

Detail To clean the transfer roller
Use Case When the back of paper is soiled because the Transfer Roller is soiled with toner due to jam removal
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Required Time 35 sec

FIX-CLN 2 Fixing film cleaning

Detail To clean the fixing film
Use Case When the Pressure Roller is soiled due to toner soiling on paper
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Print out the cleaning pattern (setting value: 44) with COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE.
2) Set the paper printed in step 1) to the Multi-purpose Tray by putting the printed side upward.
3) Set the paper size on the Multi-purpose Tray.
4) Press OK key to execute operation.
Caution The paper size set on the Multi-purpose Tray use A4 or LTR.
Required Time 60 sec

898
 8. Service Mode

■ FIXING
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > FIXING
NIP-CHK 1 Check of fixing nip width
Detail To check whether the fixing nip width is appropriate by printing.
If it is not appropriate, a fixing failure may occur.
Use Case - When replacing the fixing-related parts (Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller)
- When a fixing failure occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Print approx. 20 sheets of A4/LTR size paper.
2) Make a solid black print (setting value: 7) with COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE.
3) Set the paper printed in step 2) to the Multi-purpose Tray by putting the printed side upward.
4) Set the paper size on the Multi-purpose Tray.
5) Select the item, and then press OK key.
A sheet is stopped once in a state held by the Fixing Nip area, and is delivered approx. 20
seconds later.
6) Measure the nip width of delivered sheet.
It is judged as normal: (51cpm model: 8.1 to 10.1 mm, 45/35/25 cpm model: 7.5 to 9.5 mm) at the
center, and difference between front and rear is within 1.0 mm. If there is an error, execute step 7).
7) Check the Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller, and Fixing Lower Unit, and replace damaged part.
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE

■ PANEL
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PANEL
LCD-CHK 1 Check of LCD Panel dot missing
Detail To check whether there is a missing dot on the LCD Panel of the Control Panel.
Use Case When replacing the LCD Panel
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Check that the LCD Panel lights up in the order of white, black, red, green and blue.
3) Press STOP key to terminate checking.

LED-CHK 1 Check of Control Panel LED

Detail To check whether the LED on the Control Panel lights up.
Use Case When replacing the LCD Panel
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Check that the LED lights up in the order.
3) Use LED-OFF to terminate checking.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL> LED-OFF

LED-OFF 1 End check of Control Panel LED

Detail To terminate the check of LED on the Control Panel.
Use Case During execution of LED-CHK
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL> LED-CHK

KEY-CHK 1 Check of key entry

Detail To check the key input on the Control Panel.
Use Case When replacing the LCD Panel
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item and press the key on the Control Panel.
2) Check that the input value is displayed.
3) Cancel the selection to terminate checking.

TOUCHCHK 1 Adj of coordinate pstn of Touch Panel

Detail To adjust the coordinate position on the Touch Panel of the Control Panel.
Use Case When replacing the LCD Panel
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Press the nine "+" keys in sequence.

899
 8. Service Mode

■ PART-CHK
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PART-CHK
CL 1 Specification of operation Clutch
Detail To specify the Clutch to operate.
Use Case When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 6
1: Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Clutch (CL12)
2: Registration Clutch (CL3)
3: Developing Clutch (CL1)
4 to 6: Not used
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL-ON

CL-ON 1 Operation check of Clutch

Detail To start operation check of the Clutch specified by CL.
The operation stops after "ON for 0.5 sec" => "OFF for 10 sec" => "ON for 0.5 sec" => "OFF for 10
sec" => "ON for 0.5 sec".
Use Case When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value 0
Required Time 22 sec
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL

FAN 1 Specification of operation fan

Detail To specify the fan to operate.
Use Case When replacing the fan/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 99
1: Fixing Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM1)
2: Fixing Cooling Fan (Front) (FM2)
3: Heat Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM3)
4: Heat Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM4)
5: Not used
6: Developing Cooling Fan (FM6)
7: Delivery Cooling Fan (FM7)
8 to 98: Not used
99: All fans
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FAN-ON

FAN-ON 1 Operation check of fan

Detail To start operation check of the fan specified by FAN.
Use Case When replacing the fan/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Required Time 1 min
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FAN

900
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PART-CHK
MTR 1 Specification of operation Motor
Detail To specify the Motor to operate.
Use Case When replacing the Motor/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to remove the Toner Container before operating the Bottle Motor (M17). If it remains
installed, toner is supplied.
- When the Toner Feed Motor (M21) is operated, the Main Motor (M1) and the Developing Clutch
(CL1) are driven as well.
Be sure to open the cassette before operating the Pickup Motor of the Paper Deck Unit. If the motor
is operated while the cassette is closed, paper may be picked up.
Be sure to open the cassette before operating the High Capacity Cassette Shift Motor of the High
Capacity Cassette Pedestal. If the motor is operated while the cassette is closed, the Stack Push
Plate may be operated, resulting in damage.
Be sure to open the cassette before operating the High Capacity Cassette Pickup Motor of the High
Capacity Cassette Pedestal. If the motor is operated while the cassette is closed, paper may be
picked up.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 17
1: Polygon Motor (M11)
2: Main Motor (M1)
3: Fixing Motor (M2)
4: No.1 Delivery Motor (M10)
5: Bottle Motor (M17)
6: Cassette 1 Pickup Motor (M13)
7: Cassette 2 Pickup Motor (M3)
8: Duplex Feed Motor (M9)
9: Toner Feed Motor (M21)
10: Cassette 3 Pickup Motor (M101) *1
11: Cassette 4 Pickup Motor (M102) *1
12: Pullout Motor (M2) *2
13: Pickup Motor (M1) *2
14: Reversal Motor (M20)
15: High Capacity Cassette Shift Motor (M106) *3
16: High Capacity Cassette Pullout Motor (M103) *3
17: High Capacity Cassette Pickup Motor (M102) *3
*1: For the 2-cassette Pedestal
*2: For the Paper Deck Unit
*3: For the High Capacity Cassette Pedestal
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR-ON

901
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PART-CHK
MTR-ON 1 Operation check of Motor
Detail To start operation check of the Motor specified by MTR.
The operation automatically stops after operation of 30 seconds.
Use Case When replacing the Motor/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to remove the Toner Container before operating the Bottle Motor (M17). If it remains
installed, toner is supplied.
- When the Toner Feed Motor (M21) is operated, the Main Motor (M1) and the Developing Clutch
(CL1) are driven as well.
Be sure to open the cassette before operating the Pickup Motor of the Paper Deck Unit. If the motor
is operated while the cassette is closed, paper may be picked up.
Be sure to open the cassette before operating the High Capacity Cassette Shift Motor of the High
Capacity Cassette Pedestal. If the motor is operated while the cassette is closed, the Stack Push
Plate may be operated, resulting in damage.
Be sure to open the cassette before operating the High Capacity Cassette Pickup Motor of the High
Capacity Cassette Pedestal. If the motor is operated while the cassette is closed, paper may be
picked up.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Required Time 1 min
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR

SL 1 Specification of operation Solenoid

Detail To specify the Solenoid to operate.
Use Case When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 10
1: Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid (SL1)
2: Cassette 2 Pickup Solenoid (SL11)
3: Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid *1
4: Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid *1
5: Deck Pickup Release Solenoid (SL1) *2
6: Compartment Open Solenoid (SL2) *2
7: Reversal Solenoid (SL12)
8: No.2 Delivery Solenoid (SL13)
9: Not used
10: Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid (SL2)
*1: For the 2-cassette Pedestal
*2: For the Paper Deck Unit
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL-ON

SL-ON 1 Operation check of Solenoid

Detail To start operation check for the Solenoid specified by SL.
The operation stops after "ON for 0.5 sec" => "OFF for 10 sec" => "ON for 0.5 sec" => "OFF for 10
sec" => "ON for 0.5 sec".
Use Case When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Required Time 1 min
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL

902
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PART-CHK
FIN-CL 1 Specify of oprtn Clutch: Fin-Y1
Detail To specify the Clutch to operate.
Use Case When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 3
1: Lower Stack Delivery Roller Clutch (CL102)
2: Escape Feed Clutch (CL101)
3: Paddle Clutch (CL103)
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FINCL-ON
Supplement/Memo Finisher-Y1

FINCL-ON 1 Operation check of Clutch: Fin-Y1

Detail To start operation check for the Clutch specified by FIN-CL.
After the clutch operates for the specified period of time (10 to 30 seconds), it automatically stops.
Use Case When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution - When the job starts during the operation of the clutch, the finisher sequence error jam occurs.
- When the error avoidance jam occurs during the operation of the clutch, the jam becomes the
error immediately.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FIN-CL
Supplement/Memo Finisher-Y1

FIN-FAN 1 Specification of operation fan: Fin-Y1

Detail To specify the Fan to operate.
Use Case When replacing the Fan/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1: Cooling Fan (FM101)
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FINFANON
Supplement/Memo Finisher-Y1

FINFANON 1 Operation check of fan: Fin-Y1

Detail To start operation check of the fan specified by FIN-FAN.
After the fan operates for the specified period of time (10 to 30 seconds), it automatically stops.
Use Case When replacing the Fan/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FIN-FAN
Supplement/Memo Finisher-Y1

903
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PART-CHK
FIN-MTR 1 Specification of oprtn Motor: Fin-Y1
Detail To specify the Motor to operate.
Use Case When replacing the Motor/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When setting the staple motor or the saddle stitcher motor, remove each staple cartridge. When the
staple cartridge is installed, the motor is not driven.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 31
1: Inlet Feed Motor (M101)
2: Pre-processing/Buffer Motor (M102)
3: Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103)
4: Not used
5: Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112)
6: Stapler Shift Motor (M114)
7: Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105)
8: Swing Guide Motor (M110)
9: Front Alignment Motor (M107)
10: Rear Alignment Motor (M108)
11: Return Roller Lift Motor (M111)
12: Flapper Motor (M104)
13: Not used
14: Paper End Assist Motor (M113)
15: Not used
16: Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106)
17: Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109)
18: Not used
19: Staple Motor (M115)
20: Staple-free Binding Motor (M116)
21: Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201)
22: Saddle Delivery Motor (M207)
23: Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202)
24: Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208)
25: Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206)
26: Saddle Gripper Motor (M205)
27: Saddle Alignment Motor (M203)
28: Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/ Folding Motor (M204)
29: Punch Motor (M301)
30: Punch Shift Motor (M302)
31: Buffer Pass Feed Motor (M401)
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FINMTRON
Supplement/Memo Finisher-Y1

FINMTRON 1 Operation check of motor: Fin-Y1

Detail To start operation check of the motor specified by FIN-MTR.
After the motor operates for the specified period of time (10 to 30 seconds), it automatically stops.
Use Case When replacing the Motor/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution - When the job starts during the operation of the motor, the finisher sequence error jam occurs.
- When the error avoidance jam occurs during the operation of the motor, the jam becomes the
error immediately.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FIN-MTR
Supplement/Memo Finisher-Y1

904
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PART-CHK
FN2-FAN 1 Specification of operation fan: Fin-J1
Detail To specify the Fan to operate.
Use Case When replacing the Fan/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1: Inlet cooling fan (FM1)
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FN2FANON

FN2FANON 1 Operation check of fan: Fin-J1

Detail To start operation check of the fan specified by FN2-FAN.
After the fan operates for the specified period of time (10 to 30 seconds), it automatically stops.
Use Case When replacing the Fan/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FN2-FAN

FN2-MTR 1 Specification of operation motor: Fin-J1

Detail To specify the Motor to operate.
Use Case When replacing the Motor/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When setting the staple motor, remove each staple cartridge. When the staple cartridge is installed,
the motor is not driven.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 15
1: Feed Motor (M1)
2: Return Belt Motor (M2)
3: Front Alignment Motor (M3)
4: Rear Alignment Motor (M4)
5: Assist Motor (M5)
6: Stapler Shift Motor (M7)
7: Paddle Motor (M10) (Paddle up/down)
8: Paddle Motor (M10) (Paper retainer up/down)
9: Stapler Motor (M8)
10: Clinch Motor (M9)
11: Tray Shift Motor (M6)
12: Not Used
13: Punch Feed Motor (M3)
14: Punch Motor (M2)
15: Punch Horizontal Registration Motor (M1)
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FN2MTRON

FN2MTRON 1 Operation check of motor: Fin-J1

Detail To start operation check of the motor specified by FN2-MTR.
After the motor operates for the specified period of time (10 to 30 seconds), it automatically stops.
Use Case - When checking whether there is any failure in the motor
- When checking the operation of the replaced motor
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution - When the job starts during the operation of the motor, the finisher sequence error jam occurs.
- When the error avoidance jam occurs during the operation of the motor, the jam becomes the
error immediately.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FN2-MTR

905
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PART-CHK
FN2-SL 1 Specification of oprtn solenoid: Fin-J1
Detail To specify the Solenoid to operate.
Use Case When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1: Paper Trailing Edge Pushing Guide Solenoid (SL1)
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FN2SL-ON

FN2SL-ON 1 Operation check of solenoid: Fin-J1

Detail To start operation check for the Solenoid specified by FN2-SL.
After the solenoid operates for the specified period of time (10 to 30 seconds), it
automatically stops.
Use Case When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FN2-SL

■ CLEAR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR
ERR 1 Clear of error code
Detail To clear the specific error code.
Use Case At error occurrence
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

DC-CON 1 RAM clear of DC Controller PCB

Detail To clear the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB.
Not clear the counter.
Use Case When clearing RAM data of the DC Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter
necessary setting values.
- The RAM data is cleared After the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> IN-TRAY

R-CON 1 RAM clear of Reader Controller PCB

Detail To clear the RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB.
Use Case When clearing RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter
necessary setting values.
- The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT

JAM-HIST 1 Clear of jam history

Detail To clear the jam history.
Use Case When clearing the jam history
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> JAM

906
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR
ERR-HIST 1 Clear of error code history
Detail To clear the error code history.
Use Case When clearing the error code history
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ERR

PWD-CLR 1 Clear of system administrator password

Detail * Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To clear the password of the system administrator set in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When clearing the password of the system administrator
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.

ADRS-BK 1 Clear of address book

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To clear the address book data.
Use Case When clearing the address book data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution The address book data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.

CNT-MCON 1 Clear of Main Controller service counter

Detail To clear the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB.
Use Case When clearing the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER
Supplement/Memo See COUNTER for the target counter.

CNT-DCON 1 Clear of DC Controller service counter

Detail To clear the service counter counted by the DC Controller PCB.
Use Case When clearing the service counter counted by the DC Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER

MMI 1 Clear Settings/Registration setting VL

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To clear the Settings/Registration setting values.
- Preferences (excluding values for Paper Type Management Settings)
- Adjustment/Maintenance
- Function Settings
- Set Destination (excluding Address Lists)
- Management Settings (excluding Department ID Management)
Use Case When clearing various setting values of [Settings/Registration]
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution - The setting value is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
- If this item is executed while a login application other than User Authentication is running, it
switched to User Authentication after reboot. Set the login application using SMS as needed.
Supplement/Memo SMS (Service Management Service): An application for management which can be used on
remote UI.

907
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR
MN-CON 1 Deletion of setting values
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To delete the setting values of address lists, forwarding settings, Settings/Registration and
service mode.
For details, refer to "Backup Data List" in the Service Manual.
Use Case When initializing the setting values
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
The machine is automatically rebooted.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter
necessary setting value.
- RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
- If this item is executed while a login application other than User Authentication is running, it
switched to User Authentication after reboot. Set the login application using SMS as needed.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
Supplement/Memo SMS (Service Management Service): An application for management which can be used on
remote UI.

CARD 1 Clear of card ID-related data

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To clear the data related to the card ID (department).
Use Case When clearing the data related to the card ID
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution The value is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.

ALARM 1 Clear of alarm log

Detail To clear alarm log.
Use Case When clearing alarm log
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution The alarm log is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ALARM-2

908
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR
CA-KEY 2 Deletion of CA certificate and key pair
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To simultaneously delete the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally registered by
the user.
Use Case When a service person replaces/discards the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Check that OK is displayed.
3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution - Unless this item is executed at the time of replacement/discard of the device, the CA certificate
and key pair which are additionally registered by the user remain in the HDD, which is a problem
in terms of security.
- Do not execute this item carelessly because the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally
registered are deleted when it is executed. If they are deleted mistakenly, they need to be again
registered by the user. If no CA certificate and key pair are additionally registered, the machine
condition becomes the same as the one at the time of factory shipment.
- When NG is displayed in 2), there is a possibility that deletion was not executed. In this case,
surely execute the deletion by initializing the HDD, etc.
Display/Adj/Set Range At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal termination: NG!
Supplement/Memo - The CA certificate is used in the MEAP application with E-RDS and SSL client connection, and
the key pair is used in the SSL function of IPP, RUI and MEAP.
- When the main power switch is turned OFF/ON, the CA certificate and key pair which were
registered at the time of factory shipment are decompressed from the archive , and become
available in the E-RDS/SSL function.

ERDS-DAT 1 Initialization of E-RDS SRAM data

Detail To initialize the "internal setting values" of the Embedded-RDS stored in the SRAM.
"Internal setting values" are ON/OFF of E-RDS, server's port number, server's SOAP URL, and
communication schedule with the server (how often the data is acquired), etc.
The value set by COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR, COM-LOG
is cleared.
Use Case When clear the SRAM of the "internal setting values".
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal termination: NG!
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR, COM-LOG

USBM-CLR 1 Initialize USB MEAP priority rgst info

Detail To initialize the registered ID data retained in the OS field by calling the API provided by the OS.
Use Case When a failure occurs in USB MEAP priority registration
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.

JV-CACHE 1 Cache clear of JAVA application

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To clear the cache information used by JAVA application.
Use Case When initializing the JAVA application
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.

909
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR
LANG-CLR 2 Uninstallation of language files
Detail To uninstall the language files other than Japanese and English files installed in HDD.
When installing a new language file while the maximum number of language files (11 files) have
been already installed, an existing language file needs to be uninstalled.
Use Case When deleting/switching language files
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Download the firmware in which the necessary language files are included using SST or a USB
flash drive.
Caution A language file is not uninstalled unless the downloaded language files are installed by SST or a
USB flash drive after the execution of this item. If installation is not executed, uninstallation will be
canceled. (Status of the machine remains the same as it was before execution.)
Supplement/Memo - After the execution, language displayed on the screen becomes English. Switch the language
as needed.
- There are 9 language files (JEFIGSCKT) installed at the time of shipment.

FIN-MCON 1 Clearing Finisher delvry destination set

Detail To clear the setting of Delivery Tray of the Finisher specified in [Settings/Registration] (Function
Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray Settings).
Since the delivery destination settings are stored in the DC Controller PCB in the machine,
malfunction occurs when replacing the Finisher with another type of it without clearing the settings.
If the type of Finishers is the same, there is no need to clear the settings.
Use Case When the Finisher is replaced with a different model in the field
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Additional Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray Settings
Functions Mode

PLPW-CLR 2 Clear security policy setting password

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To clear the password of the security administrator set in the security policy settings.
Use Case When clearing the password of the security administrator
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.

JV-TYPE 1 Specification of MEAP cache clear target

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To specify the MEAP cache area to be cleared.
The target area is divided into the 4 parts:
- A jar file of MEAP application bundled as standard
- Data of the application mentioned above
- A jar file of MEAP application installed additionally
- Data of the application mentioned above
When JV-CACHE is executed, the area specified with this item is cleared.
For details, refer to the Service Manual.
Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem due to MEAP application
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4
0: Entire MEAP cache area
1: A jar file of MEAP application bundled as standard
2: A jar file and data of MEAP application bundled as standard
3: Data of MEAP application which has been installed additionally
4: A jar file and data of MEAP application which has been installed additionally
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> JV-CACHE
Supplement/Memo MEAP applications bundled as standard: system application, built-in login application
MEAP applications installed additionally: non-Canon-made login application, general
application, etc.

910
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR
DK-RCV 1 Clearing of deck alarm
Detail To clear the descent timeout alarm (04-1537) occurred in the Paper Deck.
Use Case At recovery from descent timeout alarm
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

CUSTOM2 2 [For customization]

KEY-HCD 2 For R&D
TPM-DA 2 For R&D

■ MISC-R
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-R
SCANLAMP 1 Lighting check of Scanner Unit (frt) LED
Detail To light up the Scanning Lamp for 3 seconds under the White Plate and the Copyboard
Glass respectively.
Use Case When replacing the LED of the Scanner Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!

SCANLMP2 1 Lighting check of Scanner Unit (bck) LED

Detail To light up the LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) for 3 sec.
Check whether there is a missing block or no lighting in LED.
Use Case When replacing the LED of the Scanner Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!

RD-SHPOS 2 Moving to Reader Scanner Unit fix pstn

Detail To move the Reader Scanner Unit to the position where it is secured in when moving.
When moving the Reader after installation, the Reader Scanner Unit may move and get damage.
By moving the Scanner Unit to the specified position and securing it in place with a screw before
moving, damage can be prevented.
Use Case When moving the Reader after installation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to move the Scanner Unit to the fixing position and secure it in place with a screw when
moving the Reader after installation. Otherwise, the Scanner Unit may get damage.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!

■ MISC-P
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P
P-PRINT 1 Output of service mode setting values
Detail To output the service mode setting values.
Text data is saved in HDD as a file (P-PRINT-RPT.TXT).
Use Case Before executing the CLEAR service mode, etc.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE

911
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P
HIST-PRT 1 Output of jam and error logs
Detail To output the jam log and error log.
Text data is saved in HDD as a file (HIST-PRT-RPT.TXT).
Use Case When outputting the jam/error log
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE

TRS-DATA 2 Moving memory reception data to Inbox

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To move the data received in memory to Inbox.
Use Case When moving the data received in memory to Inbox
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Additional Fax/I-Fax Inbox> Memory RX Inbox
Functions Mode

USER-PRT 1 Settings/Registration menu list output

Detail To output Settings/Registration menu list.
Text data is saved in HDD as a file (USER-PRT-RPT.TXT).
Use Case When outputting Settings/Registration menu list.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE
Supplement/Memo It takes approximately 3 seconds before output starts.

LBL-PRNT 1 Output of service label

Detail To print the service label.
Use Case When printing the service label
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Place A4/LTR paper in Cassette 1.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.

ENV-PRT 1 Outpt inside temp&hmdy/Fix Rol temp log

Detail To output data of the temperature and humidity inside the machine/surface temperature of the
Fixing Roller as a log.
Text data is saved in HDD as a file (ENV-PRT-RPT.TXT).
Use Case When figuring out the past temperature inside the machine/fixing temperature information at
problem analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE
Supplement/Memo It takes approximately 3 seconds before output starts.

912
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P
PJH-P-1 1 Outpt print job log detail info:100 jobs
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To output the print job logs of the latest 100 jobs with detailed information.
In the case of less than 100 jobs, the logs of all print jobs are output.
Text data is saved in HDD as a file (PJH-P-1-RPT.TXT).
Use Case When outputting the print job logs with detailed information
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE
Supplement/Memo Output the print job logs with detailed information which are not displayed/output in the job log
screen under "System Monitor>Print>Log>Printer" and in the report of the print job log.

PJH-P-2 1 Outpt print job log detail info:all jobs

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To output all print job logs stored in the machine with detailed information (for maximum 5000 jobs).
The difference between PJH-P-1 and this item is only the number of jobs output.
Text data is saved in HDD as a file (PJH-P-2-RPT.TXT).
Use Case When printing the print job history with detailed information
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE
Supplement/Memo Output the print job logs with detailed information which are not displayed/output in the job log
screen under "System Monitor>Print>Log>Printer" and in the report of the print job log.

USBH-PRT 1 Output of USB device information report

Detail To output information of the connected USB device in the form of a report.
Text data is saved in Storage as a file (USBH-PRT-RPT.TXT).
Use Case When outputting information of the USB device in the form of a report
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > RPT-FILE

RPT-FILE 1 Output of report print file

Detail To save various service reports in HDD as a file.
The files can be obtained using PC to which SST has been installed or USB flash drive after starting
the machine in download mode.
Use Case When obtaining the service report as a file instead of printing the report out
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Supplement/Memo File size: Approx. 1 MB at a maximum

RPT2USB 1 Write serv rpt file to USB flash drive

Detail To store the report file of service mode saved in HDD by RPT-FILE to a USB flash drive.
Use Case When storing the report file of service mode to a USB flash drive
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE

913
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P
TNRB-PRT 1 Output of Toner Container ID report
Detail To output the ID of the Toner Container in the form of a report.
Text data is saved in HDD as a file (TNRB-PRT-RPT.TXT).
Use Case When checking the ID of the Toner Container
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE

K-DRPRT 1 Output of drum report (Bk)

Detail To output the Bk-color drum report.

■ SYSTEM
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SYSTEM
DOWNLOAD 1 Shift to download mode
Detail To make the machine enter the download mode and wait for a command.
Perform downloading by SST or a USB flash drive.
Use Case At upgrade
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Perform downloading by SST or a USB flash drive.
Caution Do not turn OFF/ON the power during downloading.
Supplement/Memo SST: Service Support Tool

CHK-TYPE 1 Spec HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK exe partition No.

Detail To specify the partition number of the HDD to execute HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK.
Use Case When executing HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
0: All partitions (only the areas where the operation can be executed)
1: PDL-related file storage area
2: Image data storage area
3: MEAP-related area
4: Not used
5 and 6: Image data storage area
7: General application temporary area (temporary file)
8: General application-related area
9: PDL spool data (temporary file)
10: SEND-related area
11: Update-related area
12: License-related area
13: System area
14: SWAP (temporary file/memory alternative area)
15 to 16: Not used
17: Debug log area
18: Advanced Box image data storage area
19: Print data storage area
20 to 65535: Not used
* When 4, 12, 13, 15 or 16 is set, nothing is cleared even if HD-CLEAR is executed.
* For 2, 5 and 6, HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK is executed to all of the areas by selecting one of them.
* By selecting 8, HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK is also executed to 7, 9, 11 and 17.
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> HD-CLEAR, HD-CHECK

914
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SYSTEM
HD-CHECK 1 File system check of specified partition
Detail To execute system check of the partition specified by CHK-TYPE at the next startup.
Use Case When E602/E614 error (file corruption, etc.) occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter 1, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not executed, 1: Executed at next startup
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE

HD-CLEAR 1 Initialization of specified partition

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To initialize the partition specified by CHK-TYPE at next startup.
Use Case When E602/E614 error (file corruption, etc.) occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter 1, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not executed, 1: Executed at next startup
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE

DSRAMBUP 2 Backup of DC Controller PCB SRAM

Detail To back up the setting data in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data
which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with the old setting data
and the new data is deleted.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

DSRAMRES 2 Restore of DC Controller PCB SRAM

Detail To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data
which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with the old setting data
and the new data is deleted.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP

RSRAMBUP 2 Backup of Reader Controller PCB SRAM

Detail To back up the setting data in SRAM of the Reader Controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data
which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with the old setting data
and the new data is deleted.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

915
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SYSTEM
RSRAMRES 2 Restore of Reader Controller PCB SRAM
Detail To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of the Reader Controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data
which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with the old setting data
and the new data is deleted.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP

R-REBOOT 1 Reboot of host machine (Remote)

Detail To reboot the host machine.
Use Case When the reboot is carried out with the remote control by VNC
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.

FIXIP 1 Start of fixed IP mode

Detail IP address is set to "172.16.1.100".
In an environment where wired LAN (main) and wireless LAN (sub) are used, the IP address of
wired LAN becomes the fixed IP.
During the fixed IP mode, "FIXIP" is displayed on the upper left of the screen.
Use Case When preferring to use the network settings with the fixed IP address "172.16.1.100"
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution - It is necessary to turn OFF/ON the power to recover from the fixed IP mode.
- Whether to use RUI or not when the fixed IP mode is enabled follows the setting of "Management
Settings> License/Other> Remote UI.

■ DBG-LOG
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > DBG-LOG
LOG-TRIG 2 Set of debug log storage condition
Detail To set the conditions (timing, types, etc.) to automatically store the debug logs (stored as an
archive file).
By reading the operation setting file of the setting value from the Main Controller, the conditions
written in the file are set.
When setting a new condition is necessary, read the operation setting file provided by R&D from
the USB memory.
Use Case - When changing the conditions of debug log to automatically store
- When setting a new condition
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999
Default Value 101

HIT-STS 2 Display of debug log state

Detail To display whether archive file of the debug log which is matched with the conditions set in
LOG-TRIG exists or not.
Use Case When checking the debug log automatically saved
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: No log is available, 1: Log is available
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG> LOG-TRIG

916
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > DBG-LOG
DEFAULT 2 Reset of debug log setting
Detail To clear all debug log settings and return to the state before debug log collection operation.
Use Case - When returning the device in which analyzing the cause of a problem was completed
- When resetting the debug log settings
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.

LOG-DEL 2 Clearing of debug logs

Detail To delete the debug log file.
The debug log setting is not reset.
Use Case When clearing the debug log
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.

OPTION (Specification setting mode)

■ FNC-SW
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
MODEL-SZ 1 Fixed magnifictn & DADF orgnl dtct size
Detail To set the fixed magnification ratio display and the original detection size with DADF.
It is set automatically at the time of installation of the Reader according to the location.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: AB configuration (6R5E) for Japan, 1: Inch configuration (5R4E) for North/Middle/South
America, 2: A configuration (3R3E) for Europe, 3: AB/Inch configuration (6R5E) for Asia, Oceania,
South America
Default Value It differs according to the location.

SCANSLCT 2 ON/OFF of scan area calculate function

Detail To set ON/OFF of the function to calculate scanning area from the specified paper size.
When the paper size is larger than the original size, selecting ON reduces productivity because the
scanning area gets larger.
Use Case When matching the scanning area with the paper size
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF (calculated from the detected original size)
1: ON (calculated from the specified paper size)
Default Value 0

SENS-CNF 2 Setting of original detection size

Detail To set original detection size according to AB configuration/Inch configuration.
Set 0 for AB configuration machine, and set 1 for Inch configuration machine.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: AB configuration, 1: Inch configuration
Default Value 0

917
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
CONFIG 1 Set country/area/lang/location/ppr size
Detail To set the country/region, language, location, paper size configuration for multiple system software
in HDD.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the setting item.
2) Switch with +/- key, and then press OK key.
3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range XX YY.ZZ.AA
XX: Country/region
JP: Japan, US: USA, GB: Great Britain, FR: France, DE: Germany, IT: Italy, AU: Australia, SG:
Singapore, NL: Netherlands, KR: Korea, CN: China, TW: Taiwan, ES: Spain, SE: Sweden, PT:
Portugal, NO: Norway, DK: Denmark, FI: Finland, PL: Poland, HU: Hungary, CZ: Czech Republic,
SI: Slovenia, GR: Greece, EE: Estonia, RU: Russia, SK: Slovakia, RO: Romania, HR: Croatia, BG:
Bulgaria, TR: Turkey, TH: Thailand, VN: Vietnam, AR: Argentina, IN: India
YY: Language (Fixed; e.g. ja: Japanese)
ZZ: Location (Fixed; e.g. 00: CANON)
AA: Paper size configuration (00: AB configuration, 01: Inch configuration, 02: A configuration, 03:
Inch/AB configuration)
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ

W/SCNR 1 Setting of Reader Unit installation

Detail To set installation of the Reader Unit.
When the Reader Unit is detected at startup of the machine, "1: Installed" is set automatically.
Use Case When installing/removing the Reader Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Default Value 0 (Printer model)/1 (Copier model)

FAN-EXTN 2 Fan drive extension mode after job

Detail Fan drive extension time mode after job.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1

ORG-LGL 2 Special ppr size set at stream read: LGL

Detail To set the size of special paper (LGL configuration) that cannot be recognized in stream
reading mode.
Use Case - Upon user's request
- When picking up special paper size original from DADF
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 12
0: LEGAL-R, 1: FOOLSCAP-R/FOLIO-R, 2: OFICIO-R, 3: Not used, 4: Australian FOOLSCAP-R,
5: Ecuador OFICIO-R, 6: Bolivia OFICIO-R, 7: Argentine OFICIO-R, 8: Not used, 9: Government
LEGAL-R, 10: Mexico OFICIO-R, 11: F4A, 12: India LEGAL-R
Default Value 0

918
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
ORG-LTR 2 Special ppr size set at stream read: LTR
Detail To set the size of special paper (LTR configuration) that cannot be recognized in stream
reading mode.
Use Case - Upon user's request
- When picking up special paper size original from DADF
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: LETTER, 1: EXECUTIVE, 2: Argentine LETTER, 3: Government LETTER
Default Value 0

ORG-LTRR 2 Special ppr size set at stream read:LTRR

Detail To set the size of special paper (LTRR configuration) that cannot be recognized in stream
reading mode.
Use Case - Upon user's request
- When picking up special paper size original from DADF
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 5
0: LTR-R, 1: G-LTR-R, 2: A-LTR-R, 3: EXECUTIVE-R, 4: OFICIO-R, 5: Ecuador OFICIO-R
Default Value 0

ORG-LDR 2 Special ppr size set at stream read: LDR

Detail To set the size of special paper (LDR configuration) that cannot be recognized in stream
reading mode.
Use Case - Upon user's request
- When picking up special paper size original from DADF
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: LEDGER-R, 1: Argentine LETTER
Default Value 0

ORG-B5 2 Special ppr size set at stream read: B5

Detail To set the size of special paper (B5) that cannot be recognized in stream reading mode.
Use Case - Upon user's request
- When picking up special paper size original from DADF
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: B5, 1: Korean government office paper
Default Value 0

MODELSZ2 2 Ppr size dtct global support in bookmode

Detail To set whether to enable global support of original size detection at Copyboard reading.
Use Case Upon user's request (original consists of mixed media (AB/Inch configuration))
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution The Document Size Sensor (Photo Sensor) is additionally required to correctly detect the
document size when the original consists of mixed media (AB/Inch configuration).
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Detected with detection size according to location, 1: Detected with AB/Inch mixed media.
Default Value 0

919
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
SVMD-ENT 2 Setting of entry method to service mode
Detail To set the way to get in service mode to prevent information leak.
Use Case As needed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Factory default
1: [Settings/Registration] - Pressing [4] and [9] at the same time - [Settings/Registration]
Default Value 0

KSIZE-SW 2 Setting of K-size paper support

Detail To set detection/display of K-size paper (for China).
When MODEL-SZ is 0, this setting is enabled.
Use Case When using K size paper
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not supported, 1: Supported
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ
Supplement/Memo 8K paper: 270 x 390 mm, 16K paper: 270 x 195 mm

ORG-B4 2 Special ppr size set at stream read: B4

Detail To set the size of special paper (B4 configuration) that cannot be recognized in stream
reading mode.
Use Case - Upon user's request
- When picking up special paper size original from DADF
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: B4R, 1: FOLIO-R
Default Value 0

PDF-RDCT 2 PDF reduction set at forwarding

Detail To set whether to reduce the image for transmission when converting the image received by I-Fax
into PDF for e-mail/file transmission.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Following the current setting, 1: Image reduction
Default Value 0

SJB-UNW 2 Reserve upper limit of secured print job

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the upper limit for the number of reserved jobs in secured print job.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: 50 jobs, 1: 90 jobs, 2: No limit
Default Value 1

920
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
CARD-RNG 2 Card number setting (department number)
Detail To set the number of cards (departments) that can be used with the Card Reader.
Use Case When setting the number of cards (departments)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 1000
Default Value 1000

SJOB-CL 1 Set of scan job canceling by logout

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to cancel the scan job in operation by logout of the user.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution The job with scanning completed cannot be canceled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Cancel only scan job in waiting state, 1: Cancel all scan jobs, 2: Not canceled
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Scan job: A job after the scanning operation is completed.

MIBCOUNT 2 Scope range set of Charge Counter MIB

Detail To set the range of counter information that can be obtained as MIB (Management
Information Base).
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: All charge counters are obtained, 1: Only displayed counter* is obtained, 2: All charge counters
are not obtained
* : Counter specified by the following: COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER 1 to 6
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER1 - COUNTER6

CNTR-SW 1 Init of parts counter replacement timing

Detail To return the estimated life of parts counter to the initial value.
If either "00000000" or a value before the specification change is displayed in the estimated life
value of the parts counter, set 0 after upgrading of the firmware.
Use Case - When either "00000000" or a value before the specification change is displayed in the estimated
life value of the parts counter
- When changing the state back to the initial state after entering the estimated life value manually
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0: Returned to the initial value
Default Value 0

W/RAID 1 Set of HDD Mirroring Kit installation

Detail To set installation condition of HDD Mirroring Kit.
Select "1: Installed" when installing the HDD Mirroring Kit. Select "0: Not installed" when removing
the HDD Mirroring Kit.
Use Case When installing/removing HDD Mirroring Kit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Default Value 0

921
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
PSWD-SW 1 Password type set to enter service mode
Detail To set the type of password that is required to enter when getting into service mode.
2 types are available: one for "service technician" and the other for "system administrator +
service technician".
When selecting the type for "system administrator + service technician", enter the password for
service technician after the password entry by the user's system administrator.
Use Case Upon request from the user who concerns security
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: No password, 1: Service technician, 2: System administrator + service technician
Default Value 0

SM-PSWD 2 Password setting for service technician

Detail To set password for service technician that is used when getting into service mode.
Use Case When password is required to get into service mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to select 1 or 2 with PSWD-SW in advance.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 - 99999999
Default Value 11111111
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> PSWD-SW

RPT2SIDE 1 Set of report 1-sided/2-sided output

Detail To set whether to use 1-sided or 2-sided for report output of service mode.
Use Case When making 1-sided report output
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT

INVALPDL 1 Disable of PDL license

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To disable the registered PDL license.
When "1: Disabled" is set, PDL is disabled even if a PDL license is registered. This is set to the
machines installed at convenience stores, which do not allow PDL to be used.
Use Case When prohibiting the use of PDL
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Registered PDL license is enabled, 1: Disabled
Default Value 0

922
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
CDS-FIRM 1 Set to allow firmware update by admin
Detail * Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to perform firmware update linked with CDS and
collection of log files.
When 1 is set, [Distribution Update] is added to remote UI, and [Firmware Update] is added to
[Register/Update Software] of local UI. Log files can be collected from remote UI.
Use Case When allowing the administrator to update the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Do not use it for purposes other than collecting log files.
Be sure to return the value to 0 after use.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> LCDSFLG
Additional Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software
Functions Mode
Supplement/Memo CDS: Contents Delivery System

CDS-MEAP 1 Set to allow MEAP installation by admin

Detail * Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to install MEAP applications from CDS and enable
License options.
When 1 is set, Updater can be activated from [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When allowing the administrator to install MEAP applications and enable License options
from CDS.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo CDS: Contents Delivery System

CDS-UGW 1 Set to allow firmware update from Server

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to permit update of the firmware from the Remote Monitoring Server.
When "1: Enabled" is set, Updater accepts the operation from the Remote Monitoring Server in
cooperation with CDS.
Use Case When allowing update of the firmware from the Remote Monitoring Server
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Supplement/Memo CDS: Contents Delivery System

923
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
LOCLFIRM 1 Set to allow firmware update by file
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to update the firmware from the remote UI using
a local file.
This update is executed as a measure for vulnerability in emergency situations.
Use Case When allowing the administrator to update the firmware using a file
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 1

SDLMTWRN 1 [For customization]

JLK-PWSC 2 ON/OFF of PCAM password auth doc scan
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to scan the PCAM password authentication document with the MEAP application.
Use Case When scanning the PCAM password authentication document
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

FAX-INT 2 Set FAX RX print interruption oprtn mode

Detail To set the mode performing interruption operation of FAX reception print automatically.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution - Do not set this item while charge management (charging by Coin Manager, a device alone, etc.)
is used.
- During an ongoing job for which delivery setting (offset, stapling, etc.) is made, interruption
operation is performed between sets.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Normal, 1: Interruption operation mode
Default Value 0

CDS-LVUP 1 Set to allow CDS periodical update

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to perform periodical update linked with CDS.
When 1 is set, setting of periodical update can be made in Settings/Registration menu/via
remote UI.
When 2 is set, setting of periodical update can be made on the Updater screen in service mode.
Use Case When allowing the user/service technician to perform periodical update
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Prohibited periodical update
1: Display the periodical update setting screen in Settings/Registration menu/on remote UI
2: Display the periodical update setting screen on the Updater in service mode
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Related Service Mode Updater
Additional Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software> Periodical Update
Functions Mode
Supplement/Memo CDS: Contents Delivery System

924
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
WTM-DENS 2 Set density at watermark/PCAM setting
Detail When the watermark/PCAM is set, the density becomes high by changing the developing /primary
charge DC voltage so that the watermark/PCAM is reappeared.
Use Case To increased the density when the watermark/PCAM is selected at the security print mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to set this mode to OFF after the job is completed.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

AMSOFFSW 1 Enabling of AMS mode

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To enable the AMS mode.
When 0 is set, the AMS mode is enabled. The AMS mode is automatically enabled when the
following 2 conditions are satisfied.
- AMS license for an iR option is installed.
- AMS-supported Login application (User Authentication, etc.) is activated.
Use Case When enabling AMS mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Check that AMS-supported Login application is activated.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
4) Check that [Role Management] is displayed on remote UI.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: AMS mode enabled, 1: AMS mode disabled
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR> ST-AMS
Additional (Remote UI) User Management> Authentication Management> Role Management
Functions Mode
Supplement/Memo AMS: Access Management System
In AMS mode, [Role Management] is displayed on remote UI.

UA-OFFSW 1 ON/OFF of unified auth function

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set ON/OFF of the Unified Authentication function.
Set 0 when not preferring to use the Unified Authentication function because of security concern.
Use Case Upon user's request (not to use the Unified Authentication function)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Unified Authentication: A function with which it is considered that login authentication under it is
performed by logging in it using SSO-H.

925
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
MIB-NVTA 1 RFC-compatible character stringMIB write
Detail As default, MIB object which NVT-ASCII can be written exists in order to link with local UI entry
value. This violates RFC order, so a problem like garbled 2-byte characters may occur in the SNMP
monitoring system, such as other vendor's MPS.
Whether to allow writing of non-RFC-compatible character strings in MIB can be set using this item.
When 1 is set, only the character strings which are strictly compatible with RFC are written. (Writing
operation is executed from the SNMP manager.) It is not linked with local UI.
Use Case Upon user's request (operation with RFC-compatible system)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: Compatible in a conventional manner, 1: RFC-compatible, 2 to 3: Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo RFC: Document of internet-related technical standards
NVT-ASCII: Network Virtual Terminal-ASCII

MIB-EXT 1 For R&D

SVC-RUI 1 Enabling of remote UI func for servicing
Detail To set whether to enable the remote UI function for servicing (not provided to end users).
When 0 is set, the remote UI function is disabled.
When setting a value other than 0, the remote UI function is enabled and its value will be used as
the password to use the function.
Use Case When preferring to use the import function of background image file of main menu/custom menu
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (other than 0), and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Default Value 0

LCDSFLG 1 Enabling of local CDS server

Detail To set whether to use the local CDS server.
When CDS-FIRM is 1, this setting is enabled.
Use Case When using the local CDS server
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CDS-FIRM
Additional Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software> Software Management
Functions Mode Settings> Connection Server Settings
Supplement/Memo When local CDS is used, iW EMC/MC device firmware update plug-in is required.

STNDBY-B 1 Setting of duration of standby mode

Detail To set the duration of standby mode.
In standby mode, the Fixing Film and the Pressure Roller are heated/rotated while they are
engaged so it is possible to make an output at specified FCOT.
Use Case - Upon user's request (to maintain FCOT)
- At login authentication
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution By setting a value other than 0 when the machine is not frequently used, the life may become
shorter than the estimated life.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4
0: OFF, 1: 1 minute, 2 to 4: not used
Default Value 0

926
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
BXSHIFT 1 Setting of binding at 0mm binding margin
Detail To set whether to judge the job as a job "without binding" when storing a PDL job in Inbox while the
binding margin is set to "0".
By setting the binding margin to 0 mm while "0" is set, the job is processed as "without binding".
"Booklet" in "Options" on the Inbox screen can be also used.
When "1" is set, it is judged as "with binding" even the binding margin is 0 mm so "Booklet", which
has an exclusive relationship with "binding", cannot be used.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When storing a PDL job in Mail Box while 1 is set, "Booklet" in "Options" on the Mail Box screen
cannot be used.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Without binding, 1: With binding
Default Value 0

HOME-SW 1 Set screen displayed with Main Menu key

Detail To set whether to display the main menu screen or the screen registered as the startup screen when
pressing Main Menu key.
Use Case Upon user's request (to change the startup screen)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Main Menu screen, 1: Screen registered as the startup screen
Default Value 0

NO-LGOUT 1 Display/hide of logout button

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to display or hide [Logout] button.
When 0 is set, [Logout] button is displayed on the screen, and logout with the ID key is
enabled. (Normal)
When 1 is set, [Logout] button is not displayed, and logout with the ID key is disabled.
Use Case Upon user's request (for customization, etc.)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Display, 1: Hide
Default Value 0

T-DLV-BK 1 Bk Tonr Cont prior dvry alarm notice tmg

Detail To set the toner level as the timing to notify the prior delivery alarm for the Bk-color Toner Container.
Use Case When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the usage status
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution Since toner level is calculated based on the toner supply count, some errors may occur.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 40
Unit %
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

927
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
JM-ERR-D 2 Set of error display of 0CAx jam (DCON)
Detail To set whether to display "0CAx" jam as the error "E996-0CAx".
In the case of a jam, log cannot be obtained depending on the timing.
By selecting 1 when the jam "0CAx" occurs, it is displayed as the error "E996-0CAx" so that the log
can be obtained.
Use Case When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0CAx jam
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-R

JM-ERR-R 2 Set of error display of 0071 jam (RCON)

Detail To set whether to display 0071 jam as the error "E996-0071".
In the case of a jam, a log may not be able to be obtained depending on the timing.
By selecting 1 when the 0071 jam occurs, it is displayed as an error so that a log can be obtained.
Use Case When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0071 jam
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D

ASLPMAX 1 Set auto sleep shift time maximum value

Detail Set auto sleep shift time maximum value.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: 240minutes, 1: 120 minutes
Default Value 1

SEND-SPD 2 ON/OFF of SEND operation speed-up

Detail To set whether to speed up the SEND operation.
Usually, speed of SEND/XBOX is increased by performing image conversion during SEND
and Scan.
Reading speed may decrease when scanning large size color original at high resolution or when
competing operation occurs with another job during scanning. Set 1 to keep the speed.
When failure with MEAP application occurs, set 1.
Use Case - When reading speed is decreased during SEND and Scan
- When failure with MEAP application occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 0

928
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
VER-CHNG 2 Setting of firmware update operation
Detail To set how to update firmware of PCB/option which has been installed/replaced by comparing the
version of it with the version stored in the Flash PCB of the Main Controller.
If combination of firmware versions of PCB/option stored in the Main Controller and the version
in PCB/option after installation/replacement is not appropriate (operation with the combination of
firmware versions has not yet been checked), failure where analysis is difficult may occur.
It is possible to check the firmware versions at the start of the machine, and automatically write the
firmware stored in the Main Controller in PCB/option collectively as needed.
When 0 is set, versions are not checked and firmware update is not performed. Therefore, it is
necessary to manually update the versions using a USB memory/SST.
When 1 is set, firmware is updated if the version in PCB/option is old. However, it is not updated if
the version is new or old and new versions are mixed.
When 2 is set, a compatible firmware (the version where operation has been checked) is written
from the Main Controller regardless of whether the version in PCB/option is old or new.
Use Case When installing/replacing PCB/option having firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Keep the current firmware version.
1: Update the firmware if the version in PCB/option is older than that stored in the Main controller.
If the version is new or old and new versions are mixed, firmware is not updated.
2: Update the firmware regardless of whether the version is old or new if the version in PCB/option
differs from that stored in the Main Controller.
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo When updating the firmware, the main menu is displayed on the Control Panel at startup and then
a message prompting to update firmware is displayed.
By pressing [Update], the machine reboots immediately and firmware is updated.
By pressing [Skip], it returns to the main menu. The message is displayed again at next startup.

B4-USE 2 ON/OFF of B4 size detection

Detail To set whether to detect B4 size paper with Inch configuration machine.
If the Trailing Edge Guide Plate is not set properly when LTR size paper is set in a cassette,
the machine may recognize the paper size as B4. Since B4 size paper is rarely used with Inch
configuration machine, it is set not to detect B4 size paper.
When 0 is set, a pop-up message prompting to set the Trailing Edge Guide Plate properly is
displayed if the machine recognizes paper size as B4.
When 1 is set, B4 size can be detected.
The setting is applied to all cassettes except the Multi-purpose Tray.
Use Case When using B4 size paper with Inch configuration machine
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution The setting is enabled only with Inch configuration machine.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

CE-SW 1 [Reserve]
PICLOGIN 1 ON/OFF of Picture Login display
Detail To set whether to display [Picture Login] in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When switching the Picture Login function
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Management Settings> User Management> Authentication Management> Use User
Functions Mode Authentication> Picture Login

929
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
DCONRTRY 2 Set of retry at DCON comctn error occur
Detail To set whether to perform retry processing when communication error occurs between the Main
Controller and the DC Controller.
Set 1 to 3 when E733 occurs. Communication error may be avoided by retry. (It is effective
especially when E733-0001/0002/0005 occurs.)
If communication error occurs during finishing job while 3 is set, duplicated pages may be output
due to retry. In such case, set 0 to 2. Since retry is not performed during finishing job, duplication
of pages does not occur, but E733 occurs.
Use Case When E733 occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When 3 is set, duplication of pages may occur during finishing job.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: OFF
1: OFF during job, ON in other states
2: OFF during finishing job, ON in other states
3: ON
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo Finishing job: Job that 2-sided print, binding and/or collate set in "Finishing" of the printer driver.

FL-START 2 [For customization]

STAY-OUT 1 ON/OFF jammed ppr ejctn: MP Tray pickup
Detail To set whether to forcibly eject jammed paper when a size mismatch jam or a stationary jam occurs
at the time of pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray.
When 0 is set, the host machine stops at the time of occurrence of a jam. Manually perform
jam removal.
When 1 is set, the host machine does not stop even if a jam occurs. When the delivery destination
specified by the user is the host machine, jammed paper is ejected. When an option is specified as
the delivery destination, it is not ejected.
Use Case When reducing the number of jam removal which occurs frequently because of setting paper
whose length is longer than the specified length of the Multi-Purpose Tray
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution - When 1 is set, jammed paper is forcibly fed in the event of a stationary jam not caused by paper
size, and consequently noise or abrasion of roller may occur.
- It takes time until pickup of the second paper because paper size is judged with the first paper at
the time of pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray (productivity is decreased).
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> MF-LG-ST
Supplement/Memo When 1 is set, jammed paper being ejected may trigger another jam. When a jam is removed, size
mismatch jam is displayed.

3RDP-MSG 2 ON/OFF pop-up screen dspl after upgrade

Detail To set whether to display the screen to prompt the user to "Third-Party Software" at the first startup
after upgrading due to change in the platform version.
Use Case There will be no occasion to use this item intentionally.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Even if 0 is set, the screen is displayed if CDS-LVUP is set to 0.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CDS-LVUP

930
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
RCONRTRY 2 Set process at RCON communication error
Detail To set the processing to be executed at occurrence of RCON communication error.
Normally, recovery is performed without displaying an error. A log is not collected.
Set 1 when recovery processing is performed frequently. An error is displayed and a log for analysis
can be collected.
Use Case When recovery processing due to RCON communication error is performed frequently
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Perform recovery without collecting a log, 1: Collect a log and display an error
Default Value 0

■ DSPLY-SW
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW
UI-COPY 2 ON/OFF of copy screen display
Detail To set whether to display or hide the copy function.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1

UI-BOX 2 ON/OFF of Inbox screen display

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to display the Inbox function.
The setting values "1" and "2" of this item are linked with the values "ON" and "OFF" of [Mail Box]
in [Settings/Registration] respectively. The setting is reflected after turning OFF/ON the power.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2
1: Inbox function is active
2: Inbox function is active (with limitation; Storing is available with PDL to Inbox despite no display
on the Control Panel/remote UI)
Default Value 1
Additional Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings> Mail Box
Functions Mode

UI-SEND 2 ON/OFF of Send screen display

Detail To set whether to display or hide the SEND function.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1

931
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW
UI-FAX 2 ON/OFF of fax screen display
Detail To set whether to display or hide the FAX function.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1

NWERR-SW 2 OFF/ON of network-related error display

Detail To set OFF/ON of network-related error message display.
When setting "0: OFF" while the machine is not connected to network, the error message "Check
the network connection." is not displayed.
Use Case When using the machine as a copy machine
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1

UI-PRINT 2 Set of secured print-related UI display

Detail To set whether to display UI related to secured print.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Hide all UIs related to secured print
1: Display all UIs related to secured print
2: Hide Secured Print button in the main menu and the simple authentication settings in
[Settings/Registration]
Default Value 0

IMGC-ADJ 1 ON/OFF of img adj item dspl in [Set/Reg]

Detail To set whether to display the item relating to image adjustment in [Settings/Registration].
When 1 is set, detailed image adjustment procedure will be displayed only for the paper duplicated
in Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Type Management Settings.
Use Case As needed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
Additional Preferences> Paper Settings> Set Paper Type Management
Functions Mode

UI-RSCAN 2 ON/OFF of remote scan screen display

Detail To set whether to display the remote scan screen on the Control Panel.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1

932
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW
UI-WEB 2 ON/OFF of Web browser screen display
Detail To set whether to display or hide the Web browser screen.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1

UI-HOLD 2 ON/OFF of hold job screen display

Detail To set whether to display the hold job screen on the Control Panel.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: Hide (when POD function is OFF and JAL is OFF)
1: Display (when POD function is ON and JAL is OFF)
2: Hide (when POD function is OFF and JAL is ON)
3: Hide (when POD function is ON and JAL is ON)
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo POD function: JDF + HOLD functions
JAL function: A function to save the print result as a thumbnail.

TNR-WARN 1 ON/OFF of toner warning display

Detail To set whether to display the toner level warning.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> T-LW-BK

RMT-CNSL 1 Allow console application connection

Detail To set whether to allow connection from a console application (RemoteConsole).
When 1 is set, logs of MEAP application can be collected via the console application activated on
a PC.
Use Case When collecting logs of MEAP application
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

933
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW
UI-SBOX 2 ON/OFF of Advanced Box screen display
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set ON/OFF of the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel.
The setting values 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON) are linked with OFF and ON of [Advanced Box/Network] in
[Settings/Registration] respectively. The setting is reflected after turning OFF/ON the power.
Use Case When not displaying the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Additional Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings> Advanced Box/Network
Functions Mode

UI-MEM 2 ON/OFF of memory media screen display

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set ON/OFF of the memory media screen display on the Control Panel.
The setting values 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON) are linked with OFF and ON of [Memory Media] in
[Settings/Registration] respectively. The setting is reflected after turning OFF/ON the power.
Use Case When not displaying the memory media screen on the Control Panel
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings> Memory Media
Functions Mode

UI-NAVI 2 ON/OFF of Tutorial display

Detail To set whether to display or hide "Introduction to Useful Features" in the main menu.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1

UI-CUSTM 2 ON/OFF of custom menu screen display

Detail To set ON/OFF of the custom menu screen display on the Control Panel.
Use Case When not displaying the custom menu screen on the Control Panel
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1

934
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW
SDTM-DSP 1 ON/OFF of auto shutdown shift time dspl
Detail To set whether to display [Auto Shutdown Time] in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When 0 is set, automatic shutdown is not executed.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Additional Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Shutdown Time
Functions Mode

WT-WARN 1 ON/OFF Waste Toner Cntner prep mssg dspl

Detail To set whether to display the preparation warning message of the Waste Toner Container on the
status area of local UI.
Use Case When there is no need to notify the preparation timing of the Waste Toner Container to the user
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1

UI-PPA 2 ON/OFF of PPA screen display

Detail To set whether to display PPA-related information on the Control Panel or remote UI.
The setting is linked with LGCY-SCP. When LGCY-SCP is set to 0, the setting of this item becomes
1. When LGCY-SCP is set to 1, the setting of this item becomes 0.
Use Case When not displaying PPA-related information on the screen
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0 (non PPA-installed machine)/1 (PPA-installed machine)
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> LGCY-SCP
Supplement/Memo PPA (Personal Print Application): A function to hold print job. It contains the secured print function.

CE-DSP 2 [Reserve]
LOCAL-SZ 1 ON/OFF area-spec stdrd size ppr set scrn
Detail To set whether to display the area-specific standard size paper on the paper settings screen in
[Settings/Registration].
When 1 is set, paper type (FOOLSCAP, OFICIO, etc.) can be set on the paper settings screen for
each paper source.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Additional Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Settings
Functions Mode

935
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW
T-LW-BK 1 Set toner level warning mssg dspl timing
Detail To set the threshold value for the toner level in the Toner Container.
When the toner level becomes below the threshold value while TNR-WARN is 0, a toner level
warning message "Toner is low. Replacement not yet needed." is displayed on the Control Panel.
As the value is incremented by 1, the threshold value is increased by 1%. As the value is larger, the
timing to display the message becomes earlier.
Use Case When changing the timing to display the toner level warning message for the user to whom toner
is not delivered automatically
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 40
Unit %
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> TNR-WARN
Supplement/Memo It is not linked with COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> T-DLV-BK.
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

SND-NAME 1 Setting of [Scan and Send] button name

Detail To set the name of [Scan and Send] button displayed in the main menu.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: [Scan and Send], 1: [Scan], 2: [Scan]
Default Value 0

PCMP-DSP 1 Set copy cmpl scrn dspl:chg w/devc alone

Detail To set whether to display the screen indicating completion of copying at the time of charging with
a device alone.
When 0 is set, a message "Copying is complete. Do you want to start the job again with the same
settings?" is not displayed in a pop-up screen.
When COIN is 4, this setting is enabled.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN

ERR-DISP 2 [For customization]

SVC-ACA 1 Display of ACA installation button
Detail To set whether to display the [Install Auto Configuration Agent] button on the CDS Updater screen
(user mode/service mode).
Use Case When switching to install/not to install the ACA via network
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Hide (Hide user mode/service mode)
1: Display only service mode (Hide user mode)
2: Display all (Display user mode/service mode)
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Related Service Mode Service Mode > Updater
Additional Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software
Functions Mode
Supplement/Memo ACA : Auto Configuration Agent

936
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW
RMT-CNCT 2 Sw mssg dspl on machine w/o Svr connect
Detail To set whether to display the message "Contact your service representative." to the customer who
uses the machine without having Remote Monitoring Server connected.
Use Case When switching to display or hide the message depending on whether Remote Monitoring Server
is connected or not
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution This applies only to the messages displayed in the event of a toner memory detection error. (Alarm
code: 10-0091/-0092/-0093/-0094)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0

SVC-SRA 1 Display/hide of DBS installation button

Detail - In the case of RMS-SW:0
To set whether to display the [Install Data Backup Service] button on the CDS Updater screen (user
mode/service mode).
- In the case of RMS-SW:1
To set whether to display the [Data Backup Service] button on the counter confirmation screen or
service mode.
Use Case When switching to install/not to install the Backup Service via network
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Depending on the setting value, display when entering from Settings/Registration and that from
service mode differ.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Hide (Hide user mode/service mode)
1: Display only service mode (Hide user mode)
2: Display all (Display user mode/service mode)
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Related Service Mode Service Mode> Updater> Install Data Backup Service
Additional Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software> Install Data Backup Service
Functions Mode

UFOS-DSP 1 Display/hide of uniFLOW Setup

Detail Service mode to switch to display or hide [uniFLOW Setup].
Use Case When to switch to display or hide [uniFLOW Setup]
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Additional Main Menu > uniFLOW Setup
Functions Mode
Supplement/Memo uniFLOW : The name of the product destined for China is "mdsFLOW".

937
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW
RMS-SW 1 Remote monitoring service switching
Detail Switch the remote monitoring service connections
0: Traditional "Remote Monitoring Server" screen display (eRDS: Embeded RDS)
1: New "Remote Monitoring Server" screen display (CCA: Cloud Connection Agent)
Use Case When setting UGW connection for device installation
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1. After entering the settings, press the OK key.
2. Turn main power OFF/ON
Caution If change the setting to 1, disables the conventional connecting (COM-TEST) operations.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Traditional "Remote Monitoring Server" screen display (eRDS: Embeded RDS)
1: New "Remote Monitoring Server" screen display (CCA: Cloud Connection Agent / Show RMS
button in service mode menu)
Default Value 0

UK-DSP 1 Device Registration Tool Button Toggle

Detail Switch for switching display of device registration tool button.
Turn this switch to ON (1) to hide the device registration tool button.
In addition, hide parts that do not support Ukrainian (shown in English).
Use Case - When installing backup service and restoring, set the device registration tool button to "Display".
- When installing a state monitor, set the device registration tool button to "Display".
- In the case of installing a device with a possibility of displaying English in Ukraine, set the device
registration button to "Non-display".
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn ON/OFF the main power.
Caution - Display of standard function on the firmware is only available to use. Operation of the function
hidden by this switch is not guaranteed.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : Display of device registration tool button
1 : Non-display of device registration tool button, Installing in Ukrainian (Non-display of the parts
that do not support Ukrainian)
Default Value 1

SEC-MNTR 2 Display/hide of security features

Detail Show/hide status check > operating status > security *.
When set to display, security is displayed only to the administrator.
When hidden, security is not displayed.
*Display security measures status when security is pressed
Use Case Change the setting if you do not want to display security.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide
1: Display
Default Value 1

938
 8. Service Mode

■ NETWORK
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK
RAW-DATA 2 Setting of received data print mode
Detail To set print mode for the received image data.
This item is used to identify the cause whether it's due to image data or image processing in the
case of problem with received image.
Use Case When a problem with received image occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after recovering from the problem.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Normal print operation, 1: Print with original data without image processing
Default Value 0

IFAX-LIM 2 No. of max print lines at IFAX reception

Detail To set the maximum number of lines for e-mail text to be printed when receiving IFAX.
Setting of this item can prevent endless printing of the attached file data in the case of receiving an
error e-mail or failure in interpretation of the context.
Selecting 0 prints the header/footer in 1 sheet when receiving e-mail text without attached file.
Use Case When preventing endless print in the case of failure in reception
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0: E-mail text not printed, 999: Unlimited
Default Value 500

SMTPTXPN 2 Setting of SMTP TX port number

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set SMTP transmission port number.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Default Value 25

SMTPRXPN 2 Setting of SMTP reception port number

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set SMTP reception port number.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Default Value 25

POP3PN 2 Setting of POP3 reception port number

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set POP3 reception port number.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Default Value 110

939
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK
FTPTXPN 1 Specification of SEND port (FTP) number
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To specify address port (FTP) number for SEND.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Default Value 21

NS-CMD5 2 Limit CRAM-MD5 auth method at SMTP auth

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To restrict use of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is
the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol
executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the
user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.

NS-GSAPI 2 Limit GSSAPI auth method at SMTP auth

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To restrict use of GSSAPI authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is
the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol
executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the
user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.

NS-NTLM 2 Limit NTLM auth method at SMTP auth

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To restrict use of NTLM authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is
the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol
executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the
user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.

940
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK
NS-PLNWS 2 Limit plaintext auth at SMTP auth encry
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at the time of SMTP
authentication under the environment where the communication packet is encrypted.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is
the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol
executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the
user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.

NS-PLN 2 Limit plaintext auth at SMTPauth noencry

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at the time of SMTP
authentication under the environment where the communication packet is not encrypted.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is
the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol
executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the
user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.

NS-LGN 2 Limit LOGIN authentication at SMTP auth

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To restrict use of LOGIN authentication at the time of SMTP authentication.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is
the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol
executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the
user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.

MEAP-PN 2 HTTP port No.setting of MEAP application

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set HTTP port number of MEAP application.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Do not specify port 8080 when the Print Server is connected. Otherwise, you cannot browse
the device RUI in which MEAP authentication application is running (Port 8080 is reserved for
redirection of EFI Controller to the iR side.)
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 65535
Default Value 8000

941
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK
RMT-LGIN 2 For R&D
MEAP-SSL 2 HTTPS port setting of MEAP
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the port of HTTPS server in the case of using SSL with HTTP of MEAP.
Use Case When specifying the setting of HTTPS port for MEAP
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 65535
Default Value 8443

LPD-PORT 2 Setting of LPD port number

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the LPD port number.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 65535
Default Value 515
Supplement/Memo LPD port: Network port for TCP/IP communication when making prints through network.

WUEN-LIV 2 Recovery time setting after sleep notice

Detail To set the time from the sleep start from network without job assignment until the mode is shifted
to the sleep mode.
Use Case When setting the startup time after sleep notification
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 10 to 600
Unit sec
Default Value 15
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

942
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK
IFX-CHIG 1 Set operation by IFAX recv mail content
Detail To set the number of characters for the IFAX received mail content, so that the mail is not
printed/forwarded when the characters in the text is less than the number of specified characters.
This machine can output blank paper because some senders send e-mail text consists of linefeed
codes only. In such case, specify 2 (number of characters) so that there will be no output of
blank paper.
In the case of specifying any number other than 0, header/footer is printed/forwarded in 1 sheet only
if the e-mail (body) text is less than the specified value while no TIFF file is attached.
As the value is incremented by 1, the number of target characters in e-mail body text is increased
by 1 character.
Use Case When reducing print of blank paper due to e-mail received by IFAX
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that there will be no print of e-mail (body) text if the
number of characters is less than the specified value.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0: E-mail (body) text is not ignored.
Unit char
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo 1 Japanese Kanji character is calculated as 2 bytes, and the control codes (such as linefeed code,
etc) are included in the number of characters.
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DNSTRANS 1 Setting of DNS query priority protocol

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set priority of the protocol (IPv4/IPv6) for DNS query.
In the case of using both IPv6 and IPv4 while the DNS server supports IPv4, it takes time because
of timeout when executing DNS query with priority on IPv6. Giving priority on query by IPv4 can
shorten the time.
Use Case When it takes time to execute DNS query with priority on IPv6 because the DNS server
supports IPv4
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: IPv4, 1: IPv6
Default Value 1

PROXYRES 2 Setting of proxy response to Windows

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to provide proxy response or return the device status when an inquiry is received
via Windows while the device is in sleep mode.
Use Case When executing status response for query from Windows correctly
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: No proxy response, 1: Proxy response
Default Value 1

943
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK
WOLTRANS 1 ON/OFF sleep recover by packet reception
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to recover from deep sleep when receiving unicast packets to the machine
(excluding proxy response).
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2
1: ON, 2: OFF
Default Value 1

802XTOUT 1 Set of IEEE802.1X authentication timeout

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set timeout value for IEEE802.1X authentication.
If the device executes 802.1X authentication, change the wait time for response from the
authentication server.
Use Case When response from the authentication server is slow/fast
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 10 to 120
Unit sec
Default Value 30
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

SPDALDEL 2 Initialization of SPD value

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To initialize all the SPD values that are under management.
SPD values can be initialized without clearing SRAM.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SPD: Database that manages SA (Security Association).
SPD value is managed when IPSec Board is used. Normally, SRAM needs to be cleared in the case
of mismatch in SPD value.

NCONF-SW 1 ON/OFF of Network Configurator function

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set ON/OFF of Network Configurator function.
If the user does not use the function, select OFF to prevent remote attack through network.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo Network Configurator function is a function to be used for communication with NetSpot Device
Installer, etc., and the network setting can be changed from the remote.

944
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK
AFS-JOB 1 Set of FAX server job reception port
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the reception port of the fax server to which a fax client sends jobs.
Use Case When changing the job reception port of the fax server
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Default Value 20317
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFC-EVNT

AFC-EVNT 1 Set of FAX client event reception port

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the event notification reception port of a fax client.
Use Case When changing the event notification reception port of a fax client
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Default Value 29400
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFS-JOB

ILOGMODE 1 Setting of filter log target packet

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the target packet to be recorded in the filter log.
Usually, only the unicast packets to the machine are recorded in the filter log by PFW
(personal firewall).
When 1 is set, address filter is enabled for all protocols so all packets are recorded in the filter log.
However, logs of multicast/broadcast packets sent from a harmless device or an address that are
subject to rejection and have no direct relation to the machine are also recorded, and consequently
the number of logs is increased.
Use Case Upon user's request (to collect all filter logs)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When 1 is set, the number of logs is increased because logs of packets which have no direct
relation to the machine are recorded.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Unicast packets to the machine only, 1: All packets
Default Value 0

ILOGKEEP 1 Set of IP address block log hold time

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the retention time from the log time of IP block.
When access is made again from a same IP address which was blocked before, if it is within the
retention time of the previous log, its log is not recorded.
If access is frequently made from a same IP address, the log record of the UI might be filled with
its logs. If the user considers that a single log for a same IP address is enough, set the longer
retention time.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 48
0: 1 minute (special mode)
1 to 48: 1 hour to 48 hours
Default Value 1

945
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK
IPTBROAD 1 Set to allow broad/multicast TX
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to permit transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets.
Transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets is permitted without specifying an
exception address. It is permitted within the device even if it is rejected in the default setting of the
IPv4/v6 transmission filter.
Set "1: Disabled" when the user does not want to send them.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Allowed, 1: Prohibited , 2 to 5: Not used
Default Value 0

PFWFTPRT 1 Set of RST reply at IP filter FTP SEND

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
When FTP SEND is executed using an IP filter by which packets from a specific remote PC are
rejected, SYN is returned to the port 113 if the PC supports authentication of the FTP port 113.
However, since the IP filter blocks the packets, the block logs are increased and the performance
is lowered.
When 1 is set, RST is returned to the port 113 without blocking packets.
Use Case When executing FTP SEND against the OS which supports authentication of the FTP port 113
while the IP filter is enabled
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

DDNSINTV 1 Set of DDNS periodical update interval

Detail DNS registration is executed only once at start-up with the current iR, so the registered contents
are deleted in an environment where the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals.
To set the interval of DDNS periodical update for not deleting the registered contents.
Use Case When the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 48
0: No periodical update, 1: 1-hour interval, 2: 2-hour interval, ..., 47: 47-hour interval, 48: 48-
hour interval
Unit hour
Default Value 24
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

SIPAUDIO 2 Set of SIP session establishment order

Detail To set whether to establish audio session or T.38 session first with SIP.
Usually, audio session followed by T.38 session is established when using IPFAX in an intranet
environment. However, this order is not specified by the standard.
Set 1 when connecting the SIP server or terminal where the session starts with T.38 session.
Use Case When connecting the SIP server or terminal where the session starts with T.38 session
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When 1 is set, IPFAX fails with the destination where the session starts with audio session.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: audio, 1: T.38
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SIP: Session Initiation Protocol

946
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK
SIPINOUT 2 Set of internal/external number to URI
Detail To set whether to store the external number or the internal number in From URI when using NGN.
Use Case When a call cannot be made with external number while using NGN
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: External number, 1: Internal number
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo NGN: Next Generation Network
URI: Uniform Resource Identifier

SIPREGPR 2 Setting of registrar server use protocol

Detail To set the protocol used for communication with registrar server.
Although the protocol that is the same as the one for proxy server is usually used, another protocol
can be used in accordance with user and environment.
Use Case Upon user's request (to use a protocol different from the one for proxy server)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: Protocol set in Settings/Registration menu, 1: UDP, 2: TCP, 3: SSL
Default Value 0
Additional Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> SIP Settings> Intranet Settings
Functions Mode

VLAN-SW 2 ON/OFF VLAN participation packets send

Detail To set whether to send packets for participating in dynamic VLAN at link-up.
Use Case When participating in dynamic VLAN
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo - VLAN (Virtual LAN): A method for realizing grouping of terminals depending on the hub, switch
connection port, MAC address, protocol, etc.
- At link-up: At startup, when LAN cable is connected, when recovering from deep sleep, when
pressing the button to reflect the setting (dynamic update)
- If IP address of the machine has not been set, an IP address is assigned after participating
in VLAN.

FTPMODE 1 Set of FTP print default operation mode

Detail To set the default operation mode of FTP print.
Switch the default operation mode between ASCII mode and BIN mode in accordance with
user's environment.
Use Case At installation
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : ASCII mode, 1 : BIN mode
Default Value 0

947
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK
SSLMODE 2 Setting of HTTP/HTTPS port open/close
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to open or close HTTP/HTTPS port.
When 1 is set while [Use HTTP] is ON and [Use TLS] is OFF in Settings/Registration menu, HTTP
port is opened whereas HTTPS port is closed.
When 2 is set while both [Use HTTP] and [Use TLS] are ON in Settings/Registration menu, HTTP
port is closed whereas HTTPS port is opened.
Use Case When limiting the port to open because of security concern
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Normal, 1: Open HTTP port (80/8000) only, 2: Open HTTPS port (443/8443) only
Default Value 0
Additional Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> Use HTTP
Functions Mode Management Settings> License/Other> MEAP Settings> Use TLS

SSLSTRNG 2 Allow weak encryption algorithm for SSL

Detail To set whether to allow using weak encryption algorithm for SSL.
When 1 is set, weak encryption algorithm cannot be used.
Use Case When prohibiting weak encryption algorithm because of security concern
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Normal mode, 1: Secure mode ( Not used TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA, TLS_RSA_
WITH_RC4_128_MD5)
Default Value 1

NW-WAIT 2 Set connect wait at deep sleep recovery

Detail To set whether to send wakeup notice after the time set in Settings/Registration menu has elapsed
when recovering from deep sleep.
When 0 is set, wakeup notice is sent after "Waiting Time for Connection at Startup" has elapsed.
When 1 is set, wakeup notice is sent when the machine becomes ready for communication.
Use Case When a failure of the device management tool occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Wait, 1: Not wait
Default Value 0
Additional Preferences> Network> Waiting Time for Connection at Startup
Functions Mode

WLAN-USE 2 Setting of wireless LAN invalidation

Detail To set whether to disable the wireless LAN.
Bringing in and installation of the wireless LAN equipment may be prohibited depending on user.
In such case, set 0 to prevent the wireless LAN to be used. When 0 is set, [Wireless Connection
Settings] is not displayed in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When bringing in and installation of the wireless LAN equipment is prohibited
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Default Value 1
Additional Preferences> Network> Wireless Connection Settings
Functions Mode

948
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK
WLANPORT 2 Set of port filter at wireless LAN side
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to open all ports at the wireless LAN side.
When 0 is set, only the specific port is opened (filter is enabled).
Set 1 when using an application which uses a port other than the specific port. All ports are opened
(filter is disabled).
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Open the specific port, 1: Open all ports
Default Value 0

RAW-PORT 2 [For customization]

LINKWAKE 2 Set of deep sleep recovery at link-up
Detail To set whether to recover from deep sleep when link-up (disconnection and then connection of LAN
cable) is detected.
Set 0 if the closest hub or switch chatters at link-up. It can prevent recovery from deep sleep
triggered by chattering.
Use Case When the machine recovers from deep sleep due to chattering of the closest hub or switch
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not recovered, 1: Recovered
Default Value 1

WIFIRFCH 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

BLEPOWER 2 Set of Bluetooth radio field strength

Detail To set the radio field strength for transmission over BLE (Bluetooth Low Energy).
As the value is changed by 1, the radio field strength is changed by 1 dBm.
Use Case When radio field strength of BLE is not appropriate
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Do not change the setting in Singapore. It is prohibited by law.
Display/Adj/Set Range -10 to -1 (-10 to -1 dBm)
Default Value -5

WSMC-USE 2 [Not used]

WSMC-RST 2 [Not used]
INTENT 2 For R&D

949
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK
UUID-SW 2 UUID generation method change
Detail To change to the new UUID generation method when a failure due to the UUID conflict occurred.
Use Case When the UUID conflict between multiple devices occurred with following symptoms
- When searching for the device, one of devices can't be found or the same device is duplicated
- When using AirPrint from MacOS, second and later devices cannot be used for scanning
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Change the setting to "1", and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
3) Delete the registered deice from a PC or mobile device.
4) Execute the device search and register the machine to the PC or mobile device.
Caution - After updating the UUID, it is necessary to delete the device and then add the device again from
the printer driver, etc.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Old method, 1: New method
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo UUID : Universally Unique Identifier
This is a unique identifier that is not shared by 2 or more items in the world.
It is used to search and register the device on IPP/AirPrint.

ENVSTP 2 For R&D

RAW-LO 2 For R&D

■ ENV-SET
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ENV-SET
ENVP-INT 1 Temp&hmdy/Fix Film temp log get cycle
Detail To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside the machine and the surface
temperature of the Fixing Film.
As the value is incremented by 1, the cycle is increased by 1 minute.
Collected log can be displayed in COPIER> DISPLAY> ENVRNT.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to set "High" for [Sleep Mode Energy Use] in [Settings/Registration] before collecting logs,
and change the value back to its original setting after log collection.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 480
Unit min
Default Value 60
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ENVRNT
Additional Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Sleep Mode Energy Use
Functions Mode
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DRY-CISU 1 ON/OFF of condensation prev mode: 1-path

Detail To set whether to enable the condensation prevention mode when using the DADF (1-path model).
Set 1 when an image failure or E302 occurs due to condensation in the Scanner Unit. From the next
startup, the LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) lights for 30 seconds after completion of a job.
Use Case When droplets appear on the Scanner Unit due to condensation and image failure or E302 occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF (Normal mode), 1: ON (Condensation prevention mode)
Default Value 0

950
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ENV-SET
IMG-BLD1 2 Set image smear prevention mode
Detail To warm around the Developing Assembly and the Photosensitive Drum with the following
operation to prevent image smear.
When either 1, 2 or 3 is set, "Clean Drum" is displayed in user mode, and user can execute only
setting 2.
When the value is increased, the effect becomes big.
Use Case When image smear occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: OFF
1: 2 minutes (extend warm-up rotation)
2: 4 minutes (extend warm-up rotation)
3: 6 minutes (extend warm-up rotation)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> ENV-SET> IMG-BLD4
Additional Adjustment/Maintenance> Clean Drum> Start
Functions Mode
Supplement/Memo When this mode and the low temperature fogging prevention mode (IMG-BLD4) have been set
together, this mode becomes effective preferentially.

IMG-BLD2 2 Change of the charge frequency

Detail The quantity of electric discharge decreases by lowering charged frequency.
Therefore, the electric discharge product generated on the drum decreases.
Use Case - When the drum that an image smear occurred is replaced by a new drum
- When the image flow is improved more by using the image smear prevention mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

IMG-BLD3 2 Black band mode

Detail To prevent the image smear in the high humidity, the cleaning ability of the drum surface is raised
by this mode and the deteriorated toner is removed.
When the value is increased, the effect becomes big.
Use Case When image smear occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution Toner consumption is increased, and the Transfer Roller is likely to be soiled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: Default (No black band)
1: Black band is formed at last rotation every 75 jobs.
2: Black band is formed at last rotation every 50 jobs.
3: Black band is formed at last rotation every 25 jobs.
Default Value 0

951
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ENV-SET
IMG-BLD4 2 Low temp fogging prevention mode
Detail To set whether to enable the fogging prevention mode in the low temperature.
The initial rotation time of the fixing assembly is extended and the transfer bias applies during the
extended time.
The effect is increased when the value is increased.
Use Case When low temperature fogging occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: OFF
1: 1 minute (extend warm-up rotation)
2: 2 minutes (extend warm-up rotation)
3: 3 minutes (extend warm-up rotation)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> ENV-SET> IMG-BLD1
Supplement/Memo When this mode and the image smear prevention mode (IMG-BLD1) have been set together, the
image smear prevention mode becomes effective preferentially.

■ CLEANING
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CLEANING
FX-CN-SW 2 Set fix pressure roller cln sequence
Detail To set the fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence
Use Case Upon user's request (When the fixing motor sound which is generated in the cleaning sequence is
claimed from user)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1

■ FEED-SW
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FEED-SW
TFL-RTC 1 Set delvry dest at rcvry after tray full
Detail To select the delivery destination for a job with multiple pages after recovering the Delivery Tray that
reaches the full level.
When 0 is set, a job is output from the delivery destination again from which the last job
was delivered.
When 1 is set, a job is output from the delivery destination which priority is set as high at "Output
Tray Settings" in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When changing the delivery tray
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Output from the tray from which the last job was output, 1: Output from the delivery destination
which priority is high among the delivery trays
Default Value 0
Additional Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray Settings
Functions Mode

952
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FEED-SW
SP-SW 2 Set separation priority mode
Detail To set the separation priority mode.
When 1 is set, the following separation controls are executed.
- Turn OFF the transfer leading edge weak bias
- Turn ON the static elimination strong bias
When 2 is set, the following separation controls are executed to the 2nd side of thin paper 1 or plain
paper 1/2.
- Apply transfer leading edge weak bias to the leading edge of paper
- Change the transfer image area bias
If no effect is obtained by setting 1 when thin paper 1 or plain paper 1/2 is used, set 2.
Use Case When transfer separation failure occurs in thin paper or plain paper (2nd side).
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: Separation priority mode 1, 2: Separation priority mode 2
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> TMP-TBLC

■ IMG-SPD
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-SPD
CPMKP-SW 2 ON/OFF sequence to decrease copy speed
Detail To decrease copy speed in order to maintain fixing performance.
Use Case When the poor fixing
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

PSP-PR1 2 Set productivity/image priority mode

Detail To change the fixing temperature for the paper feed start at the paper size change.
The priority is given as the followings.
- The productivity is priority even if the fixing offset may occur.
- The image quality is priority than the productivity.
Use Case Set 1 when the productivity is priority.
Set 2 or 3 when the image quality is priority. When setting 3, the image quality is higher.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: OFF
1: Priority on productivity
2: Priority on image quality
3: Priority on image quality (high image quality)
Default Value 0

PSP-PR2 2 Print speed priority mode: postcard

Detail To improve the productivity and to reduce the fixing grade
Use Case To improve the productivity and to reduce the fixing grade in printing the post card
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON (Priority on productivity)
Default Value 0

953
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-SPD
PSP-PR3 2 Print speed priority mode: heavy paper
Detail To improve the productivity and to reduce the fixing grade
Use Case To improve the productivity and to reduce the fixing grade in printing the thick paper or plain paper 3.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: OFF (Priority on productivity)
1: ON (Priority on image quality)
2: Auto (Priority on image quality only in an N/L environment)
Default Value 2

PSP-PR4 2 Set prdctvty prrty: rotn collation mode

Detail To set the productivity priority in the rotation collation mode by lowering the fixing temperature for
the paper feed start
Use Case When switching the print to the productivity priority or the fixing grade priority by adjusting the fixing
temperature for starting the paper feed at the rotation collation mode.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: OFF
1: Priority on speed 1 (target fixing temperature - 40 deg C)
2: Priority on speed 2 (target fixing temperature - 60 deg C)
3: Priority on image quality (target fixing temperature - 20 deg C)
Default Value 0

■ IMG-RDR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-RDR
DFDST-L1 1 Adj img crrct level: stream read, front
Detail To set whether to perform image correction between originals in the Scanner Unit (for front side) at
stream reading based on the result of dust detection.
- In the case of DADF (reverse model)
Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the image is more likely to be
corrected because the machine is more likely to respond to small dust.
Decrease the value if a fine image portion is unclear as a result of dust detection correction control.
As the value is smaller, the image is less likely to be corrected because the machine is less likely
to respond to dust.
- In the case of DADF (1-path model)
Set one of 1 to 255 when black lines appear. Dust detection is performed and image is corrected
as needed.
Set 0 if a fine image portion is unclear as a result of dust detection correction control. In that case,
dust detection is not performed.
Use Case - When black line occurs due to dust
- Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution In the case of DADF (reverse model), a fine image portion may be unclear if the value is too large.
If the value is too small, black lines may appear on the image.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
0: OFF
1 to 255: ON (DADF (1-path model) only)
Default Value 200
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-RDR> DFDST-L2
Supplement/Memo Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With dust detection correction control, the
image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected.

954
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-RDR
DFDST-L2 1 Adj dust dtct level: stream read, front
Detail - In the case of DADF (reverse model)
To adjust dust detection level for dust avoidance control that is executed in the Scanner Unit (for
front side) after a stream reading job is completed.
- In the case of DADF (1-path model)
To adjust dust detection level for dust avoidance control that is executed in the Scanner Unit (for
front side) at start of the first stream reading after power-on.
Decrease the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust
detection. As the value is smaller, dust is less likely to be detected. When 0 is set, the cleaning
instruction is not displayed.
Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely to
be detected.
Use Case - When black line appears due to dust
- Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution If the value is too large, the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often since even small dust
that will not appear on the image can be detected.
If the value is too small, black lines may appear on the image.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
0: OFF
Default Value 200
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-RDR> DFDST-L1
Supplement/Memo With the dust avoidance control, reading position is adjusted to minimize dust to be least detected.
The control is performed at start of the first job after power-on in the case of DADF (1-path model);
whereas it is performed every time a job is completed in the case of DADF (reverse model).

DF2DSTL1 1 ON/OFF img crrct: stream, back, 1-path

Detail To set whether to perform image correction between originals in the Scanner Unit (for back side)
at stream reading with DADF (1-path model) based on the result of dust detection.
Set one of 1 to 255 when black lines appear. Dust detection is performed and image is corrected
as needed.
Set 0 if a fine image portion is unclear as a result of dust detection correction control. In that case,
dust detection is not performed.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
0: OFF, 1 to 255: ON
Default Value 200
Supplement/Memo Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With dust detection correction control, the
image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected.

955
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-RDR
DF2DSTL2 1 Adj dust dtct level:stream, back, 1-path
Detail To adjust dust detection level for dust avoidance control that is executed in the Scanner Unit (for
back side) at the first stream reading with DADF (1-path model) after power-on.
Decrease the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust
detection. As the value is smaller, dust is less likely to be detected. When 0 is set, the cleaning
instruction is not displayed.
Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely to
be detected.
Use Case - When black line appears due to dust
- Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution If the value is too large, the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often since even small dust
that will not appear on the image can be detected.
If the value is too small, black lines may appear on the image.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
0: OFF
Default Value 200
Supplement/Memo Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With the dust avoidance control executed
at start of the first job after power-on, reading position is adjusted to minimize dust to be
least detected.

■ IMG-MCON
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON
PASCAL 1 Set of auto gradation adjustment data
Detail To set the gradation adjustment data that is used at image formation.
When 0 is set, the initial LUT is used.
When 1 is set, the gradation adjustment data gamma LUT that is generated by auto gradation
adjustment (full/quick adjustment) control is used.
Use Case When PASCAL-related failure occurs/when identifying the cause of PASCAL-related failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: Initial LUT, 1: Auto gradation adjustment data, 2 to 3: Not used
Default Value 1

SHARP 2 Setting of sharpness level of image

Detail To set the setting level (center value) of sharpness of image.
As the value is increased, the image tends to be sharp, and as the value is decreased, image tends
to be soft.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 5
Default Value 3

956
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON
VP-ART 2 Setting of line art processing
Detail To set outline processing for line art on scalable PDF.
In the outline processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the field which is recognized as line
art, and is converted into vector data.
Specify whether to convert the binary image outline into vector data or to recognize it as one line
(as a thin line). For the thin line, the line width can be specified.
Change this value when you want to obtain an output of a wide-width line as one line rather than
as an outline (when you want to prioritize edit operation as a line rather than image quality).
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99
Default Value 1

VP-TXT 2 Setting of character vectorization

Detail To set vector conversion processing for text on scalable PDF.
In the vector conversion processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the field which is
recognized as text, and is converted into vector data.
In regular vector conversion, function approximation is not used for small text because the image
quality is not changed.
When the value is changed, function approximation processing is executed for small text, which
realizes smooth text although the image quality is changed.
Change this value when you want to prioritize smoothness in small text.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99
Default Value 1

C-PDL-T 2 Setting of PDL gradation reference

Detail To set whether gradation or density to be prioritized as the gradation reference for PDL.
With priority on gradation (% of halftone dots), gradation is matched with original on the shadow
area although the maximum density decreases. With priority on density, density is always matched
with original.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Priority on gradation (% of halftone dots), 1: Priority on density
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Abbreviation of CAL_PDL_Target

C-S-C-D 2 High density end edge crrct ON/OFF: copy

Detail To set ON/OFF of high density trailing edge correction function at copy.
With CAL of COPY, high density trailing edge correction function is ON in normal operation;
however, set OFF as needed.
Use Case ON: When reducing jagged line and jagged outline of text
OFF: When matching density with original on high density area, or when prioritizing density
and gradation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo Abbreviation of CAL_Shadow_COPY_Density. When adjusting the input signal 255 to low in the
case that the density of solid area is too high, jaggy (jagged effect of halftone) may occur to text,
etc. By entering the input signal 255 as solid, occurrence of jaggy can be prevented.

957
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON
LIN-OFST 1 Set special paper added dot amnt offset
Detail To set the offset amount of dots added to vertical/horizontal direction when lines on special paper
are thinner than those on plain paper.
When printing special paper, compared to plain paper, the amount of dots specified with this item
is added.
As the value is larger, lines become thicker.
When WDREDUCT is 0, this setting is enabled.
Use Case When the line width of special paper is thinner than the one of plain paper
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON> WDREDUCT

DOTSCT 2 Set high dens area white dot reduct mode

Detail To set the mode to reduce white dots occur in the high density area with 600 dpi.
Set 1 when white dots occur at regular intervals in the high density area. If it is not alleviated, set 2.
Set 0 when degree of gradation in the high density area is decreased due to parts life
or environment.
Use Case - When white dots occur at regular intervals in the high density area
- When the degree of gradation is decreased because colors in the high density area
become darker
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution - It is enabled only for PDL job.
- When 0 is set, white dots may be significant.
- When 2 is set, gradation in the high density area may become not noticeable.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: ON (Weak), 2: ON (Strong)
Default Value 0

SP-GRAD 2 ON/OFF of special gradation processing

Detail To set whether to make the density gradation characteristics of halftone the same as that of
conventional machines.
Use Case When making the density gradation characteristic the same as that of conventional machines
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 1

BIN-SEL 2 For R&D

■ IMG-LSR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-LSR
SC-PR-SW 2 Set scanner last rotation time
Detail To stop the polygon motor immediately after the last rotation so that a noise of the polygon motor
is reduced
Use Case When receiving a complaint about the Scanner Motor drive noise after completion of a job
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

958
 8. Service Mode

■ IMG-TR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-TR
HUM-SW 2 Switching of environmental fixed mode
Detail To output transfer current in accordance with the specified environment.
A low humidity environment: Output of transfer current becomes high.
A high humidity environment: Output of transfer current becomes low.
Use Case Use this item when a failure occurs to the environment sensor. The output level of transfer current
is controlled in accordance with the specified environment.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 5
0: Automatic control by the Environment Sensor
1 and 2: An N/L environment (temperature: 23 deg C, humidity: 5%)
3 and 4: An N/N environment (temperature: 23 deg C, humidity: 50%)
5: An H/H environment (temperature: 30 deg C, humidity: 80%)
Set 1 to 5 in accordance with the installation environment. Output of transfer current is controlled
in accordance with the specified environment.
Default Value 0

TROPT-SW 2 Adj of transfer output

Detail To adjust the transfer output value.
Use Case - When the moist paper or recycled paper is used so that the transfer failure occurs, decrease the
transfer output.
- When the thick paper is used so that the transfer failure occurs, increase the transfer output.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -1 to 1
-1: Decrease the transfer output value
0: OFF
1: Increase the transfer output value
Default Value 0

TR-BS-SW 2 Set transfer bias highland ev mode

Detail To control the transfer bias in printing so that it does not exceed a specified level
Use Case When the black spots appear on the image (caused by leak occurs at high latitude)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution Set 0 when the installation site is changed from a highland to a lowland.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

■ IMG-FIX
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX
FIX-CLN 2 Set fixing cln sequence execution temp
Detail To set the execution temperature for the fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence
Change the condition (temperature deference between the main thermistor and the sub thermistor)
to execute the fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence. When the input value is increased, the
execution period is extended.
Use Case When an image failure due to the Pressure Roller occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution As the short execution interval is set, productivity decreases.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0 : 35 deg C, 1 : 40 deg C, 2 : 45 deg C, 3 : 50 deg C
Default Value 0

959
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX
FIX-TEMP 1 Set fix control temp table:Thin 1/Cst,MP
Detail To change the fixing control temperature in the thin paper 1 mode at the Cassette feeding of the
25/35/45/51 cpm machine and the Multi-Purpose Tray feeding of the 25 cpm machine.
Use Case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the thin paper 1 mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Default Value 7

TEMP-CON 1 Set fixing control temp table: plain 3

Detail To change the fixing control temperature in the plain paper 3 mode
Use Case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain paper 3 mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Default Value 7

TEMPCON2 1 Set fix ctrl temp table:Thin1/MP-tray

Detail To set the offset amount of control temperature against the target fixing temperature for thin paper
1 mode at pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray of 35/45-ppm machine.
Use Case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the thin paper 1 mode at the Multi-
purpose Tray
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Default Value 7

FX-S-TMP 1 Set fixing temperature: Curl correction

Detail To change the fixing temperature to correct the curl, the low fixing and the paper slip in the fixing
N1 mode and N3 mode at the high humidity environment
Use Case When the curl, the low fixing or the paper slip occurs in the fixing N mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Default Value 7

TMP-TBL2 1 Set fixing control temp: heavy paper 1

Detail To set the offset amount of control temperature against the target fixing temperature for heavy
paper 1 mode.
Use Case When the curl, the low fixing or the paper slip occurs in the thick paper 1 mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Unit deg C
Default Value 7

960
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX
TMP-TBL3 1 Set fixing control temp: heavy paper 2
Detail To set the offset amount of control temperature against the target fixing temperature for heavy
paper 2 mode.
Use Case When the curl, the low fixing or the paper slip occurs in the thick paper 2 mode.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Unit deg C
Default Value 7

TMP-TBL4 1 Set fixing control temp: heavy paper 3

Detail To set the offset amount of control temperature against the target fixing temperature for heavy
paper 3 mode.
Use Case When the curl, the low fixing or the paper slip occurs in the thick paper 3 mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Unit deg C
Default Value 7

TMP-TBL5 1 Thin paper curl correction mode

Detail To change the fixing control temperature to correct the curl in the thin paper 2 mode
Use Case For the thin paper which is moist and soft
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When using plain paper, set this mode to OFF.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: OFF
1: S-thin paper mode (-10 deg C compared with thin paper mode table)
2: SS-thin paper mode (-15 deg C compared with thin paper mode table)
Default Value 0

TMP-TBL6 1 Set fix control temp: envlp, crd, S-crd

Detail To set the control temperature against the target fixing temperature for envelope/postcard/S-
postcard mode.
Use Case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the envelope mode, postcard mode and
S-postcard mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Unit deg C
Default Value 7

961
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX
TMP-TBL7 1 Set fix ctrl temp: plain 2, Cst/MP Tray
Detail To set the offset amount of control temperature against the target fixing temperature for plain paper
2 mode at pickup from a cassette of 25/35/45-ppm machine and pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray
of 25-ppm machine.
Use Case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain paper 2 mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Unit deg C
Default Value 7

RAG-CONT 1 Set fix smeared image ctrl mode level

Detail To set level of the mode (skipping) to control smeared image caused by fixing area.
Use Case When a smeared image occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: No skipping, 1: Small skipping, 2: Medium skipping, 3: Large skipping
Default Value 2
Supplement/Memo When this mode is ineffective, use COPIER> ADJUST> DEVELOP> DE-OFS together.

TMP-TBL8 1 Set fixing control temp: transparency

Detail To set the offset amount of control temperature against the target fixing temperature for
transparency mode.
Use Case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the transparency mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Unit deg C
Default Value 7

EDG-WAIT 2 Change of Detection Temp for Fixing Edge

Detail To change the detection temperature of the fixing sub thermistors 1/2 to switch the paper edge
cooling fans to the full speed control, and to shift the machine control to the down sequence
Use Case To reduce the switching frequency of the down sequence, to lower the fixing edge temperature, and
to prevent the high temperature offset
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4
0: +20 deg C, 1: +10 deg C, 2: 0 deg C, 3: -10 deg C, 4: -20 deg C
Default Value 2

962
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX
TMP-TBL9 1 Set fix ctrl temp: plain 1, Cst/MP Tray
Detail To set the offset amount of control temperature against the target fixing temperature for plain paper
1 mode at pickup from a cassette of 25/35/45-ppm machine and pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray
of 25-ppm machine.
Use Case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain paper 1 mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Unit deg C
Default Value 7

TMP-TB10 1 Set fix control temp: plain 1, MP Tray

Detail To set the offset amount of control temperature against the target fixing temperature for plain paper
1 mode at pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray of 35/45-ppm machine.
Use Case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain paper 1 mode at the Multi-
purpose Tray
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Unit deg C
Default Value 7

TMP-TBLC 2 Set fixing control tmp table: curled ppr

Detail To set the temperature control mode when thin paper 1 and plain paper 1/2 are selected to N1
mode/N3 mode in order to alleviate curl with the moist paper.
In addition, apply the transfer leading edge weak bias to the leading edge of paper or turn OFF the
transfer leading edge weak bias.
Use Case When the paper is moist so that the paper curl occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When 2 or 3 is set, productivity is decreased.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: Auto
1: OFF
2: N1 mode with thin paper 1 and plain paper 1/2 (Target temperature becomes low.)
3: N3 mode with thin paper 1 and plain paper 1/2 (Target temperature becomes moreover low.)
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Supplement/Memo When the setting value is "0", change the normal temperature control and the N1 mode depending
on environment (temperature/humidity). N3 mode is only hand-operated setting.

FIX-PR 2 Set fixing grade priority mode

Detail To decrease the productivity of all paper sizes for plain paper 3, heavy paper 1/2/3/4/5, and bond
paper mode by 4 ppm.
The productivity of all paper sizes is decreased by 5 ppm when paper types are thin paper 1/2 and
plain paper 1/2, and a temperature detected by the Environment Thermistor is less than 18 deg C.
Use Case When changing priority between fixing and productivity
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON (priority on fixing)
Default Value 0

963
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX
TMP-TB12 2 Set fix control temp: plain 2, MP Tray
Detail To set the offset amount of control temperature against the target fixing temperature for plain paper
2 mode at pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray of 35/45-ppm machine.
Use Case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain paper 2 mode at the Multi-
purpose Tray
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Unit deg C
Default Value 7

TMP-TB13 2 Set fix ctrl temp: thin 2, Cst/MP Tray

Detail To set the offset amount of control temperature against the target fixing temperature for thin paper 2
mode at pickup from a cassette of 25/35/45-ppm machine and pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray
of 25-ppm machine.
Use Case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the thin paper 2 mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Unit deg C
Default Value 7

TMP-TB14 2 Set fix control temp: thin 2, MP Tray

Detail To set the offset amount of control temperature against the target fixing temperature for thin paper
2 mode at pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray of 35/45-ppm machine.
Use Case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the thin paper 2 mode at the Multi-
Purpose Tray.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Unit deg C
Default Value 7

TMP-TB15 2 Set fix ctrl temp: thin 1,2nd of 2-sided

Detail To set the offset amount of control temperature against the target fixing temperature for the 2nd side
of 2-sided print of thin paper 1 mode.
Use Case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the thin paper 1 mode during the second
printing of 2-sided mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Unit deg C
Default Value 7

964
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX
TMP-TB16 2 Set fix ctrl temp: pln 2, 2nd of 2-sided
Detail To set the offset amount of control temperature against the target fixing temperature for the 2nd side
of 2-sided print of plain paper 2 mode.
Use Case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain paper 2 mode during the second
printing of 2-sided mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Unit deg C
Default Value 7

TMP-TB11 1 Set fix ctrl temp: pln 1, 2nd of 2-sided

Detail To set the offset amount of control temperature against the target fixing temperature for the 2nd side
of 2-sided print of plain paper 1 mode.
Use Case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain paper 1 mode during the second
printing of 2-sided mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 14
0 to 2: +15 deg C (Fixing grade priority)
3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)
12 to 14: -15 deg C (Productivity priority)
Unit deg C
Default Value 7

■ CUSTOM
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM
SC-L-CNT 1 Set large paper jdgmt reference at scan
Detail To set the judgment reference of the scan counter as to which to use B4 or LTR to determine
large size.
The threshold is determined by the combination with the setting of B4-L-CNT.
SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=0: paper exceeding B4 is determined as large size, paper with B4 or
smaller is determined as small size.
SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=1: paper with B4 or larger is determined as large size, paper smaller than
B4 is determined as small size.
Use Case As needed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: B4 size, 1: LTR size
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> B4-L-CNT

SCANTYPE 1 Switching of DADF + Reader type

Detail To switch the type of DADF + Reader to a different type.
Use Case At installation
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: DADF (reverse model) + Reader, 1: DADF (1-path model) + Reader
Default Value 0 (reverse model)/1 (1-path model)

965
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM
PDLEVCT1 2 Set event skipping at continuous PDL job
Detail To set event skipping at continuous PDL job.
During continuous operation, processing performance may be decreased due to other events
generated by the event in operation. In this case, decrease of processing performance can be
prevented by skipping the amount of event.
Processing performance: No event skipping < Subject of skipping 1
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: No event skipping, 1: Subject of skipping 1
Default Value 1

ABK-TOOL 1 Allow access from address book mntc tool

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to accept import from the address book maintenance tool.
Use Case When executing import from the address book maintenance tool
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Address book maintenance tool: Tool provided from CMJ.

FLK-RD 2 Flickering reduction mode

Detail To change the fixing temperature control to cancel fluorescent flickering during printing.
Use Case When reducing flickering of the lamp during print operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

TMP-TBL 2 Shortening FCOT

Detail To set the pickup permission temperature for fixing to be a temperature lower than the control
temperature for the first sheet of printing by 40 deg C.
It is applied only when fixing mode is for thin paper 1/2, plain paper 1/2, and transparency.
Use Case To shorten the first copy time, the fixing control temperature for the paper feed start is lowered (-40
deg C).
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

DFEJCLED 1 ON/OFF of DADF Original Output Indicator

Detail To set whether to light up the Original Output Indicator of the DADF.
Use Case Upon user's request (The Original Output Indicator is too bright.)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 0

966
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM
RDEV-SP1 2 RCON device special settings 1
Detail To execute the device special setting.
Use Case For customization
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given.
Display/Adj/Set Range 00000000 - 11111111
Default Value 0

RDEV-SP2 2 RCON device special settings 2

Detail To execute the device special setting.
Use Case For customization
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given.
Display/Adj/Set Range 00000000 - 11111111
Default Value 0

RDEV-SP3 2 RCON device special settings 3

Detail To execute the device special setting.
Use Case For customization
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given.
Display/Adj/Set Range 00000000 - 11111111
Default Value 0

RDEV-SP4 2 RCON device special settings 4

Detail To execute the device special setting.
Use Case For customization
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given.
Display/Adj/Set Range 00000000 - 11111111
Default Value 0

RDEV-SP5 2 RCON device special settings 5

Detail To execute the device special setting.
Use Case For customization
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given.
Display/Adj/Set Range 00000000 - 11111111
Default Value 0

967
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM
RDEV-SP6 2 RCON device special settings 6
Detail To execute the device special setting.
Use Case For customization
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given.
Display/Adj/Set Range 00000000 - 11111111
Default Value 0

RDEV-SP7 2 RCON device special settings 7

Detail To execute the device special setting.
Use Case For customization
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given.
Display/Adj/Set Range 00000000 - 11111111
Default Value 0

RDEV-SP8 2 RCON device special settings 8

Detail To execute the device special setting.
Use Case For customization
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given.
Display/Adj/Set Range 00000000 - 11111111
Default Value 0

TIFFJPEG 2 [For customization]

DCM-EXCL 1 [For customization]
FPOT-MD 2 [For customization]
SP-B01 2 [For customization]
SP-B02 2 [For customization]
SP-B03 2 [For customization]
SP-B04 2 [For customization]
SP-B05 2 [For customization]
SP-B06 2 [For customization]
SP-B07 2 [For customization]
SP-B08 2 [For customization]
SP-B09 2 [For customization]
SP-B10 2 [For customization]
SP-B11 2 [For customization]
SP-B12 2 [For customization]
SP-B13 2 [For customization]
SP-B14 2 [For customization]
SP-B15 2 [For customization]
SP-B16 2 [For customization]
SP-B17 2 [For customization]

968
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM
SP-B18 2 [For customization]
SP-B19 2 [For customization]
SP-B20 2 [For customization]
SP-B21 2 [For customization]
SP-B22 2 [For customization]
SP-B23 2 [For customization]
SP-B24 2 [For customization]
SP-B25 2 [For customization]
SP-B26 2 [For customization]
SP-B27 2 [For customization]
SP-B28 2 [For customization]
SP-B29 2 [For customization]
SP-B30 2 [For customization]
SP-B31 2 [For customization]
SP-B32 2 [For customization]
SP-B33 2 [For customization]
SP-B34 2 [For customization]
SP-B35 2 [For customization]
SP-B36 2 [For customization]
SP-B37 2 [For customization]
SP-B38 2 [For customization]
SP-B39 2 [For customization]
SP-B40 2 [For customization]
SP-B41 2 [For customization]
SP-B42 2 [For customization]
SP-B43 2 [For customization]
SP-B44 2 [For customization]
SP-B45 2 [For customization]
SP-B46 2 [For customization]
SP-B47 2 [For customization]
SP-B48 2 [For customization]
SP-B49 2 [For customization]
SP-B50 2 [For customization]
SP-B51 2 [For customization]
SP-B52 2 [For customization]
SP-B53 2 [For customization]
SP-B54 2 [For customization]
SP-B55 2 [For customization]
SP-B56 2 [For customization]
SP-B57 2 [For customization]
SP-B58 2 [For customization]

969
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM
SP-B59 2 [For customization]
SP-B60 2 [For customization]
SP-B61 2 [For customization]
SP-B62 2 [For customization]
SP-B63 2 [For customization]
SP-B64 2 [For customization]
SP-B65 2 [For customization]
SP-B66 2 [For customization]
SP-B67 2 [For customization]
SP-B68 2 [For customization]
SP-B69 2 [For customization]
SP-B70 2 [For customization]
SP-B71 2 [For customization]
SP-B72 2 [For customization]
SP-B73 2 [For customization]
SP-B74 2 [For customization]
SP-B75 2 [For customization]
SP-B76 2 [For customization]
SP-B77 2 [For customization]
SP-B78 2 [For customization]
SP-B79 2 [For customization]
SP-B80 2 [For customization]
SP-V01 2 [For customization]
SP-V02 2 [For customization]
SP-V03 2 [For customization]
SP-V04 2 [For customization]
SP-V05 2 [For customization]
SP-V06 2 [For customization]
SP-V07 2 [For customization]
SP-V08 2 [For customization]
SP-V09 2 [For customization]
SP-V10 2 [For customization]
SP-V11 2 [For customization]
SP-V12 2 [For customization]
SP-V13 2 [For customization]
SP-V14 2 [For customization]
SP-V15 2 [For customization]
SP-V16 2 [For customization]
SP-V17 2 [For customization]
SP-V18 2 [For customization]
SP-V19 2 [For customization]

970
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM
SP-V20 2 [For customization]
SP-V21 2 [For customization]
SP-V22 2 [For customization]
SP-V23 2 [For customization]
SP-V24 2 [For customization]
SP-V25 2 [For customization]
SP-V26 2 [For customization]
SP-V27 2 [For customization]
SP-V28 2 [For customization]
SP-V29 2 [For customization]
SP-V30 2 [For customization]
SP-V31 2 [For customization]
SP-V32 2 [For customization]
SP-V33 2 [For customization]
SP-V34 2 [For customization]
SP-V35 2 [For customization]
SP-V36 2 [For customization]
SP-V37 2 [For customization]
SP-V38 2 [For customization]
SP-V39 2 [For customization]
SP-V40 2 [For customization]
SP-V41 2 [For customization]
SP-V42 2 [For customization]
SP-V43 2 [For customization]
SP-V44 2 [For customization]
SP-V45 2 [For customization]
SP-V46 2 [For customization]
SP-V47 2 [For customization]
SP-V48 2 [For customization]
SP-V49 2 [For customization]
SP-V50 2 [For customization]
SP-V51 2 [For customization]
SP-V52 2 [For customization]
SP-V53 2 [For customization]
SP-V54 2 [For customization]
SP-V55 2 [For customization]
SP-V56 2 [For customization]
SP-V57 2 [For customization]
SP-V58 2 [For customization]
SP-V59 2 [For customization]
SP-V60 2 [For customization]

971
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM
SP-V61 2 [For customization]
SP-V62 2 [For customization]
SP-V63 2 [For customization]
SP-V64 2 [For customization]
SP-V65 2 [For customization]
SP-V66 2 [For customization]
SP-V67 2 [For customization]
SP-V68 2 [For customization]
SP-V69 2 [For customization]
SP-V70 2 [For customization]
SP-V71 2 [For customization]
SP-V72 2 [For customization]
SP-V73 2 [For customization]
SP-V74 2 [For customization]
SP-V75 2 [For customization]
SP-V76 2 [For customization]
SP-V77 2 [For customization]
SP-V78 2 [For customization]
SP-V79 2 [For customization]
SP-V80 2 [For customization]

■ USER
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
COPY-LIM 1 Setting of upper limit for copy
Detail To set the upper limit value for copy.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 9999
Default Value 9999

SLEEP 1 Setting of auto sleep function

Detail To set ON/OFF of auto sleep function.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Sleep Time
Functions Mode
Supplement/Memo The time to shift to the sleep mode can be set in Settings/Registration> Preferences> Timer/Energy
Settings> Auto Sleep Time.

972
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
SIZE-DET 2 ON/OFF of original size detect function
Detail To set ON/OFF of original size detection function.
Use Case Upon user's request (The LED is too bright, etc.)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1

COUNTER1 1 Display of software counter 1

Detail To display counter type for software counter 1 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Caution Display only. No change is available.
Default Value It differs according to the location.

COUNTER2 1 Setting of software counter 2

Detail To set counter type for software counter 2 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default Value It differs according to the location.

COUNTER3 1 Setting of software counter 3

Detail To set counter type for software counter 3 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default Value It differs according to the location.

COUNTER4 1 Setting of software counter 4

Detail To set counter type for software counter 4 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default Value It differs according to the location.

COUNTER5 1 Setting of software counter 5

Detail To set counter type for software counter 5 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default Value It differs according to the location.

973
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
COUNTER6 1 Setting of software counter 6
Detail To set counter type for software counter 6 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default Value It differs according to the location.

DATE-DSP 2 Setting of data/time display format

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set date/time display format according to the country or region.
After the display format is set with this mode, the order of date is reflected to the followings:
Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Date/Time Settings, and report output.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: YYMM/DD, 1: DD/MMYY, 2: MM/DD/YY
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Additional Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Date/Time Settings
Functions Mode

MB-CCV 2 Control card usage limit for Mail Box

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To restrict use of control card for Mail Box.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Unlimited, 1: Limited
Default Value 1

CONTROL 1 Charge setting of PDL job

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set charge count transmission of PDL job to the connecting charging management device (Coin
Manager or non-Canon-made control card).
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: No charge, 1: Charge
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN

974
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
B4-L-CNT 1 Count setting of B4 size
Detail To set B4 count with software counter 1 to 8 as to whether B4 is counted as large size or small size.
Selecting 1 counts B4 or larger size paper as large size while paper smaller than B4 size as
small size.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Small size, 1: Large size
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM> SC-L-CNT

MF-LG-ST 2 ON/OFF of long original mode display

Detail To set whether to display or hide the [Long Original] button.
When 1 is set, [Long Original] button is displayed in Copy > Options screen and the long strip paper
becomes available.
Use Case Upon user's request (use of long strip original or long strip paper)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
Additional Copy> Options
Functions Mode
Supplement/Memo Up to 630mm length paper is supported when DADF is used.

CNT-DISP 2 Display/hide of serial No.

Detail To set whether to display or hide the serial No. on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case When setting to display/hide serial No. on the Counter Check screen.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Display, 1: Hide
Default Value 0

PH-D-SEL 2 Set dither matrix at screen processing

Detail To set the screen dither matrix to be used for halftoning processing at the time of copy output, B&W
Inbox scan output and B&W SEND output.
When moire occurs frequently, set to 1.
When the setting is changed, the number of PG lines to be output at PASCAL control is
also changed.
Use Case When moire frequently occurs at the time of copy output, B&W Inbox scan output and B&W SEND
output. Especially when moire frequently occurs in the halftone density area of photo and image
gradation areas
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: 134 lines, 1: 141 lines
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> PH-D-SL2

975
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
COPY-JOB 1 Setting of copy job reservation
Detail To set to enable/disable copy job reservation when the Card Reader/Coin Manager is used.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Allowed, 1: Prohibited
Default Value 0

OP-SZ-DT 2 Orgnl size dtct ON/OFF at copyboard open

Detail To set ON/OFF of original size detection while the Copyboard is opened.
When "0: OFF" is set, enter original size manually from the Control Panel.
When "1: ON" is set, original size is detected automatically.
AB configuration machine: A3/B4/A4R/B5R/A4/B5/A5/B6
Inch configuration machine: 11" x 17"/LGL/LTR/LTRR
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

JOB-INVL 2 Job intvl setting at interruption copy

Detail To set output interval between jobs at the time of interruption copy.
Sorting is difficult after interruption copy because of the continuous output of the next job. Paper
interval becomes longer when starting pickup for the next job after the last sheet of the previous job
is delivered.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Continuous output of the interruption copy and the next job
1: Starting pickup for the next job after the interruption copy is delivered all.
2: Starting pickup for the next job after the previous job is delivered all. (For all jobs)
Default Value 0

TAB-ROT 1 Set of landscape img rotn at PDL:tab ppr

Detail To set whether to rotate landscape image by 180 degrees when PDL print is made on tab paper.
When 1 is set, image is rotated.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not rotated, 1: Rotated
Default Value 0

PR-PSESW 1 ON/OFF Pause All Print Jobs button dspl

Detail To set whether to display [Pause All Print Jobs] button on the Status Monitor/Cancel screen.
Use Case - Upon user's request
- When promptly stopping the print job in operation or under reservation
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

976
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
IDPRN-SW 1 Charge target job set of dept mngm cntr
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the job type that advances the department management counter.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0:
PRINT category: BoxPrint, ReportPrint, PDLPrint
COPY category: COPY
1:
PRINT category: ReportPrint, PDLPrint
COPY category: COPY, BoxPrint
Default Value 0

PCL-COPY 2 Set of PCL COPIES command control method

Detail To set the binder control method of COPIES command with PCL.
Select whether to use the control method of Canon-made PCL or use the same control method of
non-Canon-made PCL.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
0: Control method of Canon-made PCL (following the value of COPIES command that is specified
for each page to control on a page basis)
1: Control method of non-Canon-made PCL (handling the value of COPIES command, which is
specified for page 1 at the time of Collate mode, as bind figure while the value of COPIES command
for the next page or later is invalid. Same control applies as Canon-made PCL at the time of
non-sorted mode)
2 to 65535: For future use
Default Value 0

CNT-SW 1 Set default dspl items on charge counter

Detail To set default display items of the charge counter on the Counter Check screen.
For details of each type, refer to the Service Manual.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Type1 , 1: Type2
Default Value 0

BCNT-AST 1 Set of box print charge target job

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the job type that advances the count in box print with NE Controller (ASSIST).
Use Case When switching the job type that is subject to counting of the box print with NE Controller
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: PDL job, 1: Copy job
Default Value 0

977
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
PRJOB-CP 2 Set count TX at RX/report print
Detail To set to enable/disable a page-basis count pulse transmission to the charging management
device at the time of reception print or report print.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: No transmission, 1: Transmission
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Charging management device: Coin Manager, Non-Canon-made control card

DOC-REM 1 Display/hide of original removal message

Detail To set whether to display or hide the message to remove original when scanning with DADF without
opening/closing DADF after scanning with the Copyboard.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0

DPT-ID-7 2 Password entry set at dept ID reg/auth

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to require a password entry at the time of registration/authentication of
department ID.
With the setting to require entry, entry of 7-digit password is required as well as entry of
department ID.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Department ID only, 1: 7-digit (password) entry
Default Value 0

RUI-RJT 2 Connct set at invalid auth from remoteUI

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set to disconnect HTTP port when the machine receives invalid authentication from remote UI
3 times.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Continued connection, 1: Disconnected
Default Value 0

978
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
SND-RATE 2 Set compress ratio at SEND high compress
Detail To set the compression ratio when the data compression ratio for SEND (transmission) is set to
"High Rati".
As the value is larger, the compression ratio is higher (the file size becomes small).
Use Case When making the transmission file size smaller
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution As the value is larger, image quality is decreased.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Compression ratio 1/16, 1: Compression ratio 1/20, 2: Compression ratio 1/24
Default Value 0
Additional Function Settings> Send> Common Settings> Data Compression Ratio
Functions Mode

FREG-SW 2 For R&D

IFAX-SZL 2 Set of I-Fax transmission size limit
Detail To set for restricting data size at the time of I-Fax transmission that does not go through the server.
With the setting to restrict the data size, it is to be #830 error in the case of sending data that
exceeds the upper limit value.
In the case that the data goes through the server, the size of transmission data is always restricted.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Limited, 1: Not limited (Restriction applies when data goes through the server.)
Default Value 1
Additional Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Maximum Data Size for Sending
Functions Mode
Supplement/Memo Set the upper limit value for transmission data size in Settings/Registration menu.

IFAX-PGD 2 Set page split TX at IFax Simple mode TX

Detail To set whether to perform split-data transmission on a page basis in the case that the transmission
size in I-Fax Simple mode exceeds the upper limit value.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution In the case to enable split-data transmission, be sure to get approval from the user by explaining
the following:
- No guarantee for page order on the reception side
- There is a possibility of interruption of other received jobs between pages.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0
Additional Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Maximum Data Size for Sending
Functions Mode
Supplement/Memo Set the upper limit value for transmission data size in Settings/Registration menu.

979
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
MEAPSAFE 2 Setting of MEAP safe mode
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set safe mode for MEAP platform.
MPSF is displayed on the Control Panel in safe mode.
In safe mode, MEAP application is stopped while just the system application, which starts with initial
state, is activated. Logs for cause analysis of MEAP failure can be obtained.
Use Case Perform system recovery processing when MEAP platform fails to be activated due to resource
confliction between MEAP applications, service registration or use order.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Normal mode, 1: Safe mode
Default Value 0

PRNT-POS 2 ON/OFF of all pauses at error job cancel

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to pause the print operation of following jobs when a job is canceled due to an error
inside the machine (#037, etc.) except service calls during PDL print.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

AFN-PSWD 2 Setting of Set/Reg menu access limit

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set restriction on accessing Settings/Registration menu by entering password.
With the setting to enable this mode, password entry of system administrator is required after
pressing Settings/Registration key.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Password is not required, 1: Password is required
Default Value 0

PTJAM-RC 2 Auto reprint setting at PDL print jam

Detail To set to automatically restart printing after jam recovery that occurs with PDL print.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not automatically reprinted, 1: Automatically reprinted
Default Value 1

980
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
PDL-NCSW 2 Card mngm setting for PDL print job
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set to make PDL print job to be subject to card management by the Card Reader.
With the setting to enable this mode, PDL print is available only when the card ID of the card
inserted to the Card Reader matches the department ID.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: PDL print is available with no card inserted.
1: PDL print is available only when the card ID matches the department ID in the case that the card
is inserted.
Default Value 0

PS-MODE 2 Setting of PS print line drawing

Detail To set the image processing at PS print.
Set 8 when line width differs depending on the drawing position although the same line width is set.
Use Case Use case When right and left ruled lines are different in width
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
0 to 7: Spare
8: Strokeadjustment is enabled.
9 to 65535: Spare
Default Value 0

CNCT-RLZ 2 Setting of connection serialize function

Detail Connection serialize is a function to assure job grouping function of imageWARE Output Manager
Select Edition V1.0.
The setting to enable this mode can avoid job rearrangement because the machine does
not receive job data from other connection until it completes job data reception from the
current connection.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Connection: Connection to be established through network between multiple hosts (PC, etc).
Job grouping function: A function of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1.0. This is
to prevent job interruption from other PC by group job (sending multiple jobs in 1 session at
job transmission).

COUNTER7 1 Setting of software counter 7

Detail To set counter type for software counter 7 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default Value It differs according to the location.

981
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
COUNTER8 1 Setting of software counter 8
Detail To set counter type for software counter 8 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default Value It differs according to the location.

2C-CT-SW 2 Set of color counter at 2-color mode

Detail To set whether to use the single color counter or full color counter for count-up in 2-color mode.
Use Case When supporting 2-color mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Single color counter, 1: Full color counter
Default Value It differs according to the location.

JA-FUNC 2 Display of job archive function ON/OFF

Detail To display ON/OFF of job archive function.
Make the setting with the MEAP program which supports job archiving.
Use Case When using the job archive function
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Caution Setting cannot be made with this item.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

JA-JOB 2 Display of job archive target job

Detail To display the job type subject to job archive.
When the job archive function is ON, archive operation is executed when executing the target job.
Make the setting with the MEAP program which supports job archiving.
Use Case When using the job archive function
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Caution Setting cannot be made with this item.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0: N/A, 3: Limited to FAX/IFAX, 0xFFFFFFFF: All jobs
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> JA-FUNC

LDAP-SW 1 Retrieval condition set for LDAP server

Detail To set the condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server.
Use Case When specifying condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 5
0: Includes the next, 1: Not include the next, 2: Equivalent to the next, 3: Not equivalent to the next,
4: Starts with the next, 5: Finishes with the next
Default Value 4
Supplement/Memo LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol): Registering LDAP server enables to search e-mail
address, etc. from LDAP server and the result can be registered in the Address Book, etc.
Registration is available by the following: Set Destination > Register LDAP Server

982
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
FROM-OF 1 Deletion of mail sender's address
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to delete the sender's address (From) at the time of e-mail transmission.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Retained, 1: Deleted
Default Value 0

FILE-OF 1 Set file transmission to entered address

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to allow file transmission to a newly entered address.
When 1 is set, file transmission is not available by entering the address because "File" is not
displayed on the transmission screen.
The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution To restrict addresses for transmission, be sure to manually delete them because the addresses
registered in the Address Book can be used.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Allowed, 1: Prohibited
Default Value 0

MAIL-OF 1 Setting of e-mail TX to entered address

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to allow e-mail transmission to a newly entered address.
When 1 is set, e-mail transmission is not available by entering the address because "E-mail" is not
displayed on the transmission screen.
The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution To restrict addresses for transmission, be sure to manually delete them because the addresses
registered in the Address Book can be used.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Allowed, 1: Prohibited
Default Value 0

IFAX-OF 1 Setting of I-Fax TX to entered address

Detail * Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to allow I-Fax transmission to a newly entered address.
When 1 is set, I-Fax transmission is not available by entering the address because "I-Fax" is not
displayed on the transmission screen.
The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution To restrict addresses for transmission, be sure to manually delete them because the addresses
registered in the Address Book can be used.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Allowed, 1: Prohibited
Default Value 0

983
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
LDAP-DEF 1 Initial condtn set of LDAP server search
Detail To set initial condition for search target attribute that is specified at the time of LDAP server
Details search.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 6
0: Name, 1: E-mail, 2: FAX, 3: Organization, 4: Organization unit, 5: No registration 1 (any setting),
6: No registration 2 (any setting)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> LDAP-SW

FREE-DSP 2 ON/OFF of charge disable screen

Detail To set whether to display or hide the "Use Charge Management" screen for switching between
charge and no charge.
The hardware switch for switching charge/no charge in the Coin Manager enables the mode in
which all the services are available for free (store manager mode) by temporarily canceling the
charging system.
Even without the hardware switch, the mode can be switched with the software switch when it is
set to display the "Use Charge Management" screen in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When enabling all the services to be provided for free by temporarily canceling the charging system
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
Additional Management Settings> Charge Management> Use Charge Management
Functions Mode

TNRB-SW 2 Display/hide of Toner Container counter

Detail To set whether to display the Toner Container counter on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case When showing the Toner Container counter to the user
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4
0: Hide, 1: Display (70s only), 2: Not used, 3: Display (70s/180s), 4: Display (60s/70s/180s)
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Supplement/Memo 60s: The number of premature replacements of the Toner Container
70s: The number of installations of a new Toner Container
80s: The number of installations of a new Toner Container + the number of premature replacements
180s: The number of installations of unidentified Toner Container

USBH-DSP 2 ON/OFF of USB host use display

Detail To set whether to display "Preferences > External Interface > USB Settings > Use USB Host".
By selecting "1: Display", whether to use USB host on USB Settings screen can be selected.
Use Case When switching to display or hide "Use USB Host" on USB Settings screen
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
Additional Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use USB Host
Functions Mode

984
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
USBM-DSP 2 ON/OFF USB ex-mem device MEAP driver use
Detail To set whether to display [Use MEAP Driver for USB Storage Device] in [Settings/Registration].
When 0 is set, the item is not displayed so that the user administrator cannot change the setting.
Use Case When not allowing the user administrator to select whether to use the MEAP driver
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When setting 0, be sure to make the setting after the specified setting is completed.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device
Functions Mode

USBI-DSP 2 ON/OFF USB input device MEAP driver use

Detail To set whether to display [Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device] in [Settings/Registration].
When 0 is set, the item is not displayed so that the user administrator cannot change the setting.
Use Case When not allowing the user administrator to select whether to use the MEAP driver
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When setting 0, be sure to make the setting after the specified setting is completed.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device
Functions Mode

CTCHKDSP 1 Display/hide of counter print

Detail To set whether to display or hide "Print List" on the Counter Check screen.
Model name, model number information, counter check date and counter information can be output
as a total count management report.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1

985
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
DFLT-ADJ 1 Tgt Auto Adj Gradation initial dspl set
Detail To set the initial display of the target full adjustment/quick adjustment items on [Auto Adjust
Gradation] in [Settings/Registration].
This setting is enabled when EFI Controller is connected or only on the copy model which Adobe
PS/PDF is available.
When 0 is set, the target adjustment item is not displayed.
When 1 to 3 is set, the target adjustment items (Copy/Printer/Both) are displayed and one of them
is selected.
Use Case When switching the initial display at the time of Auto Adjust Gradation
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: Adjustment item is not displayed.
1: "Copy" in the target adjustment items is selected.
2: "Printer" in the target adjustment items is selected.
3: "Both" in the target adjustment items is selected.
Default Value 0
Additional Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation
Functions Mode

USBR-DSP 2 ON/OFF USB infrared devc MEAP driver use

Detail To set whether to display "Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device" in [Settings/Registration].
When 1 is set, whether to use MEAP driver can be selected on USB Settings screen.
Use Case When allowing the user administrator to select whether to use the MEAP driver
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Additional Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device
Functions Mode

POL-SCAN 1 ON/OFF Rights Management Server set dspl

Detail When "1: Display" is set, the Rights Management Server function screen is displayed.
While the Rights Management Server function is a standard feature, it is possible to hide if
not necessary.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value It differs according to the location.

986
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
PH-D-SL2 2 Set halftone process in text/photo mode
Detail When copying or B&W scanning to Inbox in text/photo mode, halftone processing of the image
which reproduces gradation of text and photo judgment areas can be specified with this setting.
Set to 1 when jaggy occurs or request to use the same halftoning method (text area) as
conventional one is raised.
Set to 2 when moire occurs frequently or request to use the same halftoning method as
conventional B&W MFP method is raised.
Even 0 is set, TBIC is used for text judgment area and low screen ruling for photo judgment area
at the time of B&W Inbox scan.
The setting is disabled when the B&W Inbox scanning density is set to auto.
Use Case - When jaggy occurs on the edge of text or thin lines at copy output. Especially when jaggy occurs
in the text or thin lines (text in halftone dots) of the area where gradation in the halftone density is
expressed like photo, graphics, etc.
- When moire occurs frequently at the time of copy or B&W Inbox scan Especially when moire
frequently occurs in the area where gradation in the halftone density is expressed like photo,
graphics, etc. and this symptom is not alleviated with PH-D-SEL or sharpness adjustment
- When receiving a request to use the same halftoning method (text area) as the conventional one
(model with image area separation method) at copy output
- When receiving a request to use the same halftoning method (both text and photo areas) as the
conventional B&W MFP method at the time of copy or B&W Inbox output
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Low screen ruling (134 lines) is used for photo judgment area and high screen ruling (141 lines)
for text judgment area.
1: Low screen ruling is used for photo judgment area and TBIC for text judgment area.
2: TBIC is used for both photo and text judgment areas.
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> PH-D-SEL

SCAN-RSL 2 Setting of scanned image resolution

Detail To set the resolution of image which is generated by scan processing.
Use Case When the scan processing performance with 1200 dpi is low
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: 600 dpi, 1: 1200 dpi
Default Value 0

JA-SBOX 2 Setting of linking with Advanced Box:SAM

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the link with Advanced Box when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, linking with Advanced Box is enabled.
Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0

987
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
JA-DFAX 2 Setting of direct fax transmission: SAM
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the direct fax transmission when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the direct fax transmission is enabled.
Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0

JA-REP 2 Setting of TX Report with image: SAM

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the TX Report with image is enabled.
Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0

JA-FREP 2 Setting of Fax TX Report with image: SAM

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the Fax TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the Fax TX Report with image is enabled.
Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0

JA-BOX 2 Setting of Inbox document operation: SAM

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the operation for Inbox document at the time of iW SAM
When 1 is set, the Inbox document can be operated.
Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0

JA-FORM 2 Setting of image composition: SAM

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the image composition when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the image composition is enabled.
Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0

988
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
JA-PREV 2 Setting of preview page deletion: SAM
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether a page is deleted from the scan preview screen at the time of iW SAM
When 1 is set, a page is deleted from the scan preview screen.
Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0

JA-PULL 2 Setting of network scan: SAM

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the network scan when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the network scan is enabled.
Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0

JA-PDLB 2 Set of printer driver multi box save:SAM

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether a document can be simultaneously saved to multiple Inboxes from the printer driver
at the time of iW SAM.
When 1 is set, a document can be saved to multiple Inboxes from the printer driver.
Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0

JA-JOBK 2 Setting of job merge allowance:SAM

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether merging jobs is allowed when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, jobs can be merged.
Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0

JA-JDF 2 Setting of JDF: SAM

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the use of JDF when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, JDF can be used.
Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0

989
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
JA-RUI 2 Setting of Inbox document access: SAM
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the Inbox document access from remote UI at the time of iW SAM
When 1 is set, accessing to the Inbox document from remote UI is enabled.
Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0

JA-WEB 2 Setting of Inbox document upload: SAM

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the Inbox document upload with the Web browser at the time of iW SAM.
When 1 is set uploading to the Inbox document with the Web Browser is enabled.
Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0

EXP-CRYP 1 Confdntial encrypt ON/OFF:add book exprt

Detail * Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to encrypt the confidential part (password part) in the Address Book when exporting
the address book and device settings via remote UI.
When 0 is set, the confidential part in the address book is exported without encryption.
Use Case When there is a need to export password without encryption because of operation and tool
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure not to allow the user to execute export without encryption because of security concern.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1

SMD-EXPT 1 Setting of export target data: remote UI

Detail To set whether to export "service mode data" from remote UI.
When 1 is set, "service mode data" is displayed as the target data of export on remote UI. When
installing more than 1 machine at the same time, the same service mode data can be registered.
Use Case When installing more than 1 machine at the same time
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo If selecting "service mode data" as the target data of export on remote UI after setting SMD-EXPT
to 1, service mode data can be exported.

990
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
SNDSTREN 1 Set of setting delete aftr scan and send
Detail To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the address after transmission from
the "Scan and Send" screen.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 5
0: Deleted
1: Retained only the transmission setting
2: Retained the transmission setting and address *
3: Retained only address *
4: Retained the transmission setting and address
5: Retained only address
* The setting for Options > Job Done Notice > Attach TX Image is not retained.
Default Value It differs according to the location.

FAXSTREN 1 Set of setting delete aftr fax transmit

Detail To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the address after transmission from
the "Fax" screen.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Delete
1: Retain *
2: Retain
* The setting for Options > Job Done Notice > Attach TX Image is not retained.
Default Value It differs according to the location.

SJ-UNMSK 2 ON/OFF secured job masking cancellation

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to mask other people's secured jobs.
When 0 is set, operation of other people's secured jobs is not possible because they are masked.
When COIN is set to 6 or 7 (charge mode: Type-C), set 1. Masking is canceled and other people's
secured jobs can be operated.
It is enabled at MEAP authentication.
Use Case When operating secured jobs in charge mode Type-C
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF (Masking enabled), 1: ON (Masking canceled)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN

991
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
SJ-CLMSK 2 ON/OFF secured job stop button display
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to display the button to stop a secured job.
When 0 is set, the stop button is displayed.
When COIN is set to 6 or 7 (charge mode: Type-C), set 1. Since the stop button is not displayed,
the secured job cannot be stopped.
Use Case When prohibiting to stop the secured job in charge mode Type-C
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF (Display), 1: ON (Hide)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN

PRTDP-SW 1 Duplex print settings for a single origi

Detail When printing a single original in the duplex setting, this machine omits the printing operation
on a blank paper side to emphasize productivity (it performs single-sided printing without double-
sided printing).
In this case, the orientation of the printing surface changes in the case of duplex printing operation,
and a problem occurs in which the printing surface does not align in a duplex job of a single original
and in a duplex job of two or more originals.
In addition, the direction of the printing surface changes even though in the case of printing for
preprinted or punched paper with a preset printing surface.
By setting this service mode to 1, duplex printing will be performed even when a single original is
printed with duplex settings.
Use Case - When printing on a preprinted or punched paper with duplex settings of a single original
- When aligning the printing surface in a duplex job of a single original and in a duplex job of two
or more originals
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When this switch is set to 1, even duplex print job of a single original performs duplex printing,
reducing productivity.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: 1-sided print of duplex printing job of a single original (default)
1: 2-sided print of duplex printing job of a single original
Default Value 0

PDFD-MSW 2 Set output paper size: direct print PDF

Detail To set output paper size at direct print PDF.
Usually, the region defined by MediaBox is output. However, in some cases, the region defined
(trimmed) by CropBox is judged as output paper size depending on PDF file.
Set 1 when output result differs from what is defined at direct print PDF.
Use Case When preferring to output a PDF file with paper which size is defined by CropBox while the sizes
of MediaBox and CropBox are different
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: MediaBox (Normal), 1: CropBox
Default Value 0

992
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
SFT-OUT 2 Setting of offset priority delivery
Detail To set whether to deliver a job where offset and collate/offset group is set to the delivery destination
with offset function.
When 0 is set, a job is delivered to the delivery destination set in [Settings/Registration] even
though the offset function is not available.
When 1 is set, a job is delivered to the delivery destination with offset function even though a
delivery destination without offset function is set in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When preferring to deliver a job to the delivery destination with offset function
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Based on Output Tray Settings, 1: Priority on job settings (deliver to a delivery destination where
offset is possible)
Default Value 1
Additional Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray Settings
Functions Mode

LGCY-SCP 2 Setting of PPA/secured print switch

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to use the PPA function or the conventional secured print function.
Set 0 when using the PPA function. The conventional secured print function is disabled.
Set 1 when using the conventional secured print function (when the EFI Controller is connected,
etc.). The PPA function is disabled.
When IMG-CONT is set to 3 or 4 for connecting the EFI Controller, the setting of this item
becomes 1.
When this item is set to 0, the setting of UI-PPA becomes 1. When this item is set to 1, the setting
of UI-PPA becomes 0.
Use Case When using the conventional secured print function (when the EFI Controller is connected, etc.)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution The PPA function cannot be used when the EFI Controller is connected.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Use the PPA function, 1: Use the conventional secured print function
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-PPA
COPIER> OPTION> INT-FACE> IMG-CONT
Supplement/Memo PPA (Personal Print Application): A function to hold print job. It contains the function of
secured print.

FLM-DSPL 2 ON/OFF of Clear Film usage

Detail To set whether to use the Clear Film.
When 1 is set, "Clear Film" is displayed on the paper type screen so it can be registered as the
paper to be used.
Use Case When using large size transparency or special film
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution - Since the clear film is not defined in the specifications, image
quality is not guaranteed even though it can be fed.
- After the setting is made, check image quality and get approval from the user. If there is an error,
set the value back to 0.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Additional Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Settings> Set > Detailed Settings > Clear Film
Functions Mode

993
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
CNT-PRT 2 ON/OFF of parts counter report output
Detail To set whether to print parts counter values on the counter report.
Use Case When grasping the estimated life of parts while the monitoring service function is not used
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF (Not print), 1: ON (Print)
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Additional Check Counter> Print List
Functions Mode

JA-WIFI 2 Setting of SAM Wi-Fi direct print

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to allow Wi-Fi direct print when iW SAM is enabled.
Wi-Fi direct print cannot be used when iW SAM is enabled. However, when 1 is set, it can be used.
Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0

C-P-SIZE 2 [For customization]

MF-FEED 1 Manual restart w/OK key: no ppr on MP Tr
Detail If the following three conditions are satisfied, pickup is not restarted automatically when placing
paper on the Multi-purpose Tray.
1. The setting of "Preferences> Paper Settings> Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults" is "Fixed".
2. The job type is PDL.
3. The setting value of this service mode is 1.
4. Paper is placed at occurrence of no paper on the Multi-Purpose Tray.
Use Case Upon user's request. Use this item for customization for Aeon during application of service mode.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Additional Preferences> Paper Settings> Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults
Functions Mode

TNRBEXGR 2 ON/OFF oprtn hold: Tonr Cont early rplce

Detail To set whether to hold the operation when the Toner Container is prematurely replaced although it
can still be used.
When a new Toner Container is inserted while 1 is set, a message is displayed and the operation
is held.
The message disappears by changing the Toner Container back to the one before replacement or
by changing the setting value of this item to 0 and then restarting the machine.
Use Case When preventing from replacing the Toner Container prematurely
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution The message does not disappear unless the Toner Container is changed back to the one before
the replacement. Be sure to get approval from the user by telling the above specifications before
making the setting.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

994
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
TNRBRMVR 2 ON/OFF mssg dspl at Tonr Cntner removal
Detail To set whether to display a message when the Toner Container is removed although it can still
be used.
Use Case When there is no need to display the message
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value It differs according to the location.

INSTDT-Y 1 Register installation date info: year

Detail To set the information on the installation date (year).
Use Case - At installation
- When replacing the HDD
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2038
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INSTDTST

INSTDT-M 1 Register installation date info: month

Detail To set the information on the installation date (month).
Use Case - At installation
- When replacing the HDD
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 12
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INSTDTST

INSTDT-D 1 Register installation date info: day

Detail To set the information on the installation date (day).
Use Case - At installation
- When replacing the HDD
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 31
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INSTDTST

INSTDT-H 1 Register installation date info: hour

Detail To set the information on the installation date (hour).
Use Case - At installation
- When replacing the HDD
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 23
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INSTDTST

995
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
INSTDT-N 1 Register installation date info: minute
Detail To set the information on the installation date (minute).
Use Case - At installation
- When replacing the HDD
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 59
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INSTDTST

STOP-USE 1 ON/OFF of Stop key function

Detail To switch ON and OFF of the Stop key function.
When Stop key is pressed, all print jobs are paused.
Use Case When switching to use/not use Stop key according to the customer
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to explain to the customer in advance that all print jobs are paused when Stop key
is pressed.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1

SZCHKSW 2 For R&D

JA-MODE 2 JA log recording operation mode
Detail Retain the existing JA log recording operation mode and confirm which of the following modes
is operated.
0: Existing JA log recording operation (Perform image conversion at the server side)
1: New log recording operation (Perform image conversion at the host machine side)
Use Case If the MEAP program is updated or the MEAP program is reinstalled for a reason such as
reconfiguring the environment, check which mode the previous JA log recording mode was
operating in.
Adj/Set/Operate Method When the JA system administrator (assuming a technical staff) installs the MEAP program
1. Check JA-MODE.
2. Reinstall the MEAP application according to the setting of JA-MODE.
Displaying the current JA log recording operation mode
0: Existing JA log recording operation
1: New JA log recording operation
Caution - Setting change from the service mode screen is not available. Only reference is available.
- The settings are available only from MEAP programs that support new JA log recording.
- JA-MODE is set to 1 in conjunction with enabling the JA system from the MEAP program by the
JA system administrator.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
Default Value 0

996
 8. Service Mode

■ ACC
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC
COIN 1 Setting of charge management
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set charge management method.
Use Case At installation of Coin Manager
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution -When COIN is set to a value other than 0, Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common
> Print Settings > Auto Delete Suspended Jobs is set to OFF and hidden. Setting COIN back to 0
does not turn ON.
-When COIN is set to 3, the following items are set automatically. Setting COIN to 0 does not restore
the original value.
-COPIER > OPTION > USER > CONTROL: Set to 1
-(Lev2)COPIER > OPTION > USER > AFN -PSWD: Set to 1
-(Lev2)COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY -SW > UI -BOX: Set to 0
-(Lev2)COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY -SW > UI -SEND: Set to 0
-(Lev2)COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY -SW > UI -FAX: Set to 0
-Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network > TCP/IP Settings > IPv4 Settings > Use IPv4: ON
-Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network > TCP/IP Settings > IPv6 Settings > Use IPv6: ON
-Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network > TCP/IP Settings > FTP Print Settings > Use FTP
Printing: OFF
-Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network > TCP/IP Settings > IPP Print Settings: ON
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Send > Network Settings > E -Mail/I -Fax Settings >
SMTP RX: OFF / POP RX: OFF
- When COIN is set to 4/6/7, the following items are set automatically. Setting COIN from 4/6/7 to
0 does not restore the original value.
-(Lev2)COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY -SW > UI -SBOX: The setting changes to 0 (COIN4/6/7)
-(Lev2)COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY -SW > UI -BOX: The setting changes to 0 (COIN4) / The
setting changes to 2 (COIN6/7)
-(Lev2)COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY -SW > UI -SEND: The setting changes to 0 (COIN4/6/7)
-(Lev2)COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY -SW > UI -FAX: The setting changes to 0 (COIN4/6/7)
-(Lev2)COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY -SW > UI -RSCAN: The setting changes to 0 (COIN4/6/7)
-(Lev2)COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY -SW > UI -EPRNT: The setting changes to 0 (COIN4/6/7)
-(Lev2)COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY -SW > UI -HOLD: The setting changes to 0 (COIN4/6/7)
-(Lev2)COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY -SW > UI -MEM: The setting changes to 0 (COIN4) /The
setting changes to 1 (COIN6/7)
-(Lev2)COPIER > OPTION > USER > USBH -DSP: The setting changes to 0 (COIN4/6/7)
-(Lev2)COPIER > OPTION > USER > USBM -DSP: The setting changes to 0 (COIN4/6/7)
-(Lev2)COPIER > OPTION > USER > SJ -UNMSK: The setting changes to 1 (COIN4/6/7)
-(Lev2)COPIER > OPTION > USER > SJ -CLMSK: The setting changes to 1 (COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Auto Delete Suspended
Jobs : Set to OFF and hide(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Secure Watermark
Settings > Forced Secure Watermark > Copy : Do Not Set(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Secure Watermark
Settings >Printer Driver Secure Watermark : Do Not Set(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Device Management > Display Job
Log : OFF(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Generate File : OFF(COIN4)
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Printer > Printer Settings > Custom Settings > UFRII
(PCL / PS) > Paper Save : ON(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Management Settings > License/Other > Use ACCESS MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM : OFF(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Charge Management : OFF(COIN6/7)
*Show when setting "COPIER > OPTION > USER > FREE -DSP : 1" and "COPIER > OPTION >
ACC > COIN : 4"
-Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Auto Reset Time : Off(0)(COIN6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Auto Shutdown Time :
Off(0)(COIN4/6/7)

997
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC
*COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY -SW > SDTM -DSP :Set to 1 to display
-Settings/Registration > Preferences > External Interface > USB Settings > Use as USB Device :
Turn on the setting and hide it.(COIN6/7)
*COPIER > OPTION > USER > USBH -DSP : Setting 0 turns OFF"
-Settings/Registration > Preferences > External Interface > USB Settings > Use MEAP Driver for
USB Input Device : Turn the setting OFF and then hide it(COIN6/7)
*COPIER > OPTION > USER > USBM -DSP : Setting 0 turns OFF"
-Settings/Registration > Preferences > Display Settings > Store Location Display
Settings : OFF(COIN6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Send : OFF(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Receive/Forward : OFF(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Store/Access Files : OFF(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Set Destination : OFF(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Paper Output Settings > Job Separator
Between Jobs : OFF(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Paper Output Settings > Job Separator
Between Copies : OFF(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Register Form(iR
-ADVC5800/6800Series Only) : OFF(Color machines only)(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Register Form > Check
Print(iR -ADVC5800/6800Series Only) : OFF(Black and white only)(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Paper Feed Settings > Suspended Job Timeout : Set
to OFF and hide(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Print Settings >Secure Watermark
Settings > Adjust Background/Character Contrast : OFF(Color machines only(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Copy Set Numbering
Option Settings : OFF(Color machines only)(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Forced Print of
Recognition Information : OFF(Color machines only)(COIN4/6/7)
-Settings/Registration > Management Settings > User Management > Department ID
Management : OFF(COIN4/6/7)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 7
0: No charge
1: Charge with Coin Manager
2: Charge with remote counter
3: Charge with DA (only in Japan)
4: Charge with this machine itself
5: Not used
6: External charge mode 6
7: External charge mode 7
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> DA-CNCT
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> PDL-THR
Additional Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Communication Settings
Functions Mode Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> DNS Settings> FTP Print Settings, IPP Print Settings
Supplement/Memo Control card can be used with "No charge".
DA: Digital Accessory

DK-P 1 Setting of Paper Deck paper size

Detail To set the paper size used in the Paper Deck.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: A4, 1: B5, 2: LTR
Default Value 0

998
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC
CARD-SW 1 Screen set when Coin Manager connected
Detail To set coin or card that the user is prompted to insert on the Control Panel when the Coin Manager
is connected.
When 1 is set, authentication operation using the Coin Manager is also required.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0 and 3: Card, 1: Card + authentication, 2: Coin/Card

CC-SPSW 2 Support setting of control card I/F

Detail To set support level for control card (CCIV/CCV) interface.
Use Case Upon user's request (when connecting to the external counter management system using the
control card interface)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: No support, 1: Support
Default Value 0

UNIT-PRC 2 Setting of Coin Manager currency unit

Detail To set currency unit to be handled with Coin Manager
Use Case At installation of Coin Manager
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 6
0: Japanese yen, 1: Euro, 2: Pound, 3: Swiss Franc, 4: Dollar, 5: No currency unit (no fractional
unit), 6: No currency unit (with fractional unit)
Default Value 0

IN-TRAY 1 Presence/absence of Inner 2-way Tray

Detail To set whether the Inner 2-way Tray is installed or not.
When it is installed, set 1.
Use Case When installing the Inner 2-way Tray
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Default Value 0

MIN-PRC 1 Set of Coin Manager minimum price

Detail To set the minimum amount to be handled with Coin Manager.
Enter 10 when specifying 10 Japanese yen as the minimum amount to be handled with the Coin
Manager that supports Japanese yen.
In the case to specify 1 to 4 (Euro/Pound/Swiss Franc/Dollar) by going through the following:
COPIER> OPTION> ACC > UNIT-PRC, entry is in fractional unit. Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents
($ 0.50).
Use Case At installation of Coin Manager
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 9999
Default Value 10
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC
Supplement/Memo When a value smaller than the minimum amount is entered in Settings/Registration menu as the
charging amount, it causes an error.

999
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC
MAX-PRC 1 Set of Coin Manager maximum price
Detail To set the maximum amount to be handled with Coin Manager.
Enter 8800 when specifying 8800 Japanese yen as the maximum amount to be handled with the
Coin Manager that supports Japanese yen.
Use Case At installation of Coin Manager
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 9999
Default Value 8800
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC
Supplement/Memo When a value larger than the maximum amount is entered in Settings/Registration menu as the
charging amount, it causes an error.

MIC-TUN 1 Manual adj of voice recognize microphone

Detail To manually adjust the voice receiving level (sensitivity) of the connected voice
recognition microphone.
Microphone sensitivity is automatically tuned in [Settings/Registration]; however, adjust it manually
as needed.
Use Case When the sensitivity of microphone is not improved by auto tuning
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 128
Additional Preferences> Accessibility> Voice Navigation Settings> Tune Microphone
Functions Mode

SRL-SPSW 1 Setting of Serial I/F Kit support

Detail To set the support level of the Serial Interface Kit.
To keep processing performance of printer engine, select "1: Priority on speed".
To correctly stop the output by the upper limit number of sheets, select "2: Priority on upper limit
number of sheets".
Use Case At installation of Serial Interface Kit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution With priority on speed, output cannot be correctly stopped by the upper limit number of sheets.
With priority on the upper limit number of sheets, processing performance of the printer engine is
decreased depending on pickup location.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: No support, 1: Priority on speed, 2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets
Default Value 0

PDL-THR 2 ON/OFF PDL print: external charge mode

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to execute normal PDL print when COIN is set to external charge mode 6/7.
Use Case When executing normal PDL print in external charge mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN

1000
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC
CR-TYPE 1 Setting of Card Reader
Detail To set the model of the Card Reader.
Set 1 in the case of connecting the Card Reader-C1. It operates even 0 is set, but recognition
rate decreases.
Use Case When connecting the Card Reader-C1
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Card Reader-F1, 1: Card Reader-C1
Default Value 0

MEAP-SRL 1 Set to allow serial comctn from MEAP app

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to allow serial communication of MEAP application.
When 1 is set, serial communication of the machine is stopped and only the serial communication
with MEAP application is available.
Use Case When performing serial communication from MEAP application
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0

HCC-P 1 Setting of Cst3 paper size (HC-CST)

Detail To set the paper size used in the High Capacity Cassette Pedestal.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: A4, 1: LTR
Default Value It differs according to the location.

CV-CSZ 1 [For customization]

COIN-AUT 1 ON/OFF of charge/no charge mixed setting
Detail * Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set whether to switch charge/no charge according to the authentication setting in an
environment where both charged and no charged users exist.
When this item is set to 1 while the setting value of COIN is 4, the initial screen where the user
can select charge/no charge can be set. Selecting "Charge" on the initial screen displays the copy
screen, and selecting "No Charge" displays the main menu after authentication.
Use Case At installation of Coin Manager
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When setting 1, be sure to set COIN to 4 in advance. If COIN-AUT is set first, it is necessary to make
the settings in the following order again: COIN and then COIN-AUT.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX/SEND/FAX
Additional Preferences> Display Settings> Default Screen after Startup/Restoration
Functions Mode

1001
 8. Service Mode

■ INT-FACE
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > INT-FACE
NWCT-TM 2 Timeout setting of network connection
Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set the time to keep network connection between this machine and the PC application
(keep-alive setting).
As the value is incremented by 1, the time is increased by 1 minute.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 5
Unit min
Default Value 5
Supplement/Memo Expected PC application: Network print application, E-mail function, cascade copy, MEAP network
application, etc.
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

■ LCNS-TR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
ST-SEND 2 Installation state dspl of SEND function
Detail To display installation state of SEND function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether SEND function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SEND.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SEND.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value 1

TR-SEND 2 Trns license key dspl of SEND function

Detail To display transfer license key to use SEND function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SEND.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SEND.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-ENPDF 2 Install state dspl of Encryption PDF

Detail To display installation state of Encryption PDF when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Encryption PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ENPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

1002
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
TR-ENPDF 2 Trns license key dspl of Encryption PDF
Detail To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ENPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-SPDF 2 Install state dspl of Searchable PDF

Detail To display installation state of Searchable PDF when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Searchable PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SPDF.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-SPDF 2 Trns license key dspl of Searchable PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Searchable PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-EXPDF 2 Instal state of Encry PDF + Searchbl PDF

Detail To display installation state of Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-EXPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-EXPDF.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-EXPDF 2 Trns lcns key of Encry PDF+Searchbl PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-EXPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-EXPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed for Japan.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

1003
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
ST-PDFDR 2 Install state dspl of Direct Print PDF
Detail To display installation state of Direct Print PDF when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Direct Print PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PDFDR.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PDFDR.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-PDFDR 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Direct Print PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Direct Print PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PDFDR.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PDFDR.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-SCR 2 Install state dspl of Encry Secure Print

Detail To display installation state of Encrypted Secure Print when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Encrypted Secure Print is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SCR.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCR.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-SCR 2 Trns license key dspl: Encry Secure Pnt

Detail To display transfer license key to use Encrypted Secure Print when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SCR.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCR.
Caution This mode is enabled when there is "3DES+USH-H" Board.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-BRDIM 2 Install state dspl: PCL Barcode Printing

Detail To display installation state of Barcode Printing for PCL when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Barcode Printing for PCL is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-BRDIM.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

1004
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
TR-BRDIM 2 Trns lcns key dspl: PCL Barcode Printing
Detail To display transfer license key to use Barcode Printing for PCL when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-BRDIM.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-VNC 2 Install state dspl of Remote Oprtr Soft

Detail To display installation state of Remote Operators Software when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Remote Operators Software is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-VNC.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-VNC.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-VNC 2 Trns lcns dspl of Remote Operators Soft

Detail To display transfer license key to use Remote Operators Software when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-VNC.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-VNC.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-WEB 2 Install state dspl: Web Access Software

Detail To display installation state of Web Access Software when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Web Access Software is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-WEB.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-WEB.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-WEB 2 Trns license key dspl of Web Access Soft

Detail To display transfer license key to use Web Access Software when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-WEB.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WEB.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

1005
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
ST-HRPDF 2 Install state dspl of High Compress PDF
Detail To display installation state of High Compression PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether High Compression PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-HRPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-HRPDF.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-HRPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of High Compress PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use High Compression PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-HRPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HRPDF.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-TRSND 2 Install state dspl: Trial SEND function

Detail To display installation state of Trial SEND function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Trial SEND function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TRSND.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-TRSND.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-TRSND 2 Trns lcns key dspl: Trial SEND function

Detail To display transfer license key to use Trial SEND function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TRSND.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TRSND.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-WTMRK 2 Install state dspl of Secure Watermark

Detail To display installation state of Secure Watermark when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Secure Watermark is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-WTMRK.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-WTMRK.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

1006
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
TR-WTMRK 2 Trns license key dspl: Secure Watermark
Detail To display transfer license key to use Secure Watermark when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-WTMRK.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WTMRK.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-TSPDF 2 Install state dspl of Time Stamp PDF: JP

Detail To display installation state of Time Stamp PDF (JP only) when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Time Stamp PDF (JP only) is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TSPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-TSPDF.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-TSPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Time Stamp PDF: JP

Detail To display transfer license key to use Time Stamp PDF (JP only) when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TSPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TSPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-USPDF 2 Install state dspl of Dgtl User Sign PDF

Detail To display installation state of Digital User Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Digital User Signature PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-USPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-USPDF.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value 0

TR-USPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Dgtl User Sign PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Digital User Signature PDF when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-USPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-USPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

1007
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
ST-DVPDF 2 Install state dspl of Device Sign PDF
Detail To display installation state of Device Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Device Signature PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-DVPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-DVPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Device Sign PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Device Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-DVPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-SCPDF 2 Install state dspl of Trace & Smooth PDF

Detail To display installation state of Trace & Smooth PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Trace & Smooth PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SCPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCPDF.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-SCPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Trace & Smooth PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Trace & Smooth PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SCPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-AMS 2 Install state dspl of Access Mngm System

Detail To display installation state of Access Management System when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Access Management System is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-AMS.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-AMS.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

1008
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
TR-AMS 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Access Mngm System
Detail To display transfer license key to use Access Management System when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-AMS.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AMS.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-ERDS 2 Install state dspl: E-RDS 3rd Pty Expnsn

Detail To display installation state of E-RDS non-Canon-made extension function when disabling and
then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether E-RDS non-Canon-made extension function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ERDS.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment
Supplement/Memo Monitoring service function: A function to send charge counter to the non-Canon-made
charge server.

TR-ERDS 2 Trns lcns key dspl: E-RDS 3rd Pty Expnsn

Detail To display transfer license key to use E-RDS non-Canon-made extension function when disabling
and then transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ERDS.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits
Supplement/Memo Monitoring service function: A function to send charge counter to the non-Canon-made
charge server.

ST-PS 2 Install state display of PS function

Detail To display installation state of PS function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether PS function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PS.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-PS 2 Transfer license key dspl of PS function

Detail To display transfer license key to use PS function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PS.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

1009
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
ST-PCL 2 Install state display of PCL function
Detail To display installation state of PCL function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether PCL function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PCL.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-PCL 2 Transfer license key dspl: PCL function

Detail To display transfer license key to use PCL function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PCL.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-PSLI5 2 Install state dspl: PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX: JP

Detail To display installation state of PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSLI5.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLI5.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value 0

TR-PSLI5 2 Trns lcns key dspl: PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX: JP

Detail To display transfer license key to use PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSLI5.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLI5.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-LIPS5 2 Install state dspl:LIPS LX/LIPS4 func:JP

Detail To display installation state of LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-LIPS5.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS5.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

1010
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
TR-LIPS5 2 Trns lcns key dspl:LIPS LX/LIPS4 func:JP
Detail To display transfer license key to use LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-LIPS5.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS5.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-LIPS4 2 Install state display of LIPS4 func: JP

Detail To display installation state of LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-LIPS4.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS4.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-LIPS4 2 Trns license key dspl of LIPS4 func: JP

Detail To display transfer license key to use LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-LIPS4.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS4.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-PSPCL 2 Install state dspl of PS/PCL function

Detail To display installation state of PS/PCL function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether PS/PCL function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSPCL.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCL.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-PSPCL 2 Transfer license key dspl of PS/PCL func

Detail To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSPCL.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCL.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

1011
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
ST-PCLUF 2 Install state dspl: PCL/UFR II function
Detail To display installation state of PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether PCL/UFR II function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PCLUF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCLUF.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-PCLUF 2 Trns license key dspl of PCL/UFR II func

Detail To display transfer license key to use PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PCLUF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCLUF.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-PSLIP 2 Install state dspl of PS/LIPS4 func: JP

Detail To display installation state of PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSLIP.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLIP.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-PSLIP 2 Trns license key dspl: PS/LIPS4 func:JP

Detail To display transfer license key to use PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSLIP.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLIP.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-PSPCU 2 Install state dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func

Detail To display installation state of PS/PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether PS/PCL/UFR II function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSPCU.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCU.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

1012
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
TR-PSPCU 2 Trns lcns key dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func
Detail To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSPCU.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCU.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-LXUFR 2 Install state display of UFR II function

Detail To display installation state of UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether UFR II function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-LXUFR.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LXUFR.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-LXUFR 2 Trns license key dspl of UFR II function

Detail To display transfer license key to use UFR II function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-LXUFR.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LXUFR.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-HDCR2 2 Install state dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set

Detail To display installation state of HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether HDD Initialize All Data/Settings is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-HDCR2.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCR2.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value 0

TR-HDCR2 2 Trns lcns key dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set

Detail To display transfer license key to use HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-HDCR2.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCR2.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

1013
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
ST-JBLK 2 Install state dspl of Document Scan Lock
Detail To display installation state of Document Scan Lock when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Document Scan Lock is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-JBLK.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-JBLK.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value 0

TR-JBLK 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Document Scan Lock

Detail To display transfer license key to use Document Scan Lock when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-JBLK.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-JBLK.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-AFAX 2 Installation state display of Remote Fax

Detail To display installation state of Remote Fax when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Remote Fax is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-AFAX.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-AFAX 2 Transfer license key dspl of Remote Fax

Detail To display transfer license key to use Remote Fax when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-AFAX.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-REPDF 2 Install state dspl:Reader Extensions PDF

Detail To display installation state of Reader Extensions PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Reader Extensions PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-REPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-REPDF.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

1014
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
TR-REPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl:Reader Extensions PDF
Detail To display transfer license key to use Reader Extensions PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-REPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-REPDF.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-OOXML 2 Install state display of Office Open XML

Detail To display installation state of Office Open XML when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Office Open XML is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-OOXML.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-OOXML.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-OOXML 2 Trns lcns key display of Office Open XML

Detail To display transfer license key to use Office Open XML when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-OOXML.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OOXML.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-XPS 2 Install state dspl of Direct Print XPS

Detail To display installation state of Direct Print XPS when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Direct Print XPS is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-XPS.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-XPS.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-XPS 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Direct Print XPS

Detail To display transfer license key to use Direct Print XPS when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-XPS.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-XPS.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

1015
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
ST-2600 2 Instal state dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func
Detail To display installation state of the IEEE2600.1 security function when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether the IEEE2600.1 security function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-2600.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-2600.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-2600 2 Trn lcns key dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func

Detail To display transfer license key to use IEEE2600.1 security function when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-2600.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-2600.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-OPFNT 2 Install state display of PCL Font Set

Detail To display installation state of PCL Font Set when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether PCL Font Set is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-OPFNT.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-OPFNT.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-OPFNT 2 Trns license key display of PCL Font Set

Detail To display transfer license key to use the PCL Font Set when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-OPFNT.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OPFNT.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-NCAPT 2 Install state display of NetCap function

Detail To display installation state of network packet capture function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether network packet capture function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-NCAPT.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-NCAPT.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value 0

1016
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
TR-NCAPT 2 Transfer license key dspl of NetCap func
Detail To display transfer license key to use the network packet capture function when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-NCAPT.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-NCAPT.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-IPFAX 2 Installation state display of IPFAX

Detail To display installation state of IPFAX when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether IPFAX is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-IPFAX.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-IPFAX.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-IPFAX 2 Transfer license key dspl of IPFAX

Detail To display transfer license key to use IPFAX when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-IPFAX.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-IPFAX.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-U-RDS 2 Install state display of E-RDS function

Detail To display installation state of Embedded-RDS function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Embedded-RDS function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-U-RDS.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-U-RDS.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS

TR-U-RDS 2 Trns license key dspl of E-RDS function

Detail To display transfer license key to use Embedded-RDS function when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing the HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-U-RDS.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-U-RDS.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

1017
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
ST-SMLG 2 Install state dspl of picture login func
Detail To display installation state of picture login function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether picture login function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SMLG.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SMLG.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-SMLG 2 Trns lcns key dspl: picture login func

Detail To display transfer license key to use picture login function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SMLG.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SMLG.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-TCFNT 2 Inst state dspl:PCL Asian Font, trad CHI

Detail To display installation state of PCL Asian Font (traditional Chinese) when disabling and then
transfer the license.
Use Case When checking whether PCL Asian Font (traditional Chinese) is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TCFNT.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-TCFNT.
Caution When replacing the HDD, check that "PCL Traditional Chinese Fonts" and "PCL Traditional
Chinese Fonts (HKSCS)" are installed with [Font List] in [Settings/Registration].
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment
Additional Function Settings> Printer> Output Report> PCL> Font List
Functions Mode

TR-TCFNT 2 Trn lic key dspl:PCL Asian Font,trad CHI

Detail To display transfer license key to use PCL Asian Font (traditional Chinese) when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TCFNT.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TCFNT.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits
Additional Function Settings> Printer> Output Report> PCL> Font List
Functions Mode

TR-FRWEB 2 Trn lcns key dspl:Web Access SW,free ver

Detail To display transfer license key to use the free version of Web Access Software when disabling and
then transferring the license of it.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-FRWEB.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-FRWEB.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

1018
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
ST-FRWEB 2 Instl state dspl:Web Access SW, free ver
Detail To display installation state of the free version of Web Access Software when disabling and then
transferring the license of it.
Use Case When checking whether the free version of Web Access Software is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-FRWEB.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-FRWEB.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

ST-HCD 2 Inst state dspl: IEEE2600 Security Kit

Detail To display installation state of Security Kit for IEEE2600 when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether the Security Kit for IEEE2600 is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-HCD.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-HCD.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-HCD 2 Trn lcns key dspl: IEEE2600 Security Kit

Detail To display transfer license key to use the Security Kit for IEEE2600 when disabling and then
transferring the license of it.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-HCD.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HCD.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits
Default Value 0

■ CUSTOM2
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM2
SP-B01 2 [For customization]
SP-B02 2 [For customization]
SP-B03 2 [For customization]
SP-B04 2 [For customization]
SP-B05 2 [For customization]
SP-B06 2 [For customization]
SP-B07 2 [For customization]
SP-B08 2 [For customization]
SP-B09 2 [For customization]
SP-B10 2 [For customization]
SP-B11 2 [For customization]
SP-B12 2 [For customization]
SP-B13 2 [For customization]
SP-B14 2 [For customization]
SP-B15 2 [For customization]
SP-B16 2 [For customization]

1019
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM2
SP-B17 2 [For customization]
SP-B18 2 [For customization]
SP-B19 2 [For customization]
SP-B20 2 [For customization]
SP-B21 2 [For customization]
SP-B22 2 [For customization]
SP-B23 2 [For customization]
SP-B24 2 [For customization]
SP-B25 2 [For customization]
SP-B26 2 [For customization]
SP-B27 2 [For customization]
SP-B28 2 [For customization]
SP-B29 2 [For customization]
SP-B30 2 [For customization]
SP-B31 2 [For customization]
SP-B32 2 [For customization]
SP-B33 2 [For customization]
SP-B34 2 [For customization]
SP-B35 2 [For customization]
SP-B36 2 [For customization]
SP-B37 2 [For customization]
SP-B38 2 [For customization]
SP-B39 2 [For customization]
SP-B40 2 [For customization]
SP-B41 2 [For customization]
SP-B42 2 [For customization]
SP-B43 2 [For customization]
SP-B44 2 [For customization]
SP-B45 2 [For customization]
SP-B46 2 [For customization]
SP-B47 2 [For customization]
SP-B48 2 [For customization]
SP-B49 2 [For customization]
SP-B50 2 [For customization]
SP-B51 2 [For customization]
SP-B52 2 [For customization]
SP-B53 2 [For customization]
SP-B54 2 [For customization]
SP-B55 2 [For customization]
SP-B56 2 [For customization]
SP-B57 2 [For customization]

1020
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM2
SP-B58 2 [For customization]
SP-B59 2 [For customization]
SP-B60 2 [For customization]
SP-B61 2 [For customization]
SP-B62 2 [For customization]
SP-B63 2 [For customization]
SP-B64 2 [For customization]
SP-B65 2 [For customization]
SP-B66 2 [For customization]
SP-B67 2 [For customization]
SP-B68 2 [For customization]
SP-B69 2 [For customization]
SP-B70 2 [For customization]
SP-B71 2 [For customization]
SP-B72 2 [For customization]
SP-B73 2 [For customization]
SP-B74 2 [For customization]
SP-B75 2 [For customization]
SP-B76 2 [For customization]
SP-B77 2 [For customization]
SP-B78 2 [For customization]
SP-B79 2 [For customization]
SP-B80 2 [For customization]
SP-V01 2 [For customization]
SP-V02 2 [For customization]
SP-V03 2 [For customization]
SP-V04 2 [For customization]
SP-V05 2 [For customization]
SP-V06 2 [For customization]
SP-V07 2 [For customization]
SP-V08 2 [For customization]
SP-V09 2 [For customization]
SP-V10 2 [For customization]
SP-V11 2 [For customization]
SP-V12 2 [For customization]
SP-V13 2 [For customization]
SP-V14 2 [For customization]
SP-V15 2 [For customization]
SP-V16 2 [For customization]
SP-V17 2 [For customization]
SP-V18 2 [For customization]

1021
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM2
SP-V19 2 [For customization]
SP-V20 2 [For customization]
SP-V21 2 [For customization]
SP-V22 2 [For customization]
SP-V23 2 [For customization]
SP-V24 2 [For customization]
SP-V25 2 [For customization]
SP-V26 2 [For customization]
SP-V27 2 [For customization]
SP-V28 2 [For customization]
SP-V29 2 [For customization]
SP-V30 2 [For customization]
SP-V31 2 [For customization]
SP-V32 2 [For customization]
SP-V33 2 [For customization]
SP-V34 2 [For customization]
SP-V35 2 [For customization]
SP-V36 2 [For customization]
SP-V37 2 [For customization]
SP-V38 2 [For customization]
SP-V39 2 [For customization]
SP-V40 2 [For customization]
SP-V41 2 [For customization]
SP-V42 2 [For customization]
SP-V43 2 [For customization]
SP-V44 2 [For customization]
SP-V45 2 [For customization]
SP-V46 2 [For customization]
SP-V47 2 [For customization]
SP-V48 2 [For customization]
SP-V49 2 [For customization]
SP-V50 2 [For customization]
SP-V51 2 [For customization]
SP-V52 2 [For customization]
SP-V53 2 [For customization]
SP-V54 2 [For customization]
SP-V55 2 [For customization]
SP-V56 2 [For customization]
SP-V57 2 [For customization]
SP-V58 2 [For customization]
SP-V59 2 [For customization]

1022
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM2
SP-V60 2 [For customization]
SP-V61 2 [For customization]
SP-V62 2 [For customization]
SP-V63 2 [For customization]
SP-V64 2 [For customization]
SP-V65 2 [For customization]
SP-V66 2 [For customization]
SP-V67 2 [For customization]
SP-V68 2 [For customization]
SP-V69 2 [For customization]
SP-V70 2 [For customization]
SP-V71 2 [For customization]
SP-V72 2 [For customization]
SP-V73 2 [For customization]
SP-V74 2 [For customization]
SP-V75 2 [For customization]
SP-V76 2 [For customization]
SP-V77 2 [For customization]
SP-V78 2 [For customization]
SP-V79 2 [For customization]
SP-V80 2 [For customization]

1023
 8. Service Mode

TEST (Print test mode)

■ PG
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > PG
TYPE 1 Test print
Detail To execute the test print.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Press Start key.
Test print is executed.
Caution Be sure to return the value to 0 after the test print output.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 50
0: Normal print
1: Grid
2: 17 gradations Tbic rank 2
3: 17 gradations 600 dpi (134-line screen or 141-line screen)
4: Solid white
5: Halftone (density: 80H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction)
6: Halftone (density: 80H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen, without image correction)
7: Solid black
8: Horizontal line (4 dots, 27 spaces)
9: Horizontal line (6 dots, 50 spaces)
10: Horizontal line (2 dots, 3 spaces)
11: Halftone (density: 60H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction)
12: Halftone (density: 80H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen, without image correction)
13: Halftone (density: 30H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction)
14: Halftone (density: 30H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen, without image correction)
15 to 50: For development
Default Value 0

TXPH 1 [Not used]

DENS-K 1 Adj of Bk-color density at test print
Detail To adjust Bk color density when performing test print (TYPE=5).
As the greater value is set, the image gets darker.
Use Case At test print (TYPE=5)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 128

PG-PICK 1 Setting of test print Pickup Cassette

Detail To set the Pickup Cassette for test print output.
Use Case - At trouble analysis
- At test print output
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 8
1: Cassette 1, 2: Cassette 2, 3: Cassette 3, 4: Cassette 4, 5: Multi-purpose Tray, 6: Paper Deck, 7
to 8: Not used
Default Value 1

1024
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > PG
2-SIDE 1 Setting of PG 2-sided mode
Detail To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided
Default Value 0

PG-QTY 1 Setting of PG output quantity

Detail To set the number of sheets for PG output.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 999
Unit sheet
Default Value 1
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

FINISH 1 Accessory processing function test print

Detail To execute the test print relating to accessory processing function.
Use Case When checking operation of accessory processing function
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the number of sheets for PG-QTY, and then press OK key.
2) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
3) Press Start button.
The machine outputs a test print.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99
0: N/A
1: Staple (Finisher, front)
2: Staple (Finisher, 2 points)
3: Staple (Finisher, rear)
4: Booklet (saddle stitch)
8: Saddle fold (Finisher)
11: Punch (Inner Puncher)
16: Staple free stapling (Finisher)
Any values other than those mentioned above: Not used
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> PG-QTY

1025
 8. Service Mode

■ NETWORK
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > NETWORK
PING 1 Network connection check
Detail To check connection between this machine and TCP/IP network.
Use Case - When checking network connection at the time of installation
- At network connection failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Turn OFF the main power switch.
2) Connect the network cable to this machine, and then turn ON the main power switch.
3) Inform the system administrator at user's site that installation of this machine is complete, and
ask for network setting.
4) Ask the system administrator to check the network connection, and check the remote host
address of PING transmission target.
5) Select the item and enter the remote host address, and then press OK key and Start key.
OK: Connection is normal. Checking procedure is complete.
NG: Connection failed. Go to step 6) if the cable connection is OK. In case of cable connection
failure, connect again and then go to step 5).
6) Select the item and enter loopback address, and then press OK key and Start key.
OK: TCP/IP setting of this machine is normal. Go to step 7) to check NIC.
NG: TCP/IP setting of this machine has failure. Go to step 3) to check the setting again.
7) Select the item and enter the local host address, and then press OK key.
OK: Network setting of this machine and NIC are normal. Inform the system administrator that the
trouble is due to network environment and ask for countermeasure.
NG: Connection failure/fault with NIC. Check connection of NIC/ replace NIC.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
At normal state: OK, At failure occurrence: NG
Supplement/Memo - Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal in network.
- Loopback address: 127.0.0.1. Checking TCP/IP of this machine is available because the signal
is returned before NIC.
- NIC: Network interface
- Local host address: IP address of this machine

BML-DISP 2 Set System Monitor scrn: BMlinks support

Detail To set whether to display only the device configuration in the System Monitor screen when
supporting BMlinks.
When the setting is switched, the job status and logs are not displayed.
Use Case When supporting BMlinks
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Ordinary System Monitor screen, 1: Screen in which only the device configuration is displayed
Default Value 0

IPV6-ADR 1 Setting of PING send address (IPv6)

Detail To set the IPv6 address to send PING.
When PING is sent to this address by COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> PING-IP6, the network
connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be checked.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution - Enter a consistent character string as an address of IPv6.
- Enter an address within 39 characters including hexadecimal numbers (0-9, a-f) and a
separator (:).
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> PING-IP6

PING-IP6 1 PING transmission to IPv6 address

Detail To send PING to the address specified by IPV6-ADR.
The network connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be checked.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> IPV6-ADR

1026
 8. Service Mode

■ NET-CAP
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > NET-CAP
CAPOFFON 2 ON/OFF of NetCap function
Detail To set ON/OFF of network packet capture function.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP
Additional Store Network Packet Log
Functions Mode

STT-STP 2 Start and stop of network packet capture

Detail To start and stop network packet capture.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Stop, 1: Start
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP
Additional Store Network Packet Log
Functions Mode

CAPSTATE 2 State display of network packet capture

Detail To display the state of network packet capture.
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP
Additional Store Network Packet Log
Functions Mode

PONSTART 2 Set network packet capture start timing

Detail To set whether to perform network packet capture from power-on.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP
Additional Store Network Packet Log
Functions Mode

OVERWRIT 2 Setting of NetCap data overwriting

Detail To set whether to finish network capturing or overwrite when HDD becomes full.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: No overwriting (finish network packet capture), 1: Overwriting
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP
Additional Store Network Packet Log
Functions Mode

1027
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > NET-CAP
PAYLOAD 2 Set network packet capture data save
Detail To set whether to discard payload when saving the captured packet data.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Save captured packet data as is, 1: Discard payload and save the packet data
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP
Additional Store Network Packet Log
Functions Mode

FILE-CLR 2 Deletion of network packet capture data

Detail To delete the captured packet data.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

SIMPFILT 2 Settings of packet data filtering

Detail To set whether to perform filtering when capturing packet data.
When 0 is set, filtering is not performed (All the data are captured.)
When 1 is set, packet data is captured only when the receiver's or sender's address coincides with
the Mac address of this machine.
Use Case At problem analysis (at packet data analysis)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not filtered, 1: Filtered

ENCDATA 2 Setting of packet data encryption

Detail To set whether to encrypt the packet data when writing the captured packet data to the USB
flash drive.
Use Case - At problem analysis (at packet data analysis)
- When improving security of written packet data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution This setting is enabled only when writing data to the USB flash drive. Even when the packet data
is loaded using SST, the file is specified, therefore the setting is disabled.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Encrypted (encrypted file)
1: Not encrypted (plain text file)
2: Encrypted (encrypted file + plain text file)
Default Value 0

1028
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > NET-CAP
CAPIF 2 Setting of network packet capture target
Detail To set the network interface to capture the packet data.
Make this setting before starting network packet capture.
Use Case When changing the target of network packet capture
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 6
1 - Local loopback
Basically not used. Use only if analysis is required.
2 - Wired LAN
Used when Wired LAN is set in Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network > Interface.
Use this when "Wired LAN + Wireless LAN" or "Wired LAN + Wired LAN" is set in Settings/
Registration > Preferences > Network > Interface, and you want to obtain communication on the
main line side.
3- Wireless LAN
Used when Wireless LAN is set in Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network > Interface.
Use this when "Wired LAN + Wireless LAN" is set in Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network
> Interface, and you want to obtain communication on the sub line side.
4 - Wireless Soft AP Mode
Used when Access Point Mode is set in Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network >
Direct Connection.
5 - Wi-Fi Direct
Used when Wi-Fi Direct is set in Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network > Direct
Connection Settings.
6 - Wired LAN (Subline)
Use this when "Wired LAN + Wired LAN" is set in Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network
> Interface, and you want to obtain communication on the sub line side.
Default Value 2
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP

1029
 8. Service Mode

■ P-STOP
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > P-STOP
PRINTER 1 Forcible stop of paper feed
Detail To forcibly stop paper for the next job at the specified position (only once).
Leading edge of paper stops at the specified position so that the cause of a problem can
be identified.
When the operation is stopped forcibly, jam code "AAxx" is displayed.
When a normal jam occurs at a position other than the specified position or paper is delivered
without being forcibly stopped, this setting is automatically cleared.
Use Case - When bent paper/skew/wrinkles occur
- When jam occurs frequently
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Execute a job (copy/test print).
Paper stops at the specified position.
Caution - Remove the paper being stopped with the normal jam removal procedure. After jam removal, the
job is automatically recovered.
- Display of standard jam code indicates that a jam occurs somewhere other than the specified
position. Setting of forcible stop is enabled until paper stops at the specified position.
- The setting is disabled for job where paper does not pass through the specified position.
- Unfixed toner may be adhered on paper depending on the stop position. Thus, handle it with care.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
0: OFF
1: Outlet of the Vertical Path Driven Roller (cassette 1)
2: Outlet of the Vertical Path Driven Roller (cassette 2)
3: Outlet of the Vertical Path Driven Roller (cassette 3)*3
4: Outlet of the Vertical Path Driven Roller (cassette 4)
5: Outlet of the Deck Pull-out Roller
6: Inlet of the Registration Roller
7: Inlet of the Registration Roller (2nd side)
20: Registration Roller
21: Registration Roller (2nd side)
30: Inlet of the Fixing Assembly
31: Inlet of the Fixing Assembly (2nd side)
32: Outlet of the Fixing Assembly
33: Outlet of the Fixing Assembly (2nd side)
40: Outlet of the First Delivery *1
41: Outlet of the First Delivery (2nd side) *1
42: Outlet of the Vertical Path Driven Roller *1
43: Outlet of the Vertical Path Driven Roller (2nd side) *1
50: Outlet of the Second Delivery *1
51: Outlet of the Second Delivery (2nd side) *1
70: Reverse Mouth *2
71: Inlet of the Duplex Inlet Roller *2
72: Outlet of the Duplex Inlet Roller *2
73: Outlet of the Duplex/Feeding Roller *2
99: Inlet of the Fixing Assembly (for checking image)
Any value other than those mentioned above: Not used
*1: Paper may not be stopped depending on the delivery destination setting.
*2: Paper is stopped after being reversed for a 2-sided job.
*3: The paper stop in the same position on the High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit installation.
Default Value 0

1030
 8. Service Mode

COUNTER (Counter mode)

■ TOTAL
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL
SERVICE1 1 Service-purposed total counter 1
Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999

SERVICE2 1 Service-purposed total counter 2

Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine.
Large size: 2, Small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999

COPY 1 Total copy counter

Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999

PDL-PRT 1 PDL print counter

Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at
PDL print.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999

FAX-PRT 1 FAX reception print counter

Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at
FAX reception.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999

RMT-PRT 1 Remote print counter

Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine and 2-sided print is stacked
according to the charge counter at remote print.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999

BOX-PRT 1 Inbox print counter

Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at
Inbox print.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999

RPT-PRT 1 Report print counter

Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at
report print.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999

1031
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL
2-SIDE 1 2-sided copy/print counter
Detail To count up when the copy/printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge
counter at 2-sided copy/print.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999

SCAN 1 Scan counter

Detail To count the number of scan operations according to the charge counter when the scanning
operation is complete.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999

■ PICK-UP
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PICK-UP
C1 1 Cassette 1 pickup total counter
Detail Large size: 1, Small size: 1
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

C2 1 Cassette 2 pickup total counter

Detail Large size: 1, Small size: 1
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

C3 1 Cassette 3 pickup total counter

Detail Large size: 1, Small size: 1
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

C4 1 Cassette 4 pickup total counter

Detail Large size: 1, Small size: 1
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MF 1 Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter

Detail Large size: 1, Small size: 1
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1032
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PICK-UP
DK 1 Deck pickup total counter
Detail Large size: 1, Small size: 1
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

2-SIDE 1 2-sided pickup total counter

Detail Large size: 1, Small size: 1
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

■ FEEDER
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > FEEDER
FEED 1 DADF original pickup total counter
Detail To count up the number of originals picked up from the DADF.
Use Case When checking the total counter of original pickup by DADF
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

L-FEED 1 DADF large size pickup total counter

Detail DADF large size pickup total counter
Use Case When checking the total counter of large size pickup by DADF
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0

S-FEED 1 DADF small size pickup total counter

Detail DADF small size pickup total counter
Use Case When checking the total counter of small size pickup by DADF
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0

DFOP-CNT 1 DADF hinge open/close counter

Detail To count up the number of open/close of the DADF hinge.
Use Case When checking the DADF hinge open/close counter
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1033
 8. Service Mode

■ JAM
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JAM
TOTAL 1 Host machine total jam counter
Detail Total number of jam occurrences in the host machine
Use Case When checking the total jam counter of the host machine
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit time
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

FEEDER 1 DADF total jam counter

Detail Total number of jam occurrences in the DADF
Use Case When checking the total jam counter of feeder
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit time
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

SORTER 1 Finisher total jam counter

Detail Total number of jam occurrences in the Finisher
Use Case When checking the total jam counter of finisher
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit time
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MF 1 Multi-purpose Tray jam counter

Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Multi-purpose Tray
Use Case When checking the jam counter of Multi-purpose Tray
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit time
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

C1 1 Cassette 1 pickup jam counter

Detail Cassette 1 pickup jam counter
Use Case When checking the jam counter of machine's Cassette 1
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit time
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

C2 1 Cassette 2 pickup jam counter

Detail Cassette 2 pickup jam counter
Use Case When checking the jam counter of machine's Cassette 2
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit time
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1034
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JAM
C3 1 Cassette 3 pickup jam counter
Detail Cassette 3 pickup jam counter
Use Case When checking the jam counter of machine's Cassette 3
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit time
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

C4 1 Cassette 4 pickup jam counter

Detail Cassette 4 pickup jam counter
Use Case When checking the jam counter of machine's Cassette 4
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit time
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DK 1 Pickup decks jam counter

Detail Pickup decks jam counter
Use Case When checking the jam counter of all pickup decks
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit time
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

■ MISC
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > MISC
T-SPLY-K 1 For R&D
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

LSR-MTR 1 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

ALLPW-ON 1 Number of DCON PCB power-on times

Detail Number of power-on times (Non-all-night Power Unit).
To count up when power is turned ON (Non-all-night Power Unit).
Use Case When checking the usage status of the product
Unit time
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

HDD-ON 1 Number of hard disk start-up times

Detail To count up when power of the hard disk is turned ON.
Use Case When checking the usage status of the product
Unit time
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

FIN-PTH 1 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1035
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > MISC
FR-STPL 1 For R&D
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MSTP-B 1 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

MSTPL 1 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

STPL-2P 1 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

STPL-F 1 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

STPL-R 1 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

SWG-RL 1 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

FIN-RBLT 1 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

APW-TIME 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

CPW-TIME 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

BAT-TIME 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

FUSE-CNT 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

SPW-TIME 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

■ JOB
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JOB
DVPAPLEN 1 For R&D
DVRUNLEN 1 For R&D

1036
 8. Service Mode

■ DRBL-1
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1
TR-ROLL 1 Transfer Roller parts counter
Detail Transfer Roller
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

SP-SC-EL 1 Separation Static Eliminator prts cntr

Detail Separation Static Charge Eliminator
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

PT-DRM 1 Photosensitive Drum parts counter

Detail Photosensitive Drum
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method The counter clearing by the service mode does not have a counter so that it is cleared.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DV-UNT-K 1 Developing Assembly parts counter

Detail Developing Assembly
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1037
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1
C1-PU-RL 1 Cassette 1 Pickup Roller parts counter
Detail Cassette 1 Pickup Roller
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0

C1-SP-RL 1 Cassette 1 Separation Roller parts cntr

Detail Cassette 1 Separation Roller
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0

C1-FD-RL 1 Cassette 1 Feed Roller parts counter

Detail Cassette 1 Feed Roller
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0

C2-PU-RL 1 Cassette 2 Pickup Roller parts counter

Detail Cassette 2 Pickup Roller
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0

1038
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1
C2-SP-RL 1 Cassette 2 Separation Roller prts cntr
Detail Cassette 2 Separation Roller
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0

C2-FD-RL 1 Cassette 2 Feed Roller parts counter

Detail Cassette 2 Feed Roller
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

M-FD-RL 1 Manual Feed Pickup Roller parts counter

Detail Manual Feed Pickup Roller
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0

M-SP-PD 1 Manual Feed Separation Pad parts counter

Detail Manual Feed Separation Pad
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0

1039
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1
FX-UNIT 1 Fixing Main Unit parts counter
Detail Fixing Main Unit
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0

WST-TNR 1 Waste Toner Container parts counter

Detail Waste Toner Container
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

OZ-FIL1 1 Air Filter parts counter

Detail Air Filter
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0

■ DRBL-2
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2
DF-PU-RL 1 Pickup Roller parts counter: DADF
Detail 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is advanced every time a sheet is fed.
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1040
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2
DF-FD-RL 1 Feed Roller parts counter: DADF
Detail Feed Roller (DADF)
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is advanced every time a sheet is fed.
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DF-SP-RL 1 Separation Roller parts counter: DADF

Detail Separation Roller (DADF)
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is advanced every time a sheet is fed.
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

STAMP 1 Stamp parts counter: DADF

Detail Stamp (DADF)
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life value
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit time
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1041
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2
DF-HNG-L 1 Left Hinge parts counter: reverse
Detail Left Hinge of the DADF (reverse model)
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life value
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo The counter is advanced at each opening and closing.
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

PD-PU-RL 1 Pickup Roller parts counter: Deck

Detail Pickup Roller (Front/Rear) of Paper Deck
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

PD-SP-RL 1 Separation Roller parts counter: Deck

Detail Separation Roller of Paper Deck
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1042
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2
PD-FD-RL 1 Feed Roller parts counter: Deck
Detail Feed Roller of Paper Deck
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

C3-PU-RL 1 Cassette 3 Pickup Roller parts counter

Detail Cassette 3 Pickup Roller
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

C3-SP-RL 1 Cassette3 Separation Roller prts counter

Detail Cassette3 Separation Roller
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

C3-FD-RL 1 Cassette 3 Feed Roller parts counter

Detail Cassette 3 Feed Roller
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1043
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2
C4-PU-RL 1 Cassette 4 Pickup Roller parts counter
Detail Cassette 4 Pickup Roller
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

C4-SP-RL 1 Cassette4 Separation Roller prts counter

Detail Cassette 4 Separation Roller
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

C4-FD-RL 1 Cassette 4 Feed Roller parts counter

Detail Cassette 4 Feed Roller
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

FIN-STPR 1 Stapler parts counter:Fin-J1/Y1

Detail Staple Unit
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit time
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1044
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2
PUNCH 1 Punch unit parts counter:Fin-J1/Y1
Detail Punch Unit
1st line: total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts or replacing the parts.
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit time
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

TRY-TQLM 1 Tray Torq Limt pts cntr: Fin-Y1

Detail Stack Tray Torque Limiter
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DL-STC 1 Stk Tr Dvry Ass'y Sttc Eliminator:Fin-Y1

Detail Stack Tray Delivery Assembly Static Eliminator
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1045
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2
FIN-MPDL 1 Paddle parts counter:Fin-Y1
Detail Paddle
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life value
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit time
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

FR-STPL 1 Staple free stapling counter: Fin-J1/Y1

Detail Number of executions of staple free stapling (including at the time of paper dust removal)
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life value
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit time
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> FR-ST-RP
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

ESC-CL 1 Escape Feed Clutch parts counter:Fin-Y1

Detail Escape Feed Clutch
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life value
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit time
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1046
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2
SDL-STC 1 Sdl Delvry Ass'y Sttc Eliminator:Fin-Y1
Detail Saddle Delivery Assembly Static Eliminator
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life value
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

TRY-STC1 1 Escape Dvry Ass'y Sttc Eliminator:Fin-Y1

Detail Escape Delivery Assembly Static Eliminator
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life value
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

SW-RL-CL 1 Low Stck Delvry Rol Clt prts cntr:Fin-Y1

Detail Lower Stack Delivery Roller Clutch
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit time
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1047
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2
HCCPU-RL 1 Casstt3 Pickup Roller prts cntr: HC-CST
Detail Cassette 3 Pickup Roller (High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit)
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life value
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

HCCSP-RL 1 Casstt3 Sprtn Roller prts cntr: HC-CST

Detail Cassette 3 Separation Roller (High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit)
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life value
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

HCCFD-RL 1 Casstt3 Feed Roller prts cntr: HC-CST

Detail Cassette 3 Feed Roller (High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit)
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life value
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1048
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2
SDL-STP 1 Saddle stitcher parts counter: Fin-Y1
Detail Saddle stitcher unit
1st line: total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts or replacing the parts.
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit time
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

DF-PR-PD 1 Pre-separation Unit parts counter: DADF

Detail Pre-separation Unit (DADF)
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0-99999999
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is advanced every time a sheet is fed.
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

■ LF
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > LF
K-DRM-LF 1 Drum Unit (Bk) estimated life value
Detail To display how much the Drum Unit (Bk) is close to the end of life in % (percentage).
When a new part is set, the value becomes 0.
Use Case When checking the life of Drum Unit
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit %
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

■ MISC2
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > MISC2
APW-TIME 2 For R&D
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

CPW-TIME 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1049
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > MISC2
BAT-TIME 2 For R&D
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

FUSE-CNT 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

SPW-TIME 2 For R&D

Amount of Change 1
per Unit

■ PAPER
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PAPER
G52-59 1 Delivered sheet counter: 52 to 59 g/m2
Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 52 to 59 g/m2.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

G60-63 1 Delivered sheet counter: 60 to 63 g/m2

Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 60 to 63 g/m2.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

G64-75 1 Delivered sheet counter: 64 to 75 g/m2

Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 64 to 75 g/m2.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1050
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PAPER
G76-90 1 Delivered sheet counter: 76 to 90 g/m2
Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 76 to 90 g/m2.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

G91-105 1 Delivered sheet counter: 91 to 105 g/m2

Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 91 to 105 g/m2.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

G106-128 1 Delivered sheet counter: 106 to 128 g/m2

Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 106 to 128 g/m2.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

G129-150 1 Delivered sheet counter: 129 to 150 g/m2

Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 129 to 150 g/m2.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

G151-163 1 Delivered sheet counter: 151 to 163 g/m2

Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 151 to 163 g/m2.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1051
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PAPER
G164-180 1 Delivered sheet counter: 164 to 180 g/m2
Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 164 to 180 g/m2.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

G181-220 1 Delivered sheet counter: 181 to 220 g/m2

Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 181 to 220 g/m2.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

G221-256 1 Delivered sheet counter: 221 to 256 g/m2

Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 221 to 256 g/m2.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

G257-300 1 Delivered sheet counter: 257 to 300 g/m2

Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 257 to 300 g/m2.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

G301-325 1 Delivered sheet counter: 301 to 325 g/m2

Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 301 to 325 g/m2.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1052
 8. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PAPER
G326-350 1 Delivered sheet counter: 326 to 350 g/m2
Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 326 to 350 g/m2.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

G351OVER 1 Delivered sheet counter:351 g/m2 or more

Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 351 g/m2 or more.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit sheet
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1053
 8. Service Mode

FEEDER (ADF service mode)

DISPLAY (State display mode)

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > DISPLAY (State display mode)
FEEDSIZE 1 Dspl orgnl size detected by DADF
Detail To display the original size detected by the DADF.
Use Case When checking the paper size recognized by the device after scanning
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)

TRY-WIDE 1 Distance of Original Width Detect Slider

Detail To display the decuple value of the distance between the Original Width Detection Sliders.
Use Case At incorrect detection of original size
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Caution Even if a value larger than 297.0 mm which is the maximum readable width is displayed, it does not
mean that the reading range changes. When reading an original of 297.1 mm or larger in width, the
edge of an image may be missing.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3048
Unit mm
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> TRY-A4
Supplement/Memo If the edge of an image is still missing after adjustment of A4 paper width (297.0 mm) with TRY-A4,
the original width may be larger than 297.1 mm.
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

ADJUST (Adjustment mode)

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
DOCST 1 Adj image lead edge margin: stream read
Detail To adjust the leading edge margin of the image on the front side at stream reading.
Execute this item when the output image after DADF installation is displaced.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is reduced by 0.1 mm. (The image moves upward.)
The setting is applied to only the image on the front side in the case of DADF (1-path model) or the
images on both the front and back sides in the case of DADF (reverse model).
Use Case - When installing DADF
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -50 to 50
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

1054
 8. Service Mode

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)

LA-SPEED 1 Fine adj img ratio:stream read,vert scan
Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at
stream reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1% in vertical scanning direction. (The
feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.)
Use Case - When installing DADF
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30
Unit %
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

DOCST2 1 Adj img lead edge mar: 2-side,bck,1-path

Detail To adjust the leading edge margin of the image on the back side scanned with the DADF
(1-path model).
Execute this item when the output image after DADF installation is displaced.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is reduced by 0.1 mm. (The image moves upward.)
Use Case - When installing DADF
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -50 to 50
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

LA-SPD2 1 FA img ratio:2-side,vert scan,bck,1-path

Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification in vertical scanning direction on the back side
scanned with the DADF (1-path model).
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1% in vertical scanning direction. (The
feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.)
Use Case - When installing DADF
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -200 to 200 (-2.00 to 2.00%)
Unit %
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.01
per Unit

1055
 8. Service Mode

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)

ADJMSCN1 1 Fine adj img ratio: stream,horz scan,frt
Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction on the
front side at stream reading.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is enlarged by 0.1% in horizontal scanning direction.
The setting is applied to only the image on the front side in the case of DADF (1-path model) or the
images on both the front and back sides in the case of DADF (reverse model).
Use Case When changing the image magnification ratio only for the front side
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -10 to 10
Unit %
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

ADJMSCN2 1 Fine adj img ratio:2side,horz,bck;S-pass

Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification in horizontal scanning direction on the back
side scanned with the DADF (1-path model).
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is enlarged by 0.1% in horizontal scanning direction.
Use Case When image magnification ratio on the front side and back side are different at 2-sided reading
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -10 to 10
Unit %
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)
MTR-CHK 1 Specification of DADF operation motor
Detail To specify the motor of DADF to operate.
The motor is activated by MTR-ON.
Use Case At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
- DADF (1-path model)
0: Pickup Motor (STM2), 1: Registration Motor (STM1), 2: Read Motor (STM3)
- DADF (reverse model)
0: Pickup Motor (M1), 1: Read Motor (M2), 2: Not used
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-ON

TRY-A4 1 Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: A4

Detail To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 1 for the DADF Original Pickup
Tray. (A4)
Use Case - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR)
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.

TRY-A5R 1 Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 2: A5R

Detail To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 2 for the DADF Original Pickup
Tray. (A5R)
Use Case - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR)
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.

1056
 8. Service Mode

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)

TRY-LTR 1 Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: LTR
Detail To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 1 for the DADF Original Pickup
Tray. (LTR)
Use Case - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR)
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.

TRY-LTRR 1 Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref2: LTRR

Detail To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 2 for the DADF Original Pickup
Tray. (LTRR)
Use Case - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR)
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.

FEED-CHK 1 Specify DADF individual feed operation

Detail To specify the feed mode for DADF.
Feed operation is activated by FEED-ON.
Use Case At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
- DADF (1-path model)
0: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation, 1: Not used, 2: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation (with stamp),
3: Not used
- DADF (reverse model)
0: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation, 1: 2-sided pickup/delivery operation, 2: 1-sided pickup/
delivery operation (with stamp), 3: 2-sided pickup/delivery operation (with stamp)
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-ON

CL-CHK 1 Specifying DADF Operation Clutch

Detail To specify the DADF Clutch to be operated.
The Clutch is activated by CL-ON.
Use Case At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
- DADF (1-path model)
0: Pickup Clutch (CL1), 1: Not used
- DADF (reverse model)
0: Pickup Clutch (CL1), 1: Registration Clutch (CL2)
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> CL-ON

CL-ON 1 Operation check of DADF Clutch

Detail To start operation check of the clutch specified by CL-CHK.
Use Case At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
The clutch operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically stops.
2) Press OK key.
The operation check is completed.
Caution Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation automatically stops after
approximately 5 seconds, but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is
not displayed).
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> CL-CHK

1057
 8. Service Mode

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)

FAN-CHK 1 Specification of DADF operation fan
Detail To specify the fan of DADF to operate.
The fan is activated by FAN-ON.
Use Case At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range - DADF (1-path model)
0: ADF Cooling Fan (FAN_A1)
- DADF (reverse model)
0: Not used
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-ON

FAN-ON 1 Operation check of DADF fan

Detail To start operation check of the fan specified by FAN-CHK.
Use Case At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
It is driven for approximately 5 seconds and is automatically stopped.
2) Press OK key.
The operation check is completed.
Caution Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation automatically stops after
approximately 5 seconds, but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is
not displayed).
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-CHK

SL-CHK 1 Specification of DADF operation solenoid

Detail To specify the solenoid of DADF to operate.
The solenoid is activated by SL-ON.
Use Case At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
- DADF (1-path model)
0: Stamp Solenoid (SL1), 1: Not used
- DADF (reverse model)
0: Release Solenoid (SL1), 1: Stamp Solenoid (SL2)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-ON

SL-ON 1 Operation check of DADF solenoid

Detail To start operation check of the solenoid specified by SL-CHK.
Use Case At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
It is driven for approximately 5 seconds and is automatically stopped.
2) Press OK key.
The operation check is completed.
Caution Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation automatically stops after
approximately 5 seconds, but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is
not displayed).
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-CHK

1058
 8. Service Mode

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)

MTR-ON 1 Operation check of DADF motor
Detail To start operation check for the motor specified by MTR-CHK.
Use Case At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically stops.
2) Press OK key.
The operation check is completed.
Caution Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation automatically stops after
approximately 5 seconds, but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is
not displayed).
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-CHK

ROLL-CLN 1 Rotation of DADF rollers

Detail To rotate the rollers of DADF for cleaning.
Check the rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while they are rotating.
Use Case When cleaning the rollers
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Clean the rotating rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
3) Press OK key.
The rollers stop.

FEED-ON 1 Operation check of DADF individual feed

Detail To start operation check of the feed mode specified by FEED-CHK.
Use Case At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-CHK

OPTION (Specification setting mode)

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > OPTION (Specification setting mode)
SIZE-SW 1 ON/OFF of mixed paper detection: AB/Inch
Detail To set whether to detect mixed size originals: AB configuration and Inch configuration.
Use Case When mixing AB and Inch configuration sizes original
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON

R-ATM 1 Set DADF dble fd dtct H-land mode:1-path

Detail To set the Double Feed Sensor of the DADF (1-path model) to the highland mode.
Set 1 if the installation site is above the altitude of 2000 meters.
Use Case When the installation site is above the altitude of 2,000 meters at installation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Normal, 1: Highland mode
Default Value 0

1059
 8. Service Mode

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > OPTION (Specification setting mode)

R-OVLPLV 2 Set DADF dble fd dtct thrshld VL: 1-path
Detail To set the threshold value at which the Double Feed Sensor of the DADF (1-path model) judges
whether papers are double fed.
Decrease the value if single feed of paper is incorrectly detected as double feed.
Increase the value if double feed of paper is incorrectly detected as single feed.
Use Case When double feed is incorrectly detected with special paper not defined in the specifications
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution In the case of highlands, be sure to set R-ATM in advance.
Display/Adj/Set Range -3 to 3
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode FEEDER> OPTION> R-ATM

1060
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options)

ADJUST (Adjustment mode)

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
PNCH-Y 1 Adj punch hole horz rgst pstn: Fin-J1/Y1
Detail To adjust the punch hole in horizontal registration direction.
As the value is incremented by 1, the punch hole moves by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case When the punch hole is misaligned in the horizontal registration direction
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution FIN-Y1
When the setting of "PUN-Y-SW" is 0, the adjustable range is from -3 to 15.
FIN-J1
When the setting of "PUN-Y-SW" is 0, the adjustable range is from -13 to 15.
Display/Adj/Set Range -25 to 25
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> OPTION> PUN-Y-SW
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

STP-F1 1 Front 1-staple position: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the front 1-staple position on Finisher.
As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced in the front 1-stapling mode
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

1061
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
STP-R1 1 Rear 1-staple position: Fin-Y1
Detail To adjust the rear 1-staple position.
As the value is changed by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced in the rear 1-stapling mode
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

STP-2P 1 Adj 2-stapling position: Fin-J1/Y1

Detail To adjust the 2-staple position.
As the value is changed by 1, the staples position moves by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the staples position in front/rear direction is displaced in the 2-stapling mode
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range Fin-J1: -50 to 50
Fin-Y1: -30 to 30
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

BFF-SFT 1 Ppr displace amount on buffer: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the paper displacement amount on Finisher Buffer Assembly.
As the value is incremented by 1, the paper position moves by 0.1mm.
+: The 1st sheet of buffered paper shifts toward the inlet side
-: The 1st sheet of buffered paper shifts toward the delivery side
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the paper displacement occurs on the 1st to 2nd sheets of buffered paper.
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -60 to 60
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

1062
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
PNCH-X 1 Punch hole pstn in feed way: Fin-J1/Y1
Detail To adjust the punch hole position on puncher unit in feed direction.
As the value is incremented by 1, the punch hole moves by 0.1mm.
+: Toward delivery direction
-: Toward inlet direction
Use Case When the punch hole is displaced in feed direction
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution Fin-Y1
When selecting the precision priority by operation panel menu, this adjustment cannot
be executed.
Display/Adj/Set Range -20 to 20
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> OPTION> PUCH-SW
Additional Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Switch Finisher Puncher Mode
Functions Mode
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

BFF-SFT2 1 Ppr displace amount on buffer: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the paper displacement amount on Finisher Buffer Assembly.
As the value is incremented by 1, the paper position moves by 0.1mm.
+: The 2nd sheet of buffered paper shifts toward the inlet side
-: The 2nd sheet of buffered paper shifts toward the delivery side
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the paper displacement occurs on the 2nd to 3rd sheets of buffered paper.
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -60 to 60
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

1063
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
SDL-STP 1 Adj of Saddle Sttch stpl pstn: Fin-Y1
Detail To adjust the staple position of Saddle Stitcher.
As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1mm.
+: The staple position moves toward the left at open page of the book
-: The staple position moves toward the right at open page of the book
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the staple position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced.
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -20 to 20
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> SDL-STP2
Supplement/Memo Because the staple position of the thin paper is changed by this adjustment at the same time,
perform the adjustment of SDL-STP2 as needed after performing this adjustment if the staple
position of the thin paper has been adjusted by SDL-STP2.
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

SDL-FLD 1 Adj of Saddle Sttch fold pstn: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the fold position of Saddle Stitcher.
As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm.
+: The staple position moves toward the left at open page of the book
-: The staple position moves toward the right at open page of the book
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the fold position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -20 to 20
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> SDL-FLD2
Supplement/Memo Because the fold position of the thin paper is changed by this adjustment at the same time, perform
the adjustment of SDL-FLD2 as needed after performing this adjustment if the fold position of the
thin paper has been adjusted by SDL-FLD2.
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

SDL-ALG 1 Adj of Saddle Sttch align wid: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the alignment width of Saddle Stitcher.
As the value is incremented by 1, the alignment width is increased by 0.1 mm.
+: The width of the adjustment plate becomes narrow.
-: The width of the adjustment plate becomes wide.
Use Case When the misalignment occurs within a paper stack on the Saddle Stitcher
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -20 to 20
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

1064
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
ST-ALG1 1 Adj Stacker A4 align pstn: Fin-Y1
Detail To adjust the A4 size paper alignment position of the Process Tray.
As the value is incremented by 1, the position of the adjustment plate is increased by 0.1 mm.
+: Inward
-: Outward
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When misalignment occurs in A4 size paper.
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) The alignment plate moves to position of the A4 width.
3) Set the A4 paper on the processing tray.
4) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
5) Check the adjustment movement of the alignment plate.
6) Repeat steps 4) and 5) and adjust alignment width.
7) After completion of the adjustment, remove paper on the processing tray.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -50 to 50
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

ST-ALG2 1 Adj Stacker LTR align pstn: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the LTR size paper alignment position of the Process Tray.
As the value is incremented by 1, the position of the adjustment plate is increased by 0.1 mm.
+: Inward
-: Outward
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When misalignment occurs in LTR size paper.
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) The alignment plate moves to position of the LTR width.
3) Set the LTR paper on the processing tray.
4) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
5) Check the adjustment movement of the alignment plate.
6) Repeat steps 4) and 5) and adjust alignment width.
7) After completion of the adjustment, remove paper on the processing tray.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -50 to 50
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

1065
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
SW-UP-RL 1 Adj of swing unit height: Fin-Y1
Detail To adjust the height of the swing unit.
As the value is incremented by 1, the height of the swing unit is changed by angle of 0.1 degree.
+: Downward
-: Upward
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When misalignment occurs by failure of the paper feeding to processing tray.
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

INSTP-F1 1 Adj front 1-stapling position: Fin-J1

Detail To adjust the front 1-staple position.
As the value is changed by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced in the front 1-stapling mode
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -50 to 50
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

INSTP-R1 1 Adj rear 1-stapling position: Fin-J1

Detail To adjust the rear 1-staple position.
As the value is changed by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced in the rear 1-stapling mode
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -50 to 50
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

1066
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
NST-SPD 1 Adj dvry speed at non-collate: Fin-Y1
Detail To adjust the delivery speed to the stack tray in non-collate mode.
As the value is incremented by 1, the delivery speed is increased by 10 mm/sec.
Use Case When the stacking condition in non-collate mode is poor
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -10 to 10
Unit mm/s
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 10
per Unit

FR-ST-PS 1 Adjust staple free pressure: Fin-J1/Y1

Detail To adjust the staple pressure in the staple free stapling mode.
As the value is changed by 1, the staple pressure changes by 1 mNm.
+: Increased
-: Decreased
Use Case Upon user's request (When changing the binding pressure)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution The life of staple-free binding unit becomes shorter when increasing the setting value.
Display/Adj/Set Range -15 to 15
Unit mNm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

FR-STP-X 1 Adj stpl free stpl pstn (Fd way): Fin-J1

Detail To adjust the staple position for paper feed direction in the staple free stapling mode.
As the value is changed by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward inlet direction
-: Toward delivery direction
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the staple position in paper feed direction is displaced in the staple free stapling mode
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -15 to 15
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Change the paper shift amount in the paper feed direction. The staple free stapler position is
not changed.
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

1067
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
FR-STP-Y 1 Adj stpl free stpl pstn (F/R):Fin-J1/Y1
Detail To adjust the staple position for front/rear direction in the staple free stapling mode.
As the value is changed by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced in the staple free stapling mode
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range Fin-J1: -30 to 30
Fin-Y1: -20 to 15
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Change the paper shift amount in the front/rear direction. The staple free stapler position is
not changed.
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

1068
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
RBLT-PRS 1 Adj Return Belt height 1:Fin-J1/Y1
Detail Fin-J1
To adjust the amount of pressure of the Return Belt.
As the value is changed by 1, the height of the Return Belt moves up or down by 0.1 mm so that
the amount of the pressure increases or decreases.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Fin-Y1
To adjust the height of the Return Belt when stacking the 65 sheets on the processing tray.
As the value is changed by 1, the height of the Return Belt changes by angle of 0.1 degree.
+: Downward
-: Upward
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the paper alignment position is displaced.
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution Fin-J1:
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Fin-Y1:
The height of Return Belt of the stacking 1 sheet adjust in the RBLT-PS3. The height of Return
Belt at the stacking 2 to 64 sheets alignment on the processing tray is the total of setting values of
RBLT-PRS and PBLT-PS3,
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range Fin-J1: -20 to 20
Fin-Y1: -50 to 100
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode Fin-Y1:
SORTER> ADJUST> RBLT-PS2,RBLT-PS3
Supplement/Memo Fin-Y1:
The height of Return Belt when stacking the first sheet of paper or buffering the paper: The height
of Return Belt is double of the setting value. (Escape position of Return Belt)
The height of Return Belt when stacking the sheet of paper except for first sheet: The height of
Return Belt is the setting value. (Paper feed position of Return Belt)
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

MSTP-2P 1 Adj manual stapling position:Fin-J1/Y1

Detail To adjust the staple position for front/rear direction in the manual stapling mode.
As the value is changed by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced in the manual stapling mode
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range Fin-J1: -15 to 20
Fin-Y1: -20 to 30
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

1069
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
INF-ALG1 1 Adj alignment position (A4): Fin-J1
Detail To adjust the position of the Alignment Plate when aligning A4 paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, distance between the Alignment Plates is narrowed by 0.1 mm.
Use Case - When the paper alignment position is displaced.
- When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
The Alignment Plate moves to the A4 paper width position.
2) Set A4 paper on the Processing Tray.
3) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
4) Check the operation of the Alignment Plate.
5) Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the completion of adjustment.
6) Remove the paper on the Processing Tray.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -50 to 50
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> INF-ALG2
Supplement/Memo The adjustment result is reflected in SORTER> ADJUST> INF-ALG2.
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

INF-ALG2 1 Adj alignment position (LTR): Fin-J1

Detail To adjust the position of the Alignment Plate when aligning LTR paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, distance between the Alignment Plates is narrowed by 0.1 mm.
Use Case - When the paper alignment position is displaced.
- When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
The Alignment Plate moves to the LTR paper width position.
2) Set LTR paper on the Processing Tray.
3) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
4) Check the operation of the Alignment Plate.
5) Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the completion of adjustment.
6) Remove the paper on the Processing Tray.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in INF-ALG1 of the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -50 to 50
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> INF-ALG1
Supplement/Memo The adjustment result is reflected in SORTER> ADJUST> INF-ALG1.
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

1070
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
CENT-ALG 1 Adj ctr align standard pstn: Fin-J1/Y1
Detail To adjust the standard position for the center alignment
As the value is incremented by 1, the standard position for the center alignment moves by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case - When the standard position for the center alignment is misaligned
- When the paper alignment position is displaced.
- When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution This adjustment influences alignment operation and staple position.
Fin-J1:
Adjust the alignment width with INF-ALG1/2.
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Fin-Y1:
Adjust the alignment width with ST-ALG1/2.
Display/Adj/Set Range Fin-J1: -10 to 10
Fin-Y1: -50 to 50
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode Fin-J1:
SORTER> ADJUST> INF-ALG1, INF-ALG2
Fin-Y1:
SORTER> ADJUST> ST-ALG1, ST-ALG2
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

SDL-STP2 1 Adj of Saddle Sttch stpl pstn: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the staple position of Saddle Stitcher (when using the thin paper; the paper that the paper
weight is less than 64 g/m2).
As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1mm.
+: The staple position moves toward the left at open page of the book
-: The staple position moves toward the right at open page of the book
Use Case When the staple position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced with the thin paper
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -20 to 20
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> SDL-STP
Supplement/Memo Perform this adjustment after performing the adjustment of SDL-STP.
Because the staple position of the thin paper is adjusted by the total setting values of SDL-STP
and SDL-STP2, the actual adjustment of the staple position is performed in the staple position
adjustable range (-20 to 20) even if entering the setting value beyond the mechanical staple
position adjustable range.
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

1071
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
SDL-FLD2 1 Adj of Saddle Sttch fold pstn: Fin-Y1
Detail To adjust the fold position of Saddle Stitcher (when using the thin paper; the paper that the paper
weight is less than 64 g/m2).
As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm.
+: The fold position moves toward the left at open page of the book
-: The fold position moves toward the right at open page of the book
Use Case When the fold position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced with the thin paper
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -20 to 20
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> SDL-FLD
Supplement/Memo Perform this adjustment after performing the adjustment of SDL-FLD.
Because the fold position of the thin paper is adjusted by the total setting values of SDL-FLD
and SDL-FLD2, the actual adjustment of the fold position is performed in the fold position
adjustable range (-20 to 20) even if entering the setting value beyond the mechanical fold position
adjustable range.
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

ESC1-SPD 1 Adj Escape Tr delivery speed: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the delivery speed to the escape tray.
As the value is changed by 1, the delivery speed to the lower escape tray changes by 10 mm/sec.
Use Case When the paper stacking to the escape tray is misalignment
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -10 to 10
Unit mm/s
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 10
per Unit

SFT-SPD 1 Adj dvry speed at collate mode: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the delivery speed to the stack tray at collate mode.
As the value is changed by 1, the delivery speed changes by 10 mm/sec.
Use Case When the paper stacking of stack tray at collate mode is misalignment
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When the value is decreased, the productivity is decreased.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5 to 5
Unit mm/s
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 10
per Unit

1072
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
STP-SPD 1 Adj dvry speed at staple mode: Fin-Y1
Detail To adjust the delivery speed to the stack tray at staple mode or staple-free binding mode.
As the value is changed by 1, the delivery speed changes by 10 mm/sec.
Use Case When the paper stacking at staple mode or staple-free binding mode is misalignment
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution - When the value is decreased, the productivity is decreased.
- When the buffer operation is performed, delivery speed does not change. (The buffer operation
is the operation to deliver the stacking paper on the processing tray.)
The ON/OFF of buffer operation is set by BUFF-SW.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5 to 5
Unit mm/s
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> OPTION> BUFF-SW
Amount of Change 10
per Unit

RBLT-PS2 1 Adj of Return Belt height 2:Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the height of the Return Belt when aligning the paper on the processing tray.
As the value is changed by 1, the height of the return belt changes by angle of 0.1 degree.
+: Downward
-: Upward
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the misalignment of paper stack occurs during alignment operation on the processing tray.
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution The height of Return Belt during the paper alignment on the processing tray is the total of setting
values of RBLT-PRS2 and PBLT-PS3, so adjust again the setting value of RBLT-PS2 if necessary
when changing the setting value of RBLT-PRS3.
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> RBLT-PRS,RBLT-PS3
Supplement/Memo Perform this adjustment after executing adjustment of RBLT-PRS.
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

1073
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
RBLT-PS3 1 Adj of Return Belt height 3:Fin-Y1
Detail To adjust the height of the Return Belt when stacking the 1 sheet on the processing tray.
As the value is changed by 1, the height of the return belt changes by angle of 0.1 degree.
+: Downward
-: Upward
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the paper alignment position is displaced.
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution The height of Return Belt of the stacking 65 sheets adjust in the RBLT-PRS. The height of Return
Belt at the stacking 2 to 64 sheets alignment on the processing tray is the total of setting values
of RBLT-PRS and RBLT-PS3. So adjust again the setting value of RBLT-PS2 if necessary when
changing the setting value of RBLT-PS3.
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -50 to 100
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> RBLT-PRS,RBLT-PS2
Amount of Change 0.1
per Unit

FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)
FN-SENS1 1 Adj Punch Horz Rgst Sensor: Fin-J1/Y1
Detail To automatically adjust the output of the Horizontal Registration Sensor 1 to 5 of the Puncher Unit
in sequence.
Horizontal Registration Sensor 1: A3/A4, 2: LDR/LTR, 3: B4/B5, 4: A4R/LTRR/LGL, 5: B5R
Use Case - When installing/replacing the Puncher Unit
- When replacing the Horizontal Registration Sensor of the Puncher Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution If paper blocks light to the sensor, the adjustment result ends in NG.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG

FN-SENS2 1 Adj Punch Waste Full Sensor: Fin-J1/Y1

Detail To automatically adjust the output of Punch Waste Full Sensor (Punch Waste Full Detection PCB)
of the Puncher Unit.
Use Case - When installing/replacing the Puncher Unit
- When replacing the Punch Waste Full Sensor
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution If paper blocks light to the sensor, the adjustment result ends in NG.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG

FIN-BK-R 1 Finisher backup data saving: Fin-J1/Y1

Detail To read the backup data from the Finisher Controller PCB and save in HDD.
Use Case When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> FIN-BK-W

1074
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)
FIN-BK-W 1 Finisher backup data writing: Fin-J1/Y1
Detail The backup data saved in HDD is written to the finisher controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> FIN-BK-R

FIN-CON 1 Controller PCB RAM clear: Fin-J1/Y1

Detail To execute the RAM clear of Finisher Controller PCB to delete all the adjustment contents. (except
the counter information)
Use Case When clearing RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter the
necessary setting values.
- RAM clear is executed after the main power is turned OFF/ON.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
Supplement/Memo The adjustment values stored to the puncher controller PCB does not cleared.

CNT-FCON 1 For R&D

FR-ST-RP 1 Ppr dust remov at stpl free stpl:All Fin
Detail To remove the paper dust from the staple-free binding unit, the staple-free binding operation
repeatedly is executed 30 times without paper.
When this mode is executed, the performance of the staple-free binding unit recovers.
Use Case When the performance of the staple-free binding unit deteriorates
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Finisher-J1/Y1:
- The Staple free stapling parts counter is advanced.
Finisher-Y1:
- If a job is submitted during execution of this mode, it is to be a finisher sequence error jam.
- If an error avoidance jam occurs during execution of this mode, it is to be an error immediately.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-2> FR-STPL
Supplement/Memo The removed paper dust accumulates on the lower frame under the paper path, so it does not
influence to the machine performance.
The part counter value of the staple free stapling operation is counted.

PUN-BK-R 1 Puncher backup data saving: Fin-J1/Y1

Detail To read the backup data from Puncher Controller PCB and save in HDD.
Use Case When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to read the data before writing.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> PUN-BK-W

1075
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)
PUN-BK-W 1 Puncher backup data writing: Fin-J1/Y1
Detail To write the backup data saved in HDD to Puncher Controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to read the data before writing.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> PUN-BK-R

EMSG-CLR 1 Clear Fin limited function mssg: All Fin

Detail To clear the message related to staple free stapling that is displayed when functions of Finisher
are limited.
The staple free stapling alarm (61-0002) is cleared.
Use Case When clearing the message related to limited functions mode that is displayed after
troubleshooting of finisher is performed
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Only the messages related to staple free stapling can be cleared.
Display/Adj/Set Range At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal termination: NG!

OPTION (Specification setting mode)

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode)
MD-SPRTN 1 Restricted operation at Finisher error
Detail To set whether to stop the machine when an error occurs at Finisher.
The result set in [Limited Functions Mode] in [Settings/Registration] is displayed.
Set 0 when canceling restriction on operations.
When switching whether to restrict operations for each function, make the setting in [Limited
Functions Mode].
Use Case When canceling restriction on operations of the finisher
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Do not set any value other than 0.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
0: Normal
1: Function restriction
2 to 255: Not use
Default Value 0
Additional Management Settings> Device Management> Limited Functions Mode
Functions Mode

BUFF-SW 1 Set of fin buffer opertn: Fin-Y1

Detail To set ON/OFF of buffer operation in the Finisher.
When 1 is set, the buffer operation is not performed for all modes. The alignment performance is
improved, but the productivity decreases.
Use Case When the misalignment of the buffered paper stack occurs on the processing tray
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When the buffer operation is set to OFF, productivity is decreased.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: ON, 1: OFF, 2: Not used
Default Value 0

1076
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode)
PUCH-SW 1 Hi-prdctvty/accurcy punch mod: Fin-J1/Y1
Detail To switch the high-productivity punch mode or high-accuracy punch mode of Finisher.
Use Case When switching the high-productivity punch mode or high-accuracy punch mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: high-accuracy, 1: high-productivity
Default Value 0
Additional Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Switch Finisher Puncher Mode
Functions Mode
Supplement/Memo The settings of this service mode and the "Switch Finisher Puncher Mode" of the "Settings/
Registration" change at the same time.

1SHT-SRT 1 Set collate dvry of 1-sheet: Fin-Y1

Detail To set ON/OFF of collated delivery operation for a sheet of paper.
When 1 is set, the collated delivery operation for a sheet of paper is not performed.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution The stacking condition decreases when the collated delivery operation for a sheet of
paper enables.
A sheet of paper is delivered by non-sort decreases when the collated delivery operation for a sheet
of paper disables.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 0
Additional Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Offset Jobs
Functions Mode
Supplement/Memo The collated delivery operation for a sheet of paper works in the following condition.
The setting of a sheet of paper and a copy
This service mode is ON.
The job from a printer driver
Oddset jobs is ON.

FIN-SP1 2 Finisher special setting 1: Fin-J1/Y1

Detail To execute the Finisher special settings 1.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division.
Display/Adj/Set Range 00000000 to 11111111
Default Value 00000000

FIN-SP2 2 Finisher special setting 2: Fin-J1/Y1

Detail To execute the Finisher special settings 2.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division.
Display/Adj/Set Range 00000000 to 11111111
Default Value 00000000

1077
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode)
NSRT-STC 1 Set stack improve mode: non-sort, Fin-Y1
Detail To set stack improvement mode when non-collate is set to the Stack Tray.
When 1 is set, paper stack is delivered at the center reference via the Process Tray even if it is
non-collate mode so the stacking condition can be improved.
Use Case When the stacking condition at non-sorting of the stack tray is poor
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When 1 is set:
- Productivity is decreased.
- In the case of the paper type or the paper size that cannot feed via a processing tray , paper is
delivered by non-sort.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

MSTP-TMG 1 Set of manual stpl tmg: Fin-J1/Y1

Detail To set the duration of time before executing automatic stapling at manual staple mode.
As the value is changed by 1, the time is changed by 1 second.
+: Timing is delayed
-: Timing becomes earlier
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 5
Unit sec
Default Value 3
Additional Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Time Until Stapling Starts in Stapler Mode
Functions Mode
Supplement/Memo The setting of the service mode links the setting of the user mode.
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

FR-ST-PO 1 Set staple free staple position: Fin-J1

Detail To set the staple position of staple free stapling.
When 1 is set, staple position becomes the center so paper is more likely to be come off. The
staple position moves toward delivery direction by 4.0 mm and moves inward by 2.0 mm in the
alignment direction.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Corner-stapling (normal), 1: Center-stapling
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> FR-STP-X/Y

MSTP-WT 1 Set wait time after manual stpl: Fin-J1

Detail To set the duration of time to keep manual staple mode enabled after execution of manual stapling.
While manual stapling mode is enabled, other jobs are not accepted.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 10
Unit sec
Default Value 0
Amount of Change 1
per Unit

1078
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode)
TRY-PSTN 1 Set tray pstn after job complete: Fin-J1
Detail To set the tray position after the completion of job.
When 1 is set, the tray stops at the lower limit position. Visibility of the delivered papers is improved,
but FCOT becomes longer.
Use Case Upon user's request (to improve visibility of the delivered papers)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When 1 is set, productivity is decreased. Do not put a foreign object under the tray to move the tray
down to the lower limit position. If there is a foreign object, the tray is unable to move down, E540
may occur.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Normal (priority on productivity), 1: Lower limit position (priority on visibility)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> OPTION> TRY-STP
Supplement/Memo When 1 in SORTER> OPTION> TRY-STP is set, the tray of the inner finisher does not down after
paper full detection.

PUN-Y-SW 1 Set of punch horz reg oprtn: Fin-J1/Y1

Detail To set whether or not to perform the horizontal registration operation of puncher unit for matching
with the center of the paper.
Use Case When the adjustable range of the punch hole horizontal registration adjustment (PNCH-Y)
is enlarged.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution Fin-Y1:
When punch hole position precision improvement mode is set, this mode has priority.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: The horizontal registration operation is performed.
1: The horizontal registration operation is not performed. (fixed in the center position)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> PNCH-Y
SORTER> OPTION> PUCH-SW, PNCH-SW3 (Fin-Y1 only)
Additional Fin-Y1
Functions Mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Switch Finisher Puncher Mode

PNCH-SW2 1 Setting of punch hole spec: Fin-J1/Y1

Detail To set the punch hole specification of puncher unit.
Use Case When replacing the Puncher Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution When the punch hole specification is not set, malfunction may occur in the punch operation.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: 2/4 holes puncher unit
1: 2/3 holes puncher unit
2: SWE 4 holes puncher unit
Default Value 0

1079
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode)
PNCH-SW3 1 Set punch hole hi precision mode: Fin-Y1
Detail To set ON/OFF of the mode to improve the precision of the punch hole position.
When 1 is set, the punch hole position is decided by the paper trailing edge standard.
Use Case When the position of the punch hole is misaligned
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution - When setting to ON, the productivity is decreased.
- When setting the punch mode to the precision priority, this mode enables.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> OPTION> PUCH-SW, PUN-Y-SW
Additional Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Switch Finisher Puncher Mode
Functions Mode

SFT-CHNG 1 Set dvry number of stck ppr: Fin-Y1

Detail To change the number of small size papers to be delivered as a stack in offset and collate mode.
When 1 is set, the number of small size papers to be delivered as a stack in offset and collate mode
is changed.
- Plain paper 1 and 2: Change from 5 sheets to 2 sheets
- Plain paper 3: Change from 3 sheets to 2 sheets
However, it is not changed when delivering paper with a weight of 106 g/m2 or more, tab paper or
coated paper.
Use Case When improving stacking performance at the time of offsetting and collating paper other than paper
with a weight of 106 g/m2 or more, tab paper and coated paper
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution - When the setting value of BUFF-SW is 1, the number of plain paper 1 to 3 to be delivered as a
stack is 5 sheets regardless of the setting of this mode.
- For small size paper, simultaneous stack delivery is not performed in offset and collate mode.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode SORTER> OPTION> BUFF-SW

STP-ALG 1 Set align plate oprtn at stpl mod:Fin-Y1

Detail To set the operation of alignment plates at staple mode and staple-free binding mode.
Set to 1 when the alignment operation by the alignment plates is changed from one time to two
times at the staple mode and staple-free binding mode.
Use Case When improving the alignment (front/rear) of the paper at staple mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When setting to ON, productivity is decreased.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

1080
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode)
SDL-ALG 1 Set paddle oprtn in sddl unit: Fin-Y1
Detail To set the paddle operation when stacking the paper in the saddle stitcher unit.
Set to 1 when the paddle operation of the last stack paper in the saddle stitcher unit is changed from
one rotation to two rotations.
Use Case When improving the paper alignment of the feed direction at stacking the paper in the saddle
stitcher unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When setting to ON, productivity is decreased.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

TRY-STP 1 Stpl stck limit clear: Fin-J1/Y1

Detail To set whether to limit the stack capacity of the stapled copies sheets.
When clearing the limit, the tray height limit is applied instead.
Use Case When stacking papers beyond the maximum number of stapled copies sheets
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When the stacking limit is cleared, stacking capacity increases, but stacking
performance decreases.
Display/Adj/Set Range Fin-J1: 0 to 1
Fin-Y1: 0 to 3
0: Normal specification
1: Clear the limit of stack capacity of the stapled copies, and apply the tray height limit
2, 3: Not used
Default Value 0

TRY-LMT 1 Set stack limit of stack tray: Fin-Y1

Detail To set whether to limit the stack capacity of the stack tray.
Set to 1 when the stack capacity of the stack tray for the small size paper is changed from about
3,000 sheets to about 1,000 sheets.
Use Case When the stacking performance decreases by the curled paper during stacking a large amount of
the small size paper
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

FR-ST-SW 1 Stpl free stpl at no stpl ctrdg: Fin-J1

Detail When the staple cartridge is absent, staple-free stapling is not actually performed in the default
setting while a job with staple-free stapling has executed since the finisher behaves in non-sort
mode. Set to "1" to enable the staple-free stapling without staple cartridge.
Use Case When executing staple-free stapling by removing a staple cartridge
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution If staple-free stapling is executed while 1 is set without removing a staple cartridge and the cartridge
has been installed improperly, 1C32 or E532 may occur.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

1081
 8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode)
ASTG-TMG 1 Set ast guide oprtn start tmg : Fin-J1
Detail Set 1 when the stack delivery failure occurs under the following conditions.
- Conditions: Small size/large size, thin/recycled1,2,3/plain1, 1-sided, shift-sort/nonsort
When 1 is set, the following controls are executed.
- The alignment plate evacuates 0.5mm for paper wide in the stack delivery.
- The operation start timing by the assist guide is delayed 70msec from a paddle rise.
Use Case When the stack delivery failure occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When 1 is set, productivity is decreased.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

TRY-UP 1 Set stck tr oprtn at ppr dvry: Fin-Y1

Detail To set the stack tray operation at the paper stack delivery.
When satisfy the following conditions, this mode functions.
-Staple mode or staple-free binding mode
-Paper length: 220mm or less
-2-sided printing
When 1 is set, the stack tray moves up delivering the paper stack from the processing tray.
Use Case When a downward curl occurs on the bottom paper of the delivered paper stack delivering the
paper stack from the processing tray at the staple mode/staple-free binding mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When 1 is set, the guarantee stack capacity decreases to 30 sets. (the maximum stack capacity
does not change.)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

1082
 8. Service Mode

BOARD (Option board setting mode)

OPTION (Specification setting mode)

BOARD (Option board setting mode) > OPTION (Specification setting mode)
MENU-1 2 Hide/dspl of printer set menu level 1
Detail To set whether to display or hide the level 1 of printer setting menu.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0

MENU-2 2 Hide/dspl of printer set menu level 2

Detail To set whether to display or hide the level 2 of printer setting menu.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0

MENU-3 2 Hide/dspl of printer set menu level 3

Detail To set whether to display or hide the level 3 of printer setting menu.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0

MENU-4 2 Hide/dspl of printer set menu level 4

Detail To set whether to display or hide the level 4 of printer setting menu.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0

1083
9 Installation
How to Read the Symbols.............. 1086
Points to Note before Installation.... 1087
Checking before Installation............1088
Combination Table of Accessory
Installation................................... 1090
Installation of Host Machine............ 1091
When Relocating the Host Machine
..................................................... 1115
Platen Cover Type W.......................1117
Stamp Unit-B1................................. 1125
NFC Kit-C1...................................... 1131
Connection Kit-A1/A2/A3 for Bluetooth
LE................................................ 1139
Heater Kit-N1...................................1147
Reader Heater Unit-J2/J3................1158
Drum Heater-C1.............................. 1166
Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1.............1174
Utility Tray-B1.................................. 1186
Inner 2 Way Try-L1..........................1190
Copy Card Reader-F1..................... 1194
IC Card Reader Box-C1/C2............ 1201
Voice Operation Kit-D1................... 1207
Voice Guidance Kit-G1....................1216
Document Scan Lock Kit-B1/B2......1224
 9. Installation

Serial Interface Kit-K3 / Copy Control Interface Kit-A1........1227

Pre-checks for HDD-related Option.....................................1232
Removing the HDD (Preparation)....................................... 1233
[TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB)............................................... 1235
[TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit.............................................1238
[TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit........... 1244
[TYPE-4] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) + HDD
Mirroring Kit..................................................................... 1252
[TYPE-5] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) + Removable
HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit........................................... 1258
[TYPE-6] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit.......... 1270
[TYPE-7] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD
Mirroring Kit..................................................................... 1277

1085
 9. Installation

How to Read the Symbols

Symbols
The frequently-performed operations are described with symbols in this procedure.

Screw

1x 1x 1x 1x

Packaged Item Unused Parts Install Remove Tighten Loosen

Harness
(Common for Guides Connector Power Cord
and Clamps)

1x 1x 1x 1x

Install Remove Connect Disconnect Connect Disconnect

Power

ON OFF Check the sound Check visually Check Push Cleaning

1086
 9. Installation

Points to Note before Installation

When installing the machine, beware the following points.
1. When tightening the screws, do not tighten them too tightly. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage and deformation of
screw holes.

2. When the machine is moved from a cold location to a warm location, condensation may occur resulting in water drops on the
metal surfaces. Use of the host machine when there is condensation may result in image failure. After moving the machine
from a cold location to a warm location, leave it unpacked for at least 2 hours or more to let it warm up to room temperature
before installation.
3. The maximum weight of the machine is approx. 78kg. Be sure to perform the work in accordance with the standard to handle
a heavy load in each country. In addition, be sure to keep the machine leveled when lifting it.

1087
 9. Installation

the air-inlet duct which is used for ventilation of

Checking before Installation the room.
• When options are not installed.
Following shows requirements for the installation site.
500mm or
It is desirable to see the installation site in advance before more
carrying the machine to the user's site. 100mm or more

1,172mm(single pass ADF)

1,182mm(reversal ADF)
Check When Connecting the
Power Plug to an Outlet
1. When connecting the power plug of this equipment to an
outlet, be sure to use an outlet of a system different from
that of the host machine.
2. Be sure to install this equipment near an outlet so 500mm or

500mm or
more 1,094mm
that the power plug can be disconnected right away
in case of emergency, and do not put anything around

more
the power plug.

• When the Inner Finisher and Paper Deck Unit

are installed.
Checking the
500mm or
Installation Environment more
100mm or more

500mm 1,172mm(single pass ADF)

1. The environment of the installation site must be in

or more 1,182mm(reversal ADF)

the range as shown below. Avoid installation near
the faucet, water boiler, humidifier or refrigerator.
• Guaranteed range for operation/image
Temperature: 10.0 to 30.0 deg C, Humidity: 20
to 80%

2. The machine must not be installed near a source of

1,345 mm
fire or in an area subject to dust or ammonium gas. If
500mm or
the area is exposed to direct rays of the sun, provide more
curtains to the window.

3. Be sure to provide adequate ventilation of the room • When the Inner Finisher, Inner Hole Puncher and
to keep the work environment comfortable. Room Paper Deck Unit are installed.
odor can be bothering when running the machine for
500mm or
a long time in a poorly-ventilated room although more
the ozone amount generated while running this 100mm or more
500mm 1,172mm(single pass ADF)

equipment does not harm human health.

or more 1,182mm(reversal ADF)

Checking the
Installation Space
1. Be sure that the feet of this machine are properly set.
In addition, be sure to keep the machine horizontal. 1,440 mm
500mm or
2. Be sure to keep 100mm or more distance from more
the wall to make enough room for performing
the operation.
• When options are not installed
• When the Booklet Finisher and Paper Deck Unit
are installed.

3. To install the host machine, install it in a well

ventilated place. Especially when there are multiple
host machines, be sure to locate the machine where
the machine is free from direct exhaust of other
machines. Be sure to keep the machine away from

1088
 9. Installation

• When the Booklet Finisher, External 2 Hole

Puncher, Buffer Pass Unit and Paper Deck Unit
are installed.

500mm
or
more
100mm or more

500mm 1,172mm(single pass ADF)

or more 1,182mm(reversal ADF)
500mm or
more 1,811mm

1089
 9. Installation

Combination Table of Accessory Installation

NOTE:
• The following table shows the combination of accessories installed of the host machine. Before installing the accessories, refer
to the table to check the combination of accessories.
• When installing other accessories with the Copy Card Reader, install the Copy Card Reader first.
• For installation of the Copy Card Reader, the Copy Card Reader Attachment Kit is required.

Copy Card Voice Opera- Voice Guidance Utility Tray Serial Interface Copy Control
Reader tion Kit Kit Kit Interface Kit
Copy Card Read- - Yes Yes Yes No No
er
Voice Operation Yes - No No Yes Yes
Kit
Voice Guidance Yes No - No Yes Yes
Kit
Utility Tray Yes No No - Yes Yes
Serial Interface No Yes Yes No - No
Kit
Copy Control In- No Yes Yes No No -
terface Kit

1090
 9. Installation

Installation of Host Machine 3

Unpacking

2
1200 mm

2430 mm
1230 mm

769 mm 840 mm

1091
 9. Installation

Checking the Contents Installation Procedure

NOTE:
• When installing the Cassette Pedestal, be sure to
place the host machine on the Cassette Pedestal
(Refer to cassette pedestal Installation Procedure).
1x • In the following procedure, the Cassette Feeding
Unit is installed with the host machine in the figures,
1x however, the procedure is same as without the
Cassette Feeding Unit.

1x
x1 1
■ Removing the Packaging Materials

1 Remove the pack and lift down the host machine

1x
from the palette.

2x 1x

1x
2x

2x

1x

1x

1x 2
EUR Only 1x

EUR Only 2x

1x

USA 3x EUR 4x
KOREA and THAILAND 1x
230V 1x

Single pass ADF model Only

USA: 3 Stickers
1x 3
LTN: 5 Stickers

*1: Included for some countries/regions (KR, CN and TW).

*2: Number of labels attached to the sheet varies according
to location/area.
*3: Used with the Inner 2Way Tray-L1.
<Others>
• Including guides

1092
 9. Installation

2 Remove all tapes other than the below. 3

NOTE:
Remove the following tapes in the late procedure.
• Fixing Tapes to fix the waste Toner Container Support
Holder in the front cover.
• Optical System Fixing Screws on the left side of
the Reader.
• Fixing Tapes to fix the Toner Container Lever.
• Fixing Tapes to fix the Cassette 2.

4
NOTE:
Keep the removed screws for relocating the host machine.

2x

1093
 9. Installation

5 8

1094
 9. Installation

10 2

1x

■ Installing the Air Filter

1095
 9. Installation

■ Installing the Drum Unit

4
1
1x

NOTE:
The removed screw is used at procedure 8.

2
5
NOTE:
Keep the drum cover for packing when the host machine
is relocated.

1096
 9. Installation

6 8
CAUTION: NOTE:
• Do not touch the drum surface. The screw removed at procedure 4 is used.
• Do not expose the drum surface to light for a long
period of time.

1x

7 9
CAUTION:
Engage the rail of the host machine with the edge of the
Drum Unit.

1097
 9. Installation

■ Installing the Toner Cartridge

10
1

11
2

12

1098
 9. Installation

3 5
CAUTION:
Be sure that the Toner Outlet (white part) is positioned
in an upper part when shaking the Toner Container or
the toner may not be properly supplied.

■ Connecting the Power Cord

(230V only)

230V 1x

1x

1099
 9. Installation

■ Setting the Environment

Heater Switch 2.
1 2x

NOTE:
When the installation environment is in high humidity
environment or low humidity environment, be sure to turn
ON the Environment Heater Switch.

ON

3.

■ Installing IC Card Reader

(EUR Only)

CAUTION:
Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation
may differ from the actual things, the procedure is
the same.

1.

1100
 9. Installation

4. 6.
1x

NOTE:
The removed CR BOX Upper Unit will be used in step 14.

5. NOTE:
The removed screw and Base Plate Under Cover will be
used in step 11.

7.

NOTE:
The removed Base Small Cover will be used in step 13.

1101
 9. Installation

8. 10.
NOTE:
Secure the cables asshown in the figure.

CAUTION:
Makesure to avoid putting too much load on the
connectionport of Wi-Fi cable.

9.

1x

5x

1102
 9. Installation

11. 12.
NOTE: NOTE:
Use the screw and Base Plate Under Coverremoved in Be sure to adjust the number of cushions according to the
step 6. thickness of the Card Reader.

1x

13.
NOTE:
Usethe Base Small Cover removed in step 5.

1103
 9. Installation

14. 16.
NOTE:
Usethe CR BOX Upper Unit removed in step 4.

17.
15.

2x

18.

1104
 9. Installation

CAUTION:

19. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the

Register the information of paper loaded during
installation of the host machine.
power outlet. Be sure to register the correct paper type. Especially
in the case of special paper types such as heavy
paper, registering a wrong paper type may result in

20. Turn the main power switch ON.

image failure, and when the Fixing Assembly becomes
soiled or paper wraparound occurs, repair by a service
technician becomes necessary.
■ Turning ON the Main Power

NOTE:
1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the While mixing toner, “Installing the Tray” on page
power outlet. 1106, “Setting the Cassette” on page 1106 and “Other
Installations” on page 1107 can be executed.

2. Remove the protection sheet on the control panel. ● Informing the System Administrator
Completion of the Installation
When installation is completed, ask the system administrator
3. Open the switch cover and turn ON the main to change the password and keep the changed password to
power switch. prevent information leakage.

NOTE: ■ Registration of Installation

1. Supplying the toner and initialization of the
Developing Assembly and the Drum are Date Information
automatically performed.
2. When supplying the toner is completed, the operation
CAUTION:
stops (Approx. 10minutes).
Be sure to perform this procedure after checking
that host machine's firmware is the following version
or higher.
NOTE: COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION > CONT-PF
Turning OFF the Main Power Switch If host machine's firmware version is old, upgrade
1. Open the switch cover and turn OFF the main
to the following version or higher before performing
power switch.
the procedure.
2. Be sure that the display on the Control Panel and
the Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then
• CONT-PF: 03.06
disconnect the power plug.

CAUTION:
■ Starting the Setup Guide Be sure that [Date/Time Settings] is completed. (There
are items in Setup Guide.)

CAUTION:
• Some of the settings can be skipped without
entering the command. To configure skipped
settings, configure the settings one by one after 1. Enter the following service mode, and execute
exiting Setup Guide. "Batch Set Installation Date Info".
• Setup Guide can be started again from COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INSTDTST
[Settings/ Registration]. ([Settings/Registration] >
[Management Settings] > [License/Other] > [Start NOTE:
Setup Guide]) • Year, month, day, hour, and minute can be edited
• If the host machine is turned OFF during the individually in the following service modes.
registration using the Setup Guide, the Setup COPIER > OPTION > USER > INSTDT-Y
Guide is automatically started by turning ON the COPIER > OPTION > USER > INSTDT-M
host machine. COPIER > OPTION > USER > INSTDT-D
• Once registration using the Setup Guide is COPIER > OPTION > USER > INSTDT-H
COPIER > OPTION > USER > INSTDT-N
completed, the Setup Guide is not automatically
• The default value of each service mode is "0".
started by turning ON the host machine.
• When "0" is set for each service mode, "Device
Installation Date" on the counter report will be blank.

1105
 9. Installation

2. Exit service mode.

3. Output the counter report, and check that the

2
installation date information is registered.
• [Counter/Device Information] key > [Print List]
> [Yes]

■ Installing the Tray

■ Setting the Cassette

NOTE:
Although pictures or illustrations are different from the
installing host machine, the procedure is the same.

1.

1106
 9. Installation

2. Holding the Guide Plate Lever, adjust each Guide 4. Affix the Cassette Size Label matching to the loaded
Plate to the specified size. paper size.

NOTE:
• Keep the Paper Size Label for use when changing
paper size.
• Affix the label with its lower edge aligned with the
lower edge of the number label, approx. 5.0 mm away
from the number label.

3. 5.0 mm

■ Other Installations
● Attaching the Handle Covers

1107
 9. Installation

● Affixing the Blindfold Seal ● Installing the Right Cover (Lower) (when
the cassette feeding unit is not installed)
1
1

● Installing the Service Book Holder

● Installing the Cleaning Tool
1
1.
NOTE:
• Do not install the cleaning tool around the
Motion Sensor.
• Clean the installing position with lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol.
• Ask the user where to install the cleaning tool.

1. When the inner finisher or other options is not

installed on left side of the host machine.

1108
 9. Installation

2. When the inner finisher or other options is installed

on left side of the host machine.
3.
1. When the inner finisher or other options is not
installed on left side of the host machine.

NOTE:
• Do not cover the screw hole.
• Do not cover the blindfold seal.

2.

1109
 9. Installation

2. When the inner finisher or other options is installed ● Affixing the Labels
on left side of the host machine.

NOTE:
Do not cover the screw hole. 1.
NOTE:
• Affix the label of the appropriate language as shown
in the figure.
• If the label is already affixed, affix over the
bundled label.

Single pass ADF model Only

1110
 9. Installation

● Securing the Host Machine ● Left Edge Margin(L1) Adjustment

(1st side)
1 Move the host machine to the installation position,
Execute printing from each cassette/Manual feed pickup tray.
Check that the L1 is within 2.5 +/- 1.5mm. If it is not within the
and secure it in place by turning the 4 adjusters of the
range, execute adjustment by following the procedure below.
Cassette Pedestal with screwdrivers.
Feeding direction
NOTE: of paper
• Be sure to secure it in place to prevent overturning. image
• Securing the adjusters is not a countermeasure for

L1
the earthquake.

1. Adjust the image position in the service mode.

• Cassette 1: Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER >
ADJUST > MISC > C1-ADJ-Y
• Cassette 2: Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER >
ADJUST > MISC > C2-ADJ-Y
• Cassette 3: Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER >
ADJUST > MISC > C3-ADJ-Y
• Cassette 4: Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER >
ADJUST > MISC > C4-ADJ-Y
• Manual feed pickup tray: Service mode (Level 2) >
COPIER > ADJUST > MISC > MFADJ-Y
● Checking the Print Image
NOTE:
< Setting Range>
-128 to 127 (0.1mm per unit)
1. Place a document on the document glass, copy it by
As the value is incremented by 1, the L1 is increased
feeding paper from the cassette or manual-feed tray, by 0.1mm.
and then check the quality of the print image.

NOTE:
• Abnormal noise is not occurred. 2. In case that the setting value is changed at step 1),
• The specified number of sheets of paper is write the replaced setting value on the service label.
copied normally.

3. Exit the service mode.

■ Adjusting Image Position (Printer)

NOTE:
4. Execute printing from each cassette/Manual feed
• In duplex printing, the first side is the front side and
pickup tray. Check that the L1 is within 2.5 +/- 1.5mm.
the second side is the back side.
• The Host Machine prints the first image on the back
and the second on the front.

1111
 9. Installation

● Lead-edge Margin(L1) Adjustment ● Leading Edge Margin (L1) Adjustment

(2nd side) (1st side / 2nd side)

NOTE: NOTE:
By executing the L1 adjustment (2nd side) for the Cassette By executing the leading edge margin adjustment for
1, the adjustment is applied to all source of paper. the Cassette 1, the adjustment is applied to all source
of paper.

Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 1, and check

that the left edge margin is within L1=2.5+/- 2.0mm. If it is Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 1. Check that the
not within the range, execute adjustment by following the L1 is within 4.0+1.5mm/-1.0mm. If it is not within the range,
procedure below. execute adjustment by following the procedure below.

Feeding direction L1
of paper

image
Feeding direction
L1

of paper
image

1. Adjust the image position on the service mode.

• Service mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST >
FEED-ADJ > ADJ-REFE
1. Adjust the image position in the service mode.
• Service mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST >
NOTE:
FEED-ADJ > REGIST
< Setting Range >
-128 to 127 (0.1mm per unit)
As the value is increased by 1, the L1 is increased NOTE:
by 0.1mm. < Setting Range>
-128 to 127 (0.1mm per unit)
As the value is incremented by 1, the L1 is increased
by 0.1mm.

2. Write the replaced adjustment value on the

service label.

2. In case that the setting value is changed at step 1),

write the replaced setting value on the service label.
3. Exit the service mode.

3. Exit the service mode.

4. Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 1,
and check that the left edge margin is within
L1=2.5+/- 2.0mm.
4. Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 1. Check
that the L1 is within L1=4.0 +1.5mm/-1.0mm.

■ Checking Network Connection

● Overview
If the user network environment is TCP/IP, use Ping function
to check that the network setting is properly executed.
If the user network environment is IPX/SPX or Apple Talk,
skip this procedure.

1112
 9. Installation

● Network Setting 1. Inform the system administrator to execute

checking of network connection using Ping.

CAUTION: 2. Check the remote host address with the

Use the network cable of rank 5e or higher. In addition, system administrator.
use of shield type (STP cable) is recommended. When
3. Enter the remote host address to PING.
non-shield type (UTP cable) is used, the surrounding
• "Response from the host": The machine is properly
electronic equipments may be interfered via the
connected to the network.
network cable.
• "No response from the host": Execute the following
troubleshooting because the machine is not
1. Turn OFF the main power switch. connected to the network.

2. Connect the network cable to the host machine and

turn ON the main power switch. ■ Troubleshooting of Network
3. Inform the system administrator at the installation ● Checking Connection of the
site that the installation of the host machine is Network Cable
complete, and ask for network connection of the
To check whether the network cable is properly connected to
host machine.
the LAN Port.

NOTE: ● Ping Operation Procedure

Network setting cannot be executed unless logging in as
an administrator. 1. Ask the network administrator at the user's site to
Factory default password is as follows. note the IP address of the PC that is connected to
• System administration division ID: Administrator the network.
• System administration password: 7654321
2. Select: [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >
[Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] >
[PING Command], and enter the IP address of PC,
CAUTION:
and then press "Execute” key.
Following setting needs to be ON to perform
network setting: • If the display shows "Response from the host", the
• [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > network connection is properly functioning.
[Network] > [Confirm Network Connection • If the display shows "No response from the host",
Set. Changes] go to the next step for another checking.
• [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >
[Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] ● Checking Network Setting of the
> [Use IPv4] Host Machine
Check if the IP address specified on the host machine
is correct.
4. Turn OFF the main power switch.
1. Select the following: [Settings/Registration] >
5. Turn ON the main power switch. [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4
Settings] > [IP Address Settings], and note the IP
● Ping Operation Procedure address in the IP Address field.
1. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > 2. Select the following: [Settings/Registration] >
[Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] >
[PING Command]. [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], and enter the
IP address.
2. Enter IP address with numeric keypad on the control
panel and press "Start" key. "Response from the • If the display shows "Response from the host", the
host" is displayed if Ping operation is successful. IP address specified on the host machine is correct.
"No response from the host" is displayed if Ping • If the display shows "No response from the host",
operation fails. go to the next step for another checking.

● Checking with Remote Host Address NOTE:

You can check whether the network is connected or not by When entering an address by manual operation, set
using remote host address to execute Ping. the Subnet Mask according to the instructions of the
Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal that is user administrator.
connected to/works with TCP/IP network environment, which
connects to this host machine.

1113
 9. Installation

● Checking Network Function on the

Main Controller
Check with the loopback address:

1. Select: [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >

[Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings]
> [PING Command], and enter the IP address
"127.0.0.1" with the numeric keypad and press the
Execute key.
• If the display shows "Response from the
host", the network of the main controller is
properly functioning.
• If the display shows "No response from the host",
the network function of the main controller is faulty.

2. Replace with a main controller that works properly,

and the check connection.

Operation when using

uniFLOW Online
When using uniFLOW Online*, follow the setup procedures
on the uniFLOW* Online First Steps Guide (http://www.nt-
ware.com/uFO_FS).
* China version of "uniFLOW" is called "mdsFLOW".

1114
 9. Installation

When Relocating the

4. Turn OFF the main power.
Host Machine
When moving the machine using stairs including steps or 5. Disconnect the power plug of the host machine from
transporting the machine to a different place using a truck, the power outlet.
proceed the steps described below.

CAUTION: 6. Remove the drum unit.“Removing the Drum Unit” on

< When the 2-cassette pedestal is installed. > page 269
• When lifting the host machine with the 2-cassette
pedestal, be sure to remove the 2-cassette
pedestal in advance. 7. Attach the drum cover removed at
• If the host machine is lifted with the 2-cassette installation procedure.
pedestal installed, they may separate from
each other and consequently the machine may
be damaged.

1. Move the optical system to the fixing position.

• Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > FUNCTION >
MISC-R > RD-SHPOS

2. Remove the blindfold seal.

8. Turn the lever as shown in the figure and then fix the
developer pressure lever with 1 screw.

1x

3. Secure the optical system using the 2 screws

removed at installation procedure.

2x
9. Install the waste toner container.

10. Close the front cover.

11. Close the right cover.

1115
 9. Installation

12. Secure the toner supply cover, front cover, delivery

section, and cassette with tape.

13. Place a sheet of A3 paper on the document glass,

and then secure the document glass cover (ADF)
with tapes.

14. Loosen the 4 adjusters to release fixing the

host machine.

15. <When the high capacity cassette pedestal

is installed.>
Loosen the 2 screws connecting the host machine with
the high capacity cassette pedestal.

CAUTION:
When lifting the host machine with the high capacity
cassette pedestal installed, if the fixing screws are
loosened to connect the host machine with the
high capacity cassette pedestals. They may separate
from each other and consequently the machine may
be damaged.

2x

1116
 9. Installation

Platen Cover Type W Installation Procedure

■ Removing the ADF
Points to Note at Installation
● In the case of the Single Pass ADF
• When installing this equipment to a model without ADF,
perform the work from "Installing the Equipment".
• When installing this equipment to a model without ADF,
use only the Copyboard Cover included in the package. 1.
Checking the Contents 4x

1x

1x
Binding ; M4x8
2x

6x 1x

Check Item When Turning OFF

the Main Power
Check that the main power of the host machine is OFF. 2.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the
host machine. 2x

2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and the

lamp of the main power are turned off, and then
disconnect the power plug.

Installation Outline Drawing

NOTE:
The removed screws and Rubber Caps will be used in
step 6.

1117
 9. Installation

3. 5.
3x

6.
NOTE:
Use the screws and Rubber Caps removed in step 2.

4.
CAUTION: 2x
Be careful not to drop the DADF.

4x

1118
 9. Installation

7. 8.
2x
Binding ; M4x8

2x

NOTE:
After completion of the work, perform "Installing
the Equipment".

1119
 9. Installation

● In the case of the Reversal ADF

3.
1. CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the DADF.

2x

2x

NOTE:
The removed screws and Rubber Caps will be used in
step 6.

2.
2x 2x 1x

4.

1120
 9. Installation

5. 7.
2x

6.
NOTE:
Use the screws and Rubber Caps removed in step 1.

2x

1121
 9. Installation

8. 2.

Binding ; M4x8

2x

NOTE:
After completion of the work, perform "Installing
the Equipment".

■ Installing the Equipment

1.

1122
 9. Installation

3. 5.
CAUTION:
• Be sure that there is no gap (0.3 mm or less
as a guide) between the White Plate and the
Index Sheet.
• Check that the White Plate is not placed over the
Index Sheet.

Platen Cover

White Plate Index Sheet

Reader Unit

Platen Cover

White Plate Index Sheet

Reader Unit

4.
CAUTION:
If the White Plate is pressed from top to bottom, it is
placed over the Index Sheet, so be sure to press it from
bottom to top.
Platen Cover

White Plate Index Sheet

Reader Unit

Platen Cover

White Plate Index Sheet

Reader Unit

6.
Connect the power plug to the outlet.

1123
 9. Installation

7.
Turn ON the main power switch.

1124
 9. Installation

Stamp Unit-B1 Installation Procedure

NOTE:
Checking the Contents Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation may
differ from the actual things, the procedure is the same.

It is used for the

Single pass ADF.
■ In the case of the Reversal ADF

1.
1x 1x

P Tightening
M3x12

1x 1x

Binding
M3x6
1x

<Others>
• Including guides

Check Item When Turning OFF

the Main Power
Check that the main power of the host machine is OFF.

1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the

host machine.

2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and the

lamp of the main power are turned off, and then
disconnect the power plug.

Installation Outline Drawing

2.

1125
 9. Installation

3. 4.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the [A] part of the Feed Guide
with a screwdriver when removing the screw.

1x

[A]

NOTE:
The removed screw will be used in step 7.

5.
CAUTION:
Be sure to push in the Stamp Ink Cartridge until it clicks.
NOTE:
The removed part will be used in step 8.

1126
 9. Installation

6. 8.
NOTE:
Use the part removed in step 3.

P Tightening;
M3x12

1x

1x

7.
NOTE:
Use the screw removed in step 4.

9.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the [A] part of the Feed Guide
with a screwdriver when tightening the screw.

1x

[A]

10. Connect the power plug to the outlet.

11. Turn ON the power switch.

1127
 9. Installation

■ In the case of the Single Pass ADF

3.
1.
1x
CAUTION:
Be sure to place paper in order to prevent the
Copyboard Glass from being damaged when the cover
of the document reading area is opened.

2. NOTE:
The removed screw will be used in step 7.

NOTE:
If the Stamp Solenoid is installed, perform the work from
step 7.

4.

1x

1128
 9. Installation

5. 7.
NOTE:
1x Use the part removed in step 3.

6.
P Tightening;
M3x12 1x

1x

1x

8.

1129
 9. Installation

9. 12.
CAUTION:
Be sure to push in the Stamp Ink Cartridge until it clicks.

13.
Connect the power plug to the outlet.

14.
Turn ON the power switch.

10. Operation Check

1. Press [Scan and Send] on the Touch Panel Display.

2. Specify the destination and press [Other Functions]

> [Finished Stamp].

3. Press [Close].

4. Check that a stamp is printed on the original

scanned by the Feeder.

11.

1130
 9. Installation

NFC Kit-C1 Installation Outline Drawing

Points to Note at Installation

• Do not touch the sensor and PCB components of the
Control Panel.
• The parts removed in "Removing the Control Panel" will
be used in "Installing the Control Panel".
• Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation
may differ from the actual things, the procedure is
the same.

Checking the Contents

Remove the Control Panel

1x 1x

NOTE:
The removed parts will be used in "Installing the
Control Panel".
1x
1x

1x TP; M3x4
1x 1.
<Others>
• Guides are included

Check Item When Turning OFF

the Main Power
Check that the main power of the host machine is OFF.

1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the

host machine.

2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and the

lamp of the main power are turned off, and then
disconnect the power plug.

2.
2x

1131
 9. Installation

3. 5.
CAUTION:
2x Be sure to place 5 or more sheets of paper to
prevent damage.
After completing the work, remove papers.

6.
4x
4.
3x

1132
 9. Installation

7. 9.
6x

10.

1x

2x

8.

1133
 9. Installation

2
11.

2x

Installing the NFC Kit

1
3

TP; M3x4

1x

1134
 9. Installation

4
2.
2x

1x

Installing the Control Panel 3.

NOTE: 6x
Use the parts removed in "Removing the Control Panel".

1.

1135
 9. Installation

4. 5.
1x

6.

1136
 9. Installation

7. 9.
CAUTION:
Do not install the screws to the locations with X marks. 2x
Tighten screws during the installation of cover in step 9.

10.

3x

2x

8.
4x

11.

1137
 9. Installation

Affixing the NFC Target Setting after Installation

1 1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to

the outlet.

2. Turn ON the main power switch.

3. Enter service mode (Level 1) and set the value to "1".

• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > NFC-USE

NOTE:
When [System Manager Information Settings] is set, it is
required to log in as a system manager in accordance with
instructions of the user administrator.

4. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management

Settings] > [Device Management] > [Use NFC Card
Emulation], and set the item to "ON".

5. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.

6. When a message prompting the version update is

displayed, press [Update] and automatically update
the version of this equipment.

CAUTION:
It may take time to display the update screen. (Approx.
1 to 2 min.)
During this time, do not operate the screen.

7. Check the end of the following service mode

(Level 1).
• COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION > PANEL
If the end is an even number (e.g. 01.26): NFC is
not installed.
If the end is an odd number (e.g. 01.27): NFC
is installed.

1138
 9. Installation

Connection Kit-A1/A2/A3 for Bluetooth LE

Checking the Contents

Connection Kit-A1 for Bluetooth LE

1x

for CN,KR
1x 1x

for US
1x for TW
1x

Connection Kit-A2 for Bluetooth LE

A E F

1x 1x 1x 1x 1x

C H

1x 1x 1x 1x

B G

for CN, KR
1x 1x
1x 1x

for TW TP; M3x6 P Tightening; W Sems;

1x 1x M3x8 M3x6
2x 1x

for US
1x

1139
 9. Installation

Connection Kit-A3 for Bluetooth LE

A E F

1x 1x 1x 1x 1x

C H

1x 1x 1x 1x

B G

for CN, KR
1x 1x
1x 1x

D 17.9 mm

for TW TP; M3x6 P Tightening; W Sems;

33.9 mm
1x 1x M3x8 M3x6
2x 1x

1x
for US
1x

1x 1x

<Others>
Including guides

Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power

Check that the main power of the host machine is OFF.

1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.

2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off, and then disconnect the
power plug.

1140
 9. Installation

Installation Outline Drawing

Installation Procedure

1.

2.
2x

1141
 9. Installation

3.
1x

1x

NOTE:
The removed screw will be used in a later step.

4.
NOTE:
Use the screw removed in the previous step.

1x

1x

1142
 9. Installation

5.

2x

1143
 9. Installation

6.

B
A A’

B’

A=A’
B=B’

1144
 9. Installation

7.
CAUTION:
In countries other than the following countries, it is not necessary to affix the Approval Label.

< For US >

Affix it over the number on the Wireless LAN Approval Label.

US

&RQWDLQV)&&,'$='[[[[[[[
,&'[[[[[[[

&RQWDLQV)&&,'$=')00
,&')00

< For CN, KR, and TW >

Affix it over the Wireless LAN Approval Label.

CN,KR TW

1145
 9. Installation

Setting after Installation

1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet.

2. Turn ON the main power switch.

3. Enter service mode, and set the value to "1".

COPIER >FUNCTION > INSTALL > BLE-USE

NOTE:
When [System Manager Information Settings] is set, it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with
instructions of the user administrator.

4. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [Confirm Network Connection Setting Changes], and set
the item [ON].

5. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [Bluetooth Settings] > [Use Bluetooth] > [ON].

6. The message "Perform Apply Setting Changes from Settings/Registration" appears at the bottom of the Touch
Panel Display.

7. Press [Settings/Registration] > [Apply Setting Changes] > [Yes].

1146
 9. Installation

Heater Kit-N1 Checking the Contents

[1] Heater PCB x1 [2] Heater SW Harness
Checking before Installation x1 *1

■ Check Items when Turning OFF the

Main Power
Check that the main power switch is OFF.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the Host Machine.
2. Be sure that control panel display and main power lamp
[3] Heater AC Harness [4] Heater DC Harness
are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug
x1 *1 x1 *1
from the outlet.

■ Installation Outline Drawing

[5] Screw (RS Tightening;

M3x8) x1 *1

*1: When the Cassette Heater PCB as standard is installed,

this item is installed. Therefore, this item is not used.

Installation Procedure (When

■ Points to Note on Installation the Cassette Heater PCB as
• When the Cassette Heater PCB as standard is installed
standard is installed)
to the position to show in "Installation Outline Drawing",
replace the Cassette Heater PCB with the Heater PCB CAUTION:
bundled in the this product. Check that the main power switch is OFF and the
power plug is disconnected from the outlet.
- Cassette Heater PCB

J1106

J1101

J1103
J1102

- Heater PCB
J1105 J1107 J1104
J1106
READER DECK ENV
J1101

J1103
J1102

1147
 9. Installation

■ Preparation of the Host Machine

4. Remove the Lower Rear Cover.
• 4 Screws
1. Remove the Plug Cover (120V only), and then • 1 Claw
disconnect the Power Plug.
• 1 Screw
4x

1x

2. Remove the Connector Cover.

• 1 Screw
5. Remove the Cassette Heater PCB. (The removed
screw is used at late procedure.)
1x
• 4 Connectors
• 1 Screw

4x

1x

3. When the Cassette Pedestal is installed, disconnect

the Connectors.
• 3 Connectors

3x

1148
 9. Installation

■ Installing the Heater PCB

3. Install the Lower Rear Cover.
• 1 Claw
1. Install the Heater PCB. • 4 Screws (RS Tightening; M3x8)
• 1 Screw (RS Tightening; M3x8) (removed at Step 5
in "Preparation for Host Machine")
4x

1x

4. Connect the Connectors. (When the Cassette

Pedestal is installed)
• 3 Guides
• 3 Connectors

3x

2. Connect the disconnected connectors to the

Heater PCB.
• 4 Connectors

3x
4x

1149
 9. Installation

■ Preparation of the Host Machine

5. Install the Connector Cover.
• 1 Screw (W Sems; M3x8)
1. Remove the Plug Cover (120V only), and then
disconnect the Power Plug.
1x • 1 Screw

1x

6. Connect the Power Plug, and then install the Plug

Cover (120V only). 2. Remove the Connector Cover.

• 1 Screw (TP; M3x6) • 1 Screw

1x
1x

7. After installing the optional heater, turn ON the

Heater Switch.
3. When the Cassette Pedestal is installed, disconnect
the Connectors.
Installation Procedure (When • 3 Connectors
the Cassette Heater PCB as
standard is not installed) 3x

CAUTION:
Check that the main power switch is OFF and the
power plug is disconnected from the outlet.

1150
 9. Installation

■ Installing the Heater Kit

4. Remove the Lower Rear Cover.
• 4 Screws
• 1 Claw 1. Open the Front Cover and Front Upper Cover.

4x

2. Remove the Left Upper Cover.

• 1 Screw
5. Cut off the Face Cover of the Rear Cover with
side cutters.
1x

CAUTION: 3. Remove the Left Cover.

Be sure to remove the face cover properly so that no • 3 Screws
burr is formed.

3x

1151
 9. Installation

4. Remove the Left Rear Cover. 6. Put the longer harness of Heater SW Harness
• 4 Screws through the edge saddle on the rear frame, connect
the connector of the Heater SW Harness to JPW104
of the Power Supply Unit.
4x • 1 Edge Saddle
• 1 Connector

1x

1x

5. Install the Heater SW Harness in the Power

Cord Bracket.

NOTE:
Install the Heater SW Harness in the correct direction
referring to the figure in the Power Cord Bracket.

1152
 9. Installation

7. When the Cassette Heater is installed, connect the 8. Install the Heater PCB.
connector of the second long branch of the Heater • 1 Screw (RS Tightening; M3x8)
AC Harness to the Cassette Heater Connector.

RS Tightening; M3x8

1x

1x

NOTE:
When the Cassette Heater is not installed, proceed to
Step 8.

9. Connect the connector of the shorter harness of the

Heater SW Harness to J1101 of the Heater PCB.
• 1 Connector

1x

1153
 9. Installation

10. Remove the harness from the wire saddles as shown 12. Attach the connector of the longest branch of the
in the figure, and then connect it to J1102 of the Heater AC Harness to the Cassette Relay Bracket.
Heater PCB.
• 2 Wire Saddles
• 1 Connector

2x

1x

11. Connect the connector of the Heater DC Harness to

J320 of the DC Controller PCB, and then connect 13. Install the Heater AC Harness as shown in the figure.
the other end of the connector to J1103 of the
• 3 Wire Saddles
Heater PCB.
• 2 Connectors
• 4 Wire Saddles
3x

2x

4x

1154
 9. Installation

14. When the Cassette Heater is installed, connect the 15. Install the Left Rear Cover.
connector of the Heater AC Harness to J1106 of the • 4 Screws (RS Tightening; M3x8)
Heater PCB.
• 1 Connector
4x

1x

16. Install the Left Cover.

• 3 Screws (RS Tightening; M3x8)

3x

NOTE:
When the Cassette Heater is not installed, clamp the
Heater AC Harness as shown in the figure.

1x

1155
 9. Installation

17. Install the Left Upper Cover. 19. Connect the Connectors. (When the Cassette
• 2 Claws Pedestal is installed.)
• 1 Screw (RS Tightening; M3x8) • 3 Guides
• 3 Connectors

1x
3x

3x

18. Install the Lower Rear Cover.

• 1 Claw
• 4 Screws (RS Tightening; M3x8)

20. Install the Connector Cover.

4x • 1 Screw (W Sems; M3x8)

1x

1156
 9. Installation

21. Connect the Power Plug, and then install the Plug
Cover (120V only).
• 1 Screw (TP; M3x6)

1x

22. After installing the optional heater, turn ON the

Heater Switch.

Checking after Installation

■ Disposal Parts Check
Following disposal parts are remained after
installation procedure.

[1] Cassette Heater PCB 1pc. *1

[2] Screw (RS Tightening; M3x8) 1pc. *1
[3] Heater SW Harness 1pc. *1
[4] Heater AC Harness 1pc. *1
[5] Heater DC Harness 1pc. *1
[6] Removed face cover 1pc. *2

*1: When the Cassette Heater PCB as standard is installed.

*2: When the Cassette Heater PCB as standard is
not installed.

1157
 9. Installation

Reader Heater Unit-J2/J3 Checking the Contents

Reader Heater Unit-J2
Points to Note
Before Installation
The Heater Kit-N1 must be installed before installing this M4x6
2x 2x
equipment (refer to "Heater Kit-N1" in Installation of the
Service Manual).

Check Item When Turning OFF

the Main Power 4x 1x 1x

Check that the main power of the host machine is OFF.

1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the

host machine. 2x

2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and the

lamp of the main power are turned off, and then
disconnect the power plug. Reader Heater Unit-J3

Installation Outline Drawing

2x

4x

Binding;
M4x6
1x 2x 1x

1x 1x 2x

TP; M3x6
1x 1x

1158
 9. Installation

Installation Procedure
■ Connecting the Reader Harness
3.
NOTE:
For the machines other than 120 V machine, disconnect

1.
only the Power Supply Cord.

4x 1x

1x

2. 4.
NOTE:
The procedure is the same even if the Cassette Feeding
4x Unit is not installed.

1x

1159
 9. Installation

5. <Only when the Cassette Feeding Unit is installed> 7.

NOTE:
• If the Cassette Heater is not installed, disconnect the
2 connectors.
• The positions of the connectors differ between
the Cassette Feeding Unit and the High Capacity
Cassette Feeding Unit.

3x

8.
6.
4x
1x

4x

J1105

1x

1160
 9. Installation

9. 11.
NOTE:
4x The procedure is the same even if the Cassette Feeding
Unit is not installed.

1x

10. <Only when the Cassette Feeding Unit is installed>

12.
NOTE:
• If the Cassette Heater is not installed, connect the
2 connectors.
• The positions of the connectors differ between NOTE:
the Cassette Feeding Unit and the High Capacity For the machines other than 120 V machine, connect only
Cassette Feeding Unit. the Power Supply Cord.

3x 1x

1x

1161
 9. Installation

CAUTION:

13. • Soiling on the glass surface and the White Plate

affects reading. When removing or installing the
Copyboard Glass, be sure not to touch the glass
surface and the White Plate.
4x
• If soiling is attached, clean it with lint-free paper.

White Plate

14.
4x 2.

■ Installing the Reader Heater

1.
2x

1162
 9. Installation

3. 4.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Pull the rear side of the Drive Belt in the direction of the The shape of insulating sheet may be different.
arrow to move the Scanner Box to the center. Make sure the Harness Clamps are installed in the
correct positions.

NOTE:
Install the Cable Clamps in the direction as shown in
the figure.

1163
 9. Installation

5. 6.
CAUTION: NOTE:
Be sure to hold down the Reader Heater Harness Install the Cable Clamps in the direction as shown in
because it may interfere with moving of the Scanner the figure.
Box if it is not connected properly.

1x 2x 1x

1164
 9. Installation

7. 9.
CAUTION:
Be sure to hold down the Reader Heater Harness 2x
because it may interfere with moving of the Scanner
Box if it is not connected properly.

1x 2x 1x

10.

11. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the

power outlet.

8. 12. Turn ON the main power switch.

1165
 9. Installation

Drum Heater-C1 Checking the Parts to

be Installed
Checking before Installation
[1] Drum heater unit x1 [2] Wire saddle x2

■ Check Items when Turning OFF the

Main Power
Check that the main power switch is OFF.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the Host Machine.
2. Be sure that control panel display and main power lamp
are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug
from the outlet. [3] Edge saddle x1 [4] Relay cable x1

■ Installation Outline Drawing

<Others>
Including guides

Installation Procedure

1. Open the Front Cover.

■ Points to Note on Installation

Confirm that the Heater Kit has already been installed in the
host machine.
When the cassette heater PCB is installed as standard,
replace the cassette heater PCB with the heater PCB in the
Heater Kit.

1166
 9. Installation

2. Push the button to open the Right Cover. 4. Remove 1 screw from the Developing Pressure
Lever. Turn the Developing Pressure Lever as shown
in the figure and release the Drum Unit.
• 1 Screw

1x

CAUTION:
To avoid any damage on the Drum Unit, keep the Right
Cover open by 5 cm or more during installation. 5. Remove the Drum Unit.

3. Turn the Lock Lever as shown in the figure. Remove

the Waste Toner Container.

CAUTION:
Do not touch the drum surface during the work. Be sure
to block light to the removed Drum Unit using paper.

1167
 9. Installation

6. Open the Front Upper Cover, and Remove the 8. Detach 1 connector and draw the Developing
Toner Container. Unit out.
• 1 Connector

1x

9. Remove the cable from the guide and then remove

2 screws to detach the Developing Stay. (Save the
removed screw for later use.)
• 2 Screws
• 1 Wire Saddle

7. Remove the Developing Unit Cover. 2x

• 1 Screw

1x 1x

1168
 9. Installation

10. Remove the power cord clamp (100/120V only), and 13. Remove the Connector Cover.
Remove the Power Cord. • 1 Screw

1x 1x

11. Remove the Rear Cover. 14. When the cassette pedestal is installed, remove
• 4 Screws the connectors.
• 3 Connectors
• 3 Wire Saddles
4x

3x

12. Remove the Left Rear Cover. 3x

• 4 Screws

4x

1169
 9. Installation

15. Remove the Lower Rear Cover. 18. Remove the Power Supply Unit.
• 4 Screws • 2 Screws
• 1 Claw • 11 Connectors

4x 2x

11x

19. Joint the connector of the Supplied Relay Cable to

the connector of the Drum Heater.
16. Remove the Left Upper Cover Unit. • 1 Connector
• 1 Screw

1x

1x

17. Remove the Left Cover.

• 3 Screws

3x

1170
 9. Installation

20. Attach the Drum Heater in the host machine. 21. Mount 2 supplied wire saddles on the rear frame.
• 2 Screws (RS Tightening ; M3x8) • 2 Wire Saddles
• 1 Edge Saddle

2x

3x

NOTE:
Insert the positioning pins of the Drum Heater to the holes
of rear frame.

22. Joint the connector of the Drum Heater Harness to

J1104 on the Heater PCB.
• 1 Connector

1x

CAUTION:
Do not damage the Pre-transfer Guide when installing
the Drum Heater.

23. Install the Power Supply Unit.

• 2 Screws (RS Tightening; M3×8)
• 11 Connectors

24. Install the Left Cover.

• 3 Screws (RS Tightening; M3×8)
• 3 Claws

25. Install the Left Upper Cover Unit.

• 1 Screw (RS Tightening; M3×8)

1171
 9. Installation

CAUTION:
26. Install the Lower Rear Cover. When inserting the Drum Unit, confirm
• 4 Screws (RS Tightening; M3×8) engagement of the Drum Unit and the Drum Unit
• 1 Claw rail of the host machine.

27. Restore the Cassette Pedestal connectors. (When

the Cassette Pedestal is installed.)
• 3 Connectors
• 3 Guides

28. Install the Connector Cover.

• 1 Screw (W Sems; M3×8)

29. Install the Left Rear Cover.

• 4 Screws (RS Tightening; M3×8)

36. Turn the Developing Pressure Lever to set the

30. Install the Rear Cover. Drum Unit.
• 4 Screws (TP; M3×8) • 1 Screws (TP; M3×8)

31. Restore the Power cord and Power Cord Clamp.

1x
(100/120V model only)
• 1 Screws (TP ; M3×8)

32. Attach the Developing Unit.

• 1 Connector

33. Install the Developing Unit Cover.

• 1 Screws (RS Tightening; M3×8)

37. Attach the Waste Toner Cartridge, and turn the Lock
34. Restore Toner Container, and close the Front Lever as shown in the figure and lock the Waste
Upper Cover. Toner Container.

35. Attach the Drum Unit.

1172
 9. Installation

38. Close the Front Cover.

39. Close the Right Cover.

40. Turn the environment Heater Switch ON.

1173
 9. Installation

Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1

Points to Note Before Installation

The Heater Kit-N1 must be installed before installing this equipment (refer to "Heater Kit-N1" in Installation of the Service Manual).

Checking before Installation

■ Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
Check that the main power switch is OFF.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the Host Machine.
2. Be sure that control panel display and main power lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug from
the outlet.

Checking the Contents

[3]

[1] [5]

[11]

[12]
[13]
[4]
*
[14]

[15]
[5] [2]
[6]

[9]

[8]

[7] [10]

[1] Heater Unit 1pc. [9] Screw (Binding (black); M4x4) 1pc.
[2] AC Input Connector 1pc. [10] Wire Saddle (black) 5pcs.
[3] Relay Harness Unit 1pc. [11] AC Output Connector (short) 1pc.
[4] AC Cable 1pc. [12] Screw (Binding; M4x6) 1pc.
Screw (Toothed Washer
[5] 2pcs. [13] Toothed Washer 1pc.
Sems; M4x8)
2pcs. (1 pc.
[6] Power Supply Label [14] Cable Protection Bushing * 1pc.
is used)
3pcs. (2 pcs.
[7] Wire Saddle (white) [15] AC Output Connector (long) * 1pc.
are used)
[8] Plug Cover 1pc.

* [14][15] part is not used.

<Others>
Including guides

1174
 9. Installation

Installation Procedure
3. Insert screwdrivers into the hole at rear left side
of the Compartment and then release the lever to
CAUTION: open it.
Check that the main power switch is OFF and the
power plug is disconnected from the outlet.
NOTE:
Insert screwdrivers into the hole indicated by the arrow.

■ Preparation of the Paper Deck Unit

1. Disconnect the Lattice Connector from the

host machine.
• 1 Wire Saddle
• 1 Connector

1x

1x

2. Pull the Release Lever and then with draw the Paper
Deck Unit until it stops.

4. Remove the Rear Cover.

• 5 Screws

5x

1175
 9. Installation

5. Cut the Face Cover from the Rear Cover. 6. Remove the Right Cover.
• 5 Screws

5x

7. Loosen the 2 screws and then remove the Upper

Left Cover.

2x

CAUTION:
Be sure to remove the Face Cover properly so that no
burr is formed.

1176
 9. Installation

8. Remove the Upper Cover. 10. Insert the connector of the Heater Unit to the panel
• 3 Screws mount part.

3x

9. Put the connector through the hole in the top plate

and then fix the Heater Unit.
• 2 Hooks
• 1 Screw (Toothed Washer Sems; M4x8)

Toothed Washer; M4x8

1x

1177
 9. Installation

11. Install the AC Input Connector in the power 12. Install the Wire Saddles (black) as shown in
cord mount. the figure.
• 1 Screw (Toothed Washer Sems; M4x8)

CAUTION:
Fix the Grounding Cable in the correct direction.

Toothed Washer; M4x8

1x

1178
 9. Installation

13. Connect the Relay Harness Unit and then fix it with 14. Install the Upper Cover.
the Wire Saddles (black) and Reuse Bands as shown • 2 Protrusions
in the figure. • 2 Screws (P Tightening; M4x8)
• 2 Connectors • 1 Screw (RS tightening; M4x8)
• 2 Reuse Bands
• 5 Wire Saddles
3x

2x 7x

15. Fasten the 2 screws to install the Upper Left Cover.

2x

1179
 9. Installation

16. Install the Right Cover. 18. Close the Compartment and then connect the Paper
• 2 Hooks Deck Unit with the host machine.
• 5 Screws (RS Tightening; M4x8)

5x

17. Install the Rear Cover.

• 5 Screws (RS Tightening; M4x8)

5x

1180
 9. Installation

■ Connection with the Host Machine

2. Remove the Lower Rear Cover, and then cut off the
Face Cover with side cutters.
1. Remove the Connector Cover, and then disconnect • 4 Screws
the Connectors. • 1 Claw
• 1 Screw
• 3 Connectors
4x

1x

3x

CAUTION:
Be sure to remove the Face Cover properly so that no
burr is formed.

1181
 9. Installation

3. Install the AC Output Connect (short). 4. Install the Lower Rear Cover.
• 1 Connector • 1 Claw
• 1 Toothed Washer • 4 Screws (RS Tightening; M3x8)
• 1 Screw (Binding; M4x6)

CAUTION: 4x
Fix the Grounding Cable in the correct direction.

5. Install the Connector Cover.

• 3 Guides
• 3 Connectors
• 1 Screw (W Sems; M3x8)
Binging; M4x6

1x

1x

3x

DECK
1x

1182
 9. Installation

6. Remove the 2 Face Seals. 8. Connect the Lattice Connector of the Paper Deck
Unit to the host machine.
• 1 Connector
• 1 Wire Saddle

1x

1x

9. Connect the AC cable to host machine and the Paper

Deck Unit.
• 2 Wire Saddles (white)
7. Install the Wire Saddles (white).

CAUTION:
Make sure that the Intermediate Power Cable is fully
connected to the outlet. Also, make sure to install the
Plug Cover. If the connection is not right, an accident
causing the smoke or fire may occur.

2x

1183
 9. Installation

10. Install the Plug Cover. 13. Turn ON the main power switch of the host machine.
• 1 Screw (Binding (black); M4x4)

Binding (black); M4x4

1x

11. Affix the Power Supply Label as shown in the figure.

12. Connect the power plug to the outlet.

1184
 9. Installation

Checking after Installation

■ Disposal Parts
Following disposal parts are remained after the
installation procedure.

[1] Cable Protection Bushing 1pc.

[2] Face Seal 2pcs.
[3] Removed face cover 2pcs.
[4] Power Supply Label 1pc.
[5] Wire Saddle (White) 1pc.
[6] AC Output Connector (long) 1pc.

1185
 9. Installation

Utility Tray-B1 Installation Procedure

Points to Note at Installation

1. Remove the packing tapes from this equipment.
• Refer to "Table of Options Combination" when installing
this equipment before operation.
• When installing the Copy Card Reader and this
equipment at the same time, be sure to install the Copy 2.
Card Reader first.

Table of Options Combination

Voice Opera- Voice Guid- Copy Card

tion ance Kit Reader
Utility Tray No No Yes
2x

Yes: Available / No: Unavailable

Checking the Contents

The parts 1x
using to install
the keyboard

TP; M4x8 Black

7x
5x

TP; M4x14 TP; M4x10

4x 2x
1x

TP; M4x8 Black

3x

Installation Outline Drawing

1186
 9. Installation

3. 4.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
To avoid damage, do not pull the Utility Tray too much. To avoid damage, do not pull the Utility Tray too much.

5.

1187
 9. Installation

6. 7.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Points to Note at Installation To avoid damage, do not pull the Utility Tray too much.
Be sure to install it by using the holes with the marks D,
G, J, M and P.

AB C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

Q R S

D G J M P

TP; M4x8 Black

5x

1188
 9. Installation

When installing the

8. USB Keyboard

TP; M4x8 Black

1.

2x 2x

1189
 9. Installation

Inner 2 Way Try-L1

Essential Items to Be
Performed Before Installation
• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
disconnect the power plug from the outlet.

Parts included in the package of the host machine

WARNING:
• If performing work without disconnecting the
power plug of the host machine, it may cause
electrical shock.
• If disconnecting the power plug without
turning OFF the main power, it may cause
damage of the machine.

Installation Procedure
• When turning OFF the main power, follow the
below procedure.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the
host machine.
2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the
1.
main power are turned off.
2x
Installation Outline Drawing

NOTE:
The removed Inner Cover (Upper) and 2 Screws will be
used in Procedure 4.

Checking the Contents

Parts included in the package of Inner 2way Tray

1190
 9. Installation

2.
NOTE:
Paste the cover sheet over holes, if any, in the Plate.
If there are no holes in the Plate, the cover sheet does not
need to be pasted on the Plate.

CAUTION:
Completely cover the burr around the three holes in the
Plate with the cover sheet.

1191
 9. Installation

3. 4.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Make sure that the Inner 2way Tray is properly inserted Be careful so that the upper part of the cover sheet may
into the slot and the support. not be turned up by the Inner Cover (Upper).

NOTE:
Use the Inner Cover (Upper) and Screws that were
removed in Procedure 1.

2x

5. Connect the power plug of the host machine to

the outlet.

6. Turn ON the Main Power Switch.

1192
 9. Installation

Settings after Installation

1. Set the value of the following service mode to "1".

COPIER > OPTION > ACC > IN-TRAY

2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.

3. Check that the following menu has been added.

• [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] >
[Common] > [Paper Output Settings] > [Output
Tray Settings]

4. Press [Output Tray Settings].

5. {Condition: language=en}According to the user's

request, set the function of delivering paper to the
Tray A/B/C and the priority order of the trays, and
press [OK]. The priority order is displayed as "1",
"2", and "3".

6. Check that the behavior is in accordance with

the settings.

1193
 9. Installation

Copy Card Reader-F1 Checking the Contents

Copy Card Reader Attachment-B5
Checking before Installation
• To install this equipment, the Copy Card Reader
Attachment is required.
• After installing the Copy Card Reader, input the card
number to be used in service mode (level 1) on this
equipment: [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] >
[CARD]; otherwise the card cannot be recognized even
though it is inserted.
1x 1x
• Refer to "Table of Options Combination" when installing
this equipment before operation.
• When installing any options installed on the right side of
the host machine and this equipment at the same time,
be sure to install this equipment first.

1x 1x
Table of Options Combination

Voice Voice Utility Control Serial In-

Opera- Guid- Tray Interface terface
tion ance Kit Kit
1x 2x
Copy Yes Yes Yes No No
Card
Reader
TP; TP;
M3x6 M3x12

Yes: Available / No: Unavailable 5x 2x

Check Item When Turning OFF

the Main Power
Check that the main power of the host machine is OFF. 1x 1x

1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the

host machine.

2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and the

lamp of the main power are turned off, and then 1x
disconnect the power plug.

Installation Outline Drawing

1x
1x

Screw,w/washer;
M3x14
2x
1x

TP; Binding;
M4x12 M4x6
2x 4x

1194
 9. Installation

Copy Card Reader-F1 3.

2x

RS Tightening 1x
M4x10
1x

1x

Installation Procedure
1.
4x

NOTE:
The removed screws will be used in step 5.

2.
1x

1x

1195
 9. Installation

4. 6.
CAUTION:
1x • Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until
it stops.
• Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise
the connector may not be connected properly.

[A]

1x

1x

1x

NOTE:
The removed screw will be used in step 5. 7.
5. 4x

NOTE:
Use the screws removed in steps 3 and 4.

1x

3x

1196
 9. Installation

8. 10.

Lower Cover
1x 1x
1x

1x
11.

9.
1x 1x
1x

12.
1x

1197
 9. Installation

13. 15.

TP;
M3x12

2x

14.

TP;
M3x6

4x

1198
 9. Installation

16.
CAUTION:
To ensure that the connector does not become
TP; M3x6
disconnected, be sure to place the tie-wrap of the Card
Reader External Relay Harness on the inside of the
Connector Cover.
1x

1x

17.

1199
 9. Installation

18.
4. Set the number of card (number of department ID)
that can be used with the Card Reader in service
mode.(Level 2).
• COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CARD-RNG

5. Use Service Mode to enter the minimum card

number to be used by a user (1 to 2001).
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD
1. Starting from the entered card number, the
number of cards set in step 4 can be used.

6. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to

enable the setting values.

7. Insert a card with a card number that has

been registered, and check that the machine
operates normally.

19. NOTE:
Perform the following operations to change the number of
cards (departments) after it has been set. In such a case,
counter information for each department is reset.
• Service mode (Level 1): COPIER > FUNCTION >
CLEAR > CARD
• Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to
enable the settings.
• After that, perform from step 3.
3x

Checking after Installation

1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the

power outlet.

2. Turn the main power switch ON.

3. Check the model of the Card Reader in service mode

(Level 1).
• COPIER > OPTION > ACC > CR-TYPE (Default: 0
"Card Reader-F1")

1200
 9. Installation

IC Card Reader Box-C1/C2 Checking the Contents

Points to Note at Installation

• When installing this equipment, the Card Reader (sales
company's option) is required.
• Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation
may differ from the actual things, the procedure is
the same.

Essential Items to Be 1x 1x

Performed Before Installation

• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
disconnect the power plug from the outlet.

2x
WARNING: 1x
• If performing work without disconnecting the without LED indication
power plug of the host machine, it may cause
electrical shock.
• If disconnecting the power plug without
turning OFF the main power, it may cause
damage of the machine.

• When turning OFF the main power, follow the 1x

1x
below procedure.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the
host machine.
2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the
main power are turned off.

1x 11x
Installation Outline Drawing

with LED indication with LED indication

1x 1x

1x
1x
Only for C2

1201
 9. Installation

Installation Procedure
4.
1.

2.
6x
2x

3. 5.
2x

4x

1202
 9. Installation

6. 9.

7.
NOTE:
Do not close the Wire Saddle.

1x

1x

8.

1203
 9. Installation

10. 11.
NOTE:
Secure the cables as shown in the figure.

CAUTION:
Make sure to avoid putting too much load on the
connection port of Wi-Fi cable.

1x

1x

5x

1204
 9. Installation

12. 14.
NOTE:
Be sure to adjust the number of cushions according to the
thickness of the Card Reader.

15.
13.

1205
 9. Installation

16. 19. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the
power outlet.

20. Turn the main power switch ON.

17.

2x

18.

1206
 9. Installation

Voice Operation Kit-D1 Check Item When Turning OFF

the Main Power
Points to Note at Installation Check that the main power of the host machine is OFF.

• Refer to "Table of Options Combination" when installing 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the
this equipment before operation. host machine.
• When installing the Copy Card Reader and this
2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and the
equipment at the same time, be sure to install the Copy
lamp of the main power are turned off, and then
Card Reader first.
disconnect the power plug.

Table of Options Combination

Copy Voice Utility Control Serial Installation Outline Drawing

Card Guid- Tray Inter- Inter-
Reader ance face Kit face Kit
Voice Yes No No Yes Yes
Opera-
tion

Yes: Available / No: Unavailable

Checking the Contents

TP;
M3x6
1x
1x

1x Installation Procedure

2x 1x
1.
Binding; Binding;
M3x14 M4x14
7x 1x 1x
4x

Binding; Binding;
M4x20 M4x14

2x 1x
1x
TP;
M3x6
1x
3x

1x

1x 1x

<Others>
Including guides

1207
 9. Installation

2. 4.
1x

1x

3.

2x

2x

1208
 9. Installation

5. 6.
NOTE: CAUTION:
Do not remove the spacers together with the screws. If Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB
they come off, be sure to put them back where they were 1 flatly.
originally installed. Reason: Due to the protruded plate, the PCB may be
deformed if work is performed while it is placed at
an angle.

4x

2x

NOTE:
The removed screw is used at late procedure.

1209
 9. Installation

7. 9.
CAUTION:
The connector must be contacted.

NOTE:
Use the screw removed at previous procedure.

TP㸹M3x6

1x

3x

8.
4x

1210
 9. Installation

10. 11.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Attach the cable to the [A] on the controller PCB. • Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until
it stops.
• Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise
the connector may not be connected properly.

[A]

2x

2x

1x
[B]
[A]
[B]
1x
[A]

12.
NOTE:
Cut the small cover without a burr.

1211
 9. Installation

13. 15.
4x

2x

NOTE:
The removed screw is used at procedure 17.

16.
Binding; Binding;

14.
M3x14 M4x14

2x

M3x14

M4x14

1212
 9. Installation

17. 19.
NOTE:
Use the screw removed at procedure 15.

2x

20.
18. NOTE:
Install both side of the cable.

1213
 9. Installation

21. 22.
4x 7x

2x

NOTE:
When installing the Card Reader with the Voice
Operation Kit.

Checking after Installation

NOTE:
When changing the settings upon user’s request, it is
required to log in as a system manager in accordance with
instructions from the user administrator.

1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the

power outlet.

2. Turn ON the main power switch.

1214
 9. Installation

3. [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >

[Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > and
make sure that [Use Voice Navigation] is [ON].

4. [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >

[Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > [Voice
Navigation at Startup] and make sure that is [Select
Mode at Startup] set.

5. [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >

[Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > and
make sure that [Tune Microphone] is displayed.

6. Turn OFF/ON the main power of the Host Machine.

Operation Check
■ When Starting to Use

1. Press "Reset" key or the Voice Recognition button

for more than 3 seconds.

2. In "Select the Voice Navigation type." on the Control

Panel screen, select "Manual + Vocal Mode", "Vocal
Mode" or "Manual Mode", and press OK.

3. Once the indication on the screen is framed in red,

the "Voice Operation Kit" becomes enabled.

NOTE:
When "Manual Mode" is selected in "Select the Voice
Navigation type.", nothing happens by pressing the Voice
Recognition button.

■ When Stopping to Use

1. Press "Reset" key or the Voice Recognition button

for more than 3 seconds.

1215
 9. Installation

Voice Guidance Kit-G1 Check Item When Turning OFF

the Main Power
Points to Note at Installation Check that the main power of the host machine is OFF.

• Refer to "Table of Options Combination" when installing 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the
this equipment before operation. host machine.
• When installing the Copy Card Reader and this
2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and the
equipment at the same time, be sure to install the Copy
lamp of the main power are turned off, and then
Card Reader first.
disconnect the power plug.

Table of Options Combination

Copy Card Voice Utility Copy Serial In- Installation Outline Drawing
Reader Opera- Tray Control terface
tion Kit Interface Kit
Kit
Equip- Yes No No Yes Yes
ment

Yes: Available / No: Unavailable

Checking the Contents

1x 1x

TP; Binding; Installation Procedure

M3x6 M3x16

1x 3x 1x

Binding;
M4x16
Binding;
M4x6
1.
1x 1x 1x
4x

3x 2x

Binding; TP;
M4x16 M3x6
1x 1x
1x

Binding;
M4x20

2x 1x 1x

4x

<Others>
Including guides

1216
 9. Installation

2. 4.
1x

1x

3.

2x

2x

1217
 9. Installation

5. 6.
NOTE: CAUTION:
Do not remove the spacers together with the screws. If Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB
they come off, be sure to put them back where they were 1 flatly.
originally installed. Reason: Due to the protruded plate, the PCB may be
deformed if work is performed while it is placed at
an angle.

4x

2x

1218
 9. Installation

7. 9.
CAUTION:
The connector must be contacted.

TP㸹M3x6

1x

3x

8.
4x

1219
 9. Installation

10. 11.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Connect the cables to [A] on the Controller PCB. • Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until
it stops.
• Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise
the connector may not be connected properly.

[A]

2x

2x

1x
[B]
[A]
[B]
1x
[A]

12.
NOTE:
Cut the small cover without a burr.

1220
 9. Installation

13. 15.
4x Binding; Binding;
M3x16 M4x16

2x

M3x16
M4x16

16.
14.
Binding ;
M4x6

1x

1221
 9. Installation

17. 19.
NOTE:
Be sure to attach the Ring Cores within 50 mm from the
end of the Speaker Cable.

50mm

20.

18.
2x

1222
 9. Installation

2. Turn the main power switch ON.

21. 3. Select Settings/Registration > Preferences >

Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings > Use
Voice Navigation, and check that the setting is ON.

4. Select Settings/Registration > Preferences >

Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings > Voice
3x Guide from Speakers, and check that the setting
is ON.

Operation Check
■ <When starting to Use>

1. Press reset key 3secs or more.

2. Press [Main Menu] in Control Panel.

3. If the display in panel screen is boxed with red frame,

“Voice Guidance Kit” is available.

NOTE:
When installing the Card Reader with the Voice ■ < When Stopping to Use>
Guidance Kit

1. Press the Reset Key for 3 secs or more.

Checking after Installation

CAUTION:
• When changing the settings upon user's
request, it is required to log in as a system
manager in accordance with instructions from the
user administrator.
• When pressing Settings/Registration immediately
after logging in as Administrator, <Personal
Settings> or <Device Settings> is displayed. It is
only immediately after logging in as Administrator
that <Personal Settings> or <Device Settings>
is displayed.

1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the

power outlet.

1223
 9. Installation

Document Scan Lock Kit- Checking the Contents

B1/B2

Points to Note
Before Installation 3x

• To enable the function of "Image Data Analyzer Board",

TP; M3x6
it is necessary to install the license which comes with
1x 2x
the product.
• Be sure to ask users to install the license after
the installation.

Binding; M3x4
CAUTION: 1x 1x 1x
An error occurs when the license is installed before
installing the Image Analysis Board, so make sure
to install the license after installing the Image B2
Analysis Board. TP; M3x6
2x

• Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation

1x
may differ from the actual things, the procedure is 1x
the same.

Check Item When Turning OFF 2x

the Main Power

Check that the main power of the host machine is OFF.
Installation Procedure
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the
host machine.

2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and the

lamp of the main power are turned off, and then
1.
disconnect the power plug.
4x

Installation Outline Drawing

1224
 9. Installation

2. 5.
NOTE:
1x Use the screw removed in step 3.

1x
TP ; M3x6

1x

3x

3.
1x

6.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until
it stops.
• Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise
the connector may not be connected properly.

NOTE:
The removed screw will be used in step 5.
[A]

4.

3x

1225
 9. Installation

3. If a message prompting the user to update the

version appears, press [Update] to automatically
7. update the version of the host machine.

NOTE:
1x If [Skip] is selected, a message prompting the user to
update the version will appear every time the host machine
is started. In the service mode (Lv.2) shown below, it is
possible to set not to display the message prompting the
1x user to update the version.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG

4. Ask users to install license.

5. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

6. Press [Counter/Device Information] > [Device Info./

Other] > [Check Device Configuration] key on the
control panel.

8. 7. Check that "Image Data Analyzer Board" is

displayed in option field.

4x

Checking after Installation

1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the

power outlet.

2. Turn ON the main power switch.

1226
 9. Installation

Serial Interface Kit-K3 / Copy Checking the Contents

Control Interface Kit-A1 <Serial Interface Kit-K3>

Points to Note at Installation

The following options cannot be used in combination with
each other. 1x
• Serial Interface Kit
• Copy Control Interface Kit 1x
• Copy Card Reader 2x

Check Item When Turning OFF

1x (Short) 2x
the Main Power
Check that the main power of the host machine is OFF.

1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the

host machine. 1x (Long)
2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and the
lamp of the main power are turned off, and then 1x
disconnect the power plug. 1x

Installation Outline Drawing TP; M3 x 6

1x
3x

<Copy Control Interface Kit-A1>

1x
1x

2x 2x
2x

2x

1x

1227
 9. Installation

Installation Procedure
■ Preparation
3.
2x

1.
4x

2.
1x

1x

1228
 9. Installation

■ Installing the Serial Interface Kit

2.
1.
1x
Short

1x

3.
NOTE:
Use the screw removed in step 1.

1x

3x

1x
NOTE:
The removed screw will be used in step 3.

1229
 9. Installation

■ Installing the Copy Control ■ Subsequent Work

interface Kit

1.
1. CAUTION:
• Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until
it stops.
• Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise
the connector may not be connected properly.

[A]

2.
1x

1x
2x

1x

1230
 9. Installation

2.
4x

3. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the

power outlet.

4. Turn ON the main power switch.

1231
 9. Installation

Pre-checks for HDD- Installation Outline Drawing

related Option

Points to Note at Installation

CAUTION:
• For TYPE2 to TYPE7, be sure to
perform the procedure of each TYPE after
performing“Removing the HDD (Preparation)” on
page 1233.
• When using the mirroring function, be sure to
install 2 HDDs of the same capacity.
• The HDD needs to be initialized after replacing the
large capacity HDD.
• When replacing a HDD that contains user
information with a high-capacity HDD (which is
not an initial installation), backup and export of
HDD data are necessary. For details, refer to in the Essential Items to Be
Service Manual.
Performed Before Installation
When installing the HDD-related options (the following 4 • Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
products), be sure to refer to the pages described in the disconnect the power plug from the outlet.
following table:
• 2.5inch/250GB HDD-N1
WARNING:
• 2.5inch/1TB HDD-P1
• If performing work without disconnecting the
• Removable HDD Kit-AL1
power plug of the host machine, it may cause
• HDD Mirroring Kit-J1
electrical shock.
Title Combination of products • If disconnecting the power plug without
turning OFF the main power, it may cause
TYPE- “ [TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB)” on page 1235
1 damage of the machine.
TYPE- “Removing the HDD (Preparation)” on page 1233 +
2 “ [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit” on page 1238 • When turning OFF the main power, follow the
TYPE- “Removing the HDD (Preparation)” on page 1233 + below procedure.
3 “[TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit” on 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the
page 1244 host machine.
TYPE- “Removing the HDD (Preparation)” on page 1233 + 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the
4 “[TYPE-4] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) + main power are turned off.
HDD Mirroring Kit” on page 1252
TYPE- “Removing the HDD (Preparation)” on page 1233 +
5 “[TYPE-5] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) +
Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit” on page 1258
TYPE- “Removing the HDD (Preparation)” on page 1233 +
6 “[TYPE-6] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit” on
page 1270
TYPE- “Removing the HDD (Preparation)” on page 1233 +
7 “[TYPE-7] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit
+ HDD Mirroring Kit” on page 1277

1232
 9. Installation

Removing the
HDD (Preparation) 2.
NOTE:
The removed screw will not be used to install the
NOTE: Removable HDD Kit.
• [TYPE-1] For Option HDD (1TB), skip
this procedure.
• For other TYPEs, be sure to proceed to
each installation procedure after performing
this procedure. 1x
• Removed screws will be reused in the installation
procedure of each TYPE.

1.
4x

3.
NOTE:
When replacing the HDD with an Option HDD (1TB), the
removed HDD will not be used.

1233
 9. Installation

4.

5.
1x

1x

1234
 9. Installation

[TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB) Installation Procedure

Checking the Contents

1.

1x 1x

1x 1x

Sems ; M3x4
4x
P Tightening ; M3x8
2x
2.
1x

Essential Items to Be
Performed Before Installation
• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
disconnect the power plug from the outlet.

WARNING:
• If performing work without disconnecting the
power plug of the host machine, it may cause
electrical shock.
• If disconnecting the power plug without NOTE:
turning OFF the main power, it may cause The removed screw will be used in step 7.
damage of the machine.

• When turning OFF the main power, follow the

below procedure.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the
host machine.
2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the
main power are turned off.

1235
 9. Installation

3. 5.

Sems ; M3x4

4x

4. 6.

P Tightening ; M3x8

2x

7.
NOTE:
Use the screw removed in step 2.

1x

1236
 9. Installation

4. Initializing HDD

8.
<In case of SST>
1. Start the host machine with download mode in
safe mode.
2. Start the SST.
3. Select the model. Then, select [Single] and
click [Start].
4. Click [Format HDD].
5. Select [All], and click [Start].
6. Click [Execute Format].
7. The Format is executed.
8. Select [Shutdown/Restart], and click [Shutdown].
9. Click [OK]
10. The power of the host machine is turned OFF.
11. Terminate the SST.
12. Disconnect the Cross Ethernet Cable from the
machine, and connect the user's network cable to
the machine.

<In case of USB flash drive>

9. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the PC.
2. Start up SST, and click the USB icon displayed in
power outlet.
the target selection screen.
3. Select the drive, the model series, and the
■ HDD Initialization Procedure version to be written to the USB flash drive, and
click [Confirm].
1. Requirements
4. Click [Start], and after the version has been written
1. PC to the USB flash drive, click [OK] and then remove
Service Support Tool in the version that supports the USB flash drive.
this host machine must be installed. 5. Terminate the SST.
2. Cross Ethernet Cable (when SST is used) 6. Connect the USB flash drive to the host machine,
2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software and start the host machine with download mode in
of Host machine safe mode.
7. When the USB menu is displayed, press keys on
1. If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.
the Control Panel in the order shown below.
2. Connect the PC and the host machine using an
• [4]: Clear/Format
Cross Ethernet cable. (when SST is used)
• [1]: Disk Format
3. Turn on the PC.
• [0]: OK
3. Registering the system software • Press any keys.
1. Insert the latest System Software into the PC using • [C]: Return to menu
the SST. • [Reset] : Start shutdown sequence
2. Start the SST. • [0]: OK (The power of the host machine is
3. Click 'Register Firmware'. turned OFF automatically.)
4. Select the drive where the system software has 8. Remove the USB flash drive.
been inserted, and click the [SEARCH] button. 9. Turn ON the main power switch.
5. Click the [REGISTER] button.
6. Click [OK]. ■ Executing Auto
Gradation Adjustment
When the high-capacity HDD is installed, the machine
initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto
gradation correction.
Therefore, execute full adjustment of auto gradation
adjustment after installing the high-capacity HDD to enable
proper images to be output.

■ Execution of the Minimum

Installation Work
Be sure to execute the minimum installation work in
accordance with the Setup Guide because HDD is initialized
when the high-capacity HDD is installed.

1237
 9. Installation

[TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit ■ Installing the Removable HDD Kit

Checking the Contents 1.

P Tightening; M3x8
1x 1x 2x

2x

A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1 (Red)
1x 1x
1x 2x

P Tightening; M3x8
2x A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2 (Blue)
1x

2.
1x 1x

Essential Items to Be
Performed Before Installation
• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
disconnect the power plug from the outlet.

WARNING:
• If performing work without disconnecting the
power plug of the host machine, it may cause
electrical shock.
• If disconnecting the power plug without
turning OFF the main power, it may cause
damage of the machine.

• When turning OFF the main power, follow the

below procedure.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the
host machine.
2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the
main power are turned off.

Installation Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure to perform “Removing the HDD (Preparation)”
on page 1233 before performing the following work.

1238
 9. Installation

3. 4.
NOTE:
Disconnect the HDD Cable from the HDD Connector
Support Plate, and replace it with the "A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1
(Red)" (The removed cable will not be used).

2x

2x

NOTE:
The removed screws will be used in step 5.

A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1 (Red)

2x

1239
 9. Installation

5. 7.
NOTE: CAUTION:
• Connect the assembled "A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1 (Red)". Connect the Communication Cable (red) and Power
• Use the screws removed in step 3. Supply Cable to [A] of Controller PCB.
If the Communication Cable (red) is connected to [B],
the HDD error occurs.

2x

2x

2x

[B]
[A]

6. [B]

[A]

1240
 9. Installation

■ Assembling and Installing the HDD

8.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until
1.
it stops. NOTE:
• Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise Use the HDD removed from the host machine.
the connector may not be connected properly.

CAUTION:
Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD
[A]
Connector and the Conversion Connector.

1x

1x

1x

2.

P Tightening ; M3x8

2x

1241
 9. Installation

CAUTION:
• Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block
when tightening the screws.
4.
• Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten
the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector
may not be connected properly, resulting in
poor contact.

2x

5.

3.
NOTE:
Write down the serial number of the host machine to the
label for recording the number, and affix it to the area
indicated in the figure.

6.

HDD No.

Serial No. XXXXXXXX

7. Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable

HDD to discourage theft.

1242
 9. Installation

8. 10.
NOTE:
4x • Affix the HDD Caution Label in the
appropriate language.
• Be sure that it is not placed on the ribs at upper and
lower sides.

9.

11.

12. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the

power outlet.

13. Turn ON the main power switch.

1243
 9. Installation

[TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Essential Items to Be

Removable HDD Kit Performed Before Installation
• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
Checking the Contents disconnect the power plug from the outlet.

<Option HDD (1TB)> WARNING:

• If performing work without disconnecting the
power plug of the host machine, it may cause
electrical shock.
• If disconnecting the power plug without
turning OFF the main power, it may cause
damage of the machine.

1x 1x
• When turning OFF the main power, follow the
below procedure.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the
host machine.
2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the
1x 1x main power are turned off.

Installation Procedure
Sems ; M3x4 P Tightening ; M3x8
4x 2x
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform “Removing the HDD (Preparation)”
on page 1233 before performing the following work.
<Removable HDD Kit>

■ Installing the Removable HDD Kit

1.
P Tightening; M3x8
1x 1x 2x

A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1 (Red)
1x 1x
1x

2x

P Tightening; M3x8
2x A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2 (Blue)
1x 2x

1x 1x

1244
 9. Installation

2. 4.
NOTE:
Disconnect the HDD Cable from the HDD Connector
Support Plate, and replace it with the "A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1
(Red)" (The removed cable will not be used).

2x

A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1 (Red)

3.
2x

2x

NOTE:
The removed screws will be used in step 5.

1245
 9. Installation

5. 7.
NOTE: CAUTION:
• Connect the assembled "A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1 (Red)". Connect the Communication Cable (red) and Power
• Use the screws removed in step 3. Supply Cable to [A] of Controller PCB.
If the Communication Cable (red) is connected to [B],
the HDD error occurs.

2x

2x

2x

[B]
[A]

6. [B]

[A]

1246
 9. Installation

■ Assembling and Installing the

8. Option HDD

CAUTION:
• Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until
it stops.
1.
• Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise
NOTE:
the connector may not be connected properly.
Use the 2 screws (P Tightening; M3x8) included with the
Option HDD.

[A]

P Tightening ; M3x8

2x
1x

1x

2.

Sems ; M3x4

4x

1247
 9. Installation

CAUTION:

3. • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block

when tightening the screws.
• Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten
CAUTION:
the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector
Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD
may not be connected properly, resulting in
Connector and the Conversion Connector.
poor contact.

2x

1x

4. 5.
NOTE:
Use the 2 screws (P Tightening; M3x8) included with the NOTE:
Removable HDD Kit. Write down the serial number of the host machine to the
label for recording the number, and affix it to the area
indicated in the figure.

P Tightening ; M3x8

2x

HDD No.

Serial No. XXXXXXXX

1248
 9. Installation

6. 10.
4x

7.

11.

8.

9. Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable

HDD to discourage theft.

1249
 9. Installation

2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software

of Host machine
12. 1. If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.
2. Connect the PC and the host machine using an
NOTE: Cross Ethernet cable. (when SST is used)
• Affix the HDD Caution Label in the 3. Turn on the PC.
appropriate language.
• Be sure that it is not placed on the ribs at upper and 3. Registering the system software
lower sides. 1. Insert the latest System Software into the PC using
the SST.
2. Start the SST.
3. Click 'Register Firmware'.
4. Select the drive where the system software has
been inserted, and click the [SEARCH] button.
5. Click the [REGISTER] button.
6. Click [OK].

4. Initializing HDD
<In case of SST>
1. Start the host machine with download mode in
safe mode.
2. Start the SST.
3. Select the model. Then, select [Single] and
click [Start].
4. Click [Format HDD].
5. Select [All], and click [Start].
6. Click [Execute Format].
7. The Format is executed.
8. Select [Shutdown/Restart], and click [Shutdown].
9. Click [OK]
10. The power of the host machine is turned OFF.
11. Terminate the SST.

13. 12. Disconnect the Cross Ethernet Cable from the

machine, and connect the user's network cable to
the machine.

<In case of USB flash drive>

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the PC.
2. Start up SST, and click the USB icon displayed in
the target selection screen.
3. Select the drive, the model series, and the
version to be written to the USB flash drive, and
click [Confirm].
4. Click [Start], and after the version has been written
to the USB flash drive, click [OK] and then remove
the USB flash drive.
5. Terminate the SST.
6. Connect the USB flash drive to the host machine,
and start the host machine with download mode in
safe mode.

14. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the

7. When the USB menu is displayed, press keys on
the Control Panel in the order shown below.
power outlet. • [4]: Clear/Format
• [1]: Disk Format
■ HDD Initialization Procedure • [0]: OK
• Press any keys.
1. Requirements • [C]: Return to menu
1. PC • [Reset] : Start shutdown sequence
Service Support Tool in the version that supports • [0]: OK (The power of the host machine is
this host machine must be installed. turned OFF automatically.)
2. Cross Ethernet Cable (when SST is used) 8. Remove the USB flash drive.
9. Turn ON the main power switch.

1250
 9. Installation

■ Executing Auto
Gradation Adjustment
When the high-capacity HDD is installed, the machine
initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto
gradation correction.
Therefore, execute full adjustment of auto gradation
adjustment after installing the high-capacity HDD to enable
proper images to be output.

■ Execution of the Minimum

Installation Work
Be sure to execute the minimum installation work in
accordance with the Setup Guide because HDD is initialized
when the high-capacity HDD is installed.

1251
 9. Installation

<HDD Mirroring Kit>

[TYPE-4] Standard HDD +
Option HDD (250GB) + HDD CAUTION:
Although the red cable shown below may sometimes
Mirroring Kit be supplied in lieu of the HDD Cable 2 (Blue), the
procedure for connecting the red cable is the same as
that for the blue cable.
Checking the Contents When connecting the cable to the Controller PCB,
make sure to first confirm that the sticker [B] is
<Option HDD (250 GB)> attached to the cable and then connect the cable to the
Controller PCB.

1x 1x

HDD Cable 2 (Red)

1x 1x

Sems ; M3x4 P Tightening ; M3x8

4x 2x

HDD Cable 2 (Blue)

1x 1x

TP ; M3x6 TP ; M3x8 Black

2x 2x

<Others>
• Guides are included

1252
 9. Installation

Essential Items to Be
Performed Before Installation 2.
• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
disconnect the power plug from the outlet.

WARNING:
• If performing work without disconnecting the
power plug of the host machine, it may cause
electrical shock.
• If disconnecting the power plug without
turning OFF the main power, it may cause
damage of the machine.

• When turning OFF the main power, follow the

below procedure.
3.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the
host machine.
2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the
main power are turned off.

Installation Procedure
TP ; M3x8 Black
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform “Removing the HDD (Preparation)”
on page 1233 before performing the following work.
2x

■ Installing the HDD Mirroring Kit

1.
1x

1253
 9. Installation

4. 6.
CAUTION:
Connect the HDD Cable 2 (Blue) or HDD Cable 2 (Red)
(with the label [B] attached) to [B] of the Controller PCB.
TP ; M3x6

<When the HDD Cable 2 (Blue) is used>

2x
2x

2x

[B]
[A]

5. [B]

[A]

1254
 9. Installation

<When the HDD Cable 2 (Red) is used>

7.
CAUTION:
• Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops.
• Be sure to push the [A] part hard to
install it, otherwise the connector may not be
connected properly.

2x

[A]

2x

[B]
[A]
[B]
[A] 1x

1x

8.

1255
 9. Installation

9. 2.
CAUTION:
Return the HDD removed from the host machine to the
Slot 1 (Left).

Sems ; M3x4

4x

■ Assembling and Installing the

Option HDD
3.
NOTE:

1. Install the Option HDD to the Slot 2 (Right).

P Tightening ; M3x8

2x

1256
 9. Installation

■ Setting the Mirroring

4.
NOTE:
1. Make a setting of mirroring.
Use the screw removed in "Removing the • Set the value of service mode to "1".
HDD (Preparation)". COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID

2. Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to

enable the setting value.
1x 3. Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.

4. Open the Cover, and make sure that the LED blinks.

NOTE:
Rebuilding starts approximately after 3 minutes after
turning OFF and then ON the power.
• HDD 1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks.
• HDD 2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.

CAUTION:
Rebuild process starts after setting "1" for W/RAID.
If an error occurs during the rebuild process at the

5. initial installation the hard disk needs to be replaced.

(Call service rep.), reexecute the process with the
following procedure.
1. Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2.
4x 2. Set the value of service mode to "0".
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID
3. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main
Power Supply Switch of the host machine.
4. Set the value of service mode to "1".
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID
5. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main
Power Supply Switch of the host machine.
The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild
process at the initial installation.
An error during the rebuild process that is executed
during operation is not included in the consideration.

6. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the

power outlet.

7. Turn ON the main power switch.

1257
 9. Installation

<HDD Mirroring Kit>

[TYPE-5] Standard HDD +
Option HDD (250GB) + NOTE:
The red cable shown below may sometimes be supplied in
Removable HDD Kit + HDD lieu of the HDD Cable 2 (Blue).

Mirroring Kit

Checking the Contents

<Option HDD (250 GB)>

HDD Cable 2 (Red)

1x 1x

1x

1x 1x TP ; M3x6 TP ; M3x8 Black

2x 2x

Sems ; M3x4 P Tightening ; M3x8

4x 2x

HDD Cable 2 (Blue)

1x
<Removable HDD Kit>

<Others>
• Guides are included

2x 2x Essential Items to Be
Performed Before Installation
• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
disconnect the power plug from the outlet.

A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1 (Red) 1x 1x
1x WARNING:
• If performing work without disconnecting the
power plug of the host machine, it may cause
electrical shock.
P Tightening; M3x8 • If disconnecting the power plug without
A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2 (Blue) x turning OFF the main power, it may cause
1x damage of the machine.

• When turning OFF the main power, follow the

below procedure.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the
host machine.
2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the
main power are turned off.

1258
 9. Installation

Installation Procedure
2.
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform “Removing the HDD (Preparation)”
on page 1233 before performing the following work.

■ Installing the Removable HDD Kit

1.

2x

2x

3.
1x

1259
 9. Installation

4. 6.
NOTE:
Disconnect the HDD Cable from the HDD Connector
Support Plate, and replace it with the "A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1
(Red)" (The removed cable will not be used).

2x

5.

2x

A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1 (Red)

2x

NOTE:
The removed screws will be used in step 7.

1260
 9. Installation

7. 9.
NOTE: NOTE:
• Connect the assembled "A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1 (Red)". Connect the assembled "A: HDD-Sig2/Pow2 (Blue)".
• Use the screws removed in step 5.

TP ; M3x6

2x

2x

8.
NOTE:
Use the "A: HDD-Sig2/Pow2 (Blue)" included with the
Removable HDD Kit.

A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2 (Blue)

TP ; M3x8 Black

2x

1261
 9. Installation

10. 11.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Process the "A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1 (Red)" first. • Install the A:DD-Sig1/Pow1 (red) to [A] on the
Controller PCB. If the Communication Cable (red)
is connected incorrectly, the HDD error occurs.
• Be sure to put the excess length of the cable
toward the connector side as much as possible.

NOTE:
Do not close the Wire Saddle yet in this step.

2x

2x

[B]
[A]
[B]

[A]

1262
 9. Installation

12. 13.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Process the "A: HDD-Sig2/Pow2 (Blue)" later. Be sure to connect the "A: HDD-Sig2/Pow2 (Blue)" to
[B] on the Controller PCB.

2x

2x

[B]
[A]
[B]

[A]

1263
 9. Installation

■ Assembling and Installing the HDD

14. Removed from the Host Machine
(First HDD)
CAUTION:
• Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until

1.
it stops.
• Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise
the connector may not be connected properly.
NOTE:
Use the HDD removed from the host machine.

[A]
CAUTION:
Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD
Connector and the Conversion Connector.

1x

1x

1x

2.
NOTE:
Use the 2 screws (P Tightening; M3x8) included with the
Removable HDD Kit.

P Tightening ; M3x8

2x

1264
 9. Installation

CAUTION:
• Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block
when tightening the screws.
4.
• Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten
the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector
may not be connected properly, resulting in
poor contact.

2x

5.
NOTE:
Return the HDD removed from the host machine to the
Slot 1 (Left).

3.
NOTE:
Write down the serial number of the host machine to the
label for recording the number, and affix it to the area
indicated in the figure.

HDD No.

Serial No. XXXXXXXX

1265
 9. Installation

■ Assembling and Installing the

Option HDD (Second HDD) 3.
CAUTION:

1. Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD

Connector and the Conversion Connector.

NOTE:
Use the 2 screws (P Tightening; M3x8) included with the
Option HDD.

1x

P Tightening ; M3x8

2x 4.
NOTE:
Use the 2 screws (P Tightening; M3x8) included with the
Removable HDD Kit.

P Tightening ; M3x8

2. 2x

Sems ; M3x4

4x

1266
 9. Installation

CAUTION:
• Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block
when tightening the screws.
6.
• Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten
NOTE:
the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector Install the Option HDD to the Slot 2 (Right).
may not be connected properly, resulting in
poor contact.

2x

7.
5.
NOTE:
Write down the serial number of the host machine to the
label for recording the number, and affix it to the area
indicated in the figure.

8. Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable

HDD to discourage theft.

HDD No.

Serial No. XXXXXXXX

1267
 9. Installation

9. 11.
NOTE:
4x • Affix the HDD Caution Label in the
appropriate language.
• Be sure that it is not placed on the ribs at upper and
lower sides.

10.

12.

13. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the

power outlet.

14. Turn ON the main power switch.

1268
 9. Installation

■ Setting the Mirroring

1. Make a setting of mirroring.

• Set the value of service mode to "1".
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID

2. Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to

enable the setting value.

3. Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.

4. Open the Cover, and make sure that the LED blinks.

NOTE:
Rebuilding starts approximately after 3 minutes after
turning OFF and then ON the power.
• HDD 1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks.
• HDD 2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.

CAUTION:
Rebuild process starts after setting "1" for W/RAID.
If an error occurs during the rebuild process at the
initial installation the hard disk needs to be replaced.
(Call service rep.), reexecute the process with the
following procedure.
1. Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2.
2. Set the value of service mode to "0".
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID
3. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main
Power Supply Switch of the host machine.
4. Set the value of service mode to "1".
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID
5. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main
Power Supply Switch of the host machine.
The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild
process at the initial installation.
An error during the rebuild process that is executed
during operation is not included in the consideration.

1269
 9. Installation

<HDD Mirroring Kit>

[TYPE-6] 2 Option HDDs (1TB)
+ HDD Mirroring Kit CAUTION:
Although the red cable shown below may sometimes
be supplied in lieu of the HDD Cable 2 (Blue), the
Checking the Contents procedure for connecting the red cable is the same as
that for the blue cable.
<Option HDD (1TB)> When connecting the cable to the Controller PCB,
make sure to first confirm that the sticker [B] is
attached to the cable and then connect the cable to the
Controller PCB.

1x 1x

HDD Cable 2 (Red)

1x 1x

Sems ; M3x4 P Tightening ; M3x8

4x 2x

HDD Cable 2 (Blue)

1x 1x

TP ; M3x6 TP ; M3x8 Black

2x 2x

<Others>
• Guides are included

1270
 9. Installation

Essential Items to Be
Performed Before Installation 2.
• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
disconnect the power plug from the outlet.

WARNING:
• If performing work without disconnecting the
power plug of the host machine, it may cause
electrical shock.
• If disconnecting the power plug without
turning OFF the main power, it may cause
damage of the machine.

• When turning OFF the main power, follow the

below procedure.
3.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the
host machine.
2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the
main power are turned off.

Installation Procedure
TP ; M3x8 Black
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform “Removing the HDD (Preparation)”
on page 1233 before performing the following work.
2x

■ Installing the HDD Mirroring Kit

1.
1x

1271
 9. Installation

4. 6.
CAUTION:
Connect the HDD Cable 2 (Blue) or HDD Cable 2 (Red)
(with the label [B] attached) to [B] of the Controller PCB.
TP ; M3x6

<When the HDD Cable 2 (Blue) is used>

2x
2x

2x

[B]
[A]

5. [B]

[A]

1272
 9. Installation

<When the HDD Cable 2 (Red) is used>

7.
CAUTION:
• Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops.
• Be sure to push the [A] part hard to
install it, otherwise the connector may not be
connected properly.

2x

[A]

2x

[B]
[A]
[B]
[A] 1x

1x

8.

1273
 9. Installation

■ Assembling and Installing the

Option HDD 3.
NOTE: NOTE:
Install the 2 Option HDDs according to the steps 1 to 2. Install the first Option HDD to the Slot 1 (Left).

1.

P Tightening ; M3x8

4.
2x
NOTE:
Install the second Option HDD to the Slot 2 (Right).

2.

Sems ; M3x4

4x

1274
 9. Installation

2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software

of Host machine
5. 1. If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.
2. Connect the PC and the host machine using an
NOTE: Cross Ethernet cable. (when SST is used)
Use the screw removed in "Removing the 3. Turn on the PC.
HDD (Preparation)".
3. Registering the system software
1. Insert the latest System Software into the PC using
the SST.
1x 2. Start the SST.
3. Click 'Register Firmware'.
4. Select the drive where the system software has
been inserted, and click the [SEARCH] button.
5. Click the [REGISTER] button.
6. Click [OK].

4. Initializing HDD
<In case of SST>
1. Start the host machine with download mode in
safe mode.
2. Start the SST.
3. Select the model. Then, select [Single] and
click [Start].
4. Click [Format HDD].
6. 5. Select [All], and click [Start].
6. Click [Execute Format].
7. The Format is executed.
4x 8. Select [Shutdown/Restart], and click [Shutdown].
9. Click [OK]
10. The power of the host machine is turned OFF.
11. Terminate the SST.
12. Disconnect the Cross Ethernet Cable from the
machine, and connect the user's network cable to
the machine.

<In case of USB flash drive>

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the PC.
2. Start up SST, and click the USB icon displayed in
the target selection screen.
3. Select the drive, the model series, and the
version to be written to the USB flash drive, and
click [Confirm].
4. Click [Start], and after the version has been written
to the USB flash drive, click [OK] and then remove
the USB flash drive.
5. Terminate the SST.
6. Connect the USB flash drive to the host machine,
and start the host machine with download mode in
safe mode.
7. When the USB menu is displayed, press keys on
7. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the
the Control Panel in the order shown below.
• [4]: Clear/Format
power outlet.
• [1]: Disk Format
• [0]: OK
■ HDD Initialization Procedure • Press any keys.
• [C]: Return to menu
1. Requirements
• [Reset] : Start shutdown sequence
1. PC • [0]: OK (The power of the host machine is
Service Support Tool in the version that supports turned OFF automatically.)
this host machine must be installed. 8. Remove the USB flash drive.
2. Cross Ethernet Cable (when SST is used) 9. Turn ON the main power switch.

1275
 9. Installation

■ Setting the Mirroring

1. Make a setting of mirroring.

• Set the value of service mode to "1".
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID

2. Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to

enable the setting value.

3. Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.

4. Open the Cover, and make sure that the LED blinks.

NOTE:
Rebuilding starts approximately after 3 minutes after
turning OFF and then ON the power.
• HDD 1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks.
• HDD 2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.

CAUTION:
Rebuild process starts after setting "1" for W/RAID.
If an error occurs during the rebuild process at the
initial installation the hard disk needs to be replaced.
(Call service rep.), reexecute the process with the
following procedure.
1. Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2.
2. Set the value of service mode to "0".
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID
3. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main
Power Supply Switch of the host machine.
4. Set the value of service mode to "1".
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID
5. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main
Power Supply Switch of the host machine.
The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild
process at the initial installation.
An error during the rebuild process that is executed
during operation is not included in the consideration.

■ Executing Auto
Gradation Adjustment
When the high-capacity HDD is installed, the machine
initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto
gradation correction.
Therefore, execute full adjustment of auto gradation
adjustment after installing the high-capacity HDD to enable
proper images to be output.

■ Execution of the Minimum

Installation Work
Be sure to execute the minimum installation work in
accordance with the Setup Guide because HDD is initialized
when the high-capacity HDD is installed.

1276
 9. Installation

<HDD Mirroring Kit>

[TYPE-7] 2 Option HDDs (1TB)
+ Removable HDD Kit + HDD NOTE:
The red cable shown below may sometimes be supplied in
Mirroring Kit lieu of the HDD Cable 2 (Blue).

Checking the Contents

<Option HDD (1TB)>

HDD Cable 2 (Red)

1x 1x

1x
1x 1x

TP ; M3x6 TP ; M3x8 Black

2x 2x

Sems ; M3x4 P Tightening ; M3x8

4x 2x

<Removable HDD Kit>

HDD Cable 2 (Blue)
1x

<Others>
• Guides are included
2x 2x

Essential Items to Be
Performed Before Installation
• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1 (Red) 1x 1x disconnect the power plug from the outlet.
1x

WARNING:
• If performing work without disconnecting the
power plug of the host machine, it may cause
P Tightening; M3x8
A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2 (Blue) x electrical shock.
1x • If disconnecting the power plug without
turning OFF the main power, it may cause
damage of the machine.

• When turning OFF the main power, follow the

below procedure.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the
host machine.
2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the
main power are turned off.

1277
 9. Installation

Installation Procedure
2.
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform “Removing the HDD (Preparation)”
on page 1233 before performing the following work.

■ Installing the Removable HDD Kit

1.

2x

2x

3.
1x

1278
 9. Installation

4. 6.
NOTE:
Disconnect the HDD Cable from the HDD Connector
Support Plate, and replace it with the "A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1
(Red)" (The removed cable will not be used).

2x

5.

2x

A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1 (Red)

2x

NOTE:
The removed screws will be used in step 7.

1279
 9. Installation

7. 9.
NOTE: NOTE:
• Connect the assembled "A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1 (Red)". Connect the assembled "A: HDD-Sig2/Pow2 (Blue)".
• Use the screws removed in step 5.

TP ; M3x6

2x

2x

8.
NOTE:
Use the "A: HDD-Sig2/Pow2 (Blue)" included with the
Removable HDD Kit.

A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2 (Blue)

TP ; M3x8 Black

2x

1280
 9. Installation

10. 11.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Process the "A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1 (Red)" first. • Install the A:DD-Sig1/Pow1 (red) to [A] on the
Controller PCB. If the Communication Cable (red)
is connected incorrectly, the HDD error occurs.
• Be sure to put the excess length of the cable
toward the connector side as much as possible.

NOTE:
Do not close the Wire Saddle yet in this step.

2x

2x

[B]
[A]
[B]

[A]

1281
 9. Installation

12. 13.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Process the "A: HDD-Sig2/Pow2 (Blue)" later. Be sure to connect the "A: HDD-Sig2/Pow2 (Blue)" to
[B] on the Controller PCB.

2x

2x

[B]
[A]
[B]

[A]

1282
 9. Installation

■ Assembling and Installing the

14. Option HDD

CAUTION: NOTE:
• Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until Install the 2 Option HDDs according to the steps 1 to 4.
it stops.
• Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise
the connector may not be connected properly.

1.
[A] NOTE:
Use the 2 screws (P Tightening; M3x8) included with the
Option HDD.

P Tightening ; M3x8
1x

1x 2x

1283
 9. Installation

2. 4.
NOTE:
Use the 2 screws (P Tightening; M3x8) included with the
Removable HDD Kit.

Sems ; M3x4

4x P Tightening ; M3x8

2x

3.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD
• Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block
Connector and the Conversion Connector.
when tightening the screws.
• Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten
the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector
may not be connected properly, resulting in
poor contact.

2x
1x

1284
 9. Installation

5. 6.
NOTE:
Write down the serial number of the host machine to the
label for recording the number, and affix it to the area
indicated in the figure.
• Affix the HDD No.1 to the HDD to be installed to the
Slot 1 (Left).
• Affix the HDD No.2 to the HDD to be installed to the
Slot 2 (Right).

<When affixing HDD No.1>

7.
NOTE:
• Be sure to install the HDD No.1 to the Slot 1 (Left).
• Be sure to install the HDD No.2 to the Slot 2 (Right).

<HDD No. 1>

HDD No.

Serial No. XXXXXXXX

<When affixing HDD No.2>

<HDD No. 2>

HDD No.

Serial No. XXXXXXXX

1285
 9. Installation

8. 11.

9. Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable 12.

HDD to discourage theft.
NOTE:
• Affix the HDD Caution Label in the
appropriate language.
10. • Be sure that it is not placed on the ribs at upper and
lower sides.

4x

1286
 9. Installation

4. Initializing HDD

13.
<In case of SST>
1. Start the host machine with download mode in
safe mode.
2. Start the SST.
3. Select the model. Then, select [Single] and
click [Start].
4. Click [Format HDD].
5. Select [All], and click [Start].
6. Click [Execute Format].
7. The Format is executed.
8. Select [Shutdown/Restart], and click [Shutdown].
9. Click [OK]
10. The power of the host machine is turned OFF.
11. Terminate the SST.
12. Disconnect the Cross Ethernet Cable from the
machine, and connect the user's network cable to
the machine.

<In case of USB flash drive>

14. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the PC.
2. Start up SST, and click the USB icon displayed in
power outlet.
the target selection screen.
3. Select the drive, the model series, and the
■ HDD Initialization Procedure version to be written to the USB flash drive, and
click [Confirm].
1. Requirements
4. Click [Start], and after the version has been written
1. PC to the USB flash drive, click [OK] and then remove
Service Support Tool in the version that supports the USB flash drive.
this host machine must be installed. 5. Terminate the SST.
2. Cross Ethernet Cable (when SST is used) 6. Connect the USB flash drive to the host machine,
2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software and start the host machine with download mode in
of Host machine safe mode.
7. When the USB menu is displayed, press keys on
1. If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.
the Control Panel in the order shown below.
2. Connect the PC and the host machine using an
• [4]: Clear/Format
Cross Ethernet cable. (when SST is used)
• [1]: Disk Format
3. Turn on the PC.
• [0]: OK
3. Registering the system software • Press any keys.
1. Insert the latest System Software into the PC using • [C]: Return to menu
the SST. • [Reset] : Start shutdown sequence
2. Start the SST. • [0]: OK (The power of the host machine is
3. Click 'Register Firmware'. turned OFF automatically.)
4. Select the drive where the system software has 8. Remove the USB flash drive.
been inserted, and click the [SEARCH] button. 9. Turn ON the main power switch.
5. Click the [REGISTER] button.
6. Click [OK]. ■ Setting the Mirroring

1. Make a setting of mirroring.

• Set the value of service mode to "1".
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID

2. Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to

enable the setting value.

3. Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.

1287
 9. Installation

4. Open the Cover, and make sure that the LED blinks.

NOTE:
Rebuilding starts approximately after 3 minutes after
turning OFF and then ON the power.
• HDD 1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks.
• HDD 2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.

CAUTION:
Rebuild process starts after setting "1" for W/RAID.
If an error occurs during the rebuild process at the
initial installation the hard disk needs to be replaced.
(Call service rep.), reexecute the process with the
following procedure.
1. Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2.
2. Set the value of service mode to "0".
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID
3. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main
Power Supply Switch of the host machine.
4. Set the value of service mode to "1".
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID
5. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main
Power Supply Switch of the host machine.
The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild
process at the initial installation.
An error during the rebuild process that is executed
during operation is not included in the consideration.

■ Executing Auto
Gradation Adjustment
When the high-capacity HDD is installed, the machine
initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto
gradation correction.
Therefore, execute full adjustment of auto gradation
adjustment after installing the high-capacity HDD to enable
proper images to be output.

■ Execution of the Minimum

Installation Work
Be sure to execute the minimum installation work in
accordance with the Setup Guide because HDD is initialized
when the high-capacity HDD is installed.

1288
APPENDICES
Service Tool.....................................1290
General Circuit Diagram..................1291
Soft counter specifications ............. 1311
Removal.......................................... 1317
Target PCBs of Automatic Update.. 1320
List of Service Modes That Can Be
Restored...................................... 1321
 Service Tool

Service Tool

List of Special Tools

When servicing this machine, the special tools shown below are required besides the standard tools.

Tool name Tool No. Rank* Configuration Use/Remarks

Digital multimeter FY9-2002 A For making electrical-
checks.

Tester extension pin FY9-3038 A As an addition when mak-

ing an electrical check.

Tester extension FY9-3039 A As an addition when mak-

pin (L-shipped) ing an electrical check.

NA-3 Test Chart FY9-9196 A For checking and adjust-

ing images.

*
A: Tool each service engineers should have 1 pc per engineer
B: Tool a group of approx. 5 engineers should have 1 pc per group

Solvent/Oil List
Solvent name Location of use Service parts number Caution
Alcohol External Covers, Control Pan- None (to be prepared by Never put it close to fire
el, etc. sales company)
Lubricant Driving area, sliding area FY9-6022
MOLYKOTE EM-50L Gears, Scanner Rail HY9-0007

1290
 General Circuit Diagram

General Circuit Diagram

Host machine_1/18
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F

UN3
UN5 Heater PCB
Only for JP 12/24V Power Supply PCB Only for JP

To P.10
F-5
CN2 CN52 J1101
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 1
1 2 3 J9M
1
2
3

E E
1 2 3
1
2
3

J2000
INLET
UN1
SOLD1

SOLD2

SOLD7 SOLD6
All-night Power Supply PCB

4
1 2
J10F SW4
Environment
SOLD3

1 2
J10M
Switch
MT25 CN101 CN201

3
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 SOLD5 SOLD4

Arrester_GND
Arrester_GND
D D

AC_IN_HOT2
AC_IN_NET2
AC_IN_HOT
AC_IN_NET

NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
HOT R

+12V

+24V
+24V
GND

GND
GND
GND

GND
GND
HOT

+5U
+5U
+5U
1 2 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3
J101 J103 J111 J112 J105 J104

UN30
AC Driver PCB

C C

J117 J114 J116 J115 J113

J118
CURZX_CPU(ZEROX_TRIG)

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

+12V_DCON

+24V_RCON

+12V_RCON
+24V_ACC
FAN_POW

24V_DCON

+12V
GND

GND

GND

GND
FAN_ERR

ADDON_FAN_LOCK

GND

GND
GND
+5U
+5U
+5U
ADDON_FAN_HALF
GND

GND

ADDON_FAN_FULL

SEESAW_OUT
R_POW_MONI

HEATER_RLY1_ON
HEATER_RLY2_ON
RMT_RCON

RMT_DCON

CURRMS(CRNT)
PSU_DETECT2
PSU_DETECT1
RMT_SYS

ZERO_CROSS

+5V_SEESAW
HEATER1_ON
HEATER2_ON

+3.3V_DCON
+24V_LOCK

+24V_DCON
+24V_DCON

+12V_DCON
GND

GND

GND

P_GND
L_GND

L_GND

L_GND
VOLT

GND
GND

GND
J7DH

J326
1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J8M
1716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J7D
J303 J304
B E-2 L GND
1 2 3 4
J28
1 2 3 4
J29 D-4 B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213
13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

FIN TXD
From P.8 To P.8
FIN RXD
L GND UN4
FIN MODE
Reader Controller PCB
3 2 1 UN2 FIN RESET
L GND
J1102 DC Controller PCB FIN DETECT2
FIN ENTRY SNS Finisher
+5V DCON
L GND
FIN DETECT1
N.C.
J712D
J27H
J27

3 2 1 J712DH UN3
1 2 3 Heater PCB
A 123 A

FM5
Power Supply
Cooling Fan

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1291
 General Circuit Diagram

Host machine_2/18
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F Fixing Assembly F

MT6 MT8 MT7

TH2
Fixing Sub
Thermistor 1
2 1 J709

2
S53 S19 TH1 TH3

2
Fixing Pressure Fixing Outlet

Fixing Heater 1

Fixing Heater 2
E Fixing Main Fixing Sub E

2
Release Sensor Sensor
Thermistor Thermistor 2

H1

H2
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J707L MT3

2
3 2 1 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J707DH
TP1

TP
J710 J706 J707D
Thermoswitch

1
1 2
J708 MT4

6 FIX_OUT_SNS
3 FIX_HP_SNS

8 TH_DETECT
1 +5V_DCON

4 +5V_DCON

6 TH_SUB2
4 TH_SUB1
2 TH_MAIN
D D

2 GND

5 GND

5 GND

7 GND
1 GND

3 GND
J705LA
J705LB

HEATER1
HEATER2
_BUS_7

_BUS_11

J705L

1 2 3 4
B6 A8

J705D
B6 A8 1 2 3 4

C C
_BUS_9 _BUS_8

J705DB J705DA
6
5
4
3
2
1

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

HEATER_HOT
FIX_OUT_SNS
FIX_HP_SNS

TH_DETECT
+5V_DCON

+5V_DCON

HEATER1
HEATER2
TH_SUB1

TH_SUB2
TH_MAIN

B B
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 1 2 3
J307 J102

UN2 UN30
DC Controller PCB AC Driver PCB

A A

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1292
 General Circuit Diagram

Host machine_3/18
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Right Cover Unit

F S50 S9 SL2 SL12 F

S6 Multi-Purpose Tray Multi-Purpose Tray Multi-Purpose Tray Reversal
Loop Sensor Paper Length Sensor Paper Sensor Pickup Solenoid Solenoid
SL
SL
S27 1 2
1 2

Multi-Purpose Tray
3 2 1
Paper Size Sensor 3 2 1
3 2 1 1 2 1 2 3

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J741 2 1 3 2 1
J2004 J2006 J2007 J2008DH J2080DH
J2008D J2080D FM4 FM3 FM7
Heat Exhaust Heat Exhaust Delivery
S7 Fan (Front) Fan (Rear) Cooling Fan
Duplex Feed
Sensor
123 123 123

E 1 2 3 J2506L 3 2 1
1 2 3 J2671L 1 2 3 4 J2672L 1 2 3 4 5 J2571L 1 2 J2059L 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 E
J2506DH 3 2 1 J2671DH J2672DH J2571DH 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 J2059DH
J2506D J2671D J2672D J2571D J2059D
J2507 J2009DH J2010DH J2209DH
J2009D J2010D J2209D

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223242526272829 J2501L

2928272625242322212019181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J2501DH

D J2501D
D

WAST_FAN_R_LOCK

P_COOL_FAN_LOCK
WAST_FAN_F_LOCK
+24V_DCON_SLCL1

+24V_DCON_SLCL1

WAST_FAN_R_ON
REVERSE_SL_ON

P_COOL_FAN_ON
WAST_FAN_F_ON
+5V_SESAW_CNT
MP_P_EX1_SNS
MP_SIZE_SNS

MULT_SL_ON
+3.3V_DCON
DUP_P_SNS
LOOP_SNS

MP_P_SNS
+5V_DCON

+5V_DCON

+5V_DCON
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223242526272829

J335

UN2
DC Controller PCB
C J312 J332
C
J309 J328 J311
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4

EXIT_M_BN
EXIT_M_B
EXIT_M_AN
EXIT_M_A
+5V_DCON
GND
EXIT1_FULL_SNS
+5V_DCON
GND
EXIT1_P_SNS
+5V_DCON
GND
EXIT2_P_SNS
+24V
EXIT2_SL_ON
+5V_DCON
GND
EXIT2_FULL_SNS
+5V_DCON
GND
RVRS_P_SNS
RVRS_M_BN
RVRS_M_B
RVRS_M_AN
RVRS_M_A

MAIN_M_FG
MAIN_M_DEC
MAIN_M_ACC
GND
GND
+24V_LOCK
+24V_LOCK
N.C.

+24V
REGI_CL_ON
+24V
SLEEV_CL_ON
+24V
MULT_CL_ON

DUP_M_BN
DUP_M_B
DUP_M_AN
DUP_M_A
J2511D
J2155D
J2511DH 151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J2155DH J2255D
13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J2255DH
J2511L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 J2155L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213

J2255L

B B
J737
J2561D1 5 4 3 2 1
J2028D J2027D J2075D 4 3 2 1
J2561DH11 2 3 4 5 J137 2 1 J2028DH 2 1 J2027DH 2 1 J2075DH
J2561L1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 3 2 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2
M
J2060D1 1 2 1 2 1 2
J2060DH1 M
J128 CL CL CL
J129 J130
3 2 1
2 1
3 2 1
J125 3 2 1
J126 4 3 2 1
J127 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 M9
J5 Duplex Feed
3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
M1 CL3 CL1 CL12 Motor
M M Main Motor Registration Developing Multi-Purpose Tray
1 2
Clutch Clutch Pickup Clutch
SL

S22 SL13 S23 S24 M20 M10 S20 S21

No.2 No.2 No.2 Reversal Reversal No.1 No.1 No.1 Main Drive Unit
A Delivery Delivery Delivery Sensor Motor Delivery Delivery Delivery A
Sensor Solenoid Full Sensor Motor Full Sensor Sensor

Second Delivery Unit First Delivery Unit

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1293
 General Circuit Diagram

Host machine_4/18
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F

S39 M13 M3
S35 S30 S28 S29 Cassette 1 Cassette 2
Cassette Cover Pickup Motor Pickup Motor
Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 2 Sensor
Paper Width Paper Length Paper Width Paper Length M M
Detection Switch Detection Switch Detection Switch Detection Switch
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1

J2019 J2020

A*

B*

A*

B*
J2076 J2075 J729 J731 J736

B
E J2532L
J2572L E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J2572DH
J2532DH

J2532D J2572D

CST_DOOR_SNS
CST1_SIZE_W4
CST1_SIZE_W3

CST1_SIZE_W2
CST1_SIZE_W1

CST2_SIZE_W4
CST2_SIZE_W3

CST2_SIZE_W2
CST2_SIZE_W1
CST1_SIZE_L4
CST1_SIZE_L3

CST1_SIZE_L2
CST1_SIZE_L1

CST2_SIZE_L4
CST2_SIZE_L3

CST2_SIZE_L2
CST2_SIZE_L1

FEED1_M_AN

FEED1_M_BN

FEED2_M_AN

FEED2_M_BN
FEED1_M_A

FEED1_M_B

FEED2_M_A

FEED2_M_B
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
+5V

N.C.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
D J317 J310 D

UN2
DC Controller PCB

J319
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031

CST_FEED_SNS_REF

CST1_LEVEL_A_SNS

CST1_LEVEL_B_SNS

CST2_LEVEL_A_SNS

CST2-LEVEL_B_SNS
CST1_FEED_SL_ON

CST2_FEED_SL_ON
CST2_FEED_SNS
+5V_DCON_REF
REGI_SNS_REF

CST1_P_SNS

CST2_P_SNS
+5V_DCON

+5V_DCON

C C

+24V

+24V
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V
J2545D 6 5 4 3 2 1 1413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J2563D
J2533D
J2545LH 1 2 3 4 5 6
J2533LH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314
J2563LH
J2545L J2533L J2563L

B B
J2546D 6 5 4 3 2 1
J2546LH 1 2 3 4 5 6
J2546L

J2034 J2021 J2022 J2023 J2024 J2025D J2051 J2052 J2053 J2054 J2055D
2 1
J2025DH 2 1 J2055DH
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1

SL SL

S5 S1 S2 S4 S3 SL1 S31 S32 S34 S33 SL11

A Pre-Registration Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 2 Cassette 2 Cassette 2 Cassette 2 A
Sensor Pickup Paper Paper Level Paper Level Pickup Paper Paper Level Paper Level Pickup Pickup
Sensor Sensor Sensor A Sensor B Solenoid Sensor Sensor A Sensor B Sensor Solenoid

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1294
 General Circuit Diagram

Host machine_5/18
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F

E E
UN2
DC Controller PCB

J337 J301
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

WEST_TN_FULL_SNS

+24V_TNSNS
+3.3V_DCON
FRONT_DOOR_SNS

ENV_TEMP

ENV_HUM
COOL_FAN_LOCK

TN_DEV
COOL_FAN_ON

GND

GND
+5V_DCON

+5V_DCON
D D

GND

GND

GND
From P.6 From P.6
E-5 A-7

J2060L J2040DH
1 2 J2040D
1 2 3

C C
J2210D
3 2 1 J2210DH
1 2 3 J2210L

J411D
3 2 1 J411DH
3 2 1
J21 3 2 1
J22 1 2 3 4
J23 1 2 3 4
J25 2 1
J1 3 2 1 J107
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 㸲 㸱 㸰 㸯 㸲 㸱 㸰 㸯 3 2 1

123

S25 Drum Sensor S46

S17 S18 S16 PCB
Waste Toner Front Cover Environment Developing Toner Cover
Open/Closed Sensor Assembly Open/Closed
B FM6 Full Sensor
Toner Level Sensor B
Developing Sensor
Cooling Fan Sensor

UN74
Drum ROM
PCB

A A

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1295
 General Circuit Diagram

Host machine_6/18
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

FM1 FM2 M8 S10

Fixing Cooling Fixing Cooling Fixing Film Fixing Film
Fan (Rear) Fan (Front) Shutter Motor Shutter HP
Sensor
M
F 123 123
F
1 2 3 4

1 2 3 1 2 3 3 2 1
1 2 3 4

M2 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
3 2 1

Fixing Motor J733DH

J109
J732DH J2037D
J732D J733D J2037DH
M

6 5 4 3 2 1

6 5 4 3 2 1

J730

To P.5

C-3
E E
2 1 J2060DH
J2507L
J2060D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J2507LH

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J2507D

EDGE_FAN_R_LOCK

EDGE_FAN_F_LOCK
EDGE_FAN_R_ON

EDGE_FAN_F_ON

SHUT_HP_SNS
+24V_LOCK

FIX_M_ACC
FIX_M_DEC

SHUT_M_AN

SHUT_M_BN
DRAM_TAG
FIX_M_FG

FIX_M_FR

SHUT_M_B
SHUT_M_A

+5V_DCON
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
D 1 2 3 4 5 6
J331
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415
J334 D

UN2
DC Controller PCB

J333 J302
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819 1 2 3 4

HOP_M_AN

HOP_M_BN
BOTTLE_M_BRAKE

+5V_SEESAW_CNT

HOP_M_A

HOP_M_B
BOTTLE_HP_SNS
BOTTLE_M_PWM

TR_COVER_SNS
BOTTLE_M_FG

BOTTLE_M_FR

C C

BOTTLE_TAG
+24V_DCON
+5V_DCON

TR_HOP
+24V
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
N.C.

N.C.

J124D
2322212019181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J124DH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223 J124L

J42D
121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J42DH
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 J42L B
SOLD12
SOLD11

3 2 1
J43

C-3
N.C.

J4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J41 To P.5 3 2 1
J732 1 2 3 4
J44 4 3 2 1 J4H
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 㸲 㸱 㸰㸯 1 2 3 4

M 1 2 3 4

A UN75 M
A
S52 S51 Bottle Sensor
M17 PCB
Bottle Motor Bottle Motor Toner Feed Level M21
HP Sensor Detection Sensor Toner Feed
Motor
UN76
Bottle ROM
PCB

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1296
 F

A
B
E

C
D

8
8
Host machine_7/18

MISS DETECT

1
31

FIX DC PWM

2
30

DS DC PWM

3
29

TR N DC CLK

4
28

TR CV PWM

7
7

5
27

6
TR CC PWM
26

TR P CLK
7
25

DV DC PWM
8
24

DV AC CLK
9
23

DV AC ENB
10
22

PR DC PWM
11
21

PR SIN DRV
12
20

PR AC PWM

3 2 1
13
19

UN24
FIX DC CLK

BD PCB
14
18

DS DC CLK
15
17

J9744
+3.3V DV DC CLK
16
16

BD PR DC CLK
17
15

GND REV DETECT

18
14

+3.3V PR I SNS
19
13
UN6

GND TR V SNS
HVT PCB

20
12

LSR_PWM L GND
11

21

L GND
N.C.
22
10

TR N ON
9

N.C.

6
6

23

+5V DCON
8

N.C.
24

MUTE
7

GND
25

P GND
6

APC_CTRL0_2
26

P GND
5

APC_CTRL0_0
27

UN60
N.C.
4

APC_CTRL0_1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
28

N.C.
3

POLY_M_FG
29

24V LOCK
2

+24V
30

24V LOCK
1

POLY_M_ACC
31

J9602

Laser Driver PCB (2 Beams)

POLY_M_DEC
GND
J323

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718
J401

M
J9324

5 4 3 2 1

5 4 3 2 1

M11
Polygon Motor
UN2

J9745

5
5

Laser Scanner Unit (2 Beams)

DC Controller PCB

GND
DDIP_RXD0
DDIP_TXD0

1297
GND
DDIP_BD
DDIP_ITOP
3 2 1

DDIP_INT_IMG
UN24
BD PCB

DDIP_IMG1L_SYS_RMT
J744

GND
+3.3V DCON DDIP_RST

4
4

BD DDIP_PCTS
GND DDIP_PPRDY
+3.3V DCON DDIP_PRTS
GND DDIP_PSTS
LSR PWM DDIP_PCMD
E-3

APC CTRL1 2 DDIP_POPRDY

From P.8

APC CTRL1 0 GND

APC CTRL1 1 DDIP_DCONLIVE
GND DDIP_SNS_PWR_ON
APC CTRL0 2 DDIP_DCON_TRIG1
APC CTRL0 0 DDIP_DCON_TRIG2
APC CTRL0 1 DDIP_INT_DCON(GND)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

POLY M FG DDIP_PDOWNLD
+24V DCON DDIP_PLIVEWAKE
J602

POLY M ACC GND

POLY M DEC DDIP_UART1_TX
GND DDIP_UART1_RX
272625242322212019181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021222324252627

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718

3
3

J324
J308

5 4 3 2 1

5 4 3 2 1

M11

UN23
Polygon Motor
UN14

J12D
Riser PCB

J745
J12DH

DETECT
Laser Driver PCB (4 Beams)
1
17

GND
2
16

DATA_C-
3
15

DATA_C+
4
14

GND
5
13

DATA_A-
6
12

DATA_A+
7
11

GND
8
10

DATA_B-
9
9

DATA_B+
8

10

GND
7

11

DATA_D-
2
2

12

DATA_D+
5

13

GND
4

14

GND
3

15

GND
2

16

DETECT
1

17

J601
J7201

Laser Scanner Unit (4 Beams)

1
1

A
B
E

C
D
General Circuit Diagram
 General Circuit Diagram

Host machine_8/18
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

SW1
Main Switch

J12
J11

B3

1
F F

1 2 3

2 1
A1

2
From P.1
B-7

FT2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011

2
NO NC
SW2 1 2 3 4
J10L
J10LH
To P.7
J7L

Front Door
COM Switch 4 3 2 1 J10D
E-4

FT1
1
J12L

SHUTOFF SW
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021222324252627

+24V_DCON

SEESAW IN
+24V_LOCK
E E

+5.0A IN

GND

N.C.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 272625242322212019181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J306 J305 J502 J7202 J4002 J4007

UN14
UN2 Riser PCB
DC Controller PCB

J4001
D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 D
J320 J338 J325
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 25242322212019181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J8F
ENV_HEATER_ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

DECK E P OUT SNS

OP2 PICKUP M CLK

N.C.

DECK E FEED SNS

OP2 4FEED M CLK
OP2 3FEED M CLK

DECK E CN MNT
B-1

OPC EX SEND
OPC EX LOAD

DECK KSB RX

DECK KSB TX
OPC DETECT

DECK RESET
OPC M1 CLK

OPC M2 CLK
OPC EX CLK

OPC READY
OP2 EX CLK

OPC RESET
OP2 READY

To P.1
OP2 RESET
OP2 SEND

+5V DCON
OP2 LOAD

+12V_DCON

6 5 4 3 2 1
GND
GND
N.C.

PWM

+24V_ACC
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
GND
MT10 +24V_ACC

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
2
3
4
5
GND

J119
_BUS_4
J746DA
_BUS_3
J746D
UN30
AC Driver PCB
C +24V_ACC C

4 3 2 1
A9 5
GND
+12V_DCON
J746DH
GND

J120
3 2 1
J1103
Deck

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415

UN3 J32

J33
J32H
Heater PCB

2 1
Option Cassette

B B
J31H
J31
1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J38
4 3 2 1
Option Cassette 2

A A

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1298
 General Circuit Diagram

Host machine_9/18
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F

Option Option 200V 100V Option Host Machine

E H5 H5 E
H7 H3 Reader Heater Reader Heater
Option Deck Drum Heater H6 H4

2
Heater

2
Option Cassette Heater
Cassette Heater

2
H8

H9

H2

H5
1

1
1
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2
J167 J6 J165 J166

1
J477

1
ET10
ET7
ET9 ET6

J476 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

J2099 J9911D J9912

3
2
1

1 2 3 4 5 ET5
D J475M
ET8 D
1 2 3 1 2 3
J86 J59
1 2 3 1 2 3

J92 J57
ET1

ET2

ET3

ET4

MT1

NEUTRAL

NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL

AC_IN_HOT

AC_IN_HOT
AC_IN_NET

AC_IN_NET
HOT

HOT
HOT
HOT

C 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C
J1107 J1104 J1105_2 J1105 J1106

UN3
Heater PCB

B B

A A

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1299
 General Circuit Diagram

Host machine_10/18
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F
Only for JP
From P.1
E-4
J804F

3 2 1

BL

BL
UN19 (J2)
J773 UN20
Modular PCB (2 to 4 lines) Modular PCB (1 line)

2 1
N.C

(J1) SP1
J775
(J4) J771 J751 FAX Speaker
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SP_OUT
E E

1 2
GND 2

4_LINE_L2
4_LINE_L1
3_LINE_L2
3_LINE_L1
2_LINE_L2
2_LINE_L1

CT2
CT1

N.C
N.C
T2
T1
L2
L1
N.C.
(J8) (J6)
J35 J36 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 3 2 1 2 1
J26 J30 J772 J733
MONI_USB

3 2 1

1 2 3

J3140D
(J2) (J2) GND (J7) (J3)
#FC_USB_IN

2 1
UN70

(J4)
G3 3rd/4th Line FAX PCB
UN18
D D
G3 2nd Line FAX PCB UN15
G3 FAX PCB

(J5)
(MiniUSB)

1 2 3 4
J742 N.C.
(J403)

J17
1 2 3

J24

N.C.
(J1)
1 2 3 4 5
(J2) 31302928272625242322212019181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SET_RST_FAX_N

#MODEM_SNS
#RESET_FAX
USBFAX_DN
USBFAX_DP

EXB_ADDR1

EXB_ADDR2

EXB_ADDR3

EXB_ADDR4

EXB_ADDR5

EXB_ADDR6

EXB_ADDR7

EXB_ADDR8

#FCID_USB
+3.3R_FAX

#EXB_CS1
#EXB_WE

#INT_FAX
#EXB_OE

#FOFFHK
EXB_DT0

EXB_DT1

EXB_DT2

EXB_DT3

EXB_DT4

EXB_DT5

EXB_DT6

EXB_DT7
+12S_UI_FAX

+12S_UI_FAX
C C

#FCID
+3.3R
GND

+5C_FAX

GND
GND

GND
GND

GND
GND

GND
N.C.

1 2 3 4 5

6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031
J708 J704 J701 (J4011)
(J4013) (J4012)

UN14
Riser PCB

B B

A A

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1300
 General Circuit Diagram

Host machine_11/18
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F

■ HDD STANDARD (STD) (X1) ■ REMOVABLE-HDD (STD)

J6003
J6003
GND

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GND

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TXPLUSA_H TXPLUSA_H

TXMINUSA_H TXMINUSA_H

GND GND
RXMINUSA_H
UN25 RXMINUSA_H
UN 67 UN25 RXPLUSA_H UN 67
RXPLUSA_H
Main GND
Main GND
Controller HDD1 Controller HDD1

J6004
J6004
PCB PCB N.C.

4 3 2 1

4 3 2 1
N.C.

4 3 2 1

4 3 2 1
GND GND

E GND GND
5.0C_HDD
E
5.0C_HDD

■ HDD MIRRORING ■ REMOVABLE-HDD MIRRORING

D D

J6003
GND
J6003

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GND
7 6 5 4 3 2 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TXPLUSA_H
TXPLUSA_H
TXMINUSA_H
TXMINUSA_H
GND
GND
RXMINUSA_H
RXMINUSA_H
RXPLUSA_H
RXPLUSA_H
GND
UN 67 GND UN 67
HDD1 HDD1

J6004
N.C.
J6004

4 3 2 1

4 3 2 1
N.C.
4 3 2 1

4 3 2 1

GND
GND
GND
GND
5.0C_HDD
5.0C_HDD
UN25
UN25 Main
Main Controller
C Controller PCB C

J8000
PCB GND

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J8000

GND TXPLUSB_H
7 6 5 4 3 2 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TXPLUSB_H TXMINUSB_H
TXMINUSB_H GND
GND RXMINUSB_H
RXMINUSB_H RXPLUSB_H UN 68
RXPLUSB_H
GND
UN 68 GND
HDD2

J8001
N.C.
HDD2

4 3 2 1

4 3 2 1
J8001

N.C. GND
4 3 2 1

4 3 2 1

GND GND
GND 5.0C_HDD
5.0C_HDD

B B

A A

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1301
 General Circuit Diagram

Host machine_12/18
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F

J15 VCC_FAN
UN25

3 2 1

1 2 3
GND 321
Main Controller PCB
E SNS_FAN_COM
E
FM12
Main Controller Cooling Fan

J6005
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051525354555657585960

D D

C C

B B

A A

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1302
 F

A
B
E

C
D

8
8

Option
Host machine_13/18

UN35

7
7

Voice Operation PCB

Option

+3.3C_SOC
GND
CN_DDI1_TXNO_C
CN_DDI1_TXPO_C
GND
CN_LCD_ON_N

6
6

CN_SET_ROM_LED

or
GND
CN_DDI1_AUXP
CN_DDI1_AUXN
+3.3A
GND
+12S IF_PVCLK

J1
J13

A1
A1
SET_ROM_LED_N GND

B1
B1

+12S IF_PHSYNC_K_N

A2
A2

+3.3A IF_PVD_13/15

B2
B2

GND IF_PVD_12/14

A3
A3

ACZ_SDATAIN0_1P5 IF_PVD_09/11

B3
B3

+3.3C IF_PVD_08/10

A4
A4

ACZ_SDATAOUT_1P5 IF_PVD_05/07

B4
B4

+3.3C IF_PVD_04/06

A5
A5

ACS_SYNC_1P5 IF_PVD_01/03

B5
B5

N.C. IF_PVD_00/02

A6
A6

ACS_RST_N_1P5 IF_DCON_B_DET_N

B6
B6

GND IF_PPOWER_N

5
5

A7
A7

ACS_BITCLK_1P5 IF_PPRTST_N

B7
B7

GND CN_DCON_SNS_INT1

A8
A8

+1.5C CN_DCON_SNS_INT2

B8
B8

GND CN_IA_COM_TXD1

UN36
A9
A9

B9 AUDIO_SW CN_IA_COM_RXD1
B9

GND +1.5S
A10
A10

N.C. CN_SET_VCC_ON_DC

Voice Guidance PCB

B10
B10

N.C. GND
A11
A11

N.C. DDIP_SERDES_PDN
B11
B11

N.C. CN_USB_BP2_N
A12
A12

AUDIO_TYPE GND

1303
B12
B12

GND DFRX-
A13
A13

AUDIO_MICDET DFRX+
B13
B13

GND GND
A14
A14

AUDIO_PHNDET SSTS+
B14
B14

AUDIO_VOLP SSTS-
A15
A15
UN25
UN47

AUDIO_VOLM SCMD+
B15
B15

SCMD-

4
4

CN_SCTS
Image Analysis PCB

Main Controller PCB

CN_SRTS
GND
CN_USB_BP1_N
CN_USB_OC_SOC_N
GND
CN_USB_DP3
CN_USB_DN3
GND
CN_USBWIFI_DP
J1

CN_USBWIFI_DN
GND
+5.0C_FAX
+5.0C_FAX
GND
CN_RMT_WLAN
N.C.
+3.3R_FAX
N.C.
3
3

CN_CS_FAX_N
CN_EXB_WE_N
CN_EXB_OE_N
GND
CN_ECO_SCL
CN_ECO_SDA
CN_SEESAW_IN
CN_RMT_CONT_C
CN_RMT_SYS
CN_RMT_CONT_S
CN_RMT_DCON
CN_RMT_RCON
CN_R_PW_MONITOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011 12131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051525354555657585960616263646566676869707172737475
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011 12131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051525354555657585960616263646566676869707172737475

J6001
J1700

2
2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940

1
1

A
B
E

C
D
General Circuit Diagram
 F

A
B
E

C
D

8
8
Host machine_14/18

J4000

CN_SIO_COM_RXD3

J7000
+3.3C_SOC

J4000
J7000
CN_SIO_COM_TXD3 GND
CN_HPD CN_DDI1_TXNO_C
CN_SOFTSW_N CN_DDI1_TXPO_C
UI_PANEL_INT GND
CN_SIO_COM_RXD4 CN_LCD_ON_N
CN_SIO_COM_TXD4

7
7

CN_SET_ROM_LED
CN_UI_NFC GND
CN_UI_SENS CN_DDI1_AUXP
CN_UI_PRDY CN_DDI1_AUXN
CN_RMT_UICPU +3.3A
GND GND
IF_PBD_K_N IF_PVCLK
IF_PVREQ_K_N GND
IF_PDOWNLD_N IF_PHSYNC_K_N
IF_PKIVEWAKE_N IF_PVD_13/15
IF_DDIP_RST_N IF_PVD_12/14
IF_PCPRDY_N IF_PVD_09/11
IF_INT_DCON_N IF_PVD_08/10
IF_PPI1 IF_PVD_05/07
IF_DCON_LIVE_N IF_PVD_04/06
IF_PPRDY_N IF_PVD_01/03
IF_PSCNST IF_PVD_00/02
IF_PRTS_N IF_DCON_B_DET_N
IF_PCTS_N IF_PPOWER_N

6
6

IF_PSTS IF_PPRTST_N
IF_PCMD CN_DCON_SNS_INT1
RESET1_N CN_DCON_SNS_INT2
IF_PPO3_N CN_IA_COM_TXD1
+3.3S CN_IA_COM_RXD1
+3.3S +1.5S
+3.3S CN_SET_VCC_ON_DC
N.C. GND
CN_IA_COM_TXD2 DDIP_SERDES_PDN
CN_IA_COM_RXD2 CN_USB_BP2_N
GND GND
N.C. DFRX-
N.C. DFRX+
+3.3R_RDINT_SNS GND
CN_SPRDY-S SSTS+
CN_RCON_SNS_INT_N SSTS-
CN_SPOWER SCMD+
CN_CPRDY-S SCMD-
UN25
UN14

CN_SLIVEWAKE

5
5

CN_SCTS
Riser PCB

CN_SDOWNLD CN_SRTS
CN_DFRX_FRQCHG GND
Main Controller PCB

GND CN_USB_BP1_N
CN_EXB_ADDR1 CN_USB_OC_SOC_N
CN_EXB_ADDR2 GND
CN_EXB_ADDR3 CN_USB_DP3
CN_EXB_ADDR4 CN_USB_DN3
CN_EXB_ADDR5 GND
CN_EXB_ADDR6 CN_USBWIFI_DP
CN_EXB_ADDR7 CN_USBWIFI_DN
CN_EXB_ADDR8

1304
GND
CN_EXB_DT0 +5.0C_FAX
CN_EXB_DT1 +5.0C_FAX
CN_EXB_DT2 GND
CN_EXB_DT3 CN_RMT_WLAN
CN_EXB_DT4 N.C.
CN_EXB_DT5 +3.3R_FAX
CN_EXB_DT6 N.C.

4
4

CN_EXB_DT7 CN_CS_FAX_N
CN_INT_FAX_N CN_EXB_WE_N
CN_MODEM_SNS_N CN_EXB_OE_N
RESET_FAXL1_N GND
CN_SET_RST_FAX_N CN_ECO_SCL
CN_FOFFHK_N CN_ECO_SDA
CN_FCID_N CN_SEESAW_IN
GND CN_RMT_CONT_C
GND CN_RMT_SYS
N.C. CN_RMT_CONT_S
+5S CN_RMT_DCON
+5S CN_RMT_RCON
+5S CN_R_PW_MONITOR
+5S CN_SHUTOFF_SW
FAN_ON_HDD CN_ADDON_FAN_FULL
SNS_FAN_HDD CN_ADDON_FAN_HALF
GND CN_ADDON_FAN_LOCK
CNCK_IN GND
81 82 83 84 85 86 87 8889 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100101102103104105106107108109110111112113114115116117118119120121122123124125126127128129130131132133134135136137138139140141142143144145146147148149150151152153154155156157158159160
81 82 83 84 85 86 87 8889 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100101102103104105106107108109110111 112113114115116117118119120121122123124125126127128129130131132133134135136137138139140141142143144145146147148149150151152153154155156157158159160
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011 121314151617181920212223242526272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950515253545556575859606162636465666768697071727374757677787980
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011 121314151617181920212223242526272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950515253545556575859606162636465666768697071727374757677787980

3
3

2
2

1
1

A
B
E

C
D
General Circuit Diagram
 General Circuit Diagram

Host machine_15/18
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F

UN4 UN71
Reader Controller PCB Wireless LAN PCB

J784
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
USB
J781 J782
1 2 3 4 5

USB_CARD_DN
E E

USB_USER_DN

USB_CARD_DP

CN_USBWIFI_DN
USB_USER_DP

CN_USBWIFI_DP
+5A_WIFI or +5S
RCON_SNS_INT_N
+3.3R_RDINT_SNS

+5S_USB2

+5S_USB1
DFRX_FRQCHG
SLIVEWAKE
SDOWNLD

GND

GND
SPOWER
CPRDY-S
SPRDY-S

GND
GND
SCMD+
DXRX+

SCMD-
SSTS+
DFRX-

SSTS-
SCTS

SRTS
GND

GND
GND
J4023 (Lower) 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 J4023 (Upper) 1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819
USB
J4031 HDMI (J4202)
J780

UN14
Riser PCB
D D

C UN25 C
Main Controller PCB

J20 J21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SlO COM TXD2
SlO COM TXD2
COIN B PRDY
COIN B PRDY
COIN B PRDY
COIN B PRDY

CC-Vl COUNT
CC-Vl CPENB
CC-Vl CL/BW
CC-Vl L/S
CC-Vl OP
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
+5V

+5V
B B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Serial Interface Kit Copy Card Reader Copy Control Interface Kit I/F

A A

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1305
 General Circuit Diagram

Host machine_16/18
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

UN72
F NFC PCB F
Control Panel
Speaker
J1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

2
J9

LED_NFC_G
LED_NFC_R
SPI_MISO
SPI_MOSI
SPI_SCK
SPI_PCS

NFC_INT
+3.3NFC

GND

GND

SPM
SPP
N.C.
J8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3

E J1009 J1005 J1022 E

Foot Switch

J5 J11
SKEY0

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SKEY1
SKEY2
SKEY3
SKEY4
J1001 J1
SKEY5
SKEY6
SKEY7
GND

J1024
D D
UN13 UN8
J202

J7 J6
Key Top PCB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011
Control Panel CPU PCB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
DKEY0

121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GND
6 5 4 3 2 1

DKEY1
+3.3VR DKEY2
UN77 USCLK1 DKEY5
Motion Sensor PCB J1 CLK_DRV_EN_M DKEY7
GND SOFT_SW_N
DETECT 1 POWER_ES_LED J2
J1002
GND LED_TA_G
+5A LED_ST_G
GND LED_TA_R
POWER_LED
GND

C C
J76

UN73
Device Port LED PCB
3 2 1

J1

J1020 J1021
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819 1 2 3 4 5
B

HPDR_LCD_ON
SET_ROM_LED

*DDI1_AUXN_S
DDI1_AUXP_S

INTOUT_HMD
INTOUT_NFC
*DDI1_TXNO

NFC_RXD_N
NFC_TXD_N
DDI1_TXPO

SOFTSW_N
UI_RXD_N
UI_TXD_N

FCT_MOD
CPU_RDY
LCD_ON

+12S
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
+5A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819 1 2 3 4 5

J4021 J4022

UN14
Riser PCB
A A

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1306
 General Circuit Diagram

Host machine_17/18
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F

+3.3LCD

302928272625242322212019181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

302928272625242322212019181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
+3.3LCD
+3.3LCD
+3.3LCD
N.C.
GND
E GND E
*LVDSA_N
LVDSA_P
GND
*LVDSB_N
LVDSB_P
GND
*LVDSC_N
J1008
LVDSC_P

UN13 GND UN7

*LVDSCLK_N
Control Panel CPU PCB LVDSCLK_P
LCD PCB
GND
+3.3LCD or GND
GND
GND
GND
D GND D
PWMO
BKLTEN_BLON_MASK
+12S
+12S
+12S
+12S

J1007
1 2 3 4

C C
YN
XN
XP
YP

1 2 3 4

B B

UN11
Touch Panel PCB

A A

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1307
 General Circuit Diagram

Host machine_18/18
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F

M14 S14 S15 S12 S11 S13

Original Size Original Size Copyboard Cover CCD Unit Copyboard Cover
Reader Motor
Sensor 2 Sensor 1 Open/Closed Sensor 1 HP Sensor Open/Closed Sensor 2

M
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1

J5015 J5004 J5005 J5001 J5002 J5003

E E

DF_OPEN_30
FEED_M_AN

FEED_M_BN

DF_OPEN_5
SIZE_INCH
FEED_M_A
FEED_M_B

SIZE_ON

SIZE_ON
SIZE_AB

+3.3V_

+3.3V_
GND

GND

GND
GND

GND
D D

+5V
HP
4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J2108 J2107 J2102

C UN4 C
Reader Controller PCB

B B

A A

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1308
 General Circuit Diagram

Single pass ADF

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

SL1 UN_BO4
Stamp Solenoid PS_A2 1
Original Display LED
SL Delivery PS_N1 1 1

PS_A4 PS_A3 PS_R3 1 1 2

2 J466L Tray Sensor Original Sensor PS_A1 PS_R1 1
2 2

UN_SNS1 AB/ Inch LTR-R/ LGL Large/Small J466DH

3 3
M STM2
UN_BO5
2 1 SEPA_M_A+
1 2
Arch Post-separation 1 4 4

F PS_A6 Original Sensor Sensor Sensor

Delivery Display
2 2 1 1 J466D 3 2 1
3 2 1 Sensor Sensor 2

3
SEPA_M_A-
SEPA_M_B+
5 5 Pickup Motor F
Lead Width Volume 3 3 2 1
1 3 3 2 1
1 6 6

1 3
S P LED 1 2 J478L S P J464L 4 SEPA_M_B- J471 6
Sensor 1 1 2
J478LH J461 J460 J404 RESI_M_A+
3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 2 2 1 1 5

2
RESI_M_A-
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 3 3 2 1
1 2 2 1
1 J478D 6
1
3 2 1 J468L 3 1 3 2 1
J2001L 3 3 2 1
1 3 3 2 1
1 2 2 1
1 7 RESI_M_B+
1
3 2 1
3 1 3 J457 J458 J701 1 3 J464D RESI_M_B- 1 1
1 2 3
J468DH 1 2 3
J2001LH J474 J451 8
2 2
J478 3 3 2 1
1 8
J465L 3 3 2 1
1 J2001D FAN_A1 3 3
M STM1
J468D 3 1 CL1 Cooling Fan
4 4
Registration Motor
1 J453D J475L
3 2 1
3 5 5
1 Separation Clutch
3 2 1
J453LH 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 5 J475LH 6 6
1 3 J453L
1 2 3

J465D CL J472 6
5 5 4 3 2 1
1 J475D 1 2 3
1 2
1
1 J477L 1
PS_A5 PS_A7 15 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 J467L
1 READ_M_A+
1

2
1

2
Cover Open/ Lead 1 J467DH READ_M_A-
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
15 J477DH 2 2 1
J405
2 3 3
M STM3

SLEEP-POWER
Sensor 2 READ_M_B+

EJCT_TRAY_S
E Closed Sensor J467D 3 4 4
E

FAN_ALARM
J477D 4 READ_M_B- 5 5
Read Motor

STMP_SOL
EMP LED

EMP_LED
LGL_S2

LOOP_S
A4LT_S
4

+3.3VS
6 6

SEPA_S
LGL_S

EMP_S
MV_CL
1 2 3 1 2 3

+5VR

+5VR

+5VR
+5VR
J473 6

GND

GND

GND

GND

+5VR

+5VR

+5VR

+24V
+24V

GND
+5VR
GND

GND

GND

GND
+24V
1 3
1 2 3
1 3

VR
1 2 3

NC
J459 J454
15 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 19 1 1 2 3 3
3
J410 J407 J409

3
GND
J402
UN_BO1

2
+24U

1
J408 ADF Driver PCB J401 1
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
29
50

MOVE_HP_S
COVER_S

2READ_S

J401_BUS
READ_S

SIZE1_S
SIZE2_S
SIZE3_S
SIZE4_S
US_PLS
US_PLS

RESI_S
+3.3V
+5VR

+5VR

+5VR

+5VR

+5VR

+5VR
+24U
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
GND

GND

GND
SDA
SCL

UN_BO3
LED PCB

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
(ADF)
D J1 J2 D

S_DF_READ_MTR_CLK

S_DF_SEPA_MTR_CLK

S_DF_RESI_MTR_CLK
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
5 1 5 1

S_ADF_RESET
GLASS_HP_S

FFC_JACKAL
SLEEP-OUT
S_READ_S

S_SEPA_S

S_EXCL_0
S_RESI_S

SDA_ADF
2READ_S

SCL_ADF

S_S2M_0

S_M2S_0
LOOP_S
+3.4V

+3.4J
GND

GND

GND

GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
GND
GND

GND
GND
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
GND

GND
GND

GND

GND

GND
AD0

+5V
+5V
J462

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3 3 2 1 1

DC_OUT_R
DC_OUT_L
I_OUT_R4
I_OUT_R3
I_OUT_R2
I_OUT_R1
I_OUT_L4
I_OUT_L3
I_OUT_L2
I_OUT_L1
3 2 1
J104_BUS

N.C
N.C
N.C
PS_A9 13 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1
Glass Movement J401
HP Sensor UN_BO2
C J476L J101 CMOS PCB(ADF) C
13 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 50
J1101_BUS
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

J476LH
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
AP_LOAD_11
AP_LOAD_01
BD_SCLK_1
RCLK_A_N
RCLK_A_P

BC_RX_11

BC_RX_01
J476D
FFC_ADF

BD_TX_1
RD_A_N

RC_A_N
RE_A_N

RD_A_P

RC_A_P

RB_A_N

RA_A_N
RE_A_P

RB_A_P

RA_A_P

+3.4V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
GND
GND
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

GND
GND
GND

GND
+6V
+6V
+6V
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

J1027L J105_BUS
50 50
J1027DH J452 1 1 2 2
3 1 J105 J103 J104
3 2 1
B 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 3 2 1 B
S P Reader Controlle PCB
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 6
J1027D
PS_R2 J109
Registration 19
Sensor J109_BUS
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10

5 5 4 3 2 1 1 3 3 2 1 1 6 6 5 4 3 2 1
1
J634 J635 J463
UN_BO8 UN_BO7 UN_BO6
SLIVEWAKE*

SLEEP-OUT
SDOWNLD*

Double Feed Double Feed

CPRDY-S

Paper
SPOWER
FRQCHG

Detection
SPRDY*

SCMD+

Detection
DFRX+
SCMD-

SSTS+

Width Sensor
DFRX-
SSTS-
SRTS

SCTS

PCB (Transmission)
+3.4J
GND
GND

GND

PCB (Reception)
MT2 MT6 MT8 MT3
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

A A
19

MT7 MT4 To PRINTER

MT1 MT5

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1309
 General Circuit Diagram

Reversal ADF
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CL1 CL2 SL1 SL2 M1 M2

Pickup clutch Registration clutch Release solenoid Stamp solenoid Pickup motor Read motor
M M
1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
J105 J109 MT2 1 1 MT10 MT12
F 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 CL CL SL SL 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
F
2 2 2 2 J101 J201
J412 J212 J203
1 2 1 2 2 1
2 1 J312H 2 1 J112H 1 2 J103H
J312 J112 J103

EMPTY SENS

RD MOT CLK
RK MOT CLK

KY MOT CLK
READ SENS
EXIT SENS

STAMP ON
E E

REG SENS

SENS 3.3V

RIKAN ON
RIKAN SL

PICK ON

REG ON
REG CL

RESET
SCLK

+24U

+24U

+24U

+24U
+24V
GND

GND

GND

GND
3.3U
+5V

RX
TX
MT9 MT11

*B

*A
*B

*A
B
A

B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J5 J9 MT1 J12 J6 J3 J1
n

PCB1
ADF driver PCB
D D

J4 J2
J10 J1 3
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1

DIFWIDE SEN 4
DIFWIDE SEN 3
DIFWIDE SEN 2
DIFWIDE SEN 1
EJECT LED ON

SIZE W3 SENS
SIZE W2 SENS
SIZE W1 SENS
EJECT LED V5

SIZE L2 SENS
SIZE L1 SENS

COVER SENS
MT 7 MT5

EMPTY SENS
SET LED ON

READ SENS
SET LED V5

EXIT SENS

REG SENS

SENS 3.3V
SENS 5V

SENS 5V

SENS 5V

SENS 5V
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
+5V

+5V
C C

PCB 5
Document
delivery
LED PCB J304 J20 4 J104 J202 J102
1 2 3 MT3 J113
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MT8 MT6 J113H 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
J310 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J213
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B J110 SR3 SR2 SR1 SR6 SR5 B

PCB 4 Delivery reversal Read sensor Registration Cover open/closed Document set
J210
6 5 4 3 2 1
Document width sensor sensor sensor sensor
sensor PCB
SIZE L2 SENS

SIZE L1 SENS

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3

J413 J313
SENS 5V

PCB 3
Different width PCB 2
GND

GND
+5V

sensor PCB Document set LED PCB

MT4

A J510 1 2 3 J410 1 2 3
A
1 2 3 1 2 3

SR7 SR8
Document length sensor 1 Document length sensor 2

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.1

1310
 Soft counter specifications

Soft counter specifications

The numbers entered for software counters are classified as follows:

No. Counter Details

000 to 099 Remote Copy, Toner Cartridge
100 to 199 Total
200 to 299 Copy
300 to 399 Print
400 to 499 Copy + Print, Total ( long length)
500 to 599 Scan
600 to 699 Box print, Memory Media Print
700 to 799 Advanced Box Print, Network Print, Mobile Print, Receive Print
800 to 899 Report Print
900 to 999 Transmit scan, Box Scan, Job Scan, Memory Media Scan, Remote Scan

< Meanings of symbols in tables >

• Bk: Single black color
• Large: Paper larger than B4 size.
• Small: Paper equal to or smaller than B4.

CAUTION:
When printing in the free size setting, it is counted in the large.

• The number 1 and 2 in "Counter item": The count for large size paper.
It can be changed by the service mode so that the paper larger than B4 size can be counted as large size paper.
0: Small (default)
1: Large
• Copy: Local copy + Remote Copy
• Copy A: Local copy + Remote Copy + Box Print
• Total A: Total excluding local copy + Remote Copy
• Total B: Total excluding local copy + Remote Copy + Mail Box print
• Print: PDL print + Report print + Box Print
• Print A: PDL print + Report print
• Scan: Black and white scan + color scan

Related Service Mode

COPIER > OPTION > USER > B4-L-CNT

000 to 099

Counter item
No.
UI Display Remarks
006 Remote Copy (Black & White 1) -
007 Remote Copy (Black & White 2) -
012 Remote Copy (Black & White/Large) -
013 Remote Copy (Black & White/Small) -
022 Remote Copy (Black & White/Large/2-Sided) -
023 Remote Copy (Black & White/Small/2-Sided) -
The number of premature replacements of the Toner Contain-
064 Toner Cartridge Replacement (Black)
er (Black)
071 Toner Cartridge Replacement (Black) The number of installations of a new Toner Container (Black)

1311
 Soft counter specifications

100 to 199

Counter item
No.
UI Display Remarks
101 Total 1 -
102 Total 2 -
103 Total (Large) -
104 Total (Small) -
108 Total (Black & White 1) -
109 Total (Black & White 2) -
112 Total (Black & White/Large) -
113 Total (Black & White/Small) -
114 Total 1 (2-Sided) -
115 Total 2 (2-Sided) -
116 Large (2-Sided) -
117 Small (2-Sided) -
126 Total A1 -
127 Total A2 -
128 Total A (Large) -
129 Total A (Small) -
132 Total A (Black & White 1) -
133 Total A (Black & White 2) -
136 Total A (Black & White/Large) -
137 Total A (Black & White/Small) -
138 Total A1 (2-Sided) -
139 Total A2 (2-Sided) -
140 Large A (2-Sided) -
141 Small A (2-Sided) -
150 Total B1 -
151 Total B2 -
152 Total B (Large) -
153 Total B (Small) -
156 Total B (Black & White 1) -
157 Total B (Black & White 2) -
160 Total B (Black & White/Large) -
161 Total B (Black & White/Small) -
162 Total B1 (2-Sided) -
163 Total B2 (2-Sided) -
164 Large B (2-Sided) -
165 Small B (2-Sided) -
181 Toner Cartridge Replacement (Black) BlackToner (Counter for unidentified toner bottle)

200 to 299

Counter item
No.
UI Display Remarks
201 Copy (Total 1) -
202 Copy (Total 2) -
203 Copy (Large) -
204 Copy (Small) -
205 Copy A (Total 1) -
206 Copy A (Total 2) -
207 Copy A (Large) -
208 Copy A (Small) -
209 Local Copy (Total 1) -
210 Local Copy (Total 2) -

1312
 Soft counter specifications

Counter item
No.
UI Display Remarks
211 Local Copy (Large) -
212 Local Copy (Small) -
213 Remote Copy (Total 1) -
214 Remote Copy (Total 2) -
215 Remote Copy (Large) -
216 Remote Copy (Small) -
221 Copy (Black & White 1) -
222 Copy (Black & White 2) -
227 Copy (Black & White/Large) -
228 Copy (Black & White/Small) -
237 Copy (Black & White/Large/2-Sided) -
238 Copy (Black & White/Small/2-Sided) -
249 Copy A (Black & White 1) -
250 Copy A (Black & White 2) -
255 Copy A (Black & White/Large) -
256 Copy A (Black & White/Small) -
265 Copy A (Black & White/Large/2-Sided) -
266 Copy A (Black & White/Small/2-Sided) -
277 Local Copy (Black & White 1) -
278 Local Copy (Black & White 2) -
283 Local Copy (Black & White/Large) -
284 Local Copy (Black & White/Small) -
293 Local Copy (Black & White/Large/2-Sided) -
294 Local Copy (Black & White/Small/2-Sided) -

300 to 399

Counter item
No.
UI Display Remarks
301 Print (Total 1) -
302 Print (Total 2) -
303 Print (Large) -
304 Print (Small) -
305 Print A (Total 1) -
306 Print A (Total 2) -
307 Print A (Large) -
308 Print A (Small) -
313 Print (Black & White 1) -
314 Print (Black & White 2) -
319 Print (Black & White/Large) -
320 Print (Black & White/Small) -
329 Print (Black & White/Large/2-Sided) -
330 Print (Black & White/Small/2-Sided) -
331 Printer Driver Print (Total 1) -
332 Printer Driver Print (Total 2) -
333 Printer Driver Print (Large) -
334 Printer Driver Print (Small) -
339 Printer Driver Print (Black & White 1) -
340 Printer Driver Print (Black & White 2) -
345 Printer Driver Print (Black & White/Large) -
346 Printer Driver Print (Black & White/Small) -
355 Printer Driver Print (Black & White/Large/2-Sided) -
356 Printer Driver Print (Black & White/Small/2-Sided) -

1313
 Soft counter specifications

400 to 499

Counter item
No.
UI Display Remarks
403 Copy + Print (Black & White/Large) -
404 Copy + Print (Black & White/Small) -
405 Copy + Print (Black & White 2) -
406 Copy + Print (Black & White 1) -
411 Copy + Print (Large) -
412 Copy + Print (Small) -
413 Copy + Print (2) -
414 Copy + Print (1) -
421 Copy + Print (Black & White/Large/2-Sided) -
422 Copy + Print (Black & White/Small/2-Sided) -
471 Total (Long Sheet) Long original counter (Total)
473 Total (Black & White/Long Sheet) Long original counter (Black)

500 to 599

Counter item
No.
UI Display Remarks
501 Scan (Total 1) -
502 Scan (Total 2) -
503 Scan (Large) -
504 Scan (Small) -
505 Black & White Scan (Total 1) -
506 Black & White Scan (Total 2) -
507 Black & White Scan (Large) -
508 Black & White Scan (Small) -
509 Color Scan (Total 1) -
510 Color Scan (Total 2) -
511 Color Scan (Large) -
512 Color Scan (Small) -

600 to 699

Counter item
No.
UI Display Remarks
601 Mail Box Print (Total 1) -
602 Mail Box Print (Total 2) -
603 Mail Box Print (Large) -
604 Mail Box Print (Small) -
609 Mail Box Print (Black & White 1) -
610 Mail Box Print (Black & White 2) -
615 Mail Box Print (Black & White/Large) -
616 Mail Box Print (Black & White/Small) -
625 Mail Box Print (Black & White/Large/2-Sided) -
626 Mail Box Print (Black & White/Small/2-Sided) -
631 Memory Media Print (Total 1) -
632 Memory Media Print (Total 2) -
633 Memory Media Print (Large) -
634 Memory Media Print (Small) -
639 Memory Media Print (Black & White 1) -
640 Memory Media Print (Black & White 2) -
645 Memory Media Print (Black & White/Large) -
646 Memory Media Print (Black & White/Small) -

1314
 Soft counter specifications

Counter item
No.
UI Display Remarks
655 Memory Media Print (Black & White/Large/2-Sided) -
656 Memory Media Print (Black & White/Small/2-Sided) -

700 to 799

Counter item
No.
UI Display Remarks
701 Receive Print (Total 1) -
702 Receive Print (Total 2) -
703 Receive Print (Large) -
704 Receive Print (Small) -
709 Receive Print (Black & White 1) -
710 Receive Print (Black & White 2) -
715 Receive Print (Black & White/Large) -
716 Receive Print (Black & White/Small) -
725 Receive Print (Black & White/Large/2-Sided) -
726 Receive Print (Black & White/Small/2-Sided) -
727 Advanced Box Print (Total 1) -
728 Advanced Box Print (Total 2) -
729 Advanced Box Print (Large) -
730 Advanced Box Print (Small) -
733 Advanced Box Print (Black & White 1) -
734 Advanced Box Print (Black & White 2) -
737 Advanced Box Print (Black & White/Large) -
738 Advanced Box Print (Black & White/Small) -
741 Advanced Box Print (Black & White/Large/2-Sided) -
742 Advanced Box Print (Black & White/Small/2-Sided) -
743 Network Print (Total 1) Advanced Box print-Remote (Total1)
744 Network Print (Total 2) Advanced Box print-Remote (Total2)
745 Network Print (Large) Advanced Box print-Remote (Large)
746 Network Print (Small) Advanced Box print-Remote (Small)
749 Network Print (Black & White 1) Advanced Box print-Remote (Black1)
750 Network Print (Black & White 2) Advanced Box print-Remote (Black2)
753 Network Print (Black & White/Large) Advanced Box print-Remote (Black/Large)
754 Network Print (Black & White/Small) Advanced Box print-Remote (Black/Small)
757 Network Print (Black & White/Large/2-Sided) Advanced Box print-Remote (Black/Large/2-sided)
758 Network Print (Black & White/Small/2-Sided) Advanced Box print-Remote (Black/Small/2-sided)
759 Mobile Print (Total 1) -
760 Mobile Print (Total 2) -
761 Mobile Print (Large) -
762 Mobile Print (Small) -
765 Mobile Print (Black & White 1) -
766 Mobile Print (Black & White 2) -
769 Mobile Print (Black & White/Large) -
770 Mobile Print (Black & White/Small) -
773 Mobile Print (Black & White/Large/2-Sided) -
774 Mobile Print (Black & White/Small/2-Sided) -

800 to 899

Counter item
No.
UI Display Remarks
801 Report Print (Total 1) -
802 Report Print (Total 2) -

1315
 Soft counter specifications

Counter item
No.
UI Display Remarks
803 Report Print (Large) -
804 Report Print (Small) -
809 Report Print (Black & White 1) -
810 Report Print (Black & White 2) -
815 Report Print (Black & White/Large) -
816 Report Print (Black & White/Small) -
825 Report Print (Black & White/Large/2-Sided) -
826 Report Print (Black & White/Small/2-Sided) -

900 to 999

Counter item
No.
UI Display Remarks
915 TX Scan Total 2 (Color) -
916 TX Scan Total 2 (Black & White) -
917 TX Scan Total 3 (Color) -
918 TX Scan Total 3 (Black & White) -
921 TX Scan Total 5 (Color) -
922 TX Scan Total 5 (Black & White) -
929 TX Scan Total 6 (Color) -
930 TX Scan Total 6 (Black & White) -
937 Mail Box Scan (Color) -
938 Mail Box Scan (Black & White) -
939 Remote Scan (Color) -
940 Remote Scan (Black & White) -
945 TX Scan/E-Mail (Color) -
946 TX Scan/E-Mail (Black & White) -
959 Memory Media Scan (Color) -
960 Memory Media Scan (Black & White) -
961 Job Scan (Total 1) Application scan (Total 1)
962 Black & White Job Scan (Total 1) Application black scan (Total 1)
963 Color Job Scan (Total 1) Application color scan (Total 1)
964 Advanced Box Scan (Color) Advanced Box Scan-Local Scan (Color )
965 Advanced Box Scan (Black & White) Advanced Box Scan-Local Scan (Black & White )

1316
 Removal

Removal

Overview
• User data kept by the machine contains address books and inbox documents that users can recognize.
• For security, the Settings/Registration menu for user is provided to delete data on FLASH PCB and perform overwrite deletion
to render user data on Storage unrecoverable.
• Before the removal of machine, be sure to explain to the user that the above mode must be used to completely delete data.
When performing the user operation as the substitute, make sure that the service staff executes this to prevent the information
leak of user data.

■ Cancelling the Device Registration

If Data Backup Service is used, it is required to perform the following steps in the order.

1. Stop using the Data Backup Service. (Operation on CBIO side)

2. Delete all the backup data. (Operation on CBIO side)

3. Cancel the device registration. (Operation on the device side)

NOTE:
For the above-mentioned procedure, see the User's Guide for Data Backup Service or the Service Manual for the imageRUNNER
ADVANCE system.
If the User's Guide is not available, see the technical documents published by each sales company.

CAUTION:
Be sure to cancel the device registration before deleting the user, because the device registration cannot be cancelled after
deleting the user data.

■ User data deletion

• To delete user data, execute Settings/Registration > Management Settings > System Management > Initialize All Data/
Settings. Performing Initialize All Data/Settings returns setting values of Settings/Registration menu to their factory defaults.
• Deletion Mode can be changed. Normally, "Once with 0 (Null) Data" can sufficiently delete data. Note that increasing the
number of overwrite increases the time required for the deletion operation.

NOTE:
• When you perform Initialize All Data/Settings, license and data of MEAP application are initialized to the state same as when
the HDD is replaced. If any MEAP application may be used by other users after the machine is removed, disable the MEAP
application and uninstall it in advance.
• Performing Initialize All Data/Settings does not delete the license of the system option.

■ Deletion of Service Mode Settings

The user mode setting values may have been changed at the user's request. In that case, the service mode setting values should
be changed back to the default values before removing the machine.

Work Procedure
If the user uses MEAP applications, ask the user to uninstall the MEAP applications if necessary.

■ User data delete procedure

1. Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Initialize All Data/Settings
2. Select a deletion mode.

1317
 Removal

3. Press [Start].
If the user has not given any instruction on which item in the deletion mode should be used, select the default "Once with 0
(Null) Data".

NOTE:
• When all the data are initialized, the user data on the HDD and the user data on the Flash PCB are deleted. For the items to
be deleted, refer to the backup list.
• Performing "Initialize All Data" turns auto gradation adjustment values and TPM settings to OFF. Therefore, to enable normal
operation the next time, the operation performed at installation is necessary.
• Performing Initialize All Data/Settings does not delete the license of the system option.

Report output upon completion of Initialize All Data/Settings

A report is output after "Initialize All Data/Settings" is completed.
Consider using this report to provide to user as a material to inform of work details when executing Initialize All Data/Settings upon
user's request.

Operation after Initialize All Data/Settings

The machine is started normally at restart after Initialize All Data/Settings without displaying the message (Turn OFF the main
power supply on the right side of the machine) on the screen to prompt shutdown.
The report is output after startup.

******************************
*** System Information ***
******************************

<< Initialize All Data/Settings Report >>

Serial Number ZZZ99999

Device Name iR-ADV XXXX (iAXXXX)

Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode Once with Random Data (*1)

The following data stored in the device has been completely erased.

- Data stored in the temporary data area

- User generated data
- Settings under Settings/Registration (restored to factory defaults)

1318
 Removal

*1 display following one.

"Once with 0 (Null) Data"
"Once with Random Data"
"3 Times with Random Data"
"9 Times with Random Data"
"DoD Standard"

Limitations
• The language of the report is only English, and cannot be changed.
• The report is output without fail (a function to select ON/OFF of report output is not provided).
• There is no second output of report when the machine is turned ON without paper.
• Only the output of this report remains in the job log.

■ Deletion of Service Mode Setting Values

Service Mode Lev1 > Function> CLEAR > MN-CONT

NOTE:
• When MN-CON clear is executed, the address book on the HDD is not deleted. As for the user data, initialize all the data.
• When MN-CON clear is executed, the password for the security policies will be deleted.

1319
 Target PCBs of Automatic Update

Target PCBs of Automatic Update

The following PCBs are mentioned in the System Service Manual as PCBs supported by the automatic update function.

List of Target PCBs of Automatic Update

Category Target PCB Service mode*

Printer engine DC Controller PCB DC-CON
Reader/ADF Reader Controller PCB R-CON
Inner Finisher Finisher Controller PCB SORTER
Inner Puncher Puncher Controller PCB PUNCH
Buffer Path Unit Buffer Path Controller PCB BF-PASS
Staple/Booklet Finish- Finisher Controller PCB SORTER
er SORT-SLV
Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB SDL-STCH
Puncher Puncher Controller PCB PUNCH

*:
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

1320
 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

The following items are restored when a DCM file obtained by using [Settings/Registration] > [Back Up/Restore] or [Backup/
Restoration Using Service Mode] is exported.

Purpose for Using the Function

Case Export/ Import Use Case

A Export from and import to the same device • Used as backup in preparation for a device failure
• Used as backup before changing settings
B Export from and import to a different device of • Collectively migrate data when replacing the host machine
the same model • Copy the settings to multiple devices (during kitting)
C Export from and import to a different model • Migrate the settings from the old model to the new model when replacing
the host machine
• Migrate the settings of the base machine to a different model for a
large-scale user

NOTE:
For the details of the function, refer to "Backup/Restoration" of the System Service Manual.

List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

Intermediate
Initial screen Main item Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-X Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-S Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-Y-DF Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY STRD-POS Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-X-MG Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJY-DF2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST AE AE-TBL Restored Restored -
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-T Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-L Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-R Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-B Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD W-PLT-X Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD W-PLT-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD W-PLT-Z Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD SH-TRGT Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD 100-RG Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD 100-GB Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR-R Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR-G Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR-B Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M4 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M5 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M6 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M7 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M8 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M9 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S2 Restored - -

1321
 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

Intermediate
Initial screen Main item Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S4 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S5 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S6 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S7 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S8 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S9 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD 100DF2GB Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD 100DF2RG Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2R2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2R10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2B2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2B10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2G2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2G10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M4 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M5 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M6 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M7 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M8 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M9 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S4 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S5 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S6 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S7 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S8 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S9 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-R2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-R10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-B2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-B10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-G2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-G10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M11 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M12 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S11 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S12 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M11 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M12 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S11 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S12 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2K2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2K10 Restored - -

1322
 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

Intermediate
Initial screen Main item Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-K2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-K10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR-BW Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK-G Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK-B Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK-R Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK-BW Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MF-A4R Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MF-A6R Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MF-A4 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS DENS-ADJ Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP DE-OFST Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REGIST Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LOOP-CST Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LOOP-MF Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-REFE Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LOOPREFE Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ RG-HF-SP Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-RE-L Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LOOP-THK Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LOOP-SP Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LOOP-ENV Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-PTMG Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FIXING FX-FL-SP Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FIXING FX-FL-LW Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FIXING FN-MV-SW Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FIXING ADJ-FNSH Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFST1-DC Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFST1-AC Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFST Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-TP-TM Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-TP-LV Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFT1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFT2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFT3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFT4 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFT5 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFT6 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFT7 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFT8 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFT9 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP4 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP5 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP6 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP7 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP8 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP9 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP11 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP12 Restored - -

1323
 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

Intermediate
Initial screen Main item Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP13 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP14 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP15 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP16 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP17 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFP18 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFH1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFH2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFH3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFH4 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFH5 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFO1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFO2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFO3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-OFO4 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST LASER PVE-OFST Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST LASER LA-OFF Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST LASER LDADJ1-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST LASER LDADJ2-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST LASER LDADJ3-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST LASER LDADJ4-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST LASER LDADJ5-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST LASER LDADJ6-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC SEG-ADJ Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC K-ADJ Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-ADJ Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-EN Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-CNT Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC C1-ADJ-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC C2-ADJ-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC C3-ADJ-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC C4-ADJ-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC MF-ADJ-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC DK-ADJ-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-EN2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-CNT2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC SEG-ADJ3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC K-ADJ3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-ADJ3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-EN3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-CNT3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST-P-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST-P-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST-P-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST-P-K Restored - -
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL E-RDS Restored Restored Restored
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL RGW-PORT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL RGW-ADR Restored Restored Restored
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CDS-CTL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL BIT-SVC Restored Restored Restored
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL NFC-USE Restored - -
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL BLE-USE Restored - -
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL FAX-USE Restored Restored Restored

1324
 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

Intermediate
Initial screen Main item Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
COPIER OPTION ACC COIN Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC DK-P Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC CARD-SW Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC CC-SPSW Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC UNIT-PRC Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC IN-TRAY Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC MIN-PRC Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC MAX-PRC Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC MIC-TUN Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC SRL-SPSW Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC PDL-THR Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC CR-TYPE Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION ACC MEAP-SRL Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION ACC HCC-P Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION ACC CV-CSZ Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION ACC COIN-AUT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW MODEL-SZ Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FIX-CLN Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FIX-TEMP Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-SPD CPMKP-SW Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-TR HUM-SW Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SCANSLCT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON PASCAL Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TEMP-CON Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TEMPCON2 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SENS-CNF Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CONFIG Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK RAW-DATA Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON SHARP Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK IFAX-LIM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW W/SCNR Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW FAN-EXTN Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK SMTPTXPN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK SMTPRXPN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK POP3PN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-LGL Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-LTR Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-LTRR Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-LDR Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-B5 Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-COPY Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-BOX Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-SEND Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-FAX Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK FTPTXPN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW NWERR-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW MODELSZ2 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-RDR DFDST-L1 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-RDR DFDST-L2 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS-CMD5 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS-GSAPI Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS-NTLM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS-PLNWS Restored Restored Restored

1325
 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

Intermediate
Initial screen Main item Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS-PLN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS-LGN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK MEAP-PN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SVMD-ENT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION ENV-SET ENVP-INT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK MEAP-SSL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM SC-L-CNT Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FX-S-TMP Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW KSIZE-SW Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK LPD-PORT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-B4 Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW PDF-RDCT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON VP-ART Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON VP-TXT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-PRINT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SJB-UNW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW IMGC-ADJ Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-RSCAN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-WEB Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-HOLD Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CARD-RNG Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK WUEN-LIV Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TBL2 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TBL3 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TBL4 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TBL5 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TBL6 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SJOB-CL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW TNR-WARN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TBL7 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK IFX-CHIG Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX RAG-CONT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK DNSTRANS Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW MIBCOUNT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TBL8 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ENV-SET DRY-CISU Restored - -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW RMT-CNSL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM PDLEVCT1 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK PROXYRES Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK WOLTRANS Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-RDR DF2DSTL1 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-RDR DF2DSTL2 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK 802XTOUT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK NCONF-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM ABK-TOOL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW W/RAID Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW PSWD-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SM-PSWD Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON C-PDL-T Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON C-S-P-D Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON C-S-C-D Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW RPT2SIDE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK AFS-JOB Restored Restored Restored

1326
 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

Intermediate
Initial screen Main item Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
COPIER OPTION NETWORK AFC-EVNT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-SBOX Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-MEM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK ILOGMODE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK ILOGKEEP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-NAVI Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW INVALPDL Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CDS-FIRM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CDS-MEAP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CDS-UGW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW LOCLFIRM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX EDG-WAIT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TBL9 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TB10 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK IPTBROAD Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK PFWFTPRT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON LIN-OFST Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FEED-SW TFL-RTC Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-CUSTM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SDLMTWRN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW JLK-PWSC Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK DDNSINTV Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW FAX-INT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CDS-LVUP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TBLC Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-TR TROPT-SW Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FEED-SW SP-SW Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-SPD PSP-PR1 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FIX-PR Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ENV-SET IMG-BLD1 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-TR TR-BS-SW Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION IMG-LSR SC-PR-SW Restored - -
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM FLK-RD Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-SPD PSP-PR2 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TB12 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TB13 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TB14 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TB15 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TB16 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM TMP-TBL Restored - -
COPIER OPTION CLEANING FX-CN-SW Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-SPD PSP-PR3 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ENV-SET IMG-BLD2 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TB11 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-SPD PSP-PR4 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW WTM-DENS Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW AMSOFFSW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW UA-OFFSW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW MIB-NVTA Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW MIB-EXT Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION ENV-SET IMG-BLD3 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM DFEJCLED Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SVC-RUI Restored Restored -

1327
 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

Intermediate
Initial screen Main item Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW LCDSFLG Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW SDTM-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW BXSHIFT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW HOME-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW NO-LGOUT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW T-DLV-BK Restored - -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW WT-WARN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW JM-ERR-D Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW JM-ERR-R Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK SIPAUDIO Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK SIPINOUT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK SIPREGPR Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ASLPMAX Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK VLAN-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SEND-SPD Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW VER-CHNG Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK FTPMODE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK SSLMODE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK SSLSTRNG Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-PPA Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW B4-USE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK NW-WAIT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK WLAN-USE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW CE-DSP Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON DOTSCT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON SP-GRAD Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK WLANPORT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW LOCAL-SZ Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM TIFFJPEG Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK RAW-PORT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK LINKWAKE Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW PICLOGIN Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW T-LW-BK Restored - -
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM DCM-EXCL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW DCONRTRY Restored - -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW SND-NAME Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW PCMP-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW FL-START Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM FPOT-MD Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK BLEPOWER Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK WSMC-USE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW STAY-OUT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ENV-SET IMG-BLD4 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW 3RDP-MSG Restored - -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW ERR-DISP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW SVC-ACA Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK INTENT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON BIN-SEL Restored - -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW RMT-CNCT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW SVC-SRA Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW JLG-UD-D Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UFOS-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B01 Restored Restored Restored

1328
 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

Intermediate
Initial screen Main item Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B02 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B03 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B04 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B05 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B06 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B07 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B08 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B09 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B10 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B11 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B12 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B13 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B14 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B15 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B16 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B17 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B18 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B19 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B20 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B21 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B22 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B23 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B24 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B25 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B26 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B27 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B28 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B29 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B30 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B31 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B32 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B33 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B34 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B35 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B36 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B37 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B38 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B39 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B40 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B41 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B42 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B43 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B44 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B45 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B46 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B47 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B48 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B49 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B50 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B51 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B52 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B53 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B54 Restored Restored Restored

1329
 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

Intermediate
Initial screen Main item Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B55 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B56 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B57 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B58 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B59 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B60 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B61 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B62 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B63 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B64 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B65 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B66 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B67 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B68 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B69 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B70 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B71 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B72 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B73 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B74 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B75 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B76 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B77 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B78 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B79 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B80 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V01 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V02 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V03 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V04 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V05 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V06 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V07 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V08 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V09 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V10 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V11 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V12 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V13 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V14 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V15 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V16 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V17 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V18 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V19 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V20 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V21 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V22 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V23 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V24 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V25 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V26 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V27 Restored Restored Restored

1330
 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

Intermediate
Initial screen Main item Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V28 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V29 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V30 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V31 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V32 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V33 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V34 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V35 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V36 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V37 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V38 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V39 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V40 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V41 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V42 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V43 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V44 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V45 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V46 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V47 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V48 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V49 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V50 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V51 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V52 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V53 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V54 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V55 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V56 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V57 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V58 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V59 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V60 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V61 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V62 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V63 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V64 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V65 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V66 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V67 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V68 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V69 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V70 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V71 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V72 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V73 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V74 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V75 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V76 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V77 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V78 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V79 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V80 Restored Restored Restored

1331
 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

Intermediate
Initial screen Main item Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
COPIER OPTION INT-FACE NWCT-TM Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER COPY-LIM Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER SLEEP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER SIZE-DET Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER2 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER3 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER4 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER5 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER6 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER DATE-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER MB-CCV Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER CONTROL Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER B4-L-CNT Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER MF-LG-ST Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER CNT-DISP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER PH-D-SEL Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER COPY-JOB Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER OP-SZ-DT Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER JOB-INVL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER TAB-ROT Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER PR-PSESW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER IDPRN-SW Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER CPRT-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER PCL-COPY Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER CNT-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER BCNT-AST Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER PRJOB-CP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER DOC-REM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER DPT-ID-7 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER RUI-RJT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER SND-RATE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER FREG-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER IFAX-SZL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER IFAX-PGD Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER MEAPSAFE Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER PRNT-POS Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER AFN-PSWD Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER PTJAM-RC Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER PDL-NCSW Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER PS-MODE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER CNCT-RLZ Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER7 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER8 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER 2C-CT-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER LDAP-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER FROM-OF Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER FILE-OF Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER MAIL-OF Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER IFAX-OF Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER LDAP-DEF Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER FREE-DSP Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER TNRB-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER USBH-DSP Restored Restored Restored

1332
 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

Intermediate
Initial screen Main item Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
COPIER OPTION USER USBM-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER USBI-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER CTCHKDSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER DFLT-ADJ Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER USBR-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER POL-SCAN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER PH-D-SL2 Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER SCAN-RSL Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER JA-SBOX Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-DFAX Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-REP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-FREP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-BOX Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-FORM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-PREV Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-PULL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-PDLB Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-JOBK Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-JDF Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-RUI Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-WEB Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER EXP-CRYP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER SNDSTREN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER FAXSTREN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER SJ-UNMSK Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER SJ-CLMSK Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER PRTDP-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER PDFD-MSW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER SFT-OUT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER LGCY-SCP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER FLM-DSPL Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER CNT-PRT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER C-P-SIZE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER MF-FEED Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER TNRBEXGR Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER TNRBRMVR Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER INSTDT-Y Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER INSTDT-M Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER INSTDT-D Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER INSTDT-H Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER INSTDT-N Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER STOP-USE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER SZCHKSW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER TEST NET-CAP CAPIF Restored - -
FEEDER ADJUST - DOCST Restored - -
FEEDER ADJUST - LA-SPEED Restored - -
FEEDER ADJUST - DOCST2 Restored - -
FEEDER ADJUST - LA-SPD2 Restored - -
FEEDER ADJUST - ADJMSCN1 Restored - -
FEEDER ADJUST - ADJMSCN2 Restored - -
FEEDER OPTION - SIZE-SW Restored Restored Restored
FEEDER OPTION - R-ATM Restored Restored -
FEEDER OPTION - R-OVLPLV Restored Restored -

1333
 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

Intermediate
Initial screen Main item Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
SORTER ADJUST - PNCH-Y Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - STP-F1 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - STP-R1 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - STP-2P Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - BFF-SFT Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - PNCH-X Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - BFF-SFT2 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - SDL-STP Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - SDL-FLD Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - SDL-ALG Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - ST-ALG1 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - ST-ALG2 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - SW-UP-RL Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - INSTP-F1 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - INSTP-R1 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - NST-SPD Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - FR-ST-PS Restored Restored -
SORTER ADJUST - FR-STP-X Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - FR-STP-Y Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - RBLT-PRS Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - MSTP-2P Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - INF-ALG1 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - INF-ALG2 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - CENT-ALG Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - SDL-STP2 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - SDL-FLD2 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - ESC1-SPD Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - SFT-SPD Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - STP-SPD Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - RBLT-PS2 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - RBLT-PS3 Restored - -
SORTER OPTION - MD-SPRTN Restored - -
SORTER OPTION - BUFF-SW Restored - -
SORTER OPTION - PUCH-SW Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - 1SHT-SRT Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - NSRT-STC Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - MSTP-TMG Restored Restored Restored
SORTER OPTION - FR-ST-PO Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - MSTP-WT Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - TRY-PSTN Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - PUN-Y-SW Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - PNCH-SW2 Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - PNCH-SW3 Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - SFT-CHNG Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - STP-ALG Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - SDL-ALG Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - TRY-STP Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - TRY-LMT Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - FR-ST-SW Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - ASTG-TMG Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - TRY-UP Restored Restored -

1334